JP2017176725A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of suppressing a decline in amusement of a game.SOLUTION: A game machine comprises: game control means for executing a lottery on the basis of establishment of a start condition and controlling a game on the basis of a result of the lottery; performance control means for executing the performance of the game; and sound output means for outputting a sound to be output in the game to the outside. The sound output means has a channel which can output the sound to the outside by assigning it. The performance control means, in the game, can execute a performance which restricts output of the sound for a predetermined period and, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, can output the requested sound when sound output is requested in a predetermined period.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a spinning-type gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachislot machine”).

  In a conventional gaming machine, an effect that attracts the player's interest is achieved by outputting various sounds from a speaker in each scene as the game progresses. For example, even for reach that should improve the expectations of the player, there are some that output various sounds depending on the type and others that do not.

  In the conventional gaming machine, each channel including each reach is assigned to each sound to be output in each scene, and each such sound uses a corresponding predetermined channel. It is reproduced (see Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent No. 5627044

  Recent gaming machines can perform a wide variety of effects through sound control, such as effects that draw the player's attention by suddenly lowering the volume of the effect sound while the symbols are changing and displayed for a predetermined period of time. Is executed. However, in the above production, if output of a new sound is requested while the volume is being reduced, the output effect may be halved if the sound is actually output, but the output of all sounds is prohibited. If it does, there will be a problem that necessary notification cannot be performed.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in the interest of a game by enabling necessary notification even while the output of sound is regulated. The purpose is to provide.

  In order to achieve the above-described object, a lottery is executed based on the establishment of the start condition, a game control means for controlling the game based on the lottery result, an effect control means capable of executing the game effect, and the game Sound output means for outputting the sound output at the outside to the outside, wherein the effect control means is capable of executing an effect that regulates the sound output for a predetermined period in the game, and the sound output is performed during the predetermined period. The requested sound can be output even within the predetermined period when the output time of the requested sound for which the output is requested satisfies a specific condition in relation to the predetermined period. To do.

  According to one embodiment of the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can solve the above-described problems and suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right view of a pachinko machine. It is a left view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from back. It is the perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state where the door frame was opened from the main body frame and the main body frame was opened from the outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and was seen from the back. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the outer frame and was seen from the front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the site | part of the outer frame side upper hinge member in an outer frame from the lower side, omitting the left frame member, (b) is the exploded perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows (a). is there. (A) is a perspective view which expands and shows the state by which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of an outer frame, (b) is an outer upper hinge member. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state by which the main body side upper hinge member is attached to. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect | action of the lock member in an outer frame. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right view of a door frame. It is a left view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the AA line in FIG. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the BB line in FIG. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the CC line | wire in FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit in a door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball feed unit of the door frame base unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball feed unit from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit from the back. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit from the front after removing the cover member, (b) is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit from the back after removing the cover member. It is a front view of a foul cover unit in the state where a lid member was removed. (A) is the front view of the handle unit in a door frame, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the handle unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the handle unit from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the tray unit of the door frame from the front right, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the tray unit from the left front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from upper right back, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from lower left back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is explanatory drawing which expands and shows the site | part of a lower plate in the state which removed the lower plate cover in sectional drawing of FIG. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows roughly the example provided with the ball guide part in the lower plate, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows schematically the example provided with the ball guide part different from (a) in the lower plate. (C) is explanatory drawing which shows roughly the example provided with the further different bulb | ball guidance part. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows roughly the lower plate which can be divided | segmented, (b) is description which shows the state which expanded the storage area | region of the lower plate according to the magnitude | size of the space behind a production operation unit. (C) is explanatory drawing which shows the lower plate of (b) with a schematic perspective view. (A) is a front view of the rendering operation unit in the door frame, and (b) is a right side view of the rendering operation unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the back. FIG. 11 is an explanatory view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the DD line | wire in Fig.48 (a). It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the EE line | wire in FIG.48 (b). (A) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the FF line | wire in FIG.48 (b), (b) is an enlarged view of the A section in (a). It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the production operation unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit as seen from the rear after being disassembled for each main member. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the operation button and was seen from the front, (b) was the exploded perspective view which disassembled the operation button and was seen from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the decoration board | substrate unit of the production operation unit, and was seen from the front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the base unit of the production operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the base unit of the production operation unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the base unit of the production operation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the base unit of the production operation unit, and was seen from back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which pressed the operation button in sectional drawing of the production operation unit of FIG. (A) is a view of the production operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and shows a part of the operation button that is notched and hidden by the first button decoration portion or the button frame of the operation button. It is explanatory drawing shown, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in sectional drawing of an effect operation unit. (A) is explanatory drawing shown in the perspective view which looked at the external appearance of the production | presentation operation unit from the front, (b) is explanatory drawing which looked at the external appearance of the production | presentation operation unit from the direction where the central axis of an operation button is extended. . FIG. 48A is a front view of a second effect operation unit different from the embodiment of the effect operation unit in FIGS. 48 to 63, and FIG. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd production operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd production operation unit from the back. It is explanatory drawing which looked at the 2nd production operation unit from the direction where the central axis of the operation button is extended. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the GG line in Fig.64 (a). It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the HH line | wire in FIG.64 (b). (A) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the II line | wire in FIG.64 (b), (b) is an enlarged view of the A section in (a). It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 2nd production operation unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 2nd production operation unit for every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is the exploded perspective view which exploded and looked at the operation button of the 2nd production operation unit, and (b) was the exploded perspective view which exploded and looked at the operation button of the 2nd production operation unit from the back is there. It is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd base unit of the 2nd production operation unit from the front. (A) is explanatory drawing which looked at the 2nd production operation unit from the direction where the central axis of the operation button has extended in the state where the main screen of the screen unit was turned forward, and (b) is the subscreen of the screen unit. It is explanatory drawing which looked at the 2nd production operation unit from the direction where the central axis of the operation button is extended in the state which turned to the front. (A) is a cross-sectional view cut along line JJ in FIG. 74 (a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along line KK in FIG. 74 (b). (A) is an attempt to hide the second rendering operation unit from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the main screen facing forward by the first button decoration portion or the button frame of the operation button. It is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is present, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in sectional drawing of the 2nd production operation unit of the state of (a). It is. (A) In the state which looked at the 2nd production operation unit from the direction where the central axis of the operation button has extended in the state where the subscreen turned to the front, it tried to hide by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. It is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is present, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in sectional drawing of the 2nd production operation unit of the state of (a) It is. FIG. 48A is a front view of a third effect operation unit different from the embodiment of the effect operation unit and the second effect operation unit in FIGS. 48 to 77, and FIG. 7B is a right side view of the third effect operation unit. is there. It is a rear view of a 3rd production operation unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the 3rd production operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the 3rd production operation unit from the back. It is explanatory drawing which looked at the 3rd production | presentation operation unit from the direction where the central axis of the operation button is extended. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the LL line | wire in Fig.78 (a). It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the MM line | wire in FIG.78 (b). It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 3rd production operation unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 3rd production operation unit for every main member, and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the 3rd base unit of the 3rd production operation unit from the front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the decoration rotary body unit of the 3rd production operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the decoration rotation body unit of the 3rd production operation unit from the back. (A) is a front view of the 3rd production | presentation operation unit shown in the state which orient | assigned the 2nd decoration surface part of the decoration rotary body unit to the front, (b) is the direction where the central axis of the operation button is extending (a). It is explanatory drawing seen from. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows rotation of a 1st decoration surface part in the state which faced the 1st decoration surface part ahead in the 3rd effect operation unit, (b) is a 2nd decoration surface part ahead in a 3rd effect operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows rotation of a 2nd decoration surface part in the state which faced. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the movable effect which rotates a decoration rotary body unit in a 3rd effect operation unit. In a 3rd effect operation unit, it is explanatory drawing which shows the motion of the movable effect which rotates a decoration rotary body unit in the state which rotated the 1st decoration surface part and the 2nd decoration surface part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the air by rotation of a 2nd decoration surface part in a 3rd effect operation unit. It is a perspective view which mainly shows the structural example of a 1st decoration surface part in the 1st modification of a 3rd effect operation unit. It is a perspective view which shows an example of a structure of the 1st modification of a 3rd effect operation unit. It is a perspective view which mainly shows the structural example of a 2nd decoration surface part in the 2nd modification of a 3rd effect operation unit. It is a perspective view showing an example of the composition of the 2nd modification of the 3rd production operation unit. (A) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the front, and (c) is a view of the door frame left side unit from the back. FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from the back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the NN line | wire in Fig.97 (a). (A) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from the front, and (c) is a view of the door frame right side unit from the rear. FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from the back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the OO line | wire in Fig.101 (a). (A) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the PP line in Fig.101 (a), (b) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the QQ line in Fig.101 (a). (A) is the front view of the door frame top unit in a door frame, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit from the front, (c) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit from the back It is. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the RR line | wire in FIG. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the dispensing unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the dispensing unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the payout unit for every main structure, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the payout unit for every main structure, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball guidance unit of the payout unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball guidance unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view of a ball guidance unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the payout apparatus of a payout unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the payout apparatus from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the payout apparatus and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the payout apparatus and was seen from back. (A) is a front view of the dispensing device, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line SS in (a). (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which closed the ball extraction channel | path with the ball extraction movable piece in the dispensing device, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which opened the ball extraction channel | path with the ball extraction movable piece. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the upper full sphere path unit in the dispensing unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the upper full sphere path unit from the back. (A) is the exploded perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper full sphere path | route unit and was seen from the front, (b) was the exploded perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper full sphere path unit and was seen from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the lower full sphere path unit in the dispensing unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the lower full sphere path unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the lower full ball path unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the lower full tank path unit and was seen from back. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state in which the guidance path opening / closing door is closed in a lower full sphere path | route unit, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the state in which the guidance path opening / closing door is open. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and a lower full sphere path | route unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in a payout unit. It is a front view of the game board which made the panel board of the game panel an opaque state. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board of the state of FIG. 133 from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board of the state of FIG. 133 from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the TT line | wire in FIG. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the UU line in FIG. It is the front view which cut | disconnected the front unit in the game board in the approximate center of the front-back direction in a game area | region. It is a front view of the game board which made the panel board of the game panel the transparent state. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board for every main structure and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board for every main structure and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the front structural member and game panel in a game board from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at (a) from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the starting port unit in the front unit of a game board, the side unit, the side slope, and the attacker unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at (a) from the back. It is explanatory drawing which cut | disconnected the attacker unit in a front unit at the approximate center of the front-back direction in a game area | region, and showed from the front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the center combination in a front unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the center combination from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit of the game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit for every main structural member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit for every main structural member and was seen from the back. (A) is a front view of the back front decoration unit in a back unit, (b) is the expanded sectional view cut | disconnected and expanded by the VV line in (a). (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back top movable production | generation unit in the back unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back top movement production unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back top movable production | generation knit mainly for every structural unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back upper movable production | generation unit for every main structural unit, and was seen from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back top 1st decoration body unit in the back top movable production | presentation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back top 1st decoration body unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back first decorative body unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back upper 1st decoration body unit and was seen from back. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows from a front the drive system when a back top 1st decoration body unit is a closed position, (b) is a drive system when a back top 1st decoration body unit is an open position from the front It is explanatory drawing shown. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back 2nd decoration body unit in a back top movable production | presentation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back 2nd decoration body unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back top 2 decoration body unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back upper 2nd decorative body unit and was seen from back. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows from the front the drive system when a back top 2 decorative body unit is a closed position, (b) is a drive system from the front when a back top 2 decorative body unit is an open position. It is explanatory drawing shown. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back top 3rd decorative body unit in a back top movable production | presentation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back top 3rd decorative body unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back top 3 decoration body unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back top 3rd decoration body unit and was seen from back. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows from a front the drive system when a back top 3rd decoration body unit is a closed position, (b) is a drive system from the front when a back top 3rd decoration body unit is an open position. It is explanatory drawing shown. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back top rotation base unit in a back top movable production | presentation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back top rotation base unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back upper rotation base unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back upper rotation base unit and was seen from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the gear structure in a back upper rotation base unit from the front. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the action | operation lever in a back top rotation base unit from the front, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the state of an action lever from a front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back raising / lowering unit in a back top movable production | presentation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back raising / lowering unit from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the rear lifting unit as seen from the front after disassembling it into a movable unit and a fixed unit, and (b) is an exploded view of the rear lifting unit into a movable unit and a fixed unit. And it is the disassembled perspective view seen from back. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the movable side unit of the back raising / lowering unit and was seen from the front, (b) was the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the movable side unit and was seen from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the fixed side unit of the back raising / lowering unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the fixed side unit of the back raising / lowering unit, and was seen from back. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows from the front the drive system when the movable side unit of back raising / lowering unit is a raise position, (b) is the drive system when the movable side unit of back raising / lowering unit is a lowered position. It is explanatory drawing shown from a front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive system for raising / lowering when the movable side unit of a back upper raising / lowering unit is a raise position in a back upper movable production | presentation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive system for raising / lowering when the movable side unit of a back upper raising / lowering unit is a lowered position in a back upper movable production | presentation unit. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a state where the operating lever is in the operating position when the movable side unit is in the lowered position and the back-up rotating base unit is in the horizontal position in the back movable effect unit. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the operating lever is in the non-operating position when the movable side unit is in the lowered position and the back upper rotation base unit is in the horizontal position in the back movable effect unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive system of a back top rotation base unit when a movable side unit is a lowered position and a back top rotation base unit is a horizontal position in a back top movable production | presentation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive system of a back top rotation base unit when a movable side unit rotates 45 degree | times clockwise from a horizontal position in a back side movable production | presentation unit in a descent position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive system of a back top rotation base unit when a movable side unit is a lowered position and a back top rotation base unit is a vertical position in a back top movable production | presentation unit. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a state where the operating lever is in the non-operating position when the movable side unit is in the lowered position and the back upper rotating base unit is in the vertical position in the back movable effect unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which the action lever has controlled rotation in the action position, when the movable side unit is in the lowered position and the back upper rotation base unit is in the vertical position in the action movement unit on the back. When the movable side unit is in the lowered position and the back top rotation base unit is in the vertical position in the back top movable effect unit, the back lever first decorative body unit, back top second decorative body unit, and back top first It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which is acting on the three decoration body units. (A) is a front view of the backside movable effect unit of the back unit, (b) is a back view of the backside moveable effect unit, and (c) is a backside movable decorative body unit in the backside movable effect unit. It is a rear view shown in the raised state. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state where the back center left decorative body and the back center right decorative body of the back middle movable effect unit in the back unit are moved to the appearance position on the center side. With the back left decorative body and back right decorative body of the back left movable production unit and back right movable production unit in the back unit moved to the appearance position closer to the center, with each first decorative surface facing forward It is a front view of the game board shown. FIG. 190 is a front view of a game board showing the left movable decoration unit and the right and left movable production units in the state shown in FIG. . FIG. 190 is a front view of a game board showing the left movable body unit and the back right decorative body of the left movable effect unit and the back right movable effect unit rotated from the state of FIG. 190 with their third decorative surfaces facing forward. . The first left movable decorative lens and the first right movable decorative lens of the first decorative body unit on the back, the second left movable decorative lens and the second right movable decorative lens of the second decorative body unit on the back, After the decorative lens and the third left movable decorative lens and the third right movable decorative lens of the third decorative body unit on the back are in the closed position, the first decorative body unit on the back and the second decorative on the back It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the back upper rotating base unit is moved to the lowered position while being in the horizontal position so that the body unit and the third decorative body unit on the back are horizontally arranged. From the state of FIG. 193, the back upper rotating base unit is rotated 45 degrees in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the back first decorative body unit, the back second decorative body unit, and the back third decorative body unit are inclined. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state where it was located in a line. From the state of FIG. 194, the back upper rotating base unit is further rotated 45 degrees in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the back top first decorative body unit, the back top second decorative body unit, and the back top third It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where decorative body units are arranged vertically. From the state of FIG. 181, the first left movable decorative lens and the first right movable decorative lens of the back first decorative body unit, the second left movable decorative lens and the second right movable decorative lens of the back second decorative body unit, and The first fixed decorative lens, the second fixed decorative lens, and the third fixed decorative lens in the open position of the third left movable decorative lens and the third right movable decorative lens of the back third decorative body unit, respectively. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state which enabled visual recognition. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state where the back bottom movable decorative body unit of the back bottom movable effect unit in the back unit is moved to the first ascent position. FIG. 196 is a front view of the gaming board shown in a state where the lower back movable decorative body unit is further raised from the state of FIG. 197 and moved to the second ascent position. Explanatory drawing which shows the example provided with LED for light-decorating the back front lower center lens of the stage of a center accessory and the back front decoration unit as another embodiment of a game board on the back movable production | presentation unit of a back unit It is. In the back movable movable unit in the back unit of the game board, the back rotating base unit is in a vertical position, and the first left movable decorative lens and the first right movable decorative lens of the back first decorative body unit, The second left movable decorative lens and the second right movable decorative lens of the upper second decorative body unit, and the third left movable decorative lens and the third right movable decorative lens of the back third decorative body unit are in the open position, respectively. FIG. 5 is a front view of the pachinko machine shown in a state where each of the first fixed decorative lens, the second fixed decorative lens, and the third fixed decorative lens is visible. In the front view of the pachinko machine in which the third stage operation unit is attached to the plate unit instead of the stage operation unit, the first decorative surface portion of the decorative rotating body unit is directed forward, and the game board is shown in a normal state. is there. In FIG. 201, with the second decorative surface portion of the decorative rotating body unit facing forward, in the back movable stage unit in the back unit of the game board, the back rotating base unit is in the vertical position. The first left movable decorative lens and the first right movable decorative lens of the back first decorative body unit, the second left movable decorative lens and the second right movable decorative lens of the back second decorative body unit, and the back third The first fixed decorative lens, the second fixed decorative lens, and the third fixed decorative lens are made visible by setting the third left movable decorative lens and the third right movable decorative lens of the decorative body unit to the open position, respectively. It is a front view of the pachinko machine shown in a state. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of a main control board, a payout control board, and a periphery control board. It is a block diagram which shows the structural examples, such as a payment control board. It is a block diagram which shows the structural examples, such as a periphery control board and a board | substrate connected to it. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands transmitted to the payout control board from the main control board. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands transmitted to a peripheral control board from a main control board. 207 is a table showing a continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands from the payout control board which a main control board receives. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main control side power-on process. FIG. 230 is a flowchart showing a continuation of main-control-side power-on processing in FIG. 210. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main control side timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of power-on of a payout control part. 213 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the power-on process of the payout control unit in FIG. 213. FIG. 214 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the payout control unit power-on processing following FIG. 214. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a payout control part timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a rotation angle switch log | history production process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a sprocket fixed position determination skip process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a spherical collision determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the number-of-use prize ball stock number addition process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a stock monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a pay-out ball engagement operation determination setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a payout setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a sphere ball movement setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a retry operation | movement monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a mismatch counter reset determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an error cancellation operation determination process. It is a timing chart which shows the signal process (a) at the time of paying-out operation by ball lending, and the input signal confirmation process (a) from CR unit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part power-on process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part V blank interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part 1ms timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part command reception interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part power failure warning signal interruption process. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound control by a fixed channel system as a comparison object with respect to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound definition table for implement | achieving sound control by a fixed channel system. The relationship between the gaming state, the playback sound and the playback channel is shown. It is a timing chart which shows an example of a production time chart. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound control by the automatic channel system as this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound definition table for implement | achieving sound control by an automatic channel system. It is a figure which shows the relationship between a game state, a reproduction sound, and a priority. It is a timing chart which shows an example of a production time chart. It is a figure which shows an example of the work information for automatic channel control stored in the work area for AUTO group channel control provided in the periphery control RAM. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the search process of an empty channel at the time of performing sound control when only one AUTO group is defined in an automatic channel system. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation pattern of the sound control by each channel system or those combination. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol and a special electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows a start opening prize process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation | variation start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during a fluctuation | variation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big hit game process. It is a figure which shows an example of the structure table | surface of the reproduction channel in the sound source control in this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of an empty channel search process in the case of performing control which outputs the sound of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the conditions which select the channel which replaces sound output (it stops sound reproduction | regeneration) when the channel is not vacant at the time of output of a new sound in this embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the example of an effect for explaining sound control of this embodiment, (A) shows the timing at which sound effects are reproduced, and (B) shows the channel from which each sound effect is outputted. It is a figure which shows an example of the priority order of the sound effect in the production example of this embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the volume change of the sound effect in the first half fluctuation | variation of this embodiment, (A) shows the output timing of effect sound effect, (B) shows the volume change of each effect sound effect. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen structure of the effect in the modification of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the structure table | surface of the reproduction channel in the sound source control in the modification of this embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the volume change of the effect sound in the fluctuation | variation second half of the modification of this embodiment, (A) shows the output timing of effect sound, (B) shows the volume change of each effect sound. It is a figure which shows an example of the volume control table classified by channel group which shows the priority of the volume (sound volume) control for every group in this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the group volume control process which performs sound control corresponding to the group to which the output sound of this embodiment belongs. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the procedure which controls the volume in this embodiment along a time series, (A) shows the execution timing of an effect, (B) shows the volume of each effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the volume control table classified by sound effect which shows volume (volume) control for every total reproduction time (output time) of the sound in this embodiment. It is the first half part of the flowchart which shows the procedure of the volume control process which performs sound control based on the parameter set for every sound effect of this embodiment. It is the latter half part of the flowchart which shows the procedure of the volume control process which performs sound control based on the parameter set for every sound effect of this embodiment. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the procedure which controls the volume in this embodiment along a time series, (A) shows the execution timing of an effect, (B) shows the volume of each effect. It is a figure which shows an example of a sound definition table. It is a figure which shows the conditions (cancellation conditions) by which alerting | reporting is complete | finished according to the kind of alerting | reporting sound illustrated in FIG. 277 other than alerting | reporting content, alerting | reporting aspect, alerting | reporting time. (A) is an example of processing when an output condition (abnormality detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced. FIG. (B) shows an example of processing when an output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced. FIG. (C) is an example of processing when an output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced. FIG. (A) is a figure which shows the example about the process when the output conditions (state detection) of the alerting sound which belongs to the 2nd alerting | reporting group are satisfy | filled when the alerting | reporting sound which belongs to the 1st alerting | reporting group is reproduced | regenerated. It is. (B) is a figure which shows an example about the process when the output condition (state detection) of the alerting sound which belongs to the 3rd alerting | reporting group is satisfied when the alerting sound which belongs to the 2nd alerting | reporting group is reproduced | regenerated. It is. (C) is a figure which shows an example about the process when the output condition (state detection) of the alerting sound which belongs to the 1st alerting group is satisfied when the alerting sound which belongs to the 2nd alerting | reporting group is reproduced | regenerated. It is. (D) is a figure which shows an example about the process when the output conditions (state detection) of the alerting sound which belongs to the 2nd alerting | reporting group are satisfy | filled when the alerting | reporting sound which belongs to the 3rd alerting | reporting group is reproduced | regenerated. It is. It is a time chart which shows the example as an aspect which alert | reports the state of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows the example as an aspect which alert | reports the state of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows the example as an aspect which alert | reports the state of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows the example as an aspect which alert | reports the state of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows the example as an aspect which alert | reports the state of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows the example as an aspect which alert | reports the state of a game machine. It is a figure explaining according to the information state of the pachinko machine 1 about the contents of information processing under production progress. It is a figure explaining the content about the process regarding volume adjustment. It is a figure explaining the content about the process regarding volume adjustment. It is a figure explaining the content about the process regarding volume adjustment. It is a time chart which shows an example about a channel reservation process. It is a time chart which shows an example about a channel reservation process. It is a time chart which shows an example about a channel reservation process. It is a time chart which shows an example about a channel reservation process. It is a time chart which shows an example about a channel reservation process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure about the process concerning the setting of a channel restriction level. It is a figure which shows an example about the restriction content defined according to a channel restriction level. It is a figure which shows another example about the content of restrictions defined according to a channel restriction level. It is a time chart which shows an example of the allocation condition of each channel when a channel special release process is performed. It is a time chart which shows an example of the allocation condition of each channel when an operation sound output process under suppression is performed. It is a time chart which shows an example of the allocation condition of each channel when the process relevant to channel allocation cancellation operation is performed. Examples of the channel assignment status and the status of the movable ornament when the movable ornament is detected in the process of operating the movable ornament according to the variation pattern (effect pattern) according to the big hit determination It is a time chart which shows. The allocation status of each channel when a movable body abnormality is detected not within the process of operating the movable decorative body according to the variation pattern (effect pattern) according to the big hit judgment, It is a time chart which shows an example about the condition by the side of a decoration body. It is a time chart which shows those examples about the allocation situation of each channel when a movable body abnormality occurs simultaneously in a plurality of movable decoration bodies at the specific timing in the period when pattern change is performed, and the situation on the movable decoration body side. . In the time chart which shows an example about the allocation situation of each channel when a movable body abnormality occurs in a plurality of movable decoration bodies at two different timings in the period in which symbol variation is performed, and the situation on the movable decoration body side is there. It is a circuit diagram which shows an example of the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit arrange | positioned at the game machine. It is a circuit diagram showing an example (example 1) of the magnetic sensor input circuit arranged in the gaming machine of the embodiment. It is a circuit diagram showing an example (example 2) of a magnetic sensor input circuit arranged in the gaming machine of the embodiment. It is a circuit diagram showing an example (example 3) of a magnetic sensor input circuit arranged in the gaming machine of the embodiment. It is a figure which shows the operating state of a magnetic sensor and each transistor in a tabular form. It is a figure which shows a circuit structure when the several sensor signal input part each connected to each of several magnetic detection sensor is connected in parallel with the base terminal of the transistor of a detection circuit part. It is a circuit diagram which shows an example (Example 4) which has arrange | positioned the detection circuit part of the magnetic sensor input circuit to the main control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the other example (Example 5) which has arrange | positioned the detection circuit part of the magnetic sensor input circuit to the main control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the example (Example 6) which has arrange | positioned the avoidance part and detection circuit part of a magnetic sensor input circuit in the main control board. FIG. 10 is a circuit diagram illustrating an example (Example 7) in which a voltage output unit, an avoidance unit, and a detection circuit unit of a magnetic sensor input circuit are arranged on a main control board. It is a block diagram which shows the fundamental composition of the electrical connection mainly with a detection sensor part, a panel relay board | substrate, and a main control board. It is a front view which shows typically each example of the arrangement position in the gaming machine of a panel relay board and a main control board. It is a figure which shows the example of arrangement | positioning of the avoidance part unit with respect to a panel relay board | substrate or a main control board. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the vibration generation source in a game machine, and the example of arrangement | positioning of a panel relay board | substrate and a main control board. It is a block diagram which mainly shows the basic composition of an electrical connection about the origin position detection sensor for detecting the origin position of a periphery control board, a drive board, a drive means, and a movable effect body. It is the front view which showed notionally the some movable accessory for presentation provided in the game machine, and grouping of a some movable accessory. It is a timing chart which shows an example in the case of performing recovery operation | movement to the initial position of the several movable accessory which belongs to the accessory group 01.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 thru | or FIG. 10, the whole structure of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the right front, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the left front, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the rear. FIG. 8 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main frame and the main frame opened from the outer frame. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front after disassembling the door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame. FIG. 10 shows the pachinko machine as a door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled and was seen from the back.

  A pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front surface of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that is supported so as to be opened and closed, and is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side, and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3. And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball is driven.

  As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 that are separated from each other in the vertical direction and extend to the left and right, and the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member. 20 includes a left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 which are connected to each other at both ends and extend vertically. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front-rear direction. The upper and lower lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

  The outer frame 2 connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is attached to the curtain plate member 50 attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 and the left end portion side of the upper frame member 10 when viewed from the front. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60, and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper part on the left end side in front view of the curtain plate member 50 and the left frame member 30 are provided. The main frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached to be openable and closable by an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

  The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a through-hole 111 penetrating front and rear in a quadrilateral shape whose front view extends vertically, and a through-hole of the door frame base unit 100 A handle unit 300 that is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface below 111 and can be operated by a player to drive a game ball into the game area 5 a of the game board 5, and a through-hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100. The player is provided with a tray unit 320 attached to the lower portion of the front side below the player and the game state that is attached to the center of the tray unit 320 and changes when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a. An effect decoration rotating body unit 530 capable of presenting a participatory effect, and attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100 on the left side of the through-hole 111 above the plate unit 320 The door frame left side unit 540, the door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right side of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the through-hole 111 above the plate unit 320, and the door frame left side. A door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper part of the front side of the door frame base unit 100 and above the through-hole 111 above the unit 540 and the door frame right side unit 550.

  The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 includes a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 that can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame base 600. Attached to both the upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view and rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3 respectively. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge member 150 is rotatably attached, the reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front, and the main body frame base 600 The ball launcher 680 for driving a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame are attached to the right side surface of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. 4, And a locking unit 700 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and an inverted L-shape that is attached to the rear side along the front side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 and pays out a game ball to the player side. -Shaped payout unit 800, board unit 900 attached to the lower rear portion of main body frame base 600, and rear of game board 5 attached to main body frame base 600 and attached to the rear side of main body frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable. And a back cover 980 covering the side.

  The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 has an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and is attached to the upper part of the payout unit base 801 and extends to the left and right open upward. A ball tank 802 that stores a game ball supplied from an island facility (not shown) in a box shape, and is attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802. The game ball in the ball tank 802 is moved to the left in a front view. A tank rail 803 that extends to the left and right to guide, a ball guide unit 820 that is attached to the rear surface of the upper left portion of the payout unit base 801 and guides a game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner, and a ball guide unit 820 A game ball that is detachably attached from the payout unit base 801 and guided by the ball guiding unit 820. Based on instructions from the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950, the payout device 830 pays out one by one, and the game balls attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and paid out by the payout device 830 downward. An upper full ball path unit 850 that guides and discharges a game ball from either the normal discharge port 850d or the full discharge port 850e according to the storage state of the game ball in the upper plate 321 in the tray unit 320, and a payout unit A normal guiding path 861 that is attached to the lower end of the base 801 and that guides the game ball released from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full ball path unit 850 forward and guides it from the front end to the through ball path 273 of the door frame 3 and the full guide path 861. The game ball released from the tongue outlet 850e is guided forward and guided from the front end to the full ball receiver 274 of the door frame 3. A lower full sphere path unit 860 having a RuMitsurutan taxiway 862, and a.

  The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 includes a board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and a pair of left and right lower speakers 921 (lower parts) provided on the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910 when viewed from the front. A speaker unit 920 having a left speaker 921L and a lower right speaker 921R), a power supply board box 930 which is attached to the right side of the front view on the rear side of the board unit base 910 and accommodates a power supply board therein; The interface control board box 940 that is attached to the side and accommodates the interface control board therein, and the payout that is attached across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controls the payout of the game ball inside. Control board 951 accommodates The includes a dispensing control board box 950, the.

  As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 defines the outer periphery of the game area 5 a into which the game ball is to be shot and moves the game ball launched from the ball launcher 680 to the upper part of the game area 5 a. A front component member 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 that are guided to the front, and a flat gaming panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and defines the rear end of the game area 5a. Yes.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle 302 in a state where the game ball is stored in the upper plate 321, the ball launcher 680 causes the game ball to have strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 302. The game board 5 is driven into the game area 5a. When the game balls that have been thrown into the game area 5a are received in the winning opening, a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 by the payout device 830 in accordance with the received winning opening. Since the player's interest can be enhanced by paying out this game ball, the game ball in the upper plate 321 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the game can be enjoyed by the player.

[2. Overall structure of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 16. FIG. 11 is a front view of the outer frame in the pachinko machine, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. 13 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 14 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front. FIG. 16A is a perspective view of a portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame, viewed from the lower side with the left frame member omitted, and FIG. 16B is an exploded perspective view of FIG. FIG. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) where the pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed.

  As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 is connected to both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 which are separated from each other in the vertical direction and extend to the left and right, and the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are provided. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front-rear direction. The upper and lower lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. The outer frame 2 is assembled so that the left and right end surfaces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and the side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 facing outward in the left-right direction are the same surface. Yes.

  The outer frame 2 includes an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 that is attached to the left end portion of the upper frame member 10 when viewed from the front, a lock member 66 that is attached to the lower surface of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, and a curtain plate. The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper part on the left end side of the member 50 when viewed from the front and the left frame member 30 is provided. With the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be attached so as to be opened and closed.

  The outer frame 2 connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20, and is attached to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 and has both ends. A curtain reinforcing member 80 attached to each of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, a flat left sliding member 81 attached to the left side of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 from the left and right center, and a curtain plate member And a flat plate-like right sliding member 82 attached at a position near the right end of the upper surface of the upper surface 50. The curtain plate reinforcing member 80 is formed of a solid member (for example, wood, plywood, etc.), and is attached to the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40.

  Further, the outer frame 2 includes an upper frame member 10 and a left frame member 30, an upper frame member 10 and a right frame member 40, a lower frame member 20 and a left frame member 30, and a lower frame member 20 and a right frame member 40, respectively. A connecting member 85 is provided. The outer frame 2 includes an upper hook member 90 and a lower hook member 91 that are attached to the inner side (left side surface) of the right frame member 40 and to which an outer frame hook 703 of the locking unit 700 described later is locked. ing.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
The upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. The upper frame member 10 includes an engagement notch portion 11 penetrating vertically in the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends and recessed toward the center in the left-right direction. In the engagement notch portion 11, an upper left fixing member 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and an upper right connecting member 85B, which will be described later, of the connecting member 85 are attached. The upper frame member 10 includes mounting step portions 12 that are recessed from the general surface on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion when viewed from the front. An outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to the attachment step portion 12.

[2-2. Lower frame member]
The lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. The lower frame member 20 is formed such that the left and right lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses are the same as the left and right lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses of the upper frame member 10, and the front and rear width is the upper frame member 10. It is formed longer than the width before and after. The lower frame member 20 includes an engagement notch portion 21 penetrating vertically and recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at a position closer to the rear side than the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. In the engagement notch portion 21, a lower left connecting member 85C and a lower lateral fixing portion 88 of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are attached.

  The lower frame member 20 includes front end notches 22 that are recessed rearward from the front surfaces at both left and right ends. In the lower frame member 20, the width in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front end notch 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20 is formed to the same size as the width in the front-rear direction of the upper frame member 10. When the lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2, a portion between the left and right front end cutout portions 22 is inserted into the curtain plate member 50.

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and are formed of a metal extruded shape such as an aluminum alloy. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed in symmetrical shapes in plan view. When the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are assembled as the outer frame 2, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are recessed inwardly from the rearward position to the vicinity of the rear end with respect to the center in the front-rear direction. The concave portions 31 and 41 and the protruding portions 32 and 42 that bulge from the side surface on the opposite side of the concave portions 31 and 41 and are formed in a hollow shape are provided. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are enhanced in strength and rigidity by the protrusions 32 and 42. In the protrusions 32 and 42, a lower horizontal fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, which will be described later, of the connecting member 85 is inserted and attached.

  The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 have a plurality of grooves extending vertically on the surface. With the plurality of grooves, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed or transported in an island facility such as a game hall, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held by the operator, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held. The design of the appearance of the machine 1 can be improved.

[2-4. Curtain plate member]
The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape with the rear side opened. The curtain plate member 50 is formed in a U-shape with a rear extension 51 extending rearward in the vicinity of the left end in front view on the upper surface and a size allowing a game ball to pass from the left end of the rear extension 51. A left discharge hole 52 that is notched and penetrates up and down, and a right discharge hole 53 that penetrates up and down in a size that allows a game ball to pass on the right side of the left discharge hole 52 in the rear extension 51; A standing wall portion 54 that extends upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 including the rear end of the rearward extending portion 51, and a front surface that bulges forward from the vicinity of the upper end of the standing wall portion 54. And a return portion 55 that is inclined so as to go backward as it goes to.

  The curtain plate member 50 is configured so that the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is placed on the upper surface on the front side of the rear extension 51 and the upper surface of the rear extension 51. A horizontal portion 71 described later is attached. The left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 is formed at a position that coincides with a discharge hole 74 described later of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state assembled to the outer frame 2. The right discharge hole 53 is formed at a position on the right side of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state assembled to the outer frame 2. The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52.

  The curtain plate member 50 is inclined such that the upper surface on the right side of the rear extension 51 is lower on the front end side. The curtain plate member 50 has a left mounting portion 56 for mounting the left sliding member 81 on the right side of the rear extending portion 51 on the upper surface and a right mounting portion 57 for mounting the right sliding member 82 near the right end on the upper surface. And. The lower surface of the main body frame 4 is placed on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 via the left sliding member 81 and the right sliding member 82.

  As shown in the figure, the curtain plate member 50 has a shallow relief decoration on the front surface. Although not shown, the curtain plate member 50 has a box-shaped interior partitioned into a lattice by a plurality of ribs, and has improved strength and rigidity. The curtain plate member 50 is formed so that the front half of the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 can be accommodated therein.

[2-5. Outer frame side upper hinge member]
As shown in the drawing, the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is a flat plate extending horizontally and having a rectangular outer shape, and a flat plate extending forward from the front end of the upper fixing portion 61. The front extension 62, the bearing groove 63 extending to the left and right center of the front extension 62 as it goes forward from the right end of the front extension 62, and the top fixing part 61 in plan view. A flat horizontal fixing portion 64 extending downward from the left side, and a horizontal fixing portion extending downward from an end side of the front extending portion 62 from the left end to the portion where the bearing groove 63 is opened around the front end. A flat drooping portion 65 that is continuous with the portion 64 (see FIG. 16B, etc.).

  In the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the upper fixing portion 61 is placed on the upper surface of the mounting step portion 12 of the upper frame member 10 in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, and is fixed by a screw (not shown). Yes. The front extension 62 extends forward from the front end of the upper frame member 10. The lateral fixing portion 64 is fixed to the left frame member 30 with screws while being inserted into the recess 31 on the outer side surface of the left frame member 30 from above.

  The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 inserts the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 into the bearing groove 63, thereby cooperating with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. It can be supported so that it can be opened and closed. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

[2-6. Lock member]
As shown in FIG. 16, the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 includes a band plate-like lock main body 66 a extending in the front-rear direction with a predetermined width on the left and right sides, and an operation portion protruding rightward from the rear end of the lock main body 66 a. 66b, an elastically deformable rod-like elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock main body 66a and extending obliquely left frontward, and a mounting hole penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock main body 66a 66d. The lock member 66 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 66 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 by an attachment screw 67.

  The lock member 66 is attached at a position where the rear end of the lock main body 66a is behind the bearing groove 63 in the front extending portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 through the attachment hole 66d. In a state where the lock member 66 is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the lock body 66a can block the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 It extends forward so as to be able to come into contact with a portion of the hanging portion 65 that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 63 (see FIG. 18).

  The tip of the elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock main body 66a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. The lock member 66 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 66c in a direction in which the front end rotates leftward about the attachment hole 66d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 66 near the front end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 18). In this state, a space that can accommodate a body frame upper hinge pin 622 (to be described later) of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the lock main body 66a.

  The lock member 66 can rotate the lock body 66a against the urging force of the elastic portion 66c by operating the operation portion 66b. By operating the operation portion 66b, the lock main body 66a is rotated in the direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, whereby the lock main body 66a can be retracted from the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, and the bearing groove 63 is completely moved. It can be made to pass. As a result, the main body frame hinge pin 622 can be inserted into the bearing groove 63, or the main body frame hinge pin 622 can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-7. Outer frame side lower hinge member]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 stands upward from a horizontally extending flat plate portion 71 and a rear side of the left side of the horizontal portion 71 from the center in the front-rear direction. A rising plate-like rising portion 72, an outer frame lower hinge pin 73 projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 71, and passing through the horizontal portion 71 up and down so that only one game ball can pass therethrough. And a discharge hole 74 having a size. The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

  The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the bottom in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 has a cylindrical shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape whose upper end is narrower than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 is attached to the left side position in the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 71. In the horizontal portion 71, the discharge hole 74 is in contact with a central portion in the front-rear direction of the rising portion 72, and is formed to extend in an inverted U shape from the left side of the horizontal portion 71 to the right. The discharge hole 74 is formed in substantially the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50.

  In the state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 has the horizontal portion 71 placed on the upper surface near the left end of the curtain plate member 50 and the rear extension portion 51. Is fixed to the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 by screws (not shown) penetrating the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. In a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached to a portion of the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 on the front side of the protruding portion 32 with a screw (not shown). The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 73 into a main body frame lower hinge hole (not shown) in the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable in cooperation with the hinge member 60.

  In the state in which the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 74 coincides with the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50. Thereby, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 can be dropped (discharged) to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game balls that have dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are closed as the main body frame 4 is closed. Is gradually narrowed, so that the gap is rolled to the rear side with a wide interval, and the discharge hole 74 can be discharged. At this time, the discharge hole 74 is formed at a position that is substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. The game ball dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 can be easily prevented from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4 by being discharged from the discharge hole 74, and the outer frame side It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to stay on the lower hinge member 70.

[2-8. Connecting member]
The connecting member 85 of the outer frame 2 includes an upper left connecting member 85A that connects the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connecting member 85B that connects the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, and a lower frame member. There are a lower left connecting member 85C that connects 20 and the left frame member 30, and a lower right connecting member 85D that connects the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40.

  The connecting member 85 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 86, a flat plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extending upward from either one of the left and right sides of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and a horizontal fixing portion. And a flat lower lateral fixing portion 88 extending downward from the same side as the portion where the upper lateral fixing portion 87 extends. The connecting member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  In the upper left connecting member 85 </ b> A and the upper right connecting member 85 </ b> B, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends upward from the center of the horizontal fixing portion 86 in the front-rear direction, and the lower horizontal fixing portions 88 are formed from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. It extends downward. That is, the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are provided with two lower lateral fixing portions 88 that are separated from each other in the front-rear direction. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the upper left connecting member 85 </ b> A and the upper right connecting member 85 </ b> B are fixed to the upper frame member 10 in contact with the lower surface of the upper frame member 10. The upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the engagement cutout portion 21 of the upper frame member 10 and is fixed to the end in the left-right direction of the upper frame member 10. The lower horizontal fixing portions 88 on the front side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the inner side surfaces on the front side of the protruding portions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively. Further, the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the protruding portions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is screwed from the outer side surface. Thus, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are respectively fixed.

  In the lower left connecting member 85 </ b> C and the lower right connecting member 85 </ b> D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 protrudes rearward from the rear end of the horizontal fixing portion 86 and is more than the horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. A lower lateral fixing portion 88 extends below the horizontal fixing portion 86 from the lower end of the portion protruding rearward. The lower left connecting member 85C and lower right connecting member 85D further include a bent portion 89 that protrudes from the rear end of the upper lateral fixing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal fixing portion 86. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed in contact with the upper surface of the lower frame member 20. The upper horizontal fixing portions 87 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed to the inner side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 in front of the protruding portions 32 and 42, respectively. Further, the lower horizontal fixing portions 88 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are inserted into the engagement notches 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the end surfaces in the left and right direction of the lower frame member 20, respectively. The

[2-9. Lock mechanism for upper hinge member on outer frame side]
Next, in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a locking mechanism for the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 by the lock member 66 in the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 will be described with reference to FIGS. The description will be given with reference. FIG. 17A is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and FIG. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state by which the main body side upper hinge member is attached to the hinge member. FIG. 18 is an explanatory view showing the action of the lock member in the outer frame.

  When the lock member 66 in the outer frame 2 is attached to the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 (normal state), the tip of the elastic portion 66 c is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65. In addition, the lock body 66a closes a part of the bearing groove 63 bent into a "<" shape, and the tip portion of the lock body 66a does not close the deepest part of the bearing groove 63. In the deepest part of the groove 63, a space is formed in which the body frame hinge pin 622 of the body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the body frame 4 can be inserted.

  The support mechanism of the body frame upper hinge pin 622 using the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the lock member 66 in this embodiment is such that the body frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 and the front end of the lock body 66a. The right side surface of the lock body 66 is in close contact with the right hanging portion 65 (in this state, there is a slight gap between the right side surface at the front end of the lock body 66a and the right hanging portion 65 so that it is in contact with the right hanging surface 65). In the normal shaft support state, the center of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame located at the deepest portion of the bent bearing groove 63 and the front end surface of the lock main body 66a are opposed to each other in an oblique direction. It is in a state.

  In this normal axial support state, the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 that supports the heavy main body frame 4 is in contact with the front end portion of the bearing groove 63, so that the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 Almost no load is applied to the front end surface of the lock body 66a. That is, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. Since the front end surface of the lock body 66a is formed in an arc shape, the lock member 66 rotates smoothly when the operation portion 66b is rotated to rotate the lock member 66. In the drawing, the arc center of the front end face of the lock body 66a is the center of the mounting hole 66d (the rotation center of the lock member 66).

  Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in a direction in which the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is removed along the inclination of the bearing groove 63 formed in a square shape, the acting force is applied to the arcuate front end surface of the lock body 66a. F is a component force F1 (normal direction of the arc of the front end surface of the lock main body 66a) acting on a contact portion between the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the arc-shaped front end surface, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the bearing groove 63. The component force F1 is directed to the center of the mounting hole 66d (mounting screw 67) (the rotation center of the lock member 66) when divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface of the one side. The moment of rotating the front end of the lock main body 66 a of the lock member 66 in the direction away from the right hanging portion 65 does not act, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is connected to the front end of the lock main body 66 a of the lock member 66 and the bearing groove 63. Inside Clamped state is maintained between the.

  For this reason, even in a normal shaft support state or a state where the acting force of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is applied to the lock member 66, the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 is not constantly loaded, and is integrally formed of synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation caused by creep of the elastic portion 66c, and to prevent the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame from coming off from the bearing groove 63 over a long period of time. Even if an excessive force is applied and the front end portion of the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66 is rotated in the direction of moving to the right, the right side surface of the front end of the lock main body 66a contacts the drooping portion 65 and beyond. Since it does not rotate, the lock member 66 is prevented from protruding outside the front extension 62.

  Even if the shape of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is not an arc, the position where the rotational moment does not occur due to the action of the component force F1 described above or the front end portion of the lock member 66 faces the outside of the front extension portion 62. By positioning the rotation center of the lock member 66 (the axis fixed by the mounting screw 67) at a position where the rotational moment to rotate is generated, a load is not applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 at all times. Even if the lock member 66 rotates, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66 a only abuts on the hanging portion 65, so that the lock member 66 does not protrude outside the front extension portion 62.

  When the main body frame hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 is supported by the bearing groove 63 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the main body frame is inserted into the bearing groove 63 from the open side of the bearing groove 63. The hinge pin 622 is inserted. When the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the hinge pin 622 on the body frame comes into contact with the right side surface of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66, and the front end of the lock body 66a is against the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates about the mounting screw 67 so as to move to the left. As a result, the lock main body 66 a that has closed the bearing groove 63 is retracted, the bearing groove 63 is opened, and the main body frame hinge pin 622 can be moved to the deepest portion (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

  When the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is moved to the deepest part of the bearing groove 63, the contact between the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66 is released, and the front end of the lock main body 66a is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 is rotated so as to move to the right, and the lock member 66 returns to the normal state. As a result, the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is accommodated in a space in front of the front end of the lock body 66 a in the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is rotatable at the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63. The state is held (locked) in the state.

  When the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is removed from the bearing groove 63, the lock member 66 is rotated so that the front end of the lock main body 66a moves to the left by operating the operation portion 66b of the lock member 66. The lock body 66a is retracted from the bearing groove 63 against the urging force of 66c. As a result, the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 and the opening communicate with each other, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-10. Crime prevention mechanism and ball biting prevention mechanism at the outer frame side lower hinge member]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the ball engagement prevention for preventing the game ball from being sandwiched between the crime prevention mechanism and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 at the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2. The mechanism will be described.

  When the outer frame 2 is assembled, an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to the left end portion in front view on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is mounted in a state of being placed near the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 and the upper surface of the rear extending portion 51. The curtain plate member 50 includes a standing wall portion 54 that rises upward from the rear end of the upper surface. As a result, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters the rear side of the main body frame 4 (pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. Since the tip of the unauthorized tool comes into contact with the standing wall 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, it is possible to prevent the unauthorized tool from being inserted further to the rear side. It is possible to prevent an illegal act from being performed via the outer frame side lower hinge member 70.

  Since the return portion 55 extending forward is provided at the upper end of the standing wall portion 54, when an unauthorized tool that is in contact with the standing wall portion 54 bends upward, the tip of the unauthorized tool is further moved by the return portion 55. Since it can be folded forward, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the rear side of the main body frame 4, and an illegal act can be prevented through the part of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. It can be reliably prevented.

  By the way, when the upright wall portion 54 extending upward is provided at the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the game ball is placed on the outer frame side while the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. When falling on the lower hinge member 70 (horizontal portion 71), the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 is not discharged backward from the rear end of the horizontal portion 71 due to the presence of the standing wall portion 54, so the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 There is a risk of being caught between. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52 through which the game ball can pass through the horizontal part 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rearward extension part 51 of the curtain plate member 50. And the right discharge hole 53, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can be discharged downward from the discharge hole 74 and the like. It is possible to reduce the game ball being caught between the two.

  Therefore, when the game ball is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the periphery of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is damaged, or the main body frame 4 is not closed in a normal state. It is possible to prevent a gap from being formed between the main body frame 4 and illegal acts using the gap.

[3. Overall structure of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 20 is a right side view of the door frame, FIG. 21 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 22 is a rear view of the door frame. 23 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right front, FIG. 24 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 25 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the rear. 26 is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 19, FIG. 27 is a sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 19, and FIG. 28 is a sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. FIG. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view in which the door frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view in which the door frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

  As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the door frame 3 is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and the square frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 whose front view extends vertically. Handle unit 300, a pan unit 320 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, an effect decoration rotator unit 530 attached to the center of the plate unit 320, and a door frame above the plate unit 320. Door frame left side unit 540 attached to the front left part of base unit 100, door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right part of door frame base unit 100 above dish unit 320, and door frame The door frame attached to the upper front part of the door frame base unit 100 above the left side unit 540 and the door frame right side unit 550. And Ppuyunitto 570, is equipped with a.

  The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, which will be described in detail later, is a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a through-hole 111 penetrating in the front and rear in a rectangular shape (rectangular shape) whose front view extends vertically. A frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and attached to both upper and lower ends of the reinforcing unit 130 on the left end side when viewed from the front, and attached to the main body frame 4 so as to be capable of hinge rotation. A door frame side upper hinge member 140 and a door frame side lower hinge member 150; a glass unit 190 which is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and closes the through hole 111; and a security cover 200 which covers the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190; The door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 that are attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to protrude forward through the door frame base 110. An opening / closing cylinder unit 210 for locking the space, a ball feed unit 250 for sending a game ball to the ball launcher 680 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a ball attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110 A foul cover unit 270 that receives a game ball that has been launched by the launching device 680 and has not reached the game area 5a and that discharges it to the lower plate 322.

  Although the handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail later, the game ball stored in the upper plate 321 is changed according to the rotation angle of the handle 302 by the player rotating the rotatable handle 302. It can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with high strength.

  As will be described in detail later, the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3 is attached to a lower portion of the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and the front surface bulges forward. The effect decoration rotator unit 530 is attached to the front end in the center in the left-right direction. The tray unit 320 stores an upper plate 321 for storing game balls to be driven into the game area 5a, and game balls supplied from the upper plate 321 and the foul cover unit 270. Within the range of the lower tray 322 that can be stored, the upper tray ball removal button 327 for removing the game balls stored in the upper tray 321 to the lower tray 322, and the balance of cash or prepaid card that has been put into the ball lending machine A ball lending button 328 for lending a game ball to the player, a return button 329 for returning cash or a prepaid card obtained by subtracting the amount of the game ball lending from the ball lending machine, and cash inserted into the ball lending machine , A ball rental return display unit 330 for displaying the remaining number of prepaid cards, etc., an effect selection left button 331 and an effect selection right button 332 that can be accepted by the player when the effect is presented, and a lower plate Game balls in 22 and lower tray ball vent button 333 for discharging downwardly the dish unit 320, and a.

  The effect decoration rotator unit 530 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front part of the center of the dish unit 320 in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and can be pressed by the player, and an effect image can be displayed to the player. It can be presented. The effect decoration rotator unit 530, which will be described in detail later, has a large operation button 410 that can be operated by the player, and a door frame that can be viewed from the player side in the operation button 410 and can display an effect image. A side effect display device 460.

  The door frame left side unit 540 of the door frame 3, which will be described in detail later, is attached to the front left side of the door frame base unit 100 on the left side of the front side of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the plate unit 320. The left outer side of the game area 5a) is decorated. The door frame left side unit 540 includes a left unit decorative lens member (not shown) that can be decorated with light emission.

  The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3, which will be described in detail later, is attached to the upper right side of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the plate unit 320. The right outer side of the game area 5a) is decorated. The door frame right side unit 550 protrudes more forward than the door frame left side unit 540, and is provided at the front end with a right unit left decorative member 554 and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided on both left and right sides. The right unit decorative lens member 561 is provided. The door frame right side unit 550 can decorate the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 with light emission.

  The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 is attached to the door frame left side unit 540 and the door frame right side unit 550 and above the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100. The upper part of the frame 3 is decorated. The door frame top unit 570, which will be described in detail later, has a pair of upper speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) provided on the left and right sides, and a top inner decorative member protruding forward at the center of the front surface. 576, and a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 that decorate the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576. The door frame top unit 570 can light-decorate the top middle decorative member 576, the top left decorative lens member 579, and the top right decorative lens member 580.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31A is a perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 31B is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the main part of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the main part of the door frame base unit as seen from the rear. is there.

  The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable / closable (rotatable by hinges) so that the left side when viewed from the front closes the front surface of the main body frame 4. In the door frame base unit 100, a handle unit 300 is attached to the lower front corner of the door frame, a dish unit 320 to which the effect decoration rotating body unit 530 is attached to the lower front surface of the through hole 111, and the door frame left side unit on the left outer front surface of the through hole 111. The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right outer front surface of the through-hole 111, and the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the through-hole 111, respectively.

  As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the door frame base unit 100 includes a plate-like door frame base 110 having a through-hole 111 penetrating in the front and rear in a rectangular shape whose front view extends vertically. The frame-shaped reinforcement unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 and the upper and lower ends of the reinforcement unit 130 on the left end side when viewed from the front are projected forward from the door frame base 110 and The door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame side lower hinge member 150 that are rotatably attached to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640, and the front surface of the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110. A door frame left side decorative board 160 mounted on the left side and mounted with a plurality of LEDs on the front surface, and a glass unit 19 rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110. The glass unit mounting member 170 for mounting the detachably, and a.

  The door frame base unit 100 is mounted on the front surface of the door frame base 110 at the lower right corner when viewed from the front, and has a cylindrical handle mounting member 180 for mounting the handle unit 300 and a through-hole mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base 110. A glass unit 190 that closes 111, a security cover 200 that covers a lower rear portion of the glass unit 190, and an opening / closing cylinder unit 210 that is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and protrude forward. The ball feed unit 250 attached to the lower rear portion of the door frame base 110 and the foul cover unit 270 attached to the lower rear portion of the door frame base 110 are provided.

  Further, although not shown, the door frame base unit 100 includes various decorative boards provided in the door frame 3, a ball feeding solenoid 255, a handle rotation detection sensor 307, a handle touch sensor 310, a single button operation sensor 312, Ball rental button 328, return button 329, ball rental return display section 330, effect selection left button 331, effect selection right button 332, vibration motor 424 (heat source), press detection sensor 440, door frame side effect display device 460 (liquid crystal display) Device 461), a pair of upper speakers 573 and the like, and a door main body relay board for relaying the connection between the main body frame 4 and the door frame relay board 911 of the board unit 900.

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 110 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangular shape) whose outer shape in front view extends vertically. The door frame base 110 penetrates back and forth, and includes a through-hole 111 formed in a substantially quadrilateral shape whose inner peripheral shape in a front view extends vertically. In the through-hole 111, the upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner periphery are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 110, and the lower side forming the inner periphery is the upper and lower sides from the lower end of the door frame base 110. It is located at a height of about 1/3 of the direction. Therefore, the door frame base 110 is entirely formed in a frame shape by the through-hole 111 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The door frame base 110 is integrally formed of synthetic resin.

  The door frame base 110 is formed in the front lower right corner of the front surface, and has a handle mounting seat surface 112 that is inclined so that the left end protrudes slightly forward from the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 112, and the through-hole 111. Between the cylinder mounting portion 113 and the cylinder mounting portion 113 to which the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is mounted, and is opened through the cylinder mounting portion 113 in the front-rear direction. Is inserted through the cylinder insertion hole 114 through which the cylinder lock 211 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion hole 114 and the handle mounting seat surface 112 on the left side when viewed from the front, and forward through the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b of the ball feed unit 250. And a ball feed opening 115 for facing the surface.

  The door frame base 110 is located on the left side of the center of the door frame base 110 in the left-right direction and penetrates back and forth at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 112 so that the ball discharge port 276 of the foul cover unit 270 faces forward. A plate passing hole 116 and an upper plate that penetrates forward and backward so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the through hole 111 in the vicinity of the left end of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the front and face the through ball passage 273 of the foul cover unit 270 forward. In the upper left and right corners of the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting portion 118 into which the glass frame 191 of the glass unit 190 is inserted. And a speaker insertion port 119 through which the rear end of the upper speaker 573 of the door frame top unit 570 is inserted.

[3-1b. Reinforcement unit]
The reinforcing unit 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. The reinforcing unit 130 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 to reinforce the door frame base 110 and increase the strength and rigidity of the door frame base 110 (door frame 3). The reinforcing unit 130 includes left and right upper reinforcing metal plates 131 attached along the upper side of the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and left and right middle reinforcing members attached to the lower side of the through hole 111 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110. A sheet metal 132, a left reinforcing sheet metal 133 extending vertically and attached along the front left side of the rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a right reinforcement extending vertically and attached along the right side of the door frame base 110 viewed from the front. A sheet metal 134 and a locking engagement portion 135 attached to the rear surface of the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 and to which the door frame collar 702 of the locking unit 700 is engaged are provided.

  In the reinforcing unit 130, the left and right ends of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 are connected and fixed to the upper ends of the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 with screws, and the left end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected to the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 with screws. It is fixed. The right end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected and fixed to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 via a cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 described later. Therefore, the reinforcing unit 130 is formed in a frame shape by the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the like.

  The upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the locking engagement portion 135 of the reinforcing unit 130 are formed by appropriately bending metal plates. The middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is formed with a notch portion 132a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the upper plate passage opening 117 of the door frame base 110.

  Although the detailed illustration is omitted, each of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 has a portion bent in the front-rear direction. This part increases the strength and rigidity, and prevents the entry of unauthorized tools such as a piano wire or a flat-blade screwdriver from the outside.

[3-1c. Door frame side upper hinge member]
The door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The door frame-side upper hinge member 140 is attached to the door frame base 110 and has a pair of protruding pieces 141a that are spaced apart from each other in the vertical direction, and a pair of protrusions of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141. A cylindrical door frame upper hinge pin 142 inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and a pair of projecting pieces 141a in the door frame upper hinge pin 142 that penetrates the piece 141a. A disc-shaped eaves member 143 attached at a position between the eaves member 143, the eaves member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a of the pair of protruding pieces 141a, and a hinge pin 142 on the door frame , And a lock spring 144 that biases the hinge pin 142 on the door frame upward.

  Although not shown, the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 has a flat mounting piece that connects the rear ends of the pair of protruding pieces 141a, and the shape in a side view is opened forward. It is formed in a letter shape. The door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 has a mounting piece connecting a pair of protruding pieces 141a attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 with screws.

  The door frame upper hinge pin 142 is rotatably inserted into a door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 at a portion (upper end) protruding above the upper protruding piece 141a. Although not shown, the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is bent in the horizontal direction at a portion protruding downward from the lower protruding piece 141a. The bent portion abuts on the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 141a, thereby restricting the upward movement of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame.

  The eaves member 143 is an E-ring, and is inserted and held in a groove formed on the outer periphery of the door frame upper hinge pin 142. The lock spring 144 is a coil spring through which the door frame upper hinge pin 142 can be inserted, and has an upper end in contact with the flange member 143 and a lower end in contact with the lower protruding piece 141a. The lock spring 144 is interposed between the flange member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a in a compressed state, and biases the door frame upper hinge pin 142 upward via the flange member 143. .

  The door frame side upper hinge member 140 is in a state in which the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is urged upward by the lock spring 144, and the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 projects downward. By contacting the lower surface of the piece 141a, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame protrudes a predetermined amount above the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 141a.

  The door frame side upper hinge member 140 has a portion bent horizontally at the lower end of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame and pulls the portion downward against the urging force of the lock spring 144. The upper hinge pin 142 can be moved generally downward, and the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 can be immersed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 141a. Therefore, the door frame side upper hinge member 140 inserts the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 from below or pulls it downward. Can do. As a result, the upper left end of the door frame 3 is inserted into the upper hinge hole 623 for the door frame of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 by inserting the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140. The main body frame 4 can be supported so as to be capable of hinge rotation.

  The door frame side upper hinge member 140 has a portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 that is supported by the pair of protruding pieces 141a of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141. 152 is supported on the same axis. Thus, the door frame 3 upper hinge member 140 and the door frame side lower hinge member 150 can rotate the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 in a favorable state.

[3-1d. Door frame side lower hinge member]
The door frame side lower hinge member 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. The door frame side lower hinge member 150 is attached to the door frame base 110 and includes a door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 having a flat plate-like extension piece 151a extending forward, and a door frame lower hinge shaft bracket. A columnar door frame lower hinge pin 152 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) protruding downward from the vicinity of the front end of the extending piece 151a.

  The door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 has a flat plate-like attachment piece (not shown) extending upward from the rear end of a flat plate-like extension piece 151a extending horizontally, and has an overall shape in a side view. Is formed in a substantially L-shape. The door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 has a mounting piece (not shown) attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 with screws.

  The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is formed in a truncated cone shape whose lower end is narrowed toward the lower side. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is rotatably inserted into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 in the main body frame 4 described later. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is arranged coaxially with the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140.

  The door frame side lower hinge member 150 is capable of hinge-rotating the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 152 into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the body frame side lower hinge member 640. Can be supported.

[3-1e. Door frame left side decorative board]
The door frame left side decorative board 160 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is attached to the front side of the through hole 111 on the front side of the door frame base 110. The door frame left side decorative board 160 extends up and down from the height of the position below the speaker insertion port 119 on the left side when viewed from the front in the door frame base 110 to the height near the center of the through hole 111 in the vertical direction. The frame left side upper decorative board 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative board extending up and down from the height of the lower position of the door frame left side upper decorative board 161 to substantially the same height as the lower end of the upper plate passage opening 117. A substrate 162.

  The door frame left side upper decorative substrate 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 162 of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 include a plurality of LEDs 161a and 162a that can irradiate light forward. These LEDs 161a and 162a are full-color LEDs.

  The door frame left side decorative board 160 is positioned behind the door frame left side unit 540, which will be described later, in a state where the door frame 3 is assembled, and includes a plurality of LEDs 161a and 162a provided (mounted) on the front surface. By appropriately emitting light, the left unit decorative lens member of the door frame left side unit 540 can be decorated with light emission.

[3-1f. Glass unit mounting member]
The glass unit mounting member 170 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. The glass unit attachment member 170 is rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and is for attaching the glass unit 190 in a detachable manner. The glass unit mounting member 170 is a disc-shaped base portion 171 that is rotatably attached to an axis extending in the front-rear direction on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and protrudes in a bar shape from the base portion 171 in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. Projecting portion 172.

  The glass unit attachment member 170 is rotatably attached to a portion below the pair of speaker insertion openings 119 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and outside the glass unit attachment portion 118.

  When the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protruding portion 172 protrudes upward from the base portion 171, the protruding portion 172 is more outward than the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110 in the rear view. The glass unit 190 can be inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, or the glass unit 190 can be removed from the glass unit mounting portion 118.

  When the glass unit 190 is rotated so that the protrusion 172 protrudes downward from the base 171 in a state where the glass unit 190 is inserted into the glass unit attachment 118 of the door frame base 110, the protrusion 172 becomes glass. The unit 190 comes into contact with the rear side of the mounting piece 191a, and the rearward movement of the upper portion of the glass unit 190 is restricted, so that the glass unit 190 can be attached to the door frame base 110.

  In the glass unit mounting member 170, the protruding portion 172 protrudes from a disk-shaped base portion 171 that is rotatably mounted on the door frame base 110, so that the gravity center position of the glass unit mounting member 170 is located in the protruding portion 172. . From this, in a state where the glass unit mounting member 170 can freely rotate, the protruding portion 172 is stabilized in a state of protruding downward from the base portion 171. In the glass unit mounting member 170, when the protruding portion 172 is in a rotational position protruding downward from the base portion 171, the rearward movement of the glass unit 190 is restricted by the protruding portion 172. Even if vibrations or the like act on the whole, the whole does not rotate so that the protruding portion 172 protrudes upward from the base portion 171, and the restriction on the backward movement of the glass unit 190 is not naturally released.

  When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protruding portion 172 protrudes upward from the base portion 171, and the protruding portion 172 is attached to the mounting piece 191a of the glass unit 190. By moving the glass unit 190 to the outside, the upper side of the glass unit 190 can be moved rearward, and the glass unit 190 can be removed from the door frame base 110.

[3-1 g. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The handle attachment member 180 is for attaching the handle unit 300 to the front surface of the door frame base 110. As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the handle mounting member 180 includes a cylindrical tube portion 181 extending in the front-rear direction, and outward from the rear end of the tube portion 181 in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tube portion 181. An annular flange portion 182 that extends, and a plurality of the flange portions 182 that protrude into the cylindrical portion 181 and extend over the entire length in the axial direction of the cylindrical portion 181 and are arranged at unequal intervals with respect to the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 181 ( In this example, three ridges 183, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 184 that connect the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 181 and the front surface of the flange portion 182 and are arranged in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 181 are provided. .

  The handle attachment member 180 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 112 with screws in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 182 is in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment seat surface 112 in the door frame base 110.

  The cylindrical portion 181 has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 301 a of the handle base 301 in the handle unit 300. One of the three protrusions 183 is provided on the upper side in the cylindrical portion 181, and the remaining two are provided on the lower side in the cylindrical portion 181. These three protrusions 183 are formed at positions corresponding to the three groove portions 301 c in the handle base 301. Therefore, the handle attachment member 180 can insert the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 into the cylindrical portion 181 only when the three protrusions 183 and the three groove portions 301c of the handle base 301 are aligned. The rotational position of the handle base 301 (handle unit 300) can be restricted with respect to the door frame base 110.

  The handle mounting member 180 is attached to the inclined handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 because the axis of the cylinder 181 extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange 182. Thus, the handle unit 300 can be attached to the door frame base 110 in a tilted state.

[3-1h. Glass unit]
The glass unit 190 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The glass unit 190 closes the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 so that the rear can be visually recognized from the front. The glass unit 190 has a frame-shaped glass frame 191 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 and can be attached to the glass unit attachment portion 118, and the outer periphery of the glass frame 191 is closed. Two transparent glass plates 192 attached to 191. The two glass plates 192 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 191, respectively, and are spaced apart from each other so that a space is formed between them (see FIG. 26 and the like).

  The glass frame 191 has a pair of mounting pieces 191a extending in a flat plate shape from a position below the upper left and right upper corners when viewed from the front, and a band extending downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. A plate-like locking piece 191b. The mounting piece 191 a of the glass frame 191 can be brought into contact with the protruding portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170. The locking piece 191b can be inserted into a space between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 (see FIG. 26).

  The glass unit 190 is formed by inserting a locking piece 191b of the glass frame 191 from the rear side of the door frame base 110 into the gap between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 from above. The front end of the glass frame 191 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated, and the protruding portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 is attached to the mounting piece 191a of the glass frame 191. It is attached to the door frame base 110 by contacting the rear surface.

  When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, the glass unit 190 can be removed by a procedure reverse to the above. Thereby, the glass unit 190 can be attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

[3-1i. Security cover]
The security cover 200 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The security cover 200 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 so as to cover the lower rear portion of the glass unit 190, and is formed of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 200 is arranged with a flat plate-shaped main body portion 201 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape, a flat plate-shaped rear protrusion piece 202 that protrudes rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 201, and is separated from the left and right. And a pair of locking pieces 203 that protrude forward from the main body 201 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110.

  The main body 201 of the security cover 200 is formed such that the lower end protrudes below the lower end of the glass unit 190 in a state of being attached to the door frame base 110. The main body 201 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5 a in the game board 5 with the upper end assembled in the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 201 is formed in a shape along a part of an inner rail 1002 of the front constituent member 1000 to be described later, a part of the out guiding part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005. The pachinko machine 1 is assembled so as not to protrude into the game area 5a.

  The rear protrusion 202 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. Accordingly, the security cover 200 is formed in a shallow box shape opened rearward by the main body 201 and the rear protrusion piece 202, and has high strength and rigidity. As shown in FIG. 33, the rear protruding piece 202 also protrudes backward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. The rear projecting piece 202 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 is formed so as to be along a part of the outer rail 1001 in the front component member 1000 of the game board 5 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. ing.

  The rear projecting piece 202 is not formed in a portion located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. Thereby, a game ball (game ball launched by the ball launching device 680) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not come into contact with the rear protruding piece 202 of the crime prevention cover 200, and the game area 5a There is no hindrance to the game ball.

  The pair of locking pieces 203 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110. Thereby, the security cover 200 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

  When the security cover 200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 201 is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit 190 (the rear end of the glass frame 191) and protrudes backward from the lower side of the main body 201. The removed rear protrusion 202 is in a state of being inserted into a security recess 1008 of the front component 1000 described later. The security cover 200 is in a state in which the rear protruding piece 202 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 protrudes rearward from the front surface of the front structural member 1000 so as to contact the lower surface of the front structural member 1000. Accordingly, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (the front component member 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear protrusion piece 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess portion 1008 of the front component member 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 200 and the front structural member 1000 from below the front of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 202 and the security recess 1008. The unauthorized tool can be prevented from entering the game area 5a.

[3-1j. Opening and closing cylinder unit]
The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is attached from the rear side to a cylinder mounting portion 113 at a position between the through-hole 111 and the handle mounting seat surface 112 near the right end of the door frame base 110 in a front view, and cooperates with a locking unit 700 described later. It is used to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

  The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 includes a cylindrical cylinder lock 211 having a key hole 211a on the front surface and extending in the front-rear direction, and is attached to the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 and rotates the key inserted into the key hole 211a. A rotation transmission member 212 that transmits the key lock 710 to the key cylinder 710, and a cylinder attachment metal plate 213 that attaches the cylinder lock 211 to the door frame base 110 (reinforcement unit 130).

  The cylinder lock 211 can rotate a key by inserting a corresponding key (not shown) into the key hole 211a. If the key is a corresponding key, the cylinder lock 211 can be rotated clockwise or counterclockwise. Can also be rotated by a predetermined angle in this direction.

  The rotation transmitting member 212 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear side (specifically, a conical cylinder shape whose diameter increases toward the rear side), and is directed forward from the rear end to a position facing the center axis. It has a pair of cutout portions 212a cut out. The rotation transmitting member 212 is formed such that the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from behind, and the protrusion of the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted into the pair of notches 212a. Thus, the rotation of the rotation transmitting member 212 (the key inserted into the key hole 211a of the cylinder lock 211) can be transmitted to the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 to rotate the key cylinder 710.

  The cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 is formed by bending a single metal plate, and is formed in a convex shape whose shape in plan view protrudes forward. More specifically, the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 includes a rectangular and flat front plate portion 213a extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a pair of side plate portions 213b extending rearward from the left and right sides of the front plate portion 213a. And a pair of mounting plate portions 213c extending in a flat plate shape in a direction away from the rear sides of each of the pair of side plate portions 213b. In the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting metal plate 213, the cylinder lock 211 penetrates from the rear at a substantially central position in the vertical direction, and the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 is attached to the rear surface of the front plate portion 213a. The pair of mounting plate portions 213 c of the cylinder mounting plate 213 includes a mounting plate portion 213 c on the left side when viewed from the front and is attached to the right end portion of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130, and a mounting plate portion 213 c on the right side when viewed from the front. Attached to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134. Accordingly, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 are connected by the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213.

  When the open / close cylinder unit 210 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the front end of the cylinder lock 211 protruding forward from the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 has a cylinder insertion hole from the rear side of the door frame base 110. 114 and protrudes forward of the door frame base 110, and the front plate portion 213 a and the pair of side plate portions 213 b of the cylinder mounting plate 213 are accommodated in a box-shaped cylinder mounting portion 113 that is opened rearward. ing.

[3-1k. Ball feed unit]
The ball feeding unit 250 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 34 and FIG. FIG. 34A is a perspective view of the ball feed unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 34B is a perspective view of the ball feed unit as seen from the back. FIG. 35A is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 35B is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. The ball feeding unit 250 can supply the game balls supplied from the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 one by one to the ball launching device 680, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 can be used as the upper plate ball. It can be pulled out to the lower pan by operating the pull button 327.

  In the ball feed unit 250, the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 are supplied through the upper plate ball feed port 323d of the plate unit base 323 and the ball feed opening 115 of the door frame base 110 and penetrated in the front-rear direction. A box-shaped front cover 251 that has an entrance 251a and a ball outlet 251b that opens to the lower side of the entrance 251a and that is open at the rear, and a box that closes the rear end of the front cover 251 and is opened at the front , A rear cover 252 having a hitting ball supply port 252a for supplying a game ball that has entered from the entrance 251a of the front cover 251 penetrating in the front-rear direction to the ball launcher 680, the rear cover 252 and the front cover A partition portion 253 that is pivotally supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between 251 and partitions between the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b on the rear side of the front cover 251. The ball punching member 253 having a ball and the game balls on the partitioning portion 253a of the ball punching member 253 are sent one by one to the hitting ball supply port 252a of the rear cover 252 and vertically between the front cover 251 and the rear cover 252. A ball feeding member 254 supported so as to be rotatable around the extended axis, and a ball feeding solenoid 255 for rotating the ball feeding member 254 are provided.

  As shown in the figure, the ball feeding unit 250 has a ball feeding member 254 disposed on the right side of the entrance 251a in front view, and a ball removing member 253 on the left side of the ball feeding member 254. A ball feeding solenoid 255 is arranged on the right side.

  The front cover 251 of the ball feeding unit 250 includes an arc-shaped slit 251c concentrically formed with respect to the rotation center of the ball removing member 253 on the left side of the ball outlet 251b when viewed from the front, and this slit 251c. An operating rod 253c of a ball punching member 253, which will be described later, extends forward. The front cover 251 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 251a. When the door frame 3 is assembled, the upstream end side of the ball feed guide path 323e and the ball removal guide path 323f of the dish unit base 323 is assembled. It is formed so that the site | part opened to back may be closed from a rear side.

  The ball removal member 253 includes a partition portion 253a that is divided below the entrance port 251a and between the entrance port 251a and the ball exit port 251b and whose upper surface is lowered toward the ball feed member 254, and a ball of the partition portion 253a. It extends downward from the end opposite to the feed member 254 and bends in the shape of a letter from the middle in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 251b and rotates around the axis whose lower end extends in the front-rear direction. A pivot collar 253b that is movably supported, a rod-shaped actuation collar 253c that protrudes forward from the upper end of the pivot collar 253b, and a side below the actuation collar 253c from the side surface of the pivot collar 253b. A weight portion 253d protruding to the opposite side of the partition portion 253a. The operating rod 253c of the ball removal member 253 is formed so as to protrude forward through an arc-shaped slit 251c formed in the front cover 251 (see FIG. 34A). The operating rod 253 c comes into contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 327 a that is operated by the pressing operation of the upper dish ball removal button 327 of the dish unit 320 through the ball feed opening 115 of the door frame base 110.

  The ball feeding member 254 has a fan-shaped blocking portion 254a and a rear end of the blocking portion 254a in plan view with the rotation axis extending in the vertical direction facing the entrance 251a and the partitioning portion 253a of the ball removing member 253. A sphere holding portion 254b that is recessed in an arc shape from the rotation axis to the rotation shaft core side, and a rod-like flange portion 254c that extends downward from the rear end of the sphere holding portion 254b. The blocking portion 254a and the ball holding portion 254b of the ball feeding member 254 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of about 180 ° around the rotation axis. The ball holding portion 254b of the ball feeding member 254 has a size capable of holding one game ball. The ball feeding member 254 rotates around the rotation axis when the collar portion 254c arranged at a position eccentric from the rotation axis is moved in the left-right direction by driving the ball feeding solenoid 255.

  The ball feeding member 254 includes a supply position in which the blocking portion 254a faces the direction of the partition portion 253a and at the same time the ball holding portion 254b communicates with the hitting ball supply port 252a, and the ball holding portion 254b is in the direction of the partition portion 253a. Rotate to and from the holding position. When the ball feeding member 254 is in the supply position, the game ball held in the ball holding portion 254b is supplied from the hitting ball supply port 252a to the ball launching device 680 and enters the partition portion 253a from the entrance 251a. However, the blocking unit 254a blocks the movement toward the ball holding unit 254b (hitting ball supply port 252a) and stays on the partition unit 253a. On the other hand, when the ball feed member 254 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 254b faces the partition portion 253a, and the end of the ball holding portion 254b on the flange 254c side closes the hitting ball supply port 252a. Only one game ball on the partition portion 253a is held in the ball holding portion 254b.

  The ball feed unit 250 has a ball feed operation rod 256 whose tip is swung in the vertical direction by driving (energizing) the ball feed solenoid 255, and a front-rear direction by the movement of the tip of the ball feed operation rod 256 that is swung in the vertical direction. A ball feed crank 257 that rotates around the extended axis and rotates the ball feed member 254 around the axis extending in the vertical direction. The ball feed crank 257 is engageable with the tip of the ball feed actuating rod 256 that moves up and down and extends in the left-right direction, and the side that engages the ball feed actuating rod 256 of the engaging portion 257a. A shaft portion 257b that is disposed on the opposite side and is pivotally supported around a shaft extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 251 and the rear cover 252 and extending upward from the shaft portion 257b, A transmission portion 257c that engages with a rod-shaped flange portion 254c (see FIG. 35B) that protrudes downward from a position that is eccentric with respect to the rotation center of the member 254 is provided.

  The ball feed unit 250 transmits the movement of the ball feed actuating rod 256 that is swung by driving the ball feed solenoid 255 that moves forward and backward by the ball feed actuating rod 256 and the ball feed crank 257 so that the ball feed member 254 is moved. It can be rotated. When the ball feeding solenoid 255 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding operation rod 256 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 255 and the tip is positioned downward. In this state, the ball feeding member 254 is in the supply position. It will be in the state located. When the ball feeding solenoid 255 is driven, the ball feeding operating rod 256 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 255 and the tip is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 254 is rotated to the holding position. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 255 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 254 receives one game ball, and when the ball feeding solenoid 255 is released (OFF state), the ball feeding member 254 is activated. Can be sent (supplied) to the ball launcher 680 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 255 in the ball feeding unit 250 is controlled in synchronization with the driving control of the firing solenoid 682 by a firing control unit (not shown) of the payout control board 951.

  The ball removing member 253 that is pivotally supported in the ball feeding unit 250 is applied with a moment that rotates counterclockwise by the weight portion 253d, but the projection protrudes forward. Since the rotation of the bowl 253c is restricted by contacting the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 327a that is operated by pressing the upper dish ball removal button 327 of the dish unit 320, the partition of the ball removal member 253 is normally used. The part 253a partitions the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b, so that a game ball does not enter the ball outlet 251b side.

  When the player presses the upper dish ball removal button 327 of the dish unit 320 downward, the upper dish ball removal slider 327b slides downward together with the operation transmission unit 327a, and the operation transmission unit 327a moves downward. Accordingly, the operating rod 253c also moves relatively downward. When the operating rod 253c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion 327a, the ball removing member 253 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the partition between the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b by the partition portion 253a is released. Is done. As a result, the game ball that has entered from the entrance 251a is discharged from the ball outlet 251b to the ball outlet guide path 323f of the tray unit 320 and discharged (supplied) to the lower tray 322 via the lower tray ball supply port 323c. be able to.

  The upper dish ball removal slider 327b formed with the action transmitting portion 327a with which the operation rod 253c of the ball removal member 253 contacts is urged upward by the upper dish ball removal spring 327c. Even if game balls are supplied vigorously, the impact can be absorbed by the upper dish ball removal spring 327c via the operating rod 253c, and the ball removal member 253 and the like can be prevented from being damaged. The game ball can be prevented from bouncing back at the partition portion 253a.

  The ball feeding unit 250 has a rectangular mounting recess 252b (see FIG. 35 (b) and the like) that is recessed forward and to the upper right in the rear view of the hitting ball supply port 252a in the rear cover 252. A tamper-proof member 260 is attached in 252b. The fraud prevention member 260 of the ball feeding unit 250 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is attached to the inside of the mounting recess 252b of the rear cover 252 so as to be detachable from the rear side.

  The fraud prevention member 260 is formed in a rectangular shape whose outer shape in front view extends to the left and right, and an upper piece 261 that is vertically separated at a substantially vertical center in a predetermined distance from the right side to the left. A lower piece 262, and inclined portions 263 that are each formed in a C-chamfered shape on the tip side (the right end side in front view) of the sides of the upper piece 261 and the lower piece 262 facing each other. . The upper piece 261 of the anti-fraud member 260 is bent with respect to the general surface of the anti-fraud member 260 so that the right end in front view protrudes backward. The lower piece 262 extends on the same plane as the general surface of the tamper-proof member 260. Thereby, in a plan view, the upper piece portion 261 and the lower piece portion 262 form a V-shaped groove that expands toward the right.

  The fraud prevention member 260 is attached to the attachment recess 252b of the rear cover 252 so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece 261 and the lower piece 262 communicates with the inside of the hit ball supply port 252a. Become.

  According to the fraud prevention member 260, an illegal game ball with a string attached is driven into the game area 5a by the ball launcher 680 from the upper plate 321 via the ball feed unit 250, and attached to the illegal game ball. When a fraudulent act is performed in which an illegal game ball is taken in and out of the first starting port 2002 by operating a string, the illegal game ball launched (hit) by the ball launcher 680 is illegal. After a string attached to a simple game ball is inserted between the upper piece 261 and the lower piece 262, the V-shaped narrow formed by the upper piece 261 and the lower piece 262 is narrowed. It can be cut by the part, and it is possible to prevent an illegal act using an illegal game ball with a string attached.

[3-1l. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 270 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 36 (a) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 36 (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 37A is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the front with the lid member removed, and FIG. 37B is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the rear with the lid member removed. Further, FIG. 38 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed.

  As shown in the figure, the foul cover unit 270 includes a shallow box-shaped unit main body 271 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 and opened on the front side, and a flat lid member attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271. 272. The foul cover unit 270 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and passes through the normal guiding path 861 of the lower full ball path unit 860 of the main body frame 4 and the upper dish ball supply port 323a of the dish unit 320. A full sphere receiving port 274 that opens toward the rear at the lower right side of the front sphere passage 273 and the through-sphere passage 273 and communicates with the full guide passage 862 of the lower full sphere route unit 860 of the main body frame 4. And.

  The foul cover unit 270 opens upward on the right side when viewed from the front of the full ball receiving port 274, and has not reached the game area 5a despite being fired by the ball launcher 680 of the main body frame 4. A foul ball receiving port 275 for receiving a ball (foul ball), and a game ball opened to the front near the lower right corner when viewed from the front and received in the full tank receiving port 274 and the foul ball receiving port 275 are released forward. And a ball discharge port 276 communicating with the lower tray ball supply port 323c of the tray unit 320.

  Further, the foul cover unit 270 is formed between the full tank receiving port 274 and the foul ball receiving port 275 and the ball discharge port 276 by the unit main body 271 and the lid member 272, and can store a predetermined amount of game balls. A storage passage 277 having a wide area, a plate-shaped movable piece 278 constituting a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 277 and having a lower end rotatably attached to the unit main body 271, and a movable piece A full tank detection sensor 279 that detects rotation of the 278 in a direction away from the storage passage 277 and a spring 280 that biases the movable piece 278 toward the center of the storage passage 277 are provided.

  When the inside of the lower plate 322 of the dish unit 320 is filled with game balls and the game balls are not released from the ball discharge port 276 to the lower plate 322 side, the foul cover unit 270 has a certain number in the storage passage 277. The game balls can be stored. When a certain number of game balls are stored in the storage passage 277, the upper end of the movable piece 278 is moved so as to move away from the storage passage 277 against the biasing force of the spring 280 by the weight of the game ball. The piece 278 is rotated, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 279. Thereby, since it can be determined that the lower tray 322 is full of game balls, when full tank detection is detected by the full tank detection sensor 279, payout of further game balls is stopped, This can be notified to a player, a staff member of the game hall, or the like, and can be urged to eliminate the filling of the lower plate 322.

  The foul cover unit 270 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 271 and below the through-ball passage 273, and the guide cover opening / closing door 863 of the lower full ball path unit 860 in the payout unit 800 described later of the main body frame 4 is provided. A door opening / closing contact portion 281 with which the operating protrusion 863e can contact is provided (see FIG. 131). The door opening / closing contact portion 281 is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as it goes downward. The door opening / closing contact portion 281 is formed such that when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating projection 863 e of the guide path opening / closing door 863 contacts. When the operating projection 863e of the guideway opening / closing door 863 contacts the door opening / closing contact portion 281, the guideway opening / closing door 863 rotates and the downstream end (front opening) of the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862. ) Can be opened.

[3-2. Handle unit]
The handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. 39A is a front view of the handle unit in the door frame, FIG. 39B is a perspective view of the handle unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 39B is a perspective view of the handle unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 40A is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 40B is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the back. The handle unit 300 is attached to the handle attachment member 180 of the door frame base unit 100, and can be driven by the player into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by operating the game ball in the upper plate 321. It is.

  The handle unit 300 covers the handle base 301 attached to the cylindrical portion 181 of the handle attachment member 180 in the door frame base unit 100, the handle 302 attached rotatably to the front end of the handle base 301, and the front end side of the handle 302. And a handle cover 303 attached to the handle base 301.

  The handle unit 300 has an inner base 304 attached to the front surface of the handle base 301 on the rear side of the handle 302, a handle 302 attached to the front end thereof, and rotatably mounted by the inner base 304 and the handle base 301. A shaft member 305 having a portion 305a, a transmission gear 306 meshing with a drive gear portion 305a of the shaft member 305, a detection shaft 307a rotating integrally with the transmission gear 306, and a handle base 301 and an inner base And a handle rotation detection sensor 307 sandwiched therebetween.

  Furthermore, the handle unit 300 is attached so that one end side is attached to the handle base 301 and the other end side is attached to the handle 302 so that the handle 302 is returned to the initial rotation position (rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). One end side is attached to the inner base 304 and the other end side is attached to the transmission gear 306, and the detection shaft 307a of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 is rotated clockwise in front view via the transmission gear 306. The auxiliary spring 309 biased in the direction, the handle touch sensor 310 attached to the handle base 301 behind the inner base 304, and the tip side outward from the left side of the front end outer peripheral surface of the handle base 301 in front view. The handle is protruding and the base end is behind the inner base 304 A single button 311 that is rotatably mounted around a shaft extending in the front-rear direction of the case 301, and a single button operation sensor 312 that is attached to the handle base 301 by detecting a pressing operation of the single button 311. Yes.

  A handle base 301 of the handle unit 300 includes a cylindrical base portion 301a extending in the front-rear direction, a disk-shaped front end portion 301b protruding in a radial direction from the front end of the base portion 301a, and a hollow from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base portion 301a. And three groove portions 301c that extend in the axial direction and are formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. The base 301 a of the handle base 301 is formed so that the outer diameter is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180. The three groove portions 301 c are formed at positions corresponding to the three protrusions 183 of the cylindrical portion 181 in the handle mounting member 180. Accordingly, the base 301a can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180 with the three groove portions 301c aligned with the three protrusions 183, and the protrusions 183 are respectively inserted into the three groove portions 301c. By being inserted, the handle base 301 cannot rotate relative to the handle mounting member 180.

  The handle 302 includes four first protrusions 302a, second protrusions 302b, third protrusions 302c, and fourth protrusions 302d that protrude outward in the circumferential direction from the outer peripheral surface, and a rotation shaft (shaft member 305). Two slits 302e extending in a circular arc shape as a center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and projecting rearward from an inner position with respect to the rotation center with respect to the slit 302e, the other end side of the handle return spring 308 is locked. A locking projection 302f.

  The four first protrusions 302a, the second protrusions 302b, the third protrusions 302c, and the fourth protrusions 302d are sequentially provided in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. Specifically, the first protrusion 302a bulges so that the side surface in the clockwise direction of the front portion of the portion that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 bulges outward, and the opposite side is the opposite side. The side surface in the direction of is recessed (curled) so as to curve inward. The portion of the second protrusion 302b that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 is separated from the portion of the first protrusion 302a that protrudes most clockwise by a rotation angle of about 85 degrees. Slightly low. The second protrusion 302b bulges so that the side surface in the clockwise direction of the front projection of the second protrusion 302b bulges outward, and the side surface in the direction around the counter-tick that is the opposite side is curved inward. And is formed in a shape similar to the first protrusion 302a.

  In the third protrusion 302c, the most protruding portion from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 is separated from the most protruding portion of the second protrusion 302b in a clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 70 degrees. It protrudes at about half the height. The third protrusion 302c is inclined substantially linearly on both sides, and more gently than the side face in the counterclockwise direction where the side face in the clockwise direction is the opposite side. The fourth protrusion 302d has a portion that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 away from the most protruding portion of the third protrusion 302c in a clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 55 degrees, and from the first protrusion 302a. It protrudes slightly higher. The fourth protrusion 302d is formed in a substantially isosceles triangle with side surfaces on both sides inclined substantially linearly.

  The handle cover 303 is provided with three mounting bosses 303a that have a round front center and bulge forward and project rearward. The three attachment bosses 303a are attached to the front surface of the handle base 301 through the slits 302e of the handle 302 from the front. Since the attachment boss 303a of the handle cover 303 passes through the slit 302e of the handle 302, the attachment boss 303a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 302e, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 302. In this example, the handle 302 can be rotated within a range of a rotation angle of about 120 degrees.

  The handle unit 300 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 via a handle attachment member 180. The handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 is inclined so that the right end side is positioned rearward of the left end side in plan view and faces the outside (open side). The handle unit 300 that is attached to the pachinko machine 1 is also inclined to the outside in a plan view (in other words, its tip is inclined to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). Are attached and fixed to the door frame 3. Thereby, the player can easily grasp the handle 302 of the handle unit 300, and can perform the rotation operation without feeling uncomfortable.

  The handle rotation detection sensor 307 of the handle unit 300 is a variable resistor. When the handle 302 is rotated, the detection shaft 307 a of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 rotates via the shaft member 305 and the transmission gear 306. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 307a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 682 in the ball launching device 680 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 307. The game ball is driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302.

  The outer peripheral surfaces of the handle 302 and the handle cover 303 are conductively plated, and the handle touch sensor 310 detects contact when the player contacts the handle 302 or the like. When the handle 302 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 310 detects a player's contact, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 is accepted, and the firing solenoid 682 has a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302. The drive is controlled and a game ball can be shot. That is, even if the player tries to drive the game ball into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 302 by some method without touching the handle 302, the firing solenoid 682 is not driven and the game ball can be driven. I can't do it. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the game by rotating the handle 302 in a different way from the original, and to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

  In the handle unit 300, when the player presses the single button 311 while rotating the handle 302, the single button operation sensor 312 detects the operation of the single button 311, and the firing control unit (not shown) of the payout control board 951. ) Stops the driving of the firing solenoid 682. This makes it possible to temporarily stop the playing of the game ball without returning the rotation operation of the handle 302 and to release the single button 311 before operating the single button 311 by releasing the pressing operation of the single button 311. The game ball can be driven again into the game area 5a with strength.

  Further, the handle unit 300 includes four first protrusions 302a, second protrusions 302b, third protrusions 302c, and fourth protrusions 302d on the handle 302, and the handle 302 is most rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. Thus, when the game ball is driven most strongly into the game area 5a (so-called “right-handed”), the position of the first protrusion 302a when the handle 302 is not rotated is the fourth protrusion 302d. Therefore, by changing the handle 302 with the fourth protrusion 302d as the first protrusion 302a, the player can maintain the handle 302 in the “right-handed” position in an easy state. It is possible to reduce a person's feeling of fatigue and suppress a decrease in interest in games.

[3-3. Overall configuration of pan unit]
The dish unit 320 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45. 41A is a perspective view of the tray unit of the door frame as viewed from the right front, and FIG. 41B is a perspective view of the tray unit as viewed from the left front. FIG. 42A is a perspective view of the dish unit viewed from the upper right rear, and FIG. 42B is a perspective view of the dish unit viewed from the lower left rear. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit as seen from the front after being disassembled for each main member, and FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit as seen from the back after being broken down for every main member. FIG. 45 is an explanatory view showing, in an enlarged manner, a portion of the lower plate with the lower plate cover removed in the sectional view of FIG. The dish unit 320 is attached to a lower portion of the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and the front surface bulges forward. On the front surface of the dish unit 320, an effect decoration rotating body unit 530 described later is attached.

  The tray unit 320 stores an upper plate 321 for storing game balls to be driven into the game area 5a, and game balls supplied from the upper plate 321 and the foul cover unit 270. A lower tray 322 that can be stored.

  The dish unit 320 is attached to the plate-shaped dish unit base 323 attached to the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 and the upper part of the front surface of the dish unit base 323, and the left side of the dish unit base bulges forward greatly from the left and right center. An upper plate body 324 that forms an upper plate 321, and a lower plate body 325 that is attached to the left side of the left and right center at the lower part of the front surface of the plate unit base 323 and bulges forward to form a lower plate 322. And a dish unit cover 326 attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 323 so as to cover the front sides of the upper dish body 324 and the lower dish body 325.

  The dish unit 320 includes an upper dish ball removal button 327 attached to the upper face of the upper dish 321 on the upper surface of the dish unit cover 326 so that it can be pressed from above, and a right side view of the upper dish ball removal button 327 when viewed from the front. The ball lending button 328 attached to the upper surface of the dish unit cover 326, the return button 329 attached to the upper surface of the dish unit cover 326 on the right side of the front of the ball lending button 328, the ball lending button 328 and the return A ball rental return display unit 330 attached to the upper surface of the dish unit cover 326 behind the button 329 and an effect selection attached to the front dish upper decoration part 326b on the front surface of the dish unit cover 326 in front of the upper dish 321 The left button 331 and the production selection right button 332 are projected forward from the front surface of the dish unit cover 326 in front of the lower dish 322. And a, a lower tray ball vent button 333 which is mounted for pressing from the front.

[3-3a. Top plate]
The upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 and 44. The upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 is formed by the plate unit base 323 and the upper plate body 324, and is formed in a container shape in which the left side is larger than the center of the left and right sides when viewed from the front and is opened upward. Has been. The upper plate 321 (upper plate main body 324) has a portion of about 約 bulges forward from the left end to the right with respect to the width in the left-right direction of the door frame 3. As the upper plate 321 moves from the most bulged part to the right in the front view, the front end retreats backward, and a guide passage part 321a having a depth in the front-rear direction slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball is formed. Yes. The entire upper surface of the upper plate 321 including the guide passage portion 321a is inclined so that the right end side is lowered, and the right end side in front view of the guide passage portion 321a is the upper surface of the plate unit cover 326 (the upper plate ball removal button 327). ) (See FIG. 44).

  The upper plate 321 is assembled to the plate unit base 323, and the bottom surface of the upper plate 321 is a game ball with respect to the upper end of the upper plate ball feed port 323d from a position lower than the upper plate ball supply port 323a of the plate unit base 323. It inclines so that it may become slightly lower toward the position below the outer diameter. Thereby, the game ball released forward from the upper plate ball supply port 323a can be received and stored in the upper plate 321, and the received game ball can be stored from the right end side of the guide passage portion 321a. It can be supplied to the ball feeding port 323d.

  As described above, the upper plate 321 is formed such that the bottom surface thereof is lowered downward in the guide passage portion 321a in which the depth in the front-rear direction becomes narrow. That is, a part of the upper plate 321 protrudes from above into the mounting space 326j of the plate unit cover 326 to which the later-described effect decoration rotator unit 530 (second effect decoration rotator unit 530A) is attached. Therefore, in the upper plate 321, a sufficient amount of game balls can be secured. The upper plate 321 (upper plate main body 324) protrudes into the mounting space 326j of the plate unit cover 326 so as not to contact the effect decoration rotator unit 530 (second effect decoration rotator unit 530A).

  The guide passage portion 321a is provided with a metal grounding metal 321b that is electrically grounded (grounded) in the pachinko machine 1, and the game ball comes into contact with (rolls), so that the game ball Charged static electricity can be removed.

[3-3b. Lower plate]
The lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45 and the like. The lower dish 322 is disposed below the upper dish 321 and on the left side of the center of the dish unit 320 (door frame 3) in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The lower tray 322 is formed in a container shape that can store game balls, and is attached to the lower tray ball removal hole 322a that vertically penetrates the bottom wall portion 325a and can discharge the game balls, and the tray unit cover 326. And an escape portion 322b for avoiding contact with the produced effect decoration rotator unit 530 (second effect decoration rotator unit 530A). The relief portion 322b of the lower plate 322 is formed such that the right front corner is recessed in an arc shape toward the rear.

  The lower plate 322 includes a lower plate main body 325 whose upper and rear sides are open, a lower plate cover portion 326k that covers the upper side from the left end side of the lower plate main body 325, and an open of the lower plate main body 325. A dish unit base 323 that is closed at the rear, and a lower dish cover 340 that covers the upper side of the portion of the lower dish body 325 that projects into the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. The cover 326 faces outward from the lower plate opening 326d. As shown in FIGS. 28 and 45, the lower plate 322 has a quadrangular shape in which the outer peripheral shape in plan view extends to the left and right, and a trapezoid in which the front side of the quadrangle is the base and the upper side shorter than the base is disposed on the front side. Are curved so that the left and right sides of the trapezoid extending obliquely are recessed backward. The lower plate 322 is formed such that the width in the left-right direction increases in the plan view from the front to the rear.

  As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44 and the like, the lower dish main body 325 is formed in a container shape whose upper and rear sides are open. The lower dish main body 325 has a flat bottom wall portion 325a, a main body standing wall portion 325b extending upward from an outer peripheral end excluding a rear end side of the bottom wall portion 325a, and a game ball passing through the bottom wall portion 325a. A lower dish ball removal hole 322a penetrating vertically in a possible size. The outer peripheral shape of the bottom wall portion 325a is curved so that the left and right sides extending left and right, and the front side of the quadrangle and the upper side shorter than the bottom side are arranged on the front side and the left and right sides extending obliquely are recessed backward. It is formed in a shape that combines a trapezoid. The bottom wall portion 325a (the upper surface thereof) is inclined so as to become lower toward the lower dish ball removal hole 322a. The main body standing wall 325b rises upward from the bottom wall 325a at a height that is two to five times the diameter of the game ball. The lower dish ball removal hole 322a is formed at a position on the right side of the center in the left-right direction of the lower dish body 325 (bottom wall portion 325a). In the lower dish main body 325, the curved portion at the front right front corner of the bottom wall portion 325a and the main body standing wall portion 325b corresponds to the escape portion 322b.

  The lower plate cover 340 is formed so as to cover approximately the upper right half of the lower plate body 325. As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the lower plate cover 340 includes a cover upright wall portion 340a that rises upward from the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower platen main body 325, and an approximately upper end of the cover upright wall portion 340a. A ceiling portion 340b extending horizontally. The cover standing wall portion 340a rises from a portion from a part of the front side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower dish main body 325 to the rear end of the right side. When the lower tray cover 340 is assembled to the tray unit 320, the rear ends of the cover standing wall portion 340a and the ceiling portion 340b are in contact with the front surface of the tray unit base 323. The front end (the left end side of the front side) of the cover standing wall 340a is in contact with the right end side of the lower dish opening 326d of the dish unit cover 326. Furthermore, the left end of the ceiling part 340b is in contact with the right end of the lower dish cover part 326k of the dish unit cover 326. In the lower plate cover 340, the curved surface portion of the cover standing wall portion 340a and the portion extending obliquely between the cover standing wall portion 340a and the ceiling portion 340b on the rear side correspond to the escape portion 322b. Yes.

  The lower plate 322 is covered with a plate unit cover 326 (production decoration rotating body unit 530) on the right side from the vicinity of the left end of the front view of the part that extends short to the left and right on the front end side, and more than half is production decoration in the front view. It is located behind the rotator unit 530. That is, the lower plate 322 is formed so that the right half wraps around the effect decoration rotator unit 530. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 45, the lower plate 322 includes a lower plate first area A1 (a cross hatch area in FIG. 45) located behind a lower plate opening 326d of a plate unit cover 326, which will be described later, and a lower plate. Lower pan second region A2 (in FIG. 45) located behind the opening 326d on the right side (the front end side of the staging unit 326, the staging unit mounting portion 326a in the pan unit cover 326, and the bottom pan cover 340). Shaded area). In other words, the lower dish 322 is more than half of the storage area in which the game ball can be stored (the area corresponding to the storage area in plan view and the lower dish first area A1 and the lower dish second area A2). It is located behind the effect decoration rotator unit 530. In FIG. 45, the dotted hatch area is the remaining space (area) of the mounting space 326 j in the dish unit cover 326.

  In the lower plate 322, a lower plate ball supply port 323c that forms the rear wall is open to the right side of the center of the rear wall in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. More specifically, the lower plate ball supply port 323c of the lower plate 322 includes the production decoration rotating body unit 530, the production operation unit mounting portion 326a (the right outside of the lower plate opening 326d) in the plate unit cover 326, and the lower plate cover 340. It is arrange | positioned at lower plate | pan 2nd area | region A2 used as the back, such as the front-end side. Accordingly, when the door frame 3 is viewed from the front, the lower tray ball supply port 323c is not visible from the player side through the lower tray opening 326d (see FIG. 19 and the like). Accordingly, the lower plate 322 is formed so as to bend toward the rear of the effect decoration rotating body unit 530 from the lower plate opening 326d on the left side surface of the plate unit 320 (the plate unit cover 326) bulging forward. In addition, the storage volume of the game ball is formed larger than the range seen from the front. In other words, the lower dish 322 is formed so that the lower dish second area A2 is larger than the lower dish first area A1. Thereby, when the lower plate 322 is viewed from the outside (player side), more game balls can be stored in the lower plate 322 than it looks.

  In the lower plate 322, the right half of the lower plate main body 325 in the left-right direction (lower plate second region A2) is, as shown in FIG. 41 (a), an effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (mounting space 326j) of the plate unit cover 326. The lower plate cover 340 covers the upper side of the portion of the lower plate main body 325 that protrudes into the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. With this lower plate cover 340, when the player inserts a finger into the lower plate 322 from the lower plate opening 326d, the fingertip is placed on the rear side of the production decoration rotary unit 530 (second production decoration rotation unit 530A). Can be touched.

  The lower dish 322 includes a lower dish ball removal hole 322a penetrating vertically in front of the lower dish ball supply port 323c in the lower dish second region A2. The bottom surface of the lower dish 322 is inclined so as to become lower toward the lower dish ball removal hole 322a. The lower dish ball removal hole 322a of the lower dish 322 is closed so as to be opened and closed by a lid member 334 that is operated by pressing the lower dish ball removal button 333. In the normal state, the lower dish 322 has a lower dish ball removal hole 322 a closed by a lid member 334, so that a game ball can be stored in the lower dish 322. When the lower plate ball removal button 333 is pressed to open the lid member 334, the game balls in the lower plate 322 can be discharged from the lower plate ball removal hole 322a to the lower side of the plate unit 320.

  The lower dish ball removal hole 322a of the lower dish 322 is disposed in front of (in front of) the lower dish ball supply port 323c of the dish unit base 323 that forms the rear wall of the lower dish 322. Therefore, when assembled in the door frame 3, the lower dish ball removal hole 322 a is located on the right side of the lower dish opening 326 d of the dish unit cover 326 and behind the frame unit 415 in the effect decoration rotating body unit 530. Therefore, it cannot be seen from the player (front) side.

  As described above, the lower plate 322 is formed in a shape in which the outer peripheral shape is a combination of a front side of a quadrangle extending left and right and a trapezoid whose front side is narrowed, and the bottom surface has a lower plate ball hole 322a. It is inclined to become lower toward Therefore, the game balls supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c into the lower plate 322 in the state where the lid member 334 is opened and the lower plate ball hole 322a is opened are directly in front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c. Immediately it is discharged downward from the opened lower dish ball removal hole 322a. Since the lower end of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is located slightly to the left of the left end of the lower dish ball supply port 323c, the lower dish ball supply hole 322a is opened in the state where the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is opened. The game ball supplied from the mouth 323c to the lower plate 322 does not directly flow to the left side region of the lower plate ball hole 322a in the lower plate 322, and is discharged from the lower plate ball hole 322a. Become.

  On the other hand, since the right end of the lower dish ball discharge hole 322a is located to the left of the right end of the lower dish ball supply port 323c, the game supplied to the lower plate 322 from the vicinity of the right end of the lower dish ball supply port 323c. A ball | bowl will contact | abut to the site | part which forms the standing wall of the right side of the lower plate 322 in the main body standing wall part 325b. Since the standing wall on the right side of the lower plate 322 is curved obliquely with respect to the front-rear direction so as to face the direction of the lower plate ball removal hole 322a, the game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c is When it comes into contact with the inclined portion, the light is reflected in the direction of the lower dish ball hole 322a, and is discharged from the lower dish ball hole 322a without going to the region on the left side of the lower dish ball hole 322a. (See FIG. 45).

  As described above, the lower tray 322 of the present embodiment is formed so as to guide the game ball supplied from the lower tray ball supply port 323c to the lower tray ball discharge hole 322a. In the opened state, the game ball supplied from the lower dish ball supply port 323c is immediately lowered from the lower dish ball hole 322a without entering the left side area of the lower dish ball hole 322a in the lower dish 322. (Dollar box) can be discharged. As a result, if the lower tray ball removal hole 322a is kept open, the game balls circulating on the lower plate 322 cannot be seen from the player side, so that they are paid out from the upper plate 321 or the payout device 830. An illusion that game balls and the like are directly discharged to the dollar box can be made to make it difficult for the game balls to feel annoying through the lower plate 322, thereby allowing the player to play a game (game ball driving operation). And a production image, etc.), it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  The lower plate 322 of this embodiment includes a main body standing wall 325b of the lower plate main body 325 and lower plate covers 340 and 340A extending upward from the upper end of the main body standing wall 325b. Even if the supplied game ball jumps and jumps in the lower plate 322, the game ball can be prevented from entering the mounting space 326j from the lower plate 322, and the game ball in the lower plate 322 is decorated. It is possible to prevent contact with the rear side of the rotator unit 530 (second effect decorative rotator unit 530A). Accordingly, the game balls supplied in the lower plate 322 and the game balls stored in the lower plate 322 are in contact with or pressed against the rear side of the effect decoration rotator unit 530 (second effect decoration rotator unit 530A). It is possible to prevent the rear side of the effect decoration rotator unit 530 (second effect decoration rotator unit 530A) from being damaged by the game ball.

  Furthermore, since the lower dish 322 is provided with a lower dish ball removal hole 322a in front of the lower dish ball supply port 323c, when the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is opened, the lower dish ball supply hole 323c is discharged. Since the played game ball can be directly entered into the lower dish ball removal hole 322a and discharged downward (dollar box), it is difficult for the game ball to reach the front end side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower dish body 325. Can do. Since the bottom wall portion 325a of the lower plate main body 325 near the front end of the lower plate 322 becomes higher toward the front, the game ball toward the front end side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325 has an inclined bottom surface. As a result, the moving speed of the game ball can be attenuated. Therefore, the impact when the game balls released from the lower tray ball supply port 323c into the lower tray 322 abut against the lower tray covers 340 and 340A and the main body standing wall portion 325b can be reduced and damaged. Can be difficult.

  In the present embodiment, the lid member 334 closing the lower dish ball removal hole 322a may be interlocked with the upper dish ball removal button 327. Accordingly, when the upper dish ball removal button 327 is operated, the lid member 334 is also moved to open the lower dish ball removal hole 322a, so that the game balls discharged from the upper dish 321 to the lower dish 322 are further removed. It will be discharged | emitted from the hole 322a to the lower dollar box. That is, when the upper plate ball removal button 327 is operated to remove the game ball from the upper plate 321, the game ball of the upper plate 321 is discharged to the dollar box even though the lower plate ball removal button 333 is not operated. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to have a strong illusion that the game ball on the upper plate 321 is directly discharged to the dollar box, and the above-described effects can be further exhibited. Note that the simultaneous opening of the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 for removing the ball may be performed simultaneously by driving a driving source such as a motor or a solenoid, or may be performed simultaneously by a mechanical link mechanism.

  In the present embodiment, the lower plate body 325 and the lower plate cover 340 constituting the lower plate 322 are shown as separate parts that can be disassembled, but the lower plate body 325 and the lower plate cover 340 cannot be disassembled. It is good also as one. Although the cover standing wall 340a of the lower plate cover 340 has been shown to rise from the upper end of the main body standing wall 325b of the lower plate body 325, the cover standing wall of the lower plate cover 340 is shown from the bottom wall 325a of the lower plate body 325. The part 340a may stand up. Although the ceiling part 340b of the lower dish cover 340 has shown the example extended substantially horizontally from the upper end of the cover standing wall part 340a, the ceiling part 340b of the lower dish cover 340 is shown from the upper end of the main body standing wall part 325b of the lower dish body 325. It may extend substantially horizontally.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, although the example provided with the escape part 322b for avoiding the contact with the production | presentation decoration rotary body unit 530 (second production decoration rotary body unit 530A) of the lower plate 322 was shown, the escape part 322b was shown. It is good also as the lower plate 322 which is not equipped with.

  In the present embodiment, the lower plate 322 (the lower plate body 325, the lower plate cover 340, etc.) has a uniform surface shape without a through-hole, but a plurality of through-holes through which game balls cannot pass are shown. It may have. Specifically, at least a part of the bottom wall portion 325a, the main body standing wall portion 325b, the cover standing wall portion 340a, the ceiling portion 340b, etc. of the lower plate 322 is formed in a fence shape having a gap through which a game ball cannot pass. It is good also as what was formed in the thing and net shape. It should be noted that a light emitter such as an LED may be disposed in the dish unit cover 326 (mounting space 326j) so that the interior of the lower dish 322 is illuminated (light-emitting decorated) through a fence-like or net-like gap of the lower dish 322. .

  In this embodiment, the lower plate 322 is formed by the lower plate body 325, the lower plate cover 340, the plate unit base 323, and the plate unit cover 326 (lower plate cover portion 326k) formed separately. However, the lower plate 322 may be formed by combining these four members in an appropriate combination. Specifically, the lower plate cover 340 and the lower plate body 325 are integrated, the lower plate cover 340 and the plate unit cover 326 are integrated, the lower plate body 325 and the plate unit cover 326 are integrated. What is integrated, one in which the lower plate cover 340 and the plate unit base 323 are integrated, one in which the lower plate body 325 and the plate unit base 323 are integrated, the plate unit base 323 and the plate unit cover 326 In which the lower plate body 325, the lower plate cover 340, and the plate unit base 323 are integrated, and the lower plate body 325, the lower plate cover 340, and the plate unit cover 326 are integrated. The lower plate cover 340, the plate unit base 323, and the plate unit cover 326 are integrated, the lower plate body 325, the plate unit base 323, and the plate unit. That the Tokaba 326 are integrated, that a lower tray body 325 and Shitasara cover 340 and tray unit base 323 and dish unit cover 326 is integrated, it may be like.

[3-3b-1. Ball guide part of lower plate]
With reference to FIG. 46, an embodiment in which the lower tray 322 of the tray unit 320 is provided with a ball guiding portion 322c for guiding a game ball from the lower tray ball supply port 323c to the lower tray ball removal hole 322a will be described in detail. . FIG. 46A is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which the lower plate is provided with a ball guiding portion, and FIG. 46B is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which the lower plate is provided with a ball guiding portion different from (a). It is a figure, (c) is explanatory drawing which shows roughly the example provided with the further different bulb | ball guidance part. In FIG. 46, the same components as those described above are denoted by the same reference numerals.

  The example of the lower plate 322 in FIG. 46A is substantially the same as the diameter of the lower plate ball discharge hole 322a in the portion between the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball discharge hole 322a on the bottom surface of the lower plate 322. A pair of sphere guiding portions 322c are provided that are separated from each other by a distance. The pair of ball guiding portions 322c are formed in a rail shape (protrusion) that extends back and forth in a state of protruding from the bottom surface of the lower plate 322. The lower dish 322 is inclined so that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower dish ball removal hole 322a. Accordingly, the game balls supplied from the lower dish ball supply port 323c into the lower dish 322 are guided to the lower dish ball extraction holes 322a by the pair of ball guide parts 322c without getting over the ball guide parts 322c, and the lower dish balls It is discharged downward (dollar box) from the hole 322a.

  The lower plate 322 in this example is similar to the above in that the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball release hole are located on the rear side (lower plate second region A2) on the right side of the lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326. 322a are arranged in a straight line in the front-rear direction. Accordingly, the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball release hole 322a are provided behind the covering wall such as the effect decoration rotating body unit 530, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a in the dish unit cover 326, and the front end side of the lower dish cover 340. It is not visible from the front.

  Thus, since the lower tray 322 of this example includes a pair of ball guiding portions 322c, the game ball supplied from the lower tray ball supply port 323c in a state where the lower tray ball removal hole 322a is opened. Can be immediately discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower dish ball removal hole 322a without entering the left side area of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a in the lower dish 322. Since the game balls circulating on the lower plate 322 cannot be seen from the player side, the game ball or the like paid out from the upper plate 321 or the payout device 830 is illusioned to be discharged directly into the dollar box. It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to feel the trouble of passing through the lower plate 322, so that it is possible to concentrate the player on the game (game ball driving operation, production image, etc.) and to suppress the decrease in interest. .

  In the example of FIG. 46 (a), the ball guide portion 322c is rail-shaped, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game ball is lowered like a groove extending toward the lower dish ball removal hole 322a. Any material that can be guided to the dishball hole 322a may be used.

  Next, in the example of the lower plate 322 in FIG. 46 (b), the game ball released diagonally forward to the right from the lower plate ball supply port 323c passes through the right wall of the lower plate ball removal hole 322a in the lower plate 322. In addition to being formed in a shape that reflects in the direction of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a, a buffer portion 322d is provided at a portion where the game ball abuts. The buffer 322d is formed of rubber, foam or the like.

  Similarly to the above, the lower plate 322 of this example is also provided with a lower plate ball hole 322a in front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c, and the bottom surface of the lower plate 322 is lowered toward the lower plate ball hole 322a. It is inclined to become. Therefore. The game ball released straight forward from the lower tray ball supply port 323c is discharged downward (dollar box) through the lower tray ball removal hole 322a. On the other hand, the game ball released to the right front from the lower dish ball supply port 323c is reflected toward the lower dish ball hole 322a by the buffer 322d and discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower dish ball hole 322a. Is done. At this time, since the game ball abuts on the buffer portion 322d and reflects, the collision sound at the time of reflection is reduced.

  Further, the lower plate 322 of this example is also in the rear side on the right side of the lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326 (in the decorative decorative rotator unit 530, which is the lower plate second area A2, in the plate unit cover 326). It is arrange | positioned in the production | presentation operation unit attachment part 326a and the back of covering walls, such as the front end side of the lower plate | pan cover 340, and cannot be seen from the front.

  Thus, since the lower tray 322 of this example includes the buffer portion 322d on the wall portion that reflects the game ball, even if the game ball is not released straight forward from the lower tray ball supply port 323c, The buffer portion 322d can be reflected in the direction of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a without any sound and discharged downward (dollar box). Accordingly, when game balls and the like paid out from the upper plate 321 and the payout device 830 are discharged to the dollar box, the collision sound of the game balls cannot be heard from the lower plate 322, so that the bag is also discharged directly to the dollar box. By making it difficult to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322, the player can concentrate on the game (game ball driving operation, production image, etc.) and suppress the decrease in interest Can be made.

  Subsequently, in the example of the lower plate 322 in FIG. 46 (c), a portion on the opposite side of the lower plate ball supply port 323c with the lower plate ball removal hole 322a in the bottom surface (bottom wall portion 325a) of the lower plate 322 therebetween. And a return portion 322e that reflects the game ball that has jumped upward from the lower dish ball removal hole 322a toward the lower dish ball removal hole 322a. In addition, the return part 322e may use the same material as the material which forms the lower plate 322, and may use the buffer material which relieves the collision sound at the time of reflection, such as rubber | gum and a foam. The return portion 322e may not constitute the side wall of the lower plate 322, or may constitute a part of the side wall (main body standing wall portion 325b) of the lower plate 322.

  In the lower plate 322, the lower plate ball supply port 323c, the lower plate ball hole 322a, and the return portion 322e are arranged in a straight line from the rear to the front, and the lower plate of the plate unit cover 326 The rear side of the right side of the opening 326d (the production decorative rotating body unit 530 that is the lower plate second area A2, the production operation unit mounting portion 326a in the plate unit cover 326, and the rear side of the covering wall such as the front end side of the lower plate cover 340 ) And is not visible from the front. In this lower plate 322, even if the game balls flowing from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball discharge hole 322a jump over the lower plate ball discharge hole 322a, the return plate 322e causes the lower plate ball discharge hole 322a side to And can be discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower dish ball removal hole 322a. Therefore, the same operational effects as described above can be achieved.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described ball guiding portion 322c and the buffer portion 322d may be appropriately combined with the lower plate 322. Thereby, there can exist an effect similar to the above.

[3-3b-2. Another embodiment of lower plate]
Another embodiment of the lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 (a) is an explanatory view schematically showing a lower plate that can be divided, and FIG. 47 (b) is a schematic view showing a state where the storage area of the lower plate is expanded according to the size of the space behind the effect operation unit. It is explanatory drawing shown, (c) is explanatory drawing which shows the lower plate of (b) with a schematic perspective view. The lower plate 322 shown in FIG. 47 is configured such that the lower plate main body 325 can be divided at the dividing line PL arranged in the lower plate second region A2. In addition, the area | region shown with a dotted line hatch in FIG. 47 has shown the remaining space of the attachment space 326j.

  First, the lower dish main body 325 (lower dish 322) shown in FIG. 47 (a) constitutes a part of the lower dish first area A1 and the lower dish second area A2, and has a lower dish ball removal hole 322a. A main body part 325A and a first extension part 325B that is attached to the right side of the main body part 325A and constitutes the remaining area of the lower dish second area A2 are provided. The first extension unit 325B further includes the remaining space (the production decoration rotator unit 530) in the installation space 326j in which the production decoration rotator unit 530 (second production decoration rotator unit 530A) is accommodated, compared to the main body 325A. It protrudes into the space behind the second effect decoration rotating body unit 530A. As shown in the figure, the first extension portion 325B is formed so that the width in the left-right direction increases from the front to the rear. The first extension part 325B has a relief part 322b for avoiding contact with the second effect decoration rotator unit 530A at the right front corner.

  Next, in the example of FIGS. 47B and 47C, the rear end of the effect decoration rotator unit 530 does not protrude rearward from the front end of the lower plate 322, and the example of FIG. The space behind the effect decoration rotator unit 530 (the remaining space of the mounting space 326j) is wider. The lower plate body 325 (lower plate 322) includes a main body portion 325A that constitutes a part of the lower plate first area A1 and the lower plate second area A2 and has a lower plate ball punching hole 322a, and a main body portion 325A. And a second extension part 325C which is larger than the first extension part 325B and constitutes the remaining area of the lower dish second area A2. As shown in the figure, the second extension part 325C has a constant lateral width from the front end to the rear end, and has a larger storage area for game balls than the first extension part 325B. The lower plate 322 is provided with a lower plate cover 340A having a shape corresponding to the shape of the second extension portion 325C (see FIG. 47C).

  In the example shown in FIG. 47, by attaching the first extension part 325B and the second extension part 325C to the main body part 325A, the storage areas of the respective game balls become continuous (communication), and the storage area of the game balls Expands. The boundary between the main body 325A and the first extension 325B or the second extension 325C is a dividing line PL. The first extension part 325B and the second extension part 325C in the lower plate body 325 communicate with a predetermined gap (attachment space 326j) between the rear face of the effect decoration rotator unit 530 and the second effect decoration rotator unit 530A. Space) is formed.

  As described above, in the above example, the lower tray main body 325 (lower tray 322) is configured to be divided, and at least one of the divided members can be replaced. The storage area can be increased or decreased as necessary. Since the lower platen main body 325 (lower plate 322) is configured to be split, the rear of the effect decoration rotator unit 530 (second effect decoration rotator unit 530A) attached to the plate unit cover 326 (in the attachment space 326j). An extension part (first extension part 325B or second extension part 325C) having a size corresponding to the amount of protrusion can be attached.

  In the above embodiment, the dividing line PL is arranged in the lower plate second area A2 which is behind the effect decoration rotating body unit 530 (second effect decoration rotating body unit 530A). PL may be arranged on the boundary line between the lower dish first area A1 and the lower dish second area A2, or may be arranged in the lower dish first area A1.

  In the above embodiment, the main body portion 325A of the lower plate body 325 (lower plate 322) is provided with the lower plate ball removal hole 322a, but the lower plate is added to the first extension portion 325B and the second extension portion 325C. A ball removal hole 322a may be provided.

  In the above embodiment, the first extension portion 325B and the second extension portion 325C are attached to the right side of the main body portion 325A of the lower dish main body 325. However, the game ball storage area is on the right side of the main body portion 325A. You may make it attach a flat-plate-like closure member which does not have.

  Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the lower plate body 325 in the lower plate 322 has been described, but the lower plate cover 340 can also be divided in the same manner as the lower plate body 325, or can be divided into the first extension unit 325B and the second extension unit. The shape may be adjusted to the size of 325C.

[3-3c. Dish unit base]
The dish unit base 323 of the dish unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The dish unit base 323 is attached to the lower side of the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and extends in the left-right direction over the entire width of the door frame base 110 (the rear is opened). It is formed in a shallow box shape.

  The dish unit base 323 penetrates back and forth in the vicinity of the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and penetrates back and forth at the lower side of the upper dish ball supply port 323a and the upper dish ball supply port 323a extending in a cylindrical shape to the rear. A speaker slit 323b composed of a plurality of elongated holes extending vertically, and a lower dish ball supply port 323c penetrating back and forth in the lower left portion from the left and right center in front view and extending in a cylindrical shape to the rear, The upper plate ball supply port 323c is provided with an upper plate ball feed port 323d that penetrates forward and backward on the upper right side of the lower plate ball supply port 323c and extends vertically and has an upper portion positioned at the right end of the upper plate body 324.

  The tray unit base 323 has a ball feed guide path 323e that guides the game ball sent to the rear side of the tray unit base 323 through the upper tray ball feed port 323d to the entrance 251a of the ball feed unit 250, and a ball feed guide. After drooping from the lower side of the path 323e, it extends in a substantially L shape so as to become lower toward the right side surface of the lower dish ball supply port 323c when viewed from the front, and is discharged from the ball outlet 251b of the ball feeding unit 250. A ball extraction guide path 323f for guiding the game ball to the lower dish ball supply port 323c, and the left side of the front view of the ball feed guide path 323e and between the lower end of the ball feed guide path 323e and the upper end of the ball extraction guide path 323f. Is an opening projecting so that the operation transmitting portion 327a that is in contact with the operation rod 253c of the ball feeding unit 250 and that is operated by the upper dish ball removal button 327 faces rearward at a height position of Includes a 323g, the. The ball removal guide path 323f has a downstream end opened in a cylindrical portion of the lower dish ball supply port 323c.

  Further, the dish unit base 323 penetrates back and forth in the lower right corner when viewed from the front, and the handle insertion port 323h through which the cylinder portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted, and the front and rear near the right corner when viewed from the front. And a cylinder insertion port 323i through which the cylinder lock 211 of the open / close cylinder unit 210 is inserted.

  The upper tray ball supply port 323a of the tray unit base 323 is assembled in the door frame 3, the front end opens on the rear wall of the upper plate 321, and the cylindrical rear end is the upper tray passage port for the door frame base 110. 117 is penetrated from the front side and connected to the front end of the through-ball passage 273 of the foul cover unit 270. Thereby, the game ball paid out from the payout unit 800 is supplied (paid out) into the upper plate 321 through the upper plate ball supply port 323a.

  The lower tray ball supply port 323c is assembled to the door frame 3, and the front end opens in the rear wall of the lower plate 322, and the cylindrical rear end penetrates the lower tray passage port 116 from the front side of the door frame base 110. Then, the front end of the ball discharge port 276 of the foul cover unit 270 is connected. Thereby, the game balls circulating in the storage passage 277 of the foul cover unit 270 are supplied into the lower plate 322 through the lower plate ball supply port 323c. The lower dish ball supply port 323c is behind the effect decoration rotating body unit 530, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (right outside of the lower plate opening 326d) in the plate unit cover 326, the front end side of the lower plate cover 340, and the like. It is arranged so that when the door frame 3 is viewed from the front, it cannot be seen from the player side through the lower plate opening 326d.

[3-3d. Dish unit cover]
The dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The dish unit cover 326 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 323 so as to cover the front side of the upper dish body 324 and the lower dish body 325. The dish unit cover 326 has a center in the left-right direction bulging forward, a large opening forward in the center in the left-right direction, and an effect operation unit mounting portion 326a to which the effect decoration rotating body unit 530 is attached, and the left and right of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. A dish front upper decoration part 326b formed at substantially the same height as the upper dish 321 on both sides, and a dish front lower decoration part 326c formed on the lower side of the left and right dish front decoration parts 326b, respectively. I have.

  The production operation unit mounting portion 326a is formed with a size of about 1/3 in the horizontal direction with respect to the full width in the horizontal direction of the dish unit 320, and the vertical direction is substantially the same as the height in the vertical direction of the dish unit 320. It is formed at a height. The production operation unit attachment portion 326a is inclined so as to move backward as the front end moves upward. Specifically, the front end of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a is inclined at an angle of 27 degrees with respect to the vertical line.

  The front front decoration part 326b moves rearward as it goes from the horizontal direction center side of the dish unit cover 326 toward both left and right sides. The intermediate portion is formed in a curved surface shape that slightly bulges forward with respect to the plane connecting the end portions. The upper front decorative portion 326b is inclined so that its lower end moves upward from the horizontal center of the tray unit cover 326 toward both left and right sides, and the horizontal center of the tray unit cover 326 (direction operation) It is formed so that the vertical direction is narrowed from the unit mounting portion 326a side) toward the left and right ends. In the dish unit cover 326, an effect selection left button 331 and an effect selection right button 332 are attached to the upper front dish portion 326b on the left side when viewed from the front.

  The front front side of the dish front decorative portion 326c moves rearward from the center side of the dish unit cover 326 in the left-right direction toward the both left and right sides. It is formed in a curved surface shape such that the intermediate portion is recessed backward with respect to the plane connecting the end portions.

  A lower dish opening 326d penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the front lower dish portion 326c on the left side of the front view, and the lower dish 322 faces forward from the lower dish opening 326d. In the lower front dish portion 326c on the left side when viewed from the front, a lower dish ball removal button 333 projects forward from the lower front surface of the lower dish opening 326d. A lower speaker opening 326e made of a punching metal is formed on the left side of the lower dish opening 326d in the lower front dish part 326c on the left side when viewed from the front. The lower speaker port 326e is located in front of the speaker slit 323b of the dish unit base 323 in a state where it is assembled to the dish unit 320.

  The front lower dish portion 326c on the right side when viewed from the front has a handle insertion port 326f that passes through the front and rear at the lower right corner when viewed from the front and through which the cylinder portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted. A cylinder insertion port 326g that penetrates back and forth above the handle insertion port 326f in the vicinity of the right corner and through which the cylinder lock 211 of the open / close cylinder unit 210 is inserted is formed.

  The dish unit cover 326 has a plate-shaped top plate part 326h extending from the upper end of the dish front upper decoration part 326b on the right side when viewed from the front to the front end of the dish unit base 323, and the top plate part 326h allows Covers the upper right side. The top plate ball removal button 327, the ball lending button 328, the return button 329, and the ball lending return display unit 330 are attached to the top plate portion 326h.

  The dish unit cover 326 includes a flat bottom plate part 326 i that extends from the lower end of the dish front lower decorative part 326 c to the front surface of the dish unit base 323. The bottom side of the dish unit 320 is closed by the bottom plate portion 326i. The bottom plate portion 326i is formed in a step shape so that a portion located below the lower plate 322 is recessed from below to above, and a lower plate ball removing base 335 described later is attached to the portion. In the bottom plate portion 326i, a hole penetrating vertically is formed at a position corresponding to the lower dish ball removal hole 322a of the lower dish 322.

  The dish unit cover 326 opens forward at the portion of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a, and has an installation space 326j in which the rear side of the effect decoration rotator unit 530 (second effect decoration rotator unit 530A) is inserted (accommodated). I have. The dish unit cover 326 includes a lower dish cover part 326k that extends rearward from the left side and the upper side of the lower dish opening 326d and covers the lower dish 322 (see FIG. 44). The lower plate cover part 326k is in contact with the upper end of the left side of the main body standing wall 325b in the lower plate body 325 at the left end, and the left end of the ceiling part 340b in the lower plate cover 340 is in contact with the right end.

[3-3e. Top plate ball removal button]
The upper dish ball removal button 327 of the dish unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The upper dish ball removal button 327 is attached to the top plate portion 326h of the dish unit cover 326 on the right side of the upper dish 321 when viewed from the front. It can be pulled out. Although the detailed illustration of the upper dish ball removal button 327 is omitted, the rear edge side is left and right below the top plate part 326h by a ball removal button holder attached to the lower side of the top plate part 326h of the dish unit cover 326. It is attached rotatably about an axis extending in the direction. The upper end of the upper plate ball removal button 327 is in contact with the lower surface of the front end of the upper plate ball removal lever that extends vertically. The ball removal lever is attached to be slidable in the vertical direction by a ball removal base attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 323 below the upper dish ball removal button 327.

  The ball release lever whose upper end is in contact with the lower surface of the front end of the upper dish ball removal button 327 is in contact with the upper part of the upper dish ball removal slider 327b that is slidably mounted by the dish unit base 323 from above. . The upper dish ball removal slider 327b includes an operation transmission part 327a that protrudes rearward from the rear surface. When the door frame 3 is assembled, the operation transmission part 327a is connected to the opening 323g in the dish unit base 323. It protrudes rearward so as to face, and abuts from below on the operating rod 253c of the ball removing member 253 in the ball feeding unit 250. The upper dish ball removal slider 327b is biased upward by an upper dish ball removal spring 327c, and the biasing force of the upper dish ball removal spring 327c causes the upper dish ball removal slider 327b and the ball removal lever to be biased. An upper pan ball removal button 327 is located at the rising end.

  Therefore, when the upper dish ball removal button 327 is pressed downward against the urging force of the upper dish ball removal spring 327c, the operation transmission part 327a of the upper dish ball removal slider 327b moves downward, and the operation transmission part 327a Since the operating rod 253c of the ball removing member 253 that is in contact with the upper end side also moves relatively downward, the ball removing member 253 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and enters by the partition portion 253a. The partition between the mouth 251a and the ball outlet 251b is released, and they are in communication with each other. Thereby, the game balls in the upper tray 321 are discharged from the ball outlet 251b of the ball feeding unit 250 to the ball outlet guide path 323f of the tray unit 320, and discharged to the lower tray 322 via the lower tray ball supply port 323c. (Supply).

  When the upper dish ball removal button 327 is operated, the lid member 334 closing the lower dish ball removal hole 322a may be moved in conjunction with the upper dish ball removal button 327. Accordingly, when the upper dish ball removal button 327 is operated, the lid member 334 is also moved to open the lower dish ball removal hole 322a, so that the game balls discharged from the upper dish 321 to the lower dish 322 are further removed. It will be discharged | emitted from the hole 322a to the lower dollar box. That is, when the upper plate ball removal button 327 is operated to remove the game ball from the upper plate 321, the game ball of the upper plate 321 is discharged to the dollar box even though the lower plate ball removal button 333 is not operated. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to have a strong illusion that the game ball of the upper plate 321 is directly discharged to the dollar box, thereby making it difficult for the game ball to feel annoying through the lower plate 322. It is possible to concentrate the player on the game (gaming operation of game balls, effect images, etc.) and suppress a decrease in interest. Note that the simultaneous opening of the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 for removing the ball may be performed simultaneously by driving a driving source such as a motor or a solenoid, or may be performed simultaneously by a mechanical link mechanism.

[3-3f. Ball rental button, return button, and ball rental return display section]
The ball lending button 328, the return button 329, and the ball lending return display unit 330 of the dish unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The ball lending button 328, the return button 329, and the ball lending return display unit 330 are, as shown in the drawing, on the right side of the top dish ball removal button 327 in the top plate portion 326h of the dish unit cover 326 in the circular decoration. Installed on.

  The ball lending button 328 is used to insert a predetermined number of game balls into the ball lending machine (not shown) placed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 by inserting a cash or prepaid card and pressing it. The unit 320 is lent out (paid out) into the upper plate 321. When the return button 329 is pressed in a state where the cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine is inserted, the cash or prepaid card is returned after subtracting the rented game balls.

  Although not shown, the ball rental return display unit 330 has a three-digit 7-segment LED disposed below the transparent surface, and the remaining number of cash and prepaid cards inserted into the ball rental machine, or An error code or the like when the ball lending machine breaks down is displayed.

[3-3 g. Production selection left button and production selection right button]
The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 of the dish unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are attached near the right end of the dish unit cover 326 near the effect operation unit attachment part 326a in the front dish upper decoration part 326b on the left side when viewed from the front. The effect selection left button 331 is formed in a triangular shape with one vertex pointing leftward. The effect selection right button 332 is formed in a triangular shape with one vertex directed rightward on the right side of the effect selection left button 331.

  The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are used in the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 of the effect decoration rotating body unit 530, etc. arranged in the game area 5a in front view. When an effect image that prompts the user to select is displayed, a pressing operation can be accepted, and a desired option is selected by operating the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 within a predetermined time. It is.

[3-3h. Bottom dish ball removal button]
The lower dish ball removal button 333 of the dish unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The lower dish ball removal button 333 protrudes forward from the front lower end of the front dish lower decorative part 326c on the left side when viewed from the front, below the lower dish opening 326d in the dish unit cover 326 in front of the lower dish 322. When the lower plate ball removal button 333 is pressed, the lid member 334 closing the lower plate ball removal hole 322a of the lower plate 322 can be rotated, and the lid member 334 is rotated. The lower tray ball removal hole 322a is opened, and the game balls stored in the lower tray 322 can be discharged below the tray unit 320.

  The lower dish ball removal button 333 is slidable in the front-rear direction by a lower dish ball removal base 335 (see FIG. 42B) attached to the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326 on the lower side of the lower dish body 325. Installed on. The lower dish ball removal button 333 is disposed on the left side with respect to the lower dish ball removal hole 322a of the lower dish 322 (see FIG. 28 and the like).

  The lower dish ball removal base 335 is accommodated in a portion formed in a step shape so as to be recessed upward from below at a position below the lower dish 322 in the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326. It is attached to the bottom plate portion 326i. The lower dish ball removal base 335 is formed with a discharge port 335a penetrating vertically in the same size as the lower dish ball removal hole 322a at a position directly below the lower dish ball removal hole 322a of the lower dish 322. . Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the lid member 334 is disposed between the lower dish body 325 and the lower dish ball removal base 335. Accordingly, when the lid member 334 that closes the lower dish ball removal hole 322a of the lower dish 322 is opened, the discharge port 335a of the lower dish ball removal base 335 is also opened, and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a and the discharge port 335a are opened. Are in communication with each other.

  Although not shown, the lid member 334 is attached to the lower dish ball removal base 335 so as to be rotatable around a position on the left side of the lower dish ball removal button 333 in plan view. The lower dish ball removal button 333 is connected to a portion between a portion of the lid member 334 that closes the lower dish ball removal hole 322 a and a portion that is rotatably attached by the lower dish ball removal base 335. As a result, when the lower dish ball removal button 333 is moved in the front-rear direction, the lid member 334 rotates about the vertically extending axis, and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a (discharge port 335a) can be opened and closed.

  Although not shown, the lower dish ball removal base 335 includes a holding device that holds the lower dish ball removal button 333 when the lower dish ball removal button 333 is pushed backward and moved, and a lower dish ball removal button. A lower dish ball spring for biasing 333 forward is attached. When the lower dish ball removal button 333 protrudes forward and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is closed by the lid member 334, when the lower dish ball removal button 333 is pressed and moved backward, the lid member 334 is rotated. The lower dish ball removal hole 322a is moved to move, and the lower dish ball removal button 333 is held by the holding device and remains in the rearward movement state. In this state, even if the lower dish ball removal button 333 is released, the lower dish ball removal button 333 does not move forward, and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is maintained open. The game balls in 322 can be discharged to the lower side of the dish unit 320 through the lower dish ball removal hole 322a and the discharge port 335a.

  When the lower dish ball removal button 333 is held by the holding device and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is opened, when the lower dish ball removal button 333 is pressed backward, the holding by the holding device is released. In this state, if the lower dish ball removal button 333 is released, the lower dish ball removal button 333 moves forward by the biasing force of the lower dish ball removal spring, returns to the protruding state, and the lid member 334 rotates. The lower dish ball removal hole 322a (discharge port 335a) is closed. Thereby, a game ball can be stored in the lower plate 322.

  In addition to the pressing operation of the lower dish ball removal button 333, the lid member 334 closing the lower dish ball removal hole 322a (discharge port 335a) is also moved by the pressing operation of the upper dish ball removal button 327. The lower dish ball removal hole 322a may be opened. Thus, when it is desired to discharge the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 to the dollar box disposed below the plate unit 320, the dollar box can be operated via the lower plate 322 only by operating the upper plate ball removal button 327. Can be discharged, and the labor involved in ball removal can be simplified. Note that the simultaneous opening of the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 for removing the ball may be performed simultaneously by driving a driving source such as a motor or a solenoid, or may be performed simultaneously by a mechanical link mechanism.

[3-4. Overall structure of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the effect decoration rotating body unit 530 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 to 55 and the like. FIG. 48A is a front view of the effect operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 48B is a right side view of the effect operation unit. 49A is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 49B is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 50 is an explanatory view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. 51 is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 48A, and FIG. 52 is a cross-sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. 53A is a cross-sectional view taken along line FF in FIG. 48B, and FIG. 53B is an enlarged view of a portion A in FIG. FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the front after being disassembled for each main member, and FIG. 55 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the rear after being disassembled as the main members. The effect decoration rotator unit 530 is attached to the front portion of the dish unit 320 at the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and can be pressed by the player and can also present an effect image to the player. It can be done.

  The effect decoration rotator unit 530 has a circular outer shape and a transparent central portion excluding the outer periphery, and an operation button 410 that can be pressed by the player, surrounds the outer periphery of the operation button 410, and an effect of the plate unit cover 326. A frame-shaped frame unit 415 attached to the operation unit attachment portion 326a, a decorative substrate unit 420 disposed behind the operation button 410 and capable of illuminating and decorating the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415; The base unit 430 is attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415, and the operation button 410 and the decorative board unit 420 are attached to the front surface. The base unit 430 is attached to the base unit 430 so as to be visible from the player side through the operation button 410. Door frame side effect display device 460 capable of displaying a cage effect image , And a.

[3-4a. Manual operation button]
The operation buttons 410 of the effect decoration rotator unit 530 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 56 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button as seen from the front, and FIG. 56 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button as seen from the back. The operation button 410 is formed in a circular shape whose outer shape is slightly smaller in diameter than the height in the vertical direction of the dish unit 320, and the center side excluding the outer peripheral edge is formed to be transparent. The operation button 410 has a transparent button lens 411 formed in a curved surface shape (a part of the spherical surface) so that the outer periphery is circular and the center side bulges forward, and on the front side of the outer periphery of the button lens 411. An annular button frame 412 is attached, and a cylindrical button base 413 is attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer periphery of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 and the button base 413 are formed of members that are difficult to transmit light.

  The button lens 411 is formed with a substantially constant thickness as a whole. The button lens 411 is formed in a smooth curved surface with no irregularities on the surface side. The button lens 411 extends in a predetermined length from the back surface to the center side (inner side) at a position on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412 in a W-shaped cross section, and is arranged in the circumferential direction. One button decoration part 411a and a line extending within a predetermined angular range in the circumferential direction while extending on the axis toward the center side in a state of being recessed in a circular arc shape from the back surface at a position on the outer peripheral side than the first button decoration part 411a And a plurality of (six) second button decoration portions 411b.

  As shown in the figure, the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 extends from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 to the center side in a state assembled to the operation button 410. Longer than the center.

  Each of the plurality of second button decoration portions 411b of the button lens 411 extends in an arc shape on the same circumference, and three are formed on each of the left and right sides. These second button decoration portions 411 b are formed so as to face the frame opening 412 a of the button frame 412, and protrude forward so that the front side is substantially flush with the front surface of the button frame 412.

  The button lens 411 exhibits a lens effect in which light is refracted by the concave and convex portions having a W-shaped cross section or a circular arc shape formed on the back surface in the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button decorative portion 411b. Therefore, the rear side is not clearly visible.

  The button frame 412 is formed in an annular shape, and includes a plurality of (six) frame openings 412 a penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in a circular shape with a predetermined length in the circumferential direction. Six frame openings 412a are provided on each of the left and right sides, and correspond to the six second button decoration portions 411b of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 includes a plating layer having a metallic luster on the surface.

  The button base 413 includes a substantially cylindrical main body 413a that extends short in the front-rear direction, an annular flange 413b that protrudes outward from the front end of the main body 413a, and a main body 413a from the rear side of the flange 413b. A plurality of (four) guide bosses 413c projecting rearward along the outer circumference of the main body 413a at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and along the outer circumference of the main body 413a from the rear side of the flange 413b. A plurality of (three) detection pieces 413d that protrude rearward in a band shape and penetrate the flange portion 413b in the front-rear direction outside the main body portion 413a and have a predetermined length along the outer periphery. A plurality of (six) base openings 413e extending in the circumferential direction, and extending in a cylindrical shape from the front end of the main body 413a to the front, the front end being the inner surface of the button lens 411 And a, an inner extending portion 413f are narrowed inward (central side) along.

  The outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 and the button frame 412 are attached to the outer peripheral surface of the inner extending portion 413f and the front surface of the flange portion 413b in the button base 413. The four guide boss portions 413c are respectively disposed at portions corresponding to the four corners of the upper, lower, left, and right with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body portion 413a. These four guide boss portions 413c are slidably inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430, respectively. The three detection pieces 413d are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction so as to be arranged two on the upper side and one on the lower side with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body 413a. These three detection pieces 413d are detected by the press detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430 when the operation button 410 is pressed.

  The six base openings 413 e are provided on each of the left and right sides, and correspond to the second button decoration part 411 b of the button lens 411 and the frame opening 412 a of the button frame 412. In the portion of the base opening 413e in the button base 413, a part of the main body 413a and the inner extension 413f is recessed inward from the outer peripheral side. The inner extension portion 413f has an inner diameter of the front end that is narrowed inward substantially equal to the inner diameter of the button frame 412.

  The operation button 410 has a front surface that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) and is formed to be transparent, and the door frame side effect display device 460 disposed on the rear side. Can be viewed from the front. The operation button 410 has four guide boss portions 413 c slidably inserted into the holding holes 431 b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430, and the operation button springs 438 inserted into the holding holes of the unit base 431 at 431 b. It is urged forward by. The operation button 410 is further prevented from moving forward by the urging force of the operation button spring 438 of the base unit 430, and the front side of the outer peripheral edge abuts on the frame unit 415. As a result, the rear end moves backward until it comes into contact with the front surface of the base unit 430. When the operation button 410 is pressed and moved backward, at least one of the three detection pieces 413d is detected by the press detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430. The operation button 410 is operated by the detection of the detection piece 413d by the press detection sensor 440.

  The operation button 410 is a first button decoration formed over the entire circumference so as to extend from the inner peripheral end of the button frame 412 to the center side of the transparent button lens 411 in a state where the effect decoration rotary body unit 530 is assembled. By the portion 411a, the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 of the base unit 430 can be made difficult to see from the player side.

  Further, the operation button 410 has a cylindrical button base 413 whose front end opening is closed by a button lens 411 and a button frame 412, and the operation button 410 is attached to the outer periphery of the button lens 411 by the button frame 412. With respect to the outer diameter of 410, a transparent portion whose rear side is visible is formed so as to be constricted inward from the outer periphery. The presence of the button frame 412 also makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 of the base unit 430.

  When the operation button 410 is assembled to the effect decoration rotary unit 530, the rear end of the tubular button base 413 (main body 413 a) passes through the inner peripheral side of the decoration substrate unit 420 than the front surface of the decoration substrate unit 420. It will be in the state of protruding backward. As a result, the light emitted forward from the first LEDs 422a and 423a and the second LEDs 422b and 423b mounted on the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 of the decorative substrate unit 420 is displayed. It is possible to prevent leakage from the outside of the base 413 to the inside, and the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inside of the base unit 430. It is possible to prevent light emitted forward from the LED mounted on the decorative substrate 436 from leaking from the inside to the outside of the button base 413. Accordingly, the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b of the decoration board unit 420 and the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button of the base unit 430. The LEDs mounted on the lower inner decorative board 436 can prevent the portions other than the light emitting decoration target from being decorated with light emission, and can perform the light emission decoration with good appearance.

[3-4b. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the effect decoration rotating body unit 530 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 55 and the like. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front side to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320 so as to surround the outer periphery from the front side of the operation button 410, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The frame unit 415 has an outer shape that matches the front end side of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a.

  The frame unit 415 includes a frame-shaped frame body 416 having a circular central opening 416a attached to the rendering operation unit attachment part 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320, and the frame main body 416 on the left and right sides of the central opening 416a. A pair of translucent frame side lenses 417 attached from the rear side, and a translucent frame top lens 418 attached from the front side to the frame body 416 above the central opening 416a. Yes.

  The frame body 416 has a circular central opening 416a that is smaller in diameter than the outer diameter of the operation button 410 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and penetrates in the front-rear direction on both the left and right sides of the central opening 416a. A plurality of (six) outer peripheral openings 416b extending in a circular arc shape along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416b, and a notch 416c notched with a predetermined width on the upper front surface of the central opening 416a. It is equipped with. The central opening 416a is formed to have substantially the same diameter as the outer diameter of the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410. Thereby, the front end side of the flange part 413b of the button base 413 in the operation button 410 can contact | abut to the outer periphery rear side of the frame opening part 412a.

  Six outer peripheral openings 416b are provided in three each on the left and right outer sides of the central opening 416a, and are closed by a frame side lens 417 from the rear side. The notch 416c penetrates also in the front-rear direction, and the frame top lens 418 is fitted from the front side.

  The frame main body 416 includes a substantially cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416d that extends rearward from a position slightly outside the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a. The inner cylindrical portion 416d extends rearward from a position between the central opening 416a and the outer peripheral opening 416b, and a portion corresponding to the notch 416c is cut away. The inner cylindrical portion 416d has the first LED 422a and the second LED 422b on the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423 of the decoration board unit 420 in a state where the production decoration rotating body unit 530 is assembled. , 423b, and partitions the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b (see FIG. 52).

  Furthermore, the frame main body 416 extends outward at the upper left and right sides of the outer periphery, and includes a pair of attachment portions 416e attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. The frame main body 416 (the effect decoration rotator unit 530) is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 in the plate unit 320 at the left and right sides of the pair of attachment portions 416e and the cutout portion 416c.

  The frame body 416 is substantially entirely metal except for a portion having the same width as the notch 416c on the side opposite to the notch 416c side (the side on which the frame top lens 418 is attached) with the central opening 416a in between. A glossy plating layer is formed.

  The frame side lens 417 closes the outer peripheral openings 416b formed on the left and right sides of the frame main body 416 from the rear side. The front side of the frame side lens 417 is formed on a smooth surface without irregularities, and a plurality of irregularities along the periphery of the central opening 416a are formed on the rear side (see FIGS. 53 and 63). The light is refracted by the plurality of irregularities so that the rear side of the frame side lens 417 cannot be seen.

  The frame top lens 418 has a substantially quadrangular outer shape so as to be fitted into the notch 416c of the frame body 416 from the front side. The frame top lens 418 has a smooth front surface. The frame top lens 418 has a plurality of projections and recesses extending in a zigzag shape along the periphery of the central opening 416a on the rear surface side, and is arranged in a plurality of rows in the radial direction of the central opening 416a (see FIGS. 51 and 63). . The light is refracted by the plurality of irregularities so that the rear side of the frame top lens 418 cannot be seen.

  The frame unit 415 is in a state in which the production decoration rotating body unit 530 is assembled, and the pair of frame side lenses 417 are arranged on the operation button left outside decoration board 422 and the operation button right outside decoration board 423 of the decoration board unit 420, respectively. , 423b, and the frame top lens 418 is positioned in front of the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 of the base unit 430. The second LEDs 422b, 423b and the like mounted on the frame top lens 418 can be illuminated. ing.

[3-4c. Decorative board unit]
The decoration board unit 420 of the effect decoration rotating body unit 530 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the decorative substrate unit of the effect operation unit as seen from the front. The decorative board unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the base unit 430 below the frame unit 415, and can light-decorate the second button decoration part 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. The decorative rotating body unit 530 can be vibrated.

  The decorative substrate unit 420 includes a C-shaped substrate base 421 whose upper side is open, an operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and an operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 attached to the front surfaces of the left and right sides of the substrate base 421, respectively. And a vibration motor 424 (heat source) attached to the lower part of the front surface of the substrate base 421 and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the substrate base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424.

  The substrate base 421 is formed so that the inner peripheral side is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the cylindrical main body 413 a in the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and the outer peripheral side is larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 413 b in the button base 413. In addition, it is formed smaller than the outer diameter of the frame unit 415.

  The operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The operation button left outer decorative board 422 has a plurality of first LEDs 422a mounted on the front side along the inner circumference of the board base 421, and a radially outer side of the plurality of first LEDs 422a on the inner circumference of the board base 421. And a plurality of second LEDs 422b mounted along. The operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The operation button right outer decorative board 423 is provided on the front side with a plurality of first LEDs 423a mounted along the inner circumference of the board base 421, and on the inner circumference of the board base 421 at a radially outer side than the plurality of first LEDs 423a. And a plurality of second LEDs 423b mounted along. The operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are white on both front and rear sides.

  The vibration motor 424 has an eccentric weight 424a attached to the rotation shaft, and can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a.

  In a state where the decoration board unit 420 is assembled to the effect decoration rotary body unit 530, the rear end side of the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is inserted inside the board base 421. In the decorative board unit 420, the first LEDs 422 a and 423 a on the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are located behind the second button decorative portion 411 b of the operation button 410, and The LEDs 422b and 423b are located behind the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. In the state assembled in the effect decoration rotating body unit 530, a frame is provided between the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423 and the second LEDs 422b and 423b, respectively. The inner cylinder part 416d of the unit 415 is located (see FIG. 52).

  Therefore, the decoration board unit 420 emits and decorates only the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 by the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a on the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423. In addition, only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be illuminated and decorated by the light from the respective second LEDs 422b and 423b.

  The decorative substrate unit 420 can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a of the vibration motor 424, and can vibrate the effect decoration rotating body unit 530 as a whole.

[3-4d. Base unit]
The base unit 430 of the effect decoration rotating body unit 530 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 58A is a perspective view of the base unit of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 58B is a perspective view of the base unit of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view in which the base unit of the effect operation unit is disassembled and viewed from the front. FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view in which the base unit of the effect operation unit is disassembled and viewed from behind. The base unit 430 of the effect decoration rotating body unit 530 is attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415 while the operation button 410 is attached to be movable in the front-rear direction.

  The base unit 430 is attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415 and has four through holes 431a penetrating in a substantially square shape extending vertically in the center portion, and four stop holes opened forward on the outside of the through hole 431a. A ring-shaped unit base 431 having a holding hole 431b, a translucent operation button decorative member 432 which is attached so as to cover the through-hole 431a on the front surface of the unit base 431, and which extends in a short tube shape in the front-rear direction; The operation button left inner decoration board 433 and the operation button right inner decoration board 434 attached to the left and right sides of the through hole 431a on the front surface of the unit base 431 behind the button inner decoration member 432, and the operation button inner decoration member 432, respectively. The operations attached to the upper and lower sides of the through hole 431a on the front surface of the unit base 431 at the rear. A button on the decorative substrate 435 and the operation buttons under the decorative substrate 436, and a frame top lens decorative board 437 attached to the upper front portion of the unit base 431, a.

  The base unit 430 includes four operation button springs 438 inserted into the four holding holes 431b of the unit base 431, three sensor holders 439 attached to the front surface of the unit base 431, and each sensor holder 439. Three press detection sensors 440 that are respectively attached and detect the pressing operation of the operation button 410, a presentation operation unit relay board 441 attached to the rear side of the unit base 431, and a rear side of the presentation operation unit relay board 441. And a relay board cover 442 attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 so as to cover it.

  The unit base 431 has a substantially circular outer shape and is slightly smaller than the outer shape of the frame unit 415. The unit base 431 penetrates back and forth in the center, and is formed with a substantially rectangular through hole 431a extending vertically. The through hole 431a is sized to fit within the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and is sized to allow the display screen of the door frame side effect display device 460 to be inserted. A door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 431.

  The four holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 are formed at positions corresponding to the four guide boss portions 413c of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 at the four corners on the top, bottom, left, and right outside the through hole 431a. These holding holes 431b are formed so that the inner diameter is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the guide boss portion 413c, and the guide boss portion 413c can be slidably inserted.

  More specifically, the upper left holding hole 431b of the four holding holes 431b is from the center line extending vertically through the center of the unit base 431 (the center of the operation button 410) to the center of the unit base 431. Thus, it is formed at a position rotated about 30 degrees counterclockwise. The holding hole 431b on the upper right side of the four holding holes 431b is a clockwise direction with respect to the center of the unit base 431 from a center line extending vertically through the center of the unit base 431 (the center of the operation button 410). It is formed at a position rotated about 47 degrees. On the other hand, two holding holes 431b arranged on the lower side of the four holding holes 431b are respectively formed at positions opposite to the center of the unit base 431 with respect to the upper two holding holes 431b. .

  The unit base 431 includes a light-shielding wall portion 431c that protrudes forward in a flat plate shape from between a part to which the operation button upper inner decoration board 435 is attached and a part to which the frame top lens decoration board 437 is attached, in the upper front portion. ing. The light shielding wall 431c allows the frame top lens 418 to be decorated with light emission only by the frame top lens decoration substrate 437.

  The operation button internal decoration member 432 is formed in a curved surface shape so that the substantially cylindrical peripheral wall portion 432a that extends short in the front-rear direction and the front end side of the peripheral wall portion 432a are closed and the center protrudes forward. A front plate portion 432b, a rectangular opening 432c that passes through the front plate portion 432b in the front-rear direction and extends vertically, a flange portion 432d that extends outward from the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 432a, and a flange portion 432d And a plurality of mounting bosses 432e that are attached to the unit base 431.

  The peripheral wall portion 432 a of the operation button inner decoration member 432 has an outer diameter that is substantially the same as the inner diameter of the button frame 412 in the operation button 410. The opening 432c penetrating through the front plate portion 432b is formed in substantially the same size as the display screen of the door frame side effect display device 460.

  In the operation button inner decoration member 432, the outer peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 432a and the front surface of the front plate portion 432b are formed on a smooth surface without unevenness.

  The operation button inner decorative member 432 is formed on the inner peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 432a, is recessed in an arc shape and extends in the front-rear direction, and includes a plurality of first button inner decorative portions 432f provided in the circumferential direction. , Formed on the rear surface of the front plate portion 432b, bulging in an arc shape, extending in an odd octagonal shape centering on the center of the front plate portion 432b, and concentrically centering on the center of the front plate portion 432b A plurality of second button interior decoration portions 432g (see FIG. 63). The second button interior decoration portion 432g is formed to have a portion extending in parallel with the four inner peripheries of the opening 432c.

  The operation button internal decoration member 432 is formed of a transparent member. The operation button inner decorative member 432 is not clearly visible behind the lens due to the lens effect of the first button inner decorative portion 432f of the peripheral wall portion 432a and the second button inner decorative portion 432g of the front plate portion 432b. .

  The operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 are each mounted with a plurality of LEDs. By making it emit light, the decorative member 432 in the operation button can be decorated with light emission. By decorating the operation button interior decoration member 432 with light emission, the inside of the operation button 410 or the outside of the door frame side effect display device 460 can be light emission decorated.

  A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decoration substrate 437, and by emitting these LEDs, the frame top lens 418 in the frame unit 415 can be decorated with light emission.

  The LEDs mounted on the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, the operation button lower inner decoration board 436, and the frame top lens decoration board 437 are respectively full color LEDs. It is said that. The operation button left inner decoration board 433, operation button right inner decoration board 434, operation button upper inner decoration board 435, operation button lower inner decoration board 436, and frame top lens decoration board 437 have a white front surface.

  The operation button spring 438 is a coil spring and is inserted into the four holding holes 431b in the unit base 431 from the front. The operation button spring 438 has a rear end in contact with the bottom surface of the holding hole 431b and a front end protruding rearward from the main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 when assembled in the effect decoration rotator unit 530. It abuts on the rear end of the guide boss portion 413c. These operation button springs 438 urge the operation buttons 410 forward.

  The three press detection sensors 440 are arranged at positions corresponding to the three detection pieces 413 d of the button base 413 in the operation button 410. Specifically, three pressure detection sensors 440 are arranged on the front surface of the unit base 431, one on the lower left side of the upper left holding hole 431b, the other on the lower right side of the upper right holding hole 431b, and the other on the lower left side. Are attached to the lower right side of the holding holes 431b via sensor holders 439, respectively. The three press detection sensors 440 are attached at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction around the center of the unit base 431. These three press detection sensors 440 can detect the three detection pieces 413 d of the operation button 410.

  The effect operation unit relay board 441 is attached to the left side (right side of the front view) of the through hole 431a in the rear view on the rear side of the unit base 431. The production operation unit relay board 441 includes an operation button left outer decoration board 422, an operation button right outer decoration board 423, a vibration motor 424, an operation button left inner decoration board 433, an operation button right inner decoration board 434, and an operation button upper inner decoration board. 435, operation button lower inner decoration board 436, frame top lens decoration board 437, press detection sensor 440, door frame side effect display device 460, and connection to the door body relay board (not shown) of the door frame base unit 100. It is for relaying.

  The relay board cover 442 extends leftward from the lower end of the portion covering the rear side of the effect operation unit relay board 441, and includes a leg portion 442a attached to the lower rear portion of the unit base 431. The leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 has a bottom surface extending substantially horizontally when assembled to the door frame 3 and a bottom plate portion 326i forming the bottom surface of the plate unit cover 326 in the plate unit 320. A slight gap is formed (see FIG. 26). As a result, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed or struck downward, until the lower surface of the leg portion 442a contacts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326, the frame unit 415 The impact can be absorbed by the mounting portion 416e and the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 being bent downward. After the lower surface of the leg portion 442a contacts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the effect decoration rotator unit 530 is restricted, and the attachment portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the effect operation unit attachment portion of the dish unit cover 326 are controlled. It is possible to prevent an undue force from acting on 326a and the like and to prevent them from being damaged.

[3-4e. Door frame side effect display device]
The door frame side effect display device 460 of the effect decoration rotator unit 530 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 54 and 55. The door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 so that the display screen faces forward from the opening 432c of the operation button interior decoration member 432 in the base unit 430, and the operation button 410 is transparent. The display screen can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the center portion, and the effect image can be displayed on the display screen.

  The door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 461 having a square display screen on the front surface and the liquid crystal display device 461, and attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430. And a mounting bracket 462 having a bottomed rectangular tube shape. The liquid crystal display device 461 is a commercially available color liquid crystal display having an aspect ratio of 16: 9 and a diagonal length of about 4.3 inches. The mounting bracket 462 has an outer periphery formed in the same shape as the outer periphery of the liquid crystal display device 461, and is attached so that the bottom of the bottomed cylindrical shape comes into contact with the rear surface of the liquid crystal display device 461.

  When the door frame side effect display device 460 is assembled in the effect decoration rotating body unit 530, the liquid crystal display device 461 penetrates the through hole 431a of the unit base 431 from the rear side, and the peripheral wall portion of the operation button internal decoration member 432 It protrudes into 432a (see FIG. 51). The front surface (display screen) of the liquid crystal display device 461 is located in the vicinity of the front end of the peripheral wall portion 432a of the operation button inner decorative member 432, and faces forward from an opening 432c penetrating the front plate portion 432b.

  Door frame side effect display device 460 can display a predetermined effect image based on a control signal from peripheral control board 1510 in liquid crystal display device 461.

[3-4f. Effect of production operation unit]
The effects of the effect decoration rotator unit 530 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram showing a state where an operation button is pressed in the cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit of FIG. FIG. 62 (a) is a view of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and a part of the operation button is cut away so as to be hidden by the first button decoration portion or the button frame of the operation button. It is explanatory drawing which shows a site | part, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in sectional drawing of a production | presentation operation unit. FIG. 63A is an explanatory view showing the appearance of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 63B is an explanatory view of the appearance of the rendering operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. It is.

  The effect decoration rotator unit 530 of the present embodiment can show the effect image to the player according to the game state that changes when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and the player It is possible to entertain and entertain the player in the presentation presented to the player by operating the operation button 410.

  The effect decoration rotator unit 530 is formed so that the overall height is substantially the same as the height of the lower portion of the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. The effect decoration rotating body unit 530 has a full width slightly larger than 1/3 of the full width of the door frame 3. The effect decoration rotator unit 530 is arranged at the center in the left-right direction below the game area 5a (the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110) in a front view.

  In the effect decoration rotating body unit 530, the upper part of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326 a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320. When the effect decoration rotator unit 530 is attached to the dish unit 320, the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 serving as the bottom surface is between the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320. A gap is formed. That is, the effect decoration rotating body unit 530 is attached only to the upper portion of the plate unit 320 and is attached in a suspended state.

  In the effect decoration rotating body unit 530, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner periphery of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a. As installed. As a result, in the effect decoration rotator unit 530, the central axis CL of the transparent operation button 410 bulging forward in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical shape) is at an angle of 63 degrees with respect to the vertical line. Therefore, it is inclined to move upward as it goes forward. As a result, when a player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 in order to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the player's head is placed above the plate unit 320 (production decoration rotating body unit 530). Since the game board 5 is located in front of the center of the game area 5a, the central axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the head of the player. Therefore, when the player drops his / her line of sight from the game area 5a to the effect decoration rotator unit 530 (operation button 410), the operation button 410 is as possible for the front view (projection view from a direction parallel to the central axis CL). Thus, the operation button 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 in the operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state.

  In the effect decoration rotating body unit 530, the four guide boss portions 413c of the operation button 410 are slidably inserted into the four holding holes 431b of the base unit 430, and are urged forward by the operation button spring 438. Yes. In the normal state (the state in which the operation button 410 is not pressed), the effect decoration rotating body unit 530 has the front end of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 by the urging force of the operation button spring 438. 415 is in contact with a portion of the rear surface of the frame body 416 near the central opening 416a.

  In the normal state, the effect decoration rotating body unit 530 has a central side (center axis CL side) from the vicinity of the inner periphery of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410 to the front from the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415. It protrudes. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (substantially spherical shape) in the operation button 410, a portion that protrudes forward from the inner periphery (inside) of the button frame 412 is formed. The frame unit 415 protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 (see FIG. 51 and the like).

  Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415 is about 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (the front end) with respect to the central axis CL direction of the operation button 410 is the frame unit. It protrudes about 4 cm forward from the front surface of 415.

  In a normal state, when the player presses the operation button 410 of the effect decoration rotator unit 530, the operation button 410 moves rearward along the central axis CL against the urging force of the operation button spring 438. When the rear end of the operation button 410 comes into contact with the front surface of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, the backward movement is restricted and the backward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, the button lens 411 bulging forward in a curved surface shape (substantially spherical shape) is pressed.

  The operation button 410 has a very large outer diameter compared to the operation buttons for production provided in the conventional pachinko machine, so the periphery of the button lens 411 away from the center is pressed. There is a high possibility of being. More specifically, the operation buttons for effects in the conventional pachinko machine are attached so that the central axis thereof extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, whereas the operations of the effect decoration rotating body unit 530 of the present embodiment are performed. Since the button 410 is attached with the central axis CL inclined with respect to the vertical line, when the player presses the operation button 410 from above as in the conventional pachinko machine, as shown by the white arrow in FIG. In addition, the part away from the central axis CL of the operation button 410 is pressed.

  By the way, the operation buttons for performance in the conventional pachinko machine are formed with a flat surface on which the player presses, so when the operation button is enlarged with the flat part being pressed When pressing the part off the center of the operation button, the surface to be pressed is tilted so that the pressed part is retracted first, and the operation button cannot be receded straight, There is a possibility that the pressing operation cannot be performed.

  On the other hand, the operation button 410 of the effect decoration rotator unit 530 of the present embodiment has a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) in which a part (button lens 411) pressed by the player bulges forward. Therefore, when a pressing operation is performed at a position away from the center of the operation button 410, the force is distributed over the entire operation button 410, making it difficult for the operation button 410 to tilt, and the operation button 410 moves straight back. can do. Therefore, no matter which position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly retracted without tilting, so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected and the operation button 410 is pressed. The operation to operate can be fully enjoyed.

  The effect decoration rotator unit 530 has the vibration motor 424 attached to the lower front surface of the substrate base 421 in the decoration substrate unit 420 and, as described above, only the upper part so that the effect decoration rotator unit 530 is suspended. Is attached to the production operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326. Therefore, when the vibration 424a is rotated by the vibration motor 424 to generate vibration, vibration is generated at a part farthest from the attached part. Therefore, the entire effect decoration rotator unit 530 can be vibrated greatly (strongly), and the vibration can be transmitted to the player who is touching the effect decoration rotator unit 530. Since the vibration motor 424 is disposed immediately below the position where the player can easily perform the pressing operation (the position of the white arrow in FIG. 61), the vibration motor 424 is strong against the player who is pressing the operation button 410. The vibration can be transmitted, and the player can be surprised and entertained.

  Further, the effect decoration rotator unit 530 is attached to the dish unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 forming the lower surface and the dish unit cover 326. Since a gap is formed between the bottom plate portion 326i and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, when the operation button 410 is strongly pressed or hit, the bottom surface of the leg portion 442a is in contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i. The impact can be absorbed by the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, etc. being bent downward. After the lower surface of the leg portion 442a comes into contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the effect decoration rotator unit 530 is restricted, and the attachment unit 416e of the frame unit 415 and the effect operation unit attachment of the plate unit cover 326 are performed. It is possible to avoid an unreasonable force from acting on the portion 326a and the like, and it is possible to prevent the production decoration rotary unit 530 and the like from being damaged. Therefore, even when the player presses the operation button 410 with a strong force when the player presents an effect of pressing the operation button 410 of the effect decoration rotating body unit 530, the operation button 410 or the effect is displayed. Since the decorative rotating body unit 530 and the like are not damaged, it is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to the damage, to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player, and to prevent damage to the game hall side. Increase in burden can be suppressed.

  As described above, the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 to be pressed by the player is formed in a curved surface shape projecting forward (a part of the shape of a substantially spherical surface), and thus a flat plate shape. Compared to the case, the strength and rigidity are high, and even if it is strongly struck, the impact can be distributed to the entire button lens 411 and is not easily damaged.

  As shown in FIG. 63, the effect decoration rotating body unit 530 includes a button lens 411, a frame side lens 417, a frame top lens 418, and an operation button decoration member 432, which are made of transparent members. Decorations such as first button decoration part 411a, second button decoration part 411b, first button decoration part 432f, and second button decoration part 432g formed on the back side are on the front side (player side) ). Since the light is refracted in a complicated manner because the thickness of the plate is changed, the rear side is difficult to see through the portion where the bumpy decoration is formed.

  The effect decoration rotator unit 530 includes the first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 to the center side of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, and thus the unevenness of the first button decoration portion 411a. With this decoration, it is possible to make it difficult to see the rear at the outer peripheral portion of the portion that is inside the button lens 411. Behind the portion where the first button decoration portion 411a is formed (backward in the direction of the central axis CL), the inner peripheral surface of the body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the peripheral wall portion of the operation button inner decoration member 432 A gap between the outer peripheral surface of the operation button 432a is positioned, and the outer periphery of the operation button inner decorative member 432 is moved from the front side (player side) by the first button decoration portion 411a positioned in front of the gap. It can be difficult to see. Thereby, even if the operation button 410 that can be pressed is provided with the operation button decoration member 432 whose position is fixed, the appearance of the operation button 410 can be prevented from deteriorating. The player can be prevented from feeling uncomfortable, and the operation button decoration member 432 can be disposed in the transparent operation button 410 without any problem, and the appearance of the operation button 410 can be improved.

  More specifically, the effect decoration rotator unit 530 includes an operation button decoration member 432 of the base unit 430 by the first button decoration part 411a, the second button decoration part 411b, and the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410. The unit base 431, the decorative board unit 420, and the like on the rear side (back side) outside the outer periphery of the player are formed so as not to be seen from the player side through the transparent button lens 411. Specifically, in FIG. 62, the cross hatched part surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line is hidden from the player side. As described above, since the operation button 410 includes the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like, the outside and the back side of the operation button inner decoration member 432 are hidden from view. Therefore, the appearance of the operation button 410 and, as a result, the effect decoration rotating body unit 530 can be improved.

  In the effect decoration rotating body unit 530, the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410 extends toward the central axis CL of the operation button 410 and is arranged in the circumferential direction. Thus, the second button interior decoration portion 432g formed on the front plate portion 432b of the operation button interior decoration member 432 disposed on the inner rear side of the operation button 410 extends in an odd octagonal shape centering on the central axis CL. As shown in FIG. 63, the concave and convex lines of the first button decorative portion 411a and the concave and convex lines of the second button decorative portion 432g intersect as shown in FIG. The decoration can be shown to the player.

  In the effect decoration rotating body unit 530, the first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 432g are separated from each other in the front-rear direction (the direction in which the central axis CL extends). By the second button interior decoration portion 432g, a three-dimensional geometric pattern with depth can be shown to the player, and the decoration including the inside of the operation button 410 can be enjoyed.

  Further, in the effect decoration rotating body unit 530, since the first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 432g are separated from each other in the front-rear direction, the first button decoration part 411a is moved when the position of the player's eyes moves. Since the degree of overlap between the concavo-convex line and the concavo-convex line of the second button interior decoration portion 432g changes, the moving decoration can be shown to the player and the player can be entertained.

  In this way, the effect decoration rotator unit 530 plays a decoration with movement and three-dimensional effect by the first button decoration portion 411a of the operation button 410 and the second button decoration portion 432g of the operation button decoration member 432. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 having high appealing power can be obtained.

  The effect decoration rotator unit 530 is within the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412) and behind the operation button decoration member 432, the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, and the operation button. The upper inner decoration board 435 and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 are arranged, and by emitting a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face thereof, the operation button inner decoration member 432 in the operation button 410 emits light. Can be decorated. That is, the operation button 410 can be illuminated and decorated by the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436. The LEDs mounted on the front surfaces of the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 are as shown in FIG. When viewed from the direction in which the central axis CL extends, the operation button 410 is disposed inside the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413, so that light from them does not leak outside the main body 413a. Only the inside of the operation button 410 can be appropriately decorated with light emission.

  The effect decoration rotator unit 530 has the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 in the decoration substrate unit 420 behind the second button decoration portion 411b facing the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the operation button 410. The first LED 422a and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decoration board 423 are arranged, and the six second button decoration portions 411b of the operation button 410 are illuminated and decorated by causing the first LEDs 422a and 423a to emit light. Can do. As shown in FIG. 52, the first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are formed of a cylindrical main body 413a in the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and a frame unit. 415 is located between the cylindrical inner cylinder portion 416d of the frame main body 416, and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not leak to the inside of the main body portion 413a or the outer side of the inner cylinder portion 416d. Only the second button decoration portion 411b of the button 410 can be appropriately decorated for light emission.

  Further, the effect decoration rotator unit 530 has the second LED 422b and the operation button right outside on the operation button left outside decoration substrate 422 behind the frame side lens 417 facing the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415. The second LED 423b of the decorative substrate 423 is disposed, and the frame side lens 417 can be illuminated and decorated by causing the second LEDs 422b and 423b to emit light. The second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are disposed between the cylindrical inner cylinder 416d of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame main body 416. The light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylindrical portion 416d or the outside of the frame main body 416, and only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be appropriately decorated to emit light. .

  In the effect decoration rotator unit 530, the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 in the base unit 430 is disposed behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415, and a plurality of elements are mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decoration substrate 437. By emitting the LED, the frame top lens 418 can be decorated. A flat light-shielding wall 431c projects forward from the lower side of the base unit 430 where the frame top lens decorative substrate 437 of the unit base 431 is attached to the vicinity of the rear of the lower end of the frame top lens 418. The light from the LED on the top lens decoration substrate 437 does not leak to the operation button 410 or the frame side lens 417 side, and only the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 can be decorated with good light emission.

[3-4g. Overall Configuration of Second Embodiment of Production Operation Unit]
Next, the second effect decoration rotator unit 530A, which is the second embodiment of the effect decoration rotator unit 530, will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 64A is a front view of a second effect operation unit that is different from the effect operation units of FIGS. 48 to 63, and FIG. 64B is a right side view of the second effect operation unit. FIG. 65A is a perspective view of the second performance operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 65B is a perspective view of the second performance operation unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. FIG. 67 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line GG in FIG. FIG. 68 is a cross-sectional view taken along line HH in FIG. 69A is a cross-sectional view taken along the line II in FIG. 64B, and FIG. 69B is an enlarged view of a portion A in FIG. FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the second effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the second effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. FIG.

  The second effect decoration rotator unit 530A can be attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit 320 in place of the effect decoration rotator unit 530 described above. The second effect decoration rotator unit 530A can be pressed by the player and can present an effect image to the player, similarly to the effect decoration rotator unit 530. Hereinafter, in the second effect decoration rotator unit 530A, the same components as those in the effect decoration rotator unit 530 will be described with the same reference numerals.

  The second effect decoration rotator unit 530A has a circular outer shape and a transparent central portion excluding the outer peripheral edge. The operation button 410 can be pressed by the player, and surrounds the outer periphery of the operation button 410. A frame-shaped frame unit 415 attached to the production operation unit attaching portion 326a, and a decorative board unit arranged behind the operation button 410 and capable of emitting and decorating the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415. 420, a second base unit 450 attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415, the operation button 410 and the decorative board unit 420 being attached to the front surface, and a second base visible from the player side through the operation button 410. Door frame side second attached to unit 450 and capable of displaying effect image And output display device 460A, includes a buffer unit 510 which is attached to the lower surface of the second performance display device 460A door frame side.

  The second effect decoration rotator unit 530A has a second effect operation unit relay board 515 attached to the right side surface in front view of the door frame side second effect display device 460A and the surface of the second effect operation unit relay board 515. A relay board cover 516 attached to the right side surface in front view of the door frame side second effect display device 460A so as to cover it. The second effect operation unit relay board 515 and the relay board cover 516 are attached to the right side surface of the projector mounting member 505 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A.

  The second effect operation unit relay board 515 includes an operation button left outer decoration board 422, an operation button right outer decoration board 423, a vibration motor 424, a press detection sensor 454, a frame top lens decoration board 482, a switching drive motor 492 (heat source), This relay relays the connection between the projector 500 and the rotation detection sensor 507 and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100.

[3-4g-1. Manual operation button]
The operation buttons 410 of the second effect decoration rotator unit 530A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 72A is an exploded perspective view of the operation buttons of the second effect operation unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 72B is an exploded perspective view of the operation buttons of the second effect operation unit as seen from the rear. FIG. The operation button 410 of the second effect decoration rotator unit 530A is formed in a circular shape whose outer shape is slightly smaller in diameter than the height in the vertical direction of the dish unit 320, and the center side excluding the outer peripheral edge is formed transparent. . The operation button 410 has a transparent button lens 411 formed in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) so that the outer periphery is circular and the center side bulges forward, and the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. An annular button frame 412 attached to the front side, and a cylindrical button base 413 attached to sandwich the outer periphery of the button lens 411 on the rear side of the button frame 412 The configuration is substantially the same as the operation button 410 of the decorative rotating body unit 530.

  A specific difference is that the operation button 410 of the second effect decoration rotator unit 530A and the operation button 410 of the effect decoration rotator unit 530 are different from the pattern of the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 and the button base. The shape of the guide boss part 413c of 413 is different.

  More specifically, as shown in the drawing, the first button decoration portion 411a of the operation button 410 in the second effect decoration rotating body unit 530A is one portion toward the center of the button lens 411 at a portion in contact with the inner periphery of the button frame 412. A truss-like pattern in which a triangle with its apex facing and a triangle with one apex facing away from the center are arranged in multiple rows alternately in the circumferential direction, and buttons in the truss-like pattern Right-angled triangle shape composed of a bottom side facing the center side of the lens 411, a side extending from both ends of the base side to the center side of the button lens 411, and a hypotenuse extending from the tip of the side to the center of the base side , A hypotenuse of a right triangle pattern, a side extending from the center of the base of the truss pattern triangle to the center of the button lens 411 longer than the right triangle pattern, and the tip of the side And varying isosceles triangle pattern constituted by the side extending to the hypotenuse of the leading end of the pattern of a right triangle from, in are formed.

  That is, the first button decoration portion 411a is configured by a combination of a plurality of triangles. In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, each triangle which comprises the 1st button decoration part 411a has faced the direction from which each surface differs, and is formed in the polyhedron shape. Thereby, since the front surface side of the button lens 411 is formed in a smooth curved surface shape, the back surface side is formed in a polyhedral shape in the portion of the first button decoration portion 411a, so the first button decoration portion 411a. In this part, the plate thickness of the button lens 411 changes in a complicated manner, and the light passing through this part is irregularly refracted. Accordingly, at the site of the first button decoration portion 411a, a geometric pattern in which a plurality of triangles are combined can be shown to the player, and at the same time, the rear member can be made difficult to see due to irregular refraction.

  The guide boss portion 413c of the button base 413 of the second effect decoration rotator unit 530A is formed in a cylindrical shape whose rear is open. The guide boss portion 413c is inserted into the holding hole 451d of the second base unit 450, and the button shaft 452 held in the holding hole 451d of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450 inside the cylindrical shape. Is slidably inserted. In this example, the operation button 410 is attached so as to be able to advance and retreat in the front-rear direction by the button shaft 452 of the second base unit 450 inserted from behind into the guide boss portion 413c.

[3-4g-2. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the second effect decoration rotating body unit 530A will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71 and the like. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front side to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320 so as to surround the outer periphery from the front side of the operation button 410, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The frame unit 415 has an outer shape that matches the front end side of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a.

  The frame unit 415 of the second effect decoration rotator unit 530A has the same configuration as the frame unit 415 of the effect decoration rotator unit 530, and is given the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof is omitted.

[3-4g-3. Decorative board unit]
The decoration board unit 420 of the second effect decoration rotating body unit 530A will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 57, FIG. 69 to FIG. The decorative board unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the second base unit 450 below the frame unit 415, and can decorate the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 with light emission. The vibration can be imparted to the second effect decoration rotator unit 530A.

  The decorative substrate unit 420 includes a C-shaped substrate base 421 whose upper side is open, an operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and an operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 attached to the front surfaces of the left and right sides of the substrate base 421, respectively. And a vibration motor 424 attached to the lower portion of the front surface of the substrate base 421 and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the substrate base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424.

  The decoration board unit 420 of the second effect decoration rotator unit 530A has the same configuration as the decoration substrate unit 420 of the effect decoration rotator unit 530, and is given the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof is omitted.

[3-4g-4. Second base unit]
The second base unit 450 of the second effect decoration rotator unit 530A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 is a perspective view of the second base unit of the second effect operation unit as seen from the front. The second base unit 450 of the second effect decoration rotator unit 530A has the operation button 410 movably attached in the front-rear direction, the door frame side second effect display device 460A is attached, and the rear side of the frame unit 415. It can be attached to.

  The second base unit 450 includes a unit base 451 attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415, and protrudes from the front surface of the unit base 451. The second base unit 450 is rearward in the four cylindrical guide boss portions 413c of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. Column-shaped button shafts 452 that are slidably inserted from each other, and the operation button springs through which the four button shafts 452 are inserted and the rear ends of the guide boss portions 413c of the operation buttons 410 are urged forward. (Not shown) and three press detection sensors 454 that are attached to the front surface of the unit base 451 and detect the three detection pieces 413d of the button base 413 in the operation buttons 410, respectively.

  The unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 includes an annular main body 451a, a cover 451b that protrudes hemispherically from the inner periphery of the main body 451a to the rear, and a direction perpendicular to the front surface of the main body 451a. A through-hole 451c that passes through the cover portion 451b in the front-rear direction with a substantially quadrangle that extends vertically when viewed, four holding holes 451d that are recessed from the front surface of the main body portion 451a to the rear, and a main body portion 451a. An upper bearing portion 451e that is recessed in a semicircular shape (U-shape) from the front to the rear at the upper portion, and a semicircular shape coaxially with the upper bearing portion 451e from the front to the rear at the lower portion of the main body portion 451a. The lower bearing portion 451f that is recessed (U-shaped) and the upper front surface of the main body portion 451a are formed on the left and right sides of the upper bearing portion 451e, and the screen unit 470 rotates. And a, a pair of rotation restricting portion 451g to regulate.

  The annular main body 451a of the unit base 451 has an inner periphery and an outer periphery that are substantially the same size as the substrate base 421 of the decorative substrate unit 420 formed in a C shape. The decorative board unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the main body 451a. The cover portion 451b is formed to have a size that can be accommodated without contacting when the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A is rotatably mounted by the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f. Yes. The through hole 451c is formed in a size that allows the projector 500 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A to pass from behind.

  The four holding holes 451d of the unit base 451 are formed at positions corresponding to the four guide boss portions 413c of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 at the upper, lower, left and right corners of the front surface of the main body portion 451a. These holding holes 451d are formed so that the inner diameter is larger than the outer diameter of the guide boss portion 413c, and the guide boss portion 413c can be inserted. In these four holding holes 451d, a button shaft 452 is mounted coaxially with the central axis. The front end of the button shaft 452 attached to the holding hole 451d protrudes forward from the front surface of the main body 451a. By inserting the button shaft 452 attached to the holding hole 451d into the cylindrical guide boss portion 413c of the operation button 410, the operation button 410 is attached to be slidable in the front-rear direction via the guide boss portion 413c. Can do.

  Of the four holding holes 451d, the upper left holding hole 451d is counterclockwise with respect to the center of the unit base 451 from a center line extending vertically through the center of the unit base 451 (the center of the operation button 410). It is formed at a position rotated about 30 degrees in the direction. Of the four holding holes 451d, the upper right holding hole 451d is a clockwise direction with respect to the center of the unit base 451 from a center line extending vertically through the center of the unit base 451 (center of the operation button 410). It is formed at a position rotated about 47 degrees. On the other hand, the two holding holes 451d arranged on the lower side of the four holding holes 451d are respectively formed at positions opposite to the center of the unit base 451 with respect to the upper two holding holes 451d. .

  Operation button springs (not shown) are inserted in the four holding holes 451d, respectively, and the front end of these operation button springs abuts on the rear end of the guide boss portion 413c. It is energizing forward.

  The upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451 are formed in a U-shape that is open at the front and extends rearward. In the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f, the centers of the portions extending in a semicircular arc shape are coaxially located. The upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f are inserted into the door frame side second effect display device 460A from the front, and the upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 are inserted from the front side. Is attached to the front surface of the main body 451a, so that the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A can be rotatably supported.

  The pair of rotation restricting portions 451g of the unit base 451 has their respective front surfaces passing through the central axis of the semicircular portion of the upper bearing portion 451e whose extension line (surface) is recessed rearward in a U shape. It is formed in such a manner that it is separated in the circumferential direction by a predetermined angle about the central axis. The pair of rotation restricting portions 451g restricts the rotation range of the screen unit 470 when the stopper 475b of the operation gear member 475 in the screen unit 470 comes into contact with the second effect decoration rotating body unit 530A. doing. In the present embodiment, the rotation range of the screen unit 470 is restricted to an angle range of 90 degrees by the pair of rotation restriction portions 451g.

  In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the magnet is each embed | buried in a pair of rotation control part 451g, and it contact | abuts to the rotation control part 451g by magnetizing with the iron plate attached to the stopper 475b. The stopper 475b is difficult to be separated from the rotation restricting portion 451g. Accordingly, the screen unit 470 is in the first position with the main screen 471 facing forward, or the sub-screen 472 is directed forward with the magnet in the rotation restricting portion 451g and the iron plate of the stopper 475b. The screen unit 470 can be held in any of the positions, and the movement of the screen unit 470 to be rotated by the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the vibration by the vibration motor 424 or the like is suppressed to the door frame side. The effect image by the second effect display device 460A can be enjoyed in a good state.

  The three press detection sensors 454 are attached to the front surface of the main body 451 a of the unit base 451 at positions corresponding to the three detection pieces 413 d of the button base 413 on the operation button 410. More specifically, three pressing detection sensors 454 are left on the front surface of the main body 451a of the unit base 451, one on the lower left side of the upper left holding hole 451d and the other on the lower right side of the upper right holding hole 451d. Are respectively attached to the lower right side of the lower left holding hole 451d. The three press detection sensors 454 are attached at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction around the center of the unit base 451. These three press detection sensors 454 can detect the three detection pieces 413 d of the operation button 410.

[3-4g-5. Door frame side second effect display device]
The door frame side second effect display device 460A of the second effect decoration rotator unit 530A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame side second effect display device 460 </ b> A is attached to the second base unit 450, and can display the effect image to the player through the transparent portion of the operation button 410. The door frame side second effect display device 460A includes a screen unit 470 attached to the second base unit 450 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending vertically by the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f, and the second base unit 451A. An upper bearing member 480 attached to the upper front portion of the unit 450 and rotatably attached to the upper side of the screen unit 470 in cooperation with the second base unit 450, and attached to the lower front portion of the second base unit 450. And a lower bearing member 485 that rotatably attaches the lower side of the screen unit 470 in cooperation with the second base unit 450.

  The door frame side second effect display device 460A is disposed in a rotation drive unit 490 that rotates the screen unit 470 and is attached to the upper part of the second base unit 450, and a cover portion 451b of the second base unit 450. A projector 500 capable of projecting and displaying an effect image on the screen unit 470 from the rear, and the projector 500 are attached, and the rear surface of the unit base 451 is attached so as to cover the cover portion 451b of the second base unit 450 from the rear side. The box-shaped projector mounting member 505 that is open at the front and the operating gear member 475 of the screen unit 470 are mounted on the left side of the rotation drive unit 490 in the upper part of the second base unit 450 so as to cover from above. Top cover 506 and top cover And two rotation detecting sensor 507 for detecting the rotational position of the mounted screen unit 470 (the rotational position) 06, and a.

[3-4g-5a. Screen unit]
The screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A is attached to the second base unit 450 so as to be rotatable about the axis extending vertically, and the effect image is projected from the projector 500. The effect image can be displayed (projected) so as to be visible from the player.

  The screen unit 470 has a semi-cylindrical main screen 471 that is milky white and translucent, and a disc shape with one end of the main screen 471 in the axial direction as a part of the outer periphery. A sub-screen 472 that is curved so as to bulge outward in the direction, milky white and translucent, and protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the axial center of both ends of the main screen 471 outward in the direction perpendicular to the axis. The upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474, the working gear member 475 which is attached to the tip of the upper shaft member 473 and has gear teeth 475a formed over substantially the outer circumference, and the sub-screen 472. A transparent sub-screen decoration member 476 (see FIG. 74, FIG. 75, etc.) formed in a relief shape imitating a predetermined character (skull), and a sub-screen A sub-screen decoration board 477 (see FIG. 75 and the like) on which a plurality of LEDs 477a are mounted on the surface facing the sub-screen 472 attached to the back side of the sub-screen 472, and the sub-screen 472 on the opposite side of the main screen 471 A semicircular arc-shaped peripheral decoration member 478 that extends short from the end of the main screen 471 toward the central axis of the main screen 471.

  The semi-cylindrical main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 has a radius smaller than the inner diameter of the annular main body 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450. The main screen 471 has an axial length that is approximately 4/3 times the semi-cylindrical radius. The main screen 471 is decorated so that both ends in the axial direction are edged by the peripheral decorative portion 472a of the sub screen 472 and the peripheral decorative member 478.

  The sub-screen 472 is formed in a circular shape whose outer shape matches the radius of the semi-cylindrical main screen 471 when viewed from the direction in which the central axis extends (see FIG. 74B). . The sub-screen 472 is formed in an annular shape with a predetermined width from the outer periphery to the center side, and includes a peripheral decorative portion 472a in which a plurality of quadrangular pyramid-shaped irregularities are arranged in the circumferential direction, and an inner side of the peripheral decorative portion 472a is closed. A curved screen-like general portion 472b. The peripheral decorative portion 472a of the sub screen 472 is formed in a truncated cone shape so that the inner peripheral side protrudes in a direction away from the main screen 471. The screen general portion 472b bulges in a spherical shape with a radius larger than the radius of the semi-cylindrical main screen 471 in a direction away from the main screen 471. A through-hole is formed in the screen general portion 472b of the sub-screen 472, and a sub-screen decoration member 476 is attached so as to close the hole.

  The upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 are inserted from the front into the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450, respectively, and are rotatably mounted.

  The actuating gear member 475 is engaged with the second transmission gear 495 of the rotation drive unit 490 and protrudes outward from one of the circumferential ends of the gear teeth 475a and the gear teeth 475a. And a detecting piece 475c protruding in a flat plate shape from the opposite side to the stopper 475b at the circumferential end of the gear tooth 475a. The stopper 475b of the operating gear member 475 is located in the concave portion 481a of the upper bearing member 480 that is recessed in an arc shape around the axis of the upper shaft member 473 in the state assembled to the second effect decorative rotator unit 530A. The rotation range of the screen unit 470 is restricted by contacting the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450 located at both ends in the recess 481a.

  In addition, although detailed illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the iron plate is attached to the site | part which contact | abuts the rotation control part 451g in the stopper 475b, and this iron plate can be magnetically attached to the magnet embed | buried under the rotation control part 451g. .

  The screen unit 470 can rotate between a first position with the main screen 471 facing forward and a second position with the sub screen 472 facing forward. The detection piece 475c is detected by a rotation detection sensor 507 attached to the upper cover 506.

  The sub-screen decoration member 476 is attached to the screen general portion 472b in the sub-screen 472. The sub-screen decoration member 476 is formed in a relief shape imitating a skull with a transparent member, and the thickness of the sub-screen decoration member 476 is changed in a complicated manner. It has become difficult. In addition, although detailed illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the character of "PUSH" is formed in the relief which imitated the sub screen decoration member 476 in the shape of a skull.

  The sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is attached to the back side of the sub-screen 472 so that a gap is formed between the sub-screen 472 and a plurality of LEDs 477a on the front side (side facing the sub-screen 472). Has been implemented. The sub-screen decoration substrate 477 has an outer shape smaller than that of the sub-screen decoration member 476 and has a white surface. By causing the LED 477a of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 to emit light, the sub-screen decoration member 476 and the sub-screen 472 can be decorated with light emission. More specifically, the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 emits the LED 477a so that the “eye” portion of the skull and the “PUSH” character portion can be strongly illuminated.

  The sub-screen decoration substrate 477 is disposed relatively close to the sub-screen 472 and does not include a member that diffuses light between the sub-screen 472 and the LED 477a when the LED 477a emits light. The player can recognize the point light source. Further, the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 can block light from the projector 500. Therefore, the projector 500 can project the shadow of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 on the sub-screen 472.

  The peripheral decorative member 478 is formed in the same shape as a part of the peripheral decorative portion 472a of the sub-screen 472, and a plurality of quadrangular pyramid irregularities are arranged in the circumferential direction of the arc as in the peripheral decorative portion 472a. .

  As described above, the screen unit 470 includes two different screens such as the main screen 471 and the sub screen 472. The main screen 471 is intended to display an effect image on which the effect image is projected from the projector 500 over the entire surface of the semi-cylindrical shape and noticed by the player by the projection from the projector 500. On the other hand, the sub-screen 472 has a narrow range (narrower than the main screen 471) in which the effect image from the projector 500 forms the periphery of the central sub-screen decoration member 476 due to the presence of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 in the back center. The operation button 410 is pressed to the player by the lighting decoration of the sub-screen decoration member 476 using the LED 477a. The purpose is to promote.

[3-4g-5b. Upper bearing member and lower bearing member]
The upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 are configured to close the front side of the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f that are opened forward in the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450. It is attached to the front surface of 451a. The upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 are formed by inserting the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 of the screen unit 470 from the front into the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451, respectively. By attaching to the front surface of the base 451, the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 can be rotatably attached to the second base unit 450.

  The upper bearing member 480 includes a bearing member 481 attached to the upper portion of the body portion 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 so as to close the front side of the upper bearing portion 451e whose front side is open, and a bearing member And a frame top lens decoration substrate 482 attached to the upper front surface of 481. The bearing member 481 has a recess 481a that is recessed in an arc shape from the rear surface to the front so that the center in the left-right direction is deepest. The concave portion 481a of the bearing member 481 in the upper bearing member 480 is recessed in an arc shape centered on the axis of the upper shaft member 473 of the screen unit 470 in the state assembled to the second effect decorative rotator unit 530A. The stopper 475b of the operating gear member 475 in the screen unit 470 is inserted and disposed, and the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g of the unit base 451 are located at both ends of the arc of the recess 481a. Due to the concave portion 481a that is recessed in an arc shape, the stopper 475b of the operating gear member 475 can be favorably rotated between the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g.

  The frame top lens decoration substrate 482 of the upper bearing member 480 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface side, and is assembled to the second effect decoration rotating body unit 530A in the rear of the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415. positioned. Thus, the frame top lens 418 can be decorated with light emission by causing the LED of the frame top lens decoration substrate 482 to emit light.

  The lower bearing member 485 is formed in a substantially flat plate shape, and is attached to the front surface of the main body portion 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 so as to close the front of the lower bearing portion 451f. The lower shaft member 474 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 451 in a state where the lower shaft member 474 of the screen unit 470 is inserted into the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450. Can be mounted rotatably.

[3-4g-5c. Rotation drive unit]
The rotation drive unit 490 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The rotation drive unit 490 is attached to the upper surface of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 and can drive the screen unit 470 to rotate. The rotation drive unit 490 includes a unit case 491 attached to the upper surface of the unit base 451 and having a hollow inside. A spur gear-like drive gear (not shown) fixed to the rotation shaft of the switching drive motor, and a spur gear-shaped first gear meshed with the drive gear and rotatably mounted in the unit case 491. The transmission gear (not shown) meshes with the first transmission gear and can mesh with the gear teeth 475a of the operating gear member 475 in the screen unit 470, and is rotatably mounted in the unit case 491. A second transmission gear 495 having a spur gear shape.

  In the state where the rotation drive unit 490 is assembled to the second effect decoration rotator unit 530A, the second transmission gear 495 meshes with the gear teeth 475a of the operation gear member 475 in the screen unit 470. The rotation drive unit 490 rotates the switching drive motor 492 so that the screen unit 470 extends forward and backward through the drive gear, the first transmission gear, the second transmission gear 495, and the gear teeth 475a. It can be rotated.

[3-4g-5d. projector]
The projector 500 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The projector 500 is disposed in a hemispherical cover portion 451 b of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450, and is attached to the rear side of the unit base 451 through a projector attachment member 505. The projector 500 can project and display the effect image on the main screen 471 or the sub screen 472 by irradiating the effect image toward the main screen 471 or the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470.

  The projector 500 includes a cubic projector main body 501 attached to the projector attachment member 505, and a lens unit 502 that projects forward from the projector main body 501 in a cylindrical shape and irradiates an effect image forward from the front end.

  In the projector 500, the rear portion of the projector main body 501 is attached to the projector attachment member 505, and the lens portion 502 and the projector main body 501 are disposed in the cover portion 451b through the through hole 451c of the unit base 451 from the rear side. Installed as follows.

  The projector 500 can project an effect image over substantially the front surface of the main screen 471 and the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470, and can project and display still images and moving images as the effect image. The projector 500 is a commercially available liquid crystal projector, and has an autofocus function.

[3-4g-5e. Projector mounting member]
The projector mounting member 505 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The projector mounting member 505 is formed in a box shape with the front opened, and the projector 500 is mounted inside and mounted on the rear side of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450. The projector attachment member 505 can be attached to the rear side of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450, thereby covering the cover portion 451 b of the unit base 451 and the rear side of the projector 500.

  The projector mounting member 505 has a bottom wall extending in the horizontal direction and a rear wall extending in the vertical direction, so that the projector 500 can be mounted in an inclined state so as to coincide with the inclination of the operation button 410. . A plurality of slits 505a penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed on the rear wall of the projector mounting member 505, and heat released from the projector 500 can be discharged to the outside through the slits 505a.

  A second rendering operation unit relay board 515 and a relay board cover 516 are attached to the right side surface of the projector mounting member 505 in front view.

[3-4g-5f. Upper cover and rotation detection sensor]
The upper cover 506 and the rotation detection sensor 507 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The upper cover 506 is attached to the upper surface of the main body 451a of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450 so as to cover the upper part of the operating gear member 475 of the screen unit 470. The rotation detection sensors 507 are for detecting the rotational position of the screen unit 470, and are attached to the lower surface of the upper cover 506 in a state of being separated from each other.

  Although not shown in detail, the two rotation detection sensors 507 are attached at positions that are separated from each other by a rotation angle of 90 degrees in the circumferential direction around the rotation axis of the screen unit 470. The detection piece 475c of the member 475 can be detected. Specifically, the two rotation detection sensors 507 are a detection piece 475c when the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 is facing forward and a second position where the sub screen 472 is facing forward. The time detection piece 475c can be detected respectively. Based on the detection signal of the detection piece 475c by these two rotation detection sensors 507, the rotation drive of the switching drive motor 492 of the rotation drive unit 490 is controlled.

[3-4g-6. Buffer unit]
The buffer unit 510 of the second effect decoration rotator unit 530A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The buffer unit 510 is attached to the lower surface of the door frame side second effect display device 460A, and reduces the impact when the second effect decoration rotating body unit 530A is struck from above, so that the dish in the dish unit 320 This is transmitted to the bottom plate portion 326i of the unit cover 326.

  The buffer unit 510 is in contact with an elastically deformable flat plate-shaped buffer member 511 whose upper surface is in contact with the lower surface of the projector mounting member 505 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A, and the lower surface of the buffer member 511. And a buffer base 512 that is mounted so as to be relatively close to the lower surface of the projector mounting member 505.

  The buffer base 512 of the buffer unit 510 has a flat plate-like main body portion 512a that comes into contact with the lower surface of the buffer member 511, and leg pieces that protrude downward from the left and right ends of the main body portion 512a when viewed from the front and extend in the front-rear direction. 512b. The leg piece portion 512 b of the buffer base 512 is in contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326 i of the plate unit cover 326 in the plate unit 320 in a state assembled to the door frame 3.

  In this buffer unit 510, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed or hit, the projector mounting member 505 mounted on the base unit 430 compresses the buffer member 511 in the buffer unit 510. Move downwards. The shock is absorbed by compressing the buffer member 511. When the projector mounting member 505 moves further downward, the lower surface of the projector mounting member 505 contacts the upper surface side of the main body portion 512a of the buffer base 512. Since the main body portion 512a has a gap formed between the left and right leg pieces 512b and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326, the projector mounting member is in contact with the upper surface side of the main body portion 512a. When 505 moves further downward, the flat plate-like main body portion 512a is bent, and the impact can be absorbed by the bending of the main body portion 512a. Further, when the projector mounting member 505 moves downward, the lower surface of the main body portion 512a bent downward contacts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326, and further bending of the main body portion 512a is restricted. The impact is transmitted to the dish unit cover 326. In this way, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly hit from above, the impact can be absorbed in multiple stages, and the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the effect operation unit mounting portion of the dish unit cover 326 are absorbed. It is possible to prevent an undue force from acting on 326a and the like and to prevent them from being damaged.

[3-4g-7. Effects of the second stage operation unit]
The effects of the second effect decoration rotator unit 530A will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 74A is an explanatory view of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the main screen of the screen unit facing forward, and FIG. 74B is a sub view of the screen unit. It is explanatory drawing which looked at the 2nd production operation unit from the direction where the central axis of the operation button has extended in the state which turned the screen ahead. 75A is a cross-sectional view taken along the line JJ in FIG. 74A, and FIG. 75B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line KK in FIG. 74B. FIG. 76 (a) shows the second rendering operation unit with the main screen facing forward, as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and is hidden by the first button decoration portion, button frame, etc. of the operation button. It is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is going to be shown, (b) shows the site | part which is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in sectional drawing of the 2nd production operation unit of the state of (a). It is explanatory drawing. FIG. 77 (a) shows the second rendering operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the sub-screen facing forward, and is hidden by the first button decoration portion, button frame, etc. of the operation button. It is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is going to be shown, (b) shows the site | part which is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in sectional drawing of the 2nd production operation unit of the state of (a). It is explanatory drawing.

  The second effect decoration rotator unit 530A of the present embodiment changes the decoration in the operation button 410 according to the game state that changes when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5, An effect image can be displayed in the operation button 410 to entertain the player, and the player can operate the operation button 410 to allow the player to participate in the effect presented to the player. Is.

  The second effect decoration rotator unit 530 </ b> A has an overall height substantially the same as the height of the lower portion of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. The second effect decoration rotator unit 530 </ b> A has a full width slightly larger than 1/3 of the full width of the door frame 3. The second effect decoration rotator unit 530A is arranged at the center in the left-right direction below the game area 5a (the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110) in a front view.

  In the second effect decoration rotator unit 530A, the upper part of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320. The second effect decoration rotator unit 530A is attached to the tray unit 320, and has a lower end of the leg piece portion 512b of the buffer base 512 of the buffer unit 510, and an upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the tray unit cover 326 of the tray unit 320. A gap is formed between them. That is, only the upper part of the second effect decoration rotating body unit 530A is attached to the dish unit 320, and is attached in a suspended state.

  In the second effect decoration rotating body unit 530A, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner periphery of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a. It is installed to become. Thereby, in the second effect decoration rotator unit 530A, the central axis CL (see FIG. 67) of the transparent operation button 410 bulging forward in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical shape) is vertical. It is inclined at an angle of 63 degrees with respect to the line so as to move upward as it goes forward. Thus, when a player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 in order to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the head of the player is positioned above the plate unit 320 (second effect decoration rotating body unit 530A). Since the game board 5 is located in front of the center of the game area 5a, the center axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the head of the player. Accordingly, when the player drops his / her line of sight from the game area 5a to the second effect decoration rotator unit 530A (operation button 410), the operation button 410 can be viewed from the front (projection view from a direction parallel to the central axis CL). As a result, the operation button 410, the door frame side second effect display device 460A in the operation button 410, and the like can be visually recognized in a good state.

  In the second effect decoration rotator unit 530A, the button shaft 452 held in the four holding holes 451d of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450 is formed on the four cylindrical guide boss portions 413c of the operation button 410. Each is slidably inserted and is urged forward by an operation button spring (not shown). In the normal state (the state in which the operation button 410 is not pressed), the second effect decoration rotating body unit 530A has the front end of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 as a frame by the urging force of the operation button spring. The unit 415 is in contact with a portion in the vicinity of the central opening 416a on the rear surface of the frame main body 416.

  In the normal state, the second effect decoration rotator unit 530A has a central side (center axis CL side) from the vicinity of the inner periphery of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410 and a central opening 416a of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415. Projects forward. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (substantially spherical shape) in the operation button 410, a portion that protrudes forward from the inner periphery (inside) of the button frame 412 is formed. The frame unit 415 protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 (see FIG. 67 and the like).

  Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415 is about 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (the front end) with respect to the central axis CL direction of the operation button 410 is the frame unit. It protrudes about 4 cm forward from the front surface of 415.

  In a normal state, when the player presses the operation button 410 of the second effect decoration rotator unit 530A, the operation button 410 moves rearward along the central axis CL against the biasing force of the operation button spring. When the rear end of the operation button 410 comes into contact with the front surface of the main body 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450, the backward movement is restricted and the backward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, the button lens 411 bulging forward in a curved surface shape (substantially spherical shape) is pressed.

  The operation button 410 has a very large outer diameter compared to the operation buttons for production provided in the conventional pachinko machine, so the periphery of the button lens 411 away from the center is pressed. There is a high possibility of being. More specifically, the operation buttons for effects in the conventional pachinko machine are attached so that the central axis extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, whereas the second effect decorative rotator unit 530A of the present embodiment. The operation button 410 is attached so that the central axis CL is inclined with respect to the vertical line. Therefore, when the player presses the operation button 410 from above as in the conventional pachinko machine, the operation button 410 moves away from the central axis CL. A distant part will be pressed (refer FIG. 61).

  By the way, the operation buttons for performance in the conventional pachinko machine are formed with a flat surface on which the player presses, so when the operation button is enlarged with the flat part being pressed When pressing the part off the center of the operation button, the surface to be pressed is tilted so that the pressed part is retracted first, and the operation button cannot be receded straight, There is a possibility that the pressing operation cannot be performed.

  On the other hand, the operation button 410 of the second effect decoration rotator unit 530A of the present embodiment has a curved surface shape (a substantially spherical surface) in which a portion (button lens 411) pressed by the player bulges forward. Therefore, when a pressing operation is performed at a position away from the center of the operation button 410, the force is distributed over the entire operation button 410, making it difficult for the operation button 410 to tilt and the operation button 410 to move straight back. Can be moved to. Therefore, no matter which position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly retracted without tilting, so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected and the operation button 410 is pressed. The operation to operate can be fully enjoyed.

  In the second effect decoration rotator unit 530A, the vibration motor 424 is attached to the lower front surface of the substrate base 421 in the decoration substrate unit 420, and the second effect decoration rotator unit 530A is suspended as described above. Thus, only the upper part is attached to the production operation unit attachment part 326a of the dish unit cover 326. Therefore, when vibration is generated by rotating the weight 424a by the vibration motor 424, the part farthest from the attached part is generated. Since the vibration is generated, the entire second effect decoration rotator unit 530A can be vibrated greatly (strongly), and the vibration can be transmitted to the player touching the second effect decoration rotator unit 530A. it can. Since the vibration motor 424 is disposed immediately below the position where the player can relatively press the button (near the upper part of the operation button 410), strong vibration is transmitted to the player who presses the button 410. Can surprise the player and entertain the production.

  Furthermore, the second effect decoration rotator unit 530A is attached to the dish unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the projector attachment member 505 and the dish unit cover 326 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A. A buffer unit 510 is disposed between the bottom plate portion 326i and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i. The buffer unit 510 includes an elastically deformable buffer member 511, and a gap is formed between the main body portion 512 a with which the buffer member 511 is in contact with the upper surface and the bottom plate portion 326 i of the dish unit cover 326. Therefore, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed or struck down, the impact is caused in multiple stages by elastic deformation (compression) of the buffer member 511 or bending of the main body 512a of the buffer base 512. It can be absorbed, and it can be avoided that an excessive force acts on the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415, the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, etc., and the second rendering decorative rotator unit 530A, etc. Can be prevented from being damaged. Therefore, even when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is pressed or hit with a strong force when the player is presented with an effect of pressing the operation button 410 of the second effect decoration rotating body unit 530A. Since the operation button 410, the second effect decoration rotator unit 530A, and the like are not damaged, the interruption of the game due to the damage can be avoided, and the lowering of the player's interest can be suppressed. By making it difficult, an increase in the burden on the game hall side can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 to be pressed by the player is formed in a curved surface shape projecting forward (a part of the shape of a substantially spherical surface), compared with a flat plate shape. In addition to high strength and rigidity, even if it is strongly struck, the impact can be distributed over the entire button lens 411, making it difficult to break.

  In the second effect decoration rotator unit 530A, the button lens 411, the frame side lens 417, and the frame top lens 418 are made of transparent members, and therefore the first button decoration portion formed on the back side thereof. The decoration by unevenness, such as 411a and the 2nd button decoration part 411b, can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) (refer FIG. 63). Since the light is refracted in a complicated manner because the thickness of the plate is changed, the rear side is difficult to see through the portion where the bumpy decoration is formed.

  Since the second effect decoration rotator unit 530A includes the first button decoration part 411a extending from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 to the center side of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, the first button decoration part 411a. It is possible to make it difficult to see the rear at the outer peripheral portion of the portion that is inside the button lens 411 by the uneven decoration combining the plurality of triangles. Behind the portion where the first button decoration portion 411a is formed (backward in the direction of the central axis CL), the inner peripheral surface of the body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the door frame side second effect display device A gap between the outer periphery of the screen unit 470 of 460A is located, but the first button decoration portion 411a located in front of the gap from the front side (player side) to the outside or rear side of the screen unit 470 This member can be made difficult to see. Thereby, even if the operation button 410 capable of being pressed is provided with the door frame side second effect display device 460A, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the operation button 410 from deteriorating. It is possible to prevent discomfort and to arrange the door frame side second effect display device 460A in the transparent operation button 410 without any problem, and to improve the appearance of the operation button 410.

  More specifically, the second effect decoration rotator unit 530A includes the door frame side second effect display device by the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, and the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410. The second base unit 450, the upper shaft member 473, the lower shaft member 474, and the like on the rear side (back side) outside the outer periphery of the main screen 471, the sub screen 472, etc. in 460 A are passed through the transparent button lens 411. It is formed so that it cannot be seen from the side. Specifically, in the first position with the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 facing forward, the top and bottom outside of the main screen 471, the left outside of the peripheral decorative portion 472a of the sub screen 472, and the right of the peripheral decorative member 478 The outer part (the cross hatched part surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 76) is hidden from the player side.

  On the other hand, in the second position with the sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470 facing forward, the outer portion of the annular peripheral decorative portion 472a of the sub-screen 472 (the cross-hatched portion surrounded by the one-dot chain line in FIG. 76). ) Is hidden from the player side. As described above, since the operation button 410 includes the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like, it is difficult to see the outside and the back side of the main screen 471 and the sub screen 472. It is possible to hide, and the appearance of the operation button 410 and by extension the second effect decoration rotating body unit 530A can be improved.

  In the state of the first position where the main screen 471 is facing forward, the screen general portion 472b of the sub screen 472 and the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412 and the like of the button lens 411 The sub-screen decoration member 476, the upper shaft member 473, and the lower shaft member 474 are difficult to see (see FIG. 76). This makes it difficult for the player to notice the presence of the sub-screen 472, the main screen 471 being rotatable, etc., so that when the screen unit 470 is rotated to switch from the main screen 471 to the sub-screen 472, A movement exceeding the player's expectation is performed in the button 410, so that a strong impact can be given to the player.

  Further, in the second position where the sub-screen 472 faces forward, the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft are moved by the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412 and the like of the button lens 411. The member 474 is difficult to see (see FIG. 77). This makes it difficult for the player to notice that the sub-screen 472 (sub-screen decoration member 476) can rotate, so that the impact when the sub-screen 472 (screen unit 470) is rotated can be increased. The player can be entertained.

  The second effect decoration rotator unit 530 </ b> A has a button lens 411 that can visually recognize the door frame side second effect display device 460 </ b> A disposed on the rear side of the operation button 410, and is centered from the inner periphery of the button frame 412. The door frame side second effect display that is provided with a polyhedral first button decoration portion 411a that is a combination of a plurality of triangular surfaces within a predetermined width range and that is disposed on the inner rear side of the operation button 410. The device 460A includes a peripheral decoration portion 472a of a sub-screen 472 in which a plurality of square weights are arranged, and a peripheral decoration member 478. Thereby, the decoration (first button decoration part 411a) made of a triangle arranged on the front side and the decoration made of a quadrangle arranged on the rear side (the peripheral decoration part 472a and the peripheral decoration member 478) overlap each other so as to intersect. As a result, the player can show a complicated geometric pattern to the player, improve the appearance, and suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

  As described above, the first button decoration part 411a mainly composed of a triangle, the peripheral decoration part 472a and the peripheral decoration member 478 mainly composed of a quadrilateral are separated in the front-rear direction, so that the position of the player's eyes is When they move, the overlapping state changes, so that the geometric patterns that appear to overlap can change to show the player a moving decoration and show the player a deep, three-dimensional decoration. Can entertain the player.

  Further, in the door frame side second effect display device 460A disposed on the inner rear side of the operation button 410, the screen unit 470 is rotated by driving the switching drive motor 492 so that the main screen 471 is directed forward, or the sub screen. 472 can be directed forward, and the decoration composed of a plurality of squares can be changed. More specifically, in the state where the main screen 471 is directed forward, as shown in FIG. 74 (a), the peripheral decorative portion 472a and the peripheral decorative member 478 are separated from each other in the horizontal direction and extend vertically. A geometric pattern decoration in which the decoration composed of a plurality of square pyramids arranged in a row vertically intersects the decoration composed of a plurality of triangles arranged in a ring shape of the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411. Can be shown to the player. On the other hand, in the state where the sub-screen 472 is directed forward, as shown in FIG. 74 (b), the peripheral decoration part 472a is in an annularly extending state, and the decoration is composed of a plurality of square weights arranged in an annular shape. However, it is possible to show the player the decoration of the geometric pattern that overlaps the decoration made of a plurality of triangles arranged in a ring shape of the first button decoration portion 411a in the button lens 411. Accordingly, by rotating the screen unit 470, the decoration (physical decoration) of the operation button 410 can be changed. Therefore, the player's interest can be attracted to the operation button 410 by the decoration change, The change can cause the player to suggest the arrival of a chance, etc., and the player can be entertained to suppress a decrease in interest.

  The second effect decoration rotator unit 530A has a screen (a main screen 471 and a sub screen 472) that can be switched on the door frame side second effect display device 460A provided in the operation button 410. Since the unit 470 and the projector 500 that projects and displays the effect image on the screen unit 470 are provided, an effect image completely different from the display of the effect image by the liquid crystal display device can be displayed, which has a strong impact on the player. You can entertain and entertain. More specifically, the screen unit 470 includes a semi-cylindrical main screen 471 and a sub-screen 472 having a disc-shaped relief-shaped sub-screen decoration member 476 in the center, and the center of the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474. A rotation angle of 90 degrees around the axis is provided in the circumferential direction.

  In the door frame side second effect display device 460A, when the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 is in the first position, the center axis of the semi-cylindrical shape is positioned so as to extend in the left-right direction. When viewed, it appears as a quadrangle (rectangle) extending vertically (see FIG. 74A). When the effect image is irradiated forward from the projector 500 disposed behind the main screen 471, the effect image is projected on the rear surface of the main screen 471 (see FIG. 75A), and is translucent milky white. The effect image projected from the front side can be viewed through the main screen 471. Since the main screen 471 is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape with a smooth surface, the effect image is curved in a semi-cylindrical shape. Accordingly, the display screen of the general liquid crystal display device is flat, whereas the display screen of the main screen 471 is curved in a semi-cylindrical shape. It can be recognized that it is different from the above, and the player can be surprised, the player can be noticed on the main screen 471, and the entertainment image projected and displayed on the main screen 471 can be enjoyed be able to.

  On the other hand, in the second position with the sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470 facing forward, the disc-shaped central axis substantially coincides with the central axis of the operation button 410, and when viewed from the front, the circular operation button 410 A sub-screen decoration member 476 that imitates a skull appears in the center (see FIG. 74 (b)). In this state, when the effect image is irradiated forward from the projector 500 arranged at the rear, the effect image is projected on the rear surface of the sub-screen 472. By the way, a flat and non-transparent sub-screen decoration substrate 477 is attached to the rear side of the sub-screen 472, so that the effect image (light) emitted from the projector 500 is applied to the sub-screen decoration substrate 477. As a result, the shadow of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 is projected onto the center of the rear surface of the sub-screen 472 (see FIG. 75B). Therefore, on the sub-screen 472, the effect image from the projector 500 is projected and displayed on the outer peripheral portion excluding the central portion on which the shadow of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is projected. At this time, if the LED 477a mounted on the front surface of the sub-screen decoration board 477 is caused to emit light, the central portion of the sub-screen 472 can be illuminated and decorated by the light, and the sub-screen provided in the center of the sub-screen 472 is provided. The screen decoration member 476 can be decorated with light emission. By causing the LED 477a of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 to emit light, the shadow of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 projected on the rear surface of the sub-screen 472 by the light from the projector 500 can be made difficult to see, and the entire front side of the sub-screen 472 Can be brightly decorated.

  The door frame side second effect display device 460A causes the LED 477a of the sub-screen decoration board 477 to emit light while the sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470 is directed forward, and produces an effect image (moving image) forward from the projector 500. When irradiated, an effect image is displayed on a portion of the sub-screen 472 where the shadow of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 is not projected, that is, on a portion outside the sub-screen decoration member 476 made of a decoration imitating a skull. The sub-screen decoration member 476 that is the inside of the sub-screen is decorated with light emission by the LED 477a of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477. In this state, the outer side of the light emitting decoration of the fixed sub-screen decoration member 476 is decorated with the effect image (moving image), and the decoration effect different from the light emitting decoration of the decoration member in the past pachinko machine is given. The player can be shown to the player, and a strong impact can be given to the player. At the same time, the player can be strongly focused on the sub-screen 472. In this state, because the light of the LED 477a shines brighter (with high brightness) than the brightness of the effect image inside the effect image, a partially high-intensity effect image that cannot be achieved with a conventional liquid crystal display device is displayed. It is possible to make the player's interest more attractive and to display an effect image that makes the player more entertaining.

  In the door frame side second effect display device 460A, with the effect image irradiated forward from the projector 500, the screen facing forward is rotated in an appropriate direction to change from the main screen 471 to the sub screen 472. When the sub-screen 472 is changed to the main screen 471, the main screen 471 and the sub-screen 472 are rotated while the main screen 471 and the sub-screen 472 are positioned in the projection range of the projector 500. The effect image is projected and displayed. That is, the effect image is displayed so as to straddle the main screen 471 and the sub screen 472. Therefore, when the main screen 471 is slowly changed to the sub screen 472, a mysterious visual effect that the peripheral decoration portion 472a and the sub screen decoration member 476 rotate on the effect image projected from the projector 500 is obtained. The player can be shown and entertained.

  As described above, the second effect decoration rotator unit 530A includes the first button decoration part 411a of the operation button 410 and the decoration (the peripheral decoration part 472a and the peripheral decoration member 478) of the screen unit 470 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A. ) Can show the player a decoration with movement and a three-dimensional feeling, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be obtained.

  The second effect decoration rotator unit 530A can irradiate light such as an effect image to the front of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 in which the LED 477a is mounted on the front behind the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412). The door frame side second effect display device 460A having the projector 500 is provided, and the inside of the operation button 410 can be satisfactorily decorated with the door frame side second effect display device 460A.

  Operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 in the decorative substrate unit 420 behind the second button decorative portion 411b facing the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the second effect decorative rotating body unit 530A and the operation button 410. The first LED 422a and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decoration board 423 are arranged, and the six second button decoration portions 411b of the operation button 410 are illuminated and decorated by causing the first LEDs 422a and 423a to emit light. be able to. As shown in FIG. 68, the first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 include a cylindrical main body 413a in the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and a frame unit. 415 is located between the cylindrical inner cylinder portion 416d of the frame main body 416, and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not leak to the inside of the main body portion 413a or the outer side of the inner cylinder portion 416d. Only the second button decoration portion 411b of the button 410 can be appropriately decorated for light emission.

  Further, the second effect decoration rotator unit 530A includes the second LED 422b and the operation button on the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 behind the frame side lens 417 facing the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415. The second LED 423b of the right outer decorative substrate 423 is arranged, and the frame side lens 417 can be decorated with light emission by causing the second LEDs 422b and 423b to emit light. The second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are disposed between the cylindrical inner cylinder 416d of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame main body 416. The light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylindrical portion 416d or the outside of the frame main body 416, and only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be appropriately decorated to emit light. .

  In the second effect decoration rotating body unit 530A, the frame top lens decoration substrate 482 of the upper bearing member 480 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A is arranged behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415, and the frame By emitting the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the top lens decoration substrate 482, the frame top lens 418 can be favorably decorated.

  The second effect decoration rotator unit 530A has display screens having different forms by rotating the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A disposed on the inner rear side of the operation button 410. An effect image can be displayed by switching to the main screen 471 or the sub screen 472, and an effect that cannot be achieved by a conventional pachinko machine in which the shape of the display screen changes (changes) can be presented to the player. , You can entertain the player with a strong impact.

[3-4h. Overall Configuration of Third Embodiment of Production Operation Unit]
Next, the third effect decoration rotator unit 530B, which is the third embodiment of the effect decoration rotator unit 530, will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 78 to FIG. FIG. 78A is a front view of a third effect operation unit that is different from the effect operation unit and the second effect operation unit in FIGS. 48 to 77, and FIG. 78B is a right side view of the third effect operation unit. FIG. FIG. 79 is a rear view of the third effect operation unit. FIG. 80A is a perspective view of the third performance operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 80B is a perspective view of the third performance operation unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 81 is an explanatory diagram of the third performance operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. 82 is a cross-sectional view taken along line LL in FIG. 79 (a). FIG. 83 is a cross-sectional view taken along line MM in FIG. 78 (b). FIG. 84 is an exploded perspective view of the third effect operation unit as seen from the front after being disassembled for each main member, and FIG. FIG.

  The third effect decoration rotator unit 530B can be attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit 320 in place of the effect decoration rotator unit 530 and the second effect decoration rotator unit 530A. The third effect decoration rotator unit 530B can be pressed by the player in the same manner as the effect decoration rotator unit 530. Hereinafter, in the third effect decoration rotator unit 530B, the same components as those in the effect decoration rotator unit 530 will be described with the same reference numerals.

  The third effect decoration rotator unit 530B has a circular outer shape and a transparent central portion excluding the outer peripheral edge. The operation button 410 can be pressed by the player, and surrounds the outer periphery of the operation button 410. The dish unit cover 326 A frame-shaped frame unit 415 attached to the production operation unit attaching portion 326a, and a decorative board unit arranged behind the operation button 410 and capable of emitting and decorating the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415. 420, a third base unit 520 attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415, the operation button 410 and the decorative board unit 420 being attached to the front surface, and a third base visible from the player side through the operation button 410. A decorative rotating body unit 530 attached to the unit 520; Eteiru.

[3-4h-1. Manual operation button]
The operation button 410 of the third effect decoration rotator unit 530B will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The operation button 410 of the third effect decoration rotator unit 530B is formed in a circular shape whose outer shape is slightly smaller in diameter than the height in the vertical direction of the dish unit 320, and the central side excluding the outer peripheral edge is formed transparent. . The operation button 410 has a transparent button lens 411 formed in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) so that the outer periphery is circular and the center side bulges forward, and the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. An annular button frame 412 attached to the front side, and a cylindrical button base 413 attached to sandwich the outer periphery of the button lens 411 on the rear side of the button frame 412 are provided.

  The operation button 410 of the third carry-out decoration rotator unit 530B has the same configuration as the operation button 410 of the effect decoration rotator unit 530, and is given the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof is omitted.

[3-4h-2. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the third effect decoration rotator unit 530B will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front side to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320 so as to surround the outer periphery from the front side of the operation button 410, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The frame unit 415 has an outer shape that matches the front end side of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a.

  The frame unit 415 includes a circular central opening 416a, a plurality of outer peripheral openings 416b arranged along the periphery of the central opening 416a, and a notch cut out with a predetermined width on the upper front surface of the central opening 416a. A frame-like frame body 416 that has a portion 416c and is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320, and is attached to the frame body 416 from the rear side so as to close the outer peripheral opening 416b. A pair of translucent frame side lenses 417 and a translucent frame top lens 418 attached from the front side to the frame main body 416 so as to close the notch 416c are provided.

  The frame unit 415 of the third effect decoration rotator unit 530B has the same configuration as the frame unit 415 of the effect decoration rotator unit 530, and is assigned the same reference numeral, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

[3-4h-3. Decorative board unit]
The decorative board unit 420 of the third effect decorative rotator unit 530B will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The decorative board unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the third base unit 520 below the frame unit 415, and can decorate the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 with light emission. The third effect decoration rotator unit 530B can be vibrated.

  The decorative substrate unit 420 includes a C-shaped substrate base 421 whose upper side is open, an operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and an operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 attached to the front surfaces of the left and right sides of the substrate base 421, respectively. A vibration motor 424 attached to the lower front portion of the substrate base 421, and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the substrate base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424.

  The operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 include the first LED 422 a and the first LED 423 a that can illuminate only the second button decoration portion 411 b of the operation button 410, and the frame side of the frame unit 415. A second LED 422b and a second LED 423b that can decorate only the lens 417 are provided.

  The decoration substrate unit 420 of the third effect decoration rotator unit 530B has the same configuration as the decoration substrate unit 420 of the effect decoration rotator unit 530, and is given the same reference numerals and will not be described in detail.

[3-4h-4. Third base unit]
The third base unit 520 of the third effect decoration rotating body unit 530B will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 is a perspective view of the third base unit of the third performance operation unit as seen from the front. The third base unit 520 of the third effect decorative rotator unit 530B has the operation button 410 movably attached in the front-rear direction, the decorative rotator unit 530 is attached, and is attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415. It is.

  The third base unit 520 is attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415, and includes four housing walls 521a that are hemispherically recessed rearward at the center, and four blind holes that are opened forward outside the housing wall 521a. An annular unit base 521 having two holding holes 521b, a frame top lens decorative substrate 522 attached to the upper front of the unit base 521, and four pieces inserted into the four holding holes 521b of the unit base 521, respectively. An operation button spring 523, three sensor holders 524 attached to the front surface of the unit base 521, three press detection sensors 525 that are attached to the sensor holders 524 to detect the pressing operation of the operation button 410, and a unit In the third stage operation unit attached to the rear side of the base 521 A substrate 526, and a third staging operation unit relay board cover 527 attached to the rear side of the unit base 521 so as to cover the rear side of the relay board 526, a.

  The third base unit 520 includes an effect operation unit first drive motor 528 (heat source) attached to the left side surface of the unit base 521, and a spur gear attached to the rotation shaft of the effect operation unit first drive motor 528. And a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 529 that meshes with the first drive gear and is rotatably attached to the unit base 521. The first transmission gear 529 meshes with a rotating body gear 531a of a decorative rotating body unit 530 described later.

  The unit base 521 has a substantially circular outer shape and is slightly smaller than the outer shape of the frame unit 415. In addition to the housing wall 521a and the holding hole 521b, the unit base 521 houses a light-shielding wall 521c that protrudes forward in a flat plate shape from the lower side of the part to which the frame top lens decorative substrate 437 is attached at the upper part of the front surface. A plurality of ventilation openings 521d penetrating through the wall 521a, a left protrusion 521e protruding forward from the left outer side of the storage wall 521a and the substantially vertical center, and the left protrusion 521e are accommodated so as to face each other. A right protruding portion 521f that protrudes forward from a substantially right center of the wall portion 521a and the vertical direction, a left shaft portion 521g that extends in a cylindrical shape from the left protruding portion 521e to the right, and an extension of the left shaft portion 521g A right bearing portion 521h that is coaxial with the axis (first axis CL1) and penetrates the right protruding portion 521f.

  The accommodation wall portion 521a recessed in a hemispherical shape to the rear of the unit base 521 is formed so that it can be accommodated in a state where the substantially half of the rear side of the decorative rotating body unit 530 is not in contact with the recessed front surface side.

  The four holding holes 521b of the unit base 521 are formed at positions corresponding to the four guide boss portions 413c of the button base 413 in the operation button 410 at the four corners on the upper, lower, left, and right sides of the housing wall 521a. These holding holes 521b are formed so that the inner diameter is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the guide boss portion 413c, and the guide boss portion 413c can be slidably inserted.

  More specifically, the upper left holding hole 521b of the four holding holes 521b is from the center line extending vertically through the center of the unit base 521 (the center of the operation button 410) to the center of the unit base 521. Thus, it is formed at a position rotated about 30 degrees counterclockwise. Of the four holding holes 521b, the holding hole 521b on the upper right side is a clockwise direction with respect to the center of the unit base 521 from the center line extending vertically through the center of the unit base 521 (the center of the operation button 410). It is formed at a position rotated about 47 degrees. On the other hand, the two holding holes 521b arranged on the lower side of the four holding holes 521b are respectively formed at positions opposite to the center of the unit base 521 with respect to the upper two holding holes 521b. .

  The light shielding wall 521c of the unit base 521 can prevent light from the frame top lens decoration substrate 522 from leaking downward, so that the frame top lens 418 can be decorated with light emission only by the frame top lens decoration substrate 522. Is to do.

  The left shaft portion 521g of the unit base 521 has a horizontally extending left end fixed to the left protruding portion 521e, and the right side thereof is rotatably inserted into the rotating body side left bearing portion 531b of the decorative rotating body unit 530. Is. In the right bearing portion 521h of the unit base 521, the cylindrical rotating body side right shaft portion 531c of the decorative rotating body unit 530 is rotatably inserted. The left shaft portion 521g and the right bearing portion 521h are arranged coaxially with respect to the first axis CL1 (see FIG. 83) extending in the horizontal direction. With the left shaft portion 521g and the right bearing portion 521h of the unit base 521, the decorative rotating body unit 530 can be rotatably mounted around the first axis CL1 extending in the horizontal direction.

  A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decoration substrate 522, and by emitting these LEDs, the frame top lens 418 in the frame unit 415 can be decorated with light emission. The lame top lens decorative substrate 522 has a white front surface, and the mounted LED is a full color LED.

  The operation button spring 523 is a coil spring and is inserted into the four holding holes 521b in the unit base 521 from the front. In the state where the operation button spring 523 is assembled to the third effect decorative rotator unit 530B, the rear end is in contact with the bottom surface of the holding hole 521b, and the front end protrudes rearward from the main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. The guide boss portion 413c is in contact with the rear end. The operation button spring 523 biases the operation button 410 forward.

  The three press detection sensors 525 are arranged at positions corresponding to the three detection pieces 413 d of the button base 413 in the operation button 410. More specifically, three press detection sensors 525 are arranged on the front surface of the unit base 521, one on the lower left side of the upper left holding hole 521b, one on the lower right side of the upper right holding hole 521b, and the other on the lower left side. Are attached to the lower right side of the holding holes 521b via the sensor holders 524, respectively. The three press detection sensors 525 are attached at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction around the center of the unit base 521. These three press detection sensors 525 can detect the three detection pieces 413 d of the operation button 410.

  The third effect operation unit relay board 526 is attached to the outside of the decorative rotating body unit 530 on the rear side of the unit base 521 and on the left outer side (right side in front view) of the housing wall 521a in rear view. The third effect operation unit relay board 526 includes an operation button left outer decoration board 422, an operation button right outer decoration board 423, a vibration motor 424, a frame top lens decoration board 522, a press detection sensor 525, and an effect operation unit first drive motor 528. The decorative operation unit second drive motor 534 (heat source), the first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535, the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536, and the door main body relay substrate of the door frame base unit 100 (illustration is shown). It is for relaying the connection to (omitted).

  The relay board cover 527 extends from the lower end of the portion covering the rear side of the third effect operation unit relay board 526 to the left in front view, and includes a leg portion 527a attached to the lower rear surface of the unit base 521. The leg portion 527a of the relay board cover 527 has a bottom surface extending substantially horizontally when assembled to the door frame 3 and a bottom plate portion 326i forming the bottom surface of the plate unit cover 326 in the plate unit 320. A slight gap is formed (see FIG. 26). As a result, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed or struck down, the frame unit 415 is not moved until the lower surface of the leg portion 527a comes into contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326. The impact can be absorbed by the mounting portion 416e and the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 being bent downward. After the lower surface of the leg portion 527a comes into contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the third effect decorative rotator unit 530B is restricted, and the effect operation unit of the attachment unit 416e of the frame unit 415 and the plate unit cover 326 is controlled. It is possible to prevent an undue force from acting on the attachment portion 326a and the like, and to prevent them from being damaged.

  The production operation unit first drive motor 528 is attached to the left side surface of the unit base 521, and the left shaft portion 521g of the unit base 521 is provided via the first drive gear (not shown) and the first transmission gear 529. And the decoration rotary body unit 530 rotatably attached by the right bearing part 521h can be rotated around the 1st axis line CL1 extended in the horizontal direction.

[3-4h-5. Decorative rotating body unit]
The decoration rotating body unit 530 of the third effect decoration rotating body unit 530B will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 82 to 85 and FIG. FIG. 87 (a) is a perspective view of the decorative rotating body unit of the third effect operating unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 87 (b) is a perspective view of the decorative rotating body unit of the third effect operation unit as viewed from the back. The decorative rotating body unit 530 is attached to the third base unit 520 and can show a movable effect to the player through the transparent portion of the operation button 410. As shown in the drawing, the decorative rotating body unit 530 has an overall outer surface formed in a substantially spherical shape.

  The decorative rotator unit 530 (decorative movable body) is rotatably attached to the unit base 521 of the third base unit 520, and includes a rotator base unit 531 formed in a disc shape, and a disc-shaped rotator base. The first decorative surface portion 532 is rotatably attached outside the one surface of the unit 531 and is rotatably attached outside the surface opposite to the first decorative surface portion 532 of the rotating body base unit 531. The second decorative surface portion 533 having a different decoration from the first decorative surface portion 532 and the rotary operation base unit 531 are mounted in the rotary base unit 531, and an effect operation unit No. 1 for rotating the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 is used. A two-drive motor 534 (see FIG. 83).

  As shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, the decorative rotator unit 530 is attached to one surface of the rotator base unit 531, and has a plurality of LEDs (light emitters) that can emit light toward the first decorative surface portion 532. , A heat source) mounted on the first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535 on which the heat source is mounted and the first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535 of the rotating body base unit 531, the light is directed toward the second decorative surface portion 533. And a second decorative surface portion decorative board 536 on which a plurality of LEDs (light emitters) capable of irradiating the light is mounted. The first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535 and the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536 are not mounted with the driver circuit of the mounted LED, and the mounted LED is outside the decorative rotating body unit 530. Energization is controlled by the provided driver circuit. When the driver circuit is provided outside as described above, the driver circuit can be hardly affected by the heat generated by the LED.

  The rotating body base unit 531 has a disk shape with a predetermined thickness, and the inside is formed to be hollow. The rotating body base unit 531 is attached at a predetermined position on the outer peripheral surface, and passes through the center of the rotating body gear 531a and a spur gear-shaped rotating body gear 531a that meshes with the first transmission gear 529 of the third base unit 520. The left shaft portion 521g is inserted into the rotating body side left bearing portion 531b so as to be relatively rotatable, and protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the outer peripheral surface opposite to the rotating body gear 531a so as to be relatively rotatable in the right bearing portion 521h. A rotating body side right shaft portion 531c to be inserted and a stopper 531d projecting outward on the proximal end side of the rotating body side right shaft portion 531c are provided.

  The rotator gear 531a, the rotator-side left bearing portion 531b, and the rotator-side right shaft portion 531c are orthogonal to the second axis CL2 passing through the disk-shaped center of the rotator base unit 531 and pass through the axial center of the outer peripheral surface. It arrange | positions coaxially with respect to uniaxial line CL1. The stopper 531d is formed so as to contact the front surface of the unit base 521 in the third base unit 520. The stopper 531d restricts the rotation range around the first axis CL1 extending in the horizontal direction of the decorative rotating body unit 530 relative to the third base unit 520 to a predetermined angular range (here, 180 degrees).

  The rotating body base unit 531 includes a bearing tube portion 531e that extends concentrically with the second axis CL2 passing through the center of the disk shape, and a plurality of peripheral surface decoration portions 531f that decorate the outer peripheral surface. I have. The shaft member 532d protruding from the first decorative surface portion 532 is inserted into the bearing tube portion 531e, and the shaft member 532d can be rotatably attached by bushes attached to both ends. The peripheral surface decoration portion 531f penetrates the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body base unit 531 and can decorate the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body base unit 531 to improve the appearance. Although the peripheral surface decorative portion 531f can release the heat in the rotating body base unit 531 to the outside as shown in FIG. 87 (b), the heat generation amount of the LED built in the rotating body base unit 531 is taken into consideration. In such a case, further cooling control is desired to be realized with the aim of realizing a gorgeous effect using the LED.

  The entire first decorative surface portion 532 is formed in a substantially hemispherical shape. The first decorative surface portion 532 has a logo decorative portion 532a made up of predetermined characters provided at the center of the bulged surface, and a translucent first formed radially around the logo decorative portion 532a. One main decorative portion 532b and a light-impermeable first sub-decoration formed so as to fill the outer periphery of the first main decorative portion 532b and the outer peripheral end forming a circular outer peripheral end of the first decorative surface portion 532 A portion 532c and a shaft member 532d protruding in a columnar shape from the back surface along the center are provided.

  The logo decoration portion 532a and the first main decoration portion 532b are decorated with light emission by the light from the LEDs mounted on the first decoration surface portion decoration substrate 535. The shaft member 532d is rotatably inserted into the bearing tube portion 531e via a bush. The shaft member 532d is formed in such a length that it passes through the bearing tube portion 531e of the rotating body base unit 531 and extends to the opposite side in a state assembled to the decorative rotating body unit 530, and the central axis is the first axis. It will be in the state which corresponded with the 2nd axis line CL2 orthogonal to CL1.

  The first decorative surface portion 532 can be rotated around the second axis CL2 by attaching the shaft member 532d to the bearing tube portion 531e of the rotating body base unit 531.

  On the other hand, the second decorative surface portion 533 is disposed between the rotary decorative portion 533a attached to the tip of the shaft member 532d of the first decorative surface portion 532, and between the rotary decorative portion 533a and the rotary body base unit 531. And a fixed decorative portion 533b attached to the base unit 531. Since the rotation decoration part 533a is attached to the shaft member 532d, it can rotate together with the first decoration surface part 532 via the shaft member 532d, and can rotate around the second axis CL2. On the other hand, since the fixed decorative portion 533b is attached to the rotating body base unit 531, it does not rotate together with the first decorative surface portion 532 via the shaft member 532d and does not rotate around the second axis.

  The rotating decoration portion 533a is formed in a decorative shape having a plurality of fins (blades) in the circumferential direction, and has a plurality of decorations extending concentrically in the circumferential direction. The rotation decoration portion 533a can generate wind by rotating. The fixed decorative portion 533b is formed with a decoration having a plurality of radially extending lines. The rotating decorative portion 533a and the fixed decorative portion 533b are partially translucent, and are decorated with light emission by the light from the LEDs mounted on the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536.

  As shown in FIG. 83, the effect operation unit second drive motor 534 is mounted in the rotating body base unit 531 so that the rotating shaft protrudes rearward. A spur gear-like second drive gear 534 a is attached to the rotation shaft of the rendering operation unit second drive motor 534. The second drive gear 534a meshes with a spur gear-like decorative surface portion gear 534b fixed in the middle of the shaft member 532d. Therefore, the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 (rotated decorative portion 533a) are provided by the effect operation unit second drive motor 534 via the second drive gear 534a, decorative surface portion gear 534b, and shaft member 532d. Can be rotated together.

  The first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535 and the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536 are configured such that the front surface is white and the mounted LEDs are colored in full color.

  In the decorative rotating body unit 530 of the present embodiment, a first decorative surface portion 532 and a second decorative surface portion 533 having different decorations are arranged in the circumferential direction around the second axis CL2. Specifically, the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are provided 180 degrees apart in the circumferential direction.

[3-4h-6. Effects of the Third Effect Operation Unit Next, the effects of the third effect decorative rotator unit 530B will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 78, 81, 88, and the like. FIG. 88 (a) is a front view of the third effect operation unit shown with the second decorative surface portion of the decorative rotating body unit facing forward, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing seen from the direction which exists. FIG. 89 (a) is an explanatory view showing the rotation of the first decorative surface portion with the first decorative surface portion facing forward in the third effect operation unit, and FIG. 89 (b) is the second decorative surface portion in the third effect operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows rotation of a 2nd decoration surface part in the state which faced the front.

  The third effect decoration rotator unit 530B of the present embodiment can show the effect image to the player in accordance with the game state that changes as the game ball is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5, It is possible to entertain and entertain a player in a player participation type effect presented to the player by operating the operation button 410.

  As shown in FIGS. 201 and 202, the third effect decoration rotating body unit 530 </ b> B has an overall height equal to the height of the portion below the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. They are formed at approximately the same height. The third effect decorative rotator unit 530 </ b> B is formed so that its full width is slightly larger than 1/3 of the full width of the door frame 3. The third effect decoration rotator unit 530B is arranged at the center in the left-right direction below the game area 5a (the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110) in the front view.

  In the third effect decoration rotating body unit 530B, the upper part of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320. When the third effect decoration rotator unit 530B is attached to the tray unit 320, the lower surface of the leg portion 527a of the relay board cover 527 serving as the bottom surface is in contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the tray unit cover 326 of the tray unit 320. A gap is formed between them. That is, only the upper part of the third effect decoration rotating body unit 530B is attached to the dish unit 320, and is attached in a suspended state.

  In the third effect decoration rotator unit 530B, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner periphery of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a. It is installed to become. Thereby, in the third effect decoration rotator unit 530B, the central axis CL (see FIG. 82) of the transparent operation button 410 bulging forward in a curved surface shape (substantially spherical shape) is vertical. It is inclined at an angle of 63 degrees with respect to the line so as to move upward as it goes forward. As a result, when a player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 in order to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the player's head is positioned above the plate unit 320 (third effect decoration rotating body unit 530B). Since the game board 5 is located in front of the center of the game area 5a, the center axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the head of the player. Accordingly, when the player drops his / her line of sight from the game area 5a to the third effect decorative rotator unit 530B (operation button 410), the operation button 410 is allowed to be viewed from the front (projection view from a direction parallel to the central axis CL). As a result, the operation button 410, the decorative rotating body unit 530 in the operation button 410, and the like can be visually recognized in a good state.

  In the third effect decorative rotator unit 530B, the four guide boss portions 413c of the operation button 410 are slidably inserted into the four holding holes 521b of the third base unit 520, respectively, and forward by the operation button spring 523. It is energized. In the normal state (the state where the operation button 410 is not pressed), the third effect decoration rotator unit 530B is the effect decoration rotator unit 530 and the second effect decoration rotator unit 530A by the urging force of the operation button spring 523. Similarly, the front end of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is in contact with a portion near the central opening 416a on the rear surface of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415.

  In the normal state, the third effect decorative rotator unit 530B has a central side (center axis CL side) from the vicinity of the inner periphery of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410, and a central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415. Projects forward. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (substantially spherical shape) in the operation button 410, a portion that protrudes forward from the inner periphery (inside) of the button frame 412 is formed. The frame unit 415 protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 (see FIG. 82 and the like).

  Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415 is about 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (the front end) with respect to the central axis CL direction of the operation button 410 is the frame unit. It protrudes about 4 cm forward from the front surface of 415.

  In a normal state, when the player presses the operation button 410 of the third effect decoration rotator unit 530B, the operation button 410 moves rearward along the central axis CL against the urging force of the operation button spring 523. When the rear end of the operation button 410 comes into contact with the front surface of the unit base 521 of the third base unit 520, the backward movement is restricted and the backward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, the button lens 411 bulging forward in a curved surface shape (substantially spherical shape) is pressed.

  The operation button 410 has a very large outer diameter compared to the operation buttons for production provided in the conventional pachinko machine, so the periphery of the button lens 411 away from the center is pressed. There is a high possibility of being. More specifically, while the operation buttons for effects in the conventional pachinko machine are attached so that the central axis extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, the third effect decorative rotator unit 530B of the present embodiment. Since the center axis CL is inclined with respect to the vertical line as in the case of the effect decoration rotator unit 530 and the second effect decoration rotator unit 530A, the operation button 410 is attached to the conventional pachinko machine. Similarly, when the operation button 410 is pressed from above, a part away from the central axis CL of the operation button 410 is pressed as shown by a white arrow in FIG.

  By the way, the operation buttons for performance in the conventional pachinko machine are formed with a flat surface on which the player presses, so when the operation button is enlarged with the flat part being pressed When pressing the part off the center of the operation button, the surface to be pressed is tilted so that the pressed part is retracted first, and the operation button cannot be receded straight, There is a possibility that the pressing operation cannot be performed.

  On the other hand, the operation button 410 of the third effect decorative rotator unit 530B of the present embodiment has a curved surface shape (a substantially spherical surface) in which a portion (button lens 411) pressed by the player bulges forward. Therefore, when a pressing operation is performed at a position away from the center of the operation button 410, the force is distributed over the entire operation button 410, making it difficult for the operation button 410 to tilt and the operation button 410 to move straight back. Can be moved to. Therefore, no matter which position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly retracted without tilting, so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected and the operation button 410 is pressed. The operation to operate can be fully enjoyed.

  In the third effect decoration rotator unit 530B, the vibration motor 424 is attached to the lower front surface of the substrate base 421 in the decoration substrate unit 420, and as described above, the third effect decoration rotator unit 530B is suspended. Thus, only the upper part is attached to the production operation unit attachment part 326a of the dish unit cover 326. Therefore, when vibration is generated by rotating the weight 424a by the vibration motor 424, the part farthest from the attached part is generated. Since the vibration is generated, the entire third effect decoration rotator unit 530B can be vibrated greatly (strongly), and the vibration can be transmitted to the player touching the third effect decoration rotator unit 530B. it can. Since the vibration motor 424 is disposed immediately below the position where the player can relatively easily press the operation, strong vibrations can be transmitted to the player who is pressing the operation button 410, You can be surprised and entertained.

  Further, the third effect decoration rotator unit 530B is attached to the dish unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the lower surface of the leg portion 527a of the relay board cover 527 forming the lower surface and the dish unit. Since a gap is formed between the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the cover 326, until the lower surface of the leg portion 527a comes into contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i when the operation button 410 is strongly pressed or struck down. In the meantime, the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, etc. can be bent downward to absorb the impact. After the lower surface of the leg portion 527a comes into contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B is restricted, and the effect operation of the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the plate unit cover 326 is performed. An unreasonable force can be avoided from acting on the unit mounting portion 326a and the like, and damage to the third effect decorative rotator unit 530B and the like can be prevented. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 is pressed or hit with a strong force, for example, when the player is presented with an effect of pressing the operation button 410 of the third effect decoration rotating body unit 530B, the operation button 410 is pressed. And the third effect decoration rotating body unit 530B and the like are not damaged, so that the interruption of the game due to the damage can be avoided, the lowering of the player's interest can be suppressed, and the damage can be made difficult. An increase in the burden on the game hall side can be suppressed.

  As described above, the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 to be pressed by the player is formed in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) protruding forward, so that it has a flat plate shape. In comparison with the strength and rigidity, even if it is strongly struck, the impact can be dispersed throughout the button lens 411 and is not easily damaged.

  Since the third effect decoration rotator unit 530B includes the first button decoration part 411a extending from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 to the center side of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, the first button decoration part 411a. The concave and convex decoration makes it difficult to see the back at the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. Behind the portion where the first button decoration portion 411a is formed (rear in the direction of the central axis CL), the inner peripheral surface of the body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the outer peripheral surface of the decorative rotating body unit 530 The first button decoration portion 411a located in front of the gap makes it difficult to see the gap on the outer periphery of the decorative rotating body unit 530 from the front side (player side). . As a result, even if the operation button 410 that can be pressed is provided with the decorative rotating body unit 530 that rotates, the appearance of the operation button 410 can be prevented from deteriorating, and the player who sees the operation button 410 feels uncomfortable. And the decorative rotating body unit 530 can be disposed without any problem in the transparent operation button 410, and the operation button 410 and the decorative rotating body unit 530, and thus the overall appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. Can be better.

  Furthermore, the third effect decoration rotary unit 530B is added to the decoration rotary unit 530 disposed in the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412), to the first decoration surface part decoration substrate 535 and the second decoration surface part decoration substrate 536. The first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 can be illuminated and decorated in the operation button 410 by causing a plurality of LEDs mounted thereon to emit light. When the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are illuminated, the interior of the operation button 410 can be illuminated. At this time, the button base 413 of the operation button 410 includes a cylindrical main body 413a that surrounds the outer periphery of the decorative rotating body unit 530. There is no leakage, and only the inside of the operation button 410 can be decorated with light emission.

  The third effect decoration rotating body unit 530B has the operation button left outer decoration board in the decoration board unit 420 behind the second button decoration part 411b facing the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the operation button 410. The first LED 422a of the 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decoration board 423 are arranged, and the six second button decoration portions 411b of the operation button 410 are lit and decorated by causing the first LEDs 422a and 423a to emit light. Can be made. The first LED 422a of the operation button outer left decorative board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are a cylindrical main body 413a in the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and a cylinder in the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415. (See FIGS. 52 and 83, etc.), and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a is inside the main body 413a (decorative rotating body unit 530 side) and the inner cylinder. There is no leakage to the outside of the portion 416d, and only the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 can be appropriately decorated with light emission.

  Further, the third effect decorative rotator unit 530B includes the second LED 422b and the operation button on the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 behind the frame side lens 417 facing the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415. The second LED 423b of the right outer decorative substrate 423 is arranged, and the frame side lens 417 can be decorated with light emission by causing the second LEDs 422b and 423b to emit light. The second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are disposed between the cylindrical inner cylinder 416d of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame main body 416. The light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylindrical portion 416d or the outside of the frame main body 416, and only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be appropriately decorated to emit light. .

  In the third effect decoration rotating body unit 530B, the frame top lens decoration substrate 522 in the third base unit 520 is disposed behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415, and is mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decoration substrate 522. By emitting light from the plurality of LEDs, the frame top lens 418 can be decorated. From the lower side of the unit base 521 where the frame top lens decorative substrate 522 is attached in the third base unit 520, a flat light shielding wall portion 521c projects forward to the vicinity of the rear of the lower end of the frame top lens 418. The light from the LED on the frame top lens decoration substrate 522 does not leak to the operation button 410 or the frame side lens 417 side, and only the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 can be appropriately decorated for light emission.

  The third effect decoration rotator unit 530B of the present embodiment can visually recognize the decoration rotator unit 530 disposed on the rear side through the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410 from the front. In the normal state, the third effect decoration rotator unit 530B has the first decoration surface portion 532 of the decoration rotator unit 530 facing forward as shown in FIGS. In this state, the central axis of the shaft member 532d (second axis CL2) of the first decorative surface portion 532 is substantially coincident with the central axis CL of the operation button 410 (see FIG. 82). In a normal state, the rotational position of the first decorative surface portion 532 around the second axis CL2 is rotated and stopped while the logo decorative portion 532a having directionality is directed in the correct direction.

  In a normal state, the stopper 531d of the rotating body base unit 531 in the decorative rotating body unit 530 is in contact with the front surface above the right bearing portion 521h of the unit base 521 in the third base unit 520. That is, in a normal state, the rotation of the decorative rotating body unit 530 in the direction in which the upper part moves rearward is restricted by the stopper 531d with respect to the first axis line CL1 extending horizontally.

  In this normal state, the rendering operation unit first drive motor 528 in the third base unit 520 causes the rotating body gear 531a of the decorative rotating body unit 530 to pass through the first drive gear (not shown) and the first transmission gear 529. Is rotated counterclockwise in the right side view, the decorative rotating body unit 530 rotates around the first axis CL1 so that the upper part thereof moves forward. When the decorative rotating body unit 530 rotates 180 degrees around the first axis CL1 from the normal state, the stopper 531d comes into contact with the front surface below the right bearing portion 521h of the unit base 521, and further rotation is restricted. At the same time, the rotational drive by the rendering operation unit first drive motor 528 is stopped.

  In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the 3rd base unit 520 is provided with the rotation detection sensor which detects the rotation position of the decoration rotary body unit 530, and based on the detection by a rotation detection sensor, the decoration rotary body unit 530 is equipped. The rotational position is controlled.

  When the decorative rotator unit 530 is rotated 180 degrees around the first axis CL1 from the normal state, the second decorative surface portion 533 is directed forward as shown in FIG. Accordingly, the second decorative surface portion 533 can be satisfactorily visually recognized through the transparent button lens 411 in the operation button 410. In this state, the second axis CL <b> 2 of the second decorative surface portion 533 is substantially coincident with the center axis CL of the operation button 410.

  The third effect decoration rotator unit 530B extends coaxially with the second axis CL2 via the second drive gear 534a and the decoration surface gear 534b by the effect operation unit second drive motor 534 in the decoration rotator unit 530. When the shaft member 532d is rotated, the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 attached to both ends of the shaft member 532d can be rotated simultaneously (see FIG. 89). In other words, the production operation unit second drive motor 534 rotates the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 around the second axis CL2 orthogonal to the horizontally extending first axis CL1. Can do.

  Although not shown, the decorative rotating body unit 530 includes a rotation detection sensor that detects the rotation positions of the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533. The decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 can be stopped at an arbitrary rotational position. Therefore, even if it has the logo decoration part 532a which has directionality like the 1st decoration surface part 532, since rotation can be stopped in the position according to the directionality, the decoration of the 1st decoration surface part 532 is spoiled. The decorativeness can be surely exhibited.

  The third effect decorative rotator unit 530B includes the first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535 and the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536 provided in the decorative rotating body unit 530, and the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533. Each can be illuminated. The light emitting decorations of the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 by the first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535 and the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536 rotate around the first axis CL1 in which the decorative rotating body unit 530 extends horizontally. Or when the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are rotating around the second axis CL2 orthogonal to the first axis CL1.

  The second decorative surface portion 533 includes a rotating decorative portion 533a that rotates and a fixed decorative portion 533b that does not rotate. When a plurality of LEDs are caused to emit light, a part of the light irradiated forward through the fixed decorative portion 533b is a light-impermeable portion or a colored portion of the rotating decorative portion 533a rotating Therefore, the player can show the flickering flashing decoration to the player and attract the player's attention strongly.

[3-4h-7. Movable production in the third production operation unit]
Next, the movable effect in the third effect decoration rotator unit 530B will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 90 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the movable effect that rotates the decorative rotating body unit in the third effect operation unit. FIG. 91 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the movable effect of rotating the decorative rotating body unit in a state where the first decorative surface portion and the second decorative surface portion are rotated in the third effect operation unit. First, with reference to FIG. 90 etc., the movable effect of the decoration rotary body unit 530 using only the effect operation unit first drive motor 528 will be described. In a normal state, as shown in FIG. 90A and the like, the first decorative surface portion 532 having the logo decorative portion 532a is directed forward.

  As an example of a movable effect that rotates only around the first axis CL1 that extends horizontally, from the normal state (the state of FIG. 90 (a)), the effect operation unit first drive motor 528 causes the first drive gear (not shown). Omission) The first decorative gear unit 530 is rotated 180 degrees in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the right side through the first transmission gear 529 and the rotary gear 531a without stopping midway. The second decorative surface portion 533 arranged on the opposite side of the surface portion 532 is set to face forward (see FIG. 90 (d)). Thereby, it is possible to show the player a movable effect such that the second decorative surface portion 533 moves and appears from above while rotating so that the first decorative surface portion 532 moves downward. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the impression that the first decorative surface portion 532 is suddenly switched to the second decorative surface portion 533 having a different decoration, which can surprise the player and change the decoration. It is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and it is possible to raise a sense of expectation for the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

  As a movable effect different from the above, the effect operation unit first is set so that the decorative rotating body unit 530 reciprocates in the counterclockwise direction in the right side view within an angle range of 0 degrees to 60 degrees from the normal state. The drive motor 528 is rotated forward and backward a plurality of times. Thereby, when the first decorative surface portion 532 is rotated so as to face downward, a part of the second decorative surface portion 533 is slightly visible with the plurality of peripheral surface decorative portions 531f interposed between the first decorative surface portion 532 and the first decorative surface portion 532. (See FIG. 90B), the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the second decorative surface portion 533 that is visible and hidden as the decorative rotating body unit 530 reciprocally rotates. The player's sense of expectation for the arrival of a chance can be increased depending on whether or not the second decorative surface portion 533 faces forward. Thereafter, the decorative rotator unit 530 is returned to the base state (the state shown in FIG. 90A), thereby making it possible to suggest that the player does not have a chance. On the other hand, by further rotating the decorative rotating body unit 530 so that the second decorative surface portion 533 is directed forward (state shown in FIG. 90 (d)), it is possible to suggest that a chance has arrived. Entertainers and suppress the decline of interest.

  As a movable effect different from the above, from the normal state, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise in the right side view, and the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body base unit 531 is directed forward. (See FIG. 90 (c)). Thereby, with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body base unit 531 facing forward, the first decorative surface portion 532 faces downward and the second decorative surface portion 533 faces upward on the upper side. Since the decoration of the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 is unclear, the plurality of peripheral surface decorations relatively provided on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body base unit 531 are provided. The decoration of the part 531f can be clearly shown, and the decoration of the peripheral surface decoration part 531f can be enjoyed. The decoration rotating body unit 530 stops the rotation of the plurality of peripheral surface decoration portions 531f at an intermediate position facing forward, thereby allowing the player to feel a change in the game situation and expecting the player to play the game. A feeling can be raised. Thereafter, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is rotated in a predetermined direction so that the first decorative surface portion 532 is directed forward like the base, or the second decorative surface portion 533 is directed forward. The same effects as described above can be obtained.

  Further, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is rotated from the normal state by 90 degrees in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the right side (see FIG. 90C), and the rotation angle is set at a predetermined angle around the rotation angle. The production operation unit first drive motor 528 is rotated forward and backward a plurality of times so as to reciprocate within the range. Accordingly, the rotary body base unit 531 (a plurality of peripheral surface decorative portions 531f) is sandwiched so that the first decorative surface portion 532 side can be seen more or the second decorative surface portion 533 side can be seen more. Whether the first decorative surface portion 532 faces the front or the second decorative surface portion 533 faces the front, the player can be excited and entertained to suppress a decrease in interest. Thereafter, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is rotated in a predetermined direction so that the first decorative surface portion 532 is directed forward or the second decorative surface portion 533 is directed forward, as described above. The effect of this can be achieved.

  As a movable effect different from the above, from the normal state, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is rotated 180 degrees, and the second decorative surface portion 533 is directed forward (see FIG. 90 (d)). As a reference, it is possible to perform a movable effect that performs the operation opposite to the above, and it is possible to achieve the same effects as described above. In this case, the second decorative surface portion 533 facing forward is rotated so as to move upward, and the first decorative surface portion 532 appears from below, so that the player feels ascending momentum. And the expectation for the game can be enhanced, and the upward rotation of the second decorative surface portion 533 brings the player's line of sight into the game area 5a located above the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B. The game area 5a can be enjoyed in the game, production, etc., and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  When executing the above-described movable effect, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535 and the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536 are caused to emit light appropriately, so that the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 532 are output. The decorative surface portion 533 is appropriately illuminated. This makes it easier to see the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 visible through the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410, so that the player can clearly recognize the difference between the decorations. A premium feeling due to a difference in decoration can be sufficiently exhibited, and the decoration can be enjoyed, and a decrease in the interest of the player in the game can be suppressed. By making the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 light emitting decorated, it is possible to direct the player's interest to the operation buttons 410. The player can be prompted to press the operation button 410, and the player can entertain and entertain the player participation type effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 91 and the like, a movable effect of the decorative rotating body unit 530 using the effect operation unit first drive motor 528 and the effect operation unit second drive motor 534 will be described. In the initial state, as shown in FIG. 91A, the first decorative surface portion 532 having the logo decorative portion 532a is directed forward, and the first decorative surface portion 532 is the rendering operation unit second drive motor. 534 is rotated around the second axis CL2 (here, the clockwise direction) extending so as to coincide with the center axis CL of the operation button 410. In this state, since the first decorative surface portion 532 rotates around the second axis CL2, it is difficult for the player to recognize the logo of the logo decorative portion 532a having directionality.

  As an example of a movable effect performed in a state where the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are rotated by the effect operation unit second drive motor 534, the first decorative surface portion 532 (second decorative surface portion 533) is set to the second axis. While rotating around CL2, the effect operation unit first drive motor 528 causes the decorative rotating body unit 530 to rotate 180 degrees in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the right side without stopping in the middle. The second decorative surface portion 533 rotating on the opposite side of the one decorative surface portion 532 is set in a state of facing forward (see FIG. 91 (d)). As a result, the first decorative surface portion 532 that has been rotated clockwise is suddenly switched to the second decorative surface portion 533 having a different decoration, and the second decorative surface portion 533 (the rotational decorative portion 533a) is replaced with the first decorative surface portion 532. Is rotating in the counterclockwise direction of the opposite direction, so it can give a strong impact to the player, attract the player's attention strongly, and something to the player It can be thought that there is a good thing, it can raise the expectation for a game and can suppress the fall of interest.

  As a movable effect different from the above, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is in a state where the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are rotated around the second axis CL2 by the effect operation unit second drive motor 534. The rendering operation unit first drive motor 528 is rotated forward and backward a plurality of times so as to reciprocate in the counterclockwise direction within an angle range of 0 degrees to 60 degrees in the right side view. Thus, when the first decorative surface portion 532 rotating around the second axis CL2 rotates around the first axis CL1 so as to face downward, the first decorative surface portion 532 rotates around the second axis CL2 above the first decorative surface portion 532. A plurality of non-peripheral decorative portions 531f are visible, and a part of the second decorative surface portion 533 rotating around the second axis CL2 is slightly visible above the plurality of peripheral decorative portions 531f. (See FIG. 91 (b)). Therefore, the decorative rotator unit 530 can reciprocately rotate around the first axis CL1, thereby attracting the player's interest strongly to the second decorative surface portion 533 that is visible and hidden. Whether or not 533 faces forward can increase the player's expectation for the arrival of a chance. Thereafter, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is rotated in a predetermined direction around the first axis CL1, and the first decorative surface portion 532 is directed forward (state shown in FIG. 91 (a)), or the second decorative member. If the surface portion 533 is in the forward direction (the state shown in FIG. 91 (b)), and the player wants it, it can be convinced that a chance has arrived, and the player will be entertained and entertaining will be suppressed. Can be made. Note that after the first decorative surface portion 532 rotating around the second axis CL2 is directed forward, the rotation may be stopped so that the logo decorative portion 532a of the first decorative surface portion 532 is in the correct orientation. As a result, the player can clearly recognize the logo decoration portion 532a of the first decoration surface portion 532, thereby suggesting the arrival of a chance and increasing the player's expectation for the game. Can suppress a decrease in interest.

  As a movable effect different from the above, from the state where the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are rotated around the second axis CL2 by the effect operation unit second drive motor 534, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is changed. By rotating 90 degrees counterclockwise in the right side view with respect to the first axis CL1, the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body base unit 531 is directed forward (see FIG. 91 (c)). Thereby, with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body base unit 531 facing forward, the first decorative surface portion 532 faces downward and the second decorative surface portion 533 faces upward on the upper side. Thus, since they are positioned and move so as to move in the same direction, the decoration of the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 can be in an unclear state. Therefore, the plurality of peripheral surface decorative portions 531f on the outer peripheral surface of the stationary rotating body base unit 531 sandwiched between them can be clearly shown. Therefore, the stationary peripheral surface decoration portion 531f can be made conspicuous in the operation button 410, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the peripheral surface decoration portion 531f, and the decoration can be enjoyed. Thereafter, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is rotated in a predetermined direction so that the first decorative surface portion 532 is directed forward like the base, or the second decorative surface portion 533 is directed forward. The same effects as described above can be obtained.

  Further, while rotating the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 around the second axis CL2, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is rotated around the first axis CL1 so that the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body base unit 531 moves forward. In the state (refer to FIG. 91 (c)), the rendering operation unit first drive motor 528 is moved a plurality of times so as to reciprocate within a predetermined angle range around the first axis CL around the state. To rotate forward and backward. As a result, the first decorative surface portion 532 side and the second decorative surface portion 533 side that are rotating around the second axis CL2 can be seen more or less, with the rotating body base unit 531 (the plurality of peripheral surface decoration portions 531f) interposed therebetween. Therefore, the player can be thrilled and excited by whether the first decorative surface portion 532 faces the front or the second decorative surface portion 533 faces the front. Can be made. Thereafter, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is rotated in a predetermined direction around the first axis CL1, and the first decorative surface portion 532 is directed forward (state shown in FIG. 91 (a)), or the second decorative member. By making the surface portion 533 forward (state shown in FIG. 91 (b)), the same operational effects as described above can be obtained.

  As a movable effect different from the above, after rotating the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 around the second axis CL2 from the normal state, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is rotated 180 degrees around the first axis CL. The second decorative surface portion 533 is rotated 180 degrees around the first axis CL from a state where the second decorative surface portion 533 is rotated and the second decorative surface portion 533 is rotated forward or from a normal state. , The first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are rotated around the second axis CL2, and this is the reverse (see FIG. 91 (d)). A movable effect that performs the above-described operation can be performed, and the same effects as described above can be achieved. In this case, the rotating second decorative surface portion 533 facing forward rotates around the first axis CL1 so as to move upward, and is opposite to the second decorative surface portion 533 with respect to the second axis CL2. Since the first decorative surface portion 532 rotating in the direction will appear from below, it is possible to make the player feel lifted, to increase the expectation for the game, and to increase the second axis. Due to the upward movement of the second decorative surface portion 533 rotating around CL2, the player's line of sight can be directed into the game area 5a above the third effect decorative rotator unit 530B. It is possible to entertain a game or performance within 5a and suppress a decrease in interest.

  When executing the above-mentioned movable effect, the rotation of the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 around the second axis CL2 by the effect operation unit second drive motor 534 is reversed in the middle. Alternatively, it may be reciprocally rotated within a predetermined angle range. The rotation speed around the first axis CL1 of the decorative rotating body unit 530 by the rendering operation unit first drive motor 528, and the second axis of the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 by the carry-out operation unit second drive motor 534. The rotational speed around CL2 may be the same rotational speed, or a different rotational speed. By appropriately combining these, it is possible to increase the number of movable effect patterns by the third effect decoration rotating body unit 530B, and it is difficult to get tired of the player by abundant variations of the movable effect, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest. be able to.

  When executing the above-described movable effect, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535 and the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536 are caused to emit light appropriately and rotate around the second axis CL2. The first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are appropriately illuminated. Thereby, in a state where the first decorative surface portion 532 rotating around the second axis CL2 is directed forward, the entire transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410 can be decorated with light emission with uniform light. On the other hand, in the state in which the second decorative surface portion 533 rotating around the second axis CL2 is directed forward, the transparent button lens 411 is flickered by periodically blocking light by the rotary decorative portion 533a. It can be decorated with light. Thus, since the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 can be variously decorated with light emission, the player's interest can be directed to the operation button 410, and the player participation type effect that causes the operation button 410 to be pressed. When the game is executed, the player can be prompted to press the operation button 410, and the player can participate in the player participation type effect and entertain.

[3-4h-8. Exhaust heat action of the third stage operation unit]
Next, the exhaust heat action of the third effect decoration rotator unit 530B will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 92 is an explanatory diagram showing the air flow caused by the rotation of the second decorative surface portion in the third performance operation unit. In the third effect decoration rotator unit 530B of the present embodiment, the decoration rotator unit 530 disposed on the rear side of the operation button 410 is the unit base 521 (accommodating wall portion 521a) of the operation button 410 and the third base unit 520. ) Is arranged in the button internal space AS closed at the front and rear (see FIG. 92). The housing wall 521a that forms the rear part of the button inner space AS and covers the rear side of the decorative rotating body unit 530 is formed with a plurality of ventilation ports 521d penetrating in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the button internal space AS communicates with the inside of the attachment space 326j of the dish unit cover 326 to which the third effect decoration rotator unit 530B is attached through the plurality of ventilation openings 521d. In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, attachment space 326j is connected with the exterior of the pachinko machine 1 through the exhaust port formed in the baseplate part 326i and the lower plate cover 340.

  In the third effect decorative rotator unit 530B, in the decorative rotator unit 530, one shaft member 532d is attached to the bearing cylinder portion 531e of the rotator base unit 531 so as to be rotatable coaxially with the second axis CL. A first decorative surface portion 532 and a second decorative surface portion 533 having different decorations are respectively attached to both ends, and the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 can rotate together. The rendering operation unit second drive motor 534 that rotates the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 is attached in the hollow rotating body base unit 531. On the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body base unit 531, a plurality of peripheral surface decoration portions 531 f made of penetrating hole-shaped decorations are formed, and through these peripheral surface decoration portions 531 f, Are in communication with each other.

  Of the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 that are rotatably mounted around the second axis CL in the decorative rotating body unit 530, the second decorative surface portion 533 rotates around the second axis CL. The decorative portion 533a is formed in a shape that can generate wind when rotated.

  In the third effect decorative rotator unit 530B having the above-described configuration, the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are effected with the first decorative surface portion 532 of the decorative rotator unit 530 facing forward. When the unit second drive motor 534 is rotated in a predetermined direction around the second axis CL, the wind generated by the rotation of the rotary decorative portion 533a in the second decorative surface portion 533 is generated in the housing wall 521a covering the rear. Through the plurality of ventilation ports 521d, the rear side of the housing wall 521a comes out (see FIG. 92A). With the flow of this wind, the air in the button inner space AS in which the decorative rotating body unit 530 is accommodated can be forcibly exhausted to the outside for ventilation. Since the button inner space AS and the inside of the rotating body base unit 531 communicate with each other through the plurality of peripheral surface decoration portions 531f, the heat released from the rendering operation unit second drive motor 534 is used as the plurality of peripheral surface decorations. Through the portion 531f, the button inner space AS, and the ventilation opening 521d, the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B can be discharged to the rear (in the mounting space 326j of the dish unit 320). Thereby, it can suppress that the temperature in the decoration rotary body unit 530 or the operation button 410 rises abnormally, and generation | occurrence | production of the malfunction by heat can be prevented.

  The third effect decorative rotator unit 530B of the present embodiment is configured such that the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are changed to the effect operation unit No. 1 with the second decorative surface portion 533 of the decorative rotator unit 530 facing forward. When the two-drive motor 534 is rotated in the predetermined direction around the second axis CL, the wind generated by the rotation of the rotary decorative portion 533a in the second decorative surface portion 533 is guided rearward along the inner surface of the operation button 410. Then, it passes through the plurality of ventilation ports 521d of the housing wall 521a covering the back of the decorative rotating body unit 530, and comes out rearward from the housing wall 521a (see FIG. 92B). This wind flow allows the air in the button inner space AS, in which the decorative rotating body unit 530 is accommodated, to be forcibly discharged to the outside for ventilation, and is thus installed in the rotating body base unit 531. The heat released from the effect operation unit second drive motor 534 passes through the plurality of peripheral surface decoration portions 531f, the button inner space AS, and the ventilation port 521d, behind the third effect decoration rotary body unit 530B (attachment of the dish unit 320) It can be discharged into the space 326j). Thereby, it can suppress that the temperature in the decoration rotary body unit 530 or the operation button 410 rises abnormally, and generation | occurrence | production of the malfunction by heat can be prevented.

  The exhaust heat discharged into the mounting space 326j through the plurality of ventilation ports 521d of the housing wall 521a in the unit base 521 passes through the exhaust ports (not shown) formed in the bottom plate portion 326i and the lower plate cover 340. Is discharged outside.

[3-5. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 540 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 97 to 100. 97A is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, FIG. 97B is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 97C is the rear view of the door frame left side unit. It is the perspective view seen from. 98 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 99 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the back. 100 is a cross-sectional view taken along line NN in FIG. The door frame left side unit 540 covers the front side of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 162 (door frame left side decorative substrate 160) above the plate unit 320. It is attached to the front left part on the left side of the through hole 111 in 100. The door frame left side unit 540 is for decorating the left side of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the front.

  The door frame left side unit 540 is a band plate-like left unit base 541 extending vertically and attached to the front side of the through-hole 111 in front of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and a left unit base 541. A transparent strip-shaped left unit diffusing lens member 542 attached to the front surface and a translucent element disposed in front of the left unit diffusing lens member 542 and having a polyhedral decoration at the front end. A left unit decorative lens member (not shown) and a left unit decorative lens member mounted on the front upper part of the left unit base 541 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member, projecting forward in a cylindrical frame shape and extending vertically The decorative base 544 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the left unit base 541 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member. A left unit lower decorative base 545 that is shorter than the decorative base 544 and protrudes forward in a frame shape, and covers the front end side of the left unit decorative lens member from the front side of the left unit upper decorative base 544 and the left unit lower decorative base 545. A transparent left unit decorative cover 546 attached to the front side of the left unit base 541 and a plurality of decorative members 547 attached to the front side of the left unit decorative cover 546 are provided.

  The left unit base 541 of the door frame left side unit 540 is formed in a shallow box shape with the rear side opened, and has a plurality of openings 541a penetrating front and rear in the front surface. As shown in the drawing, the plurality of openings 541a include a circular hole and a rectangular hole extending vertically. The left unit base 541 includes LEDs 161a and 162a mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side decorative board 160 (the door frame left side upper decorative board 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 162). It is attached to the front left side of the door frame base 110 so as to face forward. Each opening 541a of the left unit base 541 is formed so that each LED 161a, 162a of the door frame left side decorative board 160 is positioned at a substantially vertical center when assembled in the door frame 3. The left unit base 541 is formed of an opaque member.

  The left unit diffusing lens member 542 is formed of a transparent member, and is divided into an upper diffusing lens member 542A and a lower diffusing lens member 542B. The left unit diffusing lens member 542 includes a circular lens portion 542a in front view corresponding to the circular opening 541a in the left unit base 541, and a square in front view corresponding to the square opening 541a. A lens portion 542b. The door frame left side unit 540 is assembled to the door frame 3 so that the respective LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are positioned immediately after the center of the circular lens portion 542a and the square lens portion 542b. Is formed.

  The circular lens portion 542a of the left unit diffusing lens member 542 is formed in a convex lens shape with a smooth front surface and rear surface. By this circular lens portion 542a, the light from the LEDs 161a and 162a disposed on the rear side can be irradiated forward in the form of dots. With the light irradiated forward from the circular lens portion 542a, the circular decorative portion of the left unit decorative lens member can be illuminated and decorated.

  The square lens portion 542b of the left unit diffuser lens member 542 includes a central diffuse reflection portion 542c that is recessed backward in a conical shape at the center of the front surface, and a front diffuse lens portion 542d that is formed outside the central diffuse reflection portion 542c on the front surface. An input lens portion 542e that bulges back in the shape of a curved surface at the center of the rear surface (immediately after the central diffuse reflection portion 542c), and forwards as it is far from the input lens portion 542e outside the input lens portion 542e on the rear surface. And a front reflecting portion 542f that is inclined so as to move.

  The front diffusing lens portion 542d of the square lens portion 542b is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by radially extending lines centering on the central diffusive reflecting portion 542c. More specifically, the front diffusing lens portion 542d has a cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, and a groove portion is recessed in an arc shape to the rear, and a mountain portion between the grooves is forward. It swells in an arc shape, and the front surface is formed in a smooth wave shape. The front diffusing lens portion 542d is formed so that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction with the radially extending lines divided in the circumferential direction as a boundary.

  The front reflecting portion 542f of the rectangular lens portion 542b is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially around the input lens portion 542e. The plurality of grooves are recessed in a V shape from the rear to the front, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The front reflecting portion 542f has a cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, which is formed in a triangular shape in which a mountain portion between the grooves is pointed backward, and is formed in a saw shape. The front reflecting portion 542f is formed such that the groove and the mountain portion move forward as the distance from the center increases. The front reflecting portion 542f is formed such that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction with the radially extending lines divided in the circumferential direction as a boundary. The radially extending lines dividing in the circumferential direction coincide with the radially extending dividing lines in the front diffusion lens portion 542d.

  When the rectangular lens portion 542b is assembled to the door frame 3, the LEDs 161a and 162a corresponding to the door frame left side decorative board 160 are located immediately after the input lens portion 542e.

  In the rectangular lens unit 542b, light irradiated forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is input from the input lens unit 542e into the rectangular lens unit 542b. Since this input lens portion 542e bulges back in a curved surface (convex lens shape), the light spreading forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is refracted so as to travel in parallel forward, and the input light Almost all can be led to the conical central diffuse reflection portion 542c. The light guided to the central diffuse reflection part 542c is perpendicular to the front and rear axes by the inclined conical surface of the central diffuse reflection part 542c (a direction parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160). ) And diffuses in the rectangular lens portion 542b along the front surface from the center side toward the outside. The light reflected by the central diffuse reflection part 542c travels from the center side to the outside (in the direction away from the center line of the central diffuse reflection part 542c) over the entire thickness of the rectangular lens part 542b in the front-rear direction.

  When the light reflected from the center side to the outside substantially parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative board 160 reaches the saw-like front reflection part 542f, the front side of the front reflection part 542f moves forward. Reflect to the side. At this time, since the front reflecting portion 542f is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as it moves away from the central diffuse reflecting portion 542c, the thickness in the front-rear direction of the rectangular lens portion 542b becomes thinner as it moves away from the center. (See FIG. 100). As a result, the light that is reflected outward in the central diffuse reflection portion 542c over the entire thickness in the front-rear direction of the rectangular lens portion 542b is sequentially forwarded by the front reflection portion 542f as it goes outward from the center side. Can be reflected.

  The light reflected forward by the front reflecting portion 542f is irradiated forward from the square lens portion 542b through the front diffusion lens portion 542d. At this time, since the front diffusion lens portion 542d has a wavy cross section, the light reflected forward by the front reflection portion 542f can be diffused in various directions, and the square lens portion 542b. It is possible to irradiate the front (the rear surface of the left unit decorative lens member) with light substantially uniformly from the front surface.

  In the front lens diffuser 542d and the front reflector 542f, the rectangular lens portion 542b is formed by dividing a plurality of concentric circular grooves by a plurality of radially extending lines, and then a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves with the dividing lines as a boundary. Since the concentric arc-shaped grooves are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction by shifting in the radial direction, the light radiated forward from the front surface of the rectangular lens portion 542b has the density of the concentric stripe pattern. It is possible to avoid becoming light and to irradiate light with more uniform light and shade forward. As a result, the multi-sided decorative part in front of the rectangular lens part 542b in the left unit decorative lens member can be illuminated and decorated substantially uniformly.

  A left unit decorative lens member (not shown) is formed along the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 546. The left unit decorative lens member is positioned in front of the circular decorative portion formed at the front position of the circular lens portion 542a of the left unit diffusion lens member 542 and the square lens portion 542b of the left unit diffusion lens member 542. And a multi-sided decoration part formed on the part. The circular decorative portion is formed in a shape including a plurality of triangular ribs in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a cylindrical portion whose front surface is short and extends forward and backward. The polyhedral decorative part has a plurality of quadrangular pyramid-shaped portions arranged in the vertical direction on the front surface of the rectangular parallelepiped extending vertically, and a plurality of triangular polyhedrons arranged in the vertical direction on the left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. It is formed in such a shape. The circular decorative portion and the multi-surface decorative portion are formed in the same shape as the circular decorative portion 561a and the multi-surface decorative portion 561b of the right unit decorative lens member 561 in the door frame right side unit 550.

  The left unit decorative lens member can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the transparent left unit decorative cover 546. In the left unit decorative lens member, the multi-sided decorative portion is irradiated forward from the square lens portion 542b of the left unit diffusing lens member 542 by the light irradiated from the circular lens portion 542a of the left unit diffusing lens member 542 to the circular decorative portion. The emitted light is decorated with the emitted light.

  The left unit upper decoration base 544 is a quadrangular shape whose front view extends vertically, and is formed in a rectangular tube shape extending in the front-rear direction. The left unit upper decorative base 544 is inclined so that a portion constituting the lower surface on the outer periphery protrudes downward from the front end side toward the rear end side, and a lower portion of the portion penetrates back and forth. The left unit upper decoration base 544 is formed of an opaque member.

  The left unit lower decoration base 545 is formed in a U shape whose front view is open upward. The left unit lower decoration base 545 is inclined to the rear end so that the upper side from the substantially vertical center of the front end moves rearward as it goes upward. The left unit lower decoration base 545 is formed of a light-impermeable member.

  The left unit decorative cover 546 extends vertically over the entire height of the door frame left side unit 540. The left unit decorative cover 546 is bent so that the middle part in the vertical direction is recessed backward, and the lower part is bent backward along the front end of the upper decorative base 544 on the left unit, The upper part of the lower decorative base 545 is bent back so that the upper part is bent backward, and the lower end of the upper square part is connected to the upper end of the lower square part. And a linear portion.

  The left unit decoration cover 546 is attached at both upper and lower ends to the front surface of the left unit upper decoration base 544 and the front surface of the left unit lower decoration base 545, respectively. The left unit decorative cover 546 is formed of a transparent member, and the left unit decorative lens member disposed on the rear side can be viewed from the front side.

  The decorative member 547 extends short up and down, and is attached to the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 546 at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction. The decorative member 547 is formed of an opaque member.

[3-6. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 101A is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, FIG. 101B is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 101C is the rear view of the door frame right side unit. It is the perspective view seen from. FIG. 102 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the back. 104 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line OO in FIG. 105 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line P-P in FIG. 101 (a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line Q-Q in FIG. 101 (a). The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320.

  The door frame right side unit 550 includes a box-shaped right unit base 551 extending vertically and attached to the right side of the through-hole 111 in front of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and a front surface of the right unit base 551. The door frame right side decorative board 552 is attached to the front side of the right side of the right side of the right unit base 551 on the front side of the door frame right side decorative board 552 and extends in the vertical and front-rear directions. A transparent flat plate-shaped right unit left diffusing lens member 553, a sheet-like right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side surface of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553, and a right unit left decorative member A transparent flat plate-like right unit left cover attached to the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 so as to cover the left side of 554. Includes a over 555, the.

  The door frame right side unit 550 includes the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 on the right side of the front side of the right unit base 551 on the front side of the right side of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 and on the right side of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. A transparent flat plate-like right unit right diffusing lens member 556 that is attached to the right and left sides of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 and is decorated with a decoration. A right unit right decorative member 557 that is shaped like a transparent plate, and a right unit right cover that has a transparent flat plate shape attached to the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 so as to cover the right side of the right unit right decorative member 557.

  Furthermore, the door frame right side unit 550 is disposed between the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556, and extends in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction in which the front and right sides are opened. A box-shaped light-impermeable right unit left light-shielding member 559 and a light-opaque light attached to the left side of the right unit right light-diffusing lens member 556 so as to close the open right side of the right unit left light-shielding member 559. And a flat right unit right light-shielding member 560.

  The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the front ends of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556, and has a translucent right unit decoration having a polyhedral decoration at the front end. Before and after being attached to the front surface of the right unit base 551 so as to cover the left and right sides of the lens member 561 and the right unit decorative lens member 561 and the front end side of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. A frame-shaped right unit decoration base 562 that penetrates, a transparent right unit cover 563 that is attached to the front side of the right unit decoration base 562 so as to close the front end opening of the right unit decoration base 562, and a right unit cover 563 A plurality of decorative members 564 attached to the front side. Although illustration is omitted, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached so as to vertically penetrate the right unit base 551, and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame of the door frame top unit 570. A connection cable for connecting the top unit relay board 589 is provided.

  The right unit base 551 of the door frame right side unit 550 is a quadrangular shape whose front view is elongated vertically, and is formed in a box shape in which the center portion in the front-rear direction is closed, extending in a rectangular tube shape short in the front-rear direction. Has been. The right unit base 551 is formed of an opaque member.

  The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically. The door frame right side decorative board 552 is mounted on the left side of the front left-right center of the plurality of left LEDs 552a, on the front side of the right LED 552b mounted on the right side of the left-right center, and mounted on the front side of the left-right center. A plurality of middle LEDs 552c. The left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is for illuminating the right unit left decorative member 554 via the right unit left diffusing lens member 553. The right LED 552b is for illuminating the right unit right decorative member 557 via the right unit right diffusing lens member 556. The middle LED 552c is for decorating the right unit decorative lens member 561 with light emission.

  The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is formed with white on both front and rear sides. The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is divided into an upper door frame right side upper decorative substrate 552A and a lower door frame right side lower decorative substrate 552B. Although illustration is omitted, the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 552B is connected to the door body relay substrate of the door frame base unit 100, and the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 552A is the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 552B. It is connected to the.

  The right unit left diffusing lens member 553 includes a flat plate-like main body portion 553a extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, a rear wall portion 553b protruding in a flat plate shape from the rear side of the main body portion 553a to the right in front view, and A right unit left decorative member on the left side of the main body 553a when viewed from the front side of the main body 553a, and a plurality of cutouts 553c that are cut in a square shape from the right end of the rear wall 553b to the left when viewed from the front. A receiving recess 553d that is shallowly recessed to receive 554, a plurality of input lens portions 553e that protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a, and a right side surface in front view of the main body portion 553a. And a plurality of side reflecting portions 553f arranged in the vertical direction so that the input lens portion 553e is in the center in the vertical direction.

  The main body portion 553a of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 has a shape in a side view in which the upper corner of the front end side of the quadrangle that extends vertically is obliquely cut out in a C-chamfered shape, and the lower side is directed upward as it goes forward It is formed in the shape which inclines so that it may move to. As shown in FIG. 105, the main body portion 553a is slightly moved with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 so as to move rightward as viewed from the rear end side toward the front. Inclined. The front end of the main body 553a protrudes forward more greatly than the front end of the door frame left side unit 540 in a state assembled to the door frame 3.

  The rear wall 553b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the right end of the rear wall 553b extends to the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The left end of the rear wall portion 556b of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 is in contact with the right end of the rear wall portion 553b.

  A plurality of notches 553c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative board 552. In the state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552 faces forward from the plurality of notches 553c, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 emits light well by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c. Can be decorated.

  The housing recess 553d has a flat bottom surface, and the outer peripheral shape substantially matches the outer shape of the right unit left decorative member 554. Thereby, the right unit left decorative member 554 can be accommodated.

  The plurality of input lens portions 553e protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a in the vertical direction at a predetermined interval. More specifically, the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 is formed substantially at the center in the vertical direction when the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction. Although not shown in detail, the input lens portion 553e is recessed toward the front so as to be curved in a spherical shape from a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending quadrangle protrudes rearward and the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. A region. These input lens portions 553e are respectively positioned immediately before the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative board 552 in a state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. Thereby, the light from the left LED 552a can be input so as to be diffused widely in the main body 553a.

  A plurality (six) of side reflecting portions 553f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflecting portion 553f is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by a radially extending line centering on the input lens portion 553e. The plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves are such that, in each groove, the surface near the input lens portion 553e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 553a, and the surface far from the input lens portion 553e is the main body portion. It extends perpendicularly to the surface of 553a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side reflecting portion 553f is formed in a sharp triangular shape such that the cross-sectional shape when cut in the radial direction centering on the input lens portion 553e is such that the mountain portion between the grooves faces the center side. The whole is formed in a saw shape. The side reflecting portion 553f is formed so that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with a radial line dividing a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction as a boundary. .

  In the right unit left diffusing lens member 553, the light emitted forward from the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 enters the main body 553a of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 from the rear surface of the input lens portion 553e. Incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 553e is concavely curved forward, the input lens portion 553e is refracted so that light from the left LED 552a spreads by the curved surface. Will diffuse radially forward from the center.

  Since the main body portion 553a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 so that the entire body portion 553a moves to the right as viewed from the front, the door frame The light irradiated from the left LED 552a mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative board 552 and incident on the main body 553a from the input lens portion 553e hits a flat left surface in the main body 553a. However, the direct light from the left LED 552a is not emitted from the left surface of the main body portion 553a to the outside due to the incident angle with respect to the left surface of the main body portion 553a, and is reflected to the side reflecting portion 553f side by the inner surface of the left surface. It becomes.

  Light that is incident forward from the input lens portion 553e into the main body portion 553a is reflected leftward when viewed from the front by hitting the saw-like side surface reflection portion 553f, and is emitted outward from the left surface of the main body portion 553a. The Rukoto. Light is also emitted outward (rightward in front view) from the right surface (side surface reflection portion 553f) of the main body 553a, but the right unit left light-shielding member 559 disposed on the right side of the main body 553a is white. Since it is a member, the left surface of the right unit left light shielding member 559 is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit left light shielding member 559 is irradiated to the left side through the main body 553a. . Therefore, from the left surface of the main body portion 553a, the light reflected leftward by the side surface reflection portion 553f in the main body portion 553a and the left surface of the right unit left light-shielding member 559 are irradiated to the right from the side surface reflection portion 553f. Since the light that has been reflected and passed through the main body portion 553a is irradiated leftward, the right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side of the main body portion 553a can be decorated with light emission with good brightness. it can.

  In the side reflecting portion 553f, the concentric circular grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and then the concentric arc-shaped grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing lines as a boundary to surround the concentric circular arc-shaped grooves. Since the light is alternately arranged in the direction, it is possible to prevent the light emitted from the left surface of the main body portion 553a to the outside (left side) from becoming light having the density of concentric stripes. It is possible to irradiate light with more uniform light to the left. Thus, the right unit left decorative member 554 accommodated in the accommodation recess 553d on the left surface of the main body 553a can be decorated with light emission substantially uniformly.

  Since the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 is formed of a transparent member, side reflection is formed on the opposite side from the left side (the side on which the housing recess 553d is formed) of the main body 553a. A pattern composed of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves of the portion 553f and a radially extending line can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right unit left decorative member 554, the pattern of the side reflecting portion 553f of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion, and the transparent in the right unit left decorative member 554 is visible. This part can be decorated by the side reflection part 553f.

  The right unit left decoration member 554 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and the decoration such as the manufacturer logo of the pachinko machine 1 or the logo in accordance with the concept of presentation presented to the player on the game board 5 is translucent. It is given to have. The right unit left cover 555 protects the outer surface of the right unit left decorative member 554 in a state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

  The right unit right diffusing lens member 556 is formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left diffusing lens member 553, and has the same configuration. More specifically, the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 includes a flat plate-like main body portion 556a extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, and a rear wall that protrudes in a flat plate shape from the rear side of the main body portion 556a to the left in the front view. A portion 556b, a plurality of cutout portions 556c that are cut out in a square shape from the left end side in front view of the rear wall portion 556b to the right, and are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction; An accommodation recess 556d that is shallowly recessed to accommodate the unit right decoration member 557, a plurality of input lens portions 556e that protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a, and a front view of the main body portion 556a. And a plurality of side surface reflecting portions 556f arranged in the vertical direction so that each input lens portion 556e is in the center in the vertical direction on the left side.

  The main body portion 556a of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 has a shape in a side view in which the upper corner of the front end of the quadrangle that extends vertically is obliquely cut out in a chamfered shape, and the lower side is directed upward as it goes forward The outer shape of the main unit 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is substantially the same. As shown in FIG. 105, the main body 556a slightly moves with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 so that the main body 556a moves to the left as viewed from the front as it goes forward from the rear end side. Inclined. The front end of the main body 556a protrudes more forward than the front end of the door frame left side unit 540 in a state assembled to the door frame 3.

  The rear wall 556b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the left end of the rear wall 556b extends to the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The right end of the rear wall portion 553b of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 contacts the left end of the rear wall portion 556b.

  A plurality of notches 556 c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the LED 552 c in the door frame right side decorative board 552. The plurality of notches 556c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of notches 553c of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553. Therefore, in the state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, a rectangular opening that penetrates forward and backward through the notch 553c of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the notch 556c of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556. The middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the opening, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 can be favorably decorated with light emission by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c.

  The housing recess 556d has a flat bottom surface, and the outer shape substantially matches the outer shape of the right unit right decorative member 557. Thereby, the right unit right decorative member 557 can be accommodated.

  The plurality of input lens portions 556e protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction. Specifically, the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 is formed substantially at the center in the vertical direction when the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction. Although not shown in detail, the input lens portion 556e is recessed toward the front so as to be curved in a spherical shape from a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending quadrangle protrudes backward and a rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. A region. These input lens portions 556e are positioned immediately before the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative board 552 in a state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. Thereby, the light from the right LED 552b can be input so as to be diffused widely in the main body 556a.

  A plurality (six) of side reflecting portions 556f are provided in the vertical direction. Each of the side surface reflecting portions 556f is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially around the input lens portion 556e. The plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves are such that, in each groove, the surface near the input lens portion 556e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 556a, and the surface far from the input lens portion 556e is the main body portion. It extends perpendicularly to the surface of 556a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side reflecting portion 556f is formed in a sharp triangular shape such that the cross-sectional shape when cut in the radial direction centering on the input lens portion 556e is such that the peak portion between the grooves faces the center side. The whole is formed in a saw shape. The side reflecting portion 556f is formed so that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with a radial line dividing a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction. .

  In the right unit right diffusing lens member 556, the light irradiated forward from the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative board 552 enters the main body 556a of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 from the rear surface of the input lens portion 556e. Incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 556e is recessed in a curved shape toward the front, it is refracted so that the light from the right LED 552b spreads by the curved surface, and each input lens portion 556e in the main body portion 556a. Will diffuse radially forward from the center.

  The main body portion 556a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 so that the entire body portion 556a moves to the left as viewed from the front as it goes forward. The light irradiated from the right LED 552b mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative substrate 552 and incident on the main body 556a from the input lens portion 556e hits the flat right surface in the main body 556a. However, the direct light from the right LED 552b is not emitted from the left surface of the main body 556a to the outside because of the incident angle with respect to the right surface of the main body 556a, but is reflected to the side reflecting portion 556f side by the inner surface of the right surface. It becomes.

  Light that is incident forward from the input lens portion 556e into the main body portion 556a is reflected rightward when viewed from the front by hitting the saw-like side surface reflection portion 556f, and is irradiated outward from the right surface of the main body portion 556a. The Rukoto. Light is also emitted outward (leftward in front view) from the right surface (side surface reflection portion 556f) of the main body 556a, but the right unit right light shielding member 560 disposed on the left side of the main body 556a is white. Therefore, the right surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit right light shielding member 560 is irradiated to the right side through the main body 556a. . Therefore, from the right surface of the main body portion 556a, the light reflected to the right by the side surface reflection portion 556f in the main body portion 556a and the right side of the right unit right light shielding member 560 are irradiated to the left from the side surface reflection portion 556f. Since the light that has been reflected and passed through the main body portion 556a is irradiated to the right, the right unit right decorative member 557 attached to the right side of the main body portion 556a can be illuminated and decorated with good brightness. it can.

  In the side reflecting portion 556f, the concentric circular grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and then the concentric arc-shaped grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary, so that the concentric arc-shaped grooves are surrounded. Since they are arranged alternately in the direction, it is possible to avoid the light radiated outward from the right surface of the main body 556a (right) from being light having the density of concentric stripes. It is possible to irradiate light with more uniform light to the right. Thereby, the right unit right decoration member 557 housed in the housing recess 556d on the right surface of the main body 556a can be illuminated and decorated substantially uniformly.

  Since the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 is formed of a transparent member, the side reflection formed on the opposite side from the right side of the main body 556a in the front view (the side where the housing recess 556d is formed). A pattern composed of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves of the part 556f and a radially extending line can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right unit right decorative member 557, the pattern of the side reflecting portion 556f of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion, and the transparent in the right unit right decorative member 557 is transparent. This part can be decorated by the side reflection part 556f.

  The right unit right decoration member 557 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and the decoration such as the manufacturer logo of the pachinko machine 1 and the logo in accordance with the concept of presentation presented to the player on the game board 5 is translucent. It is given to have. The right unit right cover 558 protects the outer surface of the right unit right decorative member 557 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. The right unit right decorative member 557 and the right unit right cover 558 are formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit left cover 555. The decorations applied to the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 may be the same decoration or different decorations.

  The right unit left light-shielding member 559 is formed in substantially the same shape as the side view of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 in side view. The right unit left light shielding member 559 is formed in a shallow box shape with the front and right sides open. The right unit left light-shielding member 559 includes a flat plate-like main body portion 559a extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, a rear wall portion 559b protruding in a flat plate shape from the rear side of the main body portion 559a to the right in front view, The wall portion 559b is cut out to the left from the right end side in front view in a square shape, and a plurality of cutout portions 559c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and the body portion 559a extends from the right surface to the right and is rearward. A plurality of flat plate-like reinforcing portions 559d extending from the wall portion 559b to the front end of the main body portion 559a.

  The main body 559a of the right unit left shading member 559 has a shape in a side view in which the upper corner of the front end of the quadrangle extending vertically is cut obliquely in a chamfered shape, and the lower side is directed upward as it goes forward. The outer shape of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 is substantially the same shape as the main body portions 553a and 556a.

  The rear wall 559b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the left end of the rear wall 559b extends to the right side from the substantially horizontal center of the right unit base 551. The left surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 is in contact with the right end of the rear wall portion 559b.

  A plurality of notches 559c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative board 552. The plurality of notches 559c are formed at positions corresponding to the notches 553c and 556c of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556. Therefore, in the state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the plurality of notches 559c, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 emits light well by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c. Can be decorated.

  The plurality of reinforcing portions 559d are provided as a set of a pair of reinforcing portions 559d that are substantially the same height as the left and right widths and spaced apart in the vertical direction, and are separated by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. Each set of reinforcing portions 559 d is formed at a position behind the decorative member 564 attached to the right unit cover 563. The plurality of reinforcing portions 559d increase the overall strength and rigidity of the door frame right side unit 550.

  The right unit right light shielding member 560 has a shape in a side view such that the upper corner of the front end side of the quadrangle extending vertically is obliquely cut out in a chamfered shape, and the lower side moves upward as it goes forward. It is formed in an inclined shape, and is formed in substantially the same shape as the main body portion 559 a in the right unit left light shielding member 559. The right unit right light-shielding member 560 closes the right-side opening opened to the right of the right unit left light-shielding member 559 formed in a shallow box shape in a state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

  The right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are each formed of a white member. As shown in FIG. 105, the right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the main body 559a and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are connected to the right unit. The left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 are disposed so as to be close to the main body portions 553a and 556a. As a result, the main body 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are separated from each other in the left-right direction, forming a space extending in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction with a predetermined width in the left-right direction. . Through the space formed between the main body 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560, light emitted forward from the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is transmitted to the right unit decoration. Irradiate the rear side of the lens member 561.

  The right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are formed of a light-impermeable member, and are irradiated forward from the left LED 552a, the middle LED 552c, and the right LED 552b on the door frame right side decorative board 552, respectively. The light is prevented from interfering with each other, and the left LED 552a, the right LED 552b, and the middle LED 552c corresponding to the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561, respectively. Can be decorated only by

  Further, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are arranged on the rear side of each divided space because the internal space is divided into four in the vertical direction by three sets of reinforcing portions 559d. The middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 can prevent light from interfering with each other, and a portion located in front of each space of the right unit decorative lens member 561 , Each can be independently illuminated. That is, on the front end side of the door frame right side unit 550, it can be divided into a plurality of (four) regions in the vertical direction and each can be decorated with light emission independently.

  The right unit decorative lens member 561 is formed in a shape along the front end shape of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 includes a circular decorative portion 561a that is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front, and a polyhedral decorative portion 561b that extends vertically and has a plurality of polyhedrons. The circular decorative portion 561a is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a cylindrical portion whose front surface is short and extends shortly before and after. The polyhedral decorative portion 561b has a plurality of quadrangular pyramid-shaped portions arranged in the vertical direction on the front surface of the rectangular parallelepiped extending vertically, and a plurality of polyhedrons composed of a plurality of triangles on the left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped portion in the vertical direction. It is formed in the shape as provided.

  More specifically, the right unit decorative lens member 561 includes a plurality of circular decorative portions 561a and a multi-surface decorative portion 561b divided into four parts by three sets of reinforcing portions 559d in the right unit left light shielding member 559. In the three parts from the top in the part located in the front, one multi-face decoration part 561b is arranged on each of the upper and lower sides of the circular decoration part 561a arranged in the center in the vertical direction, and in the lowermost part, the multi-face decoration Only the portion 561b is formed.

  The right unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front end of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the transparent right unit cover 563. The right unit decorative lens member 561 is decorated with light emission by the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative board 552 arranged on the rear side.

  The right unit decoration base 562 is formed in a cylindrical frame shape penetrating in the front-rear direction. The right unit decoration base 562 is formed in a shape along the shapes of the front end and the upper end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed so as to be able to cover both the left and right outer sides in the vicinity of the front ends of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 and both the left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561. When assembled in the door frame right side unit 550, the front end of the right unit decorative lens member 561 slightly protrudes forward from the front end of the right unit decorative base 562. The right unit decoration base 562 is formed of an opaque member.

  The right unit cover 563 is formed so that the front end opening of the right unit decoration base 562 can be closed. The right unit cover 563 is formed of a transparent member, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 disposed on the rear side can be viewed from the front side.

  The decorative member 564 extends short in the vertical direction, and is attached to the front surface of the right unit cover 563 at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction. The decorative member 564 is formed of an opaque member. The three decorative members 564 divide the right unit cover 563 (the right unit decorative lens member 561) into four parts in the vertical direction.

  The door frame right side unit 550, when assembled to the door frame 3, protrudes in a plate shape larger forward than the door frame left side unit 540, and slightly protrudes forward from the front end of the upper plate 321 of the dish unit 320. Yes. The door frame right side unit 550 includes a right unit left decorative member 554 and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided on the left and right sides of the protruding left side, and a right unit decorative lens member 561 provided on the front end, respectively. And can be decorated with light emission.

  Since the door frame right side unit 550 is plate-like and protrudes greatly forward, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the door frame right side unit 550 is adjacent to the right side of the pachinko machine. An effect like a partition can be exhibited. This makes it possible for a player who plays with the pachinko machine 1 to have the illusion that he is playing in a private room, and allows the player to play in a relaxed atmosphere without hesitation of other players around. Can do.

  Since the door frame right side unit 550 protrudes greatly forward, the game hall installed with the pachinko machines 1 arranged side by side follows the island facilities even if it is not located in front of the pachinko machine 1 The pachinko machine 1 can be visually recognized from the horizontal direction, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made conspicuous in a game hall in which a large number of pachinko machines are arranged. Therefore, when the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 on the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 are light-decorated, the book can be viewed from a distance even if it is not located near the front of the pachinko machine 1. The presence of the pachinko machine 1 can be notified, and the pachinko machine 1 having high appeal to the player can be obtained.

  Further, in the door frame right side unit 550, when a defect such as ball clogging or an error occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens on both the left and right sides. By making the member 561 and the like illuminate in a unique manner, the attendant of the game hall can be immediately notified of the occurrence of the problem and recognized, and the problem can be quickly dealt with. Therefore, the interruption of the game of the player can be solved at an early stage, and the player can be frustrated and the decrease in the interest in the game can be suppressed.

[3-7. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 106A is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, FIG. 106B is a perspective view of the door frame top unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 106C is a view of the door frame top unit from the rear. It is a perspective view. FIG. 107 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 108 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from the back. 109 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line RR in FIG. The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 540 and the door frame right side unit 550.

  The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the left and right sides of the center base 571 and the center base 571 attached to the center in the left-right direction above the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100. A pair of side bases 572 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110, a pair of upper speakers 573 respectively attached to the front surfaces of the pair of side bases 572, and the center in the left-right direction project forward. A pair of openings 574a penetrating front and rear at a front position of the pair of upper speakers 573 in a box shape with the rear open, and from a position closer to the center in the left-right direction than the pair of openings 574a to the vicinity of the center A plurality of (three each on the left and right) slips extending in each direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction and spaced apart from each other. The unit main body 574 is provided on the front side of the central base 571 and the pair of side bases 572, and is disposed on the front side of the pair of upper speakers 573 so as to close the pair of openings 574a. And a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal attached to the rear side of the unit main body 574.

  The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the front surface at the center in the left-right direction of the unit main body 574, and has a translucent top middle decorative member 576, and is attached to the rear side of the top middle decorative member 576. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the top middle decorative board 577 and the front surface of the unit main body 574, and the plurality of slits 574b are closed, and the top middle decorative member 576 is viewed from the left and right ends. A plurality of transparent flat plate-like light guide members 578 extending to the vicinity of both left and right ends of the unit main body 574 across the opening 574a, and both left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 on the front surface of the unit main body 574 And a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top which respectively cover the front surfaces of a plurality of (three) light guide members 578. The right decorative lens member 580, the top left decorative lens member 579, and the top right decorative lens member 580 are respectively attached to the front surface of the unit main body 574 from the front side of each of the top decorative lenses 580. A top middle left decorative member 581 and a top middle right decorative member 582 extending to the vicinity of the center side end portion.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the inside of the left and right side surfaces of the unit main body 574, and LEDs are respectively mounted on portions facing the left and right outer ends of the plural (three) light guide members 578. The door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 584, and a plurality of (three) slits 574b formed on the left and right sides of the center in the left-right direction on the rear side of the unit main body 574 are penetrated. A pair of board bases 585 attached to the respective parts, and doors attached to the front surfaces of the pair of board bases 585 and mounted with a plurality of LEDs 586a, 587a at positions behind the slits 574b of the unit body 574. Frame top middle left decorative board 586, door frame top middle right decorative board 587, door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and And a, a pair of light blocking members 588 which are respectively attached to the rear side of the unit body 574 at the front side of the door frame top right in decorative substrate 587.

  The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the central base 571 so as to cover the door frame top unit relay board 589 attached to the front surface of the central base 571 in the unit main body 574 and the front surface of the door frame top unit relay board 589. The relay board cover 590, the upper cover 591 attached to the unit main body 574 so as to close the upper opening 574c of the unit main body 574, and the unit main body 574 so as to close the lower opening 574d of the unit main body 574. And a lower cover 592 attached to the main body.

  The center base 571 of the door frame top unit 570 is formed in a quadrangular shape whose front view extends to the left and right. The central base 571 is formed in a box shape opened rearward, and has a plurality of irregularities on the front surface. The pair of side bases 572 are attached to the left and right ends of the central base 571, respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573 are attached to the front surfaces of the side bases 572, respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573 are attached to the door frame top unit 570 in an oblique manner so that the front surfaces of the pair of upper speakers 573 move rearward on the side close to the center in the left-right direction of the door frame top unit 570. The pair of upper speakers 573 are full-range cone type speakers capable of outputting sound in a wide frequency band.

  The unit main body 574 is formed in such a shape that the lower part near the left and right ends of a quadrangle extending left and right bulges downward in a front view. In other words, the unit main body 574 is formed in such a shape that the shape of the front view is cut out of a quadrangle extending in the left-right direction by a trapezoid that is narrowed upward from the lower end side. The unit main body 574 has a rectangular shape in plan view extending from the left and right sides, and about a half of the width (length in the left-right direction) about the center in the left-right direction on the front end side of the quadrangle. The trapezoid protruding forward and the quadrangle protruding short forward with the front end side of the trapezoid as a long side are formed in a combined shape. Therefore, the unit main body 574 has a line in which both sides of a portion projecting forward at the center in the left-right direction on the front face connect the left-right end portion of the unit main body 574 and the left-right end portion of the front end of the portion projecting forward. It is located behind (it is depressed).

  In the unit main body 574, openings 574a penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed at positions on the front surface from the both ends in the left-right direction to positions outside the portions protruding forward. The unit main body 574 has a plurality of slits 574b extending left and right at a predetermined height in the vertical direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction in a portion extending obliquely forward from the portion protruding frontward in the front surface. Is formed. The plurality of slits 574b extend from the vicinity of the front end of the portion extending obliquely forward to the front surface of the unit main body 574 to the vicinity of the opening 574a. The plurality of slits 574b are formed on the both sides of the center of the unit body 574 in the left-right direction so as to be spaced apart from each other by three.

  The unit main body 574 has an upper opening 574c that is cut out squarely from the rear end to the front in the left-right direction center on the upper surface, and a lower opening 574d that is cut from the rear end in the left-right direction on the lower surface to the front. I have. The upper opening 574c of the unit main body 574 is closed by the upper cover 591. The lower opening 574d is closed by the lower cover 592.

  The unit main body 574 includes a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f that extend vertically at both left and right ends. The top left decorative portion 574e has a front surface formed at a position substantially the same as the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The top right decorative portion 574f is formed such that the front surface thereof is positioned forward of the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The unit main body 574 is formed of an opaque member.

  The top middle decorative member 576 is attached to the front end of the portion protruding forward at the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit main body 574. The top middle decorative member 576 has a front pentagonal shape that is bent so that the central part of the lower side of the substantially square is positioned downward, and extends outward from the upper ends of the left and right sides of the pentagon. It is formed in a shape such as a combination of a substantially right triangle connecting the tip of the side and the lower ends of the left and right sides of the side pentagon. The top middle decorative member 576 is inclined such that the front pentagonal portion moves rearward as it goes downward. The top middle decorative member 576 is formed in a three-dimensional shape as a whole and has translucency.

  The front middle decorative board 577 of the door frame is rearward of the top middle decorative member 576 in a state in which the front surface is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward along the front surface of the deformed pentagonal portion of the top middle decorative member 576. Mounted on the side. The door frame top middle decorative board 577 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the top middle decorative member 576 can be decorated with light emission by emitting these LEDs.

  The light guide member 578 is formed of a transparent member. The light guide member 578 is formed in a shape along the shape on the left and right outer sides of the front end of the portion protruding forward on the front surface of the unit main body 574. When the side close to both ends in the left-right direction of the unit main body 574 is described as the end side, and the side close to the center is the center side, the light guide member 578 is a straight part that extends straight from side to side toward the center side. 578a, and an arc portion 578b extending in an arc shape having a large radius so as to move forward from the end portion on the center side of the straight portion 578a toward the center side. The light guide member 578 has a depth in the front-rear direction smaller than the height in the vertical direction at the straight portion 578a, and a depth in the front-rear direction larger than the height in the vertical direction at the arc portion 578b. The light guide member 578 is formed such that the vertical portion 578a has a constant height in the vertical direction, and the arc portion 578b has a height that decreases in the vertical direction toward the center. In the state where the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the straight portion 578a is positioned immediately before the opening 574a of the unit main body 574, and the arc portion 578b closes the slit 574b of the unit main body 574 from the front. Yes.

  The light guide member 578 includes a diffuse reflection portion 578c formed of a saw-like unevenness formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a, a diffusion input portion 578d formed of a plurality of unevenness formed on the rear surface side of the arc portion 578b, It has.

  In the state where the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the outer ends of the left and right directions face the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584. At the same time, the diffusion input portion 578d faces the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587. When light from the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 584 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 is incident on the light guide member 578 from the ends on both outer sides in the left-right direction, the light enters the direct portion 578a. The inside of the straight portion 578a is sequentially reflected forward from the end portion by the diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a, and light is irradiated forward from the entire front surface of the straight portion 578a. A top left decorative lens member 579 or a top right decorative lens member 580 is disposed in front of the light guide member 578, and a portion that is in front of the straight part 578a is decorated with light emission.

  The light guide member 578 receives light from the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 from the diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface of the arc portion 578b. Then, the light is diffused widely into the arc portion 578b by the unevenness of the diffusion input portion 578d, and the light is irradiated forward from the entire front surface of the arc portion 578b. Thereby, the part located in front of the circular arc part 578b in the top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 can be decorated with light emission.

  As described above, the light guide member 578 includes the LEDs 583a and 586a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586, or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587. The light from the LEDs 584a and 587a can be guided, and the top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 arranged in front can be illuminated and decorated in a good (uniform) state.

  The top left decorative lens member 579 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 574 so as to cover the front side of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the left side of the front surface of the unit main body 574 in the left-right direction. The top left decorative lens member 579 has three decorative lens portions 579a that accommodate the three light guide members 578 independently from the front. The decorative lens portion 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 is formed in a shape that follows the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and the upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 579a, projections and depressions of a square frustum projecting forward are arranged in a row on the left and right.

  The top left decorative lens member 579 extends from the left end of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the right end of the top left decorative portion 574e of the unit body 574. That is, the top left decorative lens member 579 decorates substantially the entire left side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top left decorative lens member 579 is illuminated and decorated by the LEDs 583a and 586a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 via the three light guide members 578.

  The top right decorative lens member 580 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 574 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the right side of the front surface of the unit main body 574 in the left-right direction. The top right decorative lens member 580 has three decorative lens portions 580a that house the three light guide members 578 independently from the front. The decorative lens portion 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 is formed in a shape that follows the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 580a, projections and depressions of a square frustum projecting forward are arranged in a row on the left and right.

  The top right decorative lens member 580 extends from the right end of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the left end of the top right decorative portion 574f of the unit main body 574. That is, the top right decorative lens member 580 decorates substantially the entire right side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top right decorative lens member 580 is illuminated and decorated by the LEDs 584a and 587a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 via the three light guide members 578.

  The top middle left decorative member 581 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 574 from the front of the top left decorative lens member 579 between the left opening 574a on the front surface of the unit main body 574 and the top middle decorative member 576. The top middle left decorative member 581 is mounted so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 in the assembled state in the door frame top unit 570, and the front center side is the top left side. The decorative lens member 579 projects forward from the front surface. The top middle left decorative member 581 is formed of an opaque member.

  The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 574 from the front of the top right decorative lens member 580 between the right opening 574a on the front surface of the unit main body 574 and the top middle decorative member 576. The top middle right decorative member 582 is mounted so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 in a state assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the center of the front side is closer to the top right. The decorative lens member 580 protrudes forward from the front surface. The top middle right decorative member 582 is formed of an opaque member.

  The door frame top left decorative substrate 583 is attached to the inside of the left side surface (top left decorative portion 574e) in the unit main body 574 with the surface on which the LED 583a is mounted facing rightward. On the door frame top left decorative substrate 583, the LED 583a is mounted at a position facing the left end surfaces of the three light guide members 578 attached to the left front surface of the unit main body 574 in the left-right direction center. The three LEDs 583a can each emit light independently. The portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 that is positioned in front of the left opening 574a of the top left decorative lens member 579 is connected to the LED 583a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 via the straight portions 578a of the three light guide members 578. Can be decorated with luminescence.

  The door frame top right decorative board 584 is attached to the inside of the right side surface (top right decorative portion 574f) in the unit main body 574 with the surface on which the LED 584a is mounted facing leftward. On the door frame top right decorative board 584, an LED 584a is mounted at a position facing the right end face of the three light guide members 578 attached to the front surface on the right side of the unit body 574 in the left-right direction center. The three LEDs 584a can each emit light independently. A portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 positioned in front of the right opening 574a of the top right decorative lens member 580 via the straight portions 578a of the three light guide members 578 is set by the LED 584a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584. Can be decorated with luminescence.

  The pair of substrate bases 585 are attached to the rear side of the unit body 574 where the plurality of slits 574b are formed. The pair of substrate bases 585 are formed substantially symmetrical to each other. The substrate base 585 includes a substantially square side wall having sides extending in the vertical and front and back directions, a rear wall having a rectangular shape in front view extending rightward and leftward from the rear side of the side wall, and a front end of the upper side of the side wall. The upper wall of a substantially right triangle connecting the upper side of the side wall and the rear wall with the line connecting the upper side of the side wall as the hypotenuse, and the lower side of the side wall and the rear wall on the opposite side of the upper wall And a bottom wall of a right triangle, and is formed in a triangular prismatic box shape in which the upper and lower hypotenuses are open. The substrate base 585 is attached to the unit main body 574 such that the opened portion is closed by the unit main body 574. The substrate base 585 is attached with the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 so that the opened part is closed.

  The door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is attached to the substrate base 585 so as to close a box-shaped open part from the front in the substrate base 585 attached to the rear side to the left of the left and right center of the unit main body 574. It is done. The door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is attached to the front surface of the substrate base 585 so that the front surface moves forward as it moves toward the center side in the left-right direction of the unit body 574. Inclined state. Thereby, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is a surface of a portion where the front surface of the door frame top unit 570 is formed with three slits 574b on the left side of the unit body 574 in the left-right direction center. It becomes a state substantially parallel to.

  The door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 has a plurality of LEDs 586 a mounted at positions corresponding to the three slits 574 b of the unit main body 574. As a result, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is in a state in which the plurality of LEDs 586a face forward from the three slits 574b on the left side of the center of the unit body 574 in a state assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 emits a plurality of LEDs 586a to emit and decorate a portion near the top middle decorative member 576 of the top left decorative lens member 579 via the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

  The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is attached to the board base 585 so as to close the box-shaped open part from the front in the board base 585 attached to the rear side on the right side of the left and right center of the unit main body 574. It is done. The door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 is attached to the front surface of the substrate base 585 so that the front surface moves forward as it moves toward the center side in the left-right direction of the unit body 574. Inclined state. As a result, the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the front surface thereof is the surface of the portion where the three slits 574b on the right side of the center of the unit body 574 are formed on the right side. It becomes a state substantially parallel to.

  The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 has a plurality of LEDs 587 a mounted at positions corresponding to the three slits 574 b of the unit main body 574. As a result, the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is in a state in which the plurality of LEDs 587a face forward from the three slits 574b on the right side of the center of the unit main body 574 in a state assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 emits a plurality of LEDs 587a to emit light and decorate a portion near the top middle decorative member 576 of the top right decorative lens member 580 via the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

  The pair of light shielding members 588 are attached to the rear side of the front surface of the unit main body 574 at a position between the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 and the unit main body 574. The pair of light shielding members 588 are formed so as to be substantially bilaterally symmetrical with each other by an opaque member. The light shielding member 588 is provided between the upper and lower sides of the plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a on the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 arranged in correspondence with the three slits 574b in the unit main body 574. Partitioning. By this light shielding member 588, light can be guided forward by the light guide member 578 only by the LEDs 586a and 587a located immediately after each light guide member 578, and the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative member The decorative lens portions 579a and 580a of the lens member 580 can be illuminated and decorated satisfactorily.

  The door frame top unit relay board 589 is attached to the front surface of the central base 571. The door frame top unit relay substrate 589 includes a pair of upper speakers 573, a door frame top middle decorative substrate 577, a door frame top left decorative substrate 583, a door frame top right decorative substrate 584, a door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586, and a door. The connection between the frame top middle right decorative board 587 and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 is relayed. The door frame top unit relay board 589 is connected to the door body relay board via a connection cable (not shown) provided in the door frame right side unit 550. The front side of the door frame top unit relay board 589 is covered with a relay board cover 590.

  The door frame top unit 570 includes a top middle decorative member 576 that protrudes forward at the center in the left-right direction, and is curved so that the front surfaces on both the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 are bent backward. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have an illusion that only the top middle decorative member 576 protrudes greatly forward, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the pachinko machine 1.

  The door frame top unit 570 has a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 that decorate the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 arranged at the center from both the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576. The unit main body 574 is formed so as to extend to the top left decorative portion 574e and the top right decorative portion 574f formed at the left and right ends of the unit main body 574. Thereby, the front upper part of the door frame 3 can be entirely decorated by the door frame top unit 570.

  At this time, in the door frame top unit 570, the front surface is protected by a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal behind each of the left and right ends near the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. The speaker cover 575 faces the front from between the three decorative lens portions 579a and 580a that are separated from each other above and below the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. The player can listen to the sound output from the left and right upper speakers 573 in a good state, and can enjoy high-quality stereo sound.

  The door frame top unit 570 includes a door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and a door frame top right decorative substrate 584 by a plurality of light guide members 578 provided on the rear side of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. The light from the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 can be guided to the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580, and the top left decorative lens member 579 and The entire front surface of the top right decorative lens member 580 can be decorated with light emission. Therefore, the door frame top unit 570 can decorate the entire front surface of the upper part of the door frame 3 including the front of the left and right upper speakers 573 with light emission.

[3-8. Effect of door frame]
The effects of the door frame 3 will be described. The door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has the through-holes 111 penetrating through the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 in the front and rear directions and in the vertical and horizontal directions as compared with the conventional pachinko machine. The height in the vertical direction of the plate unit 320 and the door frame top unit 570 is reduced in accordance with the enlargement of the through hole 111, and the horizontal width of the door frame left side unit 540 and the door frame right side unit 550 Is made smaller. Thereby, the front surface of the game board 5 (game area 5a) attached to the main body frame 4 can be seen as widely as possible from the player (front) through the through-hole 111 (glass unit 190). This corresponds to the game board 5 having a wide game area 5a.

  The door frame 3 has an effect decoration rotating body unit 530 (second effect decoration rotation) having a large hemispherical operation button 410 at the center in the left-right direction of the dish unit 320 bulging forward on the lower side of the through-hole 111. Body unit 530A), and the front surface (front surface of the front front lower decorative portion 326c) of the lower half (portion lower than the upper plate 321) on both the left and right sides of the production decoration rotating body unit 530 can be bent backward. Recessed shape (the front faces of the left and right sides of the production decoration rotator unit 530 are positioned rearward from the straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of the dish unit 320 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the production decoration rotator unit 530. In a concavely curved shape). As a result, the effect decoration rotator unit 530 attached to the front surface at the center in the left-right direction of the dish unit 320 appears to protrude greatly forward, so that the effect decoration rotator unit 530 is made conspicuous to the player. It can be shown in an emphasized manner, and the effect decoration rotating body unit 530 can be strongly noticed.

  The door frame 3 is arranged such that a large hemispherical transparent operation button 410 faces obliquely upward and forward with the effect decoration rotating body unit 530 disposed on the front surface of the dish unit 320 below the through-hole 111. Since it is mounted in an inclined state, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1, the operation button 410 faces the player's head (face), and the player drops his line of sight and rotates the decoration. When the body unit 530 is viewed, the operation button 410 can be seen in a state substantially close to the front, and the large and round operation button 410 can be visually recognized with high intensity. In addition, the effect image displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 arranged in the transparent operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state. It is possible to entertain a sufficient.

  Since the door frame 3 includes an operation button 410 having a diameter substantially the same as the overall height of the plate unit 320 and bulging out in a forward direction, when the operation button 410 is operated, the operation button can be moved by a short distance of hand movement. 410 can be touched, and the operation button 410 can be “fast pressed” relatively easily. Because the operation button 410, which has a large diameter and bulges forward, is mounted in an inclined state, it can be pressed from above like the operation buttons of a conventional pachinko machine. Alternatively, the operation can be performed well even from the front, and the operation buttons 410 can be more enjoyed by the operation buttons 410 with good operability.

  The door frame 3 is mounted with the effect decoration rotator unit 530 in a suspended state by the dish unit 320 and includes a vibration motor 424 that generates vibration at the lower portion of the effect decoration rotator unit 530. When a vibration is generated by rotating the vibration motor 424 in accordance with the game state, a strong vibration can be transmitted to the player's hand touching the upper part of the operation button 410, and the player is surprised. The production using the operation buttons 410 can be further enjoyed.

  Furthermore, the door frame 3 is provided with a large operation button 410 (production decoration rotating body unit 530) over the entire height of the plate unit 320 at the center of the front surface of the plate unit 320, so that the door frame 3 is higher than the conventional pachinko machine. Since the lower plate 322 under the plate 321 becomes less conspicuous, it is possible to make it easier for players who are familiar with conventional pachinko machines to recognize that they are clearly different, and attract the player's attention strongly. The pachinko machine 1 having high appealing power can be obtained.

  The door frame 3 wraps around the lower plate 322 to the rear side of the production decoration rotator unit 530 with respect to the lower plate opening 326d opened on the left side of the production decoration rotator unit 530 on the front surface of the plate unit 320. Therefore, the volume of the lower plate 322 can be increased with respect to the size of the lower plate opening 326d, and a sufficient number of game balls can be secured in the lower plate 322. Since the rear part of the lower plate 322 wraps around to the rear side of the production decoration rotator unit 530, when the player puts his left hand into the lower plate 322 or puts his finger on the lower plate opening 326d Since it becomes difficult for the fingertips to touch the wall behind the lower plate 322, it is possible to make it difficult to give the player a sense of incongruity, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game and to increase the size of the lower plate opening 326d. Compared to this, it can be recognized by tactile sense that the volume of the lower plate 322 is large.

  Further, the door frame 3 has a lower tray ball supply port 323c through which game balls from the upper plate 321 are discharged to the lower plate 322, and a bottom for pulling out the game balls of the lower plate 322 into a dollar box or the like below the plate unit 320. The countersunk hole 322a is arranged linearly in the front-rear direction, and is arranged on the right outside of the lower dish opening 326d (on the right side of the left end of the frame unit 415 of the effect decoration rotating body unit 530) in front view. . In other words, the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a are connected to the production decoration rotating body unit 530, the production operation unit mounting portion 326a (the right outside of the lower plate opening 326d), and the lower plate cover 340. Since the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball hole 322a are not visible from the player side, the appearance of the dish unit 320 (pachinko machine 1) can be refreshed. It is possible to improve the appearance of the pachinko machine 1.

  The door frame 3 has a lower plate ball removal hole 322a in the lower plate 322, which is disposed in front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c (below the front), so that the lower plate ball removal hole 322a is opened. As soon as the game ball released from the upper plate 321 or the like to the lower plate 322 enters the lower plate 322, the game ball is discharged from the lower plate ball removal hole 322a to a lower dollar box or the like. At this time, since the player cannot see the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball removal hole 322a, the flow of the game balls discharged from the upper tray 321 and the like through the lower tray 322 to the dollar box is also included. I can't see it. Accordingly, the player can have an illusion that the game ball on the upper plate 321 or the game ball discharged from the payout device 830 in a state where the upper plate 321 is full is directly discharged to the dollar box. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to feel the annoyance passing through the lower plate 322, and to reduce the interest by dedicating the player to the game (gaming operation of the game ball, production image, etc.). it can.

  In the lower tray 322, the door frame 3 is provided with a lower tray ball removal hole 322a at a position to the front left of the lower tray ball supply port 323c, and the lower tray 322 on the right side of the lower tray ball removal hole 322a is raised. Since the wall portion is curved obliquely so as to face the direction of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a, the game balls supplied from the lower dish ball supply port 323c to the lower dish 322 are directly connected to the lower dish ball removal hole 322a. It can be guided to 322a, or can be indirectly reflected to the lower dish ball removal hole 322a by being reflected on the right wall. Thereby, in a state where the lower dish ball hole 322a remains open, the game ball supplied from the lower dish ball supply port 323c to the lower dish 322 is an area on the left side of the lower dish ball hole 322a in the lower dish 322. Since it can be discharged downward from the lower tray ball removal hole 322a without entering the lower tray first region A1, the lower side of the lower plate 322 is displayed without showing the player the game balls circulating in the lower tray 322. The game ball can be discharged downward (dollar box), and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

  The door frame 3 includes a lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326 facing the front of the lower plate 322 between the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (the effect decoration rotating body unit 530) and the lower speaker port 326e. Therefore, even if the player puts his hand on the lower plate opening 326d or puts his hand on the lower plate 322, the front of the lower speaker port 326e is not blocked by the player's hand. The sound from the lower speaker 921 in the substrate unit 900 can be output well forward, and the sound of the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed. When the player puts his hand in the lower plate 322 or approaches the lower plate 322, the player can feel the vibration caused by the heavy bass generated by the lower speaker 921 output forward from the lower speaker port 326e. You can entertain and suppress the decline of interest.

  Since the door frame 3 includes a door frame right side unit 550 that is plate-like and protrudes forward from the right side of the through-hole 111, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility of the game hall, the door frame right Since the side unit 550 can exert an effect such as a partition between the pachinko machine adjacent to the right side, it seems that a player who plays with the pachinko machine 1 is playing in a private room. The game can be played in a relaxed atmosphere without being bothered by other players.

  Furthermore, the door frame 3 can be light-decorated on the front end and both left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 that is plate-like and protrudes greatly forward, so that the game hall installed with the pachinko machines 1 arranged side by side Even if the pachinko machine 1 is not located in front of the pachinko machine 1, the presence of the pachinko machine 1 can be informed from a distance such as from the side along the island facility, and the pachinko machine has a high appeal to the player. Machine 1 can be used.

  The door frame 3 includes a top middle decorative member 576 that protrudes forward at the center in the left-right direction in the door frame top unit 570 on the upper side of the through-hole 111, and the front surfaces on the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 are moved backward. The shape of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 is less than the straight line connecting the left and right front ends of the door frame top unit 570 and the left and right front ends of the top middle decorative member 576. The shape is curved in a concave shape so that the front surfaces on both the left and right sides are located rearward. As a result, only the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 appears to protrude greatly forward, so that the player can make the top middle decorative member 576 stand out and emphasized. The medium decorative member 576 can be strongly noted.

  By the way, a pair of upper speakers spaced apart from each other are provided on the upper part of the door frame in the conventional pachinko machine, and the two upper speakers are conspicuous. On the other hand, the door frame 3 according to the present embodiment has a pair of upper portions whose front surfaces are protected by speaker covers 575 made of punching metal at both left and right ends in the door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper side of the through-hole 111. In addition to the speaker 573, a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 extending from the left and right sides of the center top middle decorative member 576 to the left and right ends through the front of the speaker cover 575 are provided. The entire front surface of the left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be decorated with light emission. Thereby, since the front upper part of the door frame 3 can be decorated as a whole, the pair of upper speakers 573 become inconspicuous in the upper part of the door frame 3, and the decoration clearly different from the conventional pachinko machine is given. The pachinko machine 1 can be recognized by the player at a glance, and the player can enjoy a high-quality stereo sound by the pair of upper speakers 573. it can.

  As described above, the door frame 3 of the present embodiment includes the effect decoration rotating body unit 530 attached to the dish unit 320 on the lower side and the upper side of the through-hole 111, and the top middle decoration member 576 of the door frame top unit 570. However, each of them protrudes forward in the center in the left-right direction, so that it is possible to show the player a uniform decoration up and down so that the virtual line passing through the center in the left-right direction is conspicuous, and a sophisticated decoration Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be made more conspicuous than other pachinko machines, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made highly appealing.

  The door frame 3 projects the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 and the effect decorative rotator unit 530 that are disposed vertically at the center in the left-right direction, and thus the top middle decorative member 576. When the decoration decoration rotating body unit 530 is decorated with light emission, the player can show a light emission line extending vertically at the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the door frame 3, and the player's line of sight is placed at the center in the left-right direction. It can be made to guide to the operation button 410 etc. of the effect decoration rotary body unit 530 performed.

[4. Overall structure of main frame]
The main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 to 113. 110 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 111 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the rear. 112 is an exploded perspective view in which the main body frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 113 is an exploded perspective view in which the main body frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 of the present embodiment is formed in a box shape with the front opened, and a game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein. The body frame 4 is attached to the frame-like outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front left side front end so that it can be opened and closed, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the opened front side is closed. It is attached so that it can be opened and closed.

  The main body frame 4 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 that can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame base 600. Attached to both the upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view and rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3 respectively. A main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and a main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge member 150 is rotatably attached, respectively, and a reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. .

  The main body frame 4 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base 600 and is attached to the right side surface of the main body frame base 600 and a ball launcher 680 for driving game balls into the game area 5 a of the game board 5. It is attached to the rear side along the front side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 and the locking unit 700 that locks between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 and between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4. An inverted L-shaped payout unit 800 for paying out a game ball to the player side, a substrate unit 900 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and a main body frame attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 so as to be opened and closed. A back cover 980 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the base 600.

[4-1. Body frame base]
As shown in FIGS. 110 to 113, the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment is formed in a rectangular shape whose front view extends vertically. The main body frame base 600 penetrates back and forth within a range of about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end, and a game board insertion slot 601 into which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side, A game board placement part 602 that forms the lower side of the board insertion slot 601 and on which the game board 5 is placed, and protrudes upward from the center in the left-right direction of the game board placement part 602 and is located at the left and right of the lower end of the game board 5 And a game board restricting portion 603 for restricting rearward movement.

  The main body frame base 600 includes a launching device mounting portion 604 for mounting a ball launching device 680 formed on the lower right side of the game board mounting portion 602 when viewed from the front, and a front-rear side of the launching device mounting portion 604 on the right side when viewed from the front. For the door frame of the board unit 900, which penetrates through the cylinder insertion port 605 through which the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted, and through the front and rear from the left and right center of the game board mounting portion 602 to the lower left side. A connection opening 606 that allows the relay board 911 to face forward, and a circular speaker that penetrates forward and backward on the lower left side of the game board mounting portion 602 when viewed from the front, and that faces the speaker unit 920 in the board unit 900 forward. And an opening 607.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 extends in a plate-like shape from the right side of the game board insertion slot 601 to the rear, so that the locking unit 700 is attached to the right side, and the back cover 980 is rotatable at the rear end. A rear extension 608 is provided. The main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4 is formed in the vicinity of the upper and lower ends at the left end of the front view on the rear surface. And a lower hinge mounting portion 610.

  The main body frame base 600 is attached to an opening cover 615 that closes the connection opening 606 so as to be opened and closed, and is pivotably attached to a position slightly lower on the left side of the left and right center of the game board mounting portion 602 when viewed from the front. And a game board lock member 616 capable of restricting the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the board insertion slot 601.

[4-2. Main body frame side upper hinge member and main body frame side lower hinge member]
The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 to 113. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 are attached to the upper hinge attaching portion 609 and the lower hinge attaching portion 610 of the main body frame base 600.

  The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 includes an upper hinge main body 621 in which a rear portion of a flat plate member extending horizontally is bent downward in an L-shape, and projects upward in a cylindrical shape from the front end of the upper hinge main body 621. The main body frame upper hinge pin 622 that is pivotally supported by the cage outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the upper hinge main body 621 pass through the left side of the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 when viewed from the front, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 is pivotally supported. And an upper hinge hole 623 for the door frame. The body frame side upper hinge member 620 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 609 of the body frame base 600 at a portion bent downward in the upper hinge body 621.

  The main body frame side lower hinge member 640 penetrates vertically at the front end of the lower hinge first main body 641 and the lower hinge first main body 641 in which the rear portion of the horizontally extending flat plate member is bent upward in an L shape. A lower hinge hole for outer frame (not shown) pivotally supported by the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 and a horizontally extending flat plate disposed above the lower hinge first main body 641 The lower hinge second main body 643 whose rear part is bent in an L shape upward, and the front end of the lower hinge second main body 643 vertically penetrates the door frame side lower hinge member 150 of the door frame 3. The door frame hinge hole 644 for supporting the door frame and the door frame hinge hole 644 in the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 643 extend from the left end to the upper side and extend upward from the left end. A regulating piece 645 for regulating the rotation range of .

  The lower hinge second body 643 is configured such that a horizontally extending portion is spaced upward from a portion of the lower hinge first main body 641 that extends horizontally, and a portion bent upward is a lower hinge first body. It is in contact with the front surface of the portion bent upward of the main body 641. The body frame side lower hinge member 640 is attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 610 of the body frame base 600 at a portion bent upward from the lower hinge first body 641 and the lower hinge second body 643.

[4-3. Reinforcement frame]
The reinforcing frame 660 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 to 113. The reinforcing frame 660 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600. The reinforcing frame 660 has a U-shaped cross-sectional shape in plan view with an open right side, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In the reinforcing frame 660, on the rear side of the portion extending rightward from the front end, the left positioning for restricting the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion slot 601 of the main body frame base 600 from moving forward and vertically A set of members 661 are attached so as to be spaced apart from each other in the vertical direction.

  The reinforcement frame 660 can reinforce the hinge side (left side in front view) of the main body frame base 600 and enter the main body frame 4 (game board 5) from the left side passing between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent unauthorized insertion of tools.

[4-4. Ball launcher]
The ball launching device 680 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 110, 112, and 113. FIG. The ball launcher 680 is a device for driving a game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the tray unit 320 into the game area 5 a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. In the ball launching device 680, the strength of the game ball is changed in accordance with the rotation angle of the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 at the lower right front corner of the door frame 3.

  The ball launching device 680 is attached to the rear launching surface 681 of the flat plate-like launching base 681 attached to the launching device attaching portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 and the launching base 681 on the rear surface in the front view. A firing solenoid 682 consisting of a rotary solenoid penetrating and extending forward, a ball striking rod 683 having a base end attached to the rotation shaft of the firing solenoid 682, and a slanting upper left extension from the vicinity of the tip of the ball striking rod 683 And a launch rail 684 attached to the front surface of the launch base 681 and capable of rolling a game ball.

  In this ball launching device 680, a game ball is supplied from the ball feed unit 250 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the launch rail 684, and a game ball is supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 684. When the handle 302 is rotated, the firing solenoid 682 is driven with a strength corresponding to the rotation operation angle, and a game ball is hit by the hitting ball 683. The game ball hit by the hitting ball 683 is guided to the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the launch rail 684 and is driven into the game area 5a.

  If the game ball that has been hit does not reach the game area 5a due to the driving strength of the game ball, the space between the launch rail 684 and the game board 5 (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002). From the lower foul cover unit 270 to the foul ball receiving port 275, passes through the foul cover unit 270, and is discharged to the lower plate 322.

[4-5. Locking unit]
A locking unit 700 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 to 113. The locking unit 700 of the present embodiment is attached to the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4 and can lock between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2. The locking unit 700 is attached to the right side surface of the rear extension 608 of the main body frame base 600 and extends vertically. The locking unit 700 protrudes forward from the unit base 701 and can be locked to the door frame 3. A door frame ridge 702, a plurality of outer frame ridges 703 projecting rearward from the unit base 701 and latchable with the outer frame 2, and projecting in a columnar shape from the bottom of the unit base 701 to the front, A protrusion protrudes from the front end portion in a direction perpendicular to the axis, and the rotation of the cylinder lock 211 is transmitted by engaging with the rotation transmitting member 212 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame 3, and the door according to the rotation direction of the key. A key cylinder 710 that unlocks either the frame collar 702 or the outer frame collar 703.

[4-6. Dispensing unit]
The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 132. FIG. 114 is a perspective view of the dispensing unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 115 is a perspective view of the dispensing unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 116 is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 117 is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the back. FIG. 118 (a) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit of the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 118 (b) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit as viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 119 is an exploded perspective view of the ball guiding unit. FIG. 120A is a perspective view of the payout unit of the payout unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 120B is a perspective view of the payout device as seen from behind. FIG. 121 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing device as seen from the front, and FIG. 122 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing device as seen from the back. FIG. 123 (a) is a front view of the dispensing device, and FIG. 123 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line SS in FIG. FIG. 124 (a) is an explanatory view showing a state where the ball removal passage is closed by the ball removal movable piece in the dispensing device, and (b) is an illustration showing a state where the ball removal passage is opened by the ball removal movable piece. .

  FIG. 125 (a) is a perspective view of the upper full ball path unit in the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 125 (b) is a perspective view of the upper full ball path unit as viewed from the back. 126 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full sphere path unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 126 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full sphere path unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 127 (a) is a perspective view of the lower full tank path unit in the payout unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 127 (b) is a perspective view of the lower full ball path unit as seen from the back. 128 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full sphere path unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 129 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full sphere path unit as seen from the back. Further, FIG. 130 (a) is an explanatory view showing a state where the guideway opening / closing door is closed in the lower full ball path unit, and FIG. 130 (b) is an explanatory view showing a state where the guideway opening / closing door is open. . FIG. 131 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the foul cover unit of the door frame and the lower full ball path unit. FIG. 132 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in the payout unit.

  As shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, the payout unit 800 of this embodiment is attached to an upper side of the payout unit base 801 and an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600. The tank tank 802 stores a game ball supplied from an island facility of a game hall (not shown) in a box shape that is open to the left and right and is attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802. And a tank rail 803 extending to the left and right for guiding the game ball in the cage ball tank 802 leftward as viewed from the front. In the tank rail 803, the game balls are guided to the left, and are aligned in two rows by the ball leveling member 804 (see FIG. 132) that is suspended so as to swing from above.

  The payout unit 800 is mounted on the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 on the upper left side of the front view and guides the game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner, and the payout unit below the ball guide unit 820. A payout device 830 that detachably attaches the game balls guided by the ball guide unit 820 from the base 801 based on instructions from the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950; It has. From the tank rail 803 to the payout device 830, game balls circulate in two rows, and from the payout device 830, game balls are paid out one by one.

  Further, the payout unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and guides the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 downward, and the game balls according to the storage state of the game balls on the upper plate 321 in the tray unit 320. Is discharged from either the normal discharge port 850d or the full tank discharge port 850e, and is discharged from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full ball path unit 850 attached to the lower end of the dispensing unit base 801. Normal guidance path 861 that guides the game ball forward from the front end to the through-ball passage 273 of the door frame 3, guides the game ball released from the full tank outlet 850e to the front of the door frame 3 from the front end. The full tank guide path 862 for guiding to the full tank receiving port 274, and the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862 are arranged on the main body frame. And a, a lower full sphere path unit 860 having a taxiway door 863 to be opened or closed in response to opening and closing of the door frame 3 against.

[4-6a. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 820 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 118 and 119. The ball guiding unit 820 includes a box-shaped front case 821 that extends vertically and has a rear side open, a box-shaped rear case 822 that is attached to the rear side of the front case 821 and has a front side open, and a front case 821 and the rear case 822, and a flat partition plate 823 that partitions the front case 821 and the rear case 822. The front and rear ends of the partition plate 823 penetrate the front case 821 and the rear case 822. A rod-shaped shaft member 824 that is attached, and a pair of movable piece member front 825 and a rear piece of the movable piece member that are rotatably attached by the shaft member 824 and are disposed in the front case 821 and the rear case 822, respectively. 826 and a ball breakage detection sensor 827 which is attached in the front case 821 and can detect the rotational position of the pair of movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826. To have.

  The front case 821 has a ball guide inlet 821a that is open at the upper part of the right side so that a game ball can pass therethrough, and a ball guide outlet that opens at a position to the right of the bottom center of the bottom side so that the game ball can pass through. 821b, and a ball guide inlet 821a and a ball guide outlet 821b are connected to each other, and a guide passage 821c through which a game ball can flow is provided. The guide passage 821c includes an introduction portion 821d that extends obliquely from the ball guide entrance 821a to the vicinity of the left end at a small angle with respect to the horizontal, and a center of height along the left side of the front case 821 from the introduction portion 821d. The detection portion 821e extends straight downward to the vicinity, and the meandering portion 821f extending in a meandering manner from the detection portion 821e with the left and right widths of the front case 821. The front case 821 includes a notch 821g on the right side wall of the detection portion 821e in the guide passage 821c.

  The rear case 822 includes a ball guide inlet 822a that is open at the upper part of the right side so that a game ball can pass therethrough, and a ball guide outlet that is opened at a position to the right of the bottom center of the bottom side so that the game ball can pass through. 822b, a ball guide inlet 822a and a ball guide outlet 822b, and a guide passage 822c through which a game ball can flow. The guide passage 822c includes an introduction portion 822d that extends obliquely from the ball guide entrance 822a to the vicinity of the left end at a small angle with respect to the horizontal, and a center of height along the left side of the rear case 822 from the introduction portion 822d. The detection unit 822e extends straight down to the vicinity, and the meandering unit 822f extends in a meandering manner from the detection unit 822e with the left and right widths of the rear case 822. The rear case 822 includes a notch 822g on the right side wall of the detection portion 822e in the guide passage 822c.

  The rear case 822 is substantially symmetrical to the left and right with respect to the front case 821, and is formed so that the guide passage 821c and the guide passage 822c are aligned in the front-rear direction when assembled in the ball guide unit 820. Yes.

  The shaft member 824 has front and rear ends attached to positions below the upper ends of the notches 821g and 822g in the front case 821 and the rear case 822 and outside the guide passages 821c and 822c.

  The movable piece member front 825 includes a flat plate-like movable piece 825a extending vertically, a shaft hole 825b penetrating forward and backward at the upper end of the right side surface of the movable piece 825a, and the movable piece 825a. An extension portion 825c extending rightward from the upper end of the movable piece 825a at a right angle to the right surface of the movable piece 825a, and connecting the extension portion 825c and the movable piece 825a, extends in a fan shape around the shaft hole 825b. A connecting portion 825d, a weight attaching portion 825e that protrudes outward from the vicinity of the center of the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d and the upper portion of the connecting portion 825d, and has a through-hole penetrating in the front-rear direction, and an extending portion 825c A detection piece 825f that extends outward from the right-hand tip and can be detected by the ball breakage detection sensor 827, and a flat extension outward from a position near the movable piece 825a on the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d. Is provided with a stopper piece 825g, the.

  When the movable piece member front 825 passes the shaft member 824 through the shaft hole 825b, the weight attaching portion 825e protruding from the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d is rotated by its own weight so as to be positioned immediately below the shaft hole 825b. The movable piece 825a extends obliquely downward from the shaft hole 825b. Therefore, in the assembled state of the ball guiding unit 820, the connecting portion 825d is inserted into the notch portion 821g of the front case 821, the lower end of the movable piece 825a protrudes into the guiding passage 821c, and the stopper piece 825g It will be in the state contact | abutted to the outer wall of the guidance channel | path 821c (detection part 821e). When the stopper piece 825g abuts against the outer wall of the guide passage 821c, the lower end of the movable piece 825a is restricted from rotating further in the direction protruding into the guide passage 821c (left direction in front view). When the movable piece member front 825 rotates the lower end of the movable piece 825a in a direction approaching the wall of the guide passage 821c (right direction in front view), the left side surface of the movable piece 825a becomes the inner surface of the guide passage 821c. Match. In this state, the detection piece 825f in front of the movable piece member 825 is in a non-detection state with respect to the ball breakage detection sensor 827. That is, when there is a game ball in the guide passage 821c, the ball break detection sensor 827 is not detected.

  The movable piece member rear 826 includes a flat plate-like movable piece 826a extending vertically, a shaft hole 826b penetrating forward and rearward at the upper end of the right surface of the movable piece 826a, and a movable piece 826a. The extension portion 826c extending rightward from the upper end of the movable piece 826a at right angles to the right surface of the movable piece 826a, and the extension portion 826c and the movable piece 826a are connected to each other and extend in a fan shape around the shaft hole 826b. A connecting portion 826d, a weight attaching portion 826e having a through hole that protrudes outward from the vicinity of the center of the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d and the upper portion of the extending portion 826c, and a through hole extending in the front-rear direction, The detection piece 826f that extends outward from the right end to the outside and can be detected by the ball breakage detection sensor 827, and extends from the position near the movable piece 826a on the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d to the outside in the form of a flat plate. Is provided with a stopper piece 826g, the.

  When the movable piece member rear 826 passes the shaft member 824 through the shaft hole 826b, the weight attaching portion 826e protruding from the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d is rotated by its own weight so as to be positioned immediately below the shaft hole 826b. Then, the movable piece 826a extends obliquely downward from the portion of the shaft hole 826b. Therefore, in the assembled state of the ball guiding unit 820, the connecting portion 826d is inserted into the notch 822g of the rear case 822, and the lower end of the movable piece 826a protrudes into the guiding passage 822c, and the stopper piece 826g It will be in the state contact | abutted to the outer wall of the guidance path 822c (detection part 822e). When the stopper piece 826g abuts against the outer wall of the guide passage 822c, the lower end of the movable piece 826a is restricted from further rotating in the direction protruding into the guide passage 822c (left direction in front view). When the movable piece member rear 826 rotates the lower end of the movable piece 826a in a direction approaching the wall of the guide passage 822c (right direction in front view), the left side surface of the movable piece 826a becomes the inner surface of the guide passage 822c. Match. In this state, the detection piece 826f after the movable piece member 826 is in a non-detection state with respect to the ball breakage detection sensor 827. That is, when there is a game ball in the guide passage 822c, the ball break detection sensor 827 is not detected.

  The ball guiding unit 820 of the present embodiment is supplied with a plurality of game balls arranged in a line in the front and back by the tank rail 803, and the front case 821 and the rear case in a state where the plurality of game balls are arranged in a row. By 822, it is possible to guide to the lower dispensing device 830 in two rows in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 132). At this time, since the front case 821 and the rear case 822 are partitioned by the partition plate 823, the game balls flowing through the respective guide passages 821c and 822c do not interfere with each other and flow well. Can do.

  When the game balls flow through the guide passages 821c and 822c of the ball guide unit 820, the game balls come into contact with the movable pieces 825a and 826a of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826, and the movable pieces 825a and 826a are guided by the guide passage. The movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 rotate in a direction coinciding with the wall surfaces of 821c and 822c. Thereby, the detection pieces 825f and 826f before the movable piece member 825 and the detection piece 825f and 826f after the movable piece member 826 are in a non-detection state with respect to the ball break detection sensor 827, and it can be seen that there is a game ball in the guide passages 821c and 822c.

  When game balls are paid out by the payout device 830 on the downstream side of the ball guide unit 820, the game balls in the guide passages 821c and 822c flow downstream. When a game ball flows through the guide passages 821c and 822c, the momentum of the game ball flowing through the introduction portions 821d and 822d is increased, and the game ball flowing through the introduction portions 821d and 822d is movable pieces above the detection portions 821e and 822e. It bounces back to the side of 825a, 826a and comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a, 826a. Since the movable pieces 825a and 826a vibrate due to the abutment of the game ball, the movable pieces 825a and 826a vibrate between the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the notches 821g and 822g of the guide passages 821c and 822c. It is possible to remove dust, dust, etc., and the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be rotated favorably by their own weight or the like.

  The ball guiding unit 820 detects the game balls flowing in the respective guide passages 821c and 822c by separate movable piece member front 825 and movable piece member rear 826, respectively, and the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece. Since each of the detection pieces 825f and 826f on the rear side of the member 826 is detected by a single ball breakage detection sensor 827, if there is no game ball in any of the guide passages 821c and 822c, The movable pieces 825a and 826a of the movable piece rear 826 are rotated so as to protrude into the guide passages 821c and 822c, and the detection pieces 825f and 826f on the side where the game ball is lost are detected by the ball breakage detection sensor 827. Therefore, since it is possible to detect a shortage of the game ball at an early stage, it is possible to quickly replenish the game ball and shorten the time when the game is interrupted as much as possible, thereby reducing the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

  Further, the weight of the movable piece member front 825, the movable piece member rear 826, and the weight is obtained by screwing and attaching a metal screw as a weight to the weight attaching portions 825e, 826e of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826. Thus, the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be easily rotated in the direction of protruding into the guide passages 821c and 822c. Since the upper ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a are rotatably attached to the outside of the guide passages 821c and 822c, and the lower end side protrudes into the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust and dirt in the guide passages 821c and 822c. Or the like does not adhere to the upper and lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, even if the movable pieces 825a and 826a rotate to the wall side of the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust, dust, or the like does not bite between the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the wall. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the movable pieces 825a and 826a do not rotate.

  As described above, the ball guiding unit 820 of the present embodiment includes a movable piece member front 825 and a movable piece member 825 a and a movable piece 825 a 826 a 826 a that protrudes into the guide passages 821 c and 822 c through which the game balls circulate due to its own weight. By attaching a weight made of a metal screw to the weight attaching portions 825e and 826e on the opposite side of the surface in contact with the game ball, the movable piece 825a depends on the weight of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 and the weight of the weight. 826a can be easily rotated (projected) into the guide passages 821c and 822c. Since the upper ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a are rotatably attached to the outside of the guide passages 821c and 822c, and the lower end side protrudes into the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust and dirt in the guide passages 821c and 822c. Or the like does not adhere to the upper and lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, even if the movable pieces 825a and 826a rotate to the wall side of the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust, dust, or the like does not bite between the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the wall. The movable pieces 825a and 826a (the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826) can be prevented from rotating.

  Since the metal screw as the weight is screwed into and attached to the weight attaching portions 825e and 826e that are formed as through holes, the weight is movable even if the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 rotate frequently. The movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 can be maintained in a good state over a long period of time without being disengaged from the member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 (weight attaching portions 825e, 826e). Since the weight can be easily attached to the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 simply by screwing a metal screw into the weight attachment portions 825e and 826e, the work of attaching the weight can be simplified. The cost for assembling the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

  Further, in the guide passages 821c and 822c, introduction portions 821d and 822d for guiding the game ball toward the movable pieces 825a and 826a are provided on the upstream side of the portion where the movable pieces 825a and 826a protrude inside. Since the game balls flow in the guide passages 821c and 822c, the game balls come into contact with the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be vibrated by the contact of the game balls. Accordingly, the vibrations of the movable pieces 825a and 826a can remove dust or dirt that is sandwiched or invaded between the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the walls of the guide passages 821c and 822c. The front piece 825 and the rear piece 826 of the movable piece can be favorably rotated.

  Therefore, since the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 can be rotated well, the state (presence / absence) of the game ball in the guide passages 821c and 822c can be detected reliably, and the game ball It is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems due to erroneous detection or the like. Even if the game ball supplied to the payout device 830 disappears from the inside of the guide passages 821c and 822c, the presence or absence of the inside of the guide passages 821c and 822c can be reliably detected via the movable pieces 825a and 826a. The ball can be replenished, and the time at which the game is interrupted can be shortened as much as possible, thereby suppressing a decrease in the interest of the player.

[4-6b. Dispensing device]
A payout device 830 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 120 to 124. The payout device 830 has a box shape with the rear side open, a payout entrance 831a that is open to allow the game ball to pass in the center in the left-right direction on the top surface, and an opening that allows the game ball to pass near the left end in front view on the bottom surface. A payout outlet 831b, a ball outlet 831c that is open so that a game ball can pass therethrough in the vicinity of the right end of the front view on the bottom surface, and a payout passage 831d through which the payout inlet 831a and the payout outlet 831b communicate with each other. , And a front box 831 having a ball discharge passage 831e which branches from the middle of the payout passage 831d and communicates with the ball discharge outlet 831c and through which game balls can flow, and is attached to the rear side of the front box 831. It has a box shape with the front side open, a payout entrance 832a that is open so that a game ball can pass through in the center in the left-right direction on the top surface, and a game ball near the left end in front view on the bottom surface. A payout outlet 832b that is open to allow passage, a ball outlet 832c that is open so that a game ball can pass therethrough in the vicinity of the right end of the front view on the bottom surface, and a payout inlet 832a and a payout outlet 832b that are connected to each other. There is a possible payout path 832d, and a rear box 832 having a ball discharge path 832e that branches from the middle of the payout path 832d and communicates with the ball discharge outlet 832c and through which game balls can flow.

  The payout device 830 is attached to the front side of the front box 831 and has a shallow box-shaped front cover 833 that is open on the rear side, and is attached to the front box 831 so that the rotary shaft passes through the front box 831 and moves forward. A payout motor 834 extending into the cover 833, a drive gear 835 attached to the rotation shaft of the payout motor 834, and meshed with the drive gear 835 so that the front box 831 and the front cover 833 can be rotated. A spur gear-shaped intermediate gear 836, a driven gear 837 meshing with the intermediate gear 836, a driven gear 837 is rotatably penetrated, a front end is attached to the front cover 833, and a rear end is A shaft member 838 that passes through the front box 831 and is attached to the rear box 832; a shaft member 838 that passes through the shaft member 838 and is rotatably attached; and a discharge passage for the front box 831 and the rear box 832 31d, 832d, a discharge blade 834 that rotates integrally with the driven gear 837, a blade rotation detection sensor 840 that is attached between the front box 831 and the rear box 832 and detects the rotation of the discharge blade 834. It is equipped with.

  Further, the dispensing device 830 is attached between the front box 831 and the rear box 832, and has a flat partition plate 841 that partitions the dispensing path 831 d of the front box 831 and the dispensing path 832 d of the rear box 832, and the front box 831. , A payout detection sensor 842 for detecting a game ball discharged from the payout outlets 831b and 832b, and a payout passage 831d and 832d. 831e and 832e are pivotally attached by a front box 831 and a rear box 832 at a portion where the ball extraction passage 831e and 832e can be closed. A ball removal lever 844 that is slidably mounted vertically on the upper right side of the box 832 in a front view and makes the ball removal movable piece 843 rotatable or non-rotatable. It is equipped with a.

  The payout passage 831d of the front box 831 extends obliquely to the lower right as viewed from the front so as to go from the payout inlet 831a to the ball outlet 831c, and is downward at a height of about 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the front box 831. It bends so as to extend vertically and bends substantially horizontally to the left near the center of the total height, and then extends vertically downward again at about 1/3 of the left and right widths of the front box 831 from the left end. It is bent in a crank shape so as to be positioned immediately above the payout outlet 831b at a height of about 1/4 from the bottom with respect to the total height of the front box 831, and extends vertically to the payout outlet 831b. Dispensing vanes 834 are arranged at portions of the dispensing passage 831d that are bent in a crank shape.

  On the other hand, the ball removal passage 831e further extends a portion extending obliquely from the discharge inlet 831a to the lower right in the discharge passage 831d, and is about 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the front box 831. It branches off to the height near the center.

  The front box 831 is formed on the upper part of the right side surface of the guide shelf 831f that protrudes rearward in the portion extending vertically toward the payout outlet 831b in the payout passage 831d, and is formed in the upper part of the right side surface. A lever mounting portion 831g for mounting the lever 844 so as to be slidable up and down.

  The payout passage 832d of the rear box 832 extends obliquely to the lower right in front view so as to go from the payout inlet 832a to the ball outlet 832c, and is downward at a height of about 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the rear box 832. It bends so as to extend vertically to the left, and is bent so as to extend substantially horizontally to the left near the center of the total height, and then extends vertically downward again at about 1/3 from the left end with respect to the left and right widths of the rear box 832. It is bent in a crank shape and extends vertically to the payout outlet 832b so as to be positioned immediately above the payout outlet 832b at a height of about 1/4 of the total height of the rear box 832. Dispensing blades 834 are disposed at portions of the dispensing passage 832d that are bent in a crank shape.

  On the other hand, the ball discharge passage 832e further extends a portion of the discharge passage 832d that obliquely extends from the discharge inlet 832a to the lower right, and is approximately 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the rear box 832. It branches off to the height near the center.

  The rear box 832 is formed on the upper part of the right side surface of the guide shelf 832f that protrudes forward as it goes downward in the portion extending vertically toward the payout outlet 832b in the payout passage 832d. A lever attachment portion 832g for attaching the lever 844 so as to be slidable up and down.

  The discharge passages 831d and 832d and the ball removal passages 831e and 832e of the front box 831 and the rear box 832 are formed in the same shape. The payout passages 831d and 832d are partitioned by a partition plate 841 up to the upstream of the portion where the payout vanes 834 are arranged. A payout detection sensor 842 is attached between the guide shelves 831f and 832f and the payout outlets 831b and 832b. That is, the game balls that have circulated through the payout passage 831d of the front box 831 and the game balls that have circulated through the payout passage 832d of the rear box 832 are moved back and forth between the front box 831 and the rear box 832 by the respective guide shelves 831f and 832f. It is brought close to the boundary and detected by one payout detection sensor 842.

  The driven gear 837 is a spur gear-like gear portion 837a meshing with the intermediate gear 836, and projects radially from the rear surface of the gear portion 837a at an angular interval of 60 degrees, and can be detected by the blade rotation detection sensor 840. A plurality of detection pieces 837b, and a connecting portion 837c that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the center of the gear portion 837a to the rear and has an unevenness on the peripheral surface of the rear end and can be connected to the discharge vane 834. .

  The payout blade 834 extends in a cylindrical shape in the front-rear direction, and protrudes in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the base cylinder part 834a from the front end of the base cylinder part 834a at a constant interval from the front end of the base cylinder part 834a. The plurality of (three) front blades 834b and the front blades 834b from the rear end of the base cylinder portion 834a are alternately projected in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the base cylinder portion 834a at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. 3) Rear blade 834c, and a connected portion that protrudes forward from the front end of the base cylindrical portion 834a in a cylindrical shape and that has concavities and convexities that can be connected to the connecting portion 837c of the driven gear 837 on the peripheral surface of the front end. 834d.

  Three front blades 834b and three rear blades 834c of the discharge blade 834 are provided at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction, and the rear blades 834c are arranged around the front blades 834b so as to be staggered. It is offset outward at an angle of 60 degrees in the direction and extends outward. The payout blade 834 of the present embodiment is connected by an arc that is recessed toward the center between the three front blades 834b (rear blades 834c), and the diameter of the arc is the same as or slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, between the front blades 834b (rear blades 834c), a ball housing portion 834e capable of housing only one game ball is formed.

  The three front blades 834b and the rear blades 834c are formed such that the outer diameter D1 around the axis of the base cylinder portion 834a is 1 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball. The diameter D2 centering on the axis of the base cylinder part 834a up to the part closest to the axis of the base cylinder part 834a in the arc part (sphere housing part 834e) between the front blades 834b (rear blades 834c) is: It is formed about 0.3 to 0.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball. That is, the depth [(diameter D1−diameter D2) / 2] from the outer periphery of the front blade 834b and the rear blade 834c to the most recessed portion of the ball housing portion 834e is 0.1-0. It is supposed to be 4 times.

  Therefore, it is possible to hold about 3/10 (between 1/4 and 1/3) of the outer periphery of the game ball by the arc portion (the ball housing portion 834e) between the front blades 834b (the rear blades 834c). it can. In other words, a depth of about 1/5 (1/7 to 1/4) of the outer diameter of the game ball can be accommodated. Thereby, the game balls in the payout paths 831d and 832d can be quickly accommodated between the front blades 834b (rear blades 834c) (the ball housing portion 834e).

  In the state in which the payout blade 834 of the present embodiment is assembled, the front blade 834b is located in the payout path 831d of the front box 831 and the rear blade 834c is located in the payout path 832d of the rear box 832 in the assembled state of the payout device 830. The game balls in the payout paths 831d and 832d can be paid out, respectively. The payout vanes 834 are arranged at portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d that are bent in a crank shape below the center of the total height of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. Specifically, in the payout passages 831d and 832d, the center of rotation of the payout vane 834 is located immediately below a portion extending vertically downward from the center of the entire height of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. In the portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d that are bent in a crank shape, the wall (inner wall) on the side far from the payout blade 834 is centered on the rotation center of the payout blade 834, and the game ball is drawn from the outer periphery of the front blade 834b and the rear blade 834c. It is formed in an arc shape that is separated by a distance S smaller than the outer diameter. In the present embodiment, the distance S is 0.7 to 0.9 times the outer diameter of the game ball. In other words, the distance from the most recessed portion of the ball housing portion 834e to the arc-shaped portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d is 1.03 to 1.1 times the outer diameter of the game ball. .

  As a result, when the game ball flowing down on the payout blade 834 comes into contact with the outer peripheries of the front blade 834b and the rear blade 834c, the payout device 830 passes through the portion bent in the crank shape of the payout passages 831d and 832d. Cannot be discharged downward from the payout outlets 831b and 832b. On the other hand, when the game ball is accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 834e, the game ball moves along with the rotation of the dispensing vane 834, and can pass through the portion bent in the crank shape of the dispensing passages 831d and 832d, and the dispensing outlets 831b and 832b. Is released downward from

  In the payout device 830, the diameter D1 of the front blade 834b and the rear blade 834c is about 1.2 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball, and the ball housing portion 834e makes 1/7 of the outer diameter of the game ball. Since the depth of ˜¼ is accommodated, the time required to accommodate the game ball can be shortened while reducing the outer diameter of the payout vane 834 as much as possible. Thereby, even if the payout blade 834 is rotated quickly, the game ball can be accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 834e and sent to the payout outlets 831b and 832b. Accordingly, the number of game balls to be paid out per unit time can be increased as compared with the conventional case, and the time required for paying out game balls can be shortened.

  The ball-removable movable piece 843 extends in a plate shape in the vertical and front / rear direction, and a lower portion is bent to form a body shape in a front view, and extends in a cylindrical shape in the front / rear direction at the upper end of the main body portion 843a. A shaft tube portion 843b whose both ends are rotatably attached to the front box 831 and the rear box 832 respectively, a projecting portion 843c projecting from the upper portion of the outer side surface of the main body portion 843a, and a main body portion 843a. A weight attaching portion 843d (see FIG. 124) including a through-hole penetrating in the front-rear direction in a lower portion bent in a square shape.

  In the state where the dispensing device 830 is assembled, the ball removal movable piece 843 is oriented so that the lower portion of the main body portion 843a extends obliquely to the lower left when viewed from the front, and the upper cylindrical tube portion 843b is disposed to eject the front box 831 and the rear box 832. In the passages 831d and 832d, it is possible to turn at a position that extends obliquely from the pay-out entrances 831a and 832a to the lower right in the front view, and slightly outside the wall on the right in the front view that is slightly above the part that bends downward. Installed on.

  In the normal state, the payout device 830 of the present embodiment is configured such that the ball removal lever 844 is slid downward, and the lower portion of the ball removal lever 844 contacts the protrusion 843c of the ball removal movable piece 843 from the right side in front view. It touches. As a result, the ball removal movable piece 843 is restricted from turning counterclockwise when viewed from the front (see FIG. 124A).

  In this normal state, in the main body portion 843a bent in the shape of a square of the ball extraction movable piece 843, the upper side extends vertically from the bent portion, and the lower side of the bent portion is diagonally lower left in front view. It extends to. The lower end of the main body 843a is located in the vicinity of a portion where the payout passages 831d and 832d and the ball passages 831e and 832e are branched. Therefore, the ball removal passages 831e and 832e are closed by the ball removal movable piece 843 (main body portion 843a), and the surface facing the left side of the main body portion 843a forms a part of the wall of the discharge passages 831d and 832d. doing.

  The ball removal movable piece 843 of the present embodiment is formed such that, in a normal state, the center of gravity of the ball removal movable piece 843 is located on the left side of the vertical line passing through the center of the shaft tube portion 843b. Although a force to rotate counterclockwise as viewed from the front acts on the anti-clockwise rotation by the ball removal lever 844, the normal state is maintained.

  When the ball removal lever 844 is slid upward from the normal state, the lower portion of the ball removal lever 844 moves away from the protruding portion 843c of the ball removal movable piece 843, and the ball removal movable piece 843 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front. Movement restrictions are lifted. Accordingly, the ball-moving movable piece 843 is rotated counterclockwise by its own weight so that the center of gravity is located directly below the shaft tube portion 843b. The ball removal movable piece 843 rotates counterclockwise until the lower right side surface of the main body portion 843a contacts the left surface of the member forming the right side surface of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. (See FIG. 124 (b)). Accordingly, the ball removal passages 831e and 832e are opened, and the game ball that has entered from the payout entrances 831a and 832a comes into contact with the main body portion 843a of the ball removal movable piece 843 in the middle of the payout passages 831d and 832d. The ball removal movable piece 843 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front to open the ball removal passages 831e and 832e, and flows through the opened ball removal passages 831e and 832e and is released downward from the ball removal outlets 831c and 832c. The Rukoto.

  In the present embodiment, since the ball removal movable piece 843 includes the weight attachment portion 843d, the ball attachment lever 844d is slid upward by screwing and attaching a weight made of a metal screw to the weight attachment portion 843d. Thus, when the restriction of the counterclockwise rotation in front view is released, the lower end of the ball removal movable piece 843 protrudes into the ball removal passages 831e and 832e due to the weight of the ball removal movable piece 843 and the weight of the weight. It is possible to facilitate rotation in a direction (counterclockwise in a front view).

  In a normal state in which the ball removal lever 844 is slid downward to close the ball removal passages 831e and 832e, the game ball that has entered from the payout inlets 831a and 832a contacts the main body portion 843a of the ball removal movable piece 843. Therefore, the ball removal movable piece 843 can be vibrated by the contact of the game ball. Accordingly, dust or dirt sandwiched or invaded between the lower end of the ball removal movable piece 843 and the inner surfaces of the ball removal passages 831e and 832e can be removed by the vibration of the ball removal movable piece 843. It is possible to prevent the ball removal movable piece 843 from becoming unable to rotate by biting or dust.

  Since the metal screw as the weight can be screwed into and attached to the weight attaching portion 843d that is a through hole, the weight is removed from the ball removing movable piece 843 (weight) even if the ball removing movable piece 843 rotates frequently. The ball removal movable piece 843 can be maintained in a good state for a long period of time without being detached from the attachment portion 843d). By simply screwing a metal screw into the weight attaching portion 843d, the weight can be easily attached to the ball removing movable piece 843. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the work of attaching the weight, and to assemble the pachinko machine 1. Cost can be reduced.

  By the way, if the ball removal passages 831e and 832e are closed for a long time by the ball removal movable piece 843, fine dust adheres to the rotation shaft of the ball removal movable piece 843 or the rotation shaft rusts, and the ball The extraction movable piece 843 may become difficult to rotate. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game balls that have entered from the payout entrances 831a and 832a are brought into contact with the main body portion 843a of the ball removal movable piece 843. Therefore, the ball removal passage 831e is formed by the ball removal movable piece 843. , 832e from the closed state, when the ball release lever 844 for releasing the closure is slid upward to release the lock, the game ball comes into contact with the ball release movable piece 843, so that the impact of the contact The ball removal movable piece 843 can be rotated, and the ball removal passages 831e and 832e can be reliably opened.

  Therefore, when the ball removal lever 844 is operated to open the ball removal passages 831e and 832e, the ball removal movable piece 843 can be rotated favorably, so that the game ball can be removed with certainty. The workability during maintenance and the like can be improved.

[4-6c. Upper full ball path unit]
The upper full ball path unit 850 of the payout unit 800 in this embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 125 and 126. FIG. The upper full ball path unit 850 is attached to a position below the dispensing device 830 in the dispensing unit base 801. The upper full ball path unit 850 is attached to the dispensing unit base 801 and has a box-shaped upper full base 851 whose rear side is opened, and is attached to the rear side of the upper full base 851 and has its front side opened. A box-shaped upper full tank cover 852 and a discharge device pressing member 853 which is rotatably attached to the rear side of the upper full cover 852 and can press the discharge device 830 upward are provided.

  The upper full ball path unit 850 includes an upper payout ball receiving port 850a that is open upward so that a game ball can pass through the left side portion from the left and right center in front view on the upper surface, and the right portion from the left and right center in front view on the upper surface. The game ball received between the upper ball outlet 850b opened upward so that the game ball can pass therethrough, the upper full base 851 and the upper full cover 852, and received by the upper payout ball outlet 850a. An upper sphere storage passage 850c having a predetermined width, a normal discharge port 850d opened downward at a position immediately below the upper payout ball receiving port 850a at the lower end of the upper sphere storage passage 850c, and an upper sphere storage passage 850c. Between the full discharge port 850e that opens downward at the portion other than the normal discharge port 850d at the lower end of the gas tank, and between the normal discharge port 850d and the full discharge port 850e. A partition member 850f that partitions the lower portion of the upper ball reservoir passage 850c on the left and right protrudes upward, and a.

  The upper full ball path unit 850 includes an upper ball passage 850g for guiding a game ball entered from the upper ball removal entrance 850b downward, and an upper ball removal opening downward at the lower end of the upper ball passage 850g. Outlet 850h. The upper full sphere path unit 850 has a normal discharge port 850d, a full tank discharge port 850e, and an upper ball discharge outlet 850h arranged in order from the left side when viewed from the front and opened downward. The upper full tank path unit 850 includes a back cover attachment portion 854 for attaching the back cover 980 to the right end of the upper full base 851.

  When the upper full ball path unit 850 is assembled to the payout unit 800, the upper payout ball receiving port 850a is located immediately below the payout outlets 831b and 832b of the payout device 830, and the upper ball discharge inlet 850b. However, it is located directly under the ball outlets 831c and 832c of the dispensing device 830. The upper full tank path unit 850 is assembled in the dispensing unit 800, and the normal discharge port 850d, the full tank discharge port 850e, and the upper ball discharge outlet 850h are the normal guide path 861 of the lower full ball path unit 860, The full-tank guide path 862 and the lower ball-out guide path 865 are respectively opened immediately above the rear end openings (see FIG. 132).

  In the upper full ball path unit 850, the game balls that have been paid out by the payout device 830 and discharged downward from the payout outlets 831b and 832b enter the upper ball storage passage 850c from the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. In a state where the normal discharge port 850d at the lower end of the upper sphere storage passage 850c is not closed, a game ball that has entered the upper sphere storage passage 850c from the upper payout ball receiving port 850a is opened directly below the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. The normal discharge port 850d is discharged.

  When the inside of the upper plate 321 of the door frame 3 is filled with game balls, the game balls cannot be stored, and when the normal guide path 861 of the lower full ball path unit 860 is filled with game balls, the normal release is performed. The outlet 850d is closed. In this state, when a game ball enters the upper ball storage passage 850c, it is stored above the normal discharge port 850d. When the amount of game balls stored on the upper side of the normal discharge port 850d becomes higher than that of the partition piece 850f, the game ball newly entering the upper ball storage passage 850c gets over the partition piece 850f and is fully released. It is discharged downward from the outlet 850e, and is sent to the lower plate 322 through the full tank guide path 862 of the lower full ball path unit 860.

  As described above, the upper full sphere path unit 850 automatically drops the game balls paid out from the payout device 830 from the upper plate 321 according to the storage amount of the game balls in the upper plate 321 in the door frame 3. It can be distributed to the dish 322.

[4-6d. Lower full ball path unit]
The lower full sphere path unit 860 of the payout unit 800 in this embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 127 to 131. The lower full tank path unit 860 is attached to the lower side of the upper full path path unit 850 in the payout unit base 801. The lower full-ball path unit 860 guides the game balls released from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full-ball path unit 850 forward and guides the game balls from the front end to the through-ball path 273 of the door frame 3. A full tank guide path 862 that guides the game ball released from the full tank discharge port 850e of the upper full ball path unit 850 forward and guides the game ball from the front end to the full tank reception port 274 of the door frame 3; A guideway opening / closing door 863 that opens and closes the front end openings of the guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 according to the opening / closing of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, and the normal path 861 and the full tank guideway 862. And a closing spring 864 biasing in a direction to close the front end opening.

  The lower full ball path unit 860 guides the game balls released from the upper ball exit 850h of the upper full ball path unit 850 to the front, and releases the game balls from the center right end in the front-rear direction onto the board unit base 910 of the board unit 900. The lower ball extraction guide path 865 is provided.

  In the lower full ball path unit 860, a normal guide path 861, a full tank guide path 862, and a lower ball guide path 865 are arranged in order from the left side to the right side in a front view. The normal guiding path 861, the full tank guiding path 862, and the lower ball guiding path 865 have rear ends that open upward. The normal guiding path 861 and the full tank guiding path 862 have a width in which a plurality of game balls are arranged on the left and right, and extend forward to the vicinity of the front end of the main body frame 4 so that the front end side is lowered. Further, the full tank guide path 862 extends forward at a position lower than the normal guide path 861. As shown in the drawing, the normal guiding path 861, the full tank guiding path 862, and the lower ball guiding path 865 are formed by an upper case 866 and a lower case 867 that can be divided vertically.

  The guideway opening / closing door 863 is rotatably attached to a portion between the normal guideway 861 and the full guideway 862 at the front end of the lower case 867 and is rotated clockwise by a closing spring 864. It is energized. More specifically, a full tank guide path 862 that opens to the right of the front end opening of the normal guide path 861 in front view at the front end of the lower full sphere path unit 860 is one game for the normal guide path 861. It is placed at a position lower by the height of the sphere. The guideway opening / closing door 863 is attached to the lower side of the normal guideway 861 and to the left side of the full tank guideway 862 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction.

  The guideway opening / closing door 863 includes a disk-like base portion 863a that is rotatably mounted, a first door plate portion 863b that extends obliquely from the base portion 863a to the upper left side and that can close the front end opening of the normal guideway 861. A second door plate portion 863c extending rightward from the base portion 863a and closing the front end opening of the full guide path 862, and an extending portion 863d extending from the base portion 863a obliquely to the lower left side in a flat plate shape. And an operating protrusion 863e that protrudes forward from the front surface of the distal end of the extending portion 863d and that can contact the door opening / closing contact portion 281 of the foul cover unit 270 in the door frame 3.

  Here, closing the front end openings of the normal guiding path 861 and the full tank guiding path 862 means that it is not necessary to seal the openings, and it is sufficient that the game ball cannot pass. The operating protrusion 863e is formed in a short arc shape with the base 863a as the center when viewed from the front, and the front end surface is inclined so as to protrude forward as it approaches the end in the counterclockwise direction. doing.

  The guideway opening / closing door 863 is urged clockwise by a closing spring 864, and the second door plate portion 863 c is located from below the front end opening of the full tank guideway 862 at the front end of the lower case 867. By contacting the boss portion 867a protruding forward, the clockwise rotation is restricted.

  In the lower full tank path unit 860 of the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, and the front end of the lower full tank path unit 860 is a through ball passage 273, a full tank receiving port 274, and a door opening / closing door in the foul cover unit 270 of the door frame 3. It is attached at a position facing the contact portion 281 (see FIG. 131). In the state where the door frame 3 is open with respect to the main body frame 4, the guide path open / close door 863 is not in contact with the operating protrusion 863 e, so the guide path open / close door 863 is driven by the biasing force of the closing spring 864. The second door plate portion 863c is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, and stops in a state where the second door plate portion 863c is in contact with the boss portion 867a of the lower case 867. In this state, the first door plate portion 863b and the second door plate portion 863c are located in front of the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862, and close the front end openings (FIG. 130). (See (a)). Accordingly, in this state, the game balls in the normal guiding path 861 and the full tank guiding path 862 cannot move forward from the front end opening, and even if the door frame 3 is opened, the normal guiding path 861 and the full tank guiding are not performed. Game balls will not spill from the road 862.

  When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the door opening / closing contact portion 281 of the foul cover unit 270 in the door frame 3 comes into contact with the front end surface of the operation protrusion 863 e of the guide path opening / closing door 863, and the operation protrusion Due to the inclination of the front end surface of 863e, a force acts to rotate the guide path opening / closing door 863 in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front against the urging force of the closing spring 864. As a result, the first door plate portion 863b and the second door plate portion 863c, which have closed the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862, rotate in a direction away from the front end opening, and the normal guide path 861 In addition, the front end opening of the full tank guide path 862 is opened (see FIG. 130 (b)). In this state, as shown in the figure, the first door plate portion 863b is positioned below the front end opening of the normal guide passage 861, and the second door plate portion 863c is positioned above the front end opening of the full tank guide passage 862. .

  In the state where the front end openings of the normal guiding path 861 and the full tank guiding path 862 are opened, the door frame 3 is completely closed with respect to the main body frame 4, and the normal guiding path 861 and the full tank guiding path 862 are filled. The through-ball passage 273 and the full tank receiving port 274 of the foul cover unit 270 in the door frame 3 are located on the front side of the front end opening of the guide path 862, and the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862 are penetrated from the side. A game ball can be delivered to the ball passage 273 and the full tank receiving port 274 side.

  In this way, the front end openings of the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 are made different in the vertical direction, and the front end openings of the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 are made by turning the guideway opening / closing door 863. Since opening and closing is performed, the operation range of the guideway opening / closing door 863 can be made as narrow as possible, and the opening / closing mechanism of the normal guideway 861 and the full-way guideway 862 can be downsized. Therefore, the space for other members can be relatively widened, and the internal space of the pachinko machine 1 can be used more effectively.

  The payout unit 800 of the present embodiment has more game balls from the payout device 830 in a state where the upper plate 321 of the door frame 3 is filled with game balls and the game balls cannot be released to the upper plate 321. Is paid out, the game balls can be stored until the inside of the normal guiding path 861 of the lower full tank path unit 860 is filled with game balls. When the game ball is further paid out from the payout device 830 in a state where the normal guiding path 861 is full of game balls, the game ball is normally discharged into the normal discharge port 850d in the upper ball storage passage 850c of the upper full ball path unit 850. If it stays on the upper side and exceeds the partition piece 850f, it will circulate to the full tank discharge port 850e side, and from the full tank discharge port 850e, the full tank guide path 862 of the lower full ball path unit 860, the foul cover The payout of game balls through the unit 270 to the lower plate 322 is automatically switched. Thereafter, when the game balls are further paid out from the payout device 830 and the lower plate 322 is filled with the game balls in addition to the upper plate 321, the foul cover unit 270 is not able to supply the game balls to the lower plate 322. A game ball is stored in the storage passage 277. When the game ball is stored in the storage passage 277 and the movable piece 278 rotates and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 279, it is notified that the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 are full of game balls. At the same time, the payout of the game ball by the payout device 830 is temporarily stopped until the detection of the movable piece 278 by the full tank detection sensor 279 is released.

  Note that the stop of the game ball payout by the payout device 830 with respect to the detection of the movable piece 278 by the full tank detection sensor 279, for example, the game ball is stored until the movable piece 278 is detected in the storage passage 277 of the foul cover unit 270. In such a state, it is possible to fill the upstream storage passage 277, the full tank guide path 862 of the lower full sphere path unit 860, and the upper sphere storage path 850c of the upper full tank path unit 850. When the game ball is paid out, the payout of the game ball by the payout device 830 may be stopped. As a result, more game balls can be stored than in conventional pachinko machines, so that in the gaming state where many game balls are paid out, such as during a big hit game, the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 are released by the game balls being paid out. It is possible to reduce the need to worry about being filled with game balls, and to make the player devoted to the big hit game and have fun.

[4-7. Substrate unit]
A substrate unit 900 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 to 113. The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 includes a board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and a lower part for low sound inside attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910 when viewed from the front. A speaker unit 920 having a speaker 921, a power supply board box 930 that is attached to the rear right side of the board unit base 910 and accommodates a power supply board therein, and is attached to the rear side of the speaker unit 920. An interface control board box 940 in which an interface control board is accommodated, and a payout control board 951 that is mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controls the payout of game balls are accommodated therein. A payout control board box 950 There.

  The board unit 900 includes a door frame relay board 911 attached to the front face of the board unit base 910 so as to face forward from the connection opening 606 of the main body frame base 600. This door frame relay board 911 relays the connection between the payout control board 951, the main control board 1310, and the peripheral control board 1510 and the door body relay board attached to the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. Is for. The payout device 830 is controlled by the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950.

[5. Overall configuration of game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 133 to 142. FIG. 133 is a front view of a game board in which the panel of the game panel is in an opaque state. 134 is a perspective view of the gaming board in the state of FIG. 133 as viewed from the right front, FIG. 135 is a perspective view of the gaming board in the state of FIG. 133 as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 136 is a perspective view of the gaming board from the back. It is a perspective view. 137 is a cross-sectional view taken along line TT in FIG. 133, and FIG. 138 is a cross-sectional view taken along line U-U in FIG. Further, FIG. 139 is a front view of the front unit of the game board cut at the approximate center in the front-rear direction within the game area. FIG. 140 is a front view of a game board in which the panel of the game panel is in a transparent state. FIG. 141 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as viewed from the front after being disassembled for each main structure, and FIG. 142 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as viewed from the rear after being disassembled for each main structure.

  The game board 5 has a game area 5a in which a game ball is driven when the player operates the handle 302 of the handle unit 300. The game board 5 defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and the outer shape of the front component member 1000 is substantially square when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and defines the rear end of the game area 5a. A board-like gaming panel 1100, a substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear portion of the gaming panel 1100, and a game performed by driving a game ball attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 into the gaming area 5a. A main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 for controlling the contents. A plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game ball are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement (not shown) in a portion that is in the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100.

  The game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 and is attached to a function display unit 1400 attached to the lower left corner of the front component member 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel 1100 A peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side, a game board side effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and attached to the front of the game panel 1100 And a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. A game board side effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the game board side effect display device 1600.

  The gaming panel 1100 is formed so that the outer periphery is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and holds the outer periphery of the transparent flat panel panel 1110 and the panel plate 1110. And a frame-like panel holder 1120 to which the rear unit 3000 is attached on the rear surface.

  The front unit 2000 has a plurality of general winning ports 2001 that are always open so as to be able to receive game balls that have been thrown into the game area 5a, and the plurality of general winning ports 2001 are games at different positions in the game area 5a. A first start opening 2002 that is always open to accept a ball, a gate portion 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a to detect the passage of the game ball, and the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003. The second start opening 2004 that allows game balls to be received according to the result of the normal lottery drawn, and the game according to the first special lottery result selected by receiving the game balls into the first start opening 2002 A first grand prize opening 2005 that allows balls to be received, and a second big prize that enables game balls to be received according to the result of the second special lottery that is drawn by receiving the game balls to the second start opening 2004. It is provided with a 2006, a.

  The front unit 2000 is mounted right above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and has a start port unit 2100 having a first start port 2002 and a left side of the start port unit 2100 in front view. A side unit 2200 attached along the inner rail 1002 and having a plurality of (three here) general winning openings 2001, and a side slope 2300 attached above the left end of the side unit 2200 as viewed from the front. , Attached to the right side of the front opening unit 2100, which is the lower right corner when viewed from the front in the game area 5a, and includes one general winning port 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting port 2004, a first big winning port 2005, And the attacker unit 2400 having the second grand prize winning opening 2006, the start opening unit 2100 and the side unit 2 00 upwards than, and a frame-shaped center won game 2500 is attached to the front view substantially central slightly above closer in the game area 5a, a.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 and the back box 3010 which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a square opening 3010a on the rear wall. A lock mechanism 3020 for detachably mounting the board side effect display device 1600, an effect drive board 3031 attached to the lower side of the opening 3010a on the rear surface of the back box 3010, and an effect drive board on the rear surface of the back box 3010 A panel relay board 3032 attached to the right side of the rear view 3031, a lower left relay board 3033 attached to the right side of the panel relay board 3032 on the rear side of the back box 3010, and an effect drive board on the rear side of the back box 3010 And a lower right relay board 3034 attached to the left side of the rear view of 3031.

  Furthermore, the back unit 3000 includes a back front decoration unit 3100 attached to the front end of the back box 3010 from the left side and the lower side in front view, and a back attached to surround the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The middle movable effect unit 3200, the back left movable effect unit 3300 and the back right movable effect unit 3400 respectively attached to the left and right sides of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and the upper side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A back movable movable effect unit 3500 attached and a back lower movable effect unit 3700 attached to the lower side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 are provided.

[5-1. Previous component]
Next, the front component member 1000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 143 (a) is a perspective view of a front component member and a game panel in the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 143 (b) is a perspective view of FIG. The front component member 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has an inner shape penetrating in a front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The outer periphery of the game area 5a is defined by the inner periphery of the inner shape. The front component member 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape from the lower left side to the left side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and extends to the upper right side through the center upper end in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. An inner rail 1002 that is arranged substantially along the outer rail 1001 inside the front component member 1000 and extends in an arc shape from the center lower part in the left-right direction in front view to the upper left part in the front view, and a game on the right side in front view of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 An out guiding portion 1003 that is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

  The front component member 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 that is inclined linearly so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end in front view of the out guide portion 1003 to the vicinity of the right side of the front component member 1000, and the right end of the lower right rail 1004 The right rail 1005 extending to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front constituent member 1000, and the upper portion thereof being curved inward of the front constituent member 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail 1001 And a stop portion 1006 that is connected to the upper end and abuts against a game ball that rolls along the outer rail 1001.

  The front component member 1000 is pivotally supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the outer rail 1001 and the front component clockwise. A backflow prevention member 1007 that is rotated by a spring and biased by a spring (not shown) so as to be able to rotate only between the open position where the outer rail 1001 is opened and returned to the closed position. Have.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes an outer side of the vicinity of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that extend substantially vertically from the lower end, a lower side of the out guiding part 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and an outer side of the right rail 1005. Each part includes a security recess 1008 that is recessed rearward from the front end. When the gaming board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security recess 1008 has a rear protruding piece 202 that protrudes rearward of the security cover 200 in the door frame 3. It will be inserted. Accordingly, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (the front component member 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear protrusion piece 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess portion 1008 of the front component member 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 200 and the front structural member 1000 from below the front of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 202 and the security recess 1008. The unauthorized tool can be prevented from entering the game area 5a.

  Although not shown, the front component member 1000 includes a plurality of positioning protrusions that protrude rearward from the rear end of the inner rail 1002. These positioning protrusions can be inserted into the inner rail fixing holes formed in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, so that the inner rail 1002 can be positioned and fixed on the front surface of the panel plate 1110.

  Furthermore, although not shown, the front component member 1000 includes a plurality of mounting bosses that protrude rearward from the rear surface. The plurality of mounting bosses can be positioned with respect to the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1100) by being inserted into mounting holes (not shown) of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100.

  The front component member 1000 includes a notch 1011 that is notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner when viewed from the front. The notch 1011 coincides with the notch 1127 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch 1011 and 1127 pass through the lower full ball path. The front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862 of the unit 860 face forward.

[5-2. Game panel]
Next, the gaming panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. The gaming panel 1100 has a flat panel panel 1110 formed with a transparent synthetic resin and having an outer periphery slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000, and holds the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. And a frame-like panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and attached to the rear unit 3000 on the rear surface.

  The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The panel plate 1110 is thinner than the panel holder 1120, and is the minimum thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently retained even if the obstruction nail is installed on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said that. In this example, panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

  The panel board 1110 is formed with an out recess 1111 that is recessed upward from the lower end at the lowest position in the game area 5a. The panel plate 1110 is formed with a plurality of openings 1112 that pass through in the front-rear direction and attach the front unit 2000.

  Although not shown in the drawing, the panel plate 1110 has a plurality of fitting holes formed by round holes arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a length extending in the front-rear direction and extending in the up-down direction. And a hole. These fitting holes and long holes are arranged outside the game area 5a and are used for positioning with the panel holder 1120. The panel plate 1110 is provided with stepped engagement step portions each having a recessed front side at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side. These engaging step portions are cut out to substantially half of the thickness of the panel plate 1110, and are disposed outside the game area 5a in the same manner as the fitting holes and the long holes. Is engaged and fixed to the panel holder 1120.

  Although not shown, the panel plate 1110 has a plurality of inner rail fixing holes at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1002 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing a positioning projection (not shown) protruding from the rear side of the inner rail 1002 into the inner rail fixing hole.

  The panel holder 1120 of the gaming panel 1100 has a size that includes the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this example). Panel holder 1120 is formed of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 has a holding step portion (not shown) that holds the panel plate 1110 in a detachable manner and is recessed from the front side to the rear side, and a size substantially equal to the game area 5a inside the holding step portion. And a through-hole 1122 penetrating in the front-rear direction.

  The holding step portion of the panel holder 1120 has a depth from the front surface that is substantially the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110, and the front surface of the panel plate 1110 held in the holding step portion is substantially the same as the front surface of the panel holder 1120. It becomes the same plane. The holding step portion has a front inner peripheral surface formed in a size that allows a predetermined amount of clearance to be formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110. This clearance can absorb the expansion and contraction even if the panel plate 1110 expands and contracts relatively due to a temperature change or a change with time.

  Although not shown, the panel holder 1120 is disposed at a position corresponding to a fitting hole and a long hole formed in the panel plate 1110 held by the holding step portion, and is directed forward from the front surface of the holding step portion. A plurality of projecting pins that extend and can be fitted and inserted into the fitting holes and the long holes of the panel plate 1110 are provided. The panel holder 1120 and the panel plate 1110 can be positioned relative to each other by fitting and inserting these protruding pins into the fitting holes and the long holes of the panel plate 1110.

  Furthermore, although not shown, the panel holder 1120 includes an engaging claw and an engaging piece that engage with the engaging step at a position corresponding to the engaging step of the panel plate 1110. Specifically, the engaging claw is disposed on the upper part of the holding step portion of the panel holder 1120, corresponds to the upper engaging step portion of the panel plate 1110, protrudes forward from the front surface of the holding step portion, It is elastically engaged with the engaging step. The engaging claw has a size that does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1120.

  The engaging piece of the panel holder 1120 is disposed below the holding step portion of the panel holder 1120 and corresponds to the lower engaging step portion of the panel plate 1110. This engagement piece is on the upper side (center side) along the front surface of the panel holder in a state where a gap of a size that allows the engagement step portion of the panel plate 1110 to be inserted is formed between the engagement piece and the front surface of the holding step portion. A predetermined amount is extended. The panel plate 1110 is detachably held with respect to the panel holder 1120 by engaging the engagement step portion of the panel plate 1110 with these engagement claws and engagement pieces.

  The panel holder 1120 includes an out port 1126 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the lowest position in the game area 5a. In the panel holder 1120, the lower rear side of the out port 1126 has the same width as the out port 1126 and is recessed forward to the lower end.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 includes a notch 1127 that is notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner when viewed from the front. The notch 1127 coincides with the notch 1011 of the front component member 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch 1011 and 1127 penetrate through the notch 1011 and 1127. The front end openings of the normal guiding path 861 and the full tank guiding path 862 face forward.

  Although not shown, the panel holder 1120 includes a plurality of mounting holes penetrating front and rear at positions corresponding to a plurality of mounting bosses (not shown) in the front component member 1000. The panel holder 1120 can be attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 by inserting the attachment bosses of the front component member 1000 into the plurality of attachment holes, and the panel holder 1120 ( The gaming panel 1100) can be positioned.

  The panel holder 1120 includes a square insertion hole 1129 penetrating in the front-rear direction above the notch 1127. The insertion hole 1129 is inserted through the rear end of the function display unit 1400.

  When the gaming panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000, the out port 1126 of the panel holder 1120 is opened to the rear side of the out guide part 1003 of the front component member 1000. Thereby, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1126 by the out guiding unit 1003, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 141 and 142. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape that is open at the top and front, and is inclined so that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the center in the left-right direction. The board holder 1200 can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side in a state assembled to the game board 5. Thereby, it is possible to receive all the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000, and formed on the bottom surface. The discharged discharge part 1201 can be discharged downward.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 141 and 142. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 137) that controls game contents, game ball payout, and the like, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. And.

  The main control board box 1320 includes a plurality of sealing mechanisms. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is then destroyed to open the main control board box 1320. Therefore, the main control board box 1320 can be left and opened. Therefore, by observing the trace of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrent against unauthorized actions on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

  The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the payout control board 951 and the peripheral control board 1510. The main control board 1310 is connected to the function display unit 1400, the gate sensor 2401, the second big prize port sensor 2402, the first reception port sensor 2434, the second reception port sensor 2435, and the second start port sensor via the panel relay board 3032. 3113, first grand prize opening sensor 2403, start opening solenoid 2105, first attacker solenoid 2108A, second attack solenoid 2108B, distribution solenoid (not shown), general winning opening sensor 3111, first start opening sensor 3112, magnetic A sensor 2404 and a vibration sensor 2405 are connected.

[5-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. As shown in the figure, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component member 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be viewed from the front (player side) through the through-hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the game board 5 is attached and the pachinko machine 1 is assembled (see FIG. 200). The function display unit 1400 displays a gaming state (game situation), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like using a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310.

  As shown in the figure, the function display unit 1400 includes a status indicator 1401 including one LED for displaying a gaming state, and four LEDs for displaying a normal lottery result selected by passing a game ball with respect to the gate unit 2003. A normal symbol display 1402, a normal hold indicator 1408 composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of holds relating to the passage of the game ball with respect to the gate unit 2003, and a lottery selected by receiving the game ball into the first start port 2002. A first special symbol display 1403 composed of eight LEDs for displaying one special lottery result, and a first special retention number display composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of suspensions related to the acceptance of game balls to the first starting port 2002 And a first 140 lottery that displays the result of the second special lottery drawn by receiving the game ball in the second starting port 2004. A special symbol display 1405, a second special hold number display 1406 composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of holds for receiving a game ball in the second start port 2004, and a first special lottery result or a second special lottery When the result is “big hit” or the like, it mainly includes a round indicator 1407 composed of three LEDs for displaying the number of times of opening / closing patterns (number of rounds) of the first big prize opening 2005.

  In this function display unit 1400, the number of symbols, symbols, etc. can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, and blinking the LEDs provided.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 136 and 142. Peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of game board side effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of back box 3010 of back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 137) that controls the presentation presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. Box 1520. Although not shown, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit for controlling a light emission effect, a sound effect, a movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit for controlling the effect image. .

  The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect decoration rotating body unit 530, various decoration boards on the door frame 3 side, the game board side effect display device 1600, the effect drive board 3031, and the like. Yes.

[5-7. Game board side effect display device]
Next, the game board side effect display device 1600 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 141 and 142. The game board side effect display device 1600 is disposed in the center of the game area 5a in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via a back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. More specifically, the game board side effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substantially center of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The game board side effect display device 1600 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. The game board side effect display device 1600 is a full-color liquid crystal display device using a white LED as a backlight. The game board side effect display device 1600 is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 and can display a predetermined still image or moving image.

  The game board side effect display device 1600 includes two left fixed pieces 1601 projecting outward from the left side surface in front view and a right fixed piece 1602 projecting outward from the right side surface in front view. This game board side effect display device 1600 has two fixed grooves opened on the left inner peripheral surface in front view in a frame-like liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of a back box 3010 described later with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. 3010c, after inserting the two left fixing pieces 1601 obliquely from the back of the back box 3010, the right fixing piece 1602 side is moved forward, and the right fixing piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020 to lock The mechanism 3020 is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it downward.

[5-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 141 and 142. The front unit 2000 of the gaming board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 from the front, the front end projects forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end passes through the opening 1112. Projecting rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

  The front unit 2000 of the present embodiment is capable of receiving game balls that have been struck into the game area 5a, and the plurality of general prize openings 2001 that are always open, and the plurality of general prize openings 2001 are within the game area 5a. A first start port 2002 that is always open to accept game balls at different positions, a gate portion 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game balls, and the game balls are gated The second start opening 2004 that allows game balls to be received according to the result of the normal lottery drawn by passing the section 2003, and the lottery by receiving the game balls to the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 A first grand prize opening 2005 and a second big prize opening 2006 that allow game balls to be received either in accordance with the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result.

  A plurality (four in this case) of general winning awards 2001 are arranged in the lower part of the game area 5a, and three are arranged on the left side and one on the right side with respect to the center in the left-right direction. The first start port 2002 is arranged right above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is disposed below the center in the vertical direction in the vicinity of the right end in front view in the game area 5a. The second start port 2004 is disposed immediately below the gate portion 2003. The first big prize opening 2005 is arranged at the height between the general prize opening 2001 and the first start opening 2002 on the right side of the general prize opening 2001 on the right side from the center in the left-right direction. The second big prize opening 2006 is arranged between the second start opening 2004 and the first big prize opening 2005.

  The front unit 2000 includes a sub-out port 2007 for discharging the game ball from the game area 5a between the first grand prize port 2005 and the second grand prize port 2006.

  Further, the front unit 2000 is mounted at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a and immediately above the out port 1126, and includes a start port unit 2100 having a first start port 2002, and a left side of the start port unit 2100 in front view. A side unit 2200 that is attached along the inner rail 1002 and has three general winning holes 2001, a side slope 2300 that is attached above the left end of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front, and a start port unit An attacker unit 2400 which is attached to the right side of the front view 2100 and has one general winning port 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting port 2004, a first major winning port 2005, and a second major winning port 2006. And a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 attached to the approximate center in the game area 5a.

[5-8a. Starting port unit]
Next, the start port unit 2100 of the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 144 (a) is a perspective view of the front unit, side unit, side slope, and attacker unit in the front unit of the game board as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) as seen from the back. is there. In the game area 5a, the start port unit 2100 is disposed immediately above the out port 1126 in the vicinity of the lower end at the center in the left-right direction, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. In the starting port unit 2100, at the top, the first starting port 2002 is always open upward with a size capable of receiving only one game ball at a time.

  The start port unit 2100 is formed with a first start port 2002 and is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front and has a translucent unit main body 2101 and is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 2101. And a starter decoration board 2102 (see FIG. 139) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface. The start port unit 2100 can illuminate the lower side of the first start port 2002 by causing the LED of the start port decoration board 2102 to emit light.

  When the start port unit 2100 is attached to the panel plate 1110, the first start port 2002 protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and is opened upward. The first start port 2002 will be described later. It is located immediately below the chance exit 2536 in the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500. Accordingly, when a game ball is released downward from the chance exit 2536 of the stage 2530, it is accepted into the first start port 2002 with a very high probability. The starter unit 2100 guides the game ball received in the first starter port 2002 to the rear of the panel board 1110 and transfers it to the central transfer port 3135 of the back front decoration unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 described later. it can.

[5-8b. Side unit]
Next, the side unit 2200 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The side unit 2200 extends in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the start port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The side unit 2200 has three general winning ports 2001 that are always open upward.

  The side unit 2200 is provided in a state in which three general winning ports 2001 are arranged side by side on the left and right sides, and is provided so that the three general winning ports 2001 become higher toward the left in the front view.

  The side unit 2200 is attached to the panel plate 1110, so that the three general winning ports 2001 protrude forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, below the first start port 2002, and start. It will be in the state arrange | positioned between the mouth unit 2100 and the side slope 2300. FIG. The side unit 2200 guides the game ball received in each general winning opening 2001 to the rear of the panel board 1110 and transfers it to the delivery port 3151 of the ball guiding unit 3150 in the back front decoration unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 described later. be able to.

[5-8c. Side slope]
Next, the side slope 2300 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. In the game area 5a, the side slope 2300 is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front slightly upward from the center in the vertical direction at the upper left of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. The side slope 2300 includes a shelf 2301 that protrudes forward and extends to the left and right so that the right end side when viewed from the front is lowered.

  The side slope 2300 is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the left end of the shelf 2301 is close to the inner rail 1002, and the right end of the shelf 2301 is from the leftmost general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200. Is also on the left. In the state where the side slope 2300 is attached to the panel plate 1110, the shelf 2301 is positioned above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100. As a result, the side slope 2300 can guide the game ball flowing down along the inner rail 1002 to the right (the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a) by the shelf 2301. There is a possibility that a game ball may be received in any of the three general winning ports 2001 of the start port 2002 and the side unit 2200.

[5-8d. Attacker unit]
Next, the attacker unit 2400 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 144 and 145. FIG. 145 is an explanatory view showing the attacker unit in the front unit as cut from the front and rear in the game area at the approximate center in the front-back direction. The attacker unit 2400 is arranged in the game area 5a to the right of the start opening unit 2100, which is the lower right corner of the front view, and is attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110 from the front. The attacker unit 2400 includes one general winning port 2001 out of four general winning ports 2001, a gate unit 2003, a second starting port 2004, a first large winning port 2005, a second large winning port 2006, and a sub-out port 2007. It has.

  As shown in FIG. 145 and the like, the attacker unit 2400 has an outer shape when viewed from the front, a bottom that is inclined so that the right end is located slightly above, a right side that rises substantially vertically from the right end of the bottom, and an upper end of the right side. It is formed in a substantially triangular shape having an oblique side extending obliquely so as to connect the left end of the bottom side. In the attacker unit 2400, a gate portion 2003 through which game balls circulate (pass) vertically is disposed in the upper right corner, and a second start port 2004 that can be opened forward is disposed directly below the gate portion 2003. . The attacker unit 2400 has a second large winning opening 2006 that can be opened upward at the lower left of the second starting opening 2004, and a sub-out opening that is always open to the left at the lower left of the second large winning opening 2006. 2007 is arranged. Further, the attacker unit 2400 is provided with a first big prize opening 2005 that can be opened upward slightly to the left of the sub-out opening 2007, and always opens upward at the lower left of the first big prize opening 2005. The general winning opening 2001 is arranged.

  The attacker unit 2400 includes a gate sensor 2401 that detects a game ball that passes through the gate unit 2003, a second start port sensor 3113 that detects a game ball received in the second start port 2004, and a first grand prize port 2005. A first big prize opening sensor 2403 for detecting an accepted game ball and a second big prize opening sensor 2402 for detecting a game ball received in the second big prize opening 2006 are provided.

  The attacker unit 2400 has a second start opening door 2411 that opens and closes the second start opening 2004 according to a normal lottery result drawn by passing a game ball through the gate portion 2003, and the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004. The first grand prize opening door 2412 that opens and closes the first big prize opening 2005 according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game balls to the first start opening 2002 or the second A second big prize opening door 2413 that opens and closes the second big prize opening 2006 according to a first special lottery result or a second special lottery result drawn by receiving a game ball into the start opening 2004.

  The attacker unit 2400 has a gate passage 2420 that extends vertically in the upper right corner in a front view and allows game balls to circulate; a left side passage 2421 that extends vertically on the left side of the gate passage 2420 and allows game balls to circulate; A right side passage 2422 that extends vertically on the right side of the gate passage 2420 and allows game balls to circulate, and below the right side passage 2422 below the gate passage 2420, the left side passage 2421, and the right side passage 2422. The left side passage 2421 extends to the left so that the game ball can be circulated, and the left side of the attacker passage 2423 extends to the left so that the left end side is lower and guides the game ball. A possible attacker shelf 2424.

  In the gate passage 2420, a gate portion 2003 is disposed near the upper portion, and a second start port 2004 is disposed at the lower portion. The gate passage 2420 passes through both the left and right walls so as to communicate with the left side passage 2421 and the right side passage 2422 between the gate portion 2003 and the second start port 2004, respectively. The gate passage 2420 extends vertically with a width slightly wider than the outer diameter of the game ball.

  The attacker passage 2423 has a second big prize opening 2006 in the bottom wall on the left side of the left side passage 2421. In this attacker passage 2423, a second big prize opening door 2413 for closing the second big prize opening 2006 so as to be opened and closed forms a part of the bottom wall. The lowest left end side of the attacker passage 2423 opens downward. The second big prize opening 2006 is opened with a width of about 1.5 times the outer diameter of the game ball.

  The attacker shelf 2424 has a first grand prize opening 2005 opened, and a first grand prize opening door 2412 that closes the first big prize opening 2005 so as to be opened and closed forms a part. The first big prize opening 2005 is opened with a width about three times the outer diameter of the game ball. A sub-out port 2007 is opened at the right end of the attacker shelf 2424. At the lower left side of the left end of the attacker shelf 2424, one general winning opening 2001 is opened.

  The second starting port door 2411 can close the second starting port 2004 opened forward from the front, and can rotate around an axis whose lower side extends to the left and right in the vicinity of the lower end of the second starting port 2004. Installed. The second starter door 2411 rotates (turns) so that the upper side moves forward, thereby opening the second starter 2004, closing the gate passage 2420, and flowing down the gate passage 2420. The game ball can be guided to the second starting port 2004 side and received in the second starting port 2004. The second start port door 2411 is formed to rotate by driving a start port solenoid (not shown), and closes the second start port 2004 when the start port solenoid is OFF (when not energized). When the solenoid is ON (when energized), the second start port 2004 is opened.

  The first grand prize opening door 2412 extends in the front-rear direction and is formed in a plate shape extending left and right so that the left end is lowered, and is opened upward by moving forward and backward. The winning opening 2005 can be closed. The first grand prize opening door 2412 closes the first big prize opening 2005 by moving forward, forms a part of the attacker shelf 2424, and moves the game ball flowing down on the attacker shelf 2424 to the left And is discharged downward from the left end of the attacker shelf 2424. The first grand prize opening door 2412 retreats to open the first big prize opening 2005, and game balls that have flowed down onto the attacker shelf 2424 via the attacker passage 2423 or the like are made into the first grand prize opening 2005. Can be accepted. The first grand prize opening door 2412 is formed so as to advance and retreat by driving a first attacker solenoid (not shown). When the first attacker solenoid is ON (when energized), the first big prize opening 2005 is opened.

  The second grand prize opening door 2413 is formed in a plate shape extending in the left and right directions so that the left end is lowered while extending in the front and rear directions. The second large prize opening door 2413 opens upward by moving forward and backward. The winning opening 2006 can be closed. The second grand prize opening door 2413 moves forward to close the second big prize opening 2006 and forms a part of the bottom wall of the attacker passage 2423, and includes a gate passage 2420, a left side passage 2421, and a right side passage. The game ball that has passed through any one of 2422 is guided to the left and discharged downward from the left end of the attacker passage 2423. The second grand prize opening door 2413 retreats to open the second big prize opening 2006, and the game ball that has entered the attacker passage 2423 can be accepted into the second big prize opening 2006 with a high probability. The second big prize opening door 2413 is formed so as to advance and retreat by driving a second attacker solenoid (not shown), and the second big prize opening 2006 is closed when the second attacker solenoid is OFF (when not energized). When the second attacker solenoid is ON (when energized), the second big prize opening 2006 is opened.

  The attacker unit 2400 includes an internal passage 2430 through which game balls received in the second grand prize opening 2006 can circulate, a first receiving port 2431 and a second receiving port 2432 that open at the bottom of the internal passage 2430, A sorting piece 2433 that distributes game balls to either the first receiving port 2431 or the second receiving port 2432 in the passage 2430, a first receiving port sensor 2434 that detects the gaming ball received in the first receiving port 2431, And a second receiving port sensor 2435 that detects a game ball received in the second receiving port 2432.

  The internal passage 2430 is formed on the downstream side of the second big prize winning port sensor 2402. The first receiving port 2431 is disposed immediately below the portion through which the game ball passes in the second grand prize opening sensor 2402, and the second receiving port 2432 is disposed on the right side of the first receiving port 2431 in front view. . The sorting piece 2433 is disposed between the first receiving port 2431 and the second receiving port 2432 in the internal passage 2430, and is attached so as to be rotatable around an axis whose lower side extends in the front-rear direction. The sorting piece 2433 stands vertically and communicates with the second grand prize opening 2006 and the first receiving port 2431, and the upper side moves to the left in front view to the left side wall of the internal passage 2430. Attached (or approached) so as to rotate between a state in which the second big prize opening 2006 and the second receiving port 2432 are in communication with each other. The sorting piece 2433 is formed so as to rotate by driving a sorting solenoid (not shown). When the sorting solenoid is OFF (when not energized), the game balls are sorted to the first receiving port 2431 and sorted. When the solenoid is ON (when energized), the game balls are distributed to the second receiving port 2432.

  The attacker unit 2400 is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the gate passage 2420 is located immediately below the opening on the downstream side of the right guide passage 2540 in the center accessory 2500 described later, and the gate portion 2003 is located above the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500. The first big winning opening 2005 and the general winning opening 2001 are located below the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100.

  Next, the flow of game balls in the attacker unit 2400 will be described. Since the gate portion 2003 of the attacker unit 2400 is positioned above the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 in the assembled state on the game board 5, the gate portion 2003 is not moved even if a game ball is released from the stage 2530. Never pass. Therefore, only the game ball that has flowed down the right side of the center accessory 2500 can pass through the gate portion 2003. Since the upper end opening of the gate passage 2420 in which the gate portion 2003 is disposed opens upward immediately below the opening on the downstream side of the right guide passage 2540 in the center accessory 2500, the right side of the center accessory 2500 The game ball that has flowed down will enter the gate passage 2420 with a high probability and pass through the gate portion 2003.

  The game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2003 is discharged from the gate passage 2420 to the attacker passage 2423 through the front of the second start port door 2411 that closes the second start port 2004 immediately below the gate ball. At this time, if the second starter door 2411 rotates forward and is in the open position, the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2003 comes into contact with the back surface of the second starter door 2411 and is second. It is guided to the start port 2004 side and is received by the second start port 2004. The second start door 2411 is in accordance with the normal lottery result drawn when the game ball passes through the gate part 2003 (the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 2401). Since it is driven at the same time, by appropriately setting the lottery time of the normal lottery result, the opening / closing timing of the second starter door 2411, etc., the game ball itself having the “normal hit” lottery is accepted into the second starter 2004. be able to.

  The game ball received in the second start port 2004 is detected by the second start port sensor 3113 and then discharged downward (on the board holder 1200) on the rear side of the game panel 1100.

  In the gate passage 2420, since the left and right sides of the portion between the gate portion 2003 and the second start port 2004 communicate with the left side passage 2421 and the right side passage 2422, the game that has passed through the gate portion 2003. A sphere may enter the left side passage 2421 or the right side passage 2422 through a rarely communicating portion. That is, the game ball that has passed through the gate part 2003 does not necessarily pass through the front of the second start door 2411.

  When the game ball that has flowed down the right side of the center object 2500 does not enter the gate passage 2420, it enters either the left side passage 2421 or the right side passage 2422 disposed on the left and right sides of the gate passage 2420, It is discharged to the attacker passage 2423 through the left side passage 2421 or the right side passage 2422.

  A game ball released from any one of the gate passage 2420, the left side passage 2421, and the right side passage 2422 to the attacker passage 2423 is guided to the left along the inclination of the attacker passage 2423, and downward from the left end of the attacker passage 2423. Is released. At this time, if the second grand prize opening door 2413 closing the second big prize opening 2006 is retreated and the second big prize opening 2006 is opened, the game balls released into the attacker passage 2423 are It is accepted with high probability in the second big prize opening 2006. The game ball received in the second big prize opening 2006 is detected by the second big prize opening sensor 2402 and then sent to the internal passage 2430, and the first receiving port 2431 or the second receiving port 2432 by the sorting piece 2433. It is distributed to either.

  The game ball received in the first receiving port 2431 or the second receiving port 2432 is detected by the first receiving port sensor 2434 or the second receiving port sensor 2435 and is moved downward (substrate holder) 1200)).

  In addition, since the width of the second big prize opening 2006 is about 1.5 times the outer diameter of the game ball, the second big prize opening door 2413 is retracted and the second big prize opening 2006 is Even if it is open, depending on the speed, behavior, etc. of the game balls flowing through the attacker passage 2423, the game balls may jump over the second big prize opening 2006 and may not be accepted into the second big prize opening 2006. .

  The game balls released from the attacker passage 2423 flow down onto the attacker shelf 2424, are guided to the attacker shelf 2424, and are released downward from the left end of the attacker shelf 2424. At this time, if the first grand prize opening door 2412 is retracted and the first big prize opening 2005 is opened, the game balls released from the attacker passage 2423 are accepted into the first big prize opening 2005. . Therefore, when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a so as to circulate on the right side of the center bonus 2500 while the first game winning opening 2005 is open, the game ball is placed at the first game winning opening 2005 with a high probability. Can be accepted.

  The game balls received in the first big prize opening 2005 are detected by a first big prize opening sensor 2403 (not shown) and then discharged downward (on the board holder 1200) on the rear side of the gaming panel 1100.

  There is a possibility that a game ball released downward from the attacker shelf 2424 is received by one general winning opening 2001 arranged below. The game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 is guided to the rear side of the panel board 1110 and then transferred to the right delivery port 3136 of the back front decoration unit 3100 in the back unit 3000. On the other hand, the game balls that have not been accepted into the general winning opening 2001 pass through the out opening 1126 at the lower end of the gaming area 5a and are discharged downward (on the board holder 1200) on the rear side of the gaming panel 1100.

[5-8e. Center character]
Next, the center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 146 (a) is a perspective view of the center unit in the front unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 146 (b) is a perspective view of the center unit as viewed from the back. In the game area 5a, the center accessory 2500 is disposed above the start port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 and slightly above the center in front view, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. It has been. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and visually recognizes the effect units provided in the game board side effect display device 1600 and the rear unit 3000 disposed behind the game panel 1100 through the frame from the front. be able to.

  The frame-shaped center accessory 2500 has the entire circumference excluding the lower side protruding forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the game ball that has been driven into the game area 5a is within the frame. It cannot be invaded.

  The center accessory 2500 has a warp inlet 2520 in which a game ball in the game area 5a is open so that the game ball in the game area 5a can enter, and a game ball that has entered the warp inlet 2520 can be discharged on the outer peripheral surface on the left side when viewed from the front. A warp outlet 2522 that is open, and a stage 2530 that can be released into the game area 5a after rolling the game ball released from the warp outlet 2522 in the left-right direction (see FIG. 139, etc.) .

  The stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 has a curved shape in which the center side in the left-right direction is depressed, and corresponds to a position corresponding to the position immediately above the first start opening 2002 of the start opening unit 2100, that is, the center accessory 2500 is placed on the game panel 1100 (panel board). 1110), a substantially central position in the left-right direction is formed in a wave shape that is slightly higher than the left and right sides. The stage 2530 can discharge the game ball into the game area 5a from the lowest portions on both sides of the center formed in a wave shape.

  The center accessory 2500 has a chance entrance 2535 that is opened forward at the highest position of the slightly higher central portion of the stage 2530, and a game ball that has entered the chance entrance 2535. A chance exit 2536 for discharging into the game area 5a below the stage 2530. The chance exit 2536 is located immediately above the first start opening 2002 of the start opening unit 2100 in a state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled to the game board 5. Thus, when a game ball is released from the chance exit 2536, it is accepted into the first start port 2002 with a very high probability.

  The center accessory 2500 includes a right guide passage 2540 that guides the game ball that has flowed down along the outer peripheral surface on the right side when viewed from the front to the left and then releases the game ball downward. The right guide passage 2540 is formed so that the downstream end of the right guide passage 2540 is located immediately above the gate passage 2420 (gate portion 2003) in the attacker unit 2400 in a state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled to the game board 5. Has been.

  The center accessory 2500 is formed so that the outer peripheral surface on the right side is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball from the right rail 1005 in the front component member 1000 when assembled to the game board 5. Accordingly, when the game ball circulates on the right side of the center accessory 2500, it circulates along the outer peripheral surface on the right side of the center accessory 2500, and all the game balls that circulate on the right side of the center accessory 2500 enter the right guide passage 2540. Enter and be guided. As a result, when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a so as to circulate on the right side of the center object 2500 (so-called “right-stroke”), the game ball can pass through the gate portion 2003 with a very high probability. it can.

[5-9. Overall configuration of the back unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 147 to 150. FIG. 147 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as seen from the front, and FIG. 148 is a perspective view of the back unit as seen from the back. FIG. 149 is an exploded perspective view in which the back unit is disassembled for each main constituent member and viewed from the front, and FIG. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. On the rear side of the back unit 3000, a game board side effect display device 1600 and a peripheral control unit 1500 are attached.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 and the back box 3010 which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a square opening 3010a on the rear wall. A lock mechanism 3020 for detachably mounting the board side effect display device 1600, an effect drive board 3031 attached to the lower side of the opening 3010a on the rear surface of the back box 3010, and an effect drive board on the rear surface of the back box 3010 A panel relay board 3032 attached to the right side of the rear view 3031, a lower left relay board 3033 attached to the right side of the panel relay board 3032 on the rear side of the back box 3010, and an effect drive board on the rear side of the back box 3010 And a lower right relay board 3034 attached to the left side of the rear view of 3031.

  The effect drive board 3031 is based on the control signal from the peripheral control board 1510, the back front decoration unit 3100, the back middle movable effect unit 3200, the back left movable effect unit 3300, the back right movable effect unit 3400, the back upper movable effect unit. The decorative board, the drive motor, and the like provided in 3500 and the lower back movable effect unit 3700 are controlled. The panel relay board 3032 includes a main control board 1310, a function display unit 1400, a gate sensor 2401, a first big prize port sensor 2403, a second big prize port sensor 2402, a first reception port sensor 2434, and a second reception port sensor 2435. , Second start port sensor 3113, start port solenoid 2105, first attacker solenoid 2108A, second attacker solenoid 2108B, distribution solenoid (not shown), general winning port sensor 3111, first start port sensor 3112, and magnetic sensor 2404 and the connection with the vibration sensor 2405 are relayed.

  The lower left relay board 3033 relays the connection between the effect drive board 3031 and the back left movable effect unit 3300. The lower right relay board 3034 connects the effect driving board 3031 to the back front decoration unit 3100, the back middle movable effect unit 3200, the back right movable effect unit 3400, the back upper movable effect unit 3500, and the lower back movable effect unit 3700. Is relayed.

  The rear unit 3000 is a stage driving board cover attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 so as to cover the rear sides of the stage driving board 3031, the panel relay board 3032, the lower left relay board 3033, and the lower right relay board 3034. 3035, a panel relay board cover 3036, a lower left relay board cover 3037, and a lower right relay board cover 3038.

  The back unit 3000 is mounted on the front end of the back box 3010 from the front side left side and the bottom side, and the back front decoration unit 3100 is movable inside the back box 3010 so as to surround the opening 3010a. The production unit 3200, the back left movable production unit 3300 and the back right movable production unit 3400 respectively attached to the left and right sides of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and the upper side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The rear upper movable effect unit 3500 and the lower back movable effect unit 3700 attached to the lower side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 are provided.

[5-9a. Back box]
Next, the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 147 to 150. The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-like shape in which the front is open and has an opening 3010a that penetrates the rear wall squarely, and a flat frame shape that protrudes backward from the periphery of the opening 3010a. A liquid crystal attachment portion 3010b, and two fixed grooves 3010c into which the left fixed piece 1601 of the game board side effect display device 1600 is inserted outwardly from the inside of the frame on the right side in the back view of the liquid crystal attachment portion 3010b. And a notch 3010d to which the lock mechanism 3020 is attached by being cut out from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 at the center in the vertical direction on the left side of the liquid crystal attaching part 3010b.

  The opening 3010a of the back box 3010 is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the game board side effect display device 1600. The liquid crystal attachment portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the game board side effect display device 1600 to be fitted in the frame. The back box 3010 has a lock mechanism 3020 attached to the rear left side of the notch 3010d on the rear surface so as to be slidable up and down.

  The back box 3010 includes a flat plate-like fixed piece 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece portion 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the gaming panel 1100. The back box 3010 is formed with bosses, mounting holes, and the like at appropriate positions for mounting the movable effect units and the like.

[5-9b. Back decoration unit]
Next, the back front decoration unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 147 to 151. FIG. 151 (a) is a front view of the back front decoration unit in the back unit, and FIG. 151 (b) is an enlarged sectional view taken along line VV in FIG. The front front decoration unit 3100 is attached so as to extend from the front side left side of the front end of the back box 3010 to the lower side.

  The back front decoration unit 3100 is formed in an L shape (a crescent shape) along the left side and the lower side at the front end of the back box 3010 and is attached to the front end of the back box 3010. A general winning opening sensor 3111 for detecting a gaming ball received in the general winning opening 2001 of the front unit 2000, a first starting opening sensor 3112 for detecting a gaming ball received in the first starting opening 2002 of the front unit 2000, In the game area 5a, a magnetic sensor 2404 capable of detecting illegal magnetism applied from the outside and a vibration sensor 2405 are provided.

  The back front decoration unit 3100 extends vertically along the left side of the back box 3010 and is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3110. The back front decoration unit 3120 and the back box 3010 from the lower end of the back front decoration unit 3120 The back front lower decoration unit 3130 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3110 and extends to the left and right along the side of the front base. And a ball guiding unit 3150 attached to the front surface.

  As shown in the drawing, the back left decorative unit 3120 of the back front decorative unit 3100 includes a translucent flat front left decorative ornament 3121 having a character decoration of “dododo”, and a front left decorative A transparent and flat front left light guide lens 3122 attached to the rear side of the decorative body 3121 and a plurality of LEDs 3123a capable of irradiating light toward the left side surface of the back front left light guide lens 3122 are mounted. And a front left decorative substrate 3123 (see FIG. 151 (b)).

  The back front left light guide lens 3122 has a plurality of reflective portions 3122 a formed in a conical shape on the rear surface behind the “D” -shaped decoration in the back front left decorative ornament 3121. The light incident on the inside from the left side surface of the back front left light guide lens 3122 is reflected forward by the plurality of reflecting portions 3122 a and is placed in front of the back front left light guide lens 3122. 3121 can be light-decorated in a planar shape.

  The back front and bottom decorative unit 3130 of the back front decorative unit 3100 is arranged so as to correspond to the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction, The back front bottom left lens 3132 and the back front bottom right lens 3133, which are respectively arranged on the left and right sides of the back front bottom center lens 3131 and have a predetermined three-dimensional decoration formed on the front, and the back front bottom center lens 3131 A back front lower left lens 3132 and a back front lower decorative board 3134 which is disposed on the rear side of the back front lower right lens 3133 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. By appropriately emitting light from the LED on the front lower back decorative substrate, the back front lower center lens 3131, the back front lower left lens 3132, and the back front lower right lens 3133 can be decorated with light emission independently.

  The back front lower decoration unit 3130 opens forward in the upper center of the back front lower center lens 3131, and the game ball guided rearward by being received by the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100 can enter. The central delivery port 3135 and the lower right front lower center lens 3131 open to the front at the lower right outside, and can be entered by the general winning port 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 and guided backwards. A left delivery port 3137. The game ball that has entered the central delivery port 3135 is detected by the first start port sensor 3112 and then discharged downward (on the substrate holder 1200). The game ball that has entered the right delivery port 3136 is discharged downward (on the substrate holder 1200) after being detected by the general winning port sensor 3111.

  The ball guiding unit 3150 of the back front decoration unit 3100 is attached to the unit base 3110 so as to be disposed below the back front bottom left lens 3132 in the back front bottom decoration unit 3130. The ball guiding unit 3150 is formed in a box shape as a whole, and is opened forward at a position corresponding to the three general winning ports 2001 in the side unit 2200, and three delivery ports 3151 into which game balls can enter. And a discharge port (not shown) for discharging the game ball that has entered the interior from the delivery port 3151 downward (on the substrate holder 1200). The game balls that have entered the interior from the delivery port 3151 are discharged downward from the discharge port after being detected by the general winning port sensor 3111.

[5-9c. Backward movable production unit]
Next, the back movable movable effect unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 149 and 150. The back middle movable effect unit 3200 is attached to the rear wall in the back box 3010 so as to surround the opening 3010a. The back middle movable effect unit 3200 is arranged on the left side in a front view and extends vertically higher than the opening 3010a of the back box 3010, and has a back middle left decorative body 3210 having a predetermined decoration. And a back middle right decorative body 3220 having a predetermined decoration which is higher than the height of the opening 3010a of the back box 3010 and has a predetermined decoration, and an opening 3010a in the rear wall of the back box 3010. And a back middle drive unit 3250 which is attached to both upper and lower outer sides and moves the back middle left decorative body 3210 and the back middle right decorative body 3220 in the left-right direction.

  The back center left decorative body 3210 is disposed on the rear side of the back center left decorative lens 3211 having a translucent flat middle back decorative lens 3211 having a relief-like decoration formed on the front surface and on the front side. A back center left decorative substrate (not shown) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, and a flat back surface attached to the rear side of the back center left decorative lens 3211 so as to cover the rear surface of the back center left decorative substrate And a left decorative body base 3212. Although not shown, the back center left decorative body base 3212 is provided with a rack gear at the lower end that extends left and right and has gear teeth formed upward. The back center left decorative body 3210 can light-decorate the back center left decorative lens 3211 by causing the LED of the back center left decorative substrate to emit light.

  The back middle right decorative body 3220 is disposed on the rear side of the back middle right decorative lens 3221 having a translucent flat middle back decorative lens 3221 having a relief-like decoration formed on the front surface. A back middle right decorative board (not shown) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, and a flat back middle attached to the rear side of the back middle right decorative lens 3221 so as to cover the rear face of the back middle right decorative board And a right decorative body base 3222. The back middle right decorative body base 3222 is provided with a rack gear which extends to the left and right and has gear teeth formed downward, although not shown. This back middle right decorative body 3220 can light-decorate the back middle right decorative lens 3221 by causing the LED of the back middle right decorative board to emit light.

  The back center left decorative lens 3211 and the back center right decorative lens 3221 of the back center left decorative body 3210 and the back center right decorative body 3220 are formed symmetrically with each other. 5 is formed in such a shape that the side close to the center in the left-right direction is curled.

  The back middle drive unit 3250 is attached to the upper side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and supports an upper rail 3251 that supports the upper ends of the back middle left decorative body 3210 and the back middle right decorative body 3220 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. A flat unit base 3252 that supports the lower ends of the middle left decorative body 3210 and the back middle right decorative body 3220 to be slidable in the left-right direction, and an opening 3010a in the back box 3010 attached to the rear side of the unit base 3252. A flat mounting base 3253 mounted on the lower side, a back middle drive motor 3254 mounted on the front surface of the unit base 3252 so that the rotation shaft projects between the mounting base 3253 and the unit base 3252, and The rotation of the drive motor 3254 is transmitted and the front surface of the mounting base 3253 can be rotated. Attached to and pinion gear rack and is engaged in the rack gear and the back in the right decorations 3220 of the back in the left ornamental body 3210 so as to be sandwiched from above and below (not shown) in which it provided with a.

  In the normal state, the back middle movable effect unit 3200 has the left and right back center left decorative bodies 3210 and the back center right decorative body 3220 in a retracted position in which they are farthest from each other. In this state, the back center left decorative body 3210 and the back center right decorative body 3220 are slightly visible through the frame of the center accessory 2500 (see FIG. 133 and the like). When the pinion gear is rotated counterclockwise as viewed from the front by driving the back center drive motor 3254 from the normal state, the rack gear of the back center left decorative body 3210 meshing with the pinion gear and the back center right decorative body 3220 By the rack gear, the back center left decorative body 3210 moves to the right and the back center right decorative body 3220 moves to the left.

  As a result, the back center left decorative body 3210 and the back center right decorative body 3220 that have been separated from each other move so as to approach each other, and the movement stops immediately before coming into contact with each other. In this state, the back center left decorative body 3210 and the back center right decorative body 3220 are located at the approximate center (appearance position) on the front side of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the back center left decorative body 3210 The decoration with the back middle right decorative body 3220 is combined to form one large decoration (decoration that imitates a cherry blossom petal) (see FIG. 189).

[5-9d. Back left movable production unit]
Next, the back left movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 149 and 150. The back left movable effect unit 3300 is attached to the left outer side in front view of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The back left movable effect unit 3300 is formed substantially symmetrically with respect to the back right movable effect unit 3400 with the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 interposed therebetween.

  The back left movable effect unit 3300 includes a back left decorative body 3310 formed in a triangular prism shape, a back left rotation drive unit 3330 that rotates the back left decorative body 3310 around an axis extending vertically, and a back box 3010. A back-left movement drive unit 3350 that is attached and moves the upper end side of the back-left rotation drive unit 3330 in the left-right direction, and a lower-end side of the back-left rotation drive unit 3330 that is attached in the back box 3010 is guided to be movable in the left-right direction. The rear left lower guide rail 3370 and the rear left upper decorative body 3390 attached to the front side of the rear left moving drive unit 3350 and having a predetermined decoration are provided.

  The back left decorative body 3310 is formed in a triangular prism shape extending vertically, and extends shorter than the vertical height of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The back left decorative body 3310 is composed of a first decorative surface 3311 on which a relief of the Deva image is formed, a second decorative surface 3312 on which a predetermined character decoration is formed, and a character different from the second decorative surface 3312. And a third decorative surface 3313 on which decoration is formed. The back left decorative body 3310 is formed to have translucency. Although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the back left decoration body 3310 is provided with the cylindrical axial part at the lower end.

  The back left rotation drive unit 3330 is attached to the lower part of the movement base 3331 so as to protrude forward and to the front of the movement base 3331 extending vertically and attached to the back left movement drive unit 3350 so as to be movable left and right. A lower rotation base 3332 rotatably supporting the lower end of the body 3310, and an upper rotation base (not shown) attached to the upper part of the moving base 3331 so as to protrude above the back left decorative body 3310; A back left rotation drive motor (heat source) (not shown), which is attached to the upper rotation base so that the rotation shaft protrudes downward, and the rotation shaft penetrating the upper rotation base is attached to the upper end of the back left decoration body 3310; A motor cover 3333 attached to the moving base 3331 so as to cover the outer periphery of the back left rotation drive motor, and a back left decorative body 3310 Lower is arranged closer to the inside is provided with a Urahidari decorative substrate 3334 in which a plurality of LED on the front is attached to the lower rotary base 3332 is mounted (see FIG. 138), the.

  Although not shown, the moving base 3331 is provided with a rack gear extending left and right at the upper end. The lower rotation base 3332 is supported so as to be rotatable with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical shaft portion of the back left decorative body 3310. Although not shown, the lower rotation base 3332 protrudes downward from the lower surface and has a protrusion that is guided by the back left lower guide rail 3370.

  The back left decorative substrate 3334 is disposed inside the back left decorative body 3310 through the inside of the cylindrical shaft portion. Although this back left decorative substrate 3334 is not shown, the upper end side is supported relatively rotatably on the lower side of the upper end of the back left decorative body 3310. Thus, only the back left decorative body 3310 is formed to rotate by driving the back left rotation drive motor. The LED of the back left decorative board 3334 always faces forward, and only the portion of the back left decorative body 3310 positioned in front of the back left decorative board 3334 (that is, the decorative surface facing forward) can be decorated with light emission. it can.

  The back left drive unit 3350 has a unit base 3351 attached to the upper left corner above the opening 3010a on the front surface of the rear wall in the back box 3010, and a rotating shaft protruding rearward through the unit base 3351. The rear left movement drive motor 3352 (heat source) attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351, the drive gear 3353 attached to the rotation shaft of the rear left movement drive motor 3352, and the drive gear 3353 are engaged. A pinion gear (not shown) that meshes with the rack gear of the back left rotation drive unit 3330 and is rotatably attached to the unit base 3351, and the back left rotation drive unit 3330 that is attached to the lower front of the unit base 3351. Sliding base 3331 is attached so as to be movable in the left-right direction. Rails (not shown) is provided with a.

  When the back left movement drive unit 3350 rotates the pinion gear counterclockwise in the front view via the drive gear 3353 by the back left movement drive motor 3352, the back left rotation drive is driven by the rack gear meshing with the pinion gear. The unit 3330 (back left decorative body 3310) can be moved rightward.

  The back left lower guide rail 3370 is attached near the left end under the opening 3010a on the front surface of the back wall of the back box 3010. The back left lower guide rail 3370 extends to the left and right, and is formed in a box shape having an open top surface. This back left lower guide rail 3370 inserts a protrusion protruding from the lower surface of the lower rotation base 3332 of the back left rotation drive unit 3330 into the opening on the upper surface, thereby guiding the protrusion so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. Can do.

  The back upper decoration body 3390 is attached to the rear left upper decoration lens 3391 having a translucent shape with a predetermined decoration and the rear left upper decoration lens 3391, and the unit base 3351 of the back left movement drive unit 3350. A decorative body base 3392 attached to the front surface, and a back upper left decorative substrate (not shown) mounted between the decorative body base 3392 and the back upper left decorative lens 3391 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. ing. The back left top decorative body 3390 can light up and decorate the back top top decorative lens 3391 by causing the LED on the back top top decorative substrate to emit light.

  In the normal state, the back left movable effect unit 3300 is in a state (retracted position) where the back left rotation drive unit 3330 (back left decorative body 3310) has moved to the leftmost side by the back left movement drive unit 3350. ing. In this normal state, the back left decorative body 3310 is positioned behind the back front left decorative unit 3120 in the back front decorative unit 3100, and is blocked by the back front left decorative unit 3120 so that it can be almost visually recognized from the front. Not possible (see FIG. 133 etc.).

  In this normal state, by driving the back left movement drive motor 3352 of the back left movement drive unit 3350, the back left decorative body 3310 can be moved to the right via the back left rotation drive unit 3330. When the left movement drive unit 3350 reaches the right end position (appearance position) of the slide rail, the movement stops. In this appearance position state, the back left decorative body 3310 is located on the right side of the back front left decoration unit 3120 in the back front decoration unit 3100 via the back left rotation drive unit 3330, and the game board side effect display It is located near the left end of the front surface of the apparatus 1600 and is visible through the frame of the center accessory 2500 (see FIGS. 190 to 192).

  The back left movable effect unit 3300 rotates the back left decorative body 3310 with the back left rotational drive motor (heat source) of the back left rotational drive unit 3330, or the first decorative surface 3311 of the back left decorative body 3310, the second The rotation can be stopped such that any one of the decorative surface 3312 and the third decorative surface 3313 faces forward. The back left decorative body 3310 can be rotated at any of the retracted position and the appearance position.

[5-9e. Back right movable production unit]
Next, the back right movable effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 149 and 150. The back right movable effect unit 3400 is attached to the right outer side in front view of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The back right movable effect unit 3400 is formed substantially symmetrically with respect to the back left movable effect unit 3300 with the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 interposed therebetween.

  The back right movable effect unit 3400 includes a back right decoration body 3410 formed in a triangular prism shape, a back right rotation drive unit 3430 for rotating the back right decoration body 3410 around an axis extending vertically, and a back box 3010. A back-right movement drive unit 3450 that is attached and moves the upper end side of the back-right rotation drive unit 3430 in the left-right direction, and a lower-end side of the back-right rotation drive unit 3430 that is attached in the back box 3010 is guided to be movable in the left-right direction. The back right lower guide rail 3470 and the back right upper decorative body 3490 attached to the front side of the back right moving drive unit 3450 and having a predetermined decoration.

  The back right decorative body 3410 is formed in a triangular prism shape extending vertically and extends shorter than the vertical height of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The back right decorative body 3410 has different characters from the first decorative surface 3411 on which the relief of the Deva image is formed, the second decorative surface 3412 on which the decoration of a predetermined character is formed, and the second decorative surface 3412. And a third decorative surface 3413 on which a decoration is formed. The back right decorative body 3410 is formed to have translucency. Although not shown, the back right decorative body 3410 includes a cylindrical shaft portion at the lower end.

  The back-right rotation drive unit 3430 is attached to the lower part of the movement base 3431 so as to protrude forward and the movement base 3431 extending vertically so as to be movable in the left-right direction by the back-right movement drive unit 3450. A lower rotation base 3432 rotatably supporting the lower end of the body 3410, and an upper rotation base (not shown) attached to the upper part of the moving base 3431 so as to protrude above the back right decoration body 3410; A back right rotation drive motor (heat source) (not shown) in which the rotation shaft is attached to the upper rotation base so as to protrude downward, and the rotation shaft penetrating the upper rotation base is attached to the upper end of the back right decoration body 3410; A motor cover 3433 attached to the moving base 3431 so as to cover the outer periphery of the back right rotation drive motor, and a back right decorative body 3410 Lower is arranged closer is provided with a back right decorative substrate 3434 in which a plurality of LED on the front is attached to the lower rotary base 3432 is mounted (see Figure 138), to.

  Although not shown, the moving base 3431 is provided with a rack gear extending left and right at the upper end. The lower rotation base 3432 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical shaft portion of the back right decorative body 3410. Although not shown, the lower rotation base 3432 has a protrusion that protrudes downward from the lower surface and is guided by the back lower right guide rail 3470.

  The back right decorative board 3434 is disposed inside the back right decorative body 3410 through the cylindrical shaft portion. Although not shown in the drawing, the back right decorative substrate 3434 is supported such that the upper end side is relatively rotatable below the upper end of the back right decorative body 3410. Thus, only the back right decorative body 3410 is formed to rotate by driving the back right rotation drive motor. The LED of the back right decorative board 3434 always faces forward, and only the portion of the back right decorative body 3410 positioned in front of the back right decorative board 3434 (that is, the decorative surface facing forward) can be decorated with light emission. it can.

  The back right movement drive unit 3450 has a unit base 3451 attached to the upper right corner above the opening 3010a on the front surface of the rear wall in the back box 3010, and a rotation shaft protruding rearward through the unit base 3451. The back right movement drive motor 3452 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3451, the drive gear 3453 attached to the rotation shaft of the back right movement drive motor 3452, and meshed with the drive gear 3453 and rotated back right. A pinion gear (not shown) that meshes with the rack gear of the drive unit 3430 and is rotatably attached to the unit base 3451, and a moving base of the back-right rotation drive unit 3430 that is attached to the lower front portion of the unit base 3451. Slide rail with 3431 movably mounted in the left-right direction Shown is provided with abbreviated).

  When the back right movement drive unit 3450 rotates the pinion gear clockwise through the drive gear 3453 by the back right movement drive motor 3452, the back right rotation drive unit is driven by the rack gear meshing with the pinion gear. 3430 (back right decorative body 3410) can be moved to the left.

  The back lower guide rail 3470 is attached near the right end under the opening 3010a on the front surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The back lower right guide rail 3470 extends left and right, and is formed in a box shape having an upper surface opened. This back lower right guide rail 3470 inserts a protrusion protruding from the lower surface of the lower rotation base 3432 of the back right rotation drive unit 3430 into the opening on the upper surface, thereby guiding the protrusion so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. be able to.

  The back upper right decorative body 3490 has a translucent back right upper decorative lens 3491 in which a predetermined decoration is formed, and is attached to the rear side of the back right upper decorative lens 3491. The back right moving drive unit 3450 has a unit base 3451. A decorative body base 3492 attached to the front surface, and a back upper right decorative board (not shown) mounted between the decorative body base 3492 and the back upper right decorative lens 3491 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. ing. The back upper right decorative body 3490 can light up and decorate the back upper right decorative lens 3491 by causing the LED of the back upper right decorative board to emit light.

  In the normal state, the back-right movable effect unit 3400 is in a state where the back-right rotation drive unit 3430 (back-right decoration body 3410) has moved to the rightmost side (retracted position) by the back-right movement drive unit 3450. ing. In this normal state, the back right decorative body 3410 is located behind the right side of the center accessory 2500, and a part thereof can be visually recognized through the frame of the center accessory 2500 (see FIG. 133 and the like). reference).

  In this normal state, by driving the back-right movement drive motor 3452 of the back-right movement drive unit 3450, the back-right decoration body 3410 can be moved to the right via the back-right rotation drive unit 3430. When reaching the left end position (appearance position) of the slide rail of the right movement drive unit 3450, the movement stops. In the state of this appearance position, the back right decorative body 3410 is located on the left side of the right side of the center accessory 2500 via the back right rotation drive unit 3430, and on the front surface of the game board side effect display device 1600. It is located in the vicinity of the right end, and is in a state where the whole is visible through the frame of the center accessory 2500 (see FIGS. 190 to 192).

  The back right movable effect unit 3400 rotates the back right decoration body 3410 with the back right rotation drive motor of the back right rotation drive unit 3430, or the first decoration surface 3411 and the second decoration surface 3412 of the back right decoration body 3410. , And the third decorative surface 3413 can be rotated or stopped so that either of them faces forward. The back right decorative body 3410 can be rotated at any of the retracted position and the appearance position.

[5-9f. Overall configuration of the rear movable movable unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the back movable production unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 152 to 177. FIG. 152 (a) is a perspective view of the backside movable effect unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 152 (b) is a perspective view of the backside movable effect unit as seen from the back. FIG. 153 is an exploded perspective view of the rear movable movable unit knit mainly exploded for each component unit and viewed from the front, and FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view. The back upper movable effect unit 3500 is attached to the upper side of the opening 3010a on the front surface of the rear wall in the back box 3010.

  The back movable production unit 3500 includes a back first decorative body unit 3510 having a predetermined character decoration, and a back second decorative body unit having a character decoration different from the back first decorative body unit 3510. 3530, a back third decorative body unit 3550 having a decoration of characters different from those of the back first decorative body unit 3510 and the back second decorative body unit 3530, and a back first decorative body at the longitudinal center. The unit 3510 is attached so as to be relatively rotatable with respect to the axis extending in the front-rear direction, and the back-side second decorative body unit 3530 and the back-side third decorative body unit 3550 extend back and forth in the vicinity of both ends in the longitudinal direction. A back-side rotation base unit 3570 that is rotatably mounted relative to the surrounding axis, and the back-side rotation base unit 3570 passes through the back-side rotation base unit 3570. The decorative body unit 3510 is non-rotatably attached, and the back upper first decorative body unit 3510 and the back upper rotation base unit 3570 are moved up and down, and the back upper lift unit 3600 attached in the back box 3010 is provided. Yes.

[5-9f-1. 1st decorative body unit on the back]
Next, the back first decorative body unit 3510 in the back top movable effect unit 3500 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 155 to 158. FIG. 155 (a) is a perspective view of the backside first decorative body unit in the backside movable effect unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 155 (b) is a perspective view of the backside first decorative body unit from the back. FIG. 156 is an exploded perspective view of the backside first decorative body unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 157 is an exploded perspective view of the backside first decorative body unit as seen from the back. FIG. 158 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the drive system when the back upper first decorative body unit is in the closed position, and FIG. 158 (b) is the drive system when the back upper first decorative body unit is in the open position. It is explanatory drawing shown from a front. The back first decorative body unit 3510 of the back top movable effect unit 3500 is attached to the front surface of the movable unit 3610 in the back top lift unit 3600 so as not to rotate.

  The back first decorative body unit 3510 includes a first left movable decorative lens 3511 and a first right movable decorative lens 3512 which are formed so as to have a predetermined character in a pair and have translucency. A first fixed decorative lens 3513 having translucency and disposed behind the left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 and having a predetermined decoration, and the rear of the first fixed decorative lens 3513 The back side first decorative substrate 3514 that is arranged on the side and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and is attached to the rear side of the first fixed decorative lens 3513 so as to cover the rear surface of the back top first decorative substrate 3514. The first decorative body base 3515 having a flat plate shape is provided. The first fixed decorative lens 3513 has a decoration that mimics lightning.

  The first upper decorative body unit 3510 on the back extends in the left-right direction at the lower part of the rear side of the first decorative body base 3515, and the left end is the left outer side of the first decorative body base 3515 and the rear of the first left movable decorative lens 3511. A first lower arm 3516 having a rack gear 3516a attached to the upper side and extending left and right on the upper side, and a slit 3516b penetrating forward and backward on the lower side of the rack gear 3516a, and a slit of the first lower arm 3516 A lower arm presser 3517 which is attached to the rear side of the first decorative body base 3515 through 3516b and which is slidably attached to the first lower arm 3516 in cooperation with the first decorative body base 3515. ing.

  The first upper decorative body unit 3510 on the back extends in the left-right direction at the upper part on the rear side of the first decorative body base 3515 and the right end is the right outside of the first decorative body base 3515 and is behind the first right movable decorative lens 3512. The first upper arm 3518 having a rack gear 3518a attached to the side and extending left and right on the lower side, and a slit 3518b penetrating back and forth on the upper side of the rack gear 3518a and extending left and right, and a slit 3518b of the first upper arm 3518 And an upper arm presser 3519 that is attached to the rear side of the first decorative body base 3515 and that is slidably attached to the first upper arm 3518 in cooperation with the first decorative body base 3515. Yes.

  Further, the back first decorative body unit 3510 has a large-diameter transmission gear portion 3520a that meshes with a rack gear 3516a of the first lower arm 3516 and a rack gear 3518a of the first upper arm 3518, and a rear surface of the transmission gear portion 3520a. A first opening / closing gear member 3520 having a small-diameter driving gear portion 3520b formed integrally and rotatably attached to the rear side of the first decorative body base 3515 is provided.

  The first upper decorative body unit 3510 on the back is formed in a flat plate shape on the left side of the first opening / closing gear member 3520 on the rear side of the first decorative body base 3515 and extends in the vertical direction, and the first opening / closing gear member 3520 on the right side. A drive rack gear 3521a extending vertically to mesh with the drive gear portion 3520b, a receiving boss 3521b projecting in a columnar shape from the lower part of the rear surface to the rear, and a slit 3521c penetrating back and forth in the vicinity of the left side and extending vertically. The first opening / closing arm 3521 is mounted on the rear side of the first decorative body base 3515 through the opening / closing arm 3521 and the slit 3521c of the first opening / closing arm 3521. The first opening / closing arm 3521 can be slid in the vertical direction in cooperation with the first decorative body base 3515. And an open / close arm presser 3522 attached thereto.

  Further, the back upper first decorative body unit 3510 has a left end attached to the rear side of the first decorative body base 3515 and a right end attached to the first upper arm 3518 so that the first upper arm 3518 is left in front view. A first opening / closing spring 3523 that is biased to move in the direction toward the right, and a first mounting base 3524 that is attached to the rear side of the first decorative body base 3515 so as to cover the rear side of the first opening / closing gear member 3520. And a horizontal lock hole 3525a that is attached to the rear side of the first mounting base 3524 and that is open to the right outer peripheral surface, and the lower outer peripheral surface is formed at the same position as the horizontal lock hole 3525a in the front-rear direction. And a mounting shaft portion 3525c that protrudes rearward in a cylindrical shape on the rear side of the vertical locking hole 3525b. End and a, a first mounting shaft member 3525 attached to the front surface of the movable unit 3610 in the back on the lift unit 3600.

  Next, the movement of the back first decorative body unit 3510 will be described in detail. The first upper decorative body unit 3510 on the back is between a closed position in which the left and right first left movable decorative lenses 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 are in contact with each other and an open position in which they are separated from each other. It is formed to slide in the left-right direction.

  A first upper arm 3518 to which a first right movable decorative lens 3512 is attached is disposed above a first lower arm 3516 to which a first left movable decorative lens 3511 is attached. Each is attached so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. The first lower arm 3516 is provided with a rack gear 3516a extending leftward and rightward, and the first upper arm 3518 is provided with a rack gear 3518a extending leftward and rightward. A rack gear 3516a of the arm 3516 and a rack gear 3518a of the first upper arm 3518 are opposed to each other. Between the first lower arm 3516 and the first upper arm 3518, the transmission gear portion 3520a of the first opening / closing gear member 3520 meshes with the rack gear 3516a of the first lower arm 3516 and the rack gear 3518a of the first upper arm 3518, respectively. doing. Accordingly, when the first opening / closing gear member 3520 (transmission gear portion 3520a) is rotated, the first lower arm 3516 and the first upper arm 3518 can be slid in different directions in the left-right direction.

  Accordingly, when the first opening / closing gear member 3520 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, the first left movable decoration lens 3511 and the first right movable decoration are interposed via the first lower arm 3516 and the first upper arm 3518. When the first opening / closing gear member 3520 is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, the first lower arm 3516 and the first upper arm 3518 can be moved. The first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 can be slid in a direction away from each other (open position direction).

  In the back first decorative body unit 3510, the first opening / closing gear member 3520 has a drive gear portion 3520b that rotates integrally with the transmission gear portion 3520a, and a vertically extending drive rack gear that meshes with the drive gear portion 3520b. A first opening / closing arm 3521 having 3521a is provided. Since the first opening / closing arm 3521 is slidably attached in the vertical direction, when the first opening / closing gear member 3520 rotates, the first opening / closing arm 3521 slides in the vertical direction. Since the first opening / closing arm 3521 is arranged on the left side of the first opening / closing gear member 3520 as viewed from the front, when the first opening / closing gear member 3520 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, the first opening / closing arm 3521 slides downward. When the opening / closing gear member 3520 is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, it slides upward.

  In other words, when the first opening / closing arm 3521 is slid downward, the first opening / closing gear member 3520 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 Can be slid in the direction approaching each other (the direction of the closed position). On the other hand, when the first opening / closing arm 3521 is slid upward, the first opening / closing gear member 3520 rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 are mutually connected. It can be slid in the direction of separation (the direction of the open position).

  The back first decorative body unit 3510 has a first opening / closing spring 3523 that biases the first upper arm 3518 to move to the left, so that a force acts on the first opening / closing arm 3521. When not (in a normal state), the first upper arm 3518 is slid leftward by the biasing force of the first opening / closing spring 3523, and the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative The lens 3512 is in a closed position where the lenses 3512 are in contact with each other. In this closed position, the transmission gear portion 3520a of the first opening / closing gear member 3520 meshes with the vicinity of the left end of the rack gear 3516a in the first lower arm 3516, and the vicinity of the right end of the rack gear 3518a in the first upper arm 3518. Meshed. In this state, the drive gear portion 3520b of the first opening / closing gear member 3520 meshes with the vicinity of the upper end of the driving rack gear 3521a in the first opening / closing arm 3521 (see FIG. 158 (a)).

  When the first opening / closing arm 3521 is slid upward from the closed position so as to resist the urging force of the first opening / closing spring 3523, the first opening / closing gear member 3520 rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. Via the lower arm 3516 and the first upper arm 3518, the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 slide in directions away from each other. When the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 reach the open position, the slide stops (see FIG. 158 (b)). The sliding stop at this open position is at the end of the slot in at least one of the slit 3516b of the first lower arm 3516, the slit 3518b of the first upper arm 3518, and the slit 3521c of the first opening / closing arm 3521. The lower arm press 3517, the upper arm press 3519, and the open / close arm press 3522 are in contact with each other, so that the slide is regulated.

  Therefore, when the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 are in the closed position, the back first decorative body unit 3510 has the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512. Is positioned in front of the first fixed decorative lens 3513 so that the first fixed decorative lens 3513 is hardly visible from the front, and the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 You can see the decoration. On the other hand, when the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 are in the open position, the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 are separated from each other, and the first The decoration of the fixed decorative lens 3513 can be seen.

  The back first decorative body unit 3510 causes the LEDs on the back first decorative substrate 3514 to emit light appropriately, thereby allowing the first left movable decorative lens 3511, the first right movable decorative lens 3512, and the first fixed decorative lens 3513 to be emitted. It can be appropriately decorated with light emission. Specifically, when the LED on the back first decorative substrate 3514 is caused to emit light when the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 are in the closed position, the first fixed decorative lens 3513 is interposed. The first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 can be illuminated. On the other hand, when the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 are in the open position, the LED on the back first decorative substrate 3514 emits light, and the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 are moved. Only the first fixed decorative lens 3513 that faces the decorative lens 3512 can be illuminated and decorated.

[5-9f-2. Second decorative unit on the back]
Next, the back top second decorative body unit 3530 in the back top movable effect unit 3500 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 159 to 162. FIG. 159 (a) is a perspective view of the backside second decorative body unit in the backside movable effect unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 160 is an exploded perspective view of the backside second decorative body unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 161 is an exploded perspective view of the backside second decorative body unit as seen from the back. FIG. 162 (a) is an explanatory view showing the drive system when the back second decorative body unit is in the closed position from the front, and FIG. 162 (b) shows the drive system when the back second decorative body unit is in the open position. It is explanatory drawing shown from a front. The back second decorative body unit 3530 of the back top movable effect unit 3500 has a rear end in the front-rear direction near one end in the longitudinal direction of the back top rotation base unit 3570 (near the right end when in the horizontal position). It is mounted for rotation about an axis extending to.

  The back second decorative body unit 3530 is formed with a pair of one-to-one sets of decorations that form predetermined characters, and has a translucent second left movable decorative lens 3531 and second right movable decorative lens 3532, and first A second fixed decorative lens 3533 having a translucency, which is disposed behind the two left movable decorative lenses 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 and has a predetermined decoration, and the second fixed decorative lens 3533. The back side second decorative substrate 3534 arranged on the side and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and attached to the rear side of the second fixed decorative lens 3533 so as to cover the rear surface of the back second decorative substrate 3534 A flat plate-like second decorative body base 3535. The second fixed decorative lens 3533 is provided with a decoration that mimics lightning.

  The back upper second decorative body unit 3530 extends in the left-right direction at the lower part of the rear side of the second decorative body base 3535 and the left end is the left outer side of the second decorative body base 3535 and is behind the second left movable decorative lens 3531. A second lower arm 3536 having a rack gear 3536a attached to the upper side and extending left and right on the upper side, and a slit 3536b penetrating forward and rearward on the lower side of the rack gear 3536a, and a slit of the second lower arm 3536 A lower arm presser 3537 which is attached to the rear side of the second decorative body base 3535 through 3536b and which is slidably attached to the second lower arm 3536 in cooperation with the second decorative body base 3535. ing.

  The back upper second decorative body unit 3530 extends in the left-right direction at the upper part of the rear side of the second decorative body base 3535 and the right end is the right outside of the second decorative body base 3535 and is behind the second right movable decorative lens 3532. And a second upper arm 3538 having a rack gear 3538a extending to the left and right on the lower side, a slit 3538b penetrating back and forth on the upper side of the rack gear 3538a and extending left and right, and a slit 3538b of the second upper arm 3538 And an upper arm presser 3539 which is attached to the rear side of the second decorative body base 3535 and which is slidably attached to the second upper arm 3538 in cooperation with the second decorative body base 3535. Yes.

  Further, the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 has a large-diameter transmission gear portion 3540a that meshes with a rack gear 3536a of the second lower arm 3536 and a rack gear 3538a of the second upper arm 3538, and a rear surface of the transmission gear portion 3540a. A second opening / closing gear member 3540 having a small-diameter driving gear portion 3540b that is integrally formed and rotatably attached to the rear side of the second decorative body base 3535 is provided.

  The back upper second decorative body unit 3530 is formed in a flat plate shape on the left side of the front of the second opening / closing gear member 3540 on the rear side of the second decorative body base 3535 and extends in the vertical direction, and on the right side of the second opening / closing gear member 3540. A driving rack gear 3541a extending vertically to mesh with the driving gear portion 3540b, a receiving boss 3541b projecting in a cylindrical shape rearward from the vicinity of the upper end portion of the rear surface, and a slit 3541c penetrating back and forth in the vicinity of the left side and extending vertically. The second opening / closing arm 3541 and the slit 3541c of the second opening / closing arm 3541 are attached to the rear side of the second decorative body base 3535. In cooperation with the second decorative body base 3535, the second opening / closing arm 3541 is moved in the vertical direction. And an open / close arm presser 3542 slidably attached.

  Further, the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 has a left end attached to the second lower arm 3536 and a right end attached to the rear side of the second decorative body base 3535 so that the second lower arm 3536 is viewed from the front right. A second opening / closing spring 3543 that is biased to move in the direction of movement, and a second attachment base 3544 attached to the rear side of the second decorative body base 3535 so as to cover the rear side of the second opening / closing gear member 3540. And. The second attachment base 3544 is attached to a second drive link gear member 3573 of the backside rotation base unit 3570 described later.

  Next, the movement of the back second decorative body unit 3530 will be described in detail. The back upper second decorative body unit 3530 is arranged between a closed position where the left and right second left movable decorative lenses 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 are in close contact with each other and an open position where they are separated from each other. It is formed to slide in the left-right direction.

  The second upper decorative body unit 3530 has a second upper arm 3538 to which a second right movable decorative lens 3532 is attached above a second lower arm 3536 to which a second left movable decorative lens 3531 is attached. Each is attached so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. The second lower arm 3536 includes a rack gear 3536a extending leftward and rightward, and the second upper arm 3538 includes a rack gear 3538a extending leftward and rightward. The rack gear 3536a of the arm 3536 and the rack gear 3538a of the second upper arm 3538 are opposed to each other. Between the second lower arm 3536 and the second upper arm 3538, the transmission gear portion 3540a of the second opening / closing gear member 3540 meshes with the rack gear 3536a of the second lower arm 3536 and the rack gear 3538a of the second upper arm 3538, respectively. doing. Accordingly, when the second opening / closing gear member 3540 (transmission gear portion 3540a) is rotated, the second lower arm 3536 and the second upper arm 3538 can be slid in different directions in the left-right direction.

  Accordingly, when the second opening / closing gear member 3540 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative member are connected via the second lower arm 3536 and the second upper arm 3538. When the second opening / closing gear member 3540 is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, the second lower arm 3536 and the second upper arm 3538 can be slid in the direction in which the lens 3532 approaches each other (the direction of the closed position). The second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 can be slid in directions away from each other (open position direction).

  In the back second decorative body unit 3530, the second opening / closing gear member 3540 has a drive gear portion 3540b that rotates integrally with the transmission gear portion 3540a, and a drive rack gear that extends vertically to mesh with the drive gear portion 3540b. A second opening / closing arm 3541 having 3541a is provided. Since the second opening / closing arm 3541 is slidably attached in the vertical direction, when the second opening / closing gear member 3540 rotates, the second opening / closing arm 3541 slides in the vertical direction. Since the second opening / closing arm 3541 is disposed on the left side of the second opening / closing gear member 3540 as viewed from the front, when the second opening / closing gear member 3540 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the second opening / closing arm 3541 slides downward. When the opening / closing gear member 3540 is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, it slides upward.

  In other words, when the second opening / closing arm 3541 is slid downward, the second opening / closing gear member 3540 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 Can be slid in the direction approaching each other (the direction of the closed position). On the other hand, when the second opening / closing arm 3541 is slid upward, the second opening / closing gear member 3540 rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 are mutually connected. It can be slid in the direction of separation (the direction of the open position).

  Since this back second decorative body unit 3530 has a second opening / closing spring 3543 that is biased so that the second lower arm 3536 moves to the right, a force acts on the second opening / closing arm 3541. When not (in a normal state), the second lower arm 3536 is slid to the right by the biasing force of the second opening / closing spring 3543, and the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative The lens 3532 is in a closed position where the lenses 3532 contact each other. In this closed position, the transmission gear portion 3540a of the second opening / closing gear member 3540 meshes with the vicinity of the left end of the rack gear 3536a in the second lower arm 3536 and the vicinity of the right end of the rack gear 3538a in the second upper arm 3538. Meshed. In this state, the drive gear portion 3540b of the second opening / closing gear member 3540 meshes with the vicinity of the upper end of the driving rack gear 3541a in the second opening / closing arm 3541 (see FIG. 162 (a)).

  When the second opening / closing arm 3541 is slid upward from the closed position so as to resist the biasing force of the second opening / closing spring 3543, the second opening / closing gear member 3540 rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, The second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 slide in directions away from each other via the two lower arms 3536 and the second upper arm 3538. When the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 reach the open position, the slide stops (see FIG. 162 (b)). The sliding stop at this open position is at the end of the long hole in at least one of the slit 3536b of the second lower arm 3536, the slit 3538b of the second upper arm 3538, and the slit 3541c of the second opening / closing arm 3541. The lower arm presser 3537, the upper arm presser 3539, and the open / close arm presser 3542 are brought into contact with each other, so that sliding is regulated.

  Therefore, the back second decorative body unit 3530 has the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 when the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 are in the closed position. Is positioned in front of the second fixed decorative lens 3533 so that the second fixed decorative lens 3533 is almost invisible from the front, and the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 provide predetermined characters. You can see the decoration. On the other hand, when the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 are in the open position, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 are separated from each other to the second The decoration of the fixed decorative lens 3533 can be seen.

  The back second decorative body unit 3530 causes the LEDs on the back second decorative substrate 3534 to emit light appropriately, thereby allowing the second left movable decorative lens 3531, the second right movable decorative lens 3532, and the second fixed decorative lens 3533 to be emitted. It can be appropriately decorated with light emission. Specifically, when the LED on the back second decorative substrate 3534 is caused to emit light when the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 are in the closed position, the second fixed decorative lens 3533 is passed through. The second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 can be illuminated. On the other hand, when the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 are in the open position, if the LED of the back second decorative substrate 3534 is caused to emit light, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3531 are movable. Only the second fixed decorative lens 3533 facing the decorative lens 3532 can be decorated with light emission.

[5-9f-3. 3rd decorative body unit on the back]
Next, the back top third decorative body unit 3550 in the back top movable effect unit 3500 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 163 to 166. FIG. 163 (a) is a perspective view of the back top third decorative body unit in the back top movable effect unit as seen from the front, and FIG. FIG. 164 is an exploded perspective view of the backside third decorative body unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 165 is an exploded perspective view of the backside third decorative body unit as seen from the back. FIG. 166 (a) is an explanatory view showing the driving system when the back upper third decorative body unit is in the closed position, and FIG. 166 (b) shows the driving system when the back upper third decorative body unit is in the open position. It is explanatory drawing shown from a front. The back third decorative body unit 3550 of the back top movable effect unit 3500 has a rear end near the end opposite to the back top second decorative body unit 3530 in the longitudinal direction of the back top rotation base unit 3570 (horizontal position). (In the vicinity of the left end at the time of), it is rotatably attached around an axis extending in the front-rear direction.

  The third decorative body unit 3550 on the back is formed with a pair of one-to-one decorations that form predetermined characters, and has a translucent third left movable decorative lens 3551 and a third right movable decorative lens 3552, After the third fixed decorative lens 3553 and the third fixed decorative lens 3553, which are disposed behind the three left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 and have a predetermined decoration. The back side third decorative substrate 3554 which is arranged on the side and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and is attached to the rear side of the third fixed decorative lens 3553 so as to cover the rear surface of the back top third decorative substrate 3554. And a flat third decorative body base 3555. The third fixed decorative lens 3553 is provided with a decoration that mimics lightning.

  The back upper third decorative body unit 3550 extends in the left-right direction in the lower part of the rear side of the third decorative body base 3555 and the left end is the left outside of the third decorative body base 3555 and is behind the third left movable decorative lens 3551. A third lower arm 3556 having a rack gear 3556a attached to the upper side and extending left and right on the upper side, and a slit 3556b penetrating back and forth on the lower side of the rack gear 3556a, and a slit of the third lower arm 3556 A lower arm presser 3557 which is attached to the rear side of the third decorative body base 3555 through 3556b and which is slidably attached to the third lower arm 3556 in cooperation with the third decorative body base 3555. ing.

  The back upper third decorative body unit 3550 extends in the left-right direction in the upper part of the rear side of the third decorative body base 3555 and the right end is on the right outside of the third decorative body base 3555 and behind the third right movable decorative lens 3552. A third upper arm 3558 having a rack gear 3558a attached to the lower side and extending left and right on the lower side, a slit 3558b penetrating back and forth on the upper side of the rack gear 3558a and extending left and right, and a slit 3558b of the third upper arm 3558 And an upper arm presser 3559 that is attached to the rear side of the third decorative body base 3555 and cooperates with the third decorative body base 3555 to slidably mount the third upper arm 3558 in the left-right direction. Yes.

  Further, the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 has a large-diameter transmission gear portion 3560a that meshes with a rack gear 3556a of the third lower arm 3556 and a rack gear 3558a of the third upper arm 3558, and a rear surface of the transmission gear portion 3560a. A third opening / closing gear member 3560 having a small-diameter driving gear portion 3560b integrally formed and rotatably attached to the rear side of the third decorative body base 3555 is provided.

  The back upper third decorative body unit 3550 is formed in a flat plate shape on the left side of the front of the third opening / closing gear member 3560 on the rear side of the third decorative body base 3555 and extends in the vertical direction, and on the right side of the third opening / closing gear member 3560. A drive rack gear 3561a that extends vertically that meshes with the drive gear portion 3560b, a third opening / closing arm 3561 that has a slit 3561c that penetrates back and forth in the vicinity of the left side and extends vertically, and a third through the slit 3561c of the third opening / closing arm 3561. And an opening / closing arm presser 3562 that is attached to the rear side of the decorative body base 3555 and that is slidably attached to the third opening / closing arm 3561 in cooperation with the third decorative body base 3555.

  Further, the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 has a left end attached to the third lower arm 3556 and a right end attached to the rear side of the third decorative body base 3555. A third opening / closing spring 3563 that is biased to move in the direction of movement, and a third attachment base 3564 attached to the rear side of the third decorative body base 3555 so as to cover the rear side of the third opening / closing gear member 3560. And. The third attachment base 3564 is attached to a third drive link gear member 3578 of the backside rotation base unit 3570 described later.

  Next, the movement of the back third decorative body unit 3550 will be described in detail. The back upper third decorative body unit 3550 has a left and right third left movable decorative lens 3551 and a third right movable decorative lens 3552 between a closed position where they are in close contact with each other and an open position where they are separated from each other. It is formed to slide in the left-right direction.

  The back upper third decorative body unit 3550 has a third upper arm 3558 to which a third right movable decorative lens 3552 is attached above a third lower arm 3556 to which a third left movable decorative lens 3551 is attached. Each is attached so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. The third lower arm 3556 is provided with a rack gear 3556a extending leftward and rightward, and the third upper arm 3558 is provided with a rack gear 3558a extending leftward and rightward. A rack gear 3556a of the arm 3556 and a rack gear 3558a of the third upper arm 3558 are opposed to each other. Between the third lower arm 3556 and the third upper arm 3558, the transmission gear portion 3560a of the third opening / closing gear member 3560 meshes with the rack gear 3556a of the third lower arm 3556 and the rack gear 3558a of the third upper arm 3558, respectively. doing. Thus, when the third opening / closing gear member 3560 (transmission gear portion 3560a) is rotated, the third lower arm 3556 and the third upper arm 3558 can be slid in different directions in the left-right direction.

  Therefore, when the third opening / closing gear member 3560 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative member are connected via the third lower arm 3556 and the third upper arm 3558. When the third opening / closing gear member 3560 is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, the third lower arm 3556 and the third upper arm 3558 can be slid in the direction in which the lens 3552 approaches each other (the direction of the closed position). The third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 can be slid in the direction away from each other (the direction of the open position).

  In the back third decorative body unit 3550, the third opening / closing gear member 3560 has a drive gear portion 3560b that rotates integrally with the transmission gear portion 3560a, and a drive rack gear that extends vertically to mesh with the drive gear portion 3560b. A third opening / closing arm 3561 having 3561a is provided. Since the third opening / closing arm 3561 is slidably attached in the vertical direction, when the third opening / closing gear member 3560 rotates, the third opening / closing arm 3561 slides in the vertical direction. Since the third opening / closing arm 3561 is disposed on the left side of the third opening / closing gear member 3560 when viewed from the front, when the third opening / closing gear member 3560 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the third opening / closing arm 3561 slides downward. When the opening / closing gear member 3560 is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, it slides upward.

  In other words, when the third opening / closing arm 3561 is slid downward, the third opening / closing gear member 3560 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 Can be slid in the direction approaching each other (the direction of the closed position). On the other hand, when the third opening / closing arm 3561 is slid upward, the third opening / closing gear member 3560 rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 are mutually connected. It can be slid in the direction of separation (the direction of the open position).

  The back third decorative body unit 3550 has a third opening / closing spring 3563 that urges the third lower arm 3556 to move to the right, so that a force acts on the third opening / closing arm 3561. When not (in a normal state), the third lower arm 3556 is slid to the right by the biasing force of the third opening / closing spring 3563, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative The lens 3552 is in a closed position where the lenses 3552 are in contact with each other. In this closed position, the transmission gear portion 3560a of the third opening / closing gear member 3560 meshes with the vicinity of the left end of the rack gear 3556a in the third lower arm 3556, and the vicinity of the right end of the rack gear 3558a in the third upper arm 3558. Meshed. In this state, the drive gear portion 3560b of the third opening / closing gear member 3560 meshes with the vicinity of the upper end of the driving rack gear 3561a in the third opening / closing arm 3561 (see FIG. 166 (a)).

  When the third opening / closing arm 3561 is slid upward from the closed position so as to resist the biasing force of the third opening / closing spring 3563, the third opening / closing gear member 3560 rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, The third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 slide in directions away from each other via the three lower arms 3556 and the third upper arm 3558. When the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 reach the open position, the slide stops (see FIG. 166 (b)). The sliding stop at the open position is at the end of the slot in at least one of the slit 3556b of the third lower arm 3556, the slit 3558b of the third upper arm 3558, and the slit 3561c of the third opening / closing arm 3561. The lower arm presser 3557, the upper arm presser 3559, and the open / close arm presser 3562 are brought into contact with each other, so that sliding is regulated.

  Therefore, when the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 are in the closed position, the back third decorative body unit 3550 has the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552. Is positioned in front of the third fixed decorative lens 3553 so that the third fixed decorative lens 3553 is hardly visible from the front, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 are used for predetermined characters. You can see the decoration. On the other hand, when the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 are in the open position, the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 are separated from each other and the third left movable decorative lens 3552 is separated from them. The decoration of the fixed decorative lens 3553 becomes visible.

  The back third decorative body unit 3550 causes the LEDs on the back third decorative board 3554 to emit light appropriately, thereby providing the third left movable decorative lens 3551, the third right movable decorative lens 3552, and the third fixed decorative lens 3553. It can be appropriately decorated with light emission. Specifically, when the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 are in the closed position, the LED on the back third decorative substrate 3554 is caused to emit light via the third fixed decorative lens 3553. The third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 can be illuminated. On the other hand, when the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 are in the open position, if the LED on the back third decorative substrate 3554 is caused to emit light, the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 are movable. Only the third fixed decorative lens 3553 that faces the decorative lens 3552 can be illuminated and decorated.

[5-9f-4. Backside rotating base unit]
Next, the back upper rotation base unit 3570 of the back upper movable effect unit 3500 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 167 to 171. FIG. 167 (a) is a perspective view of the backside rotary base unit in the backside movable production unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 167 (b) is a perspective view of the backside rotary base unit as seen from the back. FIG. 168 is an exploded perspective view of the rear upper rotary base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 169 is an exploded perspective view of the rear upper rotary base unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 170 is an explanatory diagram showing the gear configuration of the backside rotation base unit from the front. FIG. 171 (a) is an explanatory view showing the state of the operating lever in the back rotating base unit from the front, and FIG. 171 (b) is an explanatory view showing the state of the operating lever in the non-operating position from the front.

  The back surface rotation base unit 3570 of the back surface movable effect unit 3500 is attached to the front surface of the movable side unit in the back surface lifting unit so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction, and is back on both ends in the longitudinal direction. The second decorative body unit 3530 and the back third decorative body unit 3550 are attached so as to be relatively rotatable with respect to the axis extending in the front-rear direction.

  The back upper rotation base unit 3570 extends in parallel to a plane orthogonal to the axis extending in the front-rear direction, and has a first hole 3571a penetrating in the front-rear direction in the center in the longitudinal direction, and front and rear in the vicinity of both ends in the longitudinal direction. A cylindrical tube protruding rearwardly from the outer periphery of the second hole 3571b, the third hole 3571c, and the first hole 3571a penetrating into the first hole 3571a and rotatably attached to the movable side unit 3610 of the back lifting unit 3600 A backside rotating base having 3571d is provided. The first hole 3571a (the inner diameter of the mounting cylinder portion 3571d) is formed in a size that allows the mounting shaft portion 3525c of the first mounting shaft member 3525 in the back first decorative body unit 3510 to pass therethrough. The second hole 3571b and the third hole 3571c are formed slightly smaller than the first hole 3571a and have the same size as each other. The second hole 3571b and the third hole 3571c are respectively formed near the right end and the left end in a front view when the back upper rotation base 3571 is in a horizontally extended state (at the horizontal position). In the following, description will be given in a state in which the back upper rotation base 3571 extends horizontally.

  The back upper rotation base unit 3570 includes a rotation base driven gear 3572 attached to the rear side of the back upper rotation base 3571 and extending in a semicircular arc concentric with the center of the first hole 3571a. The rotation base driven gear 3572 is formed in the shape of the upper half with respect to the circular ring with the central axis extending in the front-rear direction, and gear teeth are formed on the outer peripheral surface. The rotation base driven gear 3572 is attached so as to form a gap with the outer peripheral surface on the upper side of the attachment cylinder portion 3571d. The rotation base driven gear 3572 meshes with the rotation base driving gear 3614 in the movable side unit 3610 of the back lifting unit 3600 described later.

  The back upper rotation base unit 3570 is formed in an annular shaft portion 3573a that is rotatably inserted into the second hole 3571b of the back upper rotation base 3571 from the front, and concentric and fan-shaped from the front end of the shaft portion 3573a. And a second drive link gear member 3573 to which the rear surface of the second mounting base 3544 of the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 is mounted on the front surface, and a back upper rotation base 3571. And a pressing member 3574 having a diameter larger than that of the second hole 3571b. The pressing member 3574 is attached to the second driving link gear member 3573 from the rear side. The second drive link gear member 3573 has a second link gear portion 3573b having a larger diameter than the second hole 3571b. The second link gear portion 3573b has the same diameter and the same pitch as the central link gear 3611b of the movable side base 3611 in the movable side unit 3610 of the back lifting unit 3600. The second drive link gear member 3573 is restricted from moving back and forth with respect to the second hole 3571b by attaching a pressing member 3574 to the rear side of the shaft portion 3573a inserted into the second hole 3571b. Mounted rotatably in the state.

  Further, the rear upper rotation base unit 3570 is rotatably attached to the rear side of the rear upper rotation base 3571 on the left side of the second hole 3571b when viewed from the front, and the second link gear portion of the second drive link gear member 3573. The first link gear 3575 for a spur gear meshing with 3573b and the left side of the first first link gear 3575 for the second view are attached to the rear side of the rear upper rotation base 3571 so as to be rotatable. A spur gear-like second link gear 3576 for spur gear meshing with the first link gear 3575 for second, and rotatable to the rear side of the rear upper rotation base 3571 on the left side of the second second link gear 3576 for front view. And a spur gear-like second third link gear 3577 that meshes with the second second link gear 3576.

  The second link gear portion 3573 b of the second drive link gear member 3573 and the second first link gear 3575 are meshed with each other through an opening formed in the back upper rotation base 3571. The second third link gear 3577 has the left end side approaching the outer peripheral surface on the right side of the mounting cylinder portion 3571d in the back upper rotation base 3571. The second third link gear 3577 meshes with the central link gear 3611b of the movable base 3611 in the movable unit 3610 of the back lifting unit 3600 described later.

  The back upper rotation base unit 3570 is formed in an annular shaft portion 3578a that is rotatably inserted into the third hole 3571c of the rear upper rotation base 3571 from the front, and concentric and fan-shaped from the front end of the shaft portion 3578a. A third drive link gear member 3578 having a third link gear portion 3578b and a rear surface of the third attachment base 3564 of the back third decorative body unit 3550 attached to the front surface, and a back upper rotation base 3571. A pressing member 3579 that is attached to the rear side of the third drive link gear member 3578 from the rear side and that has a larger diameter than the third hole 3571c. The third drive link gear member 3578 has a third link gear portion 3578b having a larger diameter than the third hole 3571c. The third link gear portion 3578b has the same diameter and the same pitch as the central link gear 3611b of the movable side base 3611 in the movable side unit 3610 of the back lifting unit 3600. The third drive link gear member 3578 is restricted from moving back and forth with respect to the third hole 3571c by attaching a pressing member 3579 to the rear side of the shaft portion 3578a inserted into the third hole 3571c. Mounted rotatably in the state.

  Further, the back upper rotation base unit 3570 is rotatably attached to the front side of the back upper rotation base 3571 on the right side of the third hole 3571c in front view, and the third link gear portion 3578b of the third drive link gear member 3578. A third gear first link gear 3580 having a spur gear shape and a third gear first link gear 3580 that is rotatably attached to the rear side of the rear upper rotation base 3571 on the right side of the front view. A third gear second link gear 3581 in the form of a spur gear meshing with the first link gear 3580, and the rear second rotation base 3571 on the right side when viewed from the front of the third second link gear 3581. A spur gear-like third link gear 3582 that is attached and meshes with the third second link gear 3581.

  The third first link gear 3580 and the third second link gear 3581 mesh with each other through an opening formed in the back upper rotation base 3571. The third link gear 3582 for third has a right end side approaching the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the mounting cylinder portion 3571d in the back upper rotation base 3571. The third third link gear 3582 meshes with the central link gear 3611b of the movable side base 3611 in the movable side unit 3610 of the back lifting unit 3600 described later.

  The rear upper rotation base unit 3570 is attached to the lower rear side between the first hole 3571a and the second hole 3571b in the rear upper rotation base 3571, and the rotation shaft passes through the rear upper rotation base 3571 and moves forward. A protruding action lever drive motor 3583 (heat source), a spur gear-like action lever drive gear 3584 attached to the rotating shaft of the action lever drive motor 3583, and the action lever drive gear 3588 are meshed with each other and rotated on the back side. A spur gear-like working lever pinion gear 3585 that is rotatably attached to the front surface of the base 3571, and a working lever rack gear 3586a that meshes with the working lever pinion gear 3585 from above and extends to the left and right. An action lever 3586 attached to the front surface of the upper rotation base 3571 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction; The action lever 3586 is restricted from moving forward, and the action lever press 3587 attached to the front surface of the back upper rotation base 3571 and the action lever 3586 attached to the front surface of the back rotation base 3571 in the left-right direction. And an action lever movement detection sensor 3588 for detecting the movement of.

  The action lever 3586 is connected to the horizontally long rectangular main body part 3586b having the action lever rack gear 3586a formed on the lower side and the upper side of the main body part 3586b and extends to the left of the main body part 3586b in a strip shape. A slide mounting portion 3586c that is slidably mounted in the left and right direction on the upper front surface of the back upper rotation base 3571, and protrudes leftward from the left side of the main body portion 3586b. The lock piece 3586d that can be inserted into the horizontal lock hole 3525a and the vertical lock hole 3525b, the first extension part 3586e extending downward from the main body part 3586b, and the lock piece 3586d from the lower end of the first extension part 3586e. The first action portion 3586f protruding to the left and the right side of the upper side of the main body portion 3586b A second right extending portion 3586g connected to the vicinity and extending rightward, and a second right extending from the right end of the second right extending portion 3586g to a position slightly higher than the first action portion 3586f. A lower extending portion 3586h, a second action portion 3586i extending leftward from near the lower end of the left side of the second lower extending portion 3586h, and a lower end of the first extending portion 3586e from the left end of the slide mounting portion 3586c. A third extending portion 3586j extending downward to substantially the same height and a third action portion 3586k extending leftward from the vicinity of the lower end of the left side of the third extending portion 3586j are provided (FIG. 171). See).

  The rear upper rotation base unit 3570 includes a front gear cover 3589 that is attached to the front surface of the rear upper rotation base 3571 so as to cover the front surfaces of the action lever driving gear 3584 and the action lever pinion gear 3585, and the front surface of the rear upper rotation base 3571. Are attached to the lower side of the first hole 3571a and detect the rotational position of the backside rotation base unit 3570 and cover the front side of the backside rotation base unit rotation detection sensor 3590. And a substrate cover 3592 attached to the front surface of the back upper rotation base 3571 so as to cover the front surface of the back rotation base relay substrate 3591. And.

  The backside rotation base unit rotation detection sensor 3590 detects the rotation position of the backside rotation base unit 3570 by detecting the rotation detection piece 3611d of the movable side base 3611 in the movable side unit 3610 of the backside lifting unit 3600. It is. The back surface rotation base relay substrate 3591 includes a back surface rotation drive motor 3612 (heat source) of the movable side unit 3610 in the back surface lifting unit 3600, a back surface second decorative substrate 3534, a back surface third decorative substrate 3554, and an operating lever drive. The connection with the motor 3583, the action lever movement detection sensor 3588, and the backside rotation base unit rotation detection sensor 3590 is relayed.

  Furthermore, the back upper rotation base unit 3570 includes a back upper rotation base 3571 so as to cover the rear side of the second first link gear 3575, the second second link gear 3576, and the second third link gear 3577. It is attached to the rear side of the rear upper rotation base 3571 so as to cover the rear side of the rear right gear cover 3593 attached to the rear side, the second link gear 3581 for the third, and the third link gear 3582 for the third. A rear left gear cover 3594, and a motor cover 3595 attached to the rear side of the back upper rotation base 3571 so as to cover the lower side of the action lever drive motor 3583.

  Next, the movement of the back upper rotation base unit 3570 will be described. In this backside rotation base unit 3570, a mounting cylinder part 3571d protruding rearward of the backside rotation base 3571 is inserted into the shaft cylinder part 3611a of the movable side base 3611 in the movable side unit 3610 of the backside lifting unit 3600. As a result, the movable unit 3610 is attached so as to rotate about the axis extending in the front-rear direction on the front surface. In addition, the back upper rotation base unit 3570 is restricted from moving forward by the first mounting shaft member 3525 of the back first decorative body unit 3510 that is attached to the front surface of the movable side unit through the mounting cylinder portion 3571d from the front. Is done. The back upper rotation base unit 3570 is attached to the front surface of the second drive link gear member 3573 rotatably attached to the second hole 3571b of the back upper rotation base 3571, and the second attachment of the back upper second decorative body unit 3530. By attaching the rear surface of the base 3544, the back second decorative body unit 3530 can be attached to be rotatable relative to the back top rotation base 3571. Further, the back upper rotation base unit 3570 is provided on the front surface of the third drive link gear member 3578 rotatably attached to the third hole 3571c of the back upper rotation base 3571. By attaching the rear surface of the three attachment bases 3564, the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 can be attached to be rotatable relative to the back upper rotation base 3571.

  The backside rotation base unit 3570 is attached to the front surface of the movable side unit 3610 in the backside lifting unit 3600, and the rotation base driven gear 3572 is engaged with the rotation base drive gear 3614 of the movable side unit 3610. At the same time, the second third link gear 3577 and the third third link gear 3582 mesh with the central link gear 3611b of the movable side base 3611 of the movable side unit 3610 (see FIG. 182). When the rotation base drive gear 3614 is rotated by driving the back surface rotation drive motor 3612 of the movable side unit 3610, the back surface rotation base unit 3570 is rotated through the rotation base driven gear 3572 to the first hole 3571 a (attachment tube portion). 3571d) about the axis extending back and forth around the axis. The back upper rotation base unit 3570 has a horizontal position in which the longitudinal direction (the direction in which the first hole 3571a, the second hole 3571b, and the third hole 3571c are aligned) extends horizontally, and a vertical position that extends vertically. Can be rotated 90 degrees. In the horizontal position, the second hole 3571b is located to the right of the first hole 3571a, and in the vertical position, the second hole 3571b is located below the first hole 3571a. At this horizontal position, the back rotation base unit rotation detection sensor 3590 detects the rotation detection piece 3611d of the movable unit 3610 in the back lifting unit 3600.

  When the back upper rotation base unit 3570 rotates between the horizontal position and the vertical position around the first hole 3571a, the second third link gear 3577 and the third third link gear 3582 are moved to the movable side unit 3610. It moves so as to revolve around the central link gear 3611b. At this time, since the second third link gear 3577 and the third third link gear 3582 mesh with the central link gear 3611b, the second third link gear 3511b revolves around the central link gear 3611b. The gear 3577 and the third third link gear 3582 each rotate, and each rotate relative to the back upper rotation base 3571.

  When the second third link gear 3577 and the third third link gear 3582 are rotated, the rotation of the second third link gear 3577 is changed from the second third link gear 3577 to the second second link gear 3576 and the second. It is transmitted to the second link gear portion 3573b via the first link gear 3575, and the second drive link gear member 3573 rotates in the opposite direction to the second third link gear 3577, and the third third link. The gear 3582 is transmitted to the third link gear portion 3578b via the third second link gear 3581 and the third first link gear 3580, and the third drive link gear member 3578 is transferred to the third third link gear portion 3578b. It rotates in the opposite direction to the three link gear 3582.

  At this time, since the second link gear portion 3573b and the third link gear portion 3578b have the same diameter as the central link gear 3611b of the movable unit 3610, the rotation between the rear upper rotation base 3571 and the central link gear 3611b. The angle and the rotation angle of the back upper rotation base 3571, the second link gear portion 3573b, and the third link gear portion 3578b are the same. Since the central link gear 3611b of the movable unit 3610 is non-rotatably attached, when the back upper rotation base 3571 rotates, the second link gear portion 3573b and the third link gear portion 3578b are moved back and forth. The center link gear 3611b is revolved without rotating around the extended axis. That is, the back upper rotation base unit 3570 has the first hole 3571a (movable side) with the back top second decorative body unit 3530 and the back top third decorative body unit 3550 kept in a constant vertical direction. The center link gear 3611b) of the unit 3610 can be revolved around the center.

  When the action lever pinion gear 3585 is rotated counterclockwise as viewed from the front by the action lever drive motor 3583, the back upper rotation base unit 3570 can move the action lever 3586 to the left via the action lever rack gear 3586a. When the action lever pinion gear 3585 is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, the action lever 3586 can be moved to the right via the action lever rack gear 3586a.

  More specifically, the action lever 3586 is assembled to the back upper rotation base unit 3570, and the main body portion 3586b is located on the right side of the first hole 3571a in the back upper rotation base 3571 in a front view. The slide mounting portion 3586c of the action lever 3586 extends leftward to the vicinity of the third hole 3571c so as to straddle the upper and outer sides of the first hole 3571a. The first action portion 3586f is located below the first hole 3571a. The second right extending portion 3586g extends to the vicinity of the second hole 3571b above the second hole 3571b. The second lower extending portion 3586h extends so that the lower end is positioned below the second hole 3571b. The second working portion 3586i is located at a height near the lower portion of the second hole 3571b. The third extending portion 3586j has a lower end extending below the third hole 3571c. Accordingly, the third action portion 3586k is positioned below the third hole 3571c.

  As shown in FIG. 171 (a), the action lever 3586 is a lock piece 3586d that protrudes to the left from the left side of the main body part 3586b in a front view when moved to the left (state of action position). However, it protrudes into the first hole 3571a. In this state, the left end of the first action portion 3586f is located slightly to the left of the center of the first hole 3571a. The left end of the second action portion 3586i is located to the left of the second hole 3571b. Furthermore, the left end of the third working portion 3586k is located near the right end of the third hole 3571c. In this state, the lower end of the third extension 3586 j of the action lever 3586 is detected by the action lever movement detection sensor 3588.

  On the other hand, in the state where the action lever 3586 is moved to the rightmost (state of the non-action position), the lock piece 3586d and the first action part 3586f are located to the right of the first hole 3571a. The left end of the second action portion 3586i is located slightly to the left with respect to the center of the second hole 3571b. Furthermore, the left end of the third action portion 3586k is located to the right of the third hole 3571c. In this state, the lower end of the third extending portion 3586j of the action lever 3586 is separated from the action lever movement detection sensor 3588, and is in a non-detection state.

  As will be described in detail later, the action lever 3586 is moved to the action position, and the lock piece 3586d is inserted into the horizontal lock hole 3525a or the vertical lock hole 3525b in the first mounting shaft member 3525 of the back first decorative body unit 3510. By doing so, it is possible to restrict (lock) the rotation of the backside rotation base unit 3570 relative to the movable side unit 3610 of the backside lifting unit 3600. Therefore, when the operation lever 3586 is moved to the non-operation position, the lock piece 3586d comes out of the horizontal lock hole 3525a or the vertical lock hole 3525b, and is rotated backward on the movable side unit 3610 of the back lift unit 3600. The base unit 3570 can be rotated.

  The action lever 3586 has a first action part 3586f, a second action part 3586i, and a third action part 3586k with the left ends of the first opening and closing arm 3521 of the back first decorative body unit 3510 and the back top first. The second opening / closing arm 3541 of the second decorative body unit 3530 and the third opening / closing arm 3561 of the back third decorative body unit 3550 can be brought into contact with each other. Accordingly, when the operation lever 3586 is moved to the operation position when the back upper rotation base unit 3570 is rotated and positioned in the vertically extended state, the first opening / closing arm 3521, the second opening / closing arm 3541, and the third opening / closing arm are moved. The arm 3561 can be slid upward.

[5-9f-5. Back lifting unit]
Next, the back lift unit 3600 of the back top movable effect unit 3500 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 172 to 177. FIG. 172 (a) is a perspective view of the backside lift unit in the backside movable effect unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 172 (b) is a perspective view of the backside lift unit from the back. FIG. 173 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the back lifting unit as seen from the front after disassembling the movable lifting unit and the fixed unit, and FIG. FIG. FIG. 174 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the movable unit of the rear lifting unit as seen from the front and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the movable unit as seen from the back. FIG. 175 is an exploded perspective view of the fixed unit of the back lift unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 176 is an exploded perspective view of the fixed unit of the back lift unit as seen from the back. FIG. 177 (a) is an explanatory view showing the drive system when the movable unit of the back lifting unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 177 (b) is the drive when the movable unit of the back lifting unit is in the lowered position. It is explanatory drawing which shows a system | strain from the front.

  The back upper lift unit 3600 is attached between the back left movable effect unit 3300 and the back right movable effect unit 3400 above the opening 3010a on the front surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The back lifting unit 3600 includes a movable side unit 3610 to which the back first decorative body unit 3510 and the back top rotation base unit 3570 are attached on the front surface, and a fixed side unit to be lifted up and down and attached in the back box 3010. 3650.

  First, as shown in FIG. 174, the movable side unit 3610 of the back lifting unit 3600 is attached to a substantially rectangular movable side base 3611 extending left and right in the front view, and an upper right corner on the front surface of the movable side base 3611. A rear rotation drive motor 3612 whose rear rotation shaft penetrates the movable side base 3611 and protrudes rearward; a rotation drive gear 3613 attached to the rotation shaft of the rear upper rotation drive motor 3612; and a rotation drive gear 3613; A rotation base drive gear 3614 that meshes with the rotation base driven gear 3572 of the backside rotation base unit 3570 and is rotatably attached to the front surface of the movable side base 3611 is provided.

  The movable side unit 3610 includes a motor cover 3615 attached to the front surface of the movable side base 3611 so as to cover the backside rotation drive motor 3612 and a flat base cover 3616 attached to the rear side of the movable side base 3611. And a movable relay board 3617 attached to the front surface of the base cover 3616.

  The movable side base 3611 of the movable side unit 3610 is formed at the front end of the outer peripheral surface of the shaft tube portion 3611a and the shaft tube portion 3611a that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the lower part of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface, and rotates on the back side. A central link gear 3611b that meshes with the second third link gear 3577 and the third third link gear 3582 of the base unit 3570, and penetrates forward and backward at a position on the left side from the center in the left-right direction and extends to the left and right. A long-hole-shaped elevating slit 3611c and a rotation detection piece 3611d (attached to the lower side of the shaft tube portion 3611a on the front surface and detected by the back rotation base unit rotation detection sensor 3590 of the back rotation base unit 3570) FIG. 177).

  The shaft cylinder portion 3611a of the movable base 3611 has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the attachment cylinder portion 3571d of the back upper rotation base 3571 in the back rotation base unit 3570, and rotates the attachment cylinder portion 3571d. It can be inserted as possible. The central link gear 3611b has the same diameter as the second link gear portion 3573b of the second drive link gear member 3573 and the third link gear portion 3578b of the third drive link gear member 3578 in the rear upper rotation base unit 3570. At the same pitch.

  The movable-side relay board 3617 includes a back-side relay board 3659 of the fixed-side unit 3650, a back-side first decoration board 3514 of the back-side first decoration body unit 3510, and a back-side rotation base relay board 3591 of the back-side rotation base unit 3570. , And the backside rotation drive motor 3612 is relayed. The base cover 3616 is provided with lift slide rails 3656 of the fixed side unit 3650 at both left and right ends on the rear surface. At the rear side of the base cover 3616, the lower end of the elevating spring 3657 of the fixed side unit 3650 is attached.

  As shown in FIGS. 175 and 176 and the like, the fixed side unit 3650 of the back lifting unit 3600 includes a substantially rectangular fixed side base 3651 that is mounted in the back box 3010 and extends left and right in front view, and a fixed side base 3651. In the movable side unit 3610, a spur gear-like elevating gear portion 3652a that is rotatably mounted around an axis extending in the front-rear direction at the center of the front surface of the elevating portion protrudes forward from the vicinity of the outer periphery on the front surface of the elevating gear portion 3652a. Elevating rotator 3652 having elevating drive pin 3652b slidably inserted into elevating slit 3611c of movable base 3611, and detection piece 3652c extending outward from elevating gear portion 3652a, Lift drive gear 3653 meshing with lift gear portion 3652a of lift rotor 3652, and lift drive gear 653 is provided with a backing on elevation drive motor 3654 (a heat source) that is attached to the rear surface of which the fixed-side base 3651 attached to the rotating shaft.

  The fixed-side unit 3650 is attached to the front surface of the fixed-side base 3651, and is installed in the vicinity of both the left and right sides of the front surface of the fixed-side base 3651, and an elevation detection sensor 3655 that detects the detection piece 3652c of the rotary body 3652 for elevation. A base cover 3616 of the movable side unit 3610 is attached to a pair of elevating slide rails 3656 that can be expanded and contracted vertically, and upper ends at the left and right ends of the lower part of the front surface of the fixed side base 3651 outside the pair of elevating slide rails 3656. A pair of lifting springs 3657 attached to the movable side base 3611 of the movable side unit 3610 and urged so that the movable side base 3611 moves upward.

  Further, the fixed side unit 3650 penetrates back and forth and extends in a semicircular arc shape, and has an insertion slit 3658a through which the elevating drive pin 3652b of the elevating rotating body 3652 can pass, and a pair of elevating slide rails 3656, a fixed-side front cover 3658 attached to the front surface of the fixed-side base 3651 so as to cover the front surface of the ascending / descending rotary body 3652, and a rear surface of the fixed-side base 3651, and the movable-side unit 3610 The back side relay board 3659 connecting the movable side relay board 3617, the back up / down drive motor 3654 (heat source), the lift detection sensor 3655, and the bottom right relay board 3034, and the back side of the back top relay board 3659 And a substrate cover 3660 attached to the rear side of the fixed base 3651 so as to cover.

  Next, the operation of the back lifting unit 3600 will be described. The back lifting unit 3600 has a mounting cylinder portion 3571d of the back top rotation base 3571 in the back top rotation base unit 3570 rotatably inserted into the shaft tube portion 3611a of the movable side base 3611 in the movable side unit 3610. The rear end of the first attachment shaft member 3525 of the first upper decorative body unit 3510 is attached to the front surface of the movable base 3611 through the attachment cylinder portion 3571d of the upper rotation base 3571. Thereby, the movable unit 3610 attaches the back rotation base unit 3570 so as to be rotatable around a shaft extending in the front-rear direction around the shaft cylinder portion 3611a (first hole 3571a) in a state in which the backside rotation base unit 3570 is not movable forward. be able to.

  In a state in which the backside rotation base unit 3570 is attached to the movable side base 3611 of the movable side unit 3610, the rotation base drive gear 3614 is engaged with the rotation base driven gear 3572 of the backside rotation base unit 3570. Accordingly, when the rotation base drive gear 3614 is rotated via the rotation drive gear 3613 by driving the back surface rotation drive motor 3612, the back surface rotation base unit 3570 is rotated around the shaft tube portion 3611a (first hole 3571a). Can be made. The movable side unit 3610 can rotate the back upper rotation base unit 3570 by 90 degrees between a horizontally extending state and a vertically extending state. The rotation detection piece 3611d of the movable base 3611 in the movable unit 3610 is detected by the back rotation base unit rotation detection sensor 3590 of the back rotation base unit 3570 when the back rotation base unit 3570 is in the horizontal position. .

  In the assembled state, the back up / down lift unit 3600 is movable (movable up and down) only in the vertical direction with respect to the fixed side unit 3650 by the pair of lift slide rails 3656 of the fixed side unit 3650. . In the movable side unit 3610, the up / down drive pins 3652b of the up / down rotating body 3652 in the fixed side unit 3650 are inserted into the up / down slits 3611c of the movable side base 3611 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. Therefore, the position of the movable unit 3610 in the vertical direction is regulated by the height position of the lift drive pin 3652b in the lift rotating body 3652. The movable unit 3610 is biased so as to move upward by a pair of lifting springs 3657.

  As shown in FIG. 177 (a), the back lifting unit 3600 has a lifting drive pin 3652b that revolves by the rotation of the lifting rotary member 3652, directly above the rotation center of the lifting rotary member 3652, as shown in FIG. On the other hand, it is located slightly to the right, and the movable unit 3610 is in the up position where it is located on the uppermost side by the lift drive pin 3652b. In this state, the detection piece 3652c of the up-and-down rotating body 3652 is detected by the up-and-down detection sensor 3655. In this state, the elevating drive pin 3652b is in contact with the right end in the elevating slit 3611c extending to the left and right of the movable side base 3611 in the movable side unit 3610.

  Accordingly, the weight on the movable unit 3610 side acts on the lifting drive pin 3652b, so that the lifting drive pin 3652b does not rotate even when the lifting rotary body 3652 tries to rotate in the clockwise direction through the lifting drive pin 3652b. Since it is in contact with the right end of the elevating slit 3611c, the elevating rotating body 3652 can no longer rotate in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the movable unit 3610 is prevented from moving downward. ing. That is, the movable unit 3610 is locked at the raised position. Accordingly, the weight (load) from the movable unit 3610 side does not act on the back up / down drive motor 3654 via the lift gear portion 3652a and the lift drive gear 3653 of the lift rotating body 3652, and the back A load is not applied to the up / down drive motor 3654.

  When the up / down rotary body 3652 is rotated counterclockwise by the back up / down drive motor 3654 from this raised position, the up / down drive pin 3652b of the up / down rotary body 3652 moves to the left. The revolving drive pin 3652b slides to the left in the elevating slit 3611c, and the movable side unit 3610 receives the urging force of the pair of elevating springs 3657 through the elevating slit 3611c. It will move down. When the elevating drive pin 3652b that revolves when the elevating rotating body 3652 rotates counterclockwise revolves downward beyond the same height as the rotation center of the elevating rotating body 3652, the left / right direction of the elevating drive pin 3652b The direction of the movement changes and moves downward while moving to the right, and slides to the right in the lifting slit 3611c.

  When the elevating drive pin 3652b is positioned directly below the center of the elevating rotary body 3652, the rotation of the elevating rotary body 3652 stops, and at the same time, the downward movement of the movable side unit 3610 stops, and the movable side unit 3610 is the most. The lowered position is reached (see FIG. 177 (b)). In addition, when moving the movable unit 3610 from the lowered position to the raised position, the back lifting drive motor 3654 is driven in the opposite direction to rotate the lifting rotary body 3652 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. Thus, it can be returned to the raised position. At this time, the upward movement of the movable unit 3610 is assisted by the urging force of the pair of elevating springs 3657, and the load applied to the rear elevating drive motor 3654 is reduced.

  As described above, the back lifting unit 3600 has the back top first decorative body unit 3510, the back top second decorative body unit 3530, the back top third decorative body unit 3550, and the back top rotation via the movable side unit 3610. The base unit 3570 can be moved up and down (lifted) between the raised position and the lowered position.

[5-9f-6. Operation of the rear movable movable unit]
Next, the operation of the back movable production unit 3500 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 178 to 183. FIG. 178 is an explanatory diagram showing a drive system for lifting when the movable side unit of the back lifting unit is in the raised position in the back movable production unit, and FIG. 179 is the movable of the back lifting unit in the back movable production unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive system for raising / lowering when a side unit is a lowered position. FIG. 180 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the operating lever is in the operating position when the movable side unit is in the lowered position and the back rotating base unit is in the horizontal position, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of an operation lever in a non-operation position when a movable side unit is a lowered position and a back upper rotation base unit is a horizontal position. FIG. 182 is an explanatory diagram showing a drive system of the backside rotation base unit when the movable side unit is in the lowered position and the backside rotation base unit is in the horizontal position in the backside movable effect unit, and FIG. 183 is a backside movable effect unit. FIG. 184 is an explanatory view showing the drive system of the backside rotation base unit when the movable side unit is in the lowered position and the backside rotation base unit is rotated 45 degrees clockwise from the horizontal position. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive system of a back top rotation base unit when a movable side unit is a lowered position and a back top rotation base unit is a vertical position.

  FIG. 185 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the operating lever is in the non-operating position when the movable side unit is in the lowered position and the back rotating base unit is in the vertical position, and FIG. 186 is the back movable movable unit. FIG. 183 is a diagram illustrating a state in which the action lever regulates the rotation at the operating position when the movable side unit is in the lowered position and the back upper rotation base unit is in the vertical position. FIG. When the unit is in the lowered position and the back upper rotating base unit is in the vertical position, the operating lever acts on the back first decorative body unit, the back second decorative body unit, and the back third decorative body unit in the operating position. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 178 and the like, the backside movable production unit 3500 is in a lifted position where the movable side unit 3610 of the backside lifting unit 3600 is most lifted, and the backside rotation base unit. 3570 is in a horizontal position extending horizontally. In this state, the back top second decorative body unit 3530 and the back top third decorative body unit 3550 are arranged on the left and right sides with the back top first decorative body unit 3510 as the center. A first left movable decorative lens 3511 and a first right movable decorative lens 3512 of the back first decorative body unit 3510; a second left movable decorative lens 3531 and a second right movable decorative lens 3532 of the back second decorative body unit 3530; The third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 of the back third decorative body unit 3550 are biased by the first opening / closing spring 3523, the second opening / closing spring 3543, and the third opening / closing spring 3563, respectively. Thus, the closed positions are in contact with each other.

  In this normal state, as shown in FIG. 178, the raising / lowering driving pin 3652b of the fixed unit 3650 in the back raising / lowering unit 3600 is located slightly to the right with respect to the rotation center of the raising / lowering rotary body 3652. Thus, the movable base 3611 is in contact with the right end of the lifting slit 3611c extending to the left and right. As a result, the back-side first decorative body unit 3510, the back-top second decorative body unit 3530, the back-top third decorative body unit 3550, and the back-top drive pin 3652b via the lift slit 3611c of the movable side unit 3610. Even if the weight (load) of the rotation base unit 3570 and the movable side unit 3610 is applied, the elevating drive pin 3652b cannot revolve further in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the lower side of the movable side unit 3610. Movement is restricted and locked in the raised position.

  Accordingly, in a normal state, the loads on the back first decorative body unit 3510, the back second decorative body unit 3530, the back top third decorative body unit 3550, the back top rotating base unit 3570, and the movable side unit 3610 are reduced. The back up / down drive motor 3654 does not act, and no load is applied to the back up / down drive motor 3654. In a normal state, a detection piece 3652c of the up-and-down rotating body 3652 that revolves the up-and-down driving pin 3652b is detected by the up-and-down detection sensor 3655.

  From this normal state, when the back up / down drive motor 3654 is driven to cause the up / down drive pin 3652b of the up / down rotating body 3652 to revolve counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the up / down drive pin 3652b moves within the up / down slit 3611c. As the elevating drive pin 3652b is lowered, the movable side unit 3610 moves downward, and when the elevating drive pin 3652b reaches the lowest position, the revolving of the elevating drive pin 3652b stops. Thus, the movable unit 3610 is positioned at the lowered position (see FIG. 179).

  The back movable production unit 3500 moves the movable side unit 3610 of the back lifting unit 3600 to the lowered position, so that the back first decorative body unit 3510, the back second decorative body unit 3530, and the back top third decoration. The body unit 3550 and the back upper rotation base unit 3570 can be positioned in the upper part on the front side of the game board side effect display device 1600 (see FIG. 193).

  When moving the movable side unit 3610 of the back lifting unit 3600 between the raised position and the lowered position, the back movable movable unit 3500 moves the operating lever 3586 of the back rotating base unit 3570 to the operating position. Yes. In the state where the action lever 3586 is moved to the action position on the left side by the action of the action lever drive motor 3583, as shown in FIG. 180, the lock piece 3586d of the action lever 3586 has the back first decorative body unit 3510. The first mounting shaft member 3525 is inserted into the horizontal lock hole 3525a. As a result, the action lever 3586 cannot rotate around the first attachment shaft member 3525, so that the back-side rotation base unit 3570 to which the action lever 3586 is attached becomes the first attachment shaft member 3525 (movable side). The rotation is locked with respect to the shaft tube portion 3611a) of the unit 3610. That is, the back upper rotation base unit 3570 is in a state where the rotation is locked at the horizontal position.

  Since the lock piece 3586d of the action lever 3586 has a tapered tip, the horizontal lock hole of the first mounting shaft member 3525 can be used even if the back upper rotation base unit 3570 is slightly deviated from the horizontal position. By inserting it into 3525a, the back upper rotation base unit 3570 can be moved to the horizontal position to lock the rotation.

  In this action lever 3586, although not shown, the second right extending portion 3586 g of the action lever 3586 abuts on the receiving boss 3541 b of the second opening / closing arm 3541 in the back second decorative body unit 3530 from above. In addition, the third extending portion 3586j (the left end of the slide mounting portion 3586c) of the action lever 3586 is in contact with a predetermined position of the third upper arm 3558 in the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 from the right side. Accordingly, the action lever 3586 rotates the back upper rotation base 3571 around the second hole 3571b in the back second decorative body unit 3530 and the back upper rotation in the back third decorative body unit 3550. The base 3571 is prevented from rotating around the axis around the third hole 3571c. Accordingly, by moving (moving up and down) the movable side unit 3610 of the back lifting unit 3600 in the vertical direction, the back top second decorative body unit 3530, the back top third decorative body unit 3550, and the back top rotating base unit 3570 are moved. Even if the vibration is applied, the back second decorative body unit 3530, the back top third decorative body unit 3550, and the back top rotation base unit 3570 are not shaken by the action of the action lever 3586 located at the action position. ing.

  Through the movable side unit 3610 of the back lifting unit 3600, the back top first decorative body unit 3510, the back top second decorative body unit 3530, the back top third decorative body unit 3550, and the back top rotating base unit 3570 are When the action lever pinion gear 3585 is rotated clockwise by the action lever drive motor 3583 via the action lever drive gear 3584 while being in the lowered position, the action lever pinion gear 3585 is engaged. The action lever rack gear 3586a moves the action lever 3586 in the horizontal state to the right non-action position, and the lock piece 3586d is removed from the horizontal lock hole 3525a of the first mounting shaft member 3525 (see FIG. 181). Accordingly, the back upper rotation base unit 3570 rotates around the mounting shaft portion 3525c of the first mounting shaft member 3525 (the first hole 3571a of the back upper rotation base 3571 and the shaft tube portion 3611a of the movable side base 3611). Will be able to.

  In the back upper rotation base unit 3570 of the back upper movable effect unit 3500, as shown in FIG. 182, the rotation base driven gear 3572 meshes with the rotation base drive gear 3614 in the movable side unit 3610, and for the second use. The third link gear 3577 and the third third link gear 3582 mesh with the central link gear 3611b in the movable side base 3611 of the movable side unit 3610.

  With the back-side rotation base unit 3570 in the horizontal position and the action lever 3586 in the non-action position, the back-side rotation drive motor 3612 of the movable side unit 3610 is driven to turn the rotation base drive gear 3614 counterclockwise in front view. When rotated in the surrounding direction, the back upper rotation base unit 3570 is moved to the center link gear 3611b (first hole 3571a, mounting cylinder portion 3571d) via the rotation base driven gear 3572 meshing with the rotation base driving gear 3614. ) In the clockwise direction when viewed from the front (see FIG. 183). At this time, since the back first decorative body unit 3510 is attached to the front surface of the movable unit 3610 through the first hole 3571a which is the rotation center of the back top rotation base unit 3570, the back top rotation base. It does not rotate with unit 3570.

  When the back top rotation base unit 3570 rotates around the center link gear 3611b, the back top movable effect unit 3500 is engaged with the center link gear 3611b, the second third link gear 3577 and the third third gear. The link gear 3582 rotates while revolving around the central link gear 3611b, and rotates in the clockwise direction with respect to the back upper rotation base 3571, respectively. When the second third link gear 3577 and the third third link gear 3582 are rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the second link gear portion 3573b and the third link gear portion 3578b, and the second drive. The link gear member 3573 and the third drive link gear member 3578 rotate in the counterclockwise direction with respect to the back upper rotation base 3571, respectively. That is, when the back upper rotation base unit 3570 is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, the second rotation hole 3571b and the third hole 3571c at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the back upper rotation base 3571 are rotatably attached. The drive link gear member 3573 and the third drive link gear member 3578 revolve in the clockwise direction around the first hole 3571a, and the second drive link gear member 3573 and the third drive link gear member 3578. However, they rotate (rotate) in the counterclockwise direction in the second hole 3571b and the third hole 3571c of the back upper rotation base 3571, respectively.

  The second link gear portion 3573b of the second drive link gear member 3573 and the third link gear portion 3578b of the third drive link gear member 3578 have the same diameter as the central link gear 3611b of the movable unit 3610. The rotation angle between the back upper rotation base 3571 and the central link gear 3611b is the same as the rotation angle between the back upper rotation base 3571, the second link gear portion 3573b, and the third link gear portion 3578b. When the back upper rotation base 3571 is rotated around the central link gear 3611b, the second drive link gear member 3573 and the third drive link gear member 3578 are kept in the central link gear while maintaining their rotation directions constant. Revolves around 3611b (see FIGS. 183 and 184). Since the back top second decorative body unit 3530 and the back top third decorative body unit 3550 are respectively attached to the front surfaces of the second drive link gear member 3573 and the third drive link gear member 3578, the back top When the rotation base 3571 is rotated, the back top second decorative body unit 3530 and the back top third decorative body unit 3550 are kept around the back top first decorative body unit 3510 in a state where the top and bottom directions thereof are kept constant. It will revolve.

  In this back movable production unit 3500, when the back top rotation base unit 3570 is in the horizontal position, the back top second decorative body unit 3530 is disposed on the right side of the back top first decorative body unit 3510, and the back top Since the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 is arranged on the left side of the one decorative body unit 3510, when the back upper rotation base unit 3570 is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, The second decorative body unit 3530 and the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 are arranged on the lower side and the upper side of the back upper first decorative body unit 3510 with their upper and lower directions kept as they are (FIG. 184). See). Therefore, when the back upper rotation base unit 3570 is in the vertical position, the back top third decorative body unit 3550, the back top first decorative body unit 3510, and the back top second decorative body unit 3530 are arranged in order from the top. . In this state, the back first decorative body unit 3510, the back top second decorative body unit 3530, and the back top third decorative body unit 3550 are in the closed position, respectively, at the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a. It is located so as to be longitudinally cut over substantially the entire height in the frame of the accessory 2500 (see FIG. 195).

  In a state where the back upper rotation base unit 3570 is rotated from the horizontal position to the vertical position, as shown in FIG. 185, the action lever 3586 of the back upper rotation base unit 3570 located at the non-action position is In this state, 3586d is directed upward. In this state, when the action lever pinion gear 3585 is rotated counterclockwise by driving the action lever drive motor 3583 and the action lever 3586 is moved upward to move from the non-action position to the action position, The lock piece 3586d of the action lever 3586 is inserted into the vertical lock hole 3525b of the first mounting shaft member 3525 (see FIG. 186). As a result, the back upper rotation base unit 3570 is locked in the vertical position.

  When the action lever 3586 is moved from the non-action position to the action position in the state where the back rotation base unit 3570 is in the vertical position, the action lever 3586 moves upward along with the action lever 3586. The front ends (upper ends) of the first action portion 3586f, the second action portion 3586i, and the third action portion 3586k of 3586 are the receiving bosses of the first opening / closing arm 3521 in the back first decorative body unit 3510. 3521b, a receiving boss 3541b of the second opening / closing arm 3541 in the back second decorative body unit 3530, and a lower end of the third opening / closing arm 3561 in the back top third decorative body unit 3550, respectively, are contacted from below to perform the first opening / closing. The arm 3521, the second opening / closing arm 3541, and the third opening / closing arm 3561 are moved upward.

  When the first opening / closing arm 3521, the second opening / closing arm 3541, and the third opening / closing arm 3561 are moved upward, the first left movable decorative lens of the back first decorative body unit 3510 that has been in the closed position, respectively. 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 of the back second decorative body unit 3530, and the third left movable decorative lens of the back third decorative body unit 3550. The lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 are moved outward in the left-right direction so as to be separated from each other to be in the open position (see FIG. 183).

  Accordingly, the third fixed decorative lens 3553 facing from between the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 in the back third decorative body unit 3550, and the first in the back first decorative body unit 3510. The first fixed decorative lens 3513 facing between the left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512, and the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative in the back second decorative body unit 3530. The second fixed decorative lens 3533 facing the lens 3532 is in a state of being aligned in a straight line from top to bottom. In this state, the back top first decorative body unit 3510, the back top second decorative body unit 3530, and the back top third decorative body unit 3550 are in the open position, respectively, at the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a. The first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the third fixed decorative lens 3553 are arranged in the back front decorative unit 3100. They are lined up and down with substantially the same width so as to be continuous with the back front lower center lens 3131 (see FIG. 196).

  In addition, in order to return the back movable production unit 3500 to the normal state, it can be returned to the normal state by performing an operation reverse to the above.

  The back upper movable effect unit 3500 includes a first left movable decorative lens 3511 and a first right movable decorative lens 3512 of the back first decorative body unit 3510, a second left movable decorative lens 3531 of the back upper second decorative body unit 3530, and The second right movable decorative lens 3532 and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 of the back third decorative body unit 3550 are different from each other in the closed position. In the state where the decoration of the character can be shown and the back upper third decorative body unit 3550, the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, and the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 are arranged from left to right, three characters are displayed. However, the predetermined logo in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 will be written horizontally so that the player will recognize the concept of the pachinko machine 1 It can be. When the back upper rotation base unit 3570 is set to a vertical position, the back top third decorative body unit 3550, the back top first decorative body unit 3510, and the back top second decorative body unit 3530 are aligned from top to bottom. The logo according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 is in a vertically written state, and the player can recognize the logo even in this state.

  In this way, according to the back movable stage production unit 3500, the back top rotation base unit 3570 relative to the back top first decorative body unit 3510, the back top second decorative body unit 3530, and the back top third decorative body unit 3550. By the action lever 3586 that moves between the working position and the non-working position according to the general rotational position (horizontal position or vertical position), the back top first decorative body unit 3510, the back top second decorative body unit 3530, and the back Different effects can be shown to the player by giving the upper third decorative body unit 3550 different actions of the rotation lock (first action) and the movement to the open position (second action). Can be made difficult to get bored, and the player can be entertained, and the decrease in the interest of the player in the game can be suppressed.

[5-9g. Backward movable production unit]
Next, the back bottom movable effect unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 188 and the like. 188 (a) is a front view of the backside movable effect unit of the back unit, (b) is a back view of the backside movable effect unit, and (c) is a backside movable decorative body in the backside movable effect unit. It is a rear view which shows the state which raised the unit. Backward movable production unit 3700 is attached to the lower side of opening 3010a at the center in the left-right direction of the front surface of the rear wall in back box 3010. The back lower movable effect unit 3700 includes a back lower movable decorative body unit 3710 having a predetermined three-dimensional decoration, and a back surface that is attached to the back box 3010 and moves the back lower movable decorative body unit 3710 up and down. A lower drive unit 3750.

  The under back movable decorative body unit 3710 has a three-dimensional decoration in which a plurality of gates are arranged in the left and right under a roof extending in the left and right directions, and a portion of each gate penetrates back and forth. A main body 3711, a plurality of back lower door members 3712 attached so as to open and close in the form of double doors in front of each gate portion of the back lower decorative body main body 3711, and a back lower door member 3712 The rear lower decorative body base 3713 is attached to the rear side of the back lower decorative body main body 3711 and extends to the left and the rear, and is attached to the front lower portion of the lower lower decorative body base 3713 so as to be slidable in the horizontal direction. A lower opening / closing slider 3714 for hinge-rotating the lower back door member 3712 on the left side when viewed from the front in the pair of lower back door members 3712 and a front upper portion of the back lower decorative body base 3713 in the left-right direction Slidably the back under the door member 3712 viewed from the front right side in mounted and are pairwise multiple subplantar door member 3712 comprises a, opening and closing the slider 3715 on which the hinge rotates.

  The lower back movable decorative body unit 3710 is rotatably attached to the rear side of the lower back decorative body base 3713, and the open / close rotating body 3716 slides the lower open / close slider 3714 and the upper open / close slider 3715 in different directions in the left-right direction. One end side is attached to the upper end of the opening / closing rotating body 3716 and the other end side is attached to the lower back decorative body base 3713, and each back lower door member 3712 is connected via the lower open / close slider 3714 and the upper open / close slider 3715. A door closing spring 3717 for biasing the opening / closing rotating body 3716 so that the hinge rotates in the closing direction. The door closing spring 3717 urges the opening / closing rotating body 3716 to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the back.

  Further, the lower back movable decorative body unit 3710 is disposed on the rear side of the back lower decorative lens 3718 (see FIG. 198) attached to the rear side of the back lower decorative body main body 3711 and the rear lower decorative lens 3718. A backside decorative board 3719 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the cage, and a wiring cable 3701 that is attached to the rear side of the backside decorative body base 3713 and connects the backside decorative board 3719 and the backside bottom relay board 3757. And an upper wiring cover 3720 capable of guiding. The wiring cable 3701 is a flexible flat cable. The upper wiring cover 3720 is attached to the back and bottom decorative body base 3713 to form a downwardly opened space that can accommodate the wiring cable 3701. The upper wiring cover 3720 has a curved upper guiding portion 3720a for guiding the wiring cable 3701 on the right end side in the rear view.

  The lower back drive unit 3750 is attached to the lower side of the opening 3010a at the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010, penetrates the front left and right corners when viewed from the front and extends left and right, and shortens upward from the right end. A back lower drive base 3751 having a link slit 3751a extending, and a back surface attached to the front surface of the back lower drive base 3751 so as to be movable up and down and a back lower decorative unit 3710 attached to the upper part. A lower elevating base 3752, a pair of elevating arms 3753 that are rotatably mounted near the left and right ends of the front surface of the back lower drive base 3751, and move the back lower elevating base 3752 up and down, and the rear lower drive base 3751 A back lower drive motor 3754 attached to the side and a pair of lifts by transmitting the rotation of the back lower drive motor 3754 A plurality of transmission gears 3755 to rotate the over arm 3753 directions different from each other, and a.

  The lower back drive unit 3750 is slidably mounted at the lower end side in the link slit 3751a of the lower back drive base 3751, and the upper end side is rotatably attached to the opening / closing rotary body 3716 of the back lower decorative body unit 3710. A bar-shaped link arm 3756 is provided. The upper end of the link arm 3756 is rotatably attached to a portion on the right side as viewed from the rear side with respect to the rotation center of the opening / closing rotator 3716. Accordingly, when the link arm 3756 is pulled downward, the opening / closing rotating body 3716 rotates in the clockwise direction in the rear view against the urging force of the door closing spring 3717.

  Further, the lower back drive unit 3750 is attached to the rear side of the lower back drive base 3751 and relays the connection between the lower back decorative board 3719 and the back lower drive motor 3754 and the lower right relay board 3034. The lower side of the board 3757 and the lower back relay board 3757 on the rear side of the lower back drive base 3751 is attached and can guide a wiring cable 3701 connecting the back lower relay board 3757 and the back lower decoration board 3719. A wiring cover 3758. The lower wiring cover 3758 is attached to the back lower drive base 3751 to form an upwardly open space that can accommodate the wiring cable 3701. The lower wiring cover 3758 has a curved lower guiding portion 3758a for guiding the wiring cable 3701 on the right end side in the rear view.

  Next, the operation of the lower back movable effect unit 3700 will be described. Under the back movable movable effect unit 3700, the back bottom movable decorative body unit 3710 is in the most lowered state (see FIGS. 188 (a) and (b)). In this state, due to the biasing force of the door closing spring 3717, the plurality of back and lower door members 3712 are closed by the opening / closing rotating body 3716, the lower opening / closing slider 3714, and the upper opening / closing slider 3715, so A plurality of gate doors 3711 (back lower door member 3712) are closed. In this state, it is located below the upper end of the part forming the lower side of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 and is hardly visible from the front (see FIG. 133 and the like).

  In this normal state, when the lower back drive motor 3754 is driven to rotate the pair of lift arms 3753 so that the respective facing arms 3753 move upward, the back lower lift base 3752 moves upward, The back bottom movable decorative body unit 3710 attached to the elevating base 3752 is raised.

  At this time, since the upper end of the link arm 3756 is attached to the opening / closing rotating body 3716 of the lower back movable decorative body unit 3710, the link arm 3756 is lifted together with the lower back movable decorative body unit 3710, and the lower end side is the lower back. The inside of the link slit 3751a in the drive base 3751 slides upward (leftward in rear view).

  When the lower back movable decorative body unit 3710 rises and the lower end side of the link arm 3756 reaches the upper end of the link slit 3751a, the link arm 3756 can no longer move upward. The lower back movable effect unit 3700 can temporarily stop the movement of the lower back movable decorative body unit 3710 in the vertical direction at this position (first rising position). In this state, the plurality of gate portions of the lower back decorative body main body 3711 are positioned above the lower side (stage 2530) of the center accessory 2500, and the door is closed through the frame of the center accessory 2500. A plurality of gates in the state can be visually recognized (see FIG. 197).

  When the back lower movable decorative body unit 3710 is further raised in the state of the first lift position, the link arm 3756 is pulled downward relative to the back lower movable decorative body unit 3710 by the link slit 3751a, and the link The opening / closing rotator 3716 attached to the upper end side of the arm 3756 rotates in the clockwise direction in the rear view against the urging force of the door closing spring 3717 (see FIG. 188 (c)). When the opening / closing rotating body 3716 rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the back, the lower opening / closing slider 3714 and the upper opening / closing slider 3715 slide in a direction to open the plurality of back / bottom door members 3712, so The gate stops (the back lower door member 3712) is in an open state and the ascent is stopped. In the state where the back lower door member 3712 is opened (second raised position), the back lower decorative lens 3718 arranged on the rear side through the plurality of gates of the back lower decorative body main body 3711 can be visually recognized (FIG. 198). See). In this state, the open gate can be illuminated and decorated by emitting light from the LED on the back lower decorative substrate 3719.

  In this lower back movable effect unit 3700, a wiring cable 3701 that connects a lower back decorative board 3719 of the back lower movable decorative body unit 3710 and a back lower relay board 3757 of the back lower drive unit 3750 includes an upper wiring cover 3720. And a lower wiring cover 3758. The upper wiring cover 3720 has an upper guiding portion 3720a that is curved between the upper side and the right side in the back view, and the lower end of the right side extends downward. The lower wiring cover 3758 has a lower guiding portion 3758a that is curved between the lower side and the right side when viewed from the back, and the upper end of the right side extends upward.

  The wiring cable 3701 connecting the back lower decorative board 3719 and the back lower relay board 3757 extends to the right in the rear view at the left end in the rear view on the upper side of the upper wiring cover 3720 on the lower back movable decorative body unit 3710 side. On the back lower drive unit 3750 side, the lower wiring cover is attached so as to extend rightward in the rear view at the left end in the rear view on the lower side of the lower wiring cover. Thereby, in the state of the normal position in which the lower back movable decorative body unit 3710 is lowered most, the wiring cable 3701 is curved and extends along the upper guiding portion 3720a and the lower guiding portion 3758a, and is not extremely bent. The back bottom decorative board 3719 and the back bottom relay board 3757 are connected well (see FIG. 188 (b)).

  On the other hand, in the state where the lower back movable decorative body unit 3710 is raised, as shown in FIG. 188 (c), the wiring cable 3701 includes the upper side of the upper wiring cover 3720, the right side in the rear view (upper guiding portion 3720 a), and the lower wiring. The back lower decoration board 3719 and the back lower relay board 3757 are connected in a state of being separated from the lower side of the cover 3758 and the right side in the back view (lower guide part 3758a). When the back lower movable decorative body unit 3710 is lowered from the raised state, it is smoothly guided without being bent by being guided to the upper guiding portion 3720a and the lower guiding portion 3758a, and the upper wiring cover 3720 and the lower wiring cover. 3758. Therefore, even if the backside movable decorative body unit 3710 is repeatedly raised and lowered, the backside movable effect production unit 3700 is extremely different even if the backside movable decorative body unit 3710 is repeatedly raised and lowered. Bending can be prevented, and disconnection of the wiring cable 3701 can be prevented.

[5-10. Production on the game board]
Next, main movable effects in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 189 to 198. FIG. 189 is a front view of the game board showing the back middle left decorative body and the back middle right decorative body of the back middle movable effect unit in the back unit moved to the appearance position on the center side. FIG. 190 shows the rear left movable effect unit and the rear right movable effect unit in the rear unit moved to the appearance position closer to the center, and the respective first decorative surfaces are directed forward. FIG. 191 is a front view of the game board shown in the state shown in FIG. 190. The second decorative surface is obtained by rotating the back left decorative body and the back right decorative body of the left movable effect unit and the back right movable effect unit from the state of FIG. FIG. 192 is a front view of the game board with the front facing forward, and FIG. 192 is a diagram illustrating a state in which the left and right decorative bodies of the left movable effect unit and the right and left movable effect units are rotated from the state of FIG. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the third decorative surface is directed forward.

  FIG. 193 shows the first left movable decorative lens and the first right movable decorative lens of the back first decorative body unit, the second left movable decorative lens of the back second decorative body unit, and the first After the two right movable decorative lenses and the third left movable decorative lens and the third right movable decorative lens of the third decorative body unit on the back are respectively in the closed position, the first decorative body unit on the back, It is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the second decorative body unit and the back upper third decorative body unit are moved to the lowered position while keeping the back upper rotation base unit in a horizontal position, FIG. 194 shows that the back top first decorative body unit, the back top second decorative body unit, and the back top third decorative body unit are rotated 45 degrees clockwise from the state of FIG. 193 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. Is diagonally FIG. 195 is a front view of the game board shown in the state of FIG. 194. From the state of FIG. 194, the back upper rotating base unit is further rotated by 45 degrees in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, so FIG. 196 is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the unit, the back second decorative body unit, and the back top third decorative body unit are vertically aligned, and FIG. 196 shows the state of the back top first decorative body unit from the state of FIG. The first left movable decorative lens and the first right movable decorative lens, the second left movable decorative lens and the second right movable decorative lens of the second decorative body unit on the back, and the third left movable decorative lens of the third decorative body unit on the back. The front view of the game board showing the first fixed decorative lens, the second fixed decorative lens, and the third fixed decorative lens in a state where the lens and the third right movable decorative lens are in the open position, respectively. is there.

  FIG. 197 is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the backside movable decorative body unit of the backside movable effect production unit in the back unit is moved to the first ascending position, and FIG. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state where the body unit was further raised and moved to the second raised position.

  In the normal state, the game board 5 is displayed on the display screen of the game board side effect display device 1600 attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000 through the frame of the center accessory 2500 as shown in FIGS. Can be seen well from the player side (front). In the back middle movable effect unit 3200, the left and right back center left decorative bodies 3210 and the back center right decorative body 3220 are located at the retracted positions farthest from each other behind the back left decorative body 3310 and the back right decorative body 3410 in the retracted position. The back center left decorative body 3210 and the back center right decorative body 3220 are slightly visible through the frame of the center accessory 2500. In the back left movable effect unit 3300, the back left decorative body 3310 is in the retracted position moved to the leftmost side, and is located behind the back front left decorative unit 3120 in the back front decorative unit 3100 and almost from the front. can not see. In the back right movable effect unit 3400, the back right decorative body 3410 is in the retracted position moved to the rightmost side, and a part of the center right object 2500 can be seen through the frame of the center accessory 2500. Yes.

  In the normal state, in the backside movable production unit 3500, the movable side unit 3610 of the backside lifting unit 3600 is in the lifted position in the highest position, and the backside rotation base unit 3570 is in a horizontal position where it extends horizontally. It is in the state of. With the back first decorative body unit 3510 in the center, the back second decorative body unit 3530 is arranged on the right side, and the back top third decorative body unit 3550 is arranged on the left side. A first left movable decorative lens 3511 and a first right movable decorative lens 3512 of the back first decorative body unit 3510; a second left movable decorative lens 3531 and a second right movable decorative lens 3532 of the back second decorative body unit 3530; Further, the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 of the back third decorative body unit 3550 are respectively biased by the first open / close spring 3523, the second open / close spring 3543, and the third open / close spring 3563. The closed positions are in contact with each other, and a predetermined character decoration is formed in each. The back upper movable effect unit 3500 has a rear upper third decorative body unit 3550, a back upper first decorative body unit 3510, and a back upper second decorative body unit 3530 arranged in a line from left to right. A predetermined logo in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 can be shown in horizontal writing with two letters, and the predetermined logo is displayed above the upper part of the game board side effect display device 1600 and in the upper part of the center object 2500 frame. It is visible from the player side (front).

  The game board 5 has a front front decoration unit of the back unit 3000 according to the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result that are drawn when the game balls are received at the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. 3100, back middle movable effect unit 3200, back left movable effect unit 3300, back right movable effect unit 3400, back upper movable effect unit 3500, and lower back movable effect unit 3700 provide predetermined effects (movable effects and light emission effects). Do.

  Specifically, for example, as an effect using the back middle movable effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000, the back center left decoration body 3210 and the back center right decoration that are separated from each other by driving of the back center drive motor 3254 are left and right. The body 3220 is moved so as to approach each other, and is moved to a substantially central appearance position (see FIG. 189). As a result, the back center left decorative body 3210 and the back center right decorative body 3220 are positioned substantially at the center of the front side of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the back center left decorative body 3210 and the back center right decorative body The decoration with 3220 is combined. In the state of the appearance position, the back center left decorative body 3210 and the back center right decorative body 3220 block the effect image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and attract the player's attention strongly. In addition to forming a single large decoration (decoration of a cherry blossom petal) by uniting, it makes the player think that there may be something good, and expects the game Can be raised.

  As an effect using the back left movable effect unit 3300 and the back right movable effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000, for example, the back left movement drive motor 3352 and the back right movement drive of the back left movement drive unit 3350 and the back right movement drive unit 3450 By driving the motor 3452, the back left decorative body 3310 and the back right decorative body 3410 are moved to the appearance position on the center side in the left-right direction via the back left rotational drive unit 3330 and the back right rotational drive unit 3430. As a result, the back left decorative body 3310 and the back right decorative body 3410 are in a state of a central position close to the left side and the right side in the frame-shaped center accessory 2500. In other words, it is located near the left and right ends of the front surface of the game board side effect display device 1600 within the frame of the center accessory 2500 (see FIGS. 190 to 192).

  As a result, the back left decorative body 3310 and the back right decorative body 3410 can be seen to surprise the player and attract the player's interest to the back left decorative body 3310 and the back right decorative body 3410. Can be made. At this time, the LED on the back left decorative board 3334 and the back right decorative board 3434 is made to emit light, whereby the back left decorative body 3310 and the back right decorative body 3410 can be light-decorated, and the player's interest is further attracted. Can be made. In this state, since the display screen of the game board side effect display device 1600 can be seen between the back left decorative body 3310 and the back right decorative body 3410, it is possible to entertain the effect collaborated with the effect image.

  With the back left decorative body 3310 and the back right decorative body 3410 moved to the appearance position, the back left rotational drive motor (heat source) and the back right rotational drive (not shown) of the back left rotational drive unit 3330 and the back right rotational drive unit 3430 are not shown. A player can be entertained by rotating the back left decorative body 3310 and the back right decorative body 3410 around an axis extending vertically by a motor (heat source). When the rotated back left decorative body 3310 and back right decorative body 3410 are stopped, the first decorative surfaces 3311 and 3411 of the back left decorative body 3310 and the back right decorative body 3410 are stopped so as to face forward ( 190), the second decorative surfaces 3312 and 3412 are stopped so as to face forward (see FIG. 191), or the third decorative surfaces 3313 and 3413 are stopped so as to face forward (see FIG. 192). )can do. Since the decoration changes depending on the direction in which the rotation of the back left decoration body 3310 and the back right decoration body 3410 is stopped, it is possible to entertain the player with a decoration that changes, and the back left decoration body 3310 and the back right decoration with a desired decoration. Whether the body 3410 stops or not can be throbbing, and the player's interest can be enhanced.

  In addition, since the back left movable effect unit 3300 and the back right movable effect unit 3400 can be independently moved, only one of them may be moved, or the back left decorative body 3310 and the back right decorative body 3400 may be moved. When the rotation of the decorative body 3410 is stopped, the decorative surface facing forward may be different. As a result, more various effects can be presented to the player, and the player can be made less tired.

  As an effect using the back movable production unit 3500 of the back unit 3000, for example, in the normal position, the back rotation base unit 3570 is set to the horizontal position, and the action lever 3586 is set to the action position. When the up / down drive motor 3654 revolves the up / down drive pin 3652b in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, the movable side unit 3610 moves downward along with the revolution of the up / down drive pin 3652b and is attached to the movable side unit 3610. The back first decorative body unit 3510, the back second decorative body unit 3530, and the back third decorative body unit 3550 are lowered. When the raising / lowering drive pin 3652b reaches the lowest position and the revolution stops, the back-side first decorative body unit 3510, the back-top second decorative body unit 3530, and the back-top third decoration are connected via the movable side unit 3610. The body unit 3550 is positioned in the lowered position side by side (horizontal) (see FIG. 193).

  In this state, the back first decorative body unit 3510, the back top second decorative body unit 3530, and the back top third decorative body unit 3550 are positioned upward from the vertical center in the frame of the center accessory 2500. In this state, the upper half of the front surface of the game board side effect display device 1600 is covered. Thus, a predetermined logo formed by the back first decorative body unit 3510, the back second decorative body unit 3530, and the back top third decorative body unit 3550 is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. Because it descends to the center so as to block a part of the displayed effect image, it can make the player think that there is something good and increase the player's expectation of the game Can be made.

  In the state of FIG. 193, when the action lever pinion gear 3585 is rotated clockwise by the action lever drive motor 3583 to move the action lever 3586 from the action position to the non-action position on the right side, The lock piece 3586d inserted into the horizontal lock hole 3525a of the shaft member 3525 is removed from the horizontal lock hole 3525a, and the rotation lock of the back upper rotation base unit 3570 is released.

  When the rotation base drive gear 3614 is rotated counterclockwise by the back surface rotation drive motor 3612 of the movable side unit 3610 in a state where the rotation lock of the back rotation base unit 3570 by the action lever 3586 is released, the rotation rotates. Through the rotating base driven gear 3572 meshing with the base driving gear 3614, the back upper rotating base unit 3570 rotates in the clockwise direction around the center link gear 3611b. At this time, since the back first decorative body unit 3510 is attached to the front surface of the movable unit 3610 through the first hole 3571a which is the rotation center of the back top rotation base unit 3570, the back top rotation base. It does not rotate with unit 3570.

  When the back upper rotation base unit 3570 rotates around the central link gear 3611b, the second third link gear 3577 and the third third link gear 3582 meshing with the central link gear 3611b become the central link gear. 3611b revolves while revolving, and the rotation is transmitted to the second drive link gear member 3573 and the third drive link gear member 3578, and the second drive link gear member 3573 and the third drive link gear. The members 3578 rotate in the counterclockwise direction with respect to the back upper rotation base 3571, respectively. Therefore, when the back upper rotation base 3571 is rotated, the back top second decorative body unit 3530 and the back top third decorative body unit 3550 are maintained in a state in which the top and bottom directions are kept constant. Revolve around the body unit 3510 (see FIGS. 194 and 195).

  The rotation of the back-side rotation base unit 3570 causes the back-side second decorative body unit 3530 and the back-side third decorative body unit 3550 to revolve around the back-side first decorative body unit 3510, so Since the upper and lower orientations of the decorative body unit 3530 and the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 are maintained, it is possible to allow the player to fully recognize a predetermined logo with three decorative characters, so You can entertain the movement of changing the logo to a vertical logo.

  When the back upper rotation base unit 3570 rotates 90 degrees in the clockwise direction from the horizontal position, the vertical rotation position is reached and the rotation stops. In this state, the back top third decorative body unit 3550, the back top first decorative body unit 3510, and the back top second decorative body unit 3530 are arranged in order from top to bottom (see FIG. 195). Accordingly, the logo formed by the back first decorative body unit 3510, the back top second decorative body unit 3530, and the back top third decorative body unit 3550 is displayed at the center in the frame of the center accessory 2500. Since it seems to cut across the entire height, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player and enhance the interest of the player.

  The back upper rotation base unit 3570 is rotated to a vertical position, and the back top third decorative body unit 3550, the back top first decorative body unit 3510, and the back top second decorative body unit 3530 are arranged in the vertical direction. When the action lever pinion gear 3585 is rotated counterclockwise by the action lever drive motor 3583 and the action lever 3586 at the non-action position is moved upward to the action position, the action lever 3586 is locked. The piece 3586d is inserted into the vertical lock hole 3525b of the first mounting shaft member 3525, and the back upper rotation base unit 3570 is locked in the vertical position.

  When the action lever 3586 moves (rises) from the non-action position to the action position, the tips of the first action part 3586f, the second action part 3586i, and the third action part 3586k of the action lever 3586, respectively. (Upper end) is a receiving boss 3521b of the first opening / closing arm 3521 in the back first decorative body unit 3510, a receiving boss 3541b of the second opening / closing arm 3541 in the back top second decorative body unit 3530, and the back top third decorative body. The first opening / closing arm 3521, the second opening / closing arm 3541, and the third opening / closing arm 3561 are respectively moved upward by contacting the lower ends of the third opening / closing arms 3561 of the unit 3550 from below. Accordingly, the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 of the back first decorative body unit 3510 that have been in the closed position, and the second left movable decorative lens of the back second decorative body unit 3530. 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 of the back third decorative body unit 3550 move outward in the left-right direction so as to be separated from each other. Thus, the open position is obtained (see FIG. 196).

  As a result, the third fixed decorative lens 3553 facing from between the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 and the first left movable decorative so as to cross the left and right center in the game area 5a. A first fixed decorative lens 3513 facing from between the lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512, and a second fixed decorative lens facing from between the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 3533 and the back front lower center lens 3131 of the back front decoration unit 3100 are aligned in a straight line from top to bottom, giving a strong impact to the player and attracting the player's attention strongly. Can be made.

  In this state, the LEDs mounted on the back third decorative board 3554, the back first decorative board 3514, the back second decorative board 3534, and the back front bottom decorative board 3134 are caused to emit light appropriately, and the third By sequentially decorating the fixed decorative lens 3553, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the lower front lower center lens 3131, the player's line of sight can be guided upward or downward. , Can entertain the player. The third fixed decorative lens 3553, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the back front lower center lens 3131 have substantially the same width as the door frame side effect display device 460 in the effect decoration rotating body unit 530. Since the third fixed decorative lens 3553, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, the back front lower center lens 3131, and the door frame side effect display device 460, the left and right of the pachinko machine 1 are formed. It is possible to show the player a light emission effect that crosses the center of the direction (see FIG. 200).

  As an effect using the back lower movable effect unit 3700 of the back unit 3000, for example, when the back lower movable decorative body unit 3710 is moved from the normal state to the first lift position by the back lower drive motor 3754, the back lower decorative body. The main body 3711 is positioned above the stage 2530 in the center accessory 2500 and can be seen through the frame of the center accessory 2500. As a result, the back lower decorative body main body 3711 can be seen, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted (see FIG. 197). In the first lift position, the plurality of gates of the back lower decorative body main body 3711 are closed by the plurality of back lower door members 3712.

  When the lower back movable decorative body unit 3710 is slightly raised from the first lift position to the second lift position, the plurality of back lower door members 3712 are hinged to rotate and the plurality of gates of the back lower decorative body main body 3711 are opened. (See FIG. 198). By opening the gate (back lower door member 3712), it is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and it is possible to increase the expectation for the game. In this state, if the LED of the back bottom decoration board 3719 is made to emit light to decorate the opened gate, the player can be convinced that the chance has arrived, and the player's interest can be further enhanced. .

  Thus, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the back front decoration unit 3100, the back middle movable effect unit 3200, the back left movable effect unit 3300, the back right movable effect unit 3400, the back upper movable effect unit 3500, and the lower back movable It is possible to perform a light emission effect, a movable effect, a display effect, and the like by appropriately using the effect unit 3700, etc., and the player can be entertained by various effects, and the player's interest in the game is reduced. Can be suppressed.

[5-11. Different embodiments in game board]
Next, an embodiment different from the above in the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 199 shows an example of another embodiment of the game board in which an LED for lighting and decorating a stage in the center unit and a lower front center lens of the front front decoration unit is provided on the back movable stage production unit of the back unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows. In the embodiment of FIG. 199, the back second decorative board 3534 of the back top second decorative body unit 3530 in the back top movable effect unit 3500 is provided with a plurality of lower LEDs 3534a that can emit light downward. is there.

  Accordingly, by rotating the back upper rotation base unit 3570 to the vertical position, the lower end of the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 is positioned at the center of the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 (near the chance entrance 2535) or the back front decoration. The upper end of the back front lower center lens 3131 of the unit 3100 is close to the upper end, and in this state, the lower LED 3534a emits light, so that the center of the stage 2530 and the upper part of the back front lower center lens 3131 can be illuminated. . Therefore, even in a portion where a decorative board with LEDs can not be arranged behind, light can be supplied from the outside (here, the upper side) to decorate the light, which can attract the player's attention strongly. A light emission effect can be performed.

[5-12. Production by door frame and game board]
Next, effects using the door frame 3 and the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 200 shows the back movable base unit in the back unit of the game board in the vertical position, and the first left movable decorative lens and the first right movable of the first decorative body unit on the back. A decorative lens, a second left movable decorative lens and a second right movable decorative lens of the back second decorative body unit, and a third left movable decorative lens and a third right movable decorative lens of the back third decorative body unit, respectively. It is a front view of the pachinko machine shown in a state where each of the first fixed decorative lens, the second fixed decorative lens, and the third fixed decorative lens is visible as an open position state. FIG. 201 shows that the third effect decoration rotator unit 530B is attached to the dish unit 320 instead of the effect decoration rotator unit 530, the first decoration surface portion of the decoration rotator unit is directed forward, and the game board is It is a front view of the pachinko machine shown in a normal state. 202 is a state in which the second decorative surface portion of the decorative rotating body unit is directed forward in FIG. 201, and the back rotating base unit is set to the vertical position in the back movable movable unit in the back unit of the game board. A first left movable decorative lens and a first right movable decorative lens of the back first decorative body unit, a second left movable decorative lens and a second right movable decorative lens of the back second decorative body unit, and The first fixed decorative lens, the second fixed decorative lens, and the third fixed decorative lens in the open position of the third left movable decorative lens and the third right movable decorative lens of the back third decorative body unit, respectively. It is a front view of the pachinko machine shown in the state which enabled visual recognition.

  First, an effect by the pachinko machine 1 in which the effect decoration rotating body unit 530 provided with the door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 will be described. As an effect by the door frame 3 and the game board 5, for example, there is an effect using an effect decoration rotating body unit 530 in the door frame 3 and a back movable effect unit 3500 of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5. Specifically, in the back movable production unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 of the game board 5, the back rotation base unit 3570 is moved to the vertical position with the movable unit 3610 of the back lifting unit 3600 moved to the lowered position. And the action lever 3586 is moved from the non-action position to the action position, and the first left movable decorative lens and the first right movable decorative lens of the back first decorative body unit, and the back second decorative body unit. The second left movable decorative lens and the second right movable decorative lens, and the third left movable decorative lens and the third right movable decorative lens of the third decorative body unit on the back are respectively set in the open position.

  In this state, as shown in FIG. 200, the third fixed decorative lens 3553, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the back formed at substantially the same width in the center in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 1. The front lower center lens 3131 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are arranged from top to bottom, which can surprise the player and give a strong impact. In this state, the third fixed decorative lens 3553 and the first fixed decorative lens 3513 are formed by the back third decorative substrate 3554, the back first decorative substrate 3514, the back second decorative substrate 3534, and the back front lower decorative substrate 3134. The second fixed decorative lens 3533 and the back front lower center lens 3131 are sequentially decorated with light emission from above, so that the player's line of sight can be displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 of the effect decoration rotating body unit 530 in the door frame 3. And can entertain the effect image displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 and operate the operation button 410 of the effect decoration rotating body unit 530 to ensure the player participation type effect. Can be entertained.

  In addition, with respect to said embodiment, it replaces with said production | presentation decoration rotary body unit 530 to the dish unit 320, and attaches 2nd production decoration rotary body unit 530A provided with the door frame side 2nd production display apparatus 460A, An effect similar to the above may be performed with the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A facing forward. Also by this, the same effect as the above can be obtained.

  Next, an effect by the pachinko machine 1 in which the third effect decoration rotary body unit 530B including the decoration rotary body unit 530 is attached to the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 will be described. In the pachinko machine 1, as shown in FIG. 201, in the normal state, the third effect decoration rotating body unit 530B attached to the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 passes through the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410. The first decorative surface portion 532 of the decorative rotating body unit 530 disposed on the rear side (inside) is visible from the player side (front side). As for the 1st decoration surface part 532 which can be rotated around the 2nd axis line CL2 orthogonal to the 1st axis line CL1 extended horizontally, the logo decoration part 532a with the directionality of the center has the right direction.

  Above the third effect decoration rotating body unit 530B (dish unit 320), in the game area 5a of the game board 5 that can be seen through the through hole 111 of the door frame 3, the rear side of the back unit 3000 passes through the frame of the center accessory 2500. The display screen of the game board side effect display device 1600 attached to the player can be viewed well from the player side (front). In the back middle movable effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000, the left and right back center left decorative bodies 3210 and the back center right decorative body 3220 are in the retracted positions farthest apart from each other, and pass through the frame of the center accessory 2500. Some are visible. The back left decorative body 3310 of the back left movable effect unit 3300 is in a retracted position behind the back front left decoration unit 3120 of the back front decoration unit 3100 and is hardly visible from the front. The back right decoration body 3410 of the back right movable effect unit 3400 is in the retracted position, and a part of the center right object 2500 is visible through the inside of the frame.

  In the back movable production unit 3500, the movable side unit 3610 of the back lifting unit 3600 is in the raised position, and the back rotation base unit 3570 is in the horizontal position. With the body unit 3510 at the center, the back second decorative body unit 3530 is arranged on the right side, and the back top third decorative body unit 3550 is arranged on the left side. A first left movable decorative lens 3511 and a first right movable decorative lens 3512 of the back first decorative body unit 3510; a second left movable decorative lens 3531 and a second right movable decorative lens 3532 of the back second decorative body unit 3530; Further, the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 of the back third decorative body unit 3550 are in a closed position where they are in contact with each other. (Illustration is omitted). Therefore, a predetermined logo in which three characters are arranged on the left and right is visible from the player side (front) in the upper part of the frame of the center accessory 2500.

  From the state of FIG. 201, for example, in the back movable production unit 3500, the back rotation base unit 3570 is rotated to the vertical position with the movable side unit 3610 of the back lifting unit 3600 moved to the lowered position. The operating lever 3586 is moved from the non-operating position to the operating position, and the first left movable decorative lens and the first right movable decorative lens of the back first decorative body unit and the second left movable decorative unit of the back second decorative body unit are moved. The decorative lens, the second right movable decorative lens, and the third left movable decorative lens and the third right movable decorative lens of the third decorative body unit on the back are respectively set in the open position.

  In this state, the third fixed decorative lens 3553, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the back front lower central lens 3131 formed in substantially the same width at the center in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 1 , It will be in a state of being lined from top to bottom, which can surprise the player and give a strong impact. In this state, the third fixed decorative lens 3553 and the first fixed decorative lens 3513 are formed by the back third decorative substrate 3554, the back first decorative substrate 3514, the back second decorative substrate 3534, and the back front lower decorative substrate 3134. The player's line of sight can be guided to the third effect decoration rotating body unit 530B in the door frame 3 by sequentially decorating the second fixed decoration lens 3533 and the lower front lower center lens 3131 with light emission from above. . When the light emitting decoration from above reaches the third effect decoration rotating body unit 530B, the decoration rotating body unit 530 in the operation button 410 is light-emitted by the first decoration surface portion decoration substrate 535 and the second decoration surface portion decoration substrate 536. At the same time, the effect operation unit first drive motor 528 rotates the decoration rotating body unit 530 having the first decorative surface portion 532 facing forward by 180 degrees around the first axis CL1 extending horizontally, thereby producing the second decorative surface portion. It is assumed that 533 is directed forward (see FIG. 202). As a result, the first decorative surface portion 532 that can be seen through the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410 at the tip of the player's line of sight guided from the game area 5a to the lower third effect decorative rotator unit 530B has a different decoration. The second decorative surface portion 533 is changed so that the player can be informed of the arrival of an opportunity, and the expectation for the game can be enhanced, and the operation button 410 of the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B. The operation of the operation button 410 can be enjoyed, and the player participation type effect can be enjoyed and the decrease in the interest can be suppressed.

  As described above, the effect of the third effect decoration rotator unit 530B by the decoration rotator unit 530 is triggered by the arrival of the light emission decoration from above in the game area 5a to the third effect decoration rotator unit 530B. It is desirable to do this, and it is possible to entertain the player with a continuous performance. In addition, the effect by the decoration rotary body unit 530 is the above [3-4h-7. It is only necessary to execute an effect as described in “Movable effect in the third effect operation unit”.

  As an effect different from the above, for example, from the state of FIG. 201, the decoration rotating body unit 530 of the third effect decoration rotating body unit 530B is rotated by 180 degrees around the horizontally extending first axis CL1 to obtain the second decoration. The surface portion 533 is set in a forward direction. In this state, the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are illuminated with the first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535 and the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536, so that the player's interest is the third effect decoration below the game area 5a. The rotating body unit 530B is attracted. Thereafter, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is rotated around the first axis CL so that the second decorative surface portion 533 facing forward is moved upward, and the first decorative surface portion 532 opposite to the second decorative surface portion 533 is moved. , So as to appear from below to above. By switching between the second decorative surface portion 533 and the first decorative surface portion 532, the player's line of sight can be guided above the third effect decorative rotating body unit 530B (in the game area 5a).

  Subsequently, with the movable unit 3610 of the back lifting unit 3600 in the back movable production unit 3500 moved to the lowered position, the back rotating base unit 3570 is rotated to the vertical position, and the action lever 3586 is moved to the non-moving position. The first left movable decorative lens and the first right movable decorative lens of the back first decorative body unit, the second left movable decorative lens and the second right of the second decorative body unit on the back are moved from the working position to the working position. The movable decorative lens and the third left movable decorative lens and the third right movable decorative lens of the third decorative body unit on the back are moved to the open position, respectively, and a third fixed decorative lens 3553, a first fixed decorative lens 3513, It is assumed that the two fixed decorative lenses 3533 and the back front lower center lens 3131 are arranged vertically. By decorating them in order from the bottom, the effect that started from the third effect decoration rotator unit 530B can appear to move upward from the third effect decoration rotator unit 530B. An effect that can be felt can be shown to the player, and the player's mood can be raised to suppress a decrease in interest in the game. The effect starting from the third effect decoration rotating body unit 530B may be started when the player presses the operation button 410 at a predetermined timing when the player participation type effect is executed.

  In this way, various effects can be shown to the player, and it can be difficult to get bored of the player by various effects, and the player can be entertained, and the player's interest in the game is reduced. Can be suppressed.

[6. Game contents]
Next, game contents by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 is obtained by the player rotating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 disposed in the lower right front corner of the door frame 3. The game board 5 is driven into the upper portion of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002, and the game with the game ball is started. The game ball that has been driven into the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the strength of the game. The strength of the game ball can be adjusted according to the amount of rotation of the handle 302. The game ball can be driven more strongly as it is rotated in the clockwise direction. A game ball can be shot at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

  In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game balls abut against the obstacle nails. Thus, the flow velocity of the game ball is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movement can be enjoyed. In the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a windmill (not shown) that rotates by contact of the game ball is provided at an appropriate position.

  When the game ball that is thrown into the upper portion of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the front view of the outermost surface of the center accessory 2500 from the highest position, it abuts against a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) The area on the left side of the center actor 2500 will flow down. When a game ball flowing down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp inlet 2520 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, the game ball is supplied from the warp outlet 2522 to the stage 2530.

  The game ball supplied to the stage 2530 rolls on the stage 2530, moves back and forth, and is released forward. When a game ball enters the chance entrance 2535 in the center of the stage 2530 and is released into the game area 5a from the chance exit 2536, the chance exit 2536 is located immediately above the first start opening 2002, so there is a high probability. The first start port 2002 is received. When a game ball is received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

  When the game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is released into the game area 5a from other than the center, it flows down toward the start port unit 2100. The game balls released from the stage 2530 of the center object 2500 into the game area 5a are opened in the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, the general winning port 2001 of the side unit 2200 and the attacker unit 2400, and the attacker unit 2400. There is a possibility of being accepted into the first big prize opening 2005 or the like of the state.

  By the way, when the game ball that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, it is drawn toward the center in the left-right direction by the shelf 2301 of the side slope 2300, and the general winning port 2001 of the side unit 2200 There is a possibility that the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100 is received. When a game ball is received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 through the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951.

  On the other hand, when the game ball that is driven into the upper portion of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 (so-called right hit), It is discharged from the right guide passage 2540 of the center accessory 2500 to the upper part of the attacker unit 2400. Immediately below the downstream end of the right guide passage 2540, a gate passage 2420 provided with a gate portion 2003 and a second starting port 2004 in the attacker unit 2400 is arranged, and a game ball enters the gate passage 2420 with a high probability. To do.

  When the right-handed game ball enters the gate passage 2420 and passes through the gate portion 2003, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310. If the selected lottery result is “normal hit”, the second start port The second start opening door 2411 closing the 2004 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball can be received in the second start opening 2004. When a game ball is received at the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951.

  In the present embodiment, in the normal lottery performed by the game ball passing through the gate unit 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery until the normal lottery result is suggested (for example, 0. 0). 01-60 seconds, also called normal variation time). The suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second start port 2004 is opened after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed. The shorter the normal variation time, the more the game balls for which “normal hit” is selected in the gate unit 2003 can be received at the second start port 2004.

  If a game ball passes through the gate part 2003 after the game ball passes through the gate part 2003 until the normal lottery result is suggested, the normal lottery result cannot be started. The start of the suggestion of the result is put on hold until the suggestion of the result of the previous normal lottery ends. The number of hold of the normal lottery result is up to 4 and the upper limit is discarded without holding even if the game ball passes through the gate part 2003. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side by accumulating the hold.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a game ball is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 has an advantageous game state (for example, “hit”, “ A lottery of a special lottery result that generates “medium hit”, “small hit”, “per probability change”, “per time reduction”, etc.) is performed. The lottery result of the special lottery is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as special fluctuation time). Note that the special lottery results that are drawn when the game balls are received at the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 include “losing”, “small hit”, “2R big hit”, “5R big hit”, “ “15R big hit”, “per probability change (probability change)”, “short time reduction (time reduction)”, “short per time when accuracy change”, “no per short time when probability change”, “second big hit (for example, per feature)”, etc. is there.

  When the special lottery result (the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result) drawn by accepting game balls to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 is a special lottery result that generates an advantageous gaming state After the elapse of the special variation time, the first grand prize opening 2005 is in a state where the game ball can be received in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. When a game ball is received in the first big prize opening 2005 when the first big prize opening 2005 is in the open state, a predetermined number (for example, ten or thirteen pieces) from the payout device 830 by the main control board 1310 and the payout board. ) Game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321. Therefore, when the first grand prize opening 2005 is capable of accepting game balls, by allowing the first big prize opening 2005 to accept game balls, a lot of game balls can be paid out and entertain the player. Can do.

  When the special lottery result is “small hit”, the first big prize opening 2005 is in an open state in which a game ball can be received for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The opening / closing pattern to be closed after that is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is “big hit”, a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the first big prize opening 2005 becomes open to accept game balls, or the first big prize winning An opening / closing pattern (a single opening / closing pattern is referred to as one round) that allows a gaming ball to be closed when any of the conditions for accepting a predetermined number (for example, 10) of gaming balls to the mouth 2005 is satisfied. ) Is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is generated by repeating two rounds for “2R jackpot”, five rounds for “5R jackpot”, and 15 rounds for “15R jackpot”.

  In “Big Bonus”, after the big hit game ends, the probability that a special lottery result such as “Big Bonus” will be drawn is changed (“probable hit”), or the display time of the effect image that suggests the special lottery result is changed. ("Short-time hit") or "hit".

  When the special lottery result is “second big hit (for example, per winning feature)”, the second big prize opening 2006 has passed for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds to 3.0 seconds), or It will be in an open state until one of the conditions for accepting a predetermined number (for example, only one) of game balls is satisfied. When a game ball is received in the second big prize opening 2006 when the second big prize opening 2006 is in an open state, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out. When the game balls received at the second grand prize winning opening 2006 are distributed to the first receiving opening 2431 by the sorting piece 2433, the first big winning prize opening 2005 is opened and closed as “5R big hit”, and When assigned to the second receiving port 2432, the first big prize opening 2005 opens and closes as “15R big hit”.

  In the present embodiment, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are received from the start of the special lottery until the special lottery result is suggested by the acceptance of the game balls. When a game ball is accepted at the second start opening 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started, and therefore the start of the suggestion of the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. The The number of reserved special lottery results to be held is up to four for each of the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, and for more than that, the first start port 2002 and the second start port Even if a game ball is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is not put on hold and discarded. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side by accumulating the hold.

  The special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 and the game board side effect display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest a special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 suggests the special lottery result based on the combination of the LEDs that are lit, after a plurality of LEDs are repeatedly turned on / off and blinked for a predetermined time.

  On the other hand, in the game board side effect display device 1600, based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 indirectly controls and the special lottery result is suggested as an effect image. The effect image suggesting the special lottery result on the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed in a variable manner by changing each symbol sequence in a state where three symbol sequences composed of a plurality of symbols are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction. Each symbol row is stopped and displayed so that the symbols in the three symbol rows that are stopped and displayed are in a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. When the special lottery result is other than “losing”, after the three symbol sequences are stopped and each symbol is stopped and displayed, a final image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, An advantageous gaming state (for example, a small hit game, a big hit game, etc.) according to the lottery special lottery result occurs.

  The time indicating the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variation time)) and the time suggesting the special lottery result in the game board side effect display device 1600 (the symbol string varies). The time until the fixed image is displayed is different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

  In the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the game board side effect display device 1600, the effect decoration rotating body unit 530 in the door frame 3 according to the lottery special lottery result. Operation button 410, door frame side effect display device 460, back front decoration unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, back center movable effect unit 3200, back left movable effect unit 3300, back right movable effect unit 3400, back upper movable effect unit 3500 , And the under-bottom movable production unit 3700, etc. can be used as appropriate to produce a light emission production, a movable production, a display production, etc., and the player can be entertained by various productions. It can suppress that the interest with respect to a game falls.

[7. Main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a control board that performs various controls of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 203 to 205. FIG. 203 is a block diagram of the main control board 1310, the payout control board 951, and the peripheral control board 1510. FIG. 204 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. FIG. 205 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 203 and boards connected thereto.

  As shown in FIG. 203, the pachinko gaming machine 1 mainly includes a main control board 1310, a payout control board 951, and a peripheral control board 1510, and various controls are shared. First, the main control board 1310 will be described, followed by the payout control board 951, the power supply board, and finally the peripheral control board 1310.

[7-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 includes a main control MPU 1310a, a main control MPU 1310a, a main control input circuit 1310b to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control output circuit for outputting various signals to an external board or the like. 1310c, a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d for driving various solenoids, and a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e for monitoring a sign of a predetermined power failure or an instantaneous power failure state (hereinafter referred to as “instantaneous power failure”). I have.

  The main control MPU 1350a is a microprocessor that incorporates various control programs such as a main control program for controlling gaming operations, a ROM for storing various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. The main control program is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power is turned on, and controls a power-on process executed when the power is turned on.

  In addition to the built-in RAM (corresponding to the “main control built-in RAM”) and ROM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in ROM”), the main control MPU 1310a includes a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation, It also has built-in functions for preventing fraud. The main control built-in RAM has, as part of its storage area, a jackpot determination random number storage area, a special symbol random number storage area, and a reach determination random number storage area for each start storage information stored in a start storage information storage area to be described later , Variation pattern random numbers 1, 2 storage area, variation type random number storage area, and start storage information storage area and transmission information storage area described later.

  Of these, the start memory information storage area includes a first start memory information storage area for the first special symbol and a second start memory information storage area for the second special symbol. In addition, the main control built-in RAM also includes a jackpot flag area capable of storing a jackpot flag value to be described later. As will be described later, the big hit flag represents not only a loss (00H) or a big hit (01H) but also a small hit (02H).

  Therefore, if the main control MPU 1310a accesses one storage area called the big hit flag area without accessing the small hit flag area where the value of the big hit flag can be stored, the main control MPU 1310a only determines whether it is a big hit or lost. In addition, it is possible to grasp at the same time whether it is a small hit.

  The main control MPU 1310a has a built-in nonvolatile RAM. In this non-volatile RAM, a unique ID code with a unique (unique in the world) code for identifying an individual by the manufacturer that manufactured the main control MPU 1310a is stored in advance. Since the ID code once attached is stored in the nonvolatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can take out the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM and refer to it.

  The main control input circuit 1310b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information whose detection signals from various detection switches are input to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 1310b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. That is, the main control input circuit 1310b does not reset the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals by a main control system reset to be described later. The circuit is configured to be output from the output terminal.

  The main control output circuit 1310c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND). The main control output circuit 1310c is a reset having a reset function in which a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information in which various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like are input to the various input terminals is provided. A main control output circuit 1310ca with a function and a main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function that is not provided with the reset terminal and does not have a reset function.

  The main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is input. That is, the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function is reset when information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external substrate or the like is reset by a main control system reset described later. Is configured as a circuit that does not output any signal from the various output terminals.

  On the other hand, the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. That is, the main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function does not reset the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external substrate or the like by the main control system reset described later, and thus the information is output to the information. The signal based on this is comprised as a circuit from which the various output terminals are output.

  The first start port sensor 3112 detects a game ball that has entered the first start port 2002, while the second start port sensor 3113 detects a game ball that has entered the second start port 2004. The general winning opening sensor 3020 detects a game ball that has entered the general winning opening 2001. The detection signals from the first start port sensor 3112, the second start port sensor 3113, and the general winning port sensor 3020 and the signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310 e are respectively transmitted to a predetermined value of the main control MPU 1310 a via the main control input circuit 1310 b. Input to the input port of the input port.

  The gate sensor 2401 detects a game ball that has passed through the gate unit 2350. The general winning opening sensor 3020 detects a game ball that has entered the general winning opening 2201. The first grand prize opening sensor 2403 outputs a detection signal when it is detected that a game ball has been received in the first big prize opening 2005. The second grand prize opening sensor 2402 outputs a detection signal when it is detected that a game ball has been received in the second big prize opening 2006. The magnetic sensor 2404 detects fraud using a magnet. The vibration sensor 2405 detects the vibration of the pachinko machine 1 caused by an external force (so-called dozing action or the like).

  The detection signals from the distribution detection sensor 2580, the gate sensor 2401, the general prize opening sensor 3020, the first big prize opening sensor 2403, the second big prize opening sensor 2402, the magnetic sensor 2404, and the vibration sensor 2405 described above are respectively These are inputted to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a through the panel relay terminal plate 4161 attached to the game board 5 and the main control input circuit 1310b.

  The main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function based on the detection signals from these switches, so that the main control output circuit with reset function is output. A control signal is output from 1310ca to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d. The main control MPU 1310a outputs drive signals from the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d to the start port solenoid 2105, the attack solenoid 2108A, the attack solenoid 2108B, and the distribution drive motor 2558 via the panel relay terminal plate 4161.

  The main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function based on the detection signal from each of these switches, and thereby the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca through the panel relay terminal board 4161 and the function display board 1191, the first special symbol display 1403, the second special symbol display 1405, the first special symbol memory display 1184, the second special symbol memory display 1187, A drive signal is output to the normal symbol display 1189, the normal symbol storage display 1188, the game state display 1183, and the round display 1190.

  The main control MPU 1310a outputs various types of information (game information) regarding the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function, so that the payout control board 951 is output from the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. To output various information (game information). The main control MPU 1310a outputs a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function, so that the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function outputs the signal to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Signal (power failure clear signal).

  In this embodiment, the first start port sensor 3112, the second start port sensor 3113, the gate sensor 2401, the first big prize port sensor 2403, and the second big prize port sensor 2402, for example, a non-contact type electromagnetic type. In contrast, for example, contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switches are used for the general prize opening sensors 3020 and 3020.

  This is because game balls frequently enter the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, or frequently pass through the gate portion 2350, so that the first start port sensor 3112, the second start port sensor 3113, and Detection of game balls by the gate sensor 2401 also frequently occurs. Therefore, long-life proximity switches are used for the first start port sensor 3112, the second start port sensor 3113, and the gate sensor 2401.

  When a big hit gaming state that is advantageous to the player occurs, the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006 is opened and game balls frequently enter, so the first or second big prize opening sensor 2402 is used. The detection of game balls by 2403 also frequently occurs. For this reason, long-life proximity switches are also used for the big prize opening sensors 2402 and 2403. On the other hand, detection by the general winning opening sensors 3020 and 3020 does not occur frequently at the general winning openings 2001 and 2011, where game balls do not frequently enter. For this reason, mechanical switches having a shorter lifespan than the proximity switch are used for the general prize opening sensors 3020 and 3020.

  The main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands relating to payout as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function, so that the payout control board 951 from the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function. Various commands are transmitted as serial data. When the payout control board 951 completes normal reception of various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the payout control board 951 outputs a signal (payment ACK signal) to that effect to the main control board 1310. This signal (payer ACK signal) is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

  The main control MPU 1310a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the payout control board 951 as serial data by the main control input circuit 1310b, so that the input terminal of the predetermined serial input port from the main control input circuit 1310b Various commands are received as serial data. When the main control MPU 1310a completes normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 951 as serial data, the main control MPU 1310a sends a signal (main payout ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. The signal is output to the output circuit 1310ca, and a signal (main payment ACK signal) is output from the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca to the payout control board 951.

  The main control MPU 1310a transmits, as serial data, various commands relating to control of game effects and various commands relating to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function to the peripheral control board 1510.

  Here, a main peripheral serial transmission port that transmits various commands as serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 will be briefly described. The main control MPU 1310a is configured with a main control CPU core 1310aa as a center. In addition to the main control built-in RAM described above, a main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae, which is one of various main control serial I / O ports, and the like. They are connected via a bus 1310ah. The main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae transmits various commands as main peripheral serial data to the peripheral control board 1510, and mainly includes a transmission shift register 1310aea, a transmission buffer register 1310aeb, a serial management unit 1310aec, and the like.

  When the main control CPU core 1310aa sets a command in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and outputs a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec, the serial management unit 1310aec sends the command set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb from the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. The data is transferred to the transmission shift register 1310aea and started to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data.

  The transmission buffer register 1310aeb has a storage capacity of 32 bytes, for example. The main control CPU core 1310aa continuously transmits a plurality of commands to the peripheral control board 1510 by setting a plurality of commands in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and then outputting a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec.

  The power supply board for supplying various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. BC0). With this capacitor BC0, the main control MPU 1310a stores various types of information in the main control built-in RAM in the power-off process even when the power is shut off.

  When an operation switch 952 of a payout control board 951, which will be described later, is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 952 is output from the payout control board 951 to be main. The signal is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the control input circuit 1310b. Various information stored in the main control built-in RAM is completely erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM by the main control MPU 1310a in response to this input.

[7-2. Dispensing control board]
Next, a payout control board 951 for controlling payout of game balls and the like will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 204 is a block diagram showing an example of the electrical configuration of the payout control board 951.

  The payout control board 951 is a payout control for performing various controls relating to payout as shown in FIG. 204, in addition to the operation switch 952 that also serves various functions and the error LED display 953 that displays the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Part 954 is provided. Here, various power supplies supplied to the payout control unit 954 and the payout control board 951, the payout motor drive circuit 954d, the excitation method of the payout motor 834, the switching circuit of the drive voltage to the payout motor 834, when the power is turned on and when the power is turned off The switching timing of the drive voltage to the payout motor 834 and the drive voltage to the payout motor 834 will be described.

[7-2-1. Dispensing control unit]
The payout control unit 954 performs various controls related to payout. The payout control unit 954 receives a payout control MPU 954a which is a microprocessor with a built-in ROM for storing various control programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and detection signals from various detection switches related to payout. A payout control input circuit 954b, a payout control output circuit 954c for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like, a payout motor drive circuit 954d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830, A CR unit input / output circuit 954e is provided adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 for exchanging various signals with a CR unit (not shown) installed in the pachinko island facility of the game hall.

  In addition to its built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”) and its built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in ROM”), the payout control MPU 954a operates ( It also has a built-in watchdog timer for monitoring the system and functions for preventing fraud.

  The payout control input circuit 954b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information whose detection signals from various detection switches are input to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the payout control input circuit 954b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset IC (hereinafter referred to as “payout control system reset IC”), which is a dedicated IC that outputs a reset signal (not shown), is not input. ing. That is, the payout control input circuit 954b is configured to output various signals based on the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals. It is configured as a circuit output from the terminal.

  The payout control output circuit 954c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND). The payout control output circuit 954c has a reset function in which a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information in which various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like are input to the various input terminals is provided. A payout control output circuit 954ca with a function and a payout control output circuit 954cb without a reset function that does not have a reset function without a reset terminal.

  The payout control output circuit 954ca with reset function is a circuit to which a system reset signal from the payout control system reset IC is input. That is, the payout control output circuit 954ca with a reset function is reset when the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like is reset by a payout control system reset described later. Is configured as a circuit that does not output any signal from the various output terminals.

  On the other hand, the payout control output circuit 954cb without a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from the payout control system reset IC is not input. That is, the payout control output circuit 954cb without a reset function is based on the information that the various signals input to the various input terminals are not reset by the payout control system reset IC because the information is not reset by the payout control system reset IC. The circuit is configured to output signals from various output terminals.

  The ball break detection sensor (ball break switch) 827 detects the presence or absence of a game ball in the two ball guide passages formed in the ball guide unit. The counting switch 838 detects a game ball flowing down in the prize ball passage of the payout device 830. Detection signals from the ball break detection sensor 827 and the counting switch 838 are respectively input to input terminals of predetermined input ports of the payout control MPU 954a via the payout control input circuit 954b.

  A blade rotation detection switch (rotation angle switch) 840 is attached between the front box 831 and the rear box 832 in the figure, and detects the rotation of the payout blade 834. A detection signal from the blade rotation detection switch 846 Are input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 954a via the prize ball case substrate 847 of the payout device 830 and the payout control input circuit 954b.

  The detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618 that detects the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 619 that detects the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are paid out. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 954a via the control input circuit 954b.

  Whether or not the inside of the full tank guide path formed in the lower full sphere path unit that guides to the full sphere entrance of the door frame 3 is a game ball and the tank is full (the lower plate 322 is full of game balls). The detection signal from the full detection sensor 279 that detects the above is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 954a via the payout control input circuit 954b.

  The payout control MPU 954a receives various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 housed in the main control board box of the game board 5 at the input terminal of the serial input port via the payout control input circuit 954b.

  When the payout control MPU 954a completes normal reception of various commands from the main control board as serial data, a payout control output circuit with a reset function is sent from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting to 954ca, a signal (payer ACK signal) is output from the payout control output circuit with reset function 954ca to the main control board.

  The payout control MPU 954a sends various commands for indicating the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the output terminal of the serial output port to the payout control output circuit 954cb without reset function as serial data, thereby providing a payout control output without reset function. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the circuit 954cb to the main control board.

  When the main control board 1310 completes normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 951 as serial data, the main control board 1310 outputs a signal to that effect (main payout ACK signal) to the payout control board 951. This signal (main payment ACK signal) is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 954a via the payout control input circuit 954b.

  The payout control MPU 954a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 954ca with reset function, thereby providing a payout control output with reset function. The drive signal is output from the circuit 954ca to the payout motor drive circuit 954d, and the drive signal is output from the payout motor drive circuit 954d to the payout motor 834. On the other hand, the state of the pachinko machine 1 is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting a drive signal for display on the LED display 953 to the payout control output circuit 954ca with reset function, the drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit 954ca with reset function to the error LED display 953.

  The error LED display 953 is a segment display and displays the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters and figures. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 953 include the following.

  For example, when the figure “-” is displayed, the fact that it is “normal” is notified. When the number “0” is displayed, it is informed that “the connection is abnormal” (specifically, an abnormality has occurred in the electrical connection between the main control board and the payout control board 951). doing.

  For example, when the number “1” is displayed, it is “out of sphere” (specifically, two spheres formed in the sphere guiding unit 920 based on a detection signal from the out of sphere detection sensor 827). That there is no game ball in the guide passage). For example, when the numeral “2” is displayed, it indicates that the ball is “spherical” (specifically, based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection switch 840, the bent passages 831b and 832b of the dispensing device 830 and the ball The sprocket and the game ball engage with each other in the vicinity of the entrance at the entrance communicating with the delivery space, 832k, and the sprocket is difficult to rotate).

  For example, when the number “3” is displayed, it is informed that it is a “counting switch error” (specifically, a malfunction has occurred in the counting switch 838 based on a detection signal from the counting switch 838). ing. For example, when the number “5” is displayed, it is informed that it is a “retry error” (specifically, that the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit value).

  For example, when the numeral “6” is displayed, it is “full” (specifically, it is guided to the full ball receiving port 528 of the door frame 3 based on a detection signal from a full tank switch (not shown)). That the inside of the full tank guide path formed in the lower full tank path unit 860 is full of game balls. For example, when the number “7” is displayed, it means that “CR is not connected” (from the payout control board 951 to the CR unit (not shown) installed in the pachinko island facility in the game hall adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1. That the electrical connection is cut off at any one of them. For example, when the number “9” is displayed, it is informed that it is “in stock” (specifically, the number of game balls that have not been paid out has reached a predetermined number). Yes.

  The payout control MPU 954a outputs the number of game balls actually paid out from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 954ca with reset function, so that the resistance from the payout control output circuit 954ca with reset function The number of game balls actually paid out or the like is output to an external terminal board 784 electrically connected to a hall computer installed in the game hall via a not shown.

  The payout control board 951 outputs various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board to an external terminal board 784 electrically connected to a hall computer installed in the game hall via a resistor (not shown). Yes. The external terminal plate 784 is provided with a plurality of photocouplers (not shown) incorporating, for example, infrared LEDs and photo ICs.

  The external terminal board 784 transmits the number of game balls and various information (game information) to the hall computer installed in the game hall through the plurality of photocouplers. The external terminal board 784 and the hall computer are electrically insulated by a plurality of photocouplers, and an abnormal voltage is applied to the hall computer via the external terminal board of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to cause the hall computer to The computer is configured not to malfunction or fail.

  The external terminal board 784 and the hall computer do not malfunction or fail when an abnormal voltage is applied from the hall computer to the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 951 via the external terminal board of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is configured as follows. The hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The ball lending request signal of the game ball from the ball lending button 331 of the lending operation unit 330 and the prepaid card return request signal from the return button 333 are installed in the pachinko island facility in the game hall adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1. Is input to a CR unit (not shown).

  The CR unit transmits a signal designating the number of game balls to be lent in accordance with the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 951 in a serial manner, and this signal is sent to the predetermined control MPU 954a via the CR unit input / output circuit 954e. Input to the input port of the input port. The CR unit updates the remaining degree of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of rented game balls, and outputs a signal for displaying the remaining degree on the display unit 334 of the lending operation unit 330, This signal is input to the display unit 334. A CR unit lamp (not shown) arranged in the vicinity of the display unit 334 emits light when supplied with a supply voltage from the CR unit.

  The power supply board 931 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 951, the main control board 1310, and the like serves as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control board 951 and the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. (Not shown) are provided. With the capacitor for the payout control board 951, the payout control MPU 954a stores various kinds of information in the payout control built-in RAM even when the power is turned off.

  A microprocessor (hereinafter referred to as “main control MPU”) mounted on the main control board 1310 by a capacitor for the main control board is a RAM (mainly stored in the main control MPU) that stores various types of information even when the power is turned off. (Hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in RAM”). Various types of information stored in the payout control built-in RAM are stored in the payout control MPU 954a via the payout control input circuit 954b when the operation switch 952 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. The payout control MPU 954a input to the input terminal of the input port determines as a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and triggered by this from the payout control built-in RAM by the payout control MPU 954a. Completely erased (cleared).

  This operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output to the payout control output circuit 954cb without reset function, and is output from the payout control output circuit 954cb without reset function to the main control board. When the operation switch 952 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, an operation signal corresponding to the operation switch 952 is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main output control MPU via the payout control board 951. The main control MPU judges the information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a RAM clear signal for completely erasing, and triggered by this, the main control MPU is completely erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM. The

[7-2-2. Various power supplies supplied to the payout control board]
Next, various power supplies supplied to the payout control board 951 will be described. The grounds (GND) of various substrates and the grounds (GND) of various terminal boards are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply substrate 931 and are the same ground (GND).

  The power supply board 931 includes a synchronous rectification circuit 931a, a power factor correction circuit 931b, a smoothing circuit 931c, and a power supply generation circuit 931d. The main power supply voltage supplied from the pachinko island facility is, for example, 24 VAC and is supplied to the synchronous rectifier circuit 931a. The synchronous rectifier circuit 931a rectifies the power supplied from the pachinko island facility and supplies it to the power factor correction circuit 931b. The power factor improvement circuit 931b improves the power factor of the rectified power to generate DC + 37V (DC + 37V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 37V”) and supplies it to the smoothing circuit 931c. The smoothing circuit 931c removes the supplied + 37V ripple and smoothes + 37V and supplies the smoothed power to the power generation circuit 931d.

  The power generation circuit 931d is supplied from the smoothing circuit 931c to + 37V to DC + 5V (DC + 5V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 5V”), DC + 12V (DC + 12V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 12V”), and DC + 24V (DC + 24V, hereinafter, (Referred to as “+ 24V”).

  Three types of voltages of + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V created by the power source creation circuit 931d of the power board 931 are supplied to the payout control board 951. Of these three types of voltages, two kinds of voltages, + 12V and + 24V, are The main control board provided on the game board 5 is supplied via the payout control board 951. Furthermore, the three types of voltages of + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V created by the power supply creation circuit 931d of the power supply board 931 are the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5, various boards provided on the door frame 3 side, etc. Are supplied to each.

  The + 5V supplied to the payout control board 951 is first supplied to the payout control filter circuit 954a to remove noise. The +5 V from which the noise has been removed is supplied to a capacitor for a payout control board 951 (not shown) provided in the power supply board 931 via a diode (not shown) provided in the payout control board 951, in addition to the payout control MPU 954a, It is also supplied to a payout motor drive circuit 954d and the like. In addition to being supplied to the payout control input circuit 954b, + 12V supplied to the payout control board 951 is supplied to the payout motor drive circuit 954d and the like, and is provided in the game board 5 via the payout control board 951. Is supplied to the main control board.

  The main control board provided in the game board 5 includes a + 5V creation circuit (not shown). In this + 5V creation circuit, a +12 to + 5V power source supplied via the payout control board 951 is created to create a main control board (not shown). Supply to the control filter circuit. In this main control filter circuit, noise is removed from + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit. The +5 V from which the noise has been removed is supplied to a main control MPU or the like in addition to a main control board capacitor (not shown) provided on the power supply board 931 via a diode (not shown) provided on the main control board. Has been.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the payout control board 951 and the main control board provided in the game board 5 are each supplied with the power of +5 V. However, in the payout control board 951, the power supply board 931 While + 5V created by the power supply creation circuit 931d is supplied to the payout control MPU 954a, the payout motor drive circuit 954d, etc. via the payout control filter circuit 954a, the main control board provided in the game board 5 In a + 5V creation circuit (not shown), a power supply of + 5V to + 5V created by the power supply creation circuit 931d of the power supply board 931 is created, and + 5V created on the main control board provided in the game board 5 passes through the main control filter circuit. The power supply system is supplied to the main control MPU.

[7-2-3. Dispensing motor drive circuit]
Next, a payout motor drive circuit 954d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830 will be described. The payout motor drive circuit 954d mainly includes a voltage switching circuit 954da and a drive ICPIC60. The power input terminals 1 and 2 of the voltage switching circuit 954da are created by the + 12V power line supplied with the + 12V DC power created by the power creating circuit 931d of the power board 931 and the power creating circuit 931d of the power board 931. A + 5V power supply line to which + 5V DC power is supplied via the payout control filter circuit 954a is electrically connected, and + 12V and + 5V are applied, respectively. The ground terminal of the voltage switching circuit 954da is grounded to the ground (GND).

  A voltage switching signal is input to the power source switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 954da. This voltage switching signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 954a to the payout control output circuit 954ca with reset function, and is output from the payout control output circuit 954ca with reset function to the power supply switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 954da. Is done.

  The power output terminal of the voltage switching circuit 954da is electrically connected to the third terminal and the tenth terminal, which are the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, via the Zener diode PZD60, and is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout motor 834. 3 which is a cathode terminal of the drive ICPIC 60 via the Zener diode PZD 60 using + 12V or + 5V as a motor drive voltage based on a voltage switching signal input to the voltage switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 954da. In addition to supplying to the numbering terminal and the numbering terminal 10, they are supplied to the dispensing motor 834. A detailed description will be given later of the point where control is performed to switch between when +12 V is supplied to the dispensing motor 834 as a motor driving voltage and when +5 V is supplied to the dispensing motor 834 as a motor driving voltage.

  The drive ICPIC 60 includes four Darlington power transistors. In the present embodiment, the sixth terminal and the seventh terminal, which are the emitter terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, are grounded to the ground (GND), respectively, and are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC 60. The payout motor drive signal is input to the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the twelfth terminal through the resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively.

  The second terminal, the fourth terminal, the ninth terminal and the eleventh terminal which are the collector terminals of the drive ICPIC 60 correspond to the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal and the twelfth terminal which are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, respectively. doing. When a payout motor drive signal is input to the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the twelfth terminal of the drive ICPIC 60 through the resistors PR60 to PR63, drive pulses that are excitation signals are respectively applied. Output to each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) corresponding to the payout motor 834.

  This payout motor drive signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 954a to the payout control output circuit 954ca with reset function, and is driven from the payout control output circuit 954ca with reset function via resistors PR60 to PR63. The signals are output to the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the twelfth terminal, which are the base terminals of the ICPIC 60, respectively. These drive pulses are generated by switching excitation currents that flow through the phases (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of the payout motor 834, and rotate the payout motor 834.

  Note that a back electromotive force is generated when the drive pulse (excitation signal) of each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) is cut off by this switching. When this counter electromotive force exceeds the withstand voltage of the drive ICPIC 60, the drive ICPIC 60 is damaged. As a protection, the above-described Zener diode PZD60 is electrically connected to the third terminal and the tenth terminal before the drive ICPIC 60 as a protection. The circuit configuration is adopted.

[7-2-4. Discharge motor excitation method]
Next, the excitation method of the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830 will be described. In the present embodiment, as described above, the payout motor 834 is the same as the small stepping motor provided to operate various movable bodies of the game board 5.

  In such a payout motor 834, when control is performed by a one-phase excitation method in which the coils of a small stepping motor are excited one phase at a time, the generated torque becomes extremely small. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the driving motor 834 generates the driving torque and the static torque, the control by the two-phase excitation method that excites the coil of the dispensing motor 834 by two phases is adopted. In this two-phase excitation method, the coil of the payout motor 834 is excited two phases at a time, so that about twice as much torque can be obtained as compared with the one-phase excitation method in which the coil of the payout motor 834 is excited one phase at a time. Thus, in the present embodiment, by controlling the payout motor 834 by the two-phase excitation method, it is possible to contribute to increasing the driving torque and the stationary torque.

[7-2-5. Switching circuit for drive voltage to dispensing motor]
Next, a motor drive voltage switching circuit of the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830 will be described. In the present embodiment, as described above, the payout motor 834 is the same as the small stepping motor provided to operate various movable bodies of the game board 5. In such a payout motor 834, the output shaft can be rotated with extremely small torque in a non-excited state, that is, in a state where no voltage is applied to each phase of the payout motor 834.

  As described above, the award ball motor gear is fixed to the output shaft of the payout motor 834, and the rotation of the award ball motor gear fixed to the output shaft causes the rotation to be the award ball intermediate gear 841, and the detection disk 842. The sprocket is transmitted via a prize ball sprocket gear 844. That is, when the payout motor 834 is in a non-excited state, if no voltage is applied to each phase of the payout motor 834 and no current flows, the output shaft can be rotated with extremely small torque.

  For this reason, for example, the weight of a plurality of game balls passing through the bent passage 831b formed in the prize ball front box is added to the recess of the sprocket, and this addition works in the direction of rotating the sprocket to generate torque. This torque causes the output shaft of the dispensing motor 834 to rotate. In order to prevent this, even when the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is not rotated, in order to obtain the static torque of the payout motor 834, a voltage is applied to each phase of the payout motor 834 to pass a current. .

  In order to obtain the static torque of the dispensing motor 834, it is necessary to always apply a motor driving voltage to a predetermined phase (for example, B phase and A phase) to maintain a current flowing state. In other words, although the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is not rotated, in other words, the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is set in spite of the state in which the game ball is not paid out as a prize ball to the player. Power is consumed in the same manner as when rotating.

[7-2-6. Driving voltage to the dispensing motor when the power is turned on and off]
Next, the drive voltage to the dispensing motor 834 when the power is turned on and when the power is turned off will be described. As described above, the payout control MPU 954a of the payout control board 951 rotates the output shaft of the payout motor 834 to obtain a driving torque for paying out the game ball. ) And output to the voltage switching circuit 954da to control the supply of + 12V as the motor drive voltage to the payout motor 834, while the static torque for maintaining the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is stopped. In the case of obtaining it, the logic of the voltage switching signal (for example, LOW) is set and output to the voltage switching circuit 954da to perform control to supply + 5V as the motor driving voltage to the dispensing motor 834.

  The payout control MPU 954a performs a power-on process that is a payout control program when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on. In the present embodiment, for example, in addition to the case where the power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, the concept at the time of turning on the power is the power after the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is interrupted by a power failure. Power recovery, or power recovery after the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is interrupted by a power failure that occurs instantaneously.

  When the power-on process is started, the payout control MPU 954a first sets the voltage switching signal logic (for example, LOW) to supply + 5V as the motor drive voltage to the payout motor 834 and sets the voltage switching circuit 954da. Control for generating a static torque for maintaining the state where the output shaft of the dispensing motor 834 is stopped.

  This is because when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, + 5V as the motor drive voltage is not forcibly supplied to the payout motor 834, but + 12V as the motor drive voltage is supplied to the payout motor 834. This is because the electric power consumed by is extremely large.

  That is, in the main control board provided in the game board 5 supplied with + 12V DC power generated by the power supply generation circuit 931d of the power supply board 931, the voltage + 5V that becomes the operation control voltage of the main control MPU is + 5V from this + 12V. Since it is generated in the creation circuit, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, + 12V is supplied to the payout motor 834 as the motor drive voltage, and the power consumed by the payout motor 834 becomes + 12V due to extremely large power consumption. It is difficult to increase the voltage level. Accordingly, in the main control board provided in the game board 5, it becomes difficult to generate + 5V, which is the operation control voltage of the main control MPU from this + 12V, by the + 5V generation circuit, and the main control MPU starts operation. Can be prevented from becoming impossible.

  When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the voltage may be unstable. Therefore, by supplying + 5V, which is set as a low motor drive voltage, to the payout motor 834, the power is turned on. Even if +5 V becomes unstable, the maximum allowable voltage that can be applied to the dispensing motor 834 is not exceeded. That is, it is possible to prevent the payout motor 834 from being broken by an unstable power source when the power is turned on.

  Subsequently, the payout control MPU 954a performs an initial setting process for the drive ICPIC 60. In the initial setting process for the drive ICPIC 60, the initial value of the drive ICPIC 60 is set. As this initial value, in order to obtain the static torque of the payout motor 834, information for outputting a payout motor drive signal for applying a motor drive voltage to a predetermined phase (for example, B phase and A phase). Is set in the internal register of the output port built in the payout control MPU 954a.

  Subsequently, the payout control MPU 954a performs a sprocket fixed position setting process after performing a wait timer process of waiting until a predetermined time elapses until the power supply becomes stable after the power is turned on. In this sprocket fixed position setting process, it is determined whether or not the sprocket is positioned at the fixed position described above.

  Specifically, the payout control MPU 954a is in a state where the sprocket is not located at the above-described fixed position when the detection notch is not detected based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection switch 840. In order to determine and switch the motor drive voltage from + 5V to + 12V, the logic (for example, LOW to HI) of the voltage switching signal is set and output to the voltage switching circuit 954da.

  The payout control MPU 954a sets information for outputting a payout motor drive signal to rotate the output shaft of the payout motor 834 in an internal register of an output port built in the payout control MPU 954a. The output shaft of the payout motor 834 rotates in accordance with the payout motor drive signal output from the output port.

  When the payout control MPU 954a detects the detection cutout 842b, the payout control MPU 954a rotates the output shaft of the payout motor 834 by a predetermined rotation angle, and then outputs information for outputting a payout motor drive signal to stop the output shaft of the payout motor 834. Set in the internal register of the output port built in the payout control MPU 954a. The output shaft of the payout motor 834 stops according to the payout motor drive signal output from the output port.

  The payout control MPU 954a sets the logic of the voltage switching signal (for example, HI to LOW) and outputs it to the voltage switching circuit 954da in order to switch the motor driving voltage from + 12V to + 5V, thereby waiting the sprocket at a fixed position. Maintain state.

  The payout control MPU 954a is a payout control main process every 2 ms (a process for receiving and analyzing a command from the main control board provided in the game board 5, a process for setting a main operation related to payout of a game ball, an error LED display The process of creating display data to 953 is repeated.

  The payout control MPU 954a determines that the sprocket is in the above-described fixed position when the detection notch 842b is detected based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection switch 840. The sprocket fixed position setting process is terminated as it is, and the payout control main process is repeated every 2 ms.

  When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off, the payout control MPU 954a shifts from the payout control main process repeatedly performed every 2 ms to the payout control power-off process. In the present embodiment, the concept of “when power is cut off” includes not only the case where the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off but also the case where the power is cut off due to a power failure or a momentary power failure. In the payout control power-off process, various information relating to payout is stored in the payout control built-in RAM as backup information, and in order to forcibly supply + 5V as the motor drive voltage to the payout motor 834, the logic ( For example, it is set to LOW) and output to the voltage switching circuit 954da, and control is performed to generate a static torque for maintaining the state where the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is stopped.

  As described above, the + 5V voltage is supplied not only to the voltage switching circuit 954da but also to the payout control MPU 954a. Therefore, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off, the drive system called the payout motor 834 and the payout control MPU954a are supplied. And the control system is going down at the same time.

  This is because when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off, + 5V as the motor drive voltage is not forcibly supplied to the payout motor 834, but + 12V as the motor drive voltage is supplied to the payout motor 834. This is because the electric power consumed by is extremely large.

  That is, in the main control board 1310 provided in the game board 5 supplied with the + 12V DC power generated by the power supply generation circuit 931d of the power supply board 931, + 5V, which is the operation control voltage of the main control MPU, is changed from + 12V to + 5V. Since it is created by the creation circuit, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off, in a state where + 12V is supplied to the payout motor 834 as the motor drive voltage, the power consumed by the payout motor 834 becomes + 12V due to extremely large power consumption. The voltage level of the battery drops rapidly.

  Along with this, before the main control program completes main control power-off processing and stores various information about the game in the main control built-in RAM, the operation control voltage level also drops rapidly and the main control MPU The MPU can be prevented from becoming inoperable.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off, the payout control MPU 954a of the payout control board 951 forcibly supplies + 5V to the payout motor 834 as the motor drive voltage. By outputting the logic of the switching signal (for example, LOW), the control system called the payout control MPU 954a of the payout control board 951 and the drive system called the payout motor 834 are the same when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off. Is supplied (that is, +5 V, which is an operation control voltage, is supplied to the control system called the payout control MPU 954a of the payout control board 951, and the motor to the drive system called the payout motor 834). By supplying + 5V as the drive voltage), the payout control M of the payout control board 951 And when the control system that U954a stops operating, and when the drive system of dispensing the motor 834 is deactivated, it is possible to match the. Thereby, the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be cut off while the payout control MPU 954a of the payout control board 951 knows the rotational position of the output shaft of the payout motor 834.

  That is, the payout motor 834 can be kept under the control of the payout control MPU 954a of the payout control board 951 until just before the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to preventing the output shaft of the payout motor 834 from rotating due to the influence of the power-off of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

[7-2-7. Switching timing of drive voltage to dispensing motor]
Next, the switching timing of the motor drive voltage of the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830 will be described. As described above, the payout control MPU 954a of the payout control board 951 rotates the output shaft of the payout motor 834 to obtain a driving torque for paying out the game ball. ) And output to the voltage switching circuit 954da to control the supply of + 12V as the motor drive voltage to the payout motor 834, while the static torque for maintaining the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is stopped. In the case of obtaining it, the logic of the voltage switching signal (for example, LOW) is set and output to the voltage switching circuit 954da to perform control to supply + 5V as the motor driving voltage to the dispensing motor 834.

  When the output shaft of the payout motor 834 rotates, as described above, the prize ball motor gear fixed to the output shaft rotates, and this rotation causes the prize ball intermediate gear 841 and the prize ball sprocket gear 844 of the detection disk 842 to rotate. Is transmitted to rotate the sprocket.

  In the outer periphery of the sprocket, as described above, in the ball delivery space formed in the prize ball table box, three recesses into which game balls fit are equally divided every 120 degrees, and the prize ball In the ball delivery space formed in the back box 832, three concave portions 837 b into which the game balls are fitted are equally divided every 120 degrees and arranged in the ball delivery space formed in the prize ball front box. The three recesses of the sprocket and the three recesses 837b of the sprocket arranged in the ball delivery space formed in the prize ball back box 832 are arranged so as to be shifted from each other by 60 degrees. Each time the sprocket makes one revolution, a maximum of six game balls received by the three recesses 837b can be sent downstream.

  The game balls received by the three recesses of the sprocket arranged in the ball delivery space formed in the prize ball front box are sent to the prize ball passage 831c and detected by the counting switch 838 as described above. The game balls received by the three recesses 837b of the sprocket arranged in the ball delivery space formed in the prize ball back box 832 are sent to the prize ball passage 832c and detected by the counting switch 838 as described above. The

  The payout control MPU 954a sets the logic (for example, HI) of the voltage switching signal and outputs it to the voltage switching circuit 954da, thereby controlling the supply of + 12V as the motor drive voltage to the payout motor 834, thereby outputting the payout motor 834. In the case where the sprocket is rotated by driving the shaft to pay out the game ball, and when the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is stopped, the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is driven to rotate at the recess of the sprocket 837b. The received game ball is finally sent out to the prize ball passages 831c and 832c. Thereafter, the payout control MPU 954a determines the time required for the game ball sent out last to be detected by the counting switch 838 through the award ball paths 831c and 832c (a preset time, for example, several hundred millimeters). The output shaft of the payout motor 834 is continuously driven to rotate until the time elapses).

  When this time elapses, the payout control MPU 954a stops the rotational drive of the output shaft of the payout motor 834 and stops the output shaft of the payout motor 834. In response to this, the logic of the voltage switching signal is switched (for example, In order to switch from HI to LOW), the logic (for example, LOW) of this voltage switching signal is set and output to the voltage switching circuit 954da to supply a voltage of +5 V to the dispensing motor 834 as the motor driving voltage. By doing so, a static torque is generated in the payout motor 834 and the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is stopped.

  Specifically, for example, when the player rotates the handle lever 504, the ball launcher 680 throws the game ball into the game area 5 a of the game board 5 with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle lever 504. . When a game ball that has been thrown into the game area 5a is received in a winning opening (not shown), a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 by the paying-out device 830 in accordance with the received winning opening.

  When a game ball is received at the start winning port as a winning port, a game (prize ball command) for paying out three game balls as a winning ball to the upper plate 201 by the payout device 830 is provided on the game board 5. Is transmitted to the payout control board 951 from a main control board (not shown) that controls the progress of the process.

  The payout control MPU 954a of the payout control board 951 performs control to supply + 12V to the payout motor 834 as a motor drive voltage by setting the logic (for example, HI) of the voltage switch signal and outputting it to the voltage switch circuit 954da. The output shaft of the payout motor 834 is rotationally driven to rotate the sprocket so that the first game ball, the second game ball, and finally the third game ball one by one in the recess of the sprocket, 837b The received game balls are sent out to the prize ball passages 831c and 832c. Thereafter, the payout control MPU 954a determines the time required for the third game ball sent out last to be detected by the counting switch 838 through the award ball passages 831c and 832c (a preset time, for example, The output shaft of the payout motor 834 is continuously driven to rotate until a certain number of milliseconds have elapsed).

  When this time elapses, the payout control MPU 954a stops the rotational drive of the output shaft of the payout motor 834 and stops the output shaft of the payout motor 834. In response to this, the logic of the voltage switching signal is switched (for example, In order to switch from HI to LOW), the logic (for example, LOW) of this voltage switching signal is set and output to the voltage switching circuit 954da, whereby + 5V is supplied to the payout motor 834 as the motor driving voltage. As a result, a static torque is generated in the payout motor 834 and the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is stopped.

  As described above, the payout control MPU 954a of the payout control board 951 pays out when detecting the detection notch 842b based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection switch 840 when stopping the sprocket rotational position at a fixed position. After rotating the output shaft of the motor 834 by a predetermined rotation angle, the state where the drive is stopped is maintained to maintain the state where the sprocket stands by at a fixed position.

  That is, the payout control MPU 954a determines the output shaft of the payout motor 834 in advance when detecting the detection notch 842b based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection switch 840 when stopping the rotation position of the sprocket at a fixed position. This “predetermined rotation angle” is set to the logic (for example, HI) of the voltage switching signal and output to the voltage switching circuit 954da, so that + 12V is set as the motor driving voltage. When the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is rotated by driving the output shaft of the payout motor 834 to rotate the sprocket to pay out the game ball, and when the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is stopped, The output shaft of the payout motor 834 is rotationally driven to receive the game ball received in the sprocket recess 837b as the award ball passage 8 1c, sent out to the end to 832c. Thereafter, the payout control MPU 954a determines the time required for the game ball sent out last to be detected by the counting switch 838 through the award ball paths 831c and 832c (a preset time, for example, several hundred millimeters). The output shaft of the payout motor 834 continues to be rotated until this time elapses, and when this time has elapsed, the rotation drive of the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is stopped and the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is turned off. Stop.

  The payout control board 951 can operate by supplying a stop voltage of +5 V as an operation control voltage. The payout control board 951 supplies a driving voltage of + 12V to the payout motor 834 when the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is driven to rotate to obtain a driving torque for paying out the game ball. A voltage switching signal that is a control signal is output. On the other hand, when the payout control board 951 obtains a static torque for maintaining the output shaft of the payout motor 834 stopped, the payout control board 951 supplies a + 5V stop voltage to the payout motor 834 to the voltage switching circuit 954da. A voltage switching signal that is a control signal is output. The payout control board 951 outputs a control signal to the voltage switching circuit 954da in order to forcibly supply a stop voltage of +5 V to the payout motor 834 when the power is turned off.

  Specifically, when the driving torque for paying out the game ball is obtained by rotationally driving the output shaft of the payout motor 834, the payout control MPU 954a of the payout control board 951 uses the logic (for example, HI) of the voltage switching signal. And is supplied to the voltage switching circuit 954da to control the supply of + 12V to the payout motor 834 as the motor drive voltage.

  On the other hand, when obtaining a static torque for maintaining a state where the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is stopped, the payout control MPU 954a of the payout control board 951 is set to the logic of the voltage switching signal (for example, LOW) to set the voltage. By outputting to the switching circuit 954da, control is performed to supply + 5V as the motor drive voltage to the payout motor 834.

  The payout control MPU 954a on the payout control board 951 is used as a motor drive voltage when the power is cut off (including when the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off, as well as when the power is cut off due to a power failure or instantaneous power failure). In order to forcibly supply +5 V to the dispensing motor 834, the logic (for example, LOW) of the voltage switching signal is set and output to the voltage switching circuit 954da, and the output shaft of the dispensing motor 834 is kept stopped. Therefore, it is configured to perform control for generating static torque for the purpose.

  Thus, based on the control signal (specifically, the logic of the voltage switching signal) input to the voltage switching circuit 954da, the output shaft of the dispensing motor 834 is supplied by supplying the driving voltage of +12 V to the dispensing motor 834. , And a driving torque for paying out the game ball can be obtained, and the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is stopped by supplying a stop voltage of +5 V to the payout motor 834. Can be obtained.

  The payout control board 951 outputs a driving voltage of + 12V when rotating the output shaft of the payout motor 834 to obtain a driving torque for paying out the game ball, while supplying a voltage for supplying to the payout motor 834. A voltage switching signal which is a control signal is output to the switching circuit 954da. In addition, the payout control board 951 performs control by a two-phase excitation method in which the coil of the payout motor 834 is excited two phases at a time. On the other hand, in order to obtain a stationary torque for maintaining the output motor 834 in the stopped state, the control signal is supplied to the voltage switching circuit 954da in order to supply a + 5V stop voltage to the payout motor 834. While the voltage switching signal is output, the payout control board 951 performs control by a two-phase excitation method in which the coil of the payout motor 834 is excited two phases at a time.

  Specifically, when the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is rotationally driven to obtain a driving torque for paying out the game ball, the payout control MPU 954a sets the voltage of the voltage switch signal (for example, HI) to switch the voltage. By outputting to the circuit 954da, control is performed to supply + 12V to the payout motor 834 as the motor drive voltage. In addition, the payout control MPU 954a performs control by a two-phase excitation method in which the coils of the payout motor 834 are excited two phases at a time.

  On the other hand, when obtaining static torque for maintaining the output shaft of the payout motor 834 stopped, the payout control MPU 954a sets the logic of the voltage switch signal (for example, LOW) and outputs it to the voltage switch circuit 954da. As a result, a control for supplying +5 V as a motor drive voltage to the dispensing motor 834 is performed, and a control by a two-phase excitation method for exciting the coil of the dispensing motor 834 two phases at a time is performed.

  Thus, based on the control signal (specifically, the logic of the voltage switching signal) input to the voltage switching circuit 954da, by supplying + 12V as the driving voltage to the dispensing motor 834, the output shaft of the dispensing motor 834 , And a driving torque for paying out the game ball can be obtained, and the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is stopped by supplying a stop voltage of +5 V to the payout motor 834. Can be obtained.

  Supplying a driving voltage of + 12V to the payout motor 834 to drive the output shaft of the payout motor 834 to obtain a driving torque for paying out the game ball, or supplying a stop voltage of + 5V to the payout motor 834 Even when obtaining a static torque for maintaining the state where the output shaft of the dispensing motor 834 is stopped, the dispensing motor 834 is controlled by a two-phase excitation method in which the coils of the dispensing motor 834 are excited two phases at a time. By performing, for example, the torque generated by the payout motor 834 can be increased as compared with the one-phase excitation method in which the coil of the payout motor 834 is excited one phase at a time, so that the driving torque and the static torque are increased. be able to.

  Thus, by controlling the payout motor 834 by the two-phase excitation method, it is possible to contribute to increasing the driving torque. For example, a plurality of game balls passing through the bent passage formed in the prize ball front box Even if this load acts in a rotational direction opposite to the rotational direction in which the sprocket is rotationally driven by the output shaft of the payout motor 834, The driving torque of the dispensing motor 834 is superior to the generated torque. For this reason, the rotation of the output shaft of the payout motor can be transmitted to the sprocket and the sprocket can be smoothly rotated.

  By controlling the payout motor 834 by the two-phase excitation method, it is possible to contribute to increasing the static torque. For example, the weights of a plurality of game balls passing through the bent passage formed in the prize ball front box are reduced. By being biased by the recess formed in the sprocket, even if this load acts in the direction of rotating the sprocket, the static torque of the payout motor 834 is superior to the torque generated thereby. For this reason, the state where the output shaft of the payout motor is stopped can be maintained, and the state where the sprocket is stopped can be maintained.

  Therefore, a small stepping motor can be adopted as the payout motor 834. By adopting the same type as a small stepping motor that operates a movable body provided on the game board 5 as the payout motor 834, it is possible to contribute to reducing the cost of the gaming machine.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment includes a payout control board 951 housed in a payout control board box 950 that performs payout control by rotation of the output shaft of a payout motor 834 that pays out game balls. The pachinko gaming machine 1 further includes a counting switch 838 and a voltage switching circuit 954da in the payout motor driving circuit 954d.

  The counting switch 838 can detect a game ball paid out by rotating the output shaft of the payout motor 834. The voltage switching circuit 954da is a driving voltage of + 12V for rotationally driving the output shaft of the dispensing motor 834, and a voltage for maintaining the state where the output shaft of the dispensing motor 834 is stopped, which is compared with the driving voltage. Thus, the + 5V stop voltage having a low voltage can be switched between each other.

  The payout control board 951 supplies a driving voltage of + 12V to the payout motor 834 when the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is driven to rotate to obtain a driving torque for paying out the game ball. In order to output a voltage switching signal as a control signal and to obtain a static torque for maintaining the output shaft of the dispensing motor 834 stopped, a voltage for supplying a stopping voltage of +5 V to the dispensing motor 834 A voltage switching signal which is a control signal is output to the switching circuit 954da.

  Specifically, when the output torque of the payout motor 834 is rotationally driven to obtain a drive torque for paying out the game ball, the payout control MPU 954a sets the voltage (for example, HI) of the voltage switching signal to set the voltage. The control circuit 954da outputs + 12V to the payout motor 834 as a motor drive voltage by output to the changeover circuit 954da. On the other hand, when obtaining a static torque for maintaining the output shaft of the payout motor 834 stopped, The control MPU 954a sets the logic of the voltage switching signal (for example, LOW) and outputs it to the voltage switching circuit 954da, thereby controlling the supply of + 5V as the motor driving voltage to the dispensing motor 834.

  The payout control board 951 outputs a control signal to the voltage switching circuit 954da, supplies a driving voltage of + 12V to the payout motor 834, and rotates the output shaft of the payout motor 834 to pay out the game ball. Thus, when the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is stopped, the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is rotated until the time required for the counting switch 838 to detect the game ball that has been finally paid out by rotating the output shaft of the payout motor 834 has elapsed. When this time elapses, the output shaft is continuously driven to rotate, and as a trigger, a control signal is output to the voltage switching circuit 954da to switch from the driving voltage of + 12V to the stopping voltage of + 5V and to supply to the payout motor 834. .

  Specifically, the payout control MPU 954a sets the logic (for example, HI) of the voltage switching signal and outputs it to the voltage switching circuit 954da to supply a motor driving voltage of + 12V to the payout motor 834, thereby supplying the payout motor 834. When the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is stopped when the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is stopped when the output ball of the payout motor 834 is stopped by rotating the sprocket to rotate the sprocket. Finally, the game balls are sent to the prize ball passages 831c and 832c. Thereafter, the payout control MPU 954a rotationally drives the output shaft of the payout motor 834 until a predetermined time elapses until the last sent game ball is detected by the counting switch 838 through the award ball paths 831c and 832c. If this time elapses, the rotational drive of the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is stopped and the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is stopped.

  In response to this, the payout control MPU 954a sets the logic (for example, LOW) of the voltage switching signal to switch the logic of the voltage switching signal (for example, to switch from HI to LOW), and the voltage switching circuit 954da. By performing control to supply + 5V as a motor drive voltage to the payout motor 834, the static torque is generated in the payout motor 834 and the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is stopped.

  In this manner, the payout control MPU 954a supplies the payout motor 834 with a driving voltage of + 12V based on the control signal (specifically, the logic of the voltage switch signal) input to the voltage switch circuit 954da. A driving torque for paying out a game ball by rotating the output shaft of 834 can be obtained, and the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is stopped by supplying a stop voltage of +5 V to the payout motor 834 Can be obtained.

  A control signal (specifically, the logic of the voltage switching signal) is output to the voltage switching circuit 954da, a + 12V driving voltage is supplied to the dispensing motor 834, and the output shaft of the dispensing motor 834 is rotated to drive the game ball. When the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is stopped when the payout motor 834 is stopped, the time required for the counting switch 838 to detect the game ball that has been finally paid out by rotationally driving the output shaft of the payout motor 834 has elapsed. Until this time, the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is continuously driven to rotate, and when this time elapses, a control signal (specifically, the logic of the voltage switching signal) is output to the voltage switching circuit 954da as a trigger. The voltage is switched from +12 V to a stop voltage of +5 V and supplied to the dispensing motor 834.

  The payout control board 951 is accommodated in the payout control board box 950. The payout control board 951 supplies a driving voltage of + 12V to the payout motor 834 when the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is driven to rotate to obtain a driving torque for paying out the game ball. While outputting a voltage switching signal that is a control signal, the payout control board 951 supplies a stop voltage of +5 V to the payout motor 834 in order to obtain a static torque for maintaining the output shaft of the payout motor 834 stopped. Is supplied to the voltage switching circuit 954da.

  Specifically, when the output torque of the payout motor 834 is rotationally driven to obtain a drive torque for paying out the game ball, the payout control MPU 954a sets the voltage (for example, HI) of the voltage switching signal to set the voltage. The control circuit 954da outputs + 12V to the payout motor 834 as a motor drive voltage by output to the changeover circuit 954da. On the other hand, when obtaining a static torque for maintaining the output shaft of the payout motor 834 stopped, The control MPU 954a sets the logic of the voltage switching signal (for example, LOW) and outputs it to the voltage switching circuit, thereby controlling the supply of + 5V to the dispensing motor 834 as the motor driving voltage.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, based on the control signal input to the voltage switching circuit, by supplying + 12V as the driving voltage to the payout motor 834, the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is rotationally driven to play the game ball. Can be obtained, and a stationary torque for maintaining the state where the output shaft of the payout motor 834 is stopped by supplying a stop voltage of +5 V to the payout motor 834 can be obtained. it can. By adopting the same type of small motor that operates a movable body provided on the game board 5 as the payout motor 834, it is possible to contribute to reducing the cost of the gaming machine.

  The payout motor 834 is configured such that the rotation of its output shaft is transmitted as a prize ball to a sprocket that pays out the game ball to the player, and is controlled by the payout control board 951. In a state where the sprocket is controlled to stop rotating by the payout control board, the game ball received by the sprocket is connected to the succeeding game ball so that the load due to the weight of the game ball is applied to the sprocket is maintained. The Rukoto.

  The dispensing device 830 includes at least a dispensing motor 834 and a sprocket. The payout motor 834 is an electrical drive source, and the sprocket can be rotated by the rotation of the output shaft of the payout motor 834 being transmitted.

  On the outer periphery of the sprocket, there are provided a certain number of front recesses that can receive one game ball passing through a bent passage that constitutes the ball passage by a pair of bent passage walls as a ball passage formed in the front, A fixed number of rear recesses are provided that can receive one game ball passing through the bent passage constituting the ball passage by a pair of bent passage walls as a ball passage formed at the rear.

  Specifically, a sprocket is rotatably disposed in a ball delivery space formed in the prize ball front box. In the outer periphery of the sprocket, in the ball delivery space, three concave portions into which game balls are fitted are equally divided every 120 degrees. A ball delivery space is also formed in the prize ball back box that covers the rear surface of the prize ball front box, and sprockets are also rotatably arranged in this ball delivery space. In the outer periphery of the sprocket, in the ball delivery space, three concave portions into which game balls are fitted are equally divided every 120 degrees. That is, the three recesses of the sprocket arranged in the ball delivery space formed in the prize ball front box are arranged in the ball delivery space formed in the prize ball back box 832 covering the rear surface of the prize ball front box. It is arrange | positioned ahead of three recessed parts of a sprocket.

  In a state in which the payout motor 834 is controlled to be stopped by the payout control board 951, a spherical passage is formed by a pair of bent passage walls as a spherical passage formed forward on a ridge line that is a boundary portion between the sprocket and the front recess. By setting the state in which the game ball passing through the bending passage is configured, the weight of the game ball is urged by the sprocket in one rotational direction. In addition, on the ridge line that is the boundary portion between the outer peripheral portion of the sprocket and the rear recess, a state in which the game ball passing through the bent passage that constitutes the spherical passage is received by a pair of bent passage walls as a spherical passage formed at the rear. As a result, the game ball's own weight is urged by the sprocket in another rotational direction opposite to the one rotational direction.

  Specifically, in a state where the sprocket is stopped at a fixed position, in the ball delivery space formed in the prize ball table box, the sprocket is placed on the prize ball table box on the ridge line that is the boundary between the outer periphery of the sprocket and the recess. In the ball delivery space formed in the prize ball back box, the prize ball back box is placed on the ridge line that is the boundary between the outer periphery of the sprocket and the recess. It is controlled by the payout control board 951 so as to be in a state of receiving a game ball passing through the bent passage formed in the above.

  As a result, it is in a state of receiving the game ball passing through the bent passage formed in the prize ball front box on the ridge line which is the boundary portion between the outer peripheral portion and the recess of the sprocket, and the ball formed in the prize ball back box In the delivery space, the sprocket is maintained at a fixed position by receiving the game ball passing through the bent passage formed in the prize ball back box on the ridge line which is the boundary portion between the outer peripheral portion and the concave portion of the sprocket. In this state, the sprocket is viewed from the front side when the weight of the game ball passing through the bent passage formed in the prize ball front box is on the ridge line that is the boundary portion between the outer peripheral portion and the concave portion of the sprocket. Thus, the load can be applied in the clockwise direction. On the other hand, the sprocket is placed on the ridge line where the weight of the game ball passing through the bent passage formed in the prize ball back box 832 is a boundary portion between the outer peripheral portion and the concave portion of the sprocket, and the payout device 830 is placed on the front side. When viewed from the top, the load can be applied in the direction of rotating counterclockwise.

  As described above, in a state where the payout motor 834 is controlled to be stopped by the payout control board 951, a spherical passage formed forward on a ridge line that is a boundary portion between the outer peripheral portion of the sprocket and the concave portion as the front concave portion. A state in which a game ball passing through a bent passage constituting a ball passage is received by a pair of bent passage walls is set so that the weight of the game ball is directed to the sprocket in one rotation direction (clockwise as viewed from the front side of the dispensing device 830). Urged in the direction of rotation). At the same time, the game ball passing through the bent passage constituting the ball passage is received by a pair of bent passage walls as a ball passage formed rearward on the ridge line which is the boundary portion between the outer peripheral portion of the sprocket and the concave portion as the rear concave portion. By setting the state, the game ball's own weight causes the sprocket to rotate in a direction opposite to the one direction of rotation (the direction in which the payout device 830 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front side). The direction of rotation counterclockwise as viewed from the front side).

  As a result, the sprocket is biased in one rotation direction (a direction in which the payout device 830 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front side) by the weight of the game ball, and one rotation direction (the payout device 830 is turned off). By being urged in another rotational direction (a direction in which the dispensing device 830 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front side) opposite to the direction in which the clockwise direction is viewed from the front side, each other The rotations in the rotation direction can cancel each other.

  For this reason, even if a small motor having a very small static torque compared to the static torque of a large motor is adopted as the payout motor 834, the sprocket can be used in a state where the payout motor 834 is stopped and controlled by the payout control board 951. The stopped state can be maintained. Therefore, a small motor can be adopted as the payout motor 834. By adopting the same type as the small motor that operates the movable body provided on the game board 5 as the payout motor 834, it is possible to contribute to reducing the cost of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  In the above-described embodiment, the payout control MPU 954a controls the voltage switching circuit provided in the payout motor drive circuit and the drive ICPIC, so that, for example, the drive torque and static torque of the payout motor 834, which is a small stepping motor, are controlled. Although the generated control is performed, such a circuit and control can be applied to a small stepping motor provided for operating various movable bodies of the game board 5.

[7-3. Peripheral control board]
The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1530, a liquid crystal and sound control unit 1540, and a volume adjustment volume 1510a. Peripheral control unit 1530 performs effect control based on various commands from main control board 1310.

  The liquid crystal and sound control unit 1540 includes a VDP 1540a. The VDP 1540a performs drawing control of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the frame side second effect display device 460A, and controls sound control such as BGM and sound effects reproduced from the pair of upper speakers 573 and the pair of lower speakers 921. Do.

  The volume adjustment volume 1510a includes a knob portion that can be rotated, and adjusts the volume of BGM, sound effects, and the like output from the pair of upper speakers 573 and the pair of lower speakers 921 according to the rotation operation of the knob portion. (Hereafter referred to as “Hall side volume adjustment function”). Note that the peripheral control unit 1530 and the liquid crystal and sound control unit 1540 may be separate as illustrated or may be integrated. In this case, the processing performed by the peripheral control MPU 1530a of the peripheral control board 1510 can be substituted by the VDP 1540a of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 1540, or vice versa.

  In the peripheral control board 1510, when the volume adjustment volume 1510a is operated by rotating the knob, the peripheral control MPU 1530a creates operation history information of the volume adjustment volume 1510a as history information of the detection signal output along with this. However, it may be set in the operation unit information acquisition storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c in association with the hall-side volume adjustment function.

  That is, the created operation history information is linked to the hall side volume adjustment function in the operation unit information acquisition storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c, and whether or not the volume adjustment volume 1510a is operated while each function is in operation. Is written. The peripheral control MPU 1530a determines whether or not the volume adjustment volume 1510a is operated while the hall-side volume adjustment function is operating, for example, based on the various history information set in the operation unit information acquisition storage area (for example, whether there is a volume adjustment operation). Or not) can be grasped after the fact.

  As described above, when the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with the volume adjustment volume 1510a, the energization to the amplifier (not shown) is controlled by the hall clerk so that the volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6 intentionally. The output mode can be changed to a desired mode.

  On the other hand, the peripheral control board 1510 is equipped with a player-side volume adjustment function. As the player-side volume adjustment function, first, the peripheral control MPU 1530a of the peripheral control board 1510 that has received the operation signal of the operation unit (for example, the operation button 410) that can be operated by the player performs a speaker operation according to the operation content. A function of changing the volume and setting the volume of the speaker to the volume after the change can be exemplified.

  Furthermore, as the player-side display light amount adjustment function, the peripheral control MPU 1530a of the peripheral control board 1510 that has received the operation signal of the operation button 410 that can be operated by the player performs the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the operation content. (The frame side effect display device 460) can be changed to change the light amount of the game board side effect display device 1600 (or the frame side effect display device 460) to the changed light amount.

  In addition, as a player-side light-emitting body light amount adjustment function, the peripheral control MPU 1530a of the peripheral control board 1510 that has received the operation signal of the operation button 410 that can be operated by the player has the LED group (or The light amount of the lamp group) is changed, and the light amount of the game board side effect display device 1600 (or the frame side effect display device 460) is set as the changed light amount.

  According to the player-side volume adjustment function, player-side display light amount adjustment function, or player-side light-emitting body light amount adjustment function as described above, the player can continue the game in a desired environment set intentionally. become able to.

[7-3-1. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1530 includes a peripheral control MPU 1530a, a peripheral control ROM 1530b, a peripheral control RAM 1530c, a peripheral control SRAM 1530d, and a peripheral control external watchdog timer 1530e. The peripheral control MPU 1530a is a kind of microprocessor. Peripheral control ROM 1530b controls various processes such as a sub-control program that controls a power-on process that is executed when power is turned on, and that is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power is turned on, and that controls a rendering operation. Various control data and various schedule data are stored.

  The peripheral control RAM 1530c is a variety of information (for example, game board side effect display that is inherited across the peripheral control unit steady process executed every time a V blank signal from the VDP 1540a of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 1540 described later is input. Information for managing schedule data for defining a screen to be drawn on the apparatus 1600, schedule data for defining light emission modes such as various LEDs, and the like) are stored.

  The peripheral control SRAM 1530d stores various types of information that is continued across days (for example, information for managing a history of occurrence of a big hit gaming state, information for managing a special performance flag, and the like). The peripheral control external watchdog timer 1530e monitors whether or not the peripheral control MPU 1530a is operating normally (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control external WDT 1530e”).

  Peripheral control RAM 1530c can hold the stored content only for the time when power is restored immediately after a momentary power failure occurs, and the power is cut off for a long time (when a long-time interruption occurs) ), The peripheral control SRAM 1530d is supplied with backup power by a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (not shown) provided on the power supply board (hereinafter referred to as “electrolytic capacitor for SRAM”). The stored contents can be held for about 50 hours.

  By providing an electrolytic capacitor for SRAM on the power supply board, when the game board 5 is removed from the pachinko gaming machine 1, backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 1530d. Therefore, the peripheral control SRAM 1530d stores the stored contents. You lose the contents because you can't hold it.

  The peripheral control external WDT 1530e is a timer for monitoring whether or not the system of the peripheral control MPU 1530a is running out of control. When this timer expires, the peripheral control external WDT 1530e is reset by hardware. That is, the peripheral control MPU 1530a is reset when it does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 1530e to the peripheral control external WDT 1530e within a certain period (until the timer ties). The peripheral control MPU 1530a is configured not to be reset because the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 1530e can be restarted when a clear signal is output to the peripheral control external WDT 1530e within a certain period.

  The peripheral control MPU 1530a incorporates a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like. Upon receiving various commands from the main control board 1310, each decorative board of the game board 5 is based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs etc. provided in the lamp is outputted from the serial I / O port for lamp driving board via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown). Transmit to the drive board.

  Peripheral control MPU 1530a outputs game board side motor drive data for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided in game board 5 to a serial I / O for motor drive board. It is transmitted from the port to the motor drive board via the peripheral control output circuit.

  The peripheral control MPU 1530a outputs the door-side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 3 to the serial I for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. / O port to the peripheral control output circuit. In the present embodiment, the boards that perform the decoration control on the frame side are collectively referred to as “frame decoration drive amplifier boards”.

  Various commands from the main control board 1310 are input to the serial I / O port for main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1530a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). A detection signal from a rotation detection switch for detecting the posture of the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 provided in the decorative rotating body unit 530, and a pressure detection for detecting the operation of the operation button 410 The detection signal from the switch is serialized by a door side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the door frame relay board 911 and the door frame left side decoration board 160 (frame decoration drive amplifier board as a heat source). The serialized operation unit detection data is transmitted from the door-side serial transmission circuit via the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral control input circuit, and the serial I / O for operation unit detection of the peripheral control MPU 1530a. Input to O port.

  Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, photo sensors) for detecting the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are not shown on the game board side serial (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180. Serialized by the transmission circuit, and this serialized movable body detection data is input from the game board side serial transmission circuit to the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 1530a via the peripheral control input circuit. . The peripheral control MPU 1530a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 1510 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input / output of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

  Peripheral control MPU 1530a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control built-in WDT”). I'm diagnosing.

[7-3-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU 1530a which is a microcomputer will be described. As shown in FIG. 205, the peripheral control MPU 1530a is centered on the peripheral control CPU core 1530aa, and includes a peripheral control built-in RAM 1530ab, a peripheral control DMA (abbreviation of Direct Memory Access) controller 1530ac, a peripheral control bus controller 1530ad, and peripheral control various serial I. / O port 1530ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1530af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1530ag, peripheral control analog / digital converter (hereinafter referred to as peripheral control A / D converter) 1530ak, and the like.

  Peripheral control CPU core 1530aa reads / writes various data to / from peripheral control built-in RAM 1530ab and peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac via internal bus 1530ah, while peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1530ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1530af, Various data are read from and written to the various peripheral control parallel I / O ports 1530ag and the peripheral control A / D converter 1530ak via the internal bus 1530ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1530ad, and the peripheral bus 1530ai.

  The peripheral control CPU core 1530aa reads various data from the peripheral control ROM 1530b via the internal bus 1530ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1530ad, and the external bus 1530h, while the peripheral control RAM 1530c and the peripheral control SRAM 1530d Various data are read and written via the bus 1530ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1530ad, and the external bus 1530h.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac includes a storage device such as a peripheral control built-in RAM 1530ab, a peripheral control ROM 1530b, a peripheral control RAM 1530c, and a peripheral control SRAM 1530d, a peripheral control various serial I / O port 1530ae, a peripheral control built-in WDT 1530af, and a peripheral control various parallel I. / O port 1530ag and a dedicated controller for independently transferring data between devices such as the peripheral control A / D converter 1530ak and the like without using the peripheral control CPU core 1530aa. ~ It has four channels called DMA3.

  Specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac includes a storage device of a peripheral control built-in RAM 1530ab built in the peripheral control MPU 1530a, various peripheral control serial I / O ports 1530ae built in the peripheral control MPU 1530a, and a built-in peripheral control WDT 1530af. In order to transfer data independently between the peripheral control various parallel I / O port 1530ag and the input / output device such as the peripheral control A / D converter 1530ak without the peripheral control CPU core 1530aa. In addition, the peripheral control built-in RAM 1530ab reads from and writes to the storage device via the internal bus 1530ah, while the peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1530ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1530af, and the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1530. g, and the peripheral control A / D converter input and output devices such as 1530Ak, via the peripheral control bus controller 1530ad and peripheral bus 1530Ai, reading and writing.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac includes storage devices such as a peripheral control ROM 1530b, a peripheral control RAM 1530c, and a peripheral control SRAM 1530d, and various peripheral control serial I / O ports 1530ae, a built-in peripheral control WDT 1530af, and a peripheral control. In order to independently transfer data between devices such as various parallel I / O ports 1530ag and input / output devices such as the peripheral control A / D converter 1530ak, the peripheral control CPU core 1530aa The control ROM 1530b, the peripheral control RAM 1530c, and the peripheral control SRAM 1530d are read and written via the peripheral control bus controller 1530ad and the external bus 1530h, while various peripheral control serials are provided. I / O port 1530ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1530af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1530ag, peripheral control A / D converter 1530ak, and other input / output devices via peripheral control bus controller 1530ad and peripheral bus 1530ai Read and write.

  The peripheral control bus controller 1530ad controls the internal bus 1530ah, peripheral bus 1530ai, and external bus 1530h to control the central processing unit of the peripheral control MPU core 1530aa, peripheral control built-in RAM 1530ab, peripheral control ROM 1530b, peripheral control RAM 1530c, and peripheral control Various devices such as storage devices such as SRAM 1530d, peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1530ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1530af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1530ag, and peripheral control A / D converter 1530ak It is a dedicated controller that exchanges various data between them.

  Peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1530ae are: lamp drive board serial I / O port, motor drive board serial I / O port, frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port, frame decoration drive amplifier board LED Serial I / O port, frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port, main control board serial I / O port, and operation unit information acquisition serial I / O port.

  Peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (peripheral control built-in WDT) 1530af is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 1530a is running out of control. When this timer is tie-mapped, a hardware reset is performed. It has become. That is, if the peripheral control CPU core 1530aa starts the watchdog timer, the peripheral control CPU core 1530aa resets if it does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1530af within a certain period (until the timer tie-maps). Will take. When the peripheral control CPU core 1530aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1530af within a certain period, the peripheral control CPU core 1530aa can restart the timer count, so that it is not reset.

  The peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1530ag output a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1530e in addition to outputting various latch signals such as a game board side motor drive latch signal and a door side motor drive light emission latch signal. The peripheral control various parallel I / O port 1530ag is a game (not shown) in which detection signals from various detection switches for detecting the original position and the movable position of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are provided on the motor drive board 4180. A movable body information acquisition latch for serializing by the board side serial transmission circuit and receiving the serialized movable body detection data from the game board side serial transmission circuit by the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 1530a A signal is output, or a lighting signal of an LED mounted on the upper decorative board of the upper decorative unit 280 in the door frame 3 is output.

  This LED is a high-intensity white LED and serves as a confirmation notification lamp for informing that the occurrence of the big hit gaming state has been confirmed. In the present embodiment, by adopting a configuration in which the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O port 1530ag are directly electrically connected, the path between the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O port 1530ag is shortened. It is possible to take noise countermeasures for LED lighting control. The LED lighting control is executed in a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, and other LEDs and the like other than the LED are executed in a peripheral control unit steady process described later.

  Peripheral control A / D converter 1530ak is electrically connected to volume control volume 1510a, and the resistance value is varied by rotating the knob of volume control volume 1510a. The peripheral control A / D converter 1530ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the knob portion from an analog value to a digital value, and converts it into a value in 1024 steps from a value 0 to a value 1023. . In the present embodiment, the values of 1024 levels are divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0-6.

  In accordance with such setting of the substrate volume, in the present embodiment, for example, the volume adjustment function on the hall side (hereinafter referred to as “hole side volume adjustment function”) is set to mute on the board volume 0 and to the maximum volume on the board volume 6. The volume is set so that the volume increases from the substrate volume 0 toward the substrate volume 6.

  In the peripheral control board 1510, BGM is applied to the speaker housed in the speaker unit 920 of the main body frame 4 and the speaker of the door frame 3 so that the VDP 1540 a of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 1540 has a volume set to the board volume 0 to 6. And sound effects. As described above, by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob portion, a sound such as BGM or sound effect is output from the speaker housed in the speaker unit 920 of the main body frame 4 and the speaker provided on the door frame 3. ing.

  In addition, in this embodiment, in addition to BGM and sound effects, notification sounds for notifying the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of troubles and fraudulent behavior related to the pachinko gaming machine 1, contents for game effects, etc. The notification sound is configured to be output from the pair of upper speakers 573 and the pair of lower speakers 921, but the notification sound and notification sound are reproduced without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob part. It is a mechanism to be done. The volume from mute to maximum volume is adjusted by the effect control program controlling the liquid crystal and sound control unit 1540 (VDP 1540a described later).

  The volume adjusted by the effect control program can be smoothly changed from the mute to the maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into the above seven stages. Thereby, for example, even when a store clerk or the like of the hall rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume to a low level, the BGM reproduced from the pair of upper speakers 573 and the pair of lower speakers 921 Although the effect sound such as sound effects is reduced, the notification sound set to a high volume (in this embodiment, the maximum volume) when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or when the player is cheating Can be output. Therefore, even if the volume of the production sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk and the like from becoming difficult to notice the notification sound that is output due to the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's fraud.

[7-3-1b. Peripheral control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 1530b includes various control programs for controlling the peripheral control unit 1530, the liquid crystal and sound control unit 1540, the RTC control unit 1565, various data, various control data, various schedule data, and predetermined individual information (hereinafter “ (Referred to as “regulated individual information”) (effect control storage unit).

  The various schedule data includes screen generation schedule data for displaying a screen to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, and a light emission mode generation for controlling the light emission mode of various LEDs. There are schedule data, sound generation schedule data for reproducing BGM, sound effects, notification sounds, and the like, and electrical drive source schedule data for controlling the drive mode of an electrical drive source such as a motor or solenoid.

  The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data for defining the screen configuration in time series, and the order of the screens to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is specified. Has been. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by arranging light emission data defining the light emission modes of various LEDs in time series.

  The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in time series, and the order in which sounds such as BGM and sound effects are reproduced is defined. This sound command data defines a channel number for instructing which of the plurality of channels in the built-in sound source of the VDP 1540a should incorporate sound data such as BGM and sound effects. Here, in the present embodiment, the form in which the sound source is built in the VDP 1540a is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a form in which the sound source is externally attached to the VDP 1540a may be used. Not too long.

  The electrical drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids in time series, and defines the operation of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

  Various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 1530b may be directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1530b and executed, or copied to various control program copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1530c described later when the power is turned on. Some are read and executed. Also, various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1530b can be directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1530b, or when various power control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1530c described later are turned on. Some of which are copied in the above are read out.

  In the peripheral control ROM 1530b, as one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 1565, luminance correction for correcting the luminance of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board side effect display device 1600 The program is included.

  When the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is mounted with an LED type, this luminance correction program corrects a decrease in luminance due to aging of the game board side effect display device 1600, which will be described later. The date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, the current date and time, the brightness setting information, etc. are acquired from the built-in RAM that is built in the RTC control unit 1565 and receives power backup even in the event of a power failure. The acquired brightness setting information is corrected based on the correction information.

  This correction information is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1530b. As will be described later, the luminance setting information includes luminance adjustment information for adjusting the range of the luminance of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%, And the brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 that has been set.

  For example, if the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on and the current date and time, and June has already passed since the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, When the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1530b and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on when the luminance of the LED included in the luminance setting information is 75%, the 75% The luminance of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information so that the luminance is further increased by 5%, which is the correction information acquired with respect to. Lights up.

  On the other hand, when 12 months have already passed since the date when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1530b, and the brightness setting is performed. When the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on when the luminance of the LED included in the information is 75%, the luminance is 85% which is further increased by 10% which is the correction information acquired with respect to the 75%. As described above, the luminance of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information.

[7-3-1c. Peripheral control RAM]
As shown in FIG. 205, the peripheral control RAM 1530 c includes a backup management target work area that exclusively stores information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs, and this backup Dedicated backup first area and backup second area for storing a copy of various information stored in the work area to be managed, and a copy of various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 1530b Various control program copy areas that are stored in the memory, various control data copy areas that are stored in the peripheral control ROM 1530b, in which various data, various control data, various schedule data, and the like are copied, and various controls The program is executed Of the various types of information to be updated, a backup unmanaged work area dedicated to store what is not a backup target, is provided by.

  When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (including when power is restored due to a momentary power failure or power failure), the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged work area and cleared to zero. For the work area to be managed, the backup first area, and the backup second area, the main control board 1310 (power-on command output means) when the supply of power is started by the power source of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (when the power is turned on) The power-on command (see FIG. 207) output by the command indicates the start of the RAM clear effect and the start of each state effect (for example, the operation switch 952 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. It is cleared to zero (when instructing the start of production at the time).

  The work area to be backed up includes effect information (1fr) that is various information updated in the peripheral control unit steady process that is executed each time a V blank signal from the VDP 1540a of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 1540 described later is input. Bank0 (1fr) that is stored exclusively as a backup target, and production information (1 ms) that is various information updated in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process that is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt described later occurs is used as a backup target. Bank 0 (1 ms) that is stored exclusively.

  Here, the names of Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1 ms) will be briefly described. “Bank” is a minimum management unit representing the size of a storage area for storing various information. The following 0 means a normally used storage area for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, “Bank 0” means that the size of the storage area that is normally used is the minimum management unit.

  “Bank1,” “Bank2,” “Bank3,” and “Bank4” provided in an area extending from the backup first area to the backup second area, which will be described later, have the same storage area size as “Bank0”. It means that As described later, “(1fr)” is output from the peripheral control MPU 1530a when the VDP 1540a outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. In order to output a V blank signal indicating that the screen data can be accepted to the peripheral control MPU 1530a, every time the V blank signal is input, in other words, the peripheral control unit steady process for each frame (1 frame) Are executed to “Bank0”, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3”, and “Bank4” (the production information (1fr) and the production backup information (1fr) described later). Are used in the same meaning). As described later, “(1 ms)” indicates that “Bank0”, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3”, “Bank0”, “Bank1”, “Bank3”, and the like are executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. And “Bank 4”, respectively (effect information (1 ms) and effect backup information (1 ms) to be described later are also used in the same meaning).

  Bank 0 (1fr) is provided with a lamp drive board side transmission data storage area, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area, a reception command storage area, an RTC information acquisition storage area, a schedule data storage area, and the like. Yes. In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area, game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the game board 5 is set. The frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area outputs a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs or the like provided on each decoration board of the door frame 3. Is a storage area in which door-side emission data STL-DAT is set, and a received command storage area is a storage area in which various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received and the received various commands are set. Yes, the RTC information acquisition storage area is a storage area in which various information acquired from the RTC control unit 1565 (the RTC built-in RAM of the RTC 15654a described later) is set. Ri, schedule data storage area on the basis of the command received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU1310a of), which is a storage area where various schedule data corresponding to the received command is set. In the schedule data storage area, some schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 1530b to the various control data copy areas are read and set, while various schedule data are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1530b and set. Some are done.

  Bank 0 (1 ms) includes a frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area, a motor drive board side transmission data storage area, a movable body information acquisition storage area, an operation unit information acquisition storage area, a history information storage area, and the like. Is provided.

  The frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area is set with frame door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 3. The motor drive board side transmission data storage area is a game board side for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided in the game board 5 This is a storage area in which motor drive data SM-DAT is set.

  On the other hand, in the movable body information acquisition storage area, various information obtained by acquiring the original position and movable position of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5 is set. The operation unit information acquisition storage area is a first decorative surface portion 532 and a second decorative surface portion 533 of the decorative rotating body unit 530 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the decorative rotating body unit 530. Information (such as operation history information of the operation button 410 created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the decorative rotating body unit 530, etc.) .) Is a storage area to be set.

  In addition, Bank0 (1fr) lamp drive board side transmission data storage area and frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area, Bank0 (1 ms) frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area and motor drive The board-side transmission data storage area is divided into two areas, a first area and a second area.

  When the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed in a certain cycle, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the first region of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage region, and the peripheral control unit steady processing is performed in the next cycle. When the process is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area, and each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, The game board side light emission data SL-DAT are alternately set in the first area and the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area. For example, when the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area in the peripheral control part steady process of this cycle, the peripheral control part steady process of the previous cycle is executed. In this case, the process proceeds based on the game board side light emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area.

  When the peripheral control unit steady process is executed in a certain cycle, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area is set with the door side light emission data STL-DAT in the first area, and in the next cycle When the control unit steady process is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area.

  That is, each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area. For example, when the door-side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area in the peripheral control section steady process of the current cycle, the peripheral control section stationary of the previous cycle is set. When the process is executed, the process proceeds based on the door-side emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area.

  When a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is executed, the frame door side motor drive data STM-DAT is set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area. When the period peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the frame door side motor drive data STM-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area. Each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the frame door side motor drive data STM-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area. The

  For example, when the frame door side motor drive data STM-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process of the current period, When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the process proceeds based on the frame door side motor drive data STM-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area.

  When the above peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the motor drive board side transmission data storage area is set with the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT in the first area, and the peripheral control unit of the next cycle When the 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area, and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. Each time it is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT are alternately set in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area.

  Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, for example, game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process of the current cycle. When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process of the previous cycle is executed, the process is performed based on the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area. proceed.

  Next, a description will be given of the backup first area and the backup second area for storing specially copied production information which is various information stored in the backup management target work area.

  In the backup first area and the backup second area, two pairs of two banks as one pair are managed as one page. Production information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, is produced as production backup information (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). In addition, the production information (1 ms), which is the content that is copied to the backup first area and the backup second area at a high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac and stored in the bank 0 (1 ms) that is normally used, As the production backup information (1 ms), every time the 1 ms timer interrupt is generated, the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac copies the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing to the backup first area and the backup second area at high speed. The The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks constituting the page match.

  Specifically, in the first backup area, Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) are one pair, Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) are one pair, and a total of two pairs are managed as one page. Yes. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are the peripheral control DMA in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1530ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, every time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, The peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac copies the data to Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) at high speed. The consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) match. Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  In the backup second area, Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) are one pair, and Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) are one pair, and a total of two pairs are managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are the peripheral control DMA in Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1530ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, every time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, It is copied to Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) match. Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the backup first area has one pair of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr), one pair of Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms), and a total of two pairs as one page. It is an area for management, and the backup second area is one pair of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr), one pair of Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms), and a total of two pairs as one page This is a management area. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area and backup second area.

  In the present embodiment, the production information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr) that is a storage area that is normally used, is the production backup information (1fr), and the peripheral control unit steady process for each frame (1frame). Is executed at a high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac in the backup first area and the backup second area each time is executed, and the production information which is the contents stored in the bank 0 (1 ms) which is a normal storage area (1 ms) is the production backup information (1 ms), and every time the 1 ms timer interrupt is generated, the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac is assigned to the backup first area and the backup second area each time the 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. Will be copied faster Program for executing a fast copy from these peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac are common. That is, in this embodiment, the production information (1fr) and the production information (1 ms) are managed by a common management method (execution of a common program).

[7-3-1d. Peripheral control SRAM]
The peripheral control SRAM 1530d includes a backup management target work area 1530da dedicated to storing information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs, and the backup management target work area 1530da. A backup first area and a backup second area are provided for storing a copy of various stored information.

  Note that the content stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1530d is that the power-on command from the main control board 1310 is stored in the RAM when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on (including power recovery due to an instantaneous power failure or power failure as described above). Even when instructing the start of the clear effect and the start of each state effect, it is not cleared to zero. This is completely different from the point that the backup management target work area, the backup first area, and the backup second area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c are cleared to zero.

  The backup management target work area 1530da is production information (SRAM) that is various information continued across days (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of the big hit gaming state and special production flag management) Bank 0 (SRAM) for storing information etc. exclusively as a backup target. Here, the name of Bank 0 (SRAM) will be briefly described. As described above, “Bank” is a minimum management unit indicating the size of a storage area for storing various types of information. The following 0 means a normally used storage area for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, “Bank 0” means that the size of the storage area that is normally used is the minimum management unit.

  “Bank1,” “Bank2,” “Bank3,” and “Bank4” provided in an area extending from the backup first area to the backup second area, which will be described later, have the same storage area size as “Bank0”. It means that Since “(SRAM)” is a backup target for various types of information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1530d, “Bank0”, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3”, and “Bank4” are added respectively. (Effect information (SRAM) and effect backup information (SRAM) described later are also used in the same meaning).

  Next, the backup first area and the backup second area for storing specially copied production information (SRAM), which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1530da, will be described. The backup first area and the backup second area are managed with one pair of two banks and one page as one page.

  Production information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area used normally, is production backup information (SRAM) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). The peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac copies the data to the backup first area and the backup second area at high speed. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks constituting the page match.

  Specifically, in the backup first area, Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) are managed as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). The page 15 is copied at high speed by the controller 1530ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

  In the backup second area, Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) are managed as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). This page is copied at high speed by the controller 1530ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by checking whether the contents of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) match.

  Thus, in this embodiment, the backup first area is an area for managing Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) as one pair, and managing this one pair as one page, and the backup second area is This is an area for managing Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) as one pair, and managing this one pair as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area and backup second area.

[7-3-2. Liquid crystal and sound control unit]
The liquid crystal and sound control unit 1540 controls drawing of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 and sound control such as BGM and sound effects reproduced from the pair of upper speakers 573 and the pair of lower speakers 921. And do.

  The liquid crystal and sound control unit 1540 has a built-in sound source for controlling sound such as BGM and sound effects (hereinafter also referred to as “built-in sound source”), and a game board side effect display device 1600 and a door frame side effect display device. Various character data (VDP (Video Display Processor) 1540a for performing drawing control 460, display contents of the game board side effect display device 1600 and display contents displayed in the display region of the door frame side effect display device 460 ( And sprite data with sprite numbers) and a liquid crystal and sound ROM 1540b for storing various sound data such as BGM and sound effects, and serialized BGM and sound effects as audio data as a relay board for door frames 911 and door frame left side decoration board 160 (frame decoration drive amplifier board as a heat source) An audio data transmission IC 1540c to be transmitted.

  Further, in this liquid crystal and sound ROM 1540b, the size conversion used for changing the display size in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 and displaying the common image respectively. Image data is stored in advance.

  In the peripheral control unit 1530, the peripheral control MPU 1530a extracts screen generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1530b of the peripheral control unit 1530 or the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1530c. Set to 1530cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c.

  The peripheral control MPU 1530a extracts the top screen data of the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area from the peripheral control ROM 1530b of the peripheral control unit 1530 or the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1530c, and VDP 1540a. In response to the input of a V blank signal, which will be described later, the next screen data following the first screen data in accordance with the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area is sent to the peripheral control unit 1530. Extracted from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1530b or the peripheral control RAM 1530c and output to the VDP 1540a.

  As described above, the peripheral control MPU 1530a, according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area, converts the screen data arranged in time series to the screen generation schedule data every time a V blank signal is input. One by one from the top screen data is output to the VDP 1540a.

  The peripheral control MPU 1530a extracts the sound command data at the head of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1530b of the peripheral control unit 1530 or the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1530c. Set to 1530c in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c. The peripheral control MPU 1530a extracts the sound command data at the head of the schedule data for sound generation set in the schedule data storage area from the peripheral control ROM 1530b of the peripheral control unit 1530 or the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1530c, and VDP 1540a. Output to.

  Thereafter, the peripheral control MPU 1530a receives the next sound command data following the head sound command data in accordance with the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area in response to the input of the V blank signal. The data is extracted from various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1530b or the peripheral control RAM 1530c of 1530 and output to the VDP 1540a.

  As described above, the peripheral control MPU 1530a outputs necessary sound command data to the VDP 1540a in accordance with the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area every time the V blank signal is input.

[7-3-2a. VDP]
The VDP 1540a (drawing control means) includes an internal RAM that can temporarily store data in addition to the above-described internal sound source. As part of such a built-in RAM, the VDP 1540a includes a material image RAM that can temporarily store material image data such as sprite data and repeatedly overwrite a large number of material image data.

  Furthermore, when screen data included in the screen generation schedule data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1530a, the VDP 1540a extracts character data and door frame side character data from the liquid crystal and sound ROM 1540b based on the input screen data. Then, the drawing data for one screen (one frame) respectively generated for creating sprite data and displaying it on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are stored, and further, the video is displayed. A VRAM for storing drawing data for one screen (one frame) for processing is also built in (hereinafter referred to as “built-in VRAM”).

  The VDP 1540a outputs image data for the game board side effect display device 1600 out of the drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM (frame buffer) from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and also displays the door frame side effect display. By outputting image data for the device 460 from the channel CH2 to the door frame side effect display device 460, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are synchronized.

  When the peripheral control MPU 1530a outputs the screen data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 to the VDP 1540a, the VDP 1540a displays the input screen. Character data is extracted from the liquid crystal and sound ROM 1540b based on the data, and sprite data is created and displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Are generated on the built-in VRAM. Among the generated drawing data, the VDP 1540a outputs image data for the game board side effect display device 1600 from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and also outputs image data for the door frame side effect display device 460 from the channel CH2. Output to the door frame side effect display device 460.

  That is, “screen data for one screen (for one frame)” means drawing data for one screen (for one frame) displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. This is the data to generate above.

  The VDP 1540a outputs drawing data for one screen (for one frame) from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and also displays image data for the door frame side effect display device 460 from the channel CH2 on the door frame side effect display. When output to the device 460, a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1530a can be received is output to the peripheral control MPU 1530a.

  In this embodiment, since the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, a V blank signal is output. The interval is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps).

  The peripheral control MPU 1530a executes peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, in response to the input of this V blank signal. Here, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the liquid crystal sizes of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Even in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control MPU 1530a and the VDP 1540a are mounted, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change somewhat.

  The VDP 1540a employs a frame buffer method. In this “frame buffer method”, drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be drawn on the screens of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is held in a frame buffer (built-in VRAM). The drawing data for one screen (one frame) held in the frame buffer is output to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. In this embodiment, a so-called double buffer method is adopted.

  The VDP 1540a extracts the sound command data of the liquid crystal and sound ROM 1540b when the sound command data including the reproduction channel is input from the peripheral control MPU 1530a by sound control by the automatic channel method described later based on the command from the main control board 1310. Then, by controlling the built-in sound source, sound data of effect sound such as BGM and sound effects is incorporated into the channel designated by the peripheral control MPU 1530a. In addition, the VDP 1540a controls the audio data transmission IC 1540c by using a reproduction channel specified by the peripheral control MPU 1530a in an automatic channel method to be described later, thereby allowing BGM, sound effects, etc. from the pair of upper speakers 573 and the pair of lower speakers 921. Play the sound. Note that the sound command data includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the channel in which the sound data is incorporated.

  For a plurality of channels in the built-in sound source of the VDP 1540a, in addition to the sound data of the effect sound and the sub-volume value for adjusting the sound volume, a prescribed value (maximum sound volume value) for the sound data of the notification sound is set. Subvolume value for is included. As for the effect sound, any one of the substrate volumes 0 to 6 adjusted according to the rotation operation of the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a is set as the sub volume value. On the other hand, regarding the notification sound, the maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value regardless of the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a. The sound command data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of each sound assigned to each playback channel.

  When the notification sound is reproduced in a state where the above-described effect sound is reproduced from the pair of upper speakers 573 and the pair of lower speakers 921, the effect sound is overwritten with the notification sound, and only the notification sound is paired with the pair of upper speakers 573 and Playback is started from the pair of lower speakers 921.

[7-3-2b. Liquid crystal and sound ROM]
Character data used for drawing in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is stored in advance in the liquid crystal and sound ROM 1540b. The liquid crystal and sound ROM 1540b stores sound data of sound effects and notification sounds in advance. In the present embodiment, each sound type is mainly classified into BGM (music), sound effects, and notification sounds.

  In this embodiment, as the type of each sound, for example, notification sounds 1 to 3 that may generate a reproduction request regardless of the state of the game, a notification sound such as a jackpot confirmation sound that announces that the jackpot has been confirmed. Cite. In addition, the types of sounds include normal BGM reproduced during the first half of the special symbol change, reach BGM reproduced during the second half of the special symbol change, and jackpot BGM played during the big hit. it can.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, as a sound effect of each sound, a pending winning sound that generates a playback request regardless of the state of the game, a button pressing sound that generates a playback request when a button is pressed, and a playback when the left symbol stops Left symbol stop sound, right symbol stop sound played when the right symbol is stopped, middle symbol stop sound played when the middle symbol is stopped, full-screen preview sound effect played when a full screen notice is generated Ancillary effect sound effect that is played when the advance notice is generated, an advance effect sound effect A that is reproduced when the advance notice A is generated, an early effect B sound effect that is reproduced when the advance notice B is generated, the first half The first half notice C sound effect played when the notice C occurs, the second notice A sound effect reproduced when the second notice A occurs, the second notice B sound effect reproduced when the second notice B occurs, And after the second half notice C is played back It illustrates a prior notice C sound effects.

[7-3-2c. Audio data transmission IC]
When the audio data is input from the VDP 1540a through the reproduction channel, the audio data transmission IC 1540c receives the right audio data as a positive signal and a negative signal as serial data of a differential method using a positive signal and a negative signal as a frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 911. (And, if necessary, the door frame left side decorative board 160).

  When serialized audio data is input from the VDP 1540a in this manner, the audio data transmission IC 1540c also combines the door frame relay board 911 as differential serial data with the left audio data as a positive signal and a negative signal. It transmits toward the door frame left side decorative board 160 (frame decorative drive amplifier board). Thus, the VDP 1540a can reproduce BGM, sound effects, and notification sound in stereo when using two reproduction channels from the pair of upper speakers 573 and the pair of lower speakers 921 via the audio data transmission IC 1540c. On the other hand, when one reproduction channel is used, BGM, sound effects, and notification sounds can be reproduced in monaural. In the present embodiment, the pair of upper speakers 573 and the pair of lower speakers 921 are exemplified by four speakers. However, it goes without saying that the number of speakers is not limited to this. Absent.

[7-3-3. RTC control unit]
As shown in FIG. 205, the RTC control unit 1565 is configured around the RTC 1565a, and holds, for example, calendar information that can specify the date and time and time information that can specify the hour, minute, and second.

  The RTC 1565a includes a RAM 1565aa that holds calendar information and time information (hereinafter also referred to as “RTC built-in RAM”). The RTC 1565a is supplied with power from a battery 1565b (in this embodiment, a so-called button battery is used as an example) as a driving power source and a backup power source (second power source) for the RTC built-in RAM.

  That is, the RTC 1565a is supplied with power from the battery 1565b independently of the peripheral control board 1510 without being supplied with power from the peripheral control board 1510 at all. Thereby, even if the power from the main power supply that supplies power is cut off, the RTC 1565a updates and holds calendar information and time information by supplying power from the battery 1565b.

  In addition, the battery 1565b is configured to supply power upon receiving a power failure warning signal, which will be described later, separately from the main power supply, and stop supplying power on the basis of the start of power supply by the main power supply. In such a power supply configuration, the RTC 1565a is supplied with power from the main power supply or the battery 1565b.

  The peripheral control MPU 1530a of the peripheral control unit 1530 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM of the RTC 1565a, sets the information in the RTC information acquisition storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c, and based on the acquired calendar information and time information. The effects can be unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460.

  As such an effect, for example, on December 25, a screen on which a Christmas tree or a reindeer appears is unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. For example, a screen for performing a countdown to reach the game screen is unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Calendar information and time information are set at the time of factory shipment.

  Although the RTC built-in RAM of the RTC control unit 1565 will be described in detail later, the peripheral control board 1510 performs main control from the time when the peripheral control board 1510 receives a power failure detection signal output as a power failure notice from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Information about the time until the time point (second time point) when the power-on command output from the board 1310 is received, that is, the information regarding the power failure time is stored.

  On the other hand, in addition to calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM stores and holds LED brightness setting information when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is an LED type. ing. The peripheral control MPU 1530a acquires brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM and adjusts the brightness of the backlight by PWM control when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is an LED type. .

  The luminance setting information includes luminance adjustment information for adjusting the range of the luminance of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%, and the currently set game. The brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is included.

  In the RTC built-in RAM, in addition to the calendar information, time information, and luminance setting information, the calendar information, time information, and luminance setting information are input as date / time and hour / minute / second information first stored in the RTC built-in RAM. Information is also stored.

  When the backlights of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are mounted with a cold cathode tube type, the peripheral control MPU 1530a performs ON / OFF switching control or ON of the backlight. Only.

  Various information such as calendar information, time information, luminance setting information, and input date / time information stored in the RTC built-in RAM is set in the production line of the gaming machine manufacturer. In the production line, for example, in order to perform various tests such as a display test of the game board side effect display device 1600, the year when the input date information is input on the production line as the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on. Set to the date and time of manufacture, which is the date and time.

  Thus, in addition to the calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM has brightness setting information and input date and time information when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is an LED type, etc. In addition, it stores and holds information that needs to be maintained independently of the model information of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, the probability of occurrence of a big hit gaming state with a low probability or a high probability).

  The luminance setting information and the like stored and held in the RTC built-in RAM relates to the luminance of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, for example. When the operation button 410 of the decorative rotating body unit 530 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the like. When the operation button 410 is operated during a period when the game board side effect display device 1600 or the like is in the waiting state and the operation button 410 is operated, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 or the like. Is displayed.

  By operating the operation button 410 of the decorative rotating body unit 530 according to the setting mode screen, the calendar information and time information are reset, and the backlight brightness of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted to a desired brightness. Can be. The adjusted desired brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is overwritten (updated) as the brightness of the LED stored in the brightness setting information.

  In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU 1530a executes the above-described brightness correction program, so that when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is an LED type, the game board side effect is provided. The luminance decrease due to the secular change of the display device 1600 is corrected.

  The peripheral control MPU 1530a obtains input date / time information from the RTC built-in RAM of the RTC control unit 1565, specifies the date / time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, and specifies calendar information and time for specifying the date. Time information that specifies minutes and seconds is acquired, the current date and time are specified, and the brightness range of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, is adjusted in increments of 5%. Brightness setting information including brightness adjustment information for performing and the brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 that is currently set. The acquired luminance setting information is corrected based on correction information stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1530b.

  For example, if the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on and the current date and time, and June has already passed since the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, When the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1530b and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on when the luminance of the LED included in the luminance setting information is 75%, the 75% The luminance of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information so that the luminance is further increased by 5%, which is the correction information acquired with respect to. Lights up.

  On the other hand, when 12 months have already passed since the date when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1530b, and the brightness setting is performed. When the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on when the luminance of the LED included in the information is 75%, the luminance is 85% which is further increased by 10% which is the correction information acquired with respect to the 75%. As described above, the luminance of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information.

  Note that the current date and time may be specified by acquiring calendar information specifying the date and time and time information specifying the hour, minute and second directly from the RTC built-in RAM of the RTC control unit 1565. Current calendar information that is set in the calendar information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 in the RTC information acquisition storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 in the control power-on and reset processing And the current time information set in the time information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 may be acquired to identify the current date and time.

[7-3-4. Volume adjustment volume]
As already described, the volume adjustment volume 1510a can adjust the volume of BGM, sound effect, and notification sound reproduced from the pair of upper speakers 573 and the pair of lower speakers 921 by rotating the knob portion. it can. As described above, the resistance value of the volume adjusting volume 1510a is varied by rotating the knob. The peripheral control A / D converter 1530ak electrically connected thereto converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the knob portion from an analog value to a digital value, for example, a value of 0 to The value is converted into a value in 1024 steps up to the value 1023.

  In the present embodiment, the value of the 1024 steps is divided into seven, and the volume values are managed as the substrate volumes 0 to 6 as described above. The substrate volume 0 is set to mute, the substrate volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set from the substrate volume 0 to the substrate volume 6 so as to increase. The liquid crystal and sound control unit 1540 (VDP 1540a) receives BGM, sound effects, and notification sounds from the pair of upper speakers 573 and the pair of lower speakers 921 so as to be set to any tone value of the substrate volume 0 to 6, respectively. It is configured to play.

[8. Various commands related to transmission / reception of main control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIGS. 206 to 209.

  206 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951, and FIG. 207 shows an example of various commands sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. It is a table. FIG. 208 is a table showing a continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 in FIG. 207, and FIG. 209 shows various commands from the payout control board 951 received by the main control board 1310. It is a table which shows an example.

  First, a prize ball command which is a command related to payout transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951 will be described, and then various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. Various commands from the payout control board 951 received by the main control board 1310 will be described.

[8-1. Various commands sent from the main control board to the payout control board]
The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives detection signals from various sensors (switches) such as the general winning port sensor 3020, the first starting port sensor 3112, the second starting port sensor 3113, and the big winning port sensors 2402, 2403. When input, a prize ball command for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as a prize ball is transmitted to the payout control board 951 based on these detection signals.

  This prize ball command is a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In this embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the CR unit 6 are electrically connected (corresponding to a so-called “CR machine”), a prize ball command transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951. , Commands 10H to 1EH ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) are prepared. The CR unit 6 communicates with the pachinko gaming machine 1 to drive the payout motor 834 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (payout device 830) to pay out the game ball as a rented ball to the upper plate 301 or the lower plate 302. Device. In the command 10H described above, one prize ball is designated, in the command 11H, two prize balls are designated,..., And in the command 1EH, 15 prize balls are designated. The payout control board 951 drives the payout motor 834 to perform payout control of game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

  On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the ball rental machine are installed adjacent to the game hall (hall) and the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the ball rental machine are electrically connected (such pachinko machines). A gaming machine is referred to as a “general machine”.) As shown in FIG. 206 (b), commands 20H to 2EH are prepared as prize ball commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951. The ball lending machine is a device that directly pays out game balls as lending balls to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302, which are storage dishes.

  In the command 20H described above, one prize ball is designated, in the command 21H, two prize balls are designated,..., And in the command 2EH, 15 prize balls are designated. The payout control board 951 controls the payout of game balls by driving the payout motor 834 for the designated number of prize balls.

  As a command common to the CR machine and the general machine, a command 30H is prepared as shown in FIG. 206 (c), and the self check is designated in the command 30H.

  If the transmitting side does not receive an ACK signal that is output as a command reception confirmation from the receiving side for a predetermined period after transmitting the command, the transmitting side transmits a command 30H and checks whether or not the ACK signal is input. Check the status. In the case of the CR machine in this embodiment, the payout control board 951 confirms the connection state with the CR unit 6.

[8-2. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the progress of the game.

  As shown in FIG. 207 and FIG. 208, the various commands are related to special figure 1 synchronized effect, special figure 2 synchronized effect related, jackpot related, power-on, general figure synchronized effect related, ordinary electric character effect related, notification display, state Classified into display, test related, and others.

  These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits). As shown in FIGS. 207 and 208, the status (1) has a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) and indicates a command type. STTS value) and a mode (MODE value) that has a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) and indicates variations in performance.

  For these status (STTS value) and mode (MODE value), values of a plurality of transmission information storage areas (hereinafter also referred to as “RWM”) secured in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM are used. That is, among the 8 bits of each command, for example, the upper 3 bits use the value of the first transmission information storage area (RWM1), while the lower 5 bits use the value of the second transmission information storage area (RWM2). In this way, in the peripheral control board 1510, when the peripheral control MPU 1530a receives a command transmitted from the main control board 1310, the command can be disassembled bit by bit to grasp the status and mode.

[8-2-1. Special Figure 1 Entrainment Production Related]
The special figure 1 tuning effect related is based on the detection signal from the first start port sensor 3112, and the classification is related to the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display board 1191, as shown in FIG. There are commands with names of special figure 1 synchronized production start, special symbol 1 designation, special figure 1 synchronized production end, and variable state designation. These various commands are assigned “A * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The special figure 1 synchronized production start command is a command for instructing the start of the special figure synchronized production with the production pattern designated in the mode. Command. The special figure 1 tuning effect end command is a command for instructing the end of the special figure 1 tuning effect, and the change state designation command is a command for instructing a transition to at least one of the probability and the short time state.

  As for the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 1 tuning effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 1 fluctuation start, and the special symbol 1 designation command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol 1 tuning effect starts. The synchronized production end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 variation time elapses (when the special symbol 1 is confirmed), and the variation state designation command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol winning information designation. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92) in the main control timer interruption process described later (command transmission means).

[8-2-2. Special figure 2 synchronized production]
The special figure 2 synchronization effect is based on the detection signal from the second start port sensor 3113, and the classification is related to the special symbol display 1405 of the function display board 1191 as shown in FIG. FIG. 2 includes commands with names of synchronized production start, special symbol 2 designation, and special figure 2 synchronized production end. These various commands are assigned “B * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The special figure 2 synchronized production start command designates the start of the special figure synchronized production with the production pattern designated in the mode, and the special symbol 2 designated command designates the off, specific big hit, non-specific big hit, and the special figure 2 synchronous production. The end indicates the end of the special figure 2 synchronization effect.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 2 tuning effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 2 fluctuation start, and the special symbol 2 designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the special symbol 2 tuning effect. The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 variation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 2 is confirmed). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[8-2-3. Jackpot related]
As shown in Fig. 207, the jackpot-related category includes a jackpot opening, a grand prize opening 1 open Nth display, a big prize opening 1 closing display, a big prize opening 1 count display, a big hit ending, a big hit symbol display, a small hit opening , Commands for opening the small hits display, the small hit count display, and the small hits ending. These commands are assigned “C * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The jackpot opening command instructs the opening of the jackpot opening, and the winning prize opening 1 opening N-th display command starts during the opening of the winning prize opening 1 of the 1st to 16th rounds (N of the winning prize openings 2005 and 2006 of the attacker unit 2100). The opening of the first round is instructed, and the closing display command of the grand prize opening 1 is started during the closing of the big winning opening 1 between rounds (closed between the rounds of the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 of the attacker unit 2100) Or the winning prize 1 count display command indicates that the game has entered the winning prizes 2005 and 2006 detected by the winning prizes sensors 2402 and 2403. The jackpot ending command instructs the start of the jackpot ending, and the jackpot chart Display command is for instructing the big hit symbol information display.

  The small hit opening command indicates the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit release display command indicates the start of the small hit opening (the opening of the big winning holes 2005 and 2006 of the attacker unit at the small hit or the start of opening). The small hit count display command is a small hit medium / large prize opening winning effect (an effect when a game ball that has entered the big winning hole 2103 during small hit is detected by the big winning hole sensors 2402 and 2403). The small hit ending command is for instructing the start of the small hit ending.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the big hit opening command is sent at the start of the big hit opening, and the big winning opening 1 opening Nth display command is when the big winning opening 1 is opened in the 1st to 16th rounds (the big win of the attacker unit) The winning prize opening 1 closing display command is sent when the winning prize opening 1 is closed (when the closing of the winning prize openings 2005 and 2006 of the attacker unit is started). The winning prize opening 1 count display command is used when the winning prize opening 1 is opened and when the count to the winning prize opening 1 is changed (when the winning prize opening 2005, 2006 of the attacker unit is opened and when the winning prize opening 2005, 2006 is entered). When the game ball is detected by the big prize sensor 2403, 2402), the jackpot ending command is Sent when the jackpot ending start, big hit symbol display command is sent during the special winning opening open (when opening the special winning opening 2005, 2006 of the attacker units).

  The small hit opening command is transmitted at the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit release display command is transmitted when the small hit is released (at the time of the small hit, when the attacker unit big winning opening 2005, 2006 is opened) The count display command is transmitted at the time of winning the small winning medium winning prize opening (when the game ball that has entered the big winning opening 2005, 2006 during the small winning is detected by the big winning entry sensors 2402, 2403). The hit ending command is transmitted at the start of the small hit ending. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[8-2-4. Power on]
As shown in FIG. 207, the power-on category includes various commands named power-on. This power-on command is assigned “D * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The power-on command instructs the start of the RAM clear effect and the start of each state effect (for example, instructs to start the effect when the operation switch 952 of the payout control board 951 is operated when the power is turned on. Is).

  As the transmission timing of the power-on command, it is transmitted when the main control board power is turned on when the RAM is not cleared and when the RAM is not cleared. Specifically, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, when the operation switch 952 of the payout control board 951 is operated when returning from a power failure or a momentary power failure, the main control side power-on process described later Is executed, and a power-on command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[8-2-5. General drawing related production]
The general pattern synchronization effect is based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 2401, and, as shown in FIG. 207, the general pattern display effect 1189 on the function display board 1191 is started. There are commands with the names of “design design”, “end design synchronize effect”, and “designate state when changing”. These various commands are assigned “E * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The general pattern synchronization effect start command instructs the general pattern synchronization effect start with the effect pattern specified in the mode, the general symbol specification command specifies off, specific big hit, non-specific big hit, The normal-time synchronized production end is instructed, and the variable state designation command is for instructing the probability and the short time state.

  As the transmission timings of these various commands, the general symbol synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the time of the normal symbol 1 fluctuation start, the general symbol designation command is transmitted immediately after the general symbol synchronization effect start, and the general symbol synchronization effect end command is When the normal symbol variation time has elapsed (when the normal symbol is determined), the variation state designation command is transmitted immediately after the ordinary symbol winning information designation. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[8-2-6. Ordinary electric role production related]
The ordinary electric role effect is related to a pair of movable pieces 2105 that are opened and closed by the driving of the start opening solenoid 2105. As shown in FIG. 207, as shown in FIG. It has a command named ending per common figure.

  These various commands are assigned “F * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The opening command per base map is an instruction to start the opening per base map, and the open command display command is a normal power open start (a pair of movable pieces 2105 are expanded in the left-right direction by driving the start opening solenoid 2105). The ending command per universal map indicates the start of ending per universal map.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the opening command per base map is transmitted at the start of the opening per base map, and the general power open display command is displayed when the general power is open (the pair of movable pieces 2105 is driven by the start opening solenoid 2105). The ending command per universal map is transmitted at the start of ending per universal map. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[8-2-7. Notification display]
As shown in FIG. 208, the notification display category includes commands named as winning abnormality display, connection abnormality display, disconnection / short circuit abnormality display, magnetic detection switch abnormality display, door opening, and door closing. These various commands are assigned “6 * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1). However, FIG. 208 shows a part of commands prepared as notification displays. For example, when an abnormality is detected in the vibration sensor 2405, the movable piece 2105 is in an open state. Description of other various commands is omitted, such as a command in the case where a start winning abnormality is detected when a game ball is received at the second start port 2004 when there is not.

  The winning abnormality display command indicates that a game ball has entered the big winning holes 2005 and 2006 of the attacker unit 2100 when the ball has entered the big winning 2103 mouth other than during the big hit (the condition device is in operation). When the game ball is detected by the big winning opening sensors 2402 and 2403), an instruction to start winning abnormality notification is given. The connection abnormality display command is, for example, instructing the start of connection abnormality notification when there is an electrical connection abnormality in the path between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. The display command is, for example, when a disconnection / short circuit of the electrical connection between the main control board 1310 and any one of the first start port sensor 3112, the second start port sensor 3113, the big prize port sensors 2402, 2403, etc. occurs. The magnetic detection switch abnormality display command instructs the start of the magnetic detection switch abnormality notification when an abnormality occurs in the magnetic sensor 2404.

  When the door frame opening command is in a state where the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4 based on a detection signal (opening signal) from the door frame opening switch 618 input via the payout control board 951. The door frame closing command is used when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618. An instruction to end the opening notification is given. On the other hand, the main body frame opening command is a state in which the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 based on a detection signal (open signal) from the main body frame opening switch 619 input via the payout control board 951. In some cases, the main body frame opening notification is instructed, and the main body frame closing command is a state in which the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 based on a detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 619. In this case, the main body frame release notification end is instructed.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, a winning abnormality display command is transmitted when winning a prize winning opening other than during a big hit (when the condition device is operating), and a connection abnormality displaying command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951. The command is sent when there is no ACK reply (ACK signal) from the payout control board 951 at the time of command transmission, and the disconnection / short circuit abnormality display command includes the first start port sensor 3112, the second start port sensor 3113, and the big prize port sensor This is transmitted when any of 2402, 2403, etc. is broken or short-circuited, and the magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is transmitted when abnormality of the magnetic sensor 2404 is detected.

  On the other hand, the door frame opening command is transmitted when the door opening is detected (when the door frame 3 is open to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618). The door frame closing command is transmitted when door closing is detected (when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 based on a detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618).

  The body frame release command is transmitted when the body frame release is detected (when the body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame release switch 619). The body frame closing command is transmitted when the body frame closing is detected (when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame opening switch 619). . These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[8-2-8. Status display]
As shown in FIG. 208, the status display section includes commands named “frame state 1 command”, “error cancellation navigation command”, and “frame state 2 command”. These various commands are assigned a status of “7 * H” and a mode of “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The frame status 1 command, the error canceling navigation command, and the frame status 2 command are commands having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the payout control board 951, and detailed descriptions thereof will be described later. . When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 951, as shown in FIG. 208, “7 * H” is displayed. While setting as a status, the received command is set as a mode as it is. That is, when the main control MPU 1310a receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 951, it adds “7 * H” as additional information to these received commands. Thus, the command is shaped into a command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

  The shaped frame status 1 command is transmitted when the power is restored, when the status of the frame is changed, and when the error cancellation navigation is performed. The error cancellation navigation command is transmitted when the error cancellation navigation is performed. And when the frame state changes. Note that the shaped frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[8-2-9. Test related]
As shown in FIG. 208, the test-related category includes various commands named test. This test command is assigned “8 * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). And is predetermined according to the specification content of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The test command is a command transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, and instructs various inspections of the peripheral control board 1510. Examples of such test commands include commands for inspecting various substrates such as the peripheral control unit 1530, the liquid crystal and sound control unit 1540, the door frame relay substrate 911, and the door frame left side decorative substrate 160. it can.

  In this main control board 1310, test command ports are assigned for each time for the convenience of the hardware, so that it is difficult to manage on the hardware side. Ports that can be managed by a software timer are assigned to a predetermined port among a plurality of ports, while those that can be managed by a flag are assigned to specific ports.

  As a test command transmission timing, it is transmitted when the main control board power is turned on when the RAM is not cleared and when the RAM is not cleared. Specifically, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, when the operation switch 952 of the payout control board 951 is operated when returning from a power failure or a momentary power failure, the main control side power-on process described later Is executed, and a test command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[8-2-10. Others]
As shown in FIG. 208, the other categories include start opening prize, change shortening operation end designation, high probability end designation, special symbol 1 memory, special symbol 2 memory, normal symbol memory, special symbol 1 memory pre-reading effect, and A command with a name of special symbol 2 storage prefetching effect is included. These various commands are assigned a status of “9 * H” and a mode of “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The start opening prize command is an instruction to start the start opening winning effect, and the start of the effect when a game ball enters the first start opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first start opening sensor 3112. Based on the detection signal from the second start port sensor 3113, the start of the effect when the game ball enters the second start port 2004 is instructed. The change shortening operation end designation command is used to instruct a state transition from the change shortening operation state to the change shortening non-operation state. The high probability end designation command is for instructing state transition from a high probability state (corresponding to a probability variation state described later) to a low probability state (corresponding to a normal gaming state described later). Special symbol 1 storage command is 0 to 4 special symbol 1 reservations (the game ball enters the first starting port 2002 and is still used for the variable symbol display on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display board 1191. The number of balls that have not been made (reserved number)). Special symbol 2 memory command is 0 to 4 special symbol 2 reservations (the game ball enters the second starting port 2004 and is still used to display the special symbol on the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display board 1191. The number of balls that have not been made (reserved number)). The normal symbol storage command is 0 to 4 normal symbol 1 reservations (the number of balls that have not yet been used for normal symbol variation display on the normal symbol display 1189 of the function display board 1191 after the game ball passes through the gate part 2350). Tells the number of holds)).

  The special symbol 1 storage pre-reading effect command (preceding judgment instruction command) is pre-read before the special symbol 1 hold is used for the special symbol variable display on the first special symbol display unit 1403 of the function display board 1191. Instructing the start of a pre-reading effect informing the advance notice of the display result by the first special symbol display 1403 based on 1 hold.

  The special symbol 2 storage pre-reading effect command (preceding determination instruction command) is pre-read before the special symbol 2 hold is used for the special symbol variation display on the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display board 1191. 2 Instructs the start of a pre-reading effect to notify the advance notice of the display result by the second special symbol display 1405 based on the hold. In the present embodiment, these special symbol 1 storage pre-reading effect commands and special symbol 2 storage pre-reading effect commands are also collectively referred to as “memory pre-reading effect commands”.

  The start opening prize command is issued when a detection signal is detected from the first start opening sensor 3112 along with a game ball entering the first start opening 2002 or when a game ball enters the second start opening 2004. When the detection signal is detected from the second start opening sensor 3113 (hereinafter also referred to as “start opening winning”), the sound is mainly heard from the speaker of the speaker unit 920 and the speaker of the door frame 3 provided in the main body frame 4. Is transmitted to notify the user.

  The change shortening operation end designation command is transmitted at the end of the stop period after the change is confirmed (after the lapse stop period has elapsed) after digesting the specified number of change reductions. The high-probability end designation command is transmitted at the end of the stop period (after the lapse of the stoppage period) after the change is confirmed after digesting the high-probability count in the case of “high probability N times”. The special symbol 1 memory command is used when the special symbol 1 operation holding ball number changes (the game ball enters the first starting port 2002 and the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display board 1191 still displays the variation of the special symbol. In a state where there is a reserve number that is not being used, when a game ball enters the first start port 2002 and the number of reserves increases, or when the number of reserves increases, the first special symbol display 1403 displays the variation of the special symbol. To be used when the number of holds decreases).

  The special symbol 2 memory command is used when the special symbol 2 operation holding ball number changes (the game ball enters the second start opening 2004 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display board 1191 still displays the variation of the special symbol. In a state where there is a reserve number that is not used, when a game ball enters the second start port 2004 and the number of reserves increases, or when the number of reserves increases, a special symbol change display is displayed on the second special symbol display 1405. To be used when the number of holds decreases).

  The normal symbol storage command is a normal symbol 1 operation holding ball number change (the number of holdings that the game ball passes through the gate part 2350 and is not yet used in the normal symbol display 1189 of the function display board 1191 for the normal symbol change display) When there is a game ball passing through the gate part 2350 and the number of holds increases, or when the number of holds decreases by using the normal symbol display 1189 for the normal symbol change display from the number of holds. ).

  The special symbol 1 storage pre-reading effect command is transmitted when the number of special symbol 1 operation holding balls increases (when the number of holding balls increases when the game ball enters the first start port 2002). The special symbol 2 storage pre-reading effect command is transmitted when the number of special symbol 2 actuated reserved balls increases (when the number of held balls increases when the game ball enters the second start port 2004). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[8-3. Various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board]
Next, various commands from the payout control board 951 received by the main control board 1310 will be described. As shown in FIG. 209, the various commands from the payout control board 951 are divided into command classifications named frame state 1, error release navigation, and frame state 2. It is assumed that the priorities of the various commands are set in the order of, for example, frame state 1, error release navigation, and frame state 2.

  As the frame status 1 command, “out of ball”, “full tank”, “in stock of 50 or more”, “connection abnormality”, and “CR not connected” are prepared. A value 1 is set to bit 0 (B0, “B” represents a bit) when the ball is out, and a value 1 is set to bit 1 (B1) when the ball is full. In more than 50 stocks, the value 1 is set in bit 2 (B2), the value 1 is set in bit 3 (B3) when connection is abnormal, and the value 1 is set in bit 4 (B4) when CR is not connected. . In bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) of the frame state 1 command, a value 1 is set in B5, a value 0 is set in B6, and a value 0 is set in B7.

  In the error canceling navigation command, “ball check”, “counting switch error”, and “retry error” are prepared. In the case of a sphere, a value 1 is set in bit 2 (B2), a value 1 is set in bit 3 (B3) in a counting switch error, and a value 1 is set in bit 4 (B4) in a retry error. Here, “counting switch error” indicates whether or not a malfunction of the counting switch 838 has occurred. The “retry error” means that a game ball that is not consistent with the retry operation has been repeatedly paid out. Bit (B0), bit (B1), and bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) of the error cancellation navigation command have a value 0 for B0, a value 0 for B1, a value 0 for B5, a value 1 for B6, The value 0 is set in B7.

  As the frame state 2 command, for example, “in-between balls” is prepared. During ball removal, the value 1 is set to bit 0 (B0). Bit 1 (B1) to bit 7 (B7) of the frame state 2 command have a value 0 for B1, a value 0 for B2, a value 0 for B3, a value 0 for B4, a value 1 for B5, a value 1 for B6, and B7. The value 0 is set in.

  The transmission timing of these various commands is as follows. The frame status 1 command is transmitted when the power is restored, when the frame status is changed, and during error cancellation navigation. The error cancellation navigation command is transmitted at the time of error cancellation navigation. The frame status 2 command is transmitted when power is restored and when the frame status changes. These various commands are actually transmitted in the command transmission process of step S558 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control part power-on process described later.

[9. Various control processes of main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 210 is a flowchart showing an example of main-control-side power-on processing. FIG. 211 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the main-control-side power-on process of FIG. FIG. 212 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control timer interruption process. First, various random numbers used for game control will be described, and then the operation of the initial value update type counter, main control side power-on processing, and main control side timer interrupt processing will be described.

[9-1. Various random numbers]
As various random numbers used for game control, it is mainly used to determine a big hit determination random number for use in determining whether to generate a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state and an initial value of this big hit determination random number. A random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination, a random number for determining the reach for use in determining whether or not to generate a reach (reach out of reach) when the big hit gaming state is not generated, and a first special symbol display 1403 And a random number for variation pattern for use in determining the variation pattern of the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display 1405, and the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol when the big hit gaming state is generated. The jackpot symbol used for determining the jackpot symbol derived and displayed on the display 1405, and the jackpot used for determining the initial value of this jackpot symbol And the pattern for the initial value determination random number, are prepared. Note that the big hit symbol random number described above is used for determining the small hit symbol that is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 when the small hit gaming state is generated. It is also used as a random number.

  On the other hand, the big hit symbol initial value determining random number described above is also used as a small hit symbol initial value determining random number for use in determining the initial value of the small hit symbol random number. Further, in addition to these random numbers, a random number for determining a normal symbol for use in determining whether or not to open / close the pair of movable pieces 2105 and an initial value for the random number for determining per normal symbol are used. A random number for determining an initial value for determining a normal symbol, a random number for a normal symbol variation pattern for use in determining a variation pattern of a normal symbol variably displayed on the normal symbol display 1189, and the like are prepared.

  For example, the counter that updates the jackpot determination random number is configured by hardware built in the chip, and has a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value (in this embodiment, the value 0 as the minimum value). Is updated within the value 32767) as the maximum value, and the range from this minimum value to the maximum value is incremented by incrementing by 1 every time a main control timer interrupt process described later is performed. This counter counts up from the big hit determination initial value determination random number toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value (value 0) toward the big hit determination initial value determination random number.

  When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the jackpot determination random number, the initial value determination random number for jackpot determination is updated. Such a counter updating method is referred to as an “initial value updating type counter”.

  The random number for determining the initial value for determining the big hit is obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for drawing one value from the fixed numerical range of the counter for updating the random number for determining the big hit. On the other hand, the random numbers for normal symbol determination and the initial value determination random numbers for normal symbol determination described above are also updated by the same method as the method for updating the jackpot determination random number described above.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, when the counter for updating the big hit determination random number is counted up, the initial value for determining the big hit determination is determined in the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the big hit determination random number. The random number is updated by executing the initial value lottery process. However, when the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared, the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination is based on the ID code extracted by the main control MPU 1310a from the non-volatile RAM built therein. The initial value deriving process for deriving always the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the jackpot determination random number is executed, and this derived fixed value is set.

  Note that when the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared, the operation switch 952 of the payout control board 951 is operated when the power is turned on, or the main control MPU 1310a main process is performed in the main control side power-on process described later. Check that the check sum value (sum value) obtained by calculating the sum of the game information stored in the control built-in RAM as a numerical value is stored in the main control side power-off process (when the power is turned off) For example, it may not be the same as the sum value (sum value).

  In the big hit determination initial value determination random number described above, the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value deriving process is always overwritten and updated. As described above, the value set in the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination is derived using the ID code, and is prevented from being analyzed by taking the following two steps of security measures. The

  First, as a first security measure, if the ID code is stored in the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a by the manufacturer that manufactured the main control MPU 1310a, the ID code is prevented from being rewritten even if an external device is used. That is. On the other hand, a second security measure is to derive the same fixed value based on the ID code by executing an initial value derivation process when clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Here, an advantage will be described in which an ID code is extracted from a nonvolatile RAM incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a and the extracted ID code is used as a random number for determining an initial value for determining a big hit.

  For example, a person who intends to illegally acquire a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball obtains the game board 5 by some method, disassembles it, and uses an ID code stored in advance in a nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. Even if it is possible to grasp the timing when the value of the counter for updating the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot determination value coincide with each other, the ID code is assigned a unique code for identifying the individual. Therefore, the ID code is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU provided in another game board.

  That is, in other game boards, the timing at which the counter value for updating the jackpot determination random number matches the jackpot determination value is also completely different from that of the acquired game board 5. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is completely useless in other game boards, that is, other pachinko gaming machines. Even if a momentary power failure is generated at each interval and a game winning ball is entered at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 at every predetermined interval, a big hit gaming state cannot be generated. .

[9-2. Operation of counter with initial value update type]
When clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM (when the RAM is cleared), the main control MPU 1310a takes out the ID code from the built-in non-volatile RAM, and then uses the taken out ID code to generate a jackpot determination random number. An initial value deriving process for deriving the same fixed value from the fixed numerical value range of the counter to be updated is executed. The derived fixed value is set in the initial value update type counter.

  The initial value update type counter counts up from this fixed value toward the maximum value and then counts up from the minimum value toward the fixed value as the first cycle. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the big hit determination random number, one value is randomly selected from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the big hit determination random number as the initial value determination random number for the big hit determination The initial value lottery process is executed, and the value obtained by this lottery is set.

  In the second cycle, the initial value update type counter counts up from the value obtained by the lottery toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value to the value obtained by the lottery. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the big hit determination random number, the initial value lottery process is executed again, the value obtained by this lottery is set, and the initial value update type counter As the third cycle, the value obtained by the lottery is counted up toward the maximum value.

  In the present embodiment, the value 32668 to the value 32767 are set for the low probability as the range of the big hit determination value (the jackpot determination range), which is read from the normal determination table, whereas the value 31768 to the value for the high probability. 32767 is set and is read from the probability variation determination table.

  In the present embodiment, the counter that updates the jackpot determination random number updates a predetermined fixed numerical range ranging from a value 0 as a minimum value to a value 32767 as a maximum value. In other words, the range of the jackpot determination value (the jackpot determination range) is a range closer to the maximum value from the intermediate value (value 16384) between the minimum value and the maximum value in either of the low probability and the high probability. Is set.

  Here, in the present embodiment, as a big hit determination value range (big hit determination range), a value 10 to a value 209 are set for a low probability, and a value 10 to a value 339 are set for a high probability.

  That is, with a low probability, the number of random numbers (big hit determination random numbers) that are big hits is 200, and with a high probability, the number of random numbers (big hit determination random numbers) that are big hits is 330. Here, in this embodiment, in order to prevent a plurality of random numbers to be counted and updated from being synchronized with each other, the number of other random number values acquired at the same time is the 200, except when the acquisition times of random number values are different. Other than that, for example, it is a prime number.

  In other words, in this embodiment, if the acquisition time of the random number value is different from the big hit determination random number (for example, the value of the random number for determining the big hit game mode acquired when the game ball passes through the gate 2575 described later) The number of random numbers that are big hits can be made not to be prime numbers. In the present embodiment, the small hits described above are, for example, big hit determination random numbers corresponding to the number (50) of the number of big hit symbols (200) with low probability divided by four.

  Considering the case where such a big hit judgment value range is set, the minimum and maximum values are the same regardless of whether the jackpot judgment value range (big hit judgment range) is low probability or high probability. Is set to a range closer to the minimum value side from the intermediate value (value 16384).

  In such a case, the period from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 to the time when it becomes the first value 10 in the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range), and this value 10 When the period from the next value 11 to the maximum value (value 32767) is compared, the probability of the former period being drawn by the above-described initial value lottery process is much lower than that of the latter period. In other words, the range from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 to the last value (value 209 for low probability, value 339 for high probability) in the range of jackpot determination value (big hit determination range). And the range from the value after this last value (value 210 for low probability, value 340 for high probability) to the maximum value (value 32767), the former range is the latter Compared with the range, the probability of being drawn by the initial value lottery process is extremely low.

  Then, for example, the game ball is obtained by illegally acquiring the timing at which the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 by some method and irradiating the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 with radio waves. If a fraudulent act is performed as if entering the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the value of the initial value update type counter is one of the jackpot determination value ranges (jackpot determination range). It can be said that there is a high probability that

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the range of the jackpot determination value (the jackpot determination range) is from an intermediate value (value 16384) between the minimum value and the maximum value in either the low probability or the high probability. If it is set to the range close to the maximum value side, the initial value update type counter value immediately before the value that becomes the first value in the range of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range) from the timing when the value becomes zero. A period extending to the time when the value (value 32667 for low probability, value 31767 for high probability) and a period extending from the first value (value 32668 for low probability, value 31768 for high probability) to the maximum value (value 32767) And the former period is much more likely to be drawn by the above-described initial value lottery process than the latter period.

  In other words, the value before the first value in the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 (value 32667 for low probability, value 31767 for high probability). And the range from the first value (value 32668 for low probability, value 31768 for high probability) to the maximum value (value 32767), the former range is compared to the latter range The probability of being drawn by the initial value lottery process is extremely high.

  Then, the initial value update type counter has a range from the value 0 to the value before the first value (value 32667 for low probability, value 31767 for high probability) in the range of jackpot determination value (big hit determination range). Of these values, one of the values becomes a value drawn by the initial value lottery process, and is set in the above-described big hit determination initial value determination random number. Counting up, and then counting up from the minimum value to the value obtained by lottery.

  When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the big hit determination random number, the initial value lottery process is executed again, the value obtained by this lottery is set, and the initial value update type counter Then, the value obtained by the lottery is counted up toward the maximum value.

  That is, as in the present embodiment, the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) is either the low probability or the high probability, and the maximum value side from the intermediate value (value 16384) between the minimum value and the maximum value. Is set to a range close to the initial value update type counter value from the timing when the value becomes 0, the first value in the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) (low value) The period extending to the time when the probability becomes 32667 and the value 31767) with high probability is irregular and rich in randomness.

  Thereby, for example, the game ball is obtained by illegally acquiring the timing at which the value of the initial value updating type counter becomes 0 by some method and irradiating the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 with radio waves. Even if an illegal act pretending to have entered the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 is performed, the value of the initial value update type counter is out of the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) It can be said that the probability of any value is low.

  The initial value update type counter is repeatedly updated in the range from the minimum value to the maximum value. Until the counter reaches the minimum value (first value) in the range of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range) in the second cycle from the minimum value (first value) of the range from the initial value to the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range) The time required is time T0.

  The time required for the counter to reach the minimum value (first value) of the big hit determination value range (big hit determination range) in the third cycle from time T0 is time T1, and time T1 is shorter than time T0. .

  The time required for the counter to reach the minimum value (first value) of the big hit determination value range (big hit determination range) in the fourth cycle from time T1 is time T2, and time T2 is shorter than time T1. .

  As described above, in the initial value update type counter, fluctuation is given to the time when the updated counter becomes the minimum value (first value) of the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) (periodicity). The player is not perceived by the player).

[9-3. Main control side power-on processing]
When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the main control program described above performs the main control side power-on processing as shown in FIGS. 210 and 211 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Do.

  When the main control side power-on process is started, the main control program sets the stack pointer under the control of the main control MPU 1310a (step S10). The stack pointer indicates, for example, the address accumulated on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the memory element (register) being used, or temporarily returns the return address of this routine when returning to this routine after completing the subroutine. This indicates the address stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

  In step S10, the main control program sets an initial address in the stack pointer, and from this initial address, the contents of the register, the return address, etc. are stacked on the stack. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the last stacked stack to the first stacked stack.

  Subsequent to step S10, the main control program starts outputting a power failure clear signal to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e (step S11). The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e includes a comparator MIC21 that is a voltage comparison circuit, and a D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  The comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, compares the voltage between + 24V and the reference voltage, or compares the voltage between + 12V and the reference voltage, and outputs the comparison result. This comparison result shows that when no power failure or instantaneous power failure occurs, the logical value becomes HI and is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, while a power failure or instantaneous power failure occurs. Then, the logic value becomes LOW and is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  In step S11, a power failure clear signal is output to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. This power failure clear signal is input from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function by setting the logic to LOW. Is done.

  As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can release the latch state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. It can be inverted and output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal, and the signal from the 1Q terminal can be monitored.

  Subsequent to step S12, the main control program performs wait timer process 1 (step S12), and determines whether or not a power failure notice signal is input (step S14). The voltage does not increase immediately from when the power is turned on until the voltage reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when there is a power failure or a momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped), when the voltage drops and becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input as a power failure warning from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e.

  Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage from when the power is turned on to when the voltage rises to a predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S12 is a process for waiting after the power is turned on until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes. In this embodiment, the wait timer process 200 is 200 milliseconds ( ms) is set.

  In step S14, it is determined whether or not the power failure notice signal is input. This determination is performed based on the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the above-described D-type flip-flop MIC22, as the power failure warning signal.

  If no power failure warning signal is input after the power is turned on in step S14 until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes, the main control program applies power failure to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The output of the clear signal is stopped (step S15).

  Here, the power failure clear signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a, the logic is HI, and the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC via the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. Is input. Thereby, the main control MPU 1310a can set the D-type flip-flop MIC22 to the latched state. When the D-type flip-flop MIC22 latches the state in which the logic value is LOW and is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 outputs a power failure warning signal from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal.

  Subsequent to step S15, the main control program makes a state in which RAM clear processing for initializing the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) can be executed for a predetermined time from when the power is turned on (when the game side power is turned on). Operation control means). Specifically, the main control program first determines whether or not the operation switch 952 of the payout control board 951 is operated (step S16).

  In this determination, the main control program inputs an error release navigation command (first error release command) based on an operation signal (detection signal) associated with the operation switch 952 of the payout control board 951 being operated to the main control MPU 1310a. Depending on whether or not it is done.

  Based on the logic value of the operation signal, the main control program determines that the RAM is not instructed to be cleared when the logic value of the operation signal from the operation switch 952 is HI, and the operation switch 952 operates On the other hand, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 952 is LOW, it is determined that the instruction to perform the RAM clear is made and it is determined that the operation switch 952 is operated.

  In step S16, when the operation switch 952 is operated, the main control program sets a value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S18). On the other hand, when the operation switch 952 is not operated in step S16, the main control program sets a value 0 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S20).

  That is, the main control program can execute a RAM clear process for initializing a RAM (hereinafter also referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) built in the main control MPU 1310a for a predetermined time from the time of power-on. (Game control side power-on operation control means).

  The above-described RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG indicates whether or not to erase game information related to games such as probability variation, unpaid prize balls, etc. stored in the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) of the main control MPU 1310a. This flag is set to a value of 1 when game information is erased and a value of 0 when game information is not erased. Note that the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in step S18 and step S20 is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Subsequent to step S18 or step S20, the main control program performs wait timer processing 2 (step S22). In this wait timer process 2, wait until the system that performs drawing control of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460A by the liquid crystal and sound control unit 1540 of the peripheral control board 1510 starts (boots). Yes. In this embodiment, 2 seconds (s) is set as a time until booting (boot timer).

  Subsequent to step S22, the main control program determines whether or not the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 (step S24). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when erasing game information and a value of 0 when not erasing game information.

  When the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 in step S24, that is, when the game information is not erased, a checksum is calculated (step S26). This checksum is calculated by regarding the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value and calculating the sum.

  Subsequent to step S26, the main control program calculates the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off processing (power-off), which will be described later, as the calculated checksum value (sum value). It is determined whether or not they match (step S28). If they match, the main control program determines whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG is 1 (step S30).

  This backup flag BK-FLG stores game backup information such as game information, checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power-off process described later. This flag is set to a value of 1 when the main control-side power-off process is normally terminated, and a value of 0 when the main-control-side power-off process is not terminated normally.

  When the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S30, that is, when the main control side power-off process is normally terminated, the main control program sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as the power is restored ( Step S32).

  In this setting, in addition to setting the backup flag BK-FLG to 0, the power recovery time information is read out from the ROM built in the main control MPU 1310a (hereinafter also referred to as “main control built-in ROM”). Is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, “recovery” is a state where the power is turned on from a state where the power is cut off, a state where the power is restored after a power failure or a momentary power failure, and a reset is detected by detecting that a high frequency has been applied, It also includes the state of returning after that.

  Subsequent to step S32, the main control program performs a power-on command creation process (step S34). In the power-on command creation process, the game information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S24, that is, when the game information is erased, or when the checksum value (sum value) does not match in step S28. Alternatively, when the backup flag BK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0) in step S30, that is, when the main control side power-off process has not been terminated normally, the main control program stores all the main control built-in RAM. The area is cleared (step S36).

  That is, the main control program executes the game control side RAM clearing process triggered by the input of the detection signal accompanying the operation of the operation switch 952 described above (payout control side power-on operation control means). Specifically, the main control program is executed by writing the value 0 into the main control built-in RAM. Alternatively, the main control program may read and set a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value.

  The main control MPU 1310a has a logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 952 instructing to clear the RAM. When the game information is erased, the sum value does not match, or the main control side power-off process is normally performed. When not finished, a unique ID code stored in advance in the nonvolatile RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is taken out, and the same value is always obtained from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the jackpot determination random number based on the taken out ID code. An initial value derivation process for deriving a fixed value is performed, and this fixed value is set to the big hit determination initial value determining random number used for determining the initial value of the big hit determining random number described above.

  Subsequent to step S36, the main control program sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S38). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting the initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S38, the main control program performs RAM clear notification and test command creation processing (step S40). In this RAM clear notification and test command creation processing, a power-on command classified into power-on for notifying that the main control built-in RAM is cleared and the initial setting is performed is created, and various peripheral control board 1510 Test commands that are classified as related to tests for inspection are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S34 or step S40, the main control program performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting is to set an interrupt cycle when a main control timer interrupt process described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 ms.

  Subsequent to step S42, the main control program performs interrupt permission setting (step S44). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process is repeated every interrupt cycle set in step S42, that is, every 4 ms.

  Subsequent to step S44, when a predetermined time elapses from when the power is turned on, that is, when the main process on the main control side is started, an error cancellation navigation command associated with the operation of the operation switch 952 (operation switch) is displayed. Execution of the game control side RAM clear process triggered by the reception will be restricted (normal operation control means).

  Next, the main control program sets a value A in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S46). The watchdog timer is cleared by setting value A, value B, and value C in this watchdog timer clear register WCL in order.

  Subsequent to step S46, the main control program determines whether or not a power failure notice signal is input (step S48). As described above, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shut off, or when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, a power failure notice signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure notice if the voltage falls below the power failure notice voltage. The determination in step S48 is made based on this power failure notice signal.

  When no power failure warning signal is input in step S48, the main control program performs a non-winning random number update process (step S50). In the non-winning random number update process, the above-described reach determination random number, fluctuation pattern random number, big hit symbol initial value determining random number, small hit symbol initial value determining random number, and the like are updated. In this way, in the non-winning random number update process, random numbers that are not involved in the winning determination (big hit determination) are updated. It should be noted that the above-described random numbers for normal symbol determination, random numbers for initial value determination for normal symbol, random numbers for normal symbol variation pattern, and the like described above are also updated by this non-winning random number update process.

  Following step S50, the process returns to step S46 again, the main control program sets a value A in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, determines whether or not a power failure warning signal is input in step S48, and this power failure warning notification. If there is no signal input, non-winning random number update processing is performed in step S50, and steps S46 to S50 are repeated. Note that the processing in steps S46 to S50 is referred to as “main control side main processing”.

  On the other hand, when a power failure warning signal is input in step S48, the main control program performs interrupt prohibition setting (step S52). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is not performed, writing to the main control built-in RAM is prevented, and rewriting of game information is protected.

  Subsequent to step S52, the main control program starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S53). Here, the same process as the process that started outputting the power failure clear signal in step S11 is performed. Thus, the main control program can release the latched state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Subsequent to step S53, the main control program includes the start port solenoid 2105, the attacker solenoids 2108A and 2108B, the first special symbol display 1403, the second special symbol display 1405, the upper special symbol storage display 1184, and the lower special symbol storage. The drive signals output to the display 1187, the normal symbol display 1189, the normal symbol storage display 1188, the game status display 1183, the round display 1190, etc. are stopped (step S54).

  Subsequent to step S54, the main control program calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S56). This checksum is calculated by regarding the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value excluding the storage area for the checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG described above.

  Subsequent to step S56, the main control program sets a value 1 to the backup flag BK-FLG (step S58). Thereby, storage of game backup information is completed.

  Subsequent to step S58, the main control program performs clear setting of the watchdog timer (step S60). As described above, the clear setting is performed by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL.

  Following step S60, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the value A, the value B, and the value C are not sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, so that the watchdog timer is not cleared. For this reason, the main control MPU 1310a is reset, and then the main control MPU 1310a performs the main control side power-on process again. Note that the processing of step S52 to step S60 and the infinite loop are referred to as “main control side power-off processing”.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a) is reset when a power failure occurs or when an instantaneous power failure occurs, and performs power-on processing on the main control side when power is restored thereafter.

  In step S28, it is checked whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal. Subsequently, in step S30, whether or not the main control side power-off process has been normally completed. Are inspected. In this way, by checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM twice, it is checked whether or not the game backup information is stored by an illegal act.

[9-4. Main control timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control timer interrupt process will be described. This main control side timer interrupt process is repeated every interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on process.

  When the main control timer interrupt process is started, in the main control board 1310, the main control program sets a value B in the watchdog timer clear register WCL under the control of the main control MPU 1310a (step S70). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL following the value A set in step S46 of the main control side power-on process (main control side main process).

  Subsequent to step S70, the main control program clears the interrupt flag (step S72). When the interrupt flag is cleared, the interrupt cycle is initialized, and the next interrupt cycle is counted from the initial value.

  Subsequent to step S72, the main control program performs switch input processing (step S74). In this switch input process, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Specifically, this main control program, for example, each detection signal from the general winning opening sensors 3020 and 3020 that detect the game balls that have entered the general winning openings 2001 and 2011, and the large winning openings 2005 and 2006. A detection signal from the big prize opening sensors 2403 and 2402 for detecting the game ball that has been balled, a detection signal from the first start opening sensor 3112 for detecting the game ball that has entered the first start opening 2002, and a second start opening 2004 A detection signal from the second start sensor 3113 that detects the game ball that has entered the ball, a detection signal from the gate sensor 2352 that detects the game ball that has passed through the gate 2350, and a magnetic sensor 2404 that detects fraud using a magnet. The payout control board 951 receives a detection signal from the sensor, a detection signal from other omitted sensors, and a prize ball command transmitted in a prize ball control process to be described later. Reading always 払主 ACK signal from the dispensing control board 951 to convey the fact that it has received, respectively, is stored in the input information storage area as the input information.

  The detection signal from the first start port sensor 3112 that detects the game ball that has entered the first start port 2002, and the detection signal from the second start port sensor 3113 that detects the game ball that has entered the second start port 2004 When each is read, the start opening prize command classified into the other corresponding to this is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

  That is, when there is a detection signal from the first start port sensor 3112, a corresponding start port winning command is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and there is a detection signal from the second start port sensor 3113. Then, the start winning command corresponding to this is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area.

  In the present embodiment, the detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 3020 and 3020 that detect the gaming balls that have entered the general winning openings 2001 and 2011, and the large balls that detect the gaming balls that have entered the large winning openings 2005 and 2006 are detected. A detection signal from the winning opening sensors 2403 and 2402, a detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3112 for detecting a gaming ball that has entered the first starting opening 2002, and a gaming ball that has entered the second starting opening 2004 are detected. The detection signal from the second starter sensor 3113 and the detection signal from the gate sensor 2352 that detects the game ball that has passed through the gate unit 2350 are each read as the first time when this switch input process is started. After a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) has elapsed, the data is read again as the second time.

  The result read at the second time is compared with the result read at the first time. It is determined whether there is a comparison result among the comparison results. Those that are not the same result are read again as the third time, and the result read at the third time is compared with the result read at the second time. It is determined again whether there is a comparison result among the comparison results. Those that are not the same result are read again as the fourth time, and the result read at the fourth time is compared with the result read at the third time. It is determined again whether there is a comparison result among the comparison results. Those with the same result are treated as having no game balls.

  As described above, in the switch input process, the main control program is sent from the general winning opening sensors 3020 and 3020, the large winning opening sensors 2402 and 2403, the first starting opening sensor 3112, the second starting opening sensor 3113, and the gate sensor 2352. The detection signal is read twice, that is, the second reading that compares the detection signal for the first time to the third time, and the second reading that is compared for the second time to the fourth time. Erroneous detection due to the influence of the above, and so on, from the general winning opening sensors 3020 and 3020, the large winning opening sensors 2402 and 2403, the first starting opening sensor 3112, the second starting opening sensor 3113, and the gate sensor 2352. The reliability of the detection signal can be increased.

  Subsequent to step S74, the main control program performs timer subtraction processing (step S76). In this timer subtraction process, for example, a variation time (first special variation time) in which the first special symbol display 1403 is turned on in accordance with a variation pattern (special symbol variation pattern) determined in a special symbol and special electric accessory control process described later. , Special variation time) and variation time (second special variation time, special variation time) when the second special symbol display 1405 is lit, variation pattern determined by the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing described later (ordinary symbol) In addition to the fluctuation time (normal fluctuation time) in which the normal symbol display 1189 is turned on according to the fluctuation pattern), it notifies that the payout control board 951 has normally received various commands transmitted by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a). ACK signal input determination time set as a determination condition when determining whether or not a payer ACK signal is input Performing the time management.

  Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interruption period is set to 4 ms, so every time this timer subtraction process is performed, the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4 ms, When the subtraction result is 0, the variation time of the special symbol variation pattern or the normal symbol variation pattern is accurately measured.

  In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the result of the subtraction becomes 0, thereby accurately measuring the ACK signal input determination time. The various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S76, the main control program performs a winning random number update process (step S78). In the winning random number update process, the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number described above are updated. In addition to these random numbers, the big hit symbol initial value determining random number and the small hit symbol design updated in the non-winning random number update process in step S50 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) The random number for initial value determination is also updated.

  These random numbers for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random numbers for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are updated in the main control side main process and the main control side timer interrupt process, respectively, thereby increasing the randomness. . On the other hand, since the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers related to the winning determination (big hit determination), each time the winning random number update process is performed, each counter Counts up.

  For example, the counter for updating the jackpot determination random number is an initial value updating type counter as described above, and is a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value (in this embodiment, the value as the minimum value). 0 to the maximum value is updated within the value 32767), and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value is incremented by incrementing by 1 each time the main control timer interrupt processing is performed. The big hit determination initial value determination random number is counted up toward the maximum value (value 32767), and then the big hit determination initial value determination random number is counted up.

  When the counter for updating the big hit determination random number finishes counting up within the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the big hit determination random number, the big hit determination initial value determination random number is updated by the winning random number update process. The big hit determination initial value determination random number can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for drawing one value from the fixed numerical value range of the counter for updating the big hit determination random number. Note that the above-described random numbers for normal symbol determination and random numbers for determining the initial value for normal symbol determination are also updated by this winning random number update process. The random number for determining normal symbols is the same as the method for updating the random number for determining big hits, and the description thereof is omitted.

  In the present embodiment, the big hit determination initial value determining random number, the big hit symbol initial value determining random number, and the small hit symbol initial value determining random number in the main control side power-on processing (main control side main processing) The update is performed in the non-winning random number updating process in step S50 and the winning random number updating process in step S78 in the main control timer interrupt process which is this routine.

  It should be noted that each time the interrupt timer is generated, the processing time of this routine is uneven, and the main control side main process is repeatedly executed within the remaining time until the next interrupt timer is generated, thereby updating the non-winning random number in step S50. When the number of executions of the process is random, the big hit determination initial value determining random number, the big hit symbol initial value determining random number, and the small hit symbol initial value determining random number are used in the non-winning random number update process in step S50. It is good also as a mechanism to update only

  Subsequent to step S78, the main control program performs prize ball control processing (step S80). In this prize ball control process, the main control program reads out the input information from the input information storage area described above and creates a prize ball command for paying out a game ball based on this input information. A self-check command for confirming the connection state between the board and the payout control board 951 is created. The main control program transmits the created prize ball command and self-check command to the payout control board 951 as main payout serial data.

  Further, in the prize ball control process, the main control program executes a prize ball control program code that is a part of the program code, and, for example, with the acceptance of the game ball to the prize winning opening 2103, the big prize opening sensor 2402, Triggered by the fact that the detection information based on the detection signal output from 2403 has been written in the corresponding definition bit areas that are defined one bit at a time over the number of winning prizes 2005 and 2006, respectively. For example, a prize ball command is created as a prize ball instruction indicating that 15 balls should be paid out as prize balls, and transmitted to the payout control board 951 (payout control means).

  For example, in the case where there are two large winning ports, a first large winning port 2005 and a second large winning port 2006, the main control program preliminarily stores in the main control RAM as the above-described definition bit area. Of the plurality of prepared definition bit areas, two definition bits for the big prize opening 2005 and 2006 are used. Hereinafter, these will be referred to as “first bit area” and “second bit area” in this order. On the other hand, for example, in the case of a game board having one winning prize slot, one definition bit area is used.

  These definition bit areas to be used are, for example, one bit and are adjacent to each other. When a game ball is received at the big prize opening 2103, for example, “1” is written in the first definition bit area where the fourth bit is the detection information based on the detection signals output from the big prize opening sensors 2402 and 2403, for example. It is. Thereafter, the main control program initializes the definition bit area corresponding to the big winning opening that has identified that the game ball has been received by writing, for example, “0”, and is provided for receiving the next game ball.

  Here, the main control program also determines which definition bit area is to be checked. For example, if the main control program sets the definition bit area corresponding to the big prize opening sensors 2402 and 2403 of the big prize opening 2103 to be the fourth bit, the main control program acquires information on the fourth bit definition bit area. .

  Further, the main control program performs a mask process on the detection information acquired in this way in accordance with a prize ball effective range of a special prize opening 2005, 2006 to be described later, creates a prize ball command, and stores it in the transmission information storage area. It is determined whether or not to write and not output to the payout control board 951.

  When it is determined that this prize ball command should not be transmitted, the main control program performs mask processing on each defined bit area in which detection information based on the detection signals from the above-described winning prize opening sensors 2402 and 2403 is written. For example, the bit may be forcibly set to OFF (“0”) so that the prize ball command is not written in the transmission information storage area.

  In this prize ball control process, the main control program indicates that the first big prize opening sensor indicates that one game ball has been received in the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006 in the first special gaming state. When the detection information corresponding to the detection signal from 2402 or the second grand prize opening 2403 is written in the definition bit area corresponding to any of these big prize openings, for example, 15 balls are paid as a prize ball. A prize ball command is created as a prize ball instruction to be issued and written in the transmission information storage area described above.

  In addition, the main control program writes a winning sound command as a command for outputting a predetermined sound in the transmission information storage area described above, and then transmits the command to the peripheral control board 1510 to be transmitted to the peripheral control MPU 1530a to the speaker, for example, “ The sound “Pokon” is output.

  On the other hand, the main control program, in the first special gaming state, the first big prize opening sensor 2403 or the second big prize opening sensor 2403 indicating that one game ball has been received in the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006. If the detection information based on the detection signal from the big prize opening sensor 2402 is not written in the definition bit area corresponding to any of these big prize openings, for example, a prize ball indicating that 15 balls should be paid out as a prize ball Do not create a prize ball command as an instruction.

  Also in this case, the main control program writes a winning sound command as a command to output a predetermined sound in the transmission information storage area described above, but the winning ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 951 (payout control means). Prevent the game ball payout operation from being executed. After that, the main control program initializes the above defined bit area corresponding to any one of these big winning mouths, and detects detection information based on detection signals from the first big winning mouth sensor 2403 or the second big winning mouth sensor 2403. By clearing, the game ball is allowed to be paid out.

  At this time, the main control program, when paying out more than the specified number of payouts that can be paid out in response to the acceptance of the game balls to the big prize opening 2103, is an excessive payout abnormality command (not shown in FIG. 36). ) In the transmission information storage area, and then transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the command transmission process (step SS92). Then, the peripheral control MPU 1530a causes the speaker to perform predetermined notification.

  In this way, since a substantially illegal game ball is not paid out, damage to the game hall (game hall) can be minimized.

  On the other hand, instead of the main control program, when it is detected that a game ball has been received at the big winning opening 2005, 2006, the main control program immediately writes an excessive winning abnormality command in the transmission information storage area, and the peripheral control MPU 1530a You may make it make a speaker alert | report to control.

  Thereafter, the main control program reads the prize ball command from the transmission information storage area described above and transmits it to the payout control board 951 (payout control means).

  As described above, when a game ball is received for the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006, the first big prize opening sensor 2403 or the second big prize opening sensor 2403 corresponding to each is received. It can be confirmed by hearing whether or not is functioning.

  On the other hand, if the payer ACK signal notifying that the payout control board 951 has successfully received the winning ball command is not input within a predetermined time, the main control program determines whether the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 A self-check command for confirming the connection state between the boards is created and transmitted to the payout control board 951.

  Subsequent to step S80, the main control program performs a frame command reception process (step S82). On the payout control board 951, the payout control program transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, a frame state 1 command, an error canceling navigation command, and a frame state 2 command) that are classified into state displays. On the other hand, as described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error cancellation navigation command based on a detection signal of the operation switch 952.

  In the frame command reception process described above, when the main control program normally receives the various commands as payer serial data, information that informs the payout control board 951 to that effect is stored as output information in the main control built-in RAM. Store in the area. The main control program formats the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands classified into status display (frame status 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame State 2 command))), and stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information. The frame state 1 command here corresponds to the first error occurrence command, and the error cancellation navigation command corresponds to the first error cancellation command.

  Subsequent to step S82, the main control program performs a fraud detection process (step S84). In this fraud detection process, the abnormal state related to the prize ball is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and it is detected that a game ball has entered the big prize opening 2103 by the big prize opening sensors 2402 and 2403 when not in the big hit gaming state, The main control program creates a winning anomaly display command that is classified as a notification display as an abnormal state, and stores it in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information.

  Subsequent to step S84, the main control program performs a special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S86). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control process, the main control program updates the jackpot determination random number described above by +1 by the counter, and accepts the game ball to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. That is, triggered by a winning award (establishment of the start condition), the value of the above-mentioned counter is taken out for each start storage information for which the start condition is satisfied, and used as a big hit random number value. It is determined whether or not it matches the jackpot determination value stored in advance in the ROM (lottery means). Hereinafter, this determination process is also expressed as “special lottery”.

  The main control program determines whether or not to generate a jackpot gaming state based on the lottery result, and the jackpot random value matches the jackpot determination value (predetermined winning conditions are met) ), The normal gaming state is shifted to the big hit gaming state. This big hit game state corresponds to a special game state, a first special game state, and a second special game state, which will be described later, and indicates a game state collectively referring to these.

  The main control program determines, for example, the number of rounds, the opening time, and the like as data for defining the jackpot game mode set in the jackpot game mode determination process (see FIG. 107) described later when determining the jackpot game mode. Definition that is a partial storage area of the main control built-in RAM that is specified by an address that is offset from the opening time and the game ball winning limit count number according to the number of big winning mouths. Reading from a data area (not shown).

  In the special symbol and special electric accessory control process described above, the main control program determines whether or not the random number for big hit matches the probability change hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM (this embodiment). (This is also called “special lottery”).

  The main control program determines whether or not to shift to the probability variation state based on the lottery result, and the random number for jackpot coincides with the probability variation determination value (the probability variation transition condition is satisfied). In this case, the game is shifted to the probability variation state. On the other hand, if the jackpot random number value does not match the probability variation determination value (the condition after probability variation is not satisfied), the game state is shifted to a game state other than the probability variation ( Winning probability control means). Here, the “probability variation state” refers to a state (high probability state) in which the winning probability of the special lottery described above is set relatively high compared to the normal gaming state (low probability state).

  Further, in this special symbol and special electric accessory control process, the main control program executes special fluctuation corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined as a result of each special lottery according to the lottery result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery. A fluctuation pattern command including time (fluctuation time) and whether or not each lottery is successful is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area.

  In this special symbol and special electric accessory control process, the main control program creates various commands related to the special figure 1 tuning effect according to the lottery result of the first special lottery described above, while the second special lottery described above. Various commands related to special figure 2 synchronization effects are created according to the lottery result. As described above, the main control program stores the created various commands as transmission information in the transmission information storage area.

  At the same time, the main control program determines a start hold display mode with reference to a preceding determination table (not shown) based on various random values acquired in response to the start winning, and displays the change after the start winning. Before disclosing the special symbol stop symbol, a command (hereinafter referred to as “reserved ball number change” as an example) is executed to imply a special lottery result (hereinafter referred to as “preceding judgment process”). Command ”), and when the preceding determination process is to be executed, it is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information.

  At this time, the main control program includes information regarding the stop symbol of the special symbol as information suggesting the type of the jackpot game, as will be described later, instead of the random value itself of the special lottery. I am doing so. Details of the preceding determination process will be described later.

  Next, the main control program sets the output of the lighting signal to light the first special symbol display 1403 according to the variation pattern determined at the time of starting winning according to the special symbol type, or the second special symbol display The output of the lighting signal is set so that 1405 is turned on, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area described above.

  For example, when the main control program shifts to the jackpot gaming state, various commands classified as jackpot related (a jackpot opening command, a prize winning opening 1 open Nth display command, a prize winning opening 1 closing display command, a prize winning opening, 1 count display command, jackpot ending command, and jackpot symbol display command) are stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2108A or the attacker solenoid 2108B to open / close the opening / closing member The output is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area.

  The main control program sets two rounds so that the two-round indicator lamp (not shown) of the round indicator 1190 is turned on when the number of times (rounds) that the winning prize openings 2005 and 2006 are opened from the closed state is two times. The output of the lighting signal to the display lamp is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area. When the number of rounds is 6, the main control program sets the output of a lighting signal to the 6-round display lamp to turn on the 6-round display lamp (not shown) of the round indicator 1190, and outputs output information as output information. Store in the storage area. When the round is 12 times, the main control program sets the output of the lighting signal to the 12 round display lamp so as to light the 12 round display lamp (not shown) of the round indicator 1190 and outputs the output information as output information. Store in the storage area. The main control program sets the output of the lighting signal to the 16 round display lamp to turn on the 16 round display lamp (not shown) of the round indicator 1190 when the round is 16 times, and stores output information as output information. Store in the area.

  The main control program sets the output of the lighting signal to the gaming state display 1183 so that the presence or absence of the transition to the probability variation state is lit in a predetermined color, and stores it in the output information storage area as output information.

  Further, in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, the main control program shifts from the normal gaming state to the big hit gaming state when the winning condition is satisfied as described above, and further, an example of the transition condition If the probability variation transition condition is established, the probability variation gaming state as an example of the specific gaming state is also transitioned (gaming state control means).

  Here, the main control program may be shifted to the probability variation gaming state as an example of the specific gaming state without substantially paying out the game ball in the big hit gaming state. The specific gaming state may be a state in which the time-shortening operation condition is established as another example of the transition condition and the time-shortening function is in operation. It may be in a gaming state.

  Subsequent to step S86, the main control program performs normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing (step S88). In this normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process, the main control program reads input information from the input information storage area described above and performs a gate winning process based on this input information.

  In this gate winning process, the main control program determines whether or not the detection signal from the gate sensor 2352 is input to the input terminal from the input information. Based on this determination result, the main control program extracts the value of the counter for updating the above-described normal random number for determination per symbol when the detection signal is input to the input terminal, and stores the main control built-in RAM as gate information. Is stored in the gate information storage area.

  This gate information storage area is provided with 0th partition to 3rd partition (four partitions), and gate information is stored in the order of 0th partition, 1st partition, 2nd partition, and 3rd partition. . For example, when the gate information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the gate information storage, when the detection signal from the gate sensor 2352 is input to the input terminal, the gate information is stored in the third section of the gate information storage. To do.

  The gate information stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is in the 0th section of the gate information storage, the gate information of the second section of the gate information storage is in the first section of the gate information storage, The gate information of the third section of the information storage is shifted to the second section of the gate information storage, respectively, and the third section of the gate information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when gate information is stored in the first partition to the second partition of the gate information storage, the gate information of the first partition of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th partition of the gate information storage. The gate information of the two sections is shifted to the first section of the gate information storage, and the second section of the gate information storage and the third section of the gate information storage become empty areas.

  Here, when the gate information is stored in the first section to the third section of the gate information storage, the above-described gate information is turned on so that the normal symbol storage display 1188 is turned on using the total number of stored gate information as a holding ball. Based on the above, the output of the lighting signal of the normal symbol storage display 1188 is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above.

  Following such a gate winning process, the main control program reads the gate information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM, and extracts the value of the random number for judgment per ordinary symbol from the read gate information. It is determined whether or not it matches the determination value per normal symbol stored in advance in the built-in ROM (referred to as “normal lottery”). The main control program determines whether to open / close the pair of movable pieces 2105 according to the determination result (the lottery result by the normal lottery).

  When the main control program performs the opening / closing operation by this determination, the pair of movable pieces 2105 are in an open state so that a game ball can be received in the second starting port 2004, which is advantageous to the player. Transition to the state. Further, the main control program determines the normal symbol variation pattern corresponding to the above-described determination based on the above-mentioned normal symbol variation pattern random number value, and creates various commands that are classified as related to the common symbol synchronization effect, The transmission information is stored in the transmission information storage area as the transmission information, and the output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1189 is set so that the normal symbol display 1189 is lit according to the determined variation pattern of the normal symbol. Store in the output information storage area.

  The main control program creates various commands related to the normal electric role effect when the extracted random number for normal symbol determination matches the normal symbol determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. The transmission information is stored in the transmission information storage area, and the output of the drive signal to the start port solenoid 2105 is set so as to open and close the pair of movable pieces 2105, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area described above.

  On the other hand, the main control program, when the value of the random number for determination per normal symbol taken out does not match the determination value per normal symbol stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, Based on this, the normal symbol variation pattern is determined. The main control program creates various commands that are classified as related to the common figure synchronization effect, stores them as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above, and turns on the normal symbol display 1189 according to the determined normal symbol variation pattern. The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1189 is set and stored in the output information storage area described above as output information.

  Subsequent to step S88, the main control program performs port output processing (step S90). In this port output process, the main control program reads output information from the output information storage area described above from the output terminals of the various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a, and outputs various signals based on the output information.

  The main control program, for example, outputs a main payout ACK signal when the various commands from the payout control board 951 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a based on the output information. Or a start opening solenoid 2105 for opening / closing the pair of movable pieces 2106. In addition to outputting a driving signal, the 2-round jackpot information output signal, the 6-round jackpot information output signal, the 12-round jackpot information output signal, the 16-round jackpot information output signal, the probability changing information output signal, the special symbol display information Output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, hour and middle information output information, start And outputs various information (game information) signals regarding the game, such as a mouth winning information output signal to the payout control board 951.

  Subsequent to step S90, the main control program performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S92). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the main control program reads transmission information such as commands and data from the transmission information storage area described above and transmits this transmission information to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data (command Transmission means).

  This transmission information is divided into various commands classified in relation to the special figure 1 tuning effect, various commands classified in relation to the special figure 2 tuning effect, and jackpot related, which are created in the main control side timer interruption processing which is this routine. Various commands (for example, a winning prize 1 count display command corresponding to a winning prize count command based on detection signals from the winning prize sensors 2402 and 2403 when a game ball that has entered the winning prize opening 2103 is detected) , Various commands categorized as power-on, various commands categorized as related to ordinary drawing effects, various commands categorized as related to ordinary electric role effects, various commands categorized as notification display (door frame opening command, door frame Close command, body frame open command, body frame close command, etc.), various commands divided into status display (frame state 1 command, error release) Bikomando and the frame state 2 command), various commands and various commands are classified into other are divided into test-related are stored. The main serial data consists of 3 bytes per packet.

  Specifically, the main peripheral serial data includes a status indicating a type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a production variation having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. And a sum value obtained by calculating the sum with the mode regarded as a numerical value, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

  In this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a frame state 1 command from the payout control board 951 through the RXA terminal reception port, it transmits a frame state 1 command to the peripheral control board 1510. In this case, the main control program transfers the frame state 1 command received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510.

  On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives an error release navigation command from the payout control board 951 through the RXA terminal reception port, an error release navigation command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510. Send. In this case, the main control program transfers the error cancellation navigation command received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510.

  Further, in the peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a main body frame release command from the payout control board 951 through the RXA terminal reception port, the main control program transmits a main body frame release command to the peripheral control board 1510. In this case, the main control program transfers the body frame release command received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the body frame release command.

  On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a main body frame close command from the payout control board 951 through the RXA terminal reception port, it transmits a main body frame close command to the peripheral control board 1510. . In this case, the main control program transfers the main body frame closing command received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510.

  In this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door frame opening command from the dispensing control board 951 through the RXA terminal reception port, it transmits a door frame opening command to the peripheral control board 1510. In this case, the main control program transfers the door frame closing command received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510.

  On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door closing command from the dispensing control board 951 through the RXA terminal reception port, it transmits a door closing command to the peripheral control board 1510. In this case, the main control program transfers the door closing command received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510.

  Subsequent to step S92, the main control program sets a value C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S94). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL in step S94, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL following the value B set in step S70. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, and the watchdog timer is cleared.

  Subsequent to step S94, the main control program switches (returns) the register (step S96) and ends this routine. Here, when the main control timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is started, the main control MPU 1310a stores the contents of the general-purpose registers in the stack and saves them. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the main process on the main control side from being destroyed.

  In step S96, the contents saved on the stack are read and written to the original register. The main control MPU 1310a sets interrupt permission after the return in step S96.

[10. Various control processing of payout control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 951 will be described with reference to FIGS. 213 to 229. FIG. 213 is a flowchart showing an example of the process when the payout control unit is turned on. FIG. 214 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the process when the payout control unit is turned on in FIG. FIG. 215 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the process when the payout control unit is turned on following FIG. 214. FIG. 216 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the payout control unit timer interrupt process. FIG. 217 is a flowchart showing an example of rotation angle switch history creation processing, and FIG. 218 is a flowchart showing an example of sprocket fixed position determination skip processing. FIG. 219 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a ball corner determination process, and FIG. 220 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a prize ball stock number addition process for a prize ball. FIG. 221 is a flowchart showing an example of the lending prize ball stock number adding process, and FIG. 222 is a flowchart showing an example of the stock monitoring process. FIG. 223 is a flowchart showing an example of the payout ball movement determination setting process, FIG. 224 is a flowchart showing an example of the payout setting process, and FIG. 225 is a flowchart showing an example of the ball movement action setting process. FIG. 226 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the retry operation monitoring process, and FIG. 227 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the mismatch counter reset determination process. FIG. 228 is a flowchart showing an example of the error canceling operation determination process, and FIG. 229 is a timing chart showing the signal processing (A) and the input signal confirmation processing (A) from the CR unit during the payout operation by ball lending.

  First, the payout control unit power-on processing will be described, and then the payout control unit timer interruption processing, ball removal switch operation determination processing, rotation angle switch history creation processing, sprocket fixed position determination skip processing, ball spot determination processing, award Prize ball stock number addition process for balls, prize ball stock number addition process for rented balls, stock monitoring process, payout ball movement operation determination setting process, payout setting process, ball edge operation setting process, retry operation monitoring process, inconsistency A counter reset determination process and an error release operation determination process will be described.

  By the way, a ball removal switch operation determination process, a rotation angle switch history creation process, a sprocket fixed position determination skip process, a ball corner determination process, a prize ball stock number addition process, a rental ball prize ball number addition process, a stock The monitoring process, the payout ball movement determination setting process, the retry operation monitoring process, the inconsistency counter reset determination process, and the error release operation determination process are one of the main operation setting processes in step S562 in the payout control unit power-on process described later. It is done as a process. In addition, rotation angle switch history creation processing, sprocket fixed position determination skip processing, ball corner determination processing, retry operation monitoring processing, inconsistency counter reset determination processing, error release operation determination processing, prize ball stock number addition processing for prize balls, The priority order is set in the order of the award ball stock number addition process for lending, the stock monitoring process, and the payout ball binding operation determination setting process.

[10-1. Discharge control unit power-on processing]
When the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, the payout control unit 954 on the payout control board 951 causes the payout control program to execute a payout control unit power supply as shown in FIGS. 213 to 215 under the control of the payout control MPU 954a. Process at the time of input.

  When the payout control unit power-on process is started, the payout control program sets the interrupt mode in the payout control MPU 954a (step S500). This interrupt mode is used to set the priority of interrupts of the payout control MPU 954a. In this embodiment, a payout control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is set as the highest priority, and when an interrupt of this payout control unit timer interrupt process occurs, the process is preferentially performed.

  Subsequent to step S500, the payout control program performs input / output setting (I / O input / output setting) (step S502). In this I / O input / output setting, various input ports and various output ports of the payout control MPU 954a are set.

  Subsequent to step S502, the payout control program performs wait timer process 1 (step S506), and determines whether or not a power failure warning signal is input (step S508). The voltage does not increase immediately from when the power is turned on until the voltage reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or a momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped) occurs, the voltage drops and becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage. When the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 receives a power failure warning signal (paid power failure). A warning signal is input. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage from when the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal (paid power failure warning signal) is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310.

  The wait timer process 1 is a process for waiting after the power is turned on until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes (step S506). In this embodiment, the wait time (wait timer) is, for example, 200 milliseconds. (Ms) is set. In the determination in step S508, the payout control program is executed based on a power failure notice signal (payout power failure notice signal) from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310.

  Subsequent to step S508, the payout control program determines whether or not the operation switch 952 is operated (step S512). This determination is based on the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 952, and when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 952 is HI, it is determined that the RAM clear is not instructed. On the other hand, if the operation switch 952 is operated because it is determined that the RAM clear is instructed when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 952 is LOW. judge.

  When the operation switch 952 is operated in step S512, the payout control program sets a value 1 to the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG (step S514).

  That is, the payout control program is capable of executing a RAM clear process for initializing a RAM (hereinafter also referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”) built in the payout control MPU 954a for a predetermined time from when the power is turned on. (Dispensing control side power-on operation control means).

  On the other hand, when the operation switch 952 is not operated in step S512, the payout control program sets a value 0 to the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG (step S516). This payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) of the payout control MPU 954a, for example, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, etc. The prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, and the logic of the PRDY signal stored in the CR communication information storage area Flag indicating whether or not the payout information related to payout of the set status (PRDY signal output setting information, etc.) is to be erased, and is set to a value of 1 when the payout information is erased and a value of 0 when the payout information is not erased. Is done.

  The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in step S514 and step S516 is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU 954a.

  Subsequent to step S514 or step S516, the payout control program performs setting for permitting access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S518). With this setting, the payout control built-in RAM can be accessed, and for example, payout information can be written (stored) or read out.

  Subsequent to step S518, the payout control program sets the stack pointer (step S520). This stack pointer indicates, for example, the address accumulated on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the memory element (register) being used, or the return address of this routine when the subroutine is terminated and the routine returns. This indicates the address loaded on the stack for temporary storage. The payout control program advances the stack pointer each time the stack is stacked.

  In step S520, an initial address is set in the stack pointer, and the contents of the register, the return address, etc. are stacked on the stack from this initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the last stacked stack to the first stacked stack.

  Subsequent to step S520, the payout control program determines whether or not the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the payout information is erased, and is set to a value of 0 when the payout information is not erased.

  When the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0 in step S522, that is, when the payout information is not deleted, the payout control program calculates a checksum (step S524). This checksum calculates the sum by regarding the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value.

  Subsequent to step S524, the payout control program determines whether or not the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in the payout control unit power-off process described later (at the time of power-off). (Step S526). If they match, the payout control program determines whether or not the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is 1 (step S528).

  The payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not payout backup information such as payout information and checksum value is stored and held in the payout control built-in RAM in the payout control unit power-off process described later. The payout backup flag HBK-FLG is set to a value 1 when the payout control unit power-off process is normally completed, and is set to a value 0 when the payout control unit power-off process is not normally ended. .

  When the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S528, that is, when the payout control unit power-off process is normally terminated, the payout control program sets the work area of the payout control built-in RAM as power recovery. (Step S530).

  In this setting, in addition to the value 0 being set in the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, the power recovery time information is read from the ROM built in the payout control MPU 954a (hereinafter also referred to as “the payout control built-in ROM”), This power recovery information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Accordingly, the above-mentioned payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, etc. (for example, prizes stored in the prize ball information storage area, PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of the PRDY signal stored in the CR communication information storage area, such as the ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, and the like, Information used for various processes is set based on payout information relating to payout of inconsistency counter reset determination time (stored in the time management information storage area). Note that the “recovery” includes not only a state in which the power is turned off but also a state in which the power is turned on, and also a state in which power is restored after a power failure or a momentary power failure.

  On the other hand, when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1) (that is, when payout information is deleted) in step S522, when the checksum values do not match in step S526, or step When the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0) in S528 (that is, when the payout control unit power-off process is not normally terminated), the payout control program stores the payout control built-in RAM. All areas are cleared (step S532).

  That is, the payout control program executes a payout control side RAM clear process triggered by detection of an operation signal of the operation switch 952 (payout control side power-on operation control means). As a result, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is cleared.

  Subsequent to step S532, the payout control program sets the work area of the payout control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S534). In this setting, the initial information is read from the payout control built-in ROM, and the initial information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S530 or step S534, the payout control program performs interrupt initialization (step S536). This setting is to set an interrupt cycle when a payout control unit timer interrupt process to be described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 2 ms.

  Subsequent to step S536, the payout control program performs interrupt permission setting (step S538). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeated every interrupt cycle set in step S536, that is, every 2 ms.

  Subsequent to step S538, the payout control program sets a value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S539). The watchdog timer is cleared by setting value A, value B, and value C in this order in watchdog timer clear register HWCL.

  Subsequent to step S539, the payout control program determines whether a power failure notice signal (payout power failure notice signal) has been input (step S540). As described above, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off, or when a power failure or instantaneous power failure occurs, if the voltage falls below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal (paid power failure warning signal) is used as the power failure warning signal. 1310 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. The determination in step S540 is made based on this power failure notice signal.

  If no power failure warning signal is input in step S540, the payout control program determines whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a value 1 (step S542). The 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag for measuring 2 ms in a payout control unit timer interrupt process processed every 2 ms, which will be described later, and is set to a value of 1 when 2 ms have passed, while 2 ms have not elapsed. Sometimes set to the value 0.

  When the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 0 in step S542, that is, when 2 ms has not elapsed, the process returns to step S540, and the payout control program determines whether or not a power failure warning signal (paid power failure warning signal) has been input. Determine whether.

  On the other hand, in step S542, when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has the value 1, that is, when 2 ms has elapsed, the payout control program sets the value 2 to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG (step S544).

  Subsequent to step S544, the payout control program sets a value B in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value A set in step S539.

  Subsequent to step S546, the payout control program performs port output processing (step S548). In this port output process, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and various signals are output from the output terminals of the various output ports of the payout control MPU 954a based on the various information.

  In the output information storage area, for example, payer ACK information for indicating that various commands relating to payout from the main control board 1310 (award ball command and self-check command) have been received normally, and drive control to the payout motor 834 are performed. Various information such as drive information, prize ball number information of the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834, and LED display information displayed on the error LED display 953 are stored.

  Based on this output information, the payout control program sends a payer ACK signal to the main control board 1310 when various commands relating to payout from the main control board 1310 are normally received from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 954a. Or a drive signal is output to the payout motor 834, or the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834 is output to the external terminal board 784 as an award ball number information signal (in this embodiment, payout) Each time the motor 834 actually pays out 10 game balls, a prize ball number information signal is output to the external terminal board 784.), a display signal is output to the error LED display 953.

  Subsequent to step S548, the payout control program performs port input processing (step S550). In this port input process, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the payout control MPU 954a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  For example, an operation signal of the operation switch 952, a detection signal from the blade rotation detection switch 840, a detection signal from the counting switch 838, a detection signal from the full switch 550, a BRQ signal from the CR unit 6, a BRDY signal, and a CR connection signal The main payment board ACK signal from the main control board 1310 that informs that the main control board 1310 has normally received various commands transmitted in the command transmission process described later is read and stored as input information in the input information storage area. .

  Subsequent to step S550, the payout control program performs timer update processing (step S552). In this timer update process, the payout control program is set as a determination condition when determining whether or not a ball stagnation state is caused by the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 834 is transmitted. Set when discharging the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731, skip determination time set when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is not performed, Ball removal determination time, a full tank determination time set as a determination condition when determining whether or not the game ball in which the accommodation space of the foul cover unit is stored is full, a ball breakage detection sensor 827 Is set as a determination condition when determining whether or not the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the payout device 830 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number based on a detection signal from Performing the sphere depletion determination time time management such as it is. In addition, in this timer update process, the payout control program does not match the number of game balls received by the recess of the payout rotating body and the number of balls actually detected by the counting switch 838. When determining whether or not to reset the inconsistency counter INCC for monitoring whether or not the game balls that are not consistently paid out are repeatedly issued, the inconsistency counter that is set as the determination condition Performs time management of reset judgment time.

  For example, when the ball collision determination time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interruption period is set to 2 ms. For this reason, every time this timer update process is performed, the payout control program subtracts the ball collision determination time by 2 ms, and the subtraction result becomes 0, thereby accurately measuring the ball collision determination time.

  In this embodiment, the skip determination time is 22.75 ms, the ball removal determination time is 60060 ms, the full tank determination time is 504 ms, the ball breakage determination time is 119 ms, and the inconsistency counter reset determination time is 7000 s (about 2 hours). Each time the timer update process is performed, the payout control program subtracts the ball removal determination time, the full tank determination time, the ball shortage determination time, and the inconsistency counter reset determination time by 2 ms. The payout control program accurately measures the ball removal determination time, the full tank determination time, the ball breakage determination time, and the inconsistency counter reset determination time when the subtraction result is 0. These various determination times are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S552, the payout control program performs CR communication processing (step S554). In this CR communication processing, whether or not various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, and CR connection signal) from the CR unit 6 are input based on the input information read from the input information storage area described above. Determine. Based on various signals from the CR unit 6, the payout control MPU 954a exchanges various signals with the CR unit 6.

  In the processing for setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530, as described above, the payout backup information stored in the payout control internal RAM, various flags, and various information stored in the various information storage areas. (For example, the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, the PRDY stored in the CR communication information storage area, etc. Information to be used for various processes is set based on payout information relating to payout of PRDY signal output setting information or the like in which the logic state of the signal is set.

  By this process, for example, even if there is a momentary power failure or a power failure, values such as the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, and the inconsistency counter INCC at the time of power recovery are stored as payout backup information. The value of the award ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure can be restored.

  Thereby, when the payout control program is executing the payout operation of the game ball by the payout device 830 under the control of the payout control MPU 954a, even if the payout operation cannot be continued due to a momentary power failure or power failure, Since the payout operation can be continued at the time of power recovery, the game balls can be paid out to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 without excess or deficiency.

  In other words, the payout control MPU 954a exchanges various signals with the CR unit 6 in the CR communication process, and when the game ball is paid out to the upper plate 301 or the lower plate 302, the payout control MPU 954a performs CR or Even if the exchange of various signals with the unit 6 is interrupted and the payout of the game ball cannot be continued, the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, and the inconsistency counter INCC at the time of power recovery Are restored to the values stored in the payout backup information, such as the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, and the inconsistency counter INCC immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure. As a result, the exchange of various signals between the pachinko gaming machine 1 (payout control MPU 954a) and the CR unit 6 immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure can be continued from the time of power recovery, and the game ball can be continuously paid out. It can be carried out.

  As described above, the exchange of various signals between the pachinko gaming machine 1 (payout control MPU 954a) and the CR unit 6 is restored to the state immediately before the instantaneous power outage or stop at the time of power recovery even if the power outage stops or stops. It has become. Thereby, it is comprised so that the various signals by the pachinko gaming machine 1 (payout control MPU954a) and the CR unit 6 do not change due to the influence of the instantaneous stop or stop. Therefore, the reliability of the exchange of various signals between the pachinko gaming machine 1 (payout control MPU 954a) and the CR unit 6 can be enhanced.

  Various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in the payout backup information as described above. In the CR communication process, the payout control program is set in the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530 upon power recovery, and is stored in the payout control built-in RAM. To read PRDY signal output setting information. In this CR communication process, the payout control program sets the read PRDY signal output setting information to the logical value state of the PRDY signal that informs that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible, for example. If so, the PRDY signal is output to the CR unit 6 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 954a.

  The payout control program is performed as one process of the main action setting process. For example, in the retry operation monitoring process, the payout control program is included in the payout backup information and stored in the payout information built-in RAM in the payout control built-in RAM. Based on the value of the mismatch counter INCC, it is determined whether or not the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH. When the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is not smaller than the inconsistency threshold INCTH, the payout control program determines that the retry operation is abnormally performed, that is, the game ball payout operation by the payout device 830 is abnormal. It is determined that there is a value, and a value 1 is set to the retry error flag RTERR-FLG.

  The payout control program does not allow a payout operation for paying out a rental ball when, for example, it is not in communication with the CR unit 6 as an error state output setting to the CR unit 6 in the payout ball engagement operation determination setting process. The state of logic value (LOW) of the PRDY signal to notify that it is set is set in the PRDY signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area.

  As a result, in the CR communication process, the state of the logical value of this PRDY signal is read from the CR communication information storage area and the PRDY signal is output from a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 954a at the next timer interrupt from the time of power recovery. Output from terminal to CR unit 6.

  Thus, for example, if the game ball payout operation by the payout device 830 is in an abnormal state immediately before a momentary power failure, the state is restored at the time of power recovery. At this stage, a PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the rented ball cannot be output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 954a to the CR unit 6. In addition, it is possible to inform the CR unit 6 that the game ball payout operation by the payout device 830 is in an abnormal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the BRDY, which is a useless lending request signal from the CR unit 6, from being output at an extremely early stage from the time of power recovery.

  In the CR communication processing, when the CR connection signal is read from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM and the logical value is HI based on the CR connection signal in the port input processing in step S550, that is, a pachinko machine. When the power supply 1 is turned on and the payout control board 951 and the CR unit 6 are electrically connected via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, the ball is paid out. Therefore, the logic state of the PRDY signal is set to HI and is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 954a to the CR unit 6.

  On the other hand, when the logical value is LOW, that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the payout control board 951 and the CR unit 6 are connected via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. When not electrically connected, the payout control program outputs a predetermined output of the payout control MPU 954a with the logic state of the PRDY signal set to LOW in order to notify that the payout operation for paying out the rented ball is impossible. Output from the port output terminal to the CR unit 6.

  The logical state of the EXS signal that indicates that one payout operation has been started or ended is stored as EXS signal output setting information in the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and the payout control board 951 A CR connection signal indicating whether or not the CR unit 6 is electrically connected is stored in the state information storage area as CR connection information.

  Subsequent to step S554, a full tank and out-of-ball check process is performed (step S556). In this full tank and out-of-ball check process, the payout control program reads input information from the input information storage area described above, and on the basis of this input information, the above-mentioned foul cover unit 540 is detected by a detection signal from the full tank switch 550. It is determined whether the storage space is full of stored game balls, or the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the above-described payout device 830 by the detection signal from the ball break detection sensor 827 is determined. It is determined whether or not a predetermined number or more.

  For example, whether or not the storage space of the foul cover unit 540 is full with the game balls stored is determined by using the timer interruption period 2 ms and the full tank and full ball check processing at this time. The detection signal from 550 is ON, and when the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is turned OFF in the last full (2 ms before) full ball and ball check check process, that is, the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is ON from OFF. When the transition is made, the payout control program starts counting the full tank determination time (504 ms) described above in the timer update process of step S552.

  When the full tank determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the full tank determination time is reached, the payout control program detects that the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is ON in this full tank and out-of-ball check process. It is determined whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is ON, the payout control program displays full tank information indicating that the game ball in which the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 540 is full is full. Store in the state information storage area described above.

  On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is OFF, the payout control program stores the full tank information indicating that the game ball in which the storage space of the foul cover unit 540 is stored is not full and state information is stored. Store in the area.

  Whether or not the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the payout device 830 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number also uses the timer interruption period of 2 ms, and the current full tank and out of ball check process is performed. When the detection signal from the switch is ON, the detection signal from the ball break switch is OFF in the previous full (2 ms) full and ball break check processing, that is, the detection signal from the ball break detection sensor 827 is ON from OFF When the transition is made, the timer update process in step S552 starts counting the ball breakage determination time (119 ms) described above.

  When the ball breakage determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the ball breakage determination time is reached, the payout control program detects a detection signal from the ball breakage detection sensor 827 in this full and ball breakage check process. It is determined whether or not it is ON. In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball break detection sensor 827 is ON, the ball break information indicating that the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the payout device 830 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number is displayed. While the information is stored in the information storage area, when the detection signal from the ball break detection sensor 827 is OFF, the ball break is notified that the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the payout device 830 is not more than a predetermined number. Information is stored in the state information storage area.

  Following step S556, command reception processing is performed (step S558). In this command reception process, the payout control program receives various commands relating to payout from the main control board 1310, such as a prize ball command and a self-check command.

  When the various commands are normally received, the payer ACK information indicating that is stored in the output information storage area. On the other hand, when various commands cannot be received normally, a connection abnormality that indicates that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 (an abnormality has occurred in various command signals). Information is stored in the state information storage area described above.

  Subsequent to step S558, the payout control program performs command analysis processing (step S560). In this command analysis processing, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S560, the payout control program performs main operation setting processing (step S562). In this main operation setting process, operation settings such as winning balls, lending balls, ball removal and ball scoring are performed, retry operations are judged, and the number of unpaid balls (the number of winning ball stock) is monitored. To do.

  Subsequent to step S562, the payout control program performs LED display data creation processing (step S564). In this LED display data creation process, various types of information are read from the above-described state information storage area, display data to be displayed on the error LED display 953 of the payout control board 951 is created, and LED display information is stored in the above-described output information storage area. Remember.

  For example, when the above-mentioned ball piece information is read from the state information storage area, and the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the payout device 830 is not more than a predetermined number based on this ball piece information, the corresponding display data ( In this embodiment, a display value 1 (number “1”)) is created and LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S564, the payout control program performs command transmission processing (step S566). In this command transmission process, various information is read from the state information storage area described above, and various commands (door frame opening command, door frame closing command, main body frame opening command, main body frame, which are classified into status displays based on the various information) Close command, frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command) are generated and transmitted to the main control board 1310.

  For example, when the ball break information is read from the state information storage area, a frame state 1 command is created when the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the payout device 830 is not equal to or greater than a predetermined number based on the ball break information. To the main control board 1310.

  In this command transmission process, if there is a change in the frame state, such as an error relating to a game ball payout operation, for example, this payout control program provides information (hereinafter referred to as "error" A frame state 1 command (first error canceling command) including “occurrence position information” is generated (error occurrence command generation means).

  On the other hand, in this command transmission process, if the payout control program indicates that the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG has a value of 1, that is, if an operation signal corresponding to the operation of the operation switch 952 has been detected, the error described above. A cancellation navigation command (first error cancellation command) is output (command sending means).

  This payout control program transmits a body frame opening command when a body frame opening detection signal from the body frame opening switch 619 is input. On the other hand, when the main body frame closing detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 619 is input, the payout control program transmits a main body frame closing command.

  The payout control program transmits a door frame opening command when a door frame opening detection signal is input from the door frame opening switch 618. On the other hand, when a door frame closing detection signal is input from the door frame opening switch 618, the payout control program transmits a door frame closing command.

  In the command transmission process (step S566) described above, the payout control program reads out error information including error contents from the state information storage area described above, and the machine number information for identifying itself from other pachinko gaming machines and the error An error information signal based on the information is output to a hall computer (not shown) via the external terminal board 784.

  When the hall computer receives this error information signal, it provides the above-mentioned unit number information and error information to the wireless device possessed by the hall clerk, and the hall clerk is identified based on this unit number information. In the pachinko gaming machine with the number, it is possible to grasp that the error content included in the error information has occurred.

  Subsequent to step S566, the payout control program sets a value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S568). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value B set in step S546. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and the watchdog timer is cleared.

  Following step S568, the process returns to step S539 again, and the payout control program sets a value A to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and whether or not a power failure warning signal (paid power failure warning signal) is input in step S540. judge. If there is no input of the power failure notice signal (payout power failure notice signal), the payout control program determines whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a value 1 in step S542, and the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is When the value is 1, that is, when 2 ms elapses, the value 0 is set in the 2 ms elapse flag HT-FLG in step S544, and the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S546.

  The payout control program performs port output processing in step S548, and performs port input processing in step S550. The payout control program performs a timer update process in step S552, performs a CR communication process in step S554, and performs a full tank and out-of-ball check process in step S556. The payout control program performs command reception processing in step S558, performs command analysis processing in step S560, performs main operation setting processing in step S562, and performs LED display data creation processing in step S564.

  The payout control program performs a command transmission process in step S566, sets a value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, and repeats steps S539 to S568. The processing from step S539 to step S568 is referred to as “payout control unit main processing”.

  Depending on the progress of the game by the main control board 1310, the processing content of the payout control unit main process varies. For this reason, the time required for the processing of the payout control MPU 954a varies. The payout control MPU 954a preferentially outputs to the main control board 1310 a payer ACK signal notifying that various commands relating to payout from the main control board 1310 have been normally received in the port output processing of step S548. As a result, the payout control MPU 954a secures the processing time so that other fluctuating processes can be sufficiently performed.

  On the other hand, when a power failure warning signal (paid power failure warning signal) is input in step S540, interrupt prohibition setting is performed (step S570). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing described later is not performed, writing to the payout control built-in RAM is prevented, and rewriting of the payout information described above is protected.

  Subsequent to step S570, the payout control program stops outputting the drive signal to the payout motor 834 (step S574). Thereby, payout of the game ball is stopped.

  Subsequent to step S574, the payout control program performs clear setting of the watchdog timer (step S60). As described above, the clear setting is performed by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL.

  Subsequent to step S576, the payout control program calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S578). The checksum is calculated by regarding the payout information in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value excluding the storage area for the checksum value calculated in step S524 and the payout backup flag HBK-FLG.

  Subsequent to step S578, the payout control program sets a value 1 to the payout backup flag HBK-FLG (step S580). Thereby, storage of the payout backup information is completed.

  Subsequent to step S580, the payout control program performs prohibition of access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S582). With this setting, access to the payout control built-in RAM is prohibited and writing and reading cannot be performed, and payout backup information stored in the payout control internal RAM is protected.

  Following step S582, the payout control program enters an infinite loop. In this infinite loop, the value A, the value B, and the value C are not set in this order in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, so that the watchdog timer is not cleared. Therefore, the payout control MPU 954a is reset, and then the payout control MPU 954a executes the payout control unit power-on process again. Note that the processing in step S570 to step S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as “payout control unit power-off processing”.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 (payout control MPU 954a) is reset when a power failure occurs or when an instantaneous power failure occurs, and a payout control unit power-on process is performed by power recovery thereafter.

  In step S526, it is checked whether or not the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal. Subsequently, in step S528, whether or not the payout control unit power-off process has been normally completed. I am inspecting. In this way, by checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM twice, it is checked whether or not the payout backup information is stored by fraud.

[10-2. Payment control unit timer interrupt processing]
Next, the payout control unit timer interrupt process will be described. This payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt cycle (2 ms in this embodiment) set in the payout control unit power-on process.

  When the payout control unit timer interrupt process is started, in the payout control unit 954 of the payout control board 951, the payout control program sets the timer interrupt to be prohibited under the control of the payout control MPU 954a and switches (saves) the register. Is performed (step S590). Here, the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) used in the above-described payout control unit main process is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control unit timer interrupt process, the value of the general-purpose register is not overwritten. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the payout control unit main process from being destroyed.

  Subsequent to step S590, the payout control program sets a value 1 to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG (step S592). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms every time this payout control unit timer interrupt processing is performed, that is, every 2 ms. Each is set.

  Subsequent to step S592, the payout control program switches (returns) the register (step S594). This restoration is switched from the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing to the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the payout control unit main process, the value of the auxiliary register is not overwritten. This prevents destruction of the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt process.

  Subsequent to step S594, the payout control program sets interrupt permission (step S596), and ends this routine.

[10-3. Rotation angle switch history creation process]
Next, rotation angle switch history creation processing will be described. In this rotation angle switch history creation process, a history of detection signals from the rotation detection switch 840 is created.

  When the rotation angle switch history creation processing is started, the payout control unit 954 in the payout control board 951 executes a payout control program from the payout control built-in RAM as shown in FIG. 217 under the control of the payout control MPU 954a. The switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read (step S610).

  This rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bits B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bit B0, "B" represents a bit). It has a storage capacity, and the history of the detection signal from the blade rotation detection switch 840 is stored in the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST. In step S610, rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read from the rotation angle switch history information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S610, the payout control program determines whether there is a detection signal from the blade rotation detection switch 840 (step S612). This determination is made based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection switch 840 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control part power-on process (payout control part main process). Specifically, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  In step S612, the input information is read from the input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the blade rotation detection switch 840. When there is a detection signal from the blade rotation detection switch 840 in the input information, the payout control program uses the blade rotation detection switch 840 to detect the rotation position of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 834 is transmitted. It is determined that the optical axis is in a state in which the optical axis has transitioned from a blocked state to a non-blocked state. On the other hand, when there is no detection signal from the blade rotation detection switch 840 in the input information, the payout control program determines that the detection slit has changed the optical axis of the blade rotation detection switch 840 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state.

  When the detection slit is in a state where the optical axis of the blade rotation detection switch 840 is changed from the blocking state to the non-blocking state in step S612, the payout control program performs the rotation angle switch detection history information shift process (step S614). In this rotation angle switch detection history information shift process, the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S610 is converted into the most significant bits B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2. , B2 ← B1, B1 ← the least significant bit B0, and so on, and is shifted bit by bit from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7.

  Subsequent to step S614, the payout control program sets the value 1 to the least significant bit B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST (step S616), and ends this routine.

  On the other hand, when the detection slit is in the state where the optical axis of the blade rotation detection switch 840 is changed from the non-blocking state to the blocking state in step S612, a rotation angle switch detection history information shift process is executed (step S618). In the rotation angle switch detection history information shift process, the payout control program performs the same process as the rotation angle switch detection history information shift process in step S614, and the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S610. From the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7, such as B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← the least significant bit B0. Shift one bit at a time.

  Subsequent to step S618, the payout control program sets the value 0 to the least significant bit B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST (step S620), and ends this routine.

  Thus, each time this rotation angle switch history creation process is performed, the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is shifted bit by bit from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7, and then the detection slit is moved to the blade. The least significant bit B0 is set in accordance with the state in which the optical axis of the rotation detection switch 840 has changed from the blocking state to the non-blocking state or the state in which the detection slit has shifted the optical axis of the blade rotation detection switch 840 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state. Value 1 or value 0 is set. For this reason, a history of detection signals from the blade rotation detection switch 840 is created.

[10-4. Sprocket fixed position determination skip processing]
Next, the sprocket fixed position determination skip process will be described. This sprocket fixed position determination skip process skips the determination of whether or not the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 834 is transmitted is in a fixed position when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is also performed when the payout of the game ball by the payout device 830 is completed. Thereby, rotation of the rotating shaft of the payout motor 834 can be reliably started in a state in which no ball is generated.

  When the sprocket fixed position determination skip processing is started, the payout control unit 954 on the payout control board 951 causes the payout control program to execute a fixed position determination skip flag SKP− as shown in FIG. 218 under the control of the payout control MPU 954a. It is determined whether FLG is 0 (step S630).

  The fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is to be performed, and is 1 when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is not performed (when skipping). The value is set to 0 when the body position determination is performed (when skipping is not performed).

  When the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is 0 (not skipped) in step S630, that is, when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is performed, the payout control program stores the rotation angle switch history information of the payout control built-in RAM. The rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read from the storage area (step S632), and it is determined whether or not it matches the fixed position determination value (step S634).

  This fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and in this embodiment, is “00001111B (“ B ”represents a bit)”, and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4 have the value 0 and the lower 4 bits. B3 to B0 have a value of 1. In the determination in step S634, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value.

  Here, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST have the value 1, the detection slit is the light of the blade rotation detection switch 840 described above continuously in four timer interruption cycles. It means that the shaft is in a state of transition from the shut-off state to the non-cut-off state.

  In the occurrence of the four timer interruption periods, the payout motor 834 rotates four steps. The rotation of the payout motor 834 is the rotation of the payout rotating body of the rotation detection board via the first gear, the second gear, and the third gear. Since these first gear, second gear, and third gear have play (backlash), the payout rotating body rotates clockwise or counterclockwise. The rotation is designed so as to correspond to approximately two steps of rotation of the dispensing motor 834.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the payout control program creates the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST by the detection signal history and rotation angle switch history creation processing from the blade rotation detection switch 840, and the created rotation angle. Based on the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the switch detection history information RSW-HIST, that is, based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection switch 840 generated by the latest four timer interruption periods, the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is performed. .

  As a result, in the four timer interruption cycles, the payout motor 834 rotates four steps, so that it rotates more than the rotation of the payout rotator due to backlash and absorbs the rotation of the payout rotator due to backlash. Can do. Accordingly, since it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of the fixed position of the payout rotating body due to backlash, the rotational position of the payout rotating body can be correctly managed by the rotational position of the payout motor 834. In the present embodiment, the four timer interrupt cycles are 8 ms (= 2 ms × 4 times), and are set as the backlash absorption time.

  In step S634, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S632 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, the payout control program A value 1 is set to the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG (step S636). Thereby, it can set so that the fixed position determination of the paying-out rotating body is not performed (skip). The payout control program sets the rotation position of the payout rotating body in step S636 as the fixed position of the payout rotating body.

  Subsequent to step S636, the payout control program sets the skip determination time to be valid (step S638), and ends this routine. Here, the number of detection slits is three, which is the same number as the recesses of the payout rotating body, and is formed so as to be equally divided (every 120 degrees) on the outer periphery of the rotation detection board. As described above, the rotation of the payout motor 834 is the rotation of the payout rotating body of the rotation detection board via the first gear, the second gear, and the third gear. In the present embodiment, the rotation between the detection slits (120 degrees) of the rotation detection board (dispensing rotary body) is configured to correspond to the 18-step rotation of the dispensing motor 834.

  The payout control program manages the rotational position of the payout rotating body based on the number of steps of the payout motor 834 under the control of the payout control MPU 954a. Specifically, (1) a transition state in which the detection slit changes the optical axis of the blade rotation detection switch 840 from a cutoff state to a non-blocking state (referred to as an “edge detection state”), and (2) the detection slit is a blade. A state in which the optical axis of the rotation detection switch 840 has transitioned from a blocked state to a non-blocked state (referred to as a “fixed position determination state”); and (3) a detection slit blocks the optical axis of the blade rotation detection switch 840 from the non-blocked state. It is managed in three states: a state transitioned to a state (“fixed position determination skip state”).

  Each state corresponds to the following rotation. That is, the edge detection state (1) corresponds to one step rotation of the payout motor 834, the fixed position fixed state (2) corresponds to four step rotation of the payout motor 834, and the fixed position determination of (3). In the skip state, this corresponds to 13-step rotation of the payout motor 834. Thus, the rotation position between the detection slits (120 degrees) of the rotation detection board, that is, the rotation position of the payout rotating body is managed by the rotation of a total of 18 steps.

  In the fixed position determination skip state of (3), since the detection slit is in a state where the optical axis of the blade rotation detection switch 840 has transitioned from the non-blocking state to the blocking state, the skip determination time rotates 13 steps of the payout motor 834. The time is set. As described above, since the timer interruption period is set to 2 ms, the skip determination time is 26 ms (= 2 ms × 13 steps).

  When the skip determination time becomes valid in step S638, the skip determination time is subtracted in the timer update process in step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process). The payout control program subtracts the skip determination time, and sets the initial value 0 to the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG when the subtraction result becomes the value 0.

  On the other hand, when the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is not 0 (value 1) (when skipping) in step S630, that is, when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is not performed, or in step S634, If the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in S632 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value do not match, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. To do. Note that the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG set in step S636 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU 954a.

  The game balls supplied from the pachinko island facility are stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731, taken into the supply passage of the payout device 830, and guided to the payout device 830. In general, when game balls rub against each other and are charged by friction, electrostatic discharge is generated and noise is generated.

  For this reason, the payout device 830 is susceptible to noise and is in an environment. The rotation angle switch board 753 of the payout device 830 is provided with a blade rotation detection switch 840, and a detection signal from the blade rotation detection switch 840 is easily affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the game ball. The wiring (harness) that connects the payout control board 951 and the board 754 in the prize ball case in the payout device 830 is also easily affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the game ball.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to suppress erroneous detection due to the influence of noise, the fixed position determination skip state of (3) described above, that is, the detection slit shuts off the optical axis of the blade rotation detection switch 840 from the non-blocking state. In this state, the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is not performed. Thereby, the precision of the fixed position determination of the paying-out rotating body is increased. Note that the period and period necessary for detecting the fixed position of the payout rotating body can be obtained in advance by calculation, so that the skip determination time can be easily set and adjusted.

[10-5. Spherical spot detection processing]
Next, the sphere collision determination process will be described. In this ball collision determination process, it is determined whether or not a ball collision state has occurred due to the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 834 is transmitted.

  When the ball collision determination process is started, the payout control program controls the rotation angle switch detection history from the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as shown in FIG. 219 under the control of the payout control MPU 954a. Information RSW-HIST is read (step S640).

  Subsequent to step S640, the payout control program determines whether there is a detection signal from the blade rotation detection switch 840 described above (step S642). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S640 matches the home position determination value.

  This fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM as described above. In this embodiment, it is “00001111B (“ B ”represents a bit.)”, B4 to B4 of the upper 4 bits have the value 0, and B3 to B0 of the lower 4 bits have the value 1. In the determination in step S642, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value.

  In step S642, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S640 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, the payout control program Assuming that the detection slit is in a state where the optical axis of the blade rotation detection switch 840 has transitioned from the non-blocking state to the blocking state, that is, the dispensing rotator is rotating, and the ball-spinning state has not occurred, this routine is continued. finish.

  On the other hand, in step S642, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S640 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, the payout control program Sets a value of 1 to the in-ball flag PBE-FLG (step S644). This in-bending ball flag PBE-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not a ball-bending state due to the payout rotating body has occurred. On the other hand, the value is set to 0 when the ball colliding operation is not performed.

  Subsequent to step S644, the payout control program sets the ball collision determination time to be valid (step S646), and ends this routine. When the ball stagnation determination time becomes valid, the sphere stagnation determination time is subtracted in the timer update process in step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process).

[10-6. Various prize ball stock addition processing]
Next, various prize ball stock number addition processing will be described. The various prize ball stock number addition processing includes prize ball prize ball number addition processing and rental ball prize ball number addition processing. This award ball stock number addition process is a process for adding the number of balls to be paid out based on a later-described prize ball command from the main control board 1310. This is a process of adding the number of balls to be paid out based on the ball rental request signal from. First, the award ball stock number addition process for prize balls will be described, and then the award ball stock number addition process for rental balls will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls is set to be performed preferentially. After the game balls corresponding to the number of prize balls stock added in the prize ball stock number adding process for the prize balls are paid out by the payout device 830, the setting is made so that the number of winning ball stocks for lending is added. Yes.

[10-6-1. Prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls]
When the award ball stock number addition process for a prize ball is started, the payout control unit 954 on the payout control board 951 executes a payout control program under the control of the payout control MPU 954a as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not there is (step S650).

  This determination is made based on the command analyzed in the command analysis process in step S560 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process). Specifically, the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S650, the payout control program reads the received command information from the received command information storage area and determines whether or not it is a prize ball command.

  If the received command information is not a prize ball command in step S650, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. If the received command information is a prize ball command in step S650, the payout control program counts the number of prize balls corresponding to this prize ball command. The PBV is read from the winning ball number information table (step S652). The prize ball number information table, which will be described in detail later, is an information table stored in advance in the payout built-in ROM in association with the prize ball command and the prize ball number PBV.

  Subsequent to step S652, the payout control program reads the prize ball stock number PBS from the payout control built-in RAM (step S654). The award ball stock number PBS represents the number of game balls that have not yet been paid out by the payout device 830, that is, the number of unpaid balls, and has a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits) in this embodiment. Yes.

  Thereby, the award ball stock number PBS can store the number of unpaid balls from 0 to 32767. The prize ball stock PBS is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S652, the prize ball stock number PBS is read from the prize ball information storage area.

  The payout control program adds the prize ball number PBV read in step S652 to the prize ball stock number PBS read in step S654 (step S656), and ends this routine. After the addition in step S656, the prize ball command read in step S650 is erased from the received command information storage area.

[10-6-2. Addition of prize ball stock for rental balls]
Next, the processing for adding the number of winning ball stocks will be described. When the award ball stock number adding process for lending is started, the payout control unit 954 in the payout control board 951 executes a payout request as shown in FIG. 221 under the control of the payout control MPU 954a. It is determined whether or not there is a signal (step S660).

  This determination is made based on the lending request signal from the CR unit 6 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control part power-on process (payout control part main process). Specifically, the lending request signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S660, the payout control program reads input information from the input information storage area and determines whether or not there is a lending request signal.

  The payout control program terminates this routine as it is when there is no lending request signal in step S660, while when there is a lending request signal in step S660, the award ball is stored from the award ball information storage area of the above described payout control built-in RAM. The stock number PBS is read (step S662). The payout control program adds the rented ball number RBV to the award ball stock number PBS (step S664), and ends this routine.

  The number of rented balls RBV is a fixed value and is stored in advance in the payout built-in ROM. In the present embodiment, the value 25 is set as the number of rented balls RBV. In addition, after adding in step S664, the payout control program deletes the ball rental request signal read in step S660 from the input information storage area.

  In this embodiment, the prize balls are prioritized (the prize balls and the balls are managed separately). Therefore, even when there is a ball rental request signal, the ball rental request signal is held, When the ball is paid out, the ball is paid out. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the payout of the rented ball is performed after the prize ball stock PBS reaches the value 0.

[10-7. Stock monitoring process]
Next, the stock monitoring process will be described. This stock monitoring process is a process for monitoring whether or not the game is continued while the player is playing in a state where the storage space of the foul cover unit is filled with game balls stored (stocked state).

  When the stock monitoring process is started, the payout control program reads the prize ball stock number PBS from the award ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as shown in FIG. 222 under the control of the payout control MPU 954a ( In step S670), it is determined whether or not the read prize ball stock number PBS is equal to or greater than a careful threshold value TH (step S672). The caution threshold TH is a fixed value and is stored in advance in the payout built-in ROM. In the present embodiment, the value 50 is set as the caution threshold TH.

  When the winning ball stock number PBS is greater than or equal to the caution threshold TH in step S672, the payout control program sets a value 1 to the caution flag CA-FLG (step S674), and the routine is terminated. This caution flag CA-FLG indicates that the player starts stocking of game balls in the storage space of the foul cover unit, and the number of game balls not paid out (the number of prize balls described above) reaches the warning threshold TH or more. Is set to a value of 1 when the threshold value exceeds the alert threshold value TH, and is set to a value of 0 when the alert threshold value TH is not reached.

  On the other hand, when the winning ball stock number PBS is less than the caution threshold TH in step S672, the payout control program sets a value 0 to the caution flag CA-FLG (step S676), and this routine is ended.

  If the game state becomes a big hit and the player relaxes and looks at the effects unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460A, the player inadvertently plays for one round. The game ball paid out as a prize ball may be forgotten to be extracted from the lower plate 302 by operating the lower plate ball extraction button 354. If the game is continued in this state, the lower plate 302 is filled with game balls, and the game balls start to accumulate in the storage space of the foul cover unit.

  When the storage space of the foul cover unit is filled with game balls, as described above, the value of the prize ball stock PBS increases to exceed the warning threshold value TH, and various types of door frames 3 are provided as warning effects. A plurality of LEDs on the decorative board blink. By this blinking, for example, it is possible to inform a hall clerk of paying attention to the player's game. As a result, the hall clerk can tell the player that he / she wants to remove the game ball from the lower plate 302, and the player can play the game with the game ball filled in the lower plate 302 (the storage space for the foul cover unit). Can be prevented from continuing.

  In the present embodiment, the careful threshold value TH is set to a value 50 corresponding to about one fifth of the upper limit value 255 that can be represented by 1 byte (8 bits). Accordingly, it is possible to inform the hall clerk that the player is warned of the game at the earliest possible stage.

[10-8. Dispensing ball edge motion determination setting process]
Next, the payout ball engagement operation determination setting process will be described. In this paying-ball ball movement determination setting process, the payout motor 834 pays out the game ball to the upper plate or the lower plate, performs the ball-balling operation, or does not perform such payout or discharge. It is a process to set to either.

  When the payout ball engagement operation determination setting process is started, the payout control unit 954 in the payout control board 951 executes the payout control program under the control of the payout control MPU 954a and the rotation angle switch history information of the above-described payout control built-in RAM. The rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read from the storage area (step S680).

  Subsequent to step S680, the payout control program determines whether there is a detection signal from the blade rotation detection switch 840 (step S682). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S680 matches the home position determination value. This fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM as described above. In this embodiment, it is “00001111B (“ B ”represents a bit.)”, B4 to B4 of the upper 4 bits have the value 0, and B3 to B0 of the lower 4 bits have the value 1. In the determination in step S682, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value.

  In step S682, when the payout control program matches the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S680 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, It is determined whether or not the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is 1 (step S684). The retry error flag RTERR-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not a retry operation described later is operating abnormally. The value is 1 when the retry operation is operating abnormally, and the retry operation is not operating abnormally (retry operation). When the operation is normal), the value is set to 0.

  If it is determined in step S682 that the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S680 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, or in step S684. When the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0), that is, when the retry operation is not operating abnormally, the payout control program determines whether or not the ball colliding flag PBE-FLG is a value 1. Is determined (step S686).

  This ball-spinning flag PBE-FLG is a flag that indicates whether or not a ball-spinning state due to the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 834 is transmitted. A value of 1 is set when the motion is being performed, and a value of 0 is set when the sphere motion is not being performed.

  When the ball-picking flag PEB-FLG is not the value 1 (value 0) in step S686, that is, when the ball-pushing operation is not performed, the payout control program stores the award ball information stored in the above-described payout control built-in RAM. The prize ball stock number PBS is read from the area (step S688), and it is determined whether or not the read prize ball stock number PBS is larger than 0 (step S690). In this determination, it is determined whether or not there are unpaid balls in the payout of game balls by the payout motor 834.

  When the winning ball stock number PBS is larger than 0 in step S690, that is, when there is an unpaid ball number, the payout control program determines whether or not the game ball in which the storage space of the foul cover unit is stored is full. Is determined (step S692). This determination is performed based on the full tank information stored in the full tank and out-of-ball check process in step S556 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process). Specifically, the full tank information is stored in the state information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM.

  In step S692, the full tank information is read from the state information storage area to determine whether or not the game ball in which the storage space of the foul cover unit is stored is full.

  If it is determined in step S692 that the storage space for the foul cover unit is not full, the payout control program performs a payout setting process described later (step S694), and this routine is terminated. In this payout setting process, a payout operation for paying out game balls to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 is performed.

  On the other hand, when the game ball in which the accommodation space of the foul cover unit is stored is full in step S692, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the payout motor 834 is forcibly stopped when the storage space of the foul cover unit is filled with the stored game balls. When a prize ball is generated while the payout motor 834 is forcibly stopped, the number of unpaid balls by the payout motor 834 increases, and the prize ball stock number PBS is added and increased by the prize ball stock number addition process. Become.

  On the other hand, when the winning ball stock number PBS is not greater than 0 (value 0) in step S690, that is, when there is no unpaid ball number, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. As a result, game balls are not paid out.

  On the other hand, when the ball bending flag PBE-FLG is 1 in step S686, that is, when the ball bending operation is being performed, the payout control program performs a ball bending operation setting process described later (step S700). Exit. In this ball-spinning operation setting process, a ball-spinning operation that cancels the ball-spinning state by the payout rotating body of the payout device 830 is performed.

  On the other hand, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is 1 in step S684, that is, when the retry operation is abnormal, the payout control program sets the output stop (stop) of the drive signal to the payout motor 834. (Step S702). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 834 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above.

  Subsequent to step S702, the payout control program sets an error status output to the CR unit 6 (step S704), and ends this routine. In step S704, when the payout control program is not communicating with the CR unit 6 under the control of the payout control MPU 954a in order to notify the CR unit 6 that the ball lending is not possible at present (CR unit 6). When the logic value of BRDY from LOW is held, that is, held down and held), the logic of the PRDY signal is held LOW, that is, it is held down, and the logic state of the PRDY signal is set as the PRDY signal output setting information. Set and store in the CR communication information storage area.

  As a result, the payout control program stores the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the CR communication process (step S554) in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIG. The PRDY signal output setting information is read out from this, and the read PRDY signal output setting information, that is, the PRDY signal whose logical value is LOW, is rented out from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 954a of the payout control unit 954. Output to the CR unit 6 via the device connection terminal plate 869.

  On the other hand, when communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the logical value of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, rising and being held), the logical state of the EXS signal is maintained, and the payout control program The logical state of the EXS signal is set in the EXS signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area.

  As a result, the payout control program receives the EXS signal from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control part main process of the payout control part power-on process of FIG. The output setting information is read, and the read EXS signal output setting information, that is, the EXS signal in which the logical value is maintained, is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 954a via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. Output to the CR unit 6.

  Note that “maintain the logic state of the EXS signal” means that when the logical value of the EXS signal is LOW (the EXS signal is held down), the logical value of the EXS signal is maintained. When the signal is HI (the EXS signal is held up), the logic HI is maintained.

[10-8-1. Withdrawal setting process]
Next, the payout setting process will be described. In this payout setting process, the payout motor 834 is driven to make a setting for paying out game balls.

  When the payout setting process is started, the payout control unit 954 on the payout control board 951 causes the payout control program to set the drive command number DRV from the payout control built-in RAM as shown in FIG. 224 under the control of the payout control MPU 954a. Read (step S710). This drive command number DRV commands the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 834 and is equivalent to the prize ball stock number PBS. The drive command number DRV is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S710, the drive command number DRV is read from the prize ball information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S710, the payout control program determines whether or not the drive command number DRV is 0 (step S712). This determination is based on the drive command number DRV as to whether or not the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 834 remains.

  When the drive command number DRV is 0 in step S712, that is, when the number of game balls paid out by the payout motor 834 is zero, the payout control program stops outputting (stops) the drive signal to the payout motor 834. ) Is set (step S714). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 834 and stored in the output information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S714, the payout control program reads the prize ball stock number PBS from the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM (step S716), and reads the real ball count PB (step S718). The actual ball count PB is obtained by counting the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834. Although detailed description will be given later, this count is performed based on the detection signal from the count switch 838 in the port input process in step S550 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process). The real ball count PB is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S718, the real ball count PB is read from this prize ball information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S718, the payout control program sets a value obtained by subtracting the actual ball count PB read in step S718 from the prize ball stock number PBS read in step S716 to the prize ball stock number PBS and the drive command number DRV. (Step S720), the real ball count PB is set to 0 (step S722), and this routine is terminated. When the drive command number DRV and the real ball count PB are 0, in step S722, the value of the prize ball stock number PBS read in step S716 is set as the drive command number DRV as it is.

  On the other hand, when the drive command number DRV is not 0 in step S712, that is, when there is a number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 834, the payout control program sets the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 834. (Step S724). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 834 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S724, the payout control program subtracts 1 from the drive command number DRV (decrements, step S726), and determines whether there is a detection signal from the count switch 838 (step S728). This determination is made based on the detection signal from the count switch 838 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control part power-on process (payout control part main process).

  Specifically, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S728, the payout control program reads input information from the input information storage area and determines whether there is a detection signal from the counting switch 838.

  When there is a detection signal from the counting switch 838 in step S728, the payout control program adds 1 to the actual ball count PB (increments, step S730), and this routine is finished. In step S730, the real ball count PB is incremented by incrementing the real ball count PB.

  On the other hand, when there is no detection signal from the counting switch 838 in step S728, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. As described above, the payout control program is a case where the drive command number DRV is decremented in step S726 under the control of the payout control MPU 954a, and when there is no detection signal from the counting switch 838 in the determination in step S728, that is, If the ball count PB is not incremented, one game ball could not be paid out because the game ball was not received in the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 834 was transmitted. to decide.

  Therefore, the payout control program sets the value obtained by subtracting the real ball count PB from the prize ball stock number PBS to the drive command number DRV in step S720 described above in order to pay out one ball that should be paid out again.

  Thus, when there is no detection signal from the counting switch 838 in the determination of step S728, that is, when the actual ball count PB is not incremented, the value 1 which is one ball that should be paid out is included in the prize ball stock number PBS. In other words, since the value 1 which is one ball to be paid out can be rounded into the winning ball stock number PBS, a retry operation of paying out the one ball to be paid out again can be performed. By performing this retry operation, the possibility of unpaid game balls to the player can be extremely reduced, and a player's disadvantage due to unpaid game balls can be prevented.

[10-8-2. Spherical motion setting process]
Next, the spherical cornering operation setting process will be described. In this ball-spinning operation setting process, the setting is made to cancel the ball-spinning state by the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830 is transmitted.

  When the ball staking operation setting process is started, the payout control unit 954 in the payout control board 951 causes the payout control program to pass the ball scouring determination time as shown in FIG. 225 under the control of the payout control MPU 954a. It is determined whether or not (step S750). This determination is made on the basis of the ball collision determination time subtracted in the timer update process of step S552 in the payout control part power-on process (payout control part main process). Specifically, the ball collision determination time is stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM. In step S750, the time management information is read from the time management information storage area to determine whether or not the ball stagnation determination time has elapsed.

  When it is determined in step S750 that the ball collision determination time has not elapsed, the payout control program reads the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST from the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM (step S752). .

  Subsequent to step S752, the payout control program determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the blade rotation detection switch 840 described above (step S754). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S752 matches the home position determination value.

  As described above, this fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and in this embodiment, is “00001111B (“ B ”represents a bit)”, and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4 are the same. The value 0 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are the value 1. In the determination in step S754, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value.

  In step S754, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S752 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, the payout control program The output of the drive signal to the payout motor 834 is set so as to perform the ball collapsing operation (step S756), and this routine is finished. In this setting, drive information for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 is set and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above.

  On the other hand, in step S754, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S752 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match, the payout control program Sets the stop of the drive signal to the payout motor 834 (step S758). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 834 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S758, the payout control program sets a value of 0 to the in-ball flag PBE-FLG as the end of the ball-bending operation (step S760), and ends this routine. This in-between-ball flag PBE-FLG is a flag that indicates whether or not a ball-bending state due to the payout rotating body has occurred. When the payout motor 834 performs a ball-bending operation, the value is 1, When no operation is being performed (end of the ball collapsing operation), the value is set to 0, respectively.

  On the other hand, when the ball collision determination time has elapsed in step S750, the payout control program sets stop of the drive signal to the payout motor 834 (step S762). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 834 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S762, the payout control program sets an error state output to the CR unit 6 (step S764). Here, in order to notify the CR unit 6 that the ball lending is not possible, the payout control MPU 954a is not in communication with the CR unit 6 (the logical value of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, In other words, the logic of the PRDY signal is LOW, that is, the state of being lowered is held, and the logic state of the PRDY signal is set in the PRDY signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. Remember.

  Thus, the payout control program stores the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the payout control unit main process CR communication process (step S554) of the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIG. The PRDY signal output setting information is read out from this, and the read PRDY signal output setting information, that is, the PRDY signal whose logical value is LOW, is rented out from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 954a of the payout control unit 954. Output to the CR unit 6 via the device connection terminal plate 869.

  On the other hand, when communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the logical value of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, rising and being held), the logical state of the EXS signal is maintained, and the payout control program The logical state of the EXS signal is set in the EXS signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. Thus, in the CR communication process (step S554) in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 215, the payout control program is stored in the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM. From the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 954a, the gaming signal lending device connection terminal plate 869 reads out the EXS signal output setting information from the output signal, that is, the EXS signal in which the logical value is maintained. To the CR unit 6 via

  As described above, “maintaining the logic state of the EXS signal” means that when the logical value of the EXS signal is LOW (the EXS signal is held down), the logical LOW is maintained. When the logical value of the EXS signal is HI (the EXS signal is held up), the logical HI is maintained.

  Subsequent to step S764, the payout control program sets a value “0” to the ball-balling flag PBE-FLG as the ball-balling operation ends (step S766), and the routine is terminated.

[10-9. Retry operation monitoring process]
Next, the retry operation monitoring process will be described. This retry operation monitoring process is a process for monitoring whether or not a retry operation for paying out a game ball that should be paid out is performed normally.

  When the retry operation monitoring process is started, the payout control unit 954 on the payout control board 951 causes the payout control program to execute the rotation angle of the above-described payout control built-in RAM as shown in FIG. 226 under the control of the payout control MPU 954a. The rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read from the switch history information storage area (step S770).

  Subsequent to step S770, the payout control program determines whether there is a detection signal from the blade rotation detection switch 840 described above (step S772). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S770 matches the home position determination value. This fixed position determination value is stored in the payout control built-in ROM, and in this embodiment, is “00001111B (“ B ”represents a bit)”. In this fixed position determination value, the upper 4 bits B7 to B4 have the value 0, and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 have the value 1. In the determination in step S772, the payout control program determines whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value. Do.

  In step S772, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S770 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, the payout control program The value 1 is added to the inconsistency counter INCC (increment, step S774).

  The inconsistency counter INCC is obtained by calculating the number of game balls received and received by the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 834 is transmitted, and the number of balls detected by the counting switch 838. This is a counter for calculating the difference. This inconsistency counter INCC normally has a value of 0 because the number of game balls received and paid out by the recess of the payout rotating body matches the number of balls detected by the counting switch 838. Become.

  Since the payout control program performs a retry operation in the payout installation process, the number of game balls received and paid out by the concave portion of the payout rotating body by this retry operation and the count switch 838 actually detected. The inconsistency counter INCC determines whether or not the game balls that are not consistent with the number of balls are repeatedly paid out.

  The inconsistency counter INCC is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S774, the payout control program increments the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S774 or in step S772, the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S770 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value. Sometimes, the payout control program determines whether there is a detection signal from the counting switch 838 (step S776).

  This determination is made based on the detection signal from the count switch 838 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process). Specifically, as described above, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM. In step S776, the payout control program reads input information from the input information storage area and determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the counting switch 838.

  When there is a detection signal from the counting switch 838 in step S776, the payout control program subtracts 1 from the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the award ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM (decrements, step S778). .

  Subsequent to step S778 or when there is no detection signal from the counting switch 838 in step S776, the payout control program determines whether or not the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH (step S780). ).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, it has been experimentally obtained that the probability that one game ball that does not fit due to the retry operation is paid out is about one millionth, and in this embodiment, the mismatch threshold value The value 5 is set as INCTH.

  In the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 215 (step S530), as described above, the payout backup stored in the payout control built-in RAM at the time of power recovery Information used for the retry operation monitoring process is set based on the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area, which is information.

  By this processing, for example, even if there is a momentary power failure or a power failure, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC at the time of power recovery is restored to the value of the inconsistency counter INCC just before the momentary power failure or power failure stored as payout backup information can do. Thereby, in determination of step S780, monitoring of the game ball paying-out operation (retry operation) by the paying-out device 830, which has been performed until the momentary power failure or power failure, can be continued from the time of power recovery.

  Therefore, for example, immediately before a momentary power failure or power failure, if the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH in the determination in step S780, it is determined that the retry operation is operating normally, that is, the payout device It is determined that the game ball payout operation by 830 is in a normal state, and it can be determined that the game ball payout operation by the payout device 830 is in a normal state by the determination in step S780 even during power recovery.

  On the other hand, when the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is not smaller than the inconsistency threshold INCTH in the determination in step S780, it is determined that the retry operation is abnormal, that is, the game ball payout operation by the payout device 830 is abnormal. Even when power is restored, it can be determined in step S780 that the game ball payout operation by the payout device 830 is in an abnormal state.

  If the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is smaller than the inconsistency threshold INCTH in step S780, this routine is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH in step S780, that is, when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is equal to or greater than the mismatch threshold INCTH, the payout control program displays “Retry error”. In order to notify the fact that it is, the retry error information for displaying the number “5” is set on the error LED display 953 which is a segment display mounted on the payout control board 951, and the payout control built-in RAM described above is set. Is set (stored) in the state information storage area (step S782).

  On the other hand, when notifying that “the prize ball is in stock”, the payout control program sets the information in the prize ball stock to display the number “9” on the error LED display 953 and incorporates the above-described payout control. It is set (stored) in the status information storage area of the RAM (step S782).

  Subsequent to step S782, the payout control program sets a value 0 (initial value 0) to the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM (step S784).

  In step S784, the mismatch counter INCC determines that the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH in step S780, that is, when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is greater than or equal to the mismatch threshold INCTH. It is initialized when this internal factor occurs.

  When the operation switch 952 is operated to clear the RAM when the power is turned on, the inconsistency counter INCC is initialized in response to the occurrence of this external factor. When the operation switch 952 is operated when the power is turned on, as described above, an operation signal corresponding to the operation is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 as a RAM clear signal.

  The main control program described above erases all the various information stored in the main control built-in RAM and outputs a RAM clear notification command to the peripheral control board 1510 as described above under the control of the main control MPU 1310a. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 outputs a RAM clear notification sound from the speaker of the speaker unit 920 provided in the main body frame 4 and the speaker of the door frame 3.

  Subsequent to step S784, the payout control program sets a value of 1 to the retry error flag RTERR-FLG (step S786), and the routine ends. This retry error flag RTERR-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the retry operation is operating abnormally, and is set to a value of 1 when the retry operation is operating abnormally, while the retry operation is not operating abnormally. When (when the retry operation is operating normally), the value is set to zero.

  The payout control program, under the control of the payout control MPU 954a, sets the retry error information (or information in the prize ball stock) set (stored) in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S782 to the payout control unit power supply. A retry error status command is created and transmitted to the main control board 1310 in the command transmission process of step S566 in the input process (payout control unit main process).

  The payout control program creates display data to be displayed on the error LED display 953 in the LED display data creation process of step S564 in the process, and stores it in the output information storage area as LED display information. As a result, a drive signal is output to the error LED display 953 based on the LED display information stored in the output information storage area in the port output process of step S548 in the process, and the number “5” is output to the error LED display 953. Is displayed.

  In the main control board 1310, the main control program transmits a command to the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92) in the main control side timer interrupt process. This peripheral control board 1510 has a door frame side lighting / flashing command that outputs a lighting signal for causing a plurality of LEDs on various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 to emit light in a predetermined color (red in this embodiment). It outputs to the relay board | substrate 911 for frames, and the door frame left side decoration board | substrate 160, and light-emits each corresponding LED by predetermined color.

  As described above, the store clerk or the like who notices the light emission of the plurality of LEDs opens the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 to thereby display the number “?” On the error LED display 953 mounted on the payout control board 951. By visually observing that “5” is displayed, it is possible to confirm that, for example, a “retry error” has occurred.

  As a result, in order to investigate the cause of the occurrence, the store clerk of the hall conducts confirmation work such as malfunction of the counting switch 838, disconnection of various harnesses extending from the counting switch 838 to the payout control board 951, and contact failure of various connectors. Compared with the case where the light emission of the plurality of LEDs and the display content of the error LED display 953 are not notified, the process can be performed very quickly.

  By retrying the counting switch 838 intentionally in a non-operating state, the retry operation described above is regarded as being difficult to detect the game ball that is received by the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotary shaft of the payout motor 834 is transmitted. Even if an illegal act of illegally acquiring a game ball to be paid out by this retry operation is performed, if the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is equal to or greater than the inconsistency threshold INCTH, Since the plurality of LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 emit light, the hall clerk notices this issue mode and rushes to check the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  If it does so, the player who performs a fraudulent act will have to be interrupted so that the act may not be discovered, and the illegal game ball by a fraudulent act cannot be continuously acquired. Even if the value of the inconsistency counter INCC coincides with the inconsistency threshold INCTH, the number of game balls that can be acquired by a player who performs an illegal act is the same as the inconsistency threshold INCTH. Therefore, damage to the hall due to the act of intentionally deactivating the counting switch 838 can be suppressed to an extremely small level.

  Further, as described above, the mismatch counter INCC determines that the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH in step S780, that is, the value of the mismatch counter INCC is equal to or greater than the mismatch threshold INCTH. It is initialized when the internal factor that it became.

  As a result, the inconsistency counter INCC is not initialized when an external factor occurs, for example, when the operation switch 952 is operated to cancel the error. Therefore, even if the operation switch 952 or the like is illegally modified so that the operation signal is input to the payout control MPU 954a, the inconsistency counter INCC may be forcibly initialized by such an illegal action. Absent.

[10-10. Inconsistency counter reset judgment process]
Next, the mismatch counter reset process will be described. In this inconsistency counter reset process, the number of game balls received and received by the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 834 is transmitted, and the number of balls detected by the counting switch 838 This is a process for determining whether or not to reset the inconsistency counter INCC that calculates the difference between.

  When the inconsistency counter reset determination process is started, the payout control unit 954 in the payout control board 951 causes the payout control program to execute the inconsistency counter reset determination time as shown in FIG. 227 under the control of the payout control MPU 954a. It is determined whether or not it has elapsed (step S790).

  This determination is made based on the mismatch counter reset determination time updated in the timer update process (step S552) in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process). Specifically, the mismatch counter reset determination time is stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above. In step S790, the payout control program reads the time management information from the time management information storage area and determines whether or not the mismatch counter reset determination time has elapsed.

  When the mismatch counter reset determination time has not elapsed in step S790, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. On the other hand, when the mismatch counter reset determination time has elapsed in step S790, the payout control program initializes the mismatch counter reset determination time (step S792). By this initialization, an initial value of 7000 s (about 2 hours) is set as the mismatch counter reset determination time.

  Subsequent to step S792, the payout control program sets a value 0 (initial value 0) to the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the award ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above (step S794). Exit.

  As described above, the inconsistency counter INCC is detected by the counting switch 838 and the number of game balls received and received by the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 834 is transmitted. This is a counter for calculating the difference between the number of balls, and the number of game balls received and paid out by the recess of the payout rotating body is usually equal to the number of balls detected by the counting switch 838. As a result, the value is 0.

  Since the payout control program performs a retry operation in the payout installation process under the control of the payout control MPU 954a, the number of game balls that are received and paid out by the concave portion of the payout rotating body by this retry operation are actually The inconsistency counter INCC determines whether or not the game balls that are not consistent due to the discrepancy with the number of balls detected by the counting switch 838 are repeatedly paid.

  Here, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes the game board 5 and the frame body such as the main body frame 4 to which the game board 5 is mounted, and the game board 5 is exchanged (new stand replacement). It is configured so that the specifications can be changed. Therefore, the payout control board 951 for controlling the payout apparatus 830, the drive power supply for the payout apparatus 830 and the power supply board for generating the control power supply for the payout control board 951 are provided on the frame side as common functions.

  In the payout control unit 954 on the payout control board 951, the payout control program monitors the inconsistency counter INCC as described above under the control of the payout control MPU 954a to determine whether or not the retry operation is repeatedly performed. It is comprised so that operation | movement can be determined. In the payout control unit power-off process in the payout control unit power-on process, the inconsistency counter INCC immediately before shut-off is stored when the power is shut off, while the processing in step S530 in the payout control unit power-on process (restore of the RAM work area). In the power setting), the processing is started again from the stored inconsistency counter INCC when the power is turned on.

[10-11. Error release operation determination process]
Next, the error release operation determination process will be described. In this error release operation determination process, it is determined whether or not the operation switch 952 is operated.

  When the error release operation determination process is started, the payout control unit 954 in the payout control board 951 causes the payout control program to release the error of the operation switch 952 as shown in FIG. 228 under the control of the payout control MPU 954a. It is determined whether or not it has been operated (step S800).

  This determination is made based on the operation signal from the operation switch 952 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control part power-on process (payout control part main process). Specifically, the operation signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above. In step S800, the payout control program reads the input information from the input information storage area, and determines that the error cancellation is not instructed when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 952 is HI. When the operation switch 952 is determined not to be operated, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 952 is LOW, the operation switch 952 is determined to be instructed to cancel the error. It is determined that

  When the operation switch 952 is not operated in step S800, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. On the other hand, when the operation switch 952 is operated in step S800, the payout control program performs error flag state confirmation processing. This is performed (step S802).

  In this error flag state determination process, the state of the error flag corresponding to various error information related to the payout device 830 is confirmed. For example, the state of the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the retry operation is abnormal is confirmed. As described above, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the retry operation is abnormally performed, and when the retry operation is not abnormally operated (the retry operation is operating normally). Sometimes set to the value 0. For this reason, the payout control program checks whether the value of the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is 0 or 1 under the control of the payout control MPU 954a.

  Subsequent to step S802, state information setting processing is performed (step S804). In this status information setting process, when the payout control program indicates that an error flag has occurred based on the error flag confirmed in step S802, status information corresponding to the error flag is displayed. Is set (stored) in the state information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM.

  Thereby, in the command transmission process of step S566 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process), the payout control program reads various information (state information) from the state information storage area, and this read state A status command is created based on the information and transmitted to the main control board 1310.

  For example, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the retry operation described above is operating abnormally is 1, that is, when the retry operation is operating abnormally, the payout control program indicates an error in the retry operation. Retry error information that informs the occurrence is set (stored) in the status information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. If sooted, the payout control program creates a retry error status command and sends it to the main control board 1310 in the command transmission process of step S566 in the payout control part power-on process (payout control part main process). .

  The main control board 1310 that has received the retry error information is transmitted by the main control program to the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process. The sub-control program performs a retry operation error notification process that reports that an error has occurred in the retry operation.

  In this retry operation error notification process, the error notification announcement of the retry operation “Check the prize ball unit.” And “Check the harness of the payout control board.” Is repeated twice, for example. The information is reproduced from the speaker of the speaker unit 920 and the speaker of the door frame 3, thereby informing the hall clerk and the like.

  A store clerk or the like who heard this retry operation error notification announces a malfunction of the counting switch 838, disconnection of various harnesses from the counting switch 838 to the payout control board 951, contact failure of various connectors, etc. Compared with the case where the error notification announcement of the retry operation does not flow from the speaker 573 or the pair of lower speakers 921, it can be confirmed very quickly. In the retry operation error notification process, a plurality of LEDs on various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 are caused to emit light in a predetermined color (in this embodiment, red).

  Subsequent to step S804, release setting processing is performed (step S806). In this cancellation setting process, when the payout control program indicates that an error has occurred based on the error flag corresponding to the various error information confirmed in step S802, the error flag The fact that the error corresponding to is already stopped by the error LED display 953, which is a segment display mounted on the payout control board 951, is in a state where it can be forcibly stopped. In order to transmit to the CR unit 6, the logic of the above-mentioned PRDY signal is held at HI, that is, the state in which the PRDY signal is raised is held, and the game ball lending device connection terminal is connected from the output terminal of the payout control MPU 954 a of the payout control unit 954 Output to the CR unit 6 via the plate 869.

  For example, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the retry operation described above is operating abnormally is 1, that is, when the retry operation is operating abnormally, the payout control program already has an error LED indicator. In order to forcibly stop the number “5” indicating that it is a “retry error” displayed by 953, the retry error information stored in the state information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM is Forcibly overwrites the information displayed with the graphic “-” notifying that “normal”.

  In order to inform the CR unit 6 that it is ready to lend a ball, the logic of the PRDY signal is HI, that is, the rising state is held, and the payout control program outputs an output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 954a. Are output to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869.

  Subsequent to step S806, the payout control program performs error flag initialization processing (step S808), and this routine is terminated. In this error flag initialization process, when the payout control program indicates that an error has occurred based on the error flag corresponding to the various error information confirmed in step S802, Initialize the error flag.

  For example, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the retry operation described above is operating abnormally is 1, that is, when the retry operation is operating abnormally, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to 0. Set and initialize. At this time, the logic of the PRDY signal described above is held at HI, that is, the rising state is maintained, and the logic state of the PRDY signal is set in the PRDY signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area.

  Thus, in the CR communication process (step S554) in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 215, the PRDY signal output setting information is stored from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM. The read PRDY signal output setting information, that is, the PRDY signal whose logical value is LOW, is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 954a via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. Output to.

  Thus, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is determined by the payout control program when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is equal to or greater than the mismatch threshold INCTH in the determination of step S780 in the retry operation monitoring process. When the operation switch 952 is operated while the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to a value 1 in step S786 of the process, the occurrence of this external factor is triggered. As a trigger, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to 0 and initialized.

  The retry error flag RTERR-FLG is operated to clear the RAM when the operation switch 952 is operated to clear the RAM when the power is turned on, that is, the operation switch 952 clears the RAM to release the error. Similar to the case where the switch 952 is operated, the initialization is triggered by the occurrence of this external factor.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the main process on the main control side is executed from the time the power is turned on to the operation switch 952 (operation switch) that was originally supposed to be used to cancel the error that has occurred regarding the payout operation. Instead, for the predetermined time until the operation is performed, an operation for exhibiting a RAM clear function for starting initialization of the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) and the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) instead. It functions as a part.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 causes the operation switch 952 to function as an operation unit for canceling an error that has occurred with respect to the game ball payout operation after the predetermined time has elapsed. Here, even if the hall clerk is not familiar with the operation of the pachinko gaming machine, as long as he remembers the position of the operation switch 952 on the back of the gaming machine, according to the timing of operating the operation switch 952, If the predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, the function of canceling the error that occurred with respect to the game ball paying-out operation is exhibited, while depending on the timing when the operation switch 952 is operated, If it is within the predetermined time, the function of initializing the storage unit can be exhibited.

  Therefore, even if an error occurs in such a gaming machine, the hall clerk can take appropriate action without hesitating the switch operation by improving the efficiency of the switch operation at the time of handling the error, so that the game is interrupted. The game can be resumed before the played player loses his willingness to play.

[10-12. Exchange of various signals with CR unit]
Next, the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control part power-on process of FIG. 215 will be described using a timing chart. In this CR communication processing, various signals are exchanged between the payout control board 951 and the CR unit 6.

  First, signal processing at the time of payout operation by ball lending will be described, and subsequently input signal confirmation processing from the CR unit 6 will be described. Here, the number of game balls of 200 yen as the amount (in this embodiment, 50 balls, and the payout operation of 25 balls of 100 yen as the amount is performed twice) is used as the number of rented balls. A case of paying out to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 will be described.

  The BRQ signal, the BRDY signal, and the CR connection signal from the CR unit 6 are read from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM and stored in the read input information. In the CR communication process, the payout control program confirms the logical states of the BRQ signal, the BRDY signal, and the CR connection signal from the input information every 2 ms that is the interrupt timer period.

[14-12-1. Signal processing during payout by ball lending]
The payout control program reads PRDY signal output setting information from the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM under the control of the payout control MPU 954a. When the read PRDY signal output setting information is set to the logic state of the PRDY signal that indicates that the payout operation for paying out the rented ball is possible, the payout control program executes FIG. As shown in d), in order to notify that the payout operation for paying out the rented ball is possible, the logic of the PRDY signal is set to HI, that is, it is started up and held and the payout control unit 954 of the payout control unit 954a It outputs from the output terminal of a predetermined | prescribed output port, and it outputs to CR unit 6 via the lending apparatus connection terminal board 869, such as game balls, as PRDY (timing H0).

  In this state, for example, when a player pushes the ball rental button 361 of the ball rental unit 360, the ball rental sensor 365b is switched on (ON), and this ball rental operation signal is set as TDS. The data is input from the frequency display board 365 to the CR unit 6 through the game ball rental device connecting terminal board 869.

  The CR unit 6 to which this TDS is inputted pays out the ball rental request signal BRDY to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 in order to pay out the number of game balls equivalent to 200 yen as the number of rented balls. 6 is output to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 954a) via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is raised and held (timing H1). This BRDY is input as a BRDY signal to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 954a.

  As shown in FIG. 229 (b), the payout control program controls the payout request monitoring time HA (from 20 milliseconds (ms) in this embodiment) from the timing H1 by the control of the payout control MPU 954a to which the BRDY signal is input. Is set to 58 ms.) A predetermined number of balls (for example, 25 balls) is paid out from the CR unit 6 through a gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869 by one paying operation before the time elapses. Whether or not BRQ, which is a one-time payout operation start request signal, rises is monitored.

  Since the CR unit 6 pays out the number of game balls for 100 yen to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 as the number of rents out of the number of game balls for 200 yen as an amount of money, FIG. ), The BRQ is output from the CR unit 6 to the CR unit 6 via the lending device connection terminal plate 869 such as a game ball until the rental request monitoring time HA elapses from the timing H1, and the signal is Start up and hold (timing H2). This BRQ is input as a BRQ signal to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 954a.

  As shown in FIG. 229 (c), the payout control MPU 954a, when the BRQ signal rises from the timing H1 until the lending request monitoring time HA elapses, the BRQ request acknowledgment ACK monitoring time HB (this embodiment) Is set to 20 ms ± 1 ms.) In order to inform that the one-time payout operation has been started, the payout is made with the logic of the EXS signal set to HI, that is, with the raised state held. It outputs from the output terminal of the predetermined | prescribed output port of control MPU954a, and outputs to CR unit 6 via the lending apparatus connection terminal board 869, such as game balls, as EXS (timing H3).

  As shown in FIG. 229 (b), the CR unit 6 to which this EXS is input has a lending instruction monitoring time HC (in the present embodiment, set to 20 ms to 58 ms) from the timing H3. The BRQ that has been started up and held from the timing H2 is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 951 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is lowered and held (timing H4).

  As shown in FIG. 229 (c), the payout control MPU 954a performs one payout operation until the payout monitoring time HD (in this embodiment, the ball payout time is set) from the timing H4. Then, only the predetermined number of rented balls, that is, the number of game balls for 100 yen is paid out to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 as the number of lent balls. When the payout monitoring time HD elapses, the EXS signal that has been raised and held from timing H3 is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 954a with its logic set to LOW, that is, in the lowered state. , EXS is output to the CR unit 6 via the gaming ball rental device connecting terminal plate 869 (timing H5).

  Since the CR unit 6 pays out the remaining number of game balls of 100 yen out of the number of game balls of 200 yen as the amount of money to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 as the rented number, FIG. ), The BRQ is transferred from the CR unit 6 to the lending device connection terminal board such as a game ball until the next request confirmation timing HE (in this embodiment, the maximum is set to 268 ms) from the timing H5. It outputs to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU954a) via 869, and raises and holds the signal (timing H6).

  Similarly, when the payout control MPU 954a pays out the remaining 100 yen of game balls to the upper plate 301 or the lower plate 302 using the method described above, as shown in FIG. 229 (c). The EXS signal that has been raised and held is set to LOW, that is, held in a lowered state, and is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 954a. It outputs to CR unit 6 via board 869 (timing H7).

  As shown in FIG. 229 (a), the CR unit 6 starts from the timing H1 until the CR unit lending completion monitoring time HF (in this embodiment, the maximum setting is 268 ms) elapses from the timing H7. The BRDY thus raised and held is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 951 (the payout control MPU 954a) via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is lowered and held (timing H8).

  The lending request monitoring time HA, the BRQ request acknowledgment ACK monitoring time HB, the lending instruction monitoring time HC, the dispensing monitoring time HD, the next request confirmation timing HE, and the CR unit lending completion monitoring time HF are processed when the dispensing control unit is turned on. The time is counted in the timer update process in step S552 in the (payout control unit main process).

  Note that the payout control program is not in communication with the CR unit 6 when a ball breakage, ball rounding, counting switch error, retry error, full tank, etc. occurs (the logical value of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW). In other words, when the signal is held down and held), the logic of the PRDY signal that has been started up and held from the timing H1 is set to LOW. In other words, the payout control program is held in a lowered state and is output from an output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 954a, and is supplied as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. Output (timing H9).

  On the other hand, when communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the logical value of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, rising and being held), the payout control program maintains the logical state of the EXS signal. , And output from an output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 954a. The payout control program is output as EXS to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connecting terminal board 869. “Keep the logic state of the EXS signal” means that when the logical value of the EXS signal is LOW (the EXS signal is held down), the logical value of the EXS signal is HI. In some cases (when the EXS signal is held up), the logic HI is maintained.

  Thus, the CR unit 6 exchanges various signals with the payout control program (payout control MPU 954a). This CR unit 6 performs a payout operation of 25 balls for an amount of 100 yen twice as the number of game balls for an amount of 200 yen, thereby allowing a game ball with a rental amount of 50 balls to be placed on the upper plate 301 or Pay out to the lower plate 302.

  A hall clerk or the like operates a setting unit (not shown) provided on the front side of the CR unit 6 so that, for example, the number of game balls for an amount of 100 yen is used as the number of rented balls. When set to pay out to the tray 302, the payout control MPU 954a performs a payout operation of 25 balls for the amount of 100 yen once, and the upper plate with the number of game balls of 500 yen as the amount of money is lent. When the payout control program is set to be paid out to 301 or the lower plate 302, the payout control program performs the payout operation of 25 balls for the amount of 100 yen five times, while renting the number of game balls for the amount of 1000 yen. When set to pay out to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 as numbers, 25 ball payout operations for an amount of 100 yen are performed 10 times.

[10-12-2. Checking input signal from CR unit]
The payout control program allows the CR unit 6 to output the BRQ from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 951 via the lending device connection terminal board 869 such as a game ball even after the rental request monitoring time HA has passed. Even when the signal is not raised or even when the lending instruction monitoring time HC described above elapses, the CR unit 6 sends the BRDY to the payout control board 951 from the CR unit 6 via the lending device connection terminal board 869 such as a game ball. Output to. Even if the CR unit 6 has not lowered the signal or the next request confirmation timing HE described above has elapsed, the CR unit 6 transmits the BRQ via the CR ball 6 via the lending device connection terminal board 869 such as a game ball. To the payout control board 951. When the CR unit 6 does not start up the signal or when the above-mentioned CR unit lending completion monitoring time HF elapses, the CR unit 6 returns the BRDY, and the gaming unit lending device connection terminal plate 869 from the CR unit 6 To the payout control board 951. When the signal has not fallen, the CR unit 6 uses the above-described PRDY and EXS to check whether BRQ and BRDY are normal.

  Specifically, when the payout control program determines that BRQ and BRDY are not normal (timing J0), after a lapse of a predetermined period JA (in this embodiment, 200 ms ± 1 ms) from the timing J0. , The logic of the PRDY signal is set to LOW, that is, the state of being lowered is held and output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 954a, and as PRDY, CR via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 It is output to the unit 6, the logic of the EXS signal is set to LOW, that is, the state in which it is lowered is held and output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 954 a, and as the EXS, the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869 To the CR unit 6 (timing J1).

  Subsequently, the payout control program, after the elapse of a predetermined period JB from the timing J1 (in this embodiment, set to 200 ms ± 1 ms), sets the logic of the PRDY signal held down from the timing J1 to HI. In other words, it is held in the raised state and is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 954a, and is output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing) J2).

  Subsequently, the payout control program sets the logic of the PRDY signal raised and held from the timing J2 after the elapse of a predetermined period JC (in this embodiment, 100 ms ± 1 ms) from the timing J2. In other words, it is held in a lowered state and output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 954a, and is output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing) J3).

  Subsequently, the payout control program sets the logic of the PRDY signal held down and held from the timing J3 after the elapse of a predetermined period JD from the timing J3 (in this embodiment, 100 ms ± 1 ms) as the logic HI. In other words, it is held in the raised state and is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 954a, and is output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing) J4).

  Subsequently, the payout control program sets the logic of the PRDY signal raised and held from the timing J4 after a predetermined period JE (in this embodiment, set to 100 ms ± 1 ms) from the timing J4 to LOW. In other words, it is held in a lowered state and output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 954a, and is output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing) J5).

  Subsequently, the payout control program sets the logic of the PRDY signal held down and held from the timing J5 after the elapse of a predetermined period JF (in this embodiment, 10000 ms ± 1 ms) from the timing J5 to HI. In other words, it is held in the raised state and is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 954a, and is output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing) J6).

  The above-described predetermined period JA to predetermined period JF are timed by the timer update process in step S552 in the payout control part power-on process (payout control part main process).

[11. Various control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 1510 that receives various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described with reference to FIGS. 230 to 234. 230 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit power-on process, FIG. 231 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, and FIG. 232 shows an example of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process. FIG. 233 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process, and FIG. 234 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process.

  The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1530 and a liquid crystal and sound control unit 1540, and various control processes of the peripheral control unit 1530 will be described here. First, the peripheral control unit power-on process will be described, followed by the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process, and the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process. . In the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing is set as the highest priority as the interrupt processing priority, followed by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and peripheral control unit The order of V blank interrupt processing is set.

  Further, the peripheral control board 1510 acquires game information such as the result of jackpot determination from the main control board 1310 and refers to it, thereby allowing any one of a plurality of decorative symbol variation patterns to appear. In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, based on the acquired game information, the effect display device 1600 causes the decorative pattern variation pattern to appear, and the effect display (background or hold image) related to the degree of expectation is changed. Control for operating the movable member is executed. In the decorative symbol variation pattern, the decorative symbol is variably displayed for the variation time of the special symbol, and if a special symbol combination appears as a result of the variably displayed, it is suggested that the winning combination is won.

[11-1. Various control processes of peripheral control unit]
[11-1-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the processing at power-on of the peripheral control unit will be described with reference to FIG. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control MPU 1530a of the peripheral control unit 1530 performs a peripheral control unit power-on process as shown in FIG. When the peripheral control unit power-on process is started, the effect control program performs an initial setting process under the control of the peripheral control MPU 1530a (step S1000). In this initial setting process, the effect control program performs a process for initializing the peripheral control MPU 1530a itself, a hot start / cold start determination process, a process for setting a wait timer after reset, and the like. The peripheral control MPU 1530a first performs a process of initializing itself. The time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 1530a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU 1530a is initialized in a very short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1530a enters a state in which interrupt permission is set. For example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described below, the peripheral control MPU 1530a outputs commands and pachinko machines related to control of game effects output from the main control board 1310. Various commands such as commands relating to the state of the gaming machine 1 can be received. In the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 1530a itself, the peripheral control MPU 1530a initializes the built-in VRAM by, for example, writing “0” in the storage area of the built-in VRAM in the sound source built-in VDP 1540a.

  In the hot start / cold start determination process, the peripheral control RAM 1530c compares the production backup information (1fr), which is the contents backed up in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr), in the backup first area. The production backup information (1 ms) which is the contents backed up in Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms) is compared, and the contents backed up in Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) in the backup second area. While comparing certain production backup information (1fr), production backup information (1ms), which is the contents backed up in Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms), is compared. For the production backup information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank1 (1fr) with respect to Bank0 (1fr), which is the storage area normally used in the peripheral control RAM 1530c, and for Bank0 (1ms) The production backup information (1 ms), which is the content stored in Bank 1 (1 ms), is copied back to make a hot start, while the compared contents do not match (that is, they do not match). The value 0 is forcibly written to Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1 ms), which are normally used storage areas of the peripheral control RAM 1530c, to make a cold start.

  In the hot start / cold start determination process, the peripheral control SRAM 1530d also compares the production backup information (SRAM) that is backed up in the Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) in the first backup area. At the same time, the production backup information (SRAM) that is backed up in the Bank 3 (SRAM) and the Bank 4 (SRAM) in the second backup area is compared. When the compared contents match, the production backup information (SRAM) that is the contents stored in the Bank 0 (SRAM) with respect to the Bank 0 (SRAM) that is the normally used storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1530d (see FIG. 20). ) Is copied back to make a hot start, but when the compared contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), the value is relative to Bank0 (SRAM) which is a storage area normally used by the peripheral control SRAM 1530d. A 0 is forcibly written to make a cold start. Following such a hot start or cold start, the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged work area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c (see FIG. 20) to clear it to zero. Then, after performing this initialization setting process, the peripheral control MPU 1530a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1530af and the peripheral control external WDT 1530e (see FIG. 19) so that the peripheral control MPU 1530a is not reset. Yes.

  Subsequent to step S1000, the effect control program performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, the effect control program acquires calendar information specifying the year, month, and day from the RTC built-in RAM of the RTC 15654a of the RTC control unit 1565, and acquires time information specifying the hour, minute, and second. Furthermore, the effect control program is set in the RTC information acquisition storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c as the current calendar information in the calendar information storage unit, and is set as the current time information in the time information storage unit.

  As described above, the peripheral control MPU 1530a acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM of the RTC 1565a when the power is turned on. The peripheral control MPU 1530a outputs the clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1530af and the peripheral control external WDT 1530e after performing the above-described current time information acquisition process, so that the peripheral control MPU 1530a is not reset.

  In the current time information acquisition process, the brightness setting process of the game board side effect display device 1600 is also performed. In the luminance setting process of the game board side effect display device 1600, the peripheral control MPU 1530a acquires the luminance setting information from the RTC built-in RAM of the RTC control unit 1565, and becomes the luminance of the LED included in the acquired luminance setting information. In addition, a process of turning on the backlight by adjusting the luminance of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is performed.

  As described above, the luminance setting information includes luminance adjustment information for adjusting the range of the luminance of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 in the range of 100% to 70% in increments of 5%, and the currently set game. Brightness of the backlight of the board-side effect display device 1600.

  Subsequent to step S1002, the effect control program sets a value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1006). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute a peripheral control unit steady process to be described later, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Is set to 0 when not executing.

  The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed in response to the input of a V blank signal from the VDP 1540a that indicates that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1530a can be received. The value 1 is set in the blank signal interrupt processing.

  In step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. The peripheral control MPU 1530a sets a value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, and then outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1530af and the peripheral control external WDT 1530e so that the peripheral control MPU 1530a is not reset. Yes.

  Subsequent to step S1006, the effect control program determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 (step S1008). When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (value 0), the process returns to step S1008 again to repeatedly determine whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1.

  By repeating such a determination, the process waits until the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. The peripheral control MPU 1530a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1530af and the peripheral control external WDT 1530e after determining whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, and resets to the peripheral control MPU 1530a. It is made so that it won't be applied.

  When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, a value 1 is first set to the steady process flag SP-FLG (step S1009). The steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed.

  Subsequent to step S1009, the effect control program performs 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer starting process, a 1 ms interrupt timer for executing a later-described peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is started, and the number of times this 1 ms interrupt timer is started and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. The value 1 is set in the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. This 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing.

  Subsequent to step S1010, the effect control program performs lamp data output processing (step S1012). In the lamp data output process, the effect control program performs DMA serial continuous transmission to the lamp driving board 4170. Here, the serial I / O port continuous transmission for the lamp driving board is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac of the peripheral control MPU 1530a. When the serial I / O port continuous transmission for the lamp driving board is started, a lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided in the game board 5 in the lamp driving board side transmission data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c, The game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting the blinking signal or the gradation lighting signal is created and set in the ramp data creation process described later.

  The peripheral control CPU core 1530aa of the peripheral control MPU 1530a designates transmission of the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board in response to a request from the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac, and the game stored at the head address of the lamp driving board side transmission data storage area The first byte of the panel-side light emission data SL-DAT is transferred to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board via the external bus 1530h, the peripheral control bus controller 1530ad, and the peripheral bus 1530ai. Write.

  As a result, the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board transfers the written data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the light emission clock signal SL-CLK on the game board side to 1 byte of the transmission shift register. The data starts to be transmitted bit by bit.

  When the peripheral control CPU core 1530aa does not use the bus when the transmission interrupt request for the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board is generated, the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac receives the lamp driving board side transmission data storage area. The remaining game board-side light emission data SL-DAT stored in the CPU is transmitted through the external bus 1530h, the peripheral control bus controller 1530ad, and the peripheral bus 1530ai via the serial buffer I / O port transmission buffer register. The serial I / O port for the lamp driving board transfers the written data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register and transmits it in synchronization with the game board side light emission clock signal SL-CLK. 1-bit data of 1 byte of shift register One transmission begins, and subjected to continuous transmission by the serial I / O ports for the lamp driving substrate.

  In the lamp data output process, the effect control program performs a DMA serial continuous transmission process to the door frame relay board 911 and the door frame left side decorative board 160. Also here, the frame I / O port LED serial I / O port continuous transmission is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac of the peripheral control MPU 1530a.

  When the serial transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port is started, a plurality of decoration boards provided in the door frame 3 are stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c. The door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to the LED is created and set in a lamp data creation process described later.

  The peripheral control CPU core 1530aa of the peripheral control MPU 1530a designates transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port in response to a request from the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac, and transmits the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area. The first one byte of the door-side light emission data STL-DAT stored at the head address is transferred to the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O via the external bus 1530h, the peripheral control bus controller 1530ad, and the peripheral bus 1530ai. Transfer and write to O-port transmit buffer register.

  As a result, the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK. Transmission of 1-byte data is started bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac is triggered by a transmission interrupt request for the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED (in this embodiment, the serial I / O for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED). 1 byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register is empty because 1 byte data disappears.), Peripheral control CPU core 1530aa If the bus does not use the bus, the remaining door side light emission data STL-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area byte by byte, external bus 1530h, peripheral control bus controller 1530ad, and Frame decoration drive amplifier board L via peripheral bus 1530ai By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for D, the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, In synchronization with the door-side light emission clock signal STL-CLK, transmission of 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port.

  Subsequent to step S1012, the effect control program performs an operation unit monitoring process (step S1014). In the operation unit monitoring process, in the operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the first decorative surface unit 532 is based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the third decorative rotating body unit 530B. And various types of information obtained by acquiring the posture of the second decorative surface portion 533 and the operation of the operation button 410 (for example, the first decorative surface portion 532 created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided on the decorative rotating body unit 530). And the attitude mode of the second decorative surface portion 533 and the operation history information of the operation button 410, etc.) are monitored based on the operation unit information acquisition storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c. However, the posture state and the operation state of the operation button 410 are contrary to the game effect. Whether to appropriately determine that.

  Subsequent to step S1014, the effect control program performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output processing, the drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the VDP 1540a built-in VRAM in the display data creation processing described later is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door from the channels CH1 and VDP2540a. This is output to the frame side effect display device 460A.

  Thereby, various screens are drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460A. In the display data output process, when drawing exceeding the drawing capability of the VDP 1540a is performed, the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is used for the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device. Canceling output to 460A.

  This can prevent the processing time from being delayed, but although a so-called frame drop occurs, a plurality of LEDs on various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 by the ramp data output processing in step S1012, and Production by a plurality of LEDs on various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3, and production by BGM and sound effects according to various productions from a pair of upper speakers 573 and a pair of lower speakers 921 by sound data output processing to be described later , It is a mechanism that can give priority to the synchronization.

  Subsequent to step S1016, the effect control program performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the effect control program outputs the BGM and sound data such as sound effects set in the VDP 1540a in the sound data creation process described later as serialized audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1540c, In addition to the sound effect, the sound data of the notification sound and the notification sound is output to the audio data transmission IC 1540c as serialized audio data.

  When the audio data transmission IC 1540c receives the serialized audio data from the VDP 1540a, the door frame relay board 911 (and if necessary, as differential serial data with the right audio data as a plus signal and a minus signal) To the door frame left side decorative board 160) and to the door frame relay board 911 and the door frame left side decorative board 160 as differential serial data using the left audio data as a positive signal and a negative signal. To send. As a result, BGM and sound effects adapted to various effects are reproduced in stereo from the pair of upper speakers 573 and the pair of lower speakers 921, and notification sounds and notification sounds are also reproduced in stereo.

  Subsequent to step S1018, the effect control program performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the effect control program updates various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c.

  For example, in the scheduler update process, of the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area, what number screen data from the top screen data is output to the VDP 1540a? The pointer is updated to indicate

  Also, in the scheduler update process, among the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area, the number of the light emission data from the first light emission data is changed to the light emission mode of various LEDs. The pointer is updated to indicate whether or not

  Further, in the scheduler update process, sound data indicating sound data such as BGM and sound effects, sound data of notification sounds and notification sounds, arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area. Of the command data, the pointer is updated in order to indicate what number of sound command data from the head sound command data is to be output to the VDP 1540a.

  Also, in the scheduler update process, from the drive data of the first drive data among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area. The pointer is updated to indicate whether or not the second drive data is to be output. The drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data is a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt which is repeatedly executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt described later occurs. It is updated by motor and solenoid drive processing in the processing.

  In the motor and solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed each time this 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is performed. The pointer is updated to the data, and the pointer is updated every time its own processing is executed.

  In other words, since the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated in the scheduler update processing, the pointer is originally instructed for some reason in the motor and solenoid drive processing. Even if other drive data is to be instructed from the drive data that is supposed to be performed, it is forcibly updated to instruct the drive data that should be instructed originally in the scheduler update processing.

  Subsequent to step S1020, the effect control program performs a received command analysis process (step S1022). In this received command analysis process, the effect control program analyzes various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process (command receiving means) described later (command analysis). means).

  That is, in the effect control program, the command received in this peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is, for example, a start opening prize command for instructing the start opening start effect, the number of normal symbols held (0 to 4) ), A symbol synchronization effect start command for instructing the start of a symbol synchronization effect, a symbol memory command that is output when the number of start suspension changes, and a winning ball 2103 is received by a game ball. The winning prize 1 count display command (big winning prize count command) output every time, or the frame status 1 command (second error occurrence command, full tank error occurrence command) indicating the content of the full tank shown in FIG. (Command analyzing means) to recognize which gaming state is currently in progress.

  In this effect control program, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, the command received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is a body frame opening command, a body frame closing command, a door frame opening command or a door frame closing command. It is analyzed whether or not.

  Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the reception command storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c. In the reception command analysis processing, the effect control program is Analyzes various commands stored in the received command storage area.

  The various commands include various commands classified as related to Special Figure 1 tuned effects, various commands classified as related to Special Figure 2 tuned effects, various commands classified as jackpot related, various commands classified as power-on, Various commands categorized in relation to the synchronized production effect, various commands categorized in relation to ordinary electric role effect, various commands categorized in the notification display, door frame opening command, door frame closing command, main body frame opening command and main body There are various commands classified into status displays such as a frame closing command, an error canceling navigation command, and a frame status 1 command, various commands classified into tests, and various commands classified into others.

  Subsequent to step S1022, the effect control program performs warning processing (step S1024). In this warning process, when the command analyzed by the effect control program in the received command analysis process in step S1022 as described above includes various commands classified into the notification display, various abnormality notifications are executed. Screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, electrical drive source schedule data, etc. set in the abnormal display mode for the peripheral control ROM 1530b of the peripheral control unit 1530 or the peripheral The data is extracted from various control data copy areas in the control RAM 1530c and set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c in 1530cae.

  In the warning process, when multiple abnormalities occur simultaneously, the abnormality notification is performed in the order of the priority registered in advance, and the abnormality is automatically resolved and the remaining abnormality notifications are automatically transitioned to. To do. This allows you to monitor multiple anomalies at the same time without losing the information that an anomaly has occurred due to the occurrence of another anomaly after the occurrence of the anomaly but before resolving the anomaly Can do.

  Furthermore, in this warning process, after a predetermined time has elapsed since power-on, the command analyzed by the effect control program in the received command analysis process (step S1022) described above is classified into various commands, For example, in the case of an error canceling navigation command (second error canceling command), the liquid crystal and sound control unit 1540 is controlled in a manner different from the normal rendering aspect associated with the rendering operation. 1600 (production device), door-side production display device 460 (production device), and a lamp (production device) are used to visually warn the outside, or a pair of side speakers (production devices) are used audibly to the outside. Warning (error notification means).

  In this way, when a malicious player attempts to input an error cancellation navigation command to the main control board 1310 by operating the operation switch 952 of the payout control board 951 despite being in a gaming state. Since the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured to warn the outside, fraudulent acts on the main control board 1310 that may affect the progress of the game are suppressed.

  Next, following step S1024 described above, the effect control program performs main prize ball number information acquisition processing (step S1025), and then performs RCT acquisition information update processing (step S1026).

  In this RTC acquisition information update process, the presentation control program acquires the calendar information and time stored in the calendar information storage unit acquired in the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 and set in the RTC information acquisition storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c. The time information stored in the information storage unit is updated.

  By this RCT acquisition information update process, the hour, minute and second as time information stored in the time information storage unit are updated, and the year and month as calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit based on the updated time information. The day is updated.

  Subsequent to step S1026, the effect control program performs lamp data creation processing (step S1028). In this lamp data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process in step S1020, and the pointer indicates the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data. Peripheral control of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 based on the light emission data to be performed The peripheral control ROM 1530b of the unit 1530 or the peripheral control RAM 1530c is extracted from various control data copy areas, set in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c, and various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 Lighting signal, blinking signal or gradation lighting to multiple LEDs Door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a signal is extracted from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1530b or the peripheral control RAM 1530c of the peripheral control unit 1530 and created, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board of the peripheral control RAM 1530c Set in the transmission data storage area for the side LED.

  Subsequent to step S1028, the effect control program performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process in step S1020, so that the presentation control program is arranged in time series in the peripheral control MPU 1530a as data constituting the screen generation schedule data. Of the screen data, the screen data indicated by the pointer is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1530b of the peripheral control unit 1530 or the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1530c and output to the VDP 1540a.

  When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1530a, the VDP 1540a extracts at least one character data from the liquid crystal and sound ROM 1540b based on the input screen data and sprite data from the extracted at least one character data. And drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460A is generated on the built-in VRAM (corresponding to a frame buffer).

  Subsequent to step S1030, the effect control program performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In the sound data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process in step S1020, and the pointer indicates the sound command data arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data. The sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1530b of the peripheral control unit 1530 or various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1530c and output to the VDP 1540a.

  When sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1530a, the VDP 1540a extracts sound data such as BGM and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound ROM 1540b and controls the built-in sound source, thereby controlling the sound command data. Then, after determining a playback channel to be used in accordance with sound control by an automatic channel method, which will be described later, playback is performed using the determined playback channel.

  In the sound data creation process, every time this sound data creation process is performed (that is, every time the peripheral control unit steady process is performed), the peripheral position of the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a is rotated by the peripheral control A / D converter 1530ak. The voltage divided by the resistance value is converted into a value in 1024 steps from 0 to 1023.

  In this embodiment, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6, and the sound volume is set to the substrate volume 0, the maximum volume is set to the substrate volume 6, and the substrate volume 0 to the substrate volume are set. Each volume is set to increase toward the volume 6.

  The VDP 1540a of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 1540 is controlled so that the volume is set to the substrate volume 0 to 6, and the audio data transmission IC 1540c is converted into audio data serialized by the sound data output processing in step S1018 described above. The BGM and sound effects are reproduced from the pair of upper speakers 573 and the pair of lower speakers 921.

  The notification sound and the notification sound are played back without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob part, and the VDP 1540a of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 1540 is set by the program from the mute to the maximum volume. Can be controlled and adjusted.

  Subsequent to step S1032 shown in FIG. 232, the effect control program performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup process, the effect control program copies the contents stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c to the backup first area and the backup second area, respectively, and stores them in the peripheral control SRAM 1530d. The contents are copied and backed up in the backup first area and the backup second area, respectively.

  Specifically, in the backup process, Bank0 (1fr) that is the backup target for the peripheral control RAM 1530c every frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area, that is, every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. ) Included in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area, the reception command storage area, the RTC information acquisition storage area, and the schedule data storage area. Peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac copies certain production information (1fr) as production backup information (1fr) to Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) in the backup first area at high speed, and Bank3 ( 1fr And peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac copies at high speed Bank4 (1fr).

  The high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1530aa of the peripheral control MPU 1530a designates the content stored in Bank0 (1fr) in the request of the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac, and the copy to Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area, and Bank0 (1fr) ) To the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr) from the content stored at the head address of the first address of the bank 1 (for example, 1 byte) continuously from the head address of Bank 1 (1fr) in the backup first area. Copy all in order.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU core 1530aa designates the content stored in Bank0 (1fr) in the request of the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac, the copy to Bank2 (1fr) in the backup first area, and the head of Bank0 (1fr) Everything from the content stored at the address to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr) in order from the first address of Bank2 (1fr) in the backup first area in order of a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) make a copy.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1530aa designates the content stored in the Bank 0 (1fr) in the request of the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac, and the copy to the Bank 3 (1fr) in the backup second area, and the Bank 0 (1fr) From the content stored at the start address to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr), in sequence from the start address of Bank3 (1fr) in the backup second area in succession by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) Copy everything.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU core 1530aa designates the content stored in Bank0 (1fr) in the request of the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac, and the copy to Bank4 (1fr) in the backup second area, and the head of Bank0 (1fr) Everything from the content stored at the address to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr) in order from the start address of Bank4 (1fr) in the backup second area in succession by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) make a copy.

  In the backup process, the peripheral control SRAM 1530d is stored in the backup target Bank 0 (SRAM) every frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 1530da, that is, every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. The peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac copies the production information (SRAM), which is the content that has been recorded, as production backup information (SRAM) to the bank 1 (SRAM) and bank 2 (SRAM) in the first backup area at high speed. The peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac makes a high-speed copy to Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) in two areas.

  Briefly describing the high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1530aa of the peripheral control MPU 1530a stores the request in the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac in Bank 0 (SRAM). From the content stored in the first address of Bank 0 (SRAM) to the content stored in the end address of Bank 0 (SRAM), the copy to the Bank 1 (SRAM) of the backup first area is designated. All of the bytes are copied in order starting from the first address of Bank 1 (SRAM) in the backup first area successively in predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core 1530aa The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) are specified for copying to Bank2 (SRAM) in the first backup area, and the bank 0 (SRAM) end address is determined from the contents stored at the beginning address of Bank0 (SRAM). The contents stored in are sequentially copied in order starting from the first address of Bank 2 (SRAM) in the backup first area, in units of predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1530aa designates the contents stored in the Bank 0 (SRAM) in the request of the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac, the copy to the Bank 3 (SRAM) in the backup second area, and the Bank 0 (SRAM). From the content stored at the start address to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (SRAM), in sequence, from the start address of Bank3 (SRAM) in the backup second area, successively by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) Copy everything.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU core 1530aa designates the content stored in the Bank 0 (SRAM) in the request of the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac, the copy to the Bank 4 (SRAM) in the backup second area, and the top of the Bank 0 (SRAM). Everything from the contents stored in the address to the contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (SRAM) in order from the first address of Bank4 (SRAM) in the backup second area in succession by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) make a copy.

  Subsequent to step S1034, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clear process, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1530af and the peripheral control external WDT 1530e so that the peripheral control MPU 1530a is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1036, the effect control program sets the value 0 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG as the completion of the peripheral control unit steady processing (step S1038), returns to step S1006 again, and the V blank signal detection flag VB. -FLG is initialized by setting value 0, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until value 1 is set in V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later.

  That is, in step S1008, the process waits until a value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. If it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the process proceeds from step S1009 to step S1009. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, processing in steps S1009 to S1038 is performed. The processing from step S1009 to step S1038 is referred to as “peripheral control unit steady processing”.

  The peripheral control unit steady process starts from the fact that the effect control program first sets the value 1 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG, assuming that the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed in step S1009, and 1 ms in step S1010. An interrupt timer activation process is performed, and each process of steps S1012, S1014,..., And step S1036 is performed. Set to to complete.

  The peripheral control unit steady process is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1008. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when the V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1530a can be received is input from the VDP 1540a. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later.

  In this embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460A is set to approximately 30 fps as described above. The interval at which the blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms.

[11-1-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control that is executed when a V blank signal that indicates that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1530a of the peripheral control unit 1530 can be received is input from the VDP 1540a of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 1540. Part V blank signal interrupt processing will be described.

  When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1530a of the peripheral control unit 1530 determines whether or not the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 (step S1045). As described above, the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing in steps S1009 to S1038 is being executed when the peripheral control power is turned on and in reset processing. Set to 0 when execution completes.

  If the steady process flag SP-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S1045, that is, if the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed, this routine is terminated. On the other hand, when the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in step S1045, that is, when the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed, the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1050). This routine ends. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady process. When the part steady process is not executed, the value is set to 0.

  In this embodiment, it is determined in step S1045 whether or not the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed. Sometimes the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in step S1050. This is because, when the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed, if the V blank signal is input and the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, step S1008 in the peripheral control power-on and reset processing In order to prevent the peripheral control unit steady state process from starting from the beginning by forcibly canceling the peripheral control unit steady state process that is currently being executed, It is because it is doing like.

  That is, when the peripheral control power supply is turned on and in step S1009 in the reset process (peripheral control unit steady process), a value of 1 is set in the steady processing flag SP-FLG to indicate that the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed. While transmitting to the control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit steady processing is performed by setting the value 0 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG in step S1038 in the peripheral control power-on and reset processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) Is transmitted to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, whether or not the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in the determination of step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process. That is, it is determined whether or not the peripheral control unit steady process has been completed. In other words, this is a measure for the case where the peripheral control unit steady-state processing cannot be completed before the next V blank signal is input and the next V blank signal is input, so-called processing failure.

  As a result, in the peripheral control unit steady process of this cycle, when the process cannot be completed in a time of about 33.3 ms and the process is dropped, the next determination is made in step S1008 at the time of the peripheral control power-on and the reset process. It is in a state of waiting until the V blank signal is input.

  That is, the time for executing the peripheral control unit steady process of the current cycle in which the process has dropped is about 66.6 ms. Normally, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is repeatedly executed every time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control power-on and reset processing (peripheral control unit steady process). When the peripheral control unit steady process is executed only 32 times, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed 64 times when the peripheral control unit steady process of the current cycle that has been dropped as described above exists. It is executed only 32 times.

  In other words, even if the peripheral control unit steady process has failed, the consistency between the presentation progress state by the peripheral control unit steady process and the presentation progress state by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is timer interrupt control, is consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit steady process is lost, the progress state of the performance can be reliably matched.

[11-1-3. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is repeatedly executed every time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control power supply, will be described. When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is started, the peripheral control unit 1530 determines whether the presentation control program is under the control of the peripheral control MPU 1530 a and the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times ( Step S1100).

  As described above, this 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is the same as that of this routine when the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in the 1 ms interrupt timer starting process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control power-on and the reset process. This is a counter that counts the number of times that the control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process has been executed.

  In this embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460A is set to approximately 30 fps as described above. The interval at which the blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps).

  That is, since the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, the peripheral control unit steady process of the next cycle is executed after starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process. Until then, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times.

  Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated first, then the second,... Will occur.

  When the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than 33 times in step S1100, that is, when the 1 ms timer interrupt of the 33rd time is generated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, the effect control program is directly executed by this routine. Exit.

  In the present embodiment, when the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs accidentally before the next generation of the V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is the peripheral control unit V as the priority of interrupt processing. Although set higher than the blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, since the V blank signal dominates the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs accidentally before the next V blank signal generation, In order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled.

  After the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is newly started by the first 1 ms timer interrupt generation.

  On the other hand, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 in step S1100, the value 1 is added to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increment, step S1102). When the value 1 is added to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control power supply and this routine. The number of times that the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed is increased by one.

  Subsequent to step S1102, the effect control program performs motor and solenoid drive processing (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c outside the peripheral control MPU 1530a. In accordance with the drive data indicated by the pointer, the effect control program drives an electric drive source such as a motor and a solenoid, and updates the pointer to the next drive data defined in time series. Each time the motor and solenoid drive process is executed, the pointer is updated.

  Specifically, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, the effect control program performs DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the door frame relay board 911 and the door frame left side decorative board 160. Here, the effect control program uses the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac of the peripheral control MPU 1530a to continuously transmit the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port.

  When this frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port continuous transmission is started, first, when configuring the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c outside the peripheral control MPU 1530a. Out of drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in series, frame door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to the motor based on drive data indicated by the pointer, It is created by extracting from various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1530b or peripheral control RAM 1530c of the peripheral control unit 1530, and is set in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area in the peripheral control RAM 1530c.

  The peripheral control CPU core 1530aa of the peripheral control MPU 1530a designates transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port as a request of the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac, and transmits the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area. The first one byte of the frame door side motor drive data STM-DAT stored at the top address is serialized for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via the external bus 1530h, the peripheral control bus controller 1530ad, and the peripheral bus 1530ai. Transfer and write to the I / O port transmit buffer register.

  As a result, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port transfers the written transmission buffer register data to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK. The 1-byte data starts to be transmitted bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac uses the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port transmission interrupt request as a trigger when the peripheral control CPU core 1530aa does not use the bus. The remaining frame door side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area is frame decorated via the external bus 1530h, peripheral control bus controller 1530ad, and peripheral bus 1530ai byte by byte. By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port sends the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register. Transfer door side motor drive clock signal ST One byte of data for synchronization with the transmit shift register and -CLK, bit by bit to start transmission, and subjected to continuous transmission by the serial I / O ports for the frame ornamental driving amplifier board motor.

  In the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the motor drive board 4180 is performed. Also here, the peripheral I / O port serial transmission is continuously performed by using the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac of the peripheral control MPU 1530a. When the serial I / O port continuous transmission for the motor drive board is started, first, the motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c A game board for outputting drive signals to motors and solenoids for moving various movable bodies provided in the game board 5 based on drive data indicated by a pointer among drive data of an electrical drive source such as -Side motor drive data SM-DAT is extracted and created from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1530b or peripheral control RAM 1530c of the peripheral control unit 1530, and is set in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c. .

  The peripheral control CPU core 1530aa of the peripheral control MPU 1530a designates transmission of the motor drive board serial I / O port as a request of the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac, and the game stored in the start address of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area The first byte of the board side motor drive data SM-DAT is transferred to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for motor drive board via the external bus 1530h, peripheral control bus controller 1530ad, and peripheral bus 1530ai And write.

  As a result, the serial I / O port for the motor drive board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and 1 of the transmission shift register is synchronized with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK. Start transmitting byte data bit by bit.

  When the peripheral control CPU core 1530aa does not use the bus when the transmission interrupt request for the serial I / O port for the motor drive board is generated, the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac receives the motor drive board side transmission data storage area. The remaining game board side motor drive data SM-DAT stored in the CPU is transmitted through the external bus 1530h, the peripheral control bus controller 1530ad, and the peripheral bus 1530ai via the serial I / O port transmission buffer for the motor drive board Transfer and write to register.

  As a result, the serial I / O port for the motor drive board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and 1 of the transmission shift register is synchronized with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK. Byte data starts to be transmitted bit by bit, and is continuously transmitted by the serial I / O port for motor drive board.

  Subsequent to step S1104 as described above, the effect control program performs movable body information acquisition processing under the control of the peripheral control MPU 1530a (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches is created by determining whether or not the detection signals from the various detection switches provided on the game board 5 are input, and the peripheral control RAM 1530c. Set in the movable body information acquisition storage area. From the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the movable body information acquisition storage area, the original positions and movable positions of the various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 can be acquired.

  Subsequent to step S1106 as described above, the effect control program performs operation unit information acquisition processing under the control of the peripheral control MPU 1530a (step S1108). In the operation unit information acquisition process, history information (for example, operation buttons) of detection signals from various detection switches is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided in the decorative rotating body unit 530 are input. 410 (operation history information, posture history information regarding the posture modes of the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533) are created and set in the operation unit information acquisition storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c.

  The effect control program determines the posture of the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 (such as the rotation direction) and whether or not the operation button 410 is operated based on various history information set in the operation unit information acquisition storage area. Can be acquired.

  Further, in this operation unit information acquisition process (step S1108), as described above, the effect control program is one of the player side volume adjustment function, player side display adjustment function, and player side light quantity adjustment function. When the operation button 410 is operated when the adjustment function is in operation, operation history information of the operation button 410 is created as history information of a detection signal output along with the operation button 410, and operation unit information of the peripheral control RAM 1530c is generated. In the acquisition storage area, the player-side volume adjustment function, the player-side display adjustment function, and the player-side light amount adjustment function are set independently.

  That is, the created operation history information is divided into player-side volume adjustment function, player-side display adjustment function, and player-side light amount adjustment function in the operation unit information acquisition storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c. It is written whether or not the operation button 410 is operated while the function is in operation.

  Based on the various history information set in the operation unit information acquisition storage area, for example, the effect control program determines whether or not the operation button 410 has been operated while the player-side volume adjustment function is operating (for example, whether there has been a volume adjustment operation). Or not).

  Subsequently, the effect control program performs a drawing state acquisition process (S1110) and a main prize ball number information output process (S1112), then performs a backup process (step S1114), and ends this routine. In this backup process, the contents stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c are copied and backed up in the backup first area and the backup second area, respectively, and the contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1530d are backed up. Copy to 1 area and backup 2nd area to backup.

  Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 1530c is backed up every time a 1 ms interrupt timer is generated in the backup target work area, that is, every time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. Stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area, motor drive board side transmission data storage area, movable body information acquisition storage area, and operation unit information acquisition storage area included in Bank 0 (1 ms) The peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac copies the production information (1 ms), which is the content that has been recorded, as production backup information (1 ms) to Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms) in the first backup area at high speed. 2 area B NK3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) to the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac copies at high speed.

  The high speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1530aa of the peripheral control MPU 1530a designates the content stored in Bank0 (1 ms) in the request of the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac, and the copy to Bank1 (1 ms) of the backup first area, and Bank0 (1 ms) ) To the content stored at the end address of Bank 0 (1 ms) from the content stored at the top address of the first address), from the first address of Bank 1 (1 ms) in the backup first area continuously by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte). Copy all in order.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU core 1530aa designates the content stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) in the request of the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac, and the copy to Bank 2 (1 ms) in the backup first area, and the head of Bank 0 (1 ms). Everything from the content stored at the address to the content stored at the end address of Bank 0 (1 ms) in order from the start address of Bank 2 (1 ms) in the first area of the backup in succession by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) make a copy.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1530aa designates the content stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) in the request of the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac, and copies to Bank 3 (1 ms) in the backup second area, and Bank 0 (1 ms). From the content stored at the start address of the first address to the content stored at the end address of Bank 0 (1 ms), in order from the start address of Bank 3 (1 ms) in the second area of the backup in succession by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) Copy everything to.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU core 1530aa designates the content stored in Bank0 (1 ms) in the request of the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac, and the copy to Bank4 (1 ms) in the backup second area, and the head of Bank0 (1 ms) Everything from the content stored at the address to the content stored at the end address of Bank 0 (1 ms) in order starting from the first address of Bank 4 (1 ms) in the backup second area in succession by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) make a copy.

  As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interruption process, various processes related to the effects in steps S1104 to S1108 are executed as the progress of the effects within a period of 1 ms.

  In contrast, in the peripheral control unit steady process at the time of turning on the peripheral control power and in the reset process, various processes relating to the effects in steps S1012 to S1032 described above are executed as the progress of the effects within a period of about 33.3 ms. Yes. In the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is started. In order to end this routine as it is, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is performed. After the start is forcibly canceled and the 1 ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is newly generated by the first 1 ms timer interrupt. Start .

  That is, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady process and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process which is the timer interrupt control is not lost. Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the progress of the production.

  As described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal sizes of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460A, and the periphery in which the peripheral control MPU 1530a and the VDP 1540a are mounted. Even in the production lot of the control board 1510, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change somewhat.

  In this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that dominates the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, the peripheral control is performed. In order to execute the part V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control part 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, by forcibly canceling the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt, It is possible to absorb a time shift due to a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[11-1-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. The peripheral control MPU 1530a of the peripheral control unit 1530 starts transmission of various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data. With this as a trigger, the peripheral peripheral MPU 1530a incorporates the main peripheral serial data into the peripheral control MPU 1530a. One-byte (8-bit) information is taken into the reception buffer at the O port, and when this fetching is completed, an interrupt is generated as a trigger, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed.

  The main circumference serial data is composed of 3 bytes per packet, the status is assigned as the first byte, the mode is assigned as the second byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values as the third byte and the total The sum value that is calculated is assigned.

  When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1530a of the peripheral control unit 1530 determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out (step S1200). The 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received from the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310.

  When the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, within the period in which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received from the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310, the peripheral The 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the main I / O port for the main control board built in the control MPU 1530a is fetched (step S1202), and the value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (increment, step S1204).

  This reception counter SRXC is a counter indicating the number of times the data has been extracted from the reception buffer. When the status, which is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, is extracted from the reception buffer, the value is 1, and the mode is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data. The value is 2 when extracted from the reception buffer, and the value is 3 when the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, is extracted from the reception buffer. The reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value 0 when the power is turned on.

  Subsequent to step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether or not the sum value that is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode that is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data, and the sum value that is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data are sequentially received from the reception buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

  When the reception counter SRXC is not the value 3 in step S1206, that is, following the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode that is still the second byte of the main peripheral serial data, and the third byte of the main peripheral serial data When the sum values are not sequentially taken out from the reception buffer, the 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is terminated. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, a mode in which the mode which is the second byte of the main circumference serial data or the sum value which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data can be received is set.

  On the other hand, when the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3 in step S1206, that is, following the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode that is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data, and the main peripheral serial data 3 When the sum value which is the byte is taken out from the reception buffer in order, the initial value 0 is set in the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). In this calculation, the status that is the first byte of the main circumference serial data and the mode that is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, which have already been extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, are regarded as numerical values and the sum (sum value). ) Is calculated.

  Subsequent to step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value that is the third byte of the main serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1212). S1214). The sum value that is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 is the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data from the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212.

  By the way, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is supplied with game balls from the pachinko island facility. When the game balls rub against each other and are charged, electrostatic discharge is generated and noise is generated, so the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in an environment susceptible to noise. Therefore, the peripheral controller 1530 side regards the status assigned as the first byte of the received main circumference serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main circumference serial data as numerical values and sums them (sums Value) is calculated, and it is determined whether or not the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data among the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. ing. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1530a determines whether or not the main peripheral serial data has changed to main peripheral serial data different from the normal due to the influence of noise between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. be able to.

  In step S1214, if the sum value that is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 matches the sum value calculated in step S1212, the received main circumference serial data is received. The status allocated as the first byte and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are stored in the received command storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c (step S1216), and this routine is terminated.

  This reception command storage area is used as a ring buffer, and the status allocated as the first byte of the main circumference serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main circumference serial data are the same as those in the reception command storage area. It is stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer. This "peripheral control unit reception ring buffer" is a buffer that is used so that the end and the top of the buffer are connected. Data is sequentially stored from the beginning of the buffer, and when it reaches the end of the buffer, it returns to the beginning. Remember.

  When storing the peripheral control MPU 1530a in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer in step S1216, the peripheral control MPU 1530a is allocated as the received status of the main peripheral serial data as the first byte and the main peripheral serial data as the second byte. Are stored in association with each other, and the sum value allocated as the third byte is discarded.

  On the other hand, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, it exceeds the period in which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received from the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310. Sometimes, or in step S1214, if the sum value that is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 and the sum value calculated in step S1212 do not match, this routine is directly executed. finish.

[11-1-5. Peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing will be described. This peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interruption process is executed when a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 is input from the main control board 1310.

  When the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1530a of the peripheral control unit 1530 first activates a 2 microsecond timer (step S1300), and a power failure notification signal (peripheral power failure notification signal) is input. It is determined whether or not (step S1302). If no power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is input in this determination, this routine is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, when a power failure warning signal is input in step S1302, it is determined whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer started in step S1300 has passed 2 microseconds.

  If it is determined in step S1304 that 2 macroseconds have not elapsed, the process returns to step S1302 to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. If a signal is input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started.

  When the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started in step S1304 and the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds, power saving processing is performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the backlights of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460A are turned off, the motors and solenoids provided in the game board 5 are turned off, and various LEDs are turned off sequentially. By suppressing the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by this, even if the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off, a stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the peripheral control MPU 1530a can operate. .

  Subsequent to step S1306, command reception standby processing is performed (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310, at least a period of 17 milliseconds so that the peripheral control MPU 1530a can receive the command being transmitted. stand by. When a command is received, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described above is started, and the received command is stored in the reception command storage area (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer) of the peripheral control RAM 1530c.

  Subsequent to step S1308, command backup processing is performed (step S1310). In this command backup processing, the contents stored in the received command storage area included in Bank0 (1fr) in the work area to be backed up are transferred to the peripheral control DMA controller in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) in the backup first area. 1530ac copies at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac copies at high speed to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) in the backup second area.

  The high-speed copy of the contents stored in the received command storage area included in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1530aa of the peripheral control MPU 1530a includes the contents stored in the received command storage area included in Bank0 (1fr) in the request of the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac and included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area. Contents stored in the end address of the receive command storage area included in Bank0 (1fr) from the contents stored in the start address of the receive command storage area included in Bank0 (1fr) by specifying copy to the receive command storage area Are successively copied in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area in units of a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte).

  Further, the peripheral control MPU core 1530aa stores the contents stored in the reception command storage area included in Bank0 (1fr) in the request of the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac, and the reception command storage included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area. Specify the copy to the area, from the content stored at the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of the received command storage area included in Bank0 (1fr), All of the data is sequentially copied in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1530aa receives the content stored in the reception command storage area included in Bank0 (1fr) in the request of the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac, and received in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area. Designates copying to the command storage area, and from contents stored at the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank0 (1fr) to contents stored at the end address of the received command storage area included in Bank0 (1fr) Are successively copied in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area in units of a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte).

  Further, the peripheral control MPU core 1530aa stores the contents stored in the received command storage area included in Bank0 (1fr) in the request of the peripheral control DMA controller 1530ac, and the received command storage included in Bank4 (1fr) in the backup second area. Specify the copy to the area, from the content stored at the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of the received command storage area included in Bank0 (1fr), All of the data is sequentially copied in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area, successively by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequent to step S1310, it is determined whether a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is input (step S1312). If a power failure warning signal is input in this determination, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1314). In this WDT clear process, the peripheral control MPU 1530a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1530af and the peripheral control external WDT 1530e so that the peripheral control MPU 1530a is not reset.

  On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is not input in step S1312, or following step S1314, the process returns to step S1312, and it is determined whether the power failure warning signal is input. That is, it is determined indefinitely whether or not a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is input. By continuing the determination indefinitely in this manner, the peripheral control MPU 1530a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1530af and the peripheral control external WDT 1530e when the power failure notification signal (peripheral power failure notification signal) is not input in step S1312. When the power failure warning signal is input in step S1312, the WDT clear process is performed in step S1314, and the peripheral control MPU 1530a is not reset. When the peripheral control MPU 1530a is reset, “0” is written in the storage area of the built-in VRAM as an example to initialize the peripheral control MPU 1530a, and the peripheral control power is turned on and the reset process is started again from the beginning. .

  As described above, when the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) continues to be input in the infinite loop as determined in step S1312, the peripheral control is performed immediately before the power failure state is established by executing the WDT clear process in step S1314. The MPU 1530a is not reset.

  On the other hand, if the input of the power failure warning signal is not continued in the infinite loop and is canceled in the determination in step S1312, the WDT clear process is not executed. The output is interrupted. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started erroneously due to noise or the like and the noise is generated beyond the period of 2 microseconds, the determination of step S1302 is passed. If the input of the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is canceled without being continued in the infinite loop as determined in S1312, the peripheral control MPU 1530a is reset because the WDT clear process in step S1314 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to cope with such noise by automatically resetting.

[12. Sound control by automatic channel method]
By the way, in the sound data creation process (step S1032 in FIG. 232) which has already been described, the explanation regarding the automatic channel sound control which is a part thereof will be described later. Thus, next, automatic channel sound control according to the present embodiment will be described. First, the background is briefly explained.

  In a general pachinko machine, an effect that attracts the player's interest is output by outputting various sounds from a speaker in each scene as the game progresses. For example, even for reach that should improve the expectations of the player, there are some that output various sounds depending on the type and others that do not. In such a general pachinko machine, each channel including the respective reach is assigned in advance to each sound to be output in each scene. It is played back using the channel (see Japanese Patent No. 5627044). However, in a general pachinko machine, even if there is an empty channel, the sound to be played may not be assigned to the empty channel due to channel assignment. There was a problem that it was difficult to realize various sound productions.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 1530a of the peripheral control board 1510 has a pair of upper speakers 573 (sound Output means) and a pair of lower speakers 921 (sound output means), while dynamically assigning and managing each channel to each sound to be output, the number of combinations of sounds to be output is the number of each channel. When the maximum number of channels (16 channels are exemplified in the present embodiment) is exceeded, each channel is dynamically assigned to the combination of sounds scheduled to be output within the range of the maximum number of channels according to a predetermined priority. (Channel control means). Further, the peripheral control MPU 1530a simultaneously reproduces the combination of sounds scheduled to be output through each channel dynamically allocated within the range of the maximum number of channels according to the predetermined priority (sound output control means). . This will be specifically described below.

[12-1. Sound control by fixed channel method]
FIG. 235 (A) and FIG. 235 (B) each show an example of sound control by a fixed channel method as a comparison object with respect to the present embodiment. FIG. 235 (A) shows an example of a sound reproduction channel. In the sound control by the fixed channel method, for example, all 16 channels of the reproduction channel 00 to the reproduction channel 15 are used, as in the sound control by the automatic channel method according to the present embodiment described later. The “reproduction ch” shown in the figure is a reproduction channel omitted.

  On the other hand, FIG. 235 (B) shows an example of allocation of playback channels for each sound. In the sound control by the fixed channel method, as shown in the figure, each sound is assigned in advance to each reproduction channel to be used. Here, touching on the basic sound reproduction rule, one sound requires two channels when outputting in stereo, while one channel is required when outputting in monaural.

  The “notification sound 1” to “button pressing sound” shown in the figure shall not be muted in the middle of the sound that has started playback until any end of the playback. As a channel assignment method, a reproduction channel and sound are assigned exclusively as a pair so that sound overwriting does not occur. On the other hand, the “normal BGM” to “holding winning sound” shown in the figure does not cause a problem even if the sound that has started playback is overwritten with another sound during playback and muted. As a channel assignment method, the same channel is assigned as much as possible so as not to suffer from the reproduction timing.

  In the sound control by the fixed channel method, when a new sound is output to the same channel being output, the sound being output is muted and a new sound is output. For sounds that would interfere with overwriting, independent channels are assigned, or sounds that do not overlap playback timing are assigned to the same channel.

  FIG. 236 shows an example of a sound definition table for realizing sound control by the fixed channel method. This sound definition table manages the definition of playback channel number, left and right pan initial value, upper and lower pan initial value, volume initial value, sound number, playback type setting and output type setting for each sound classification and sound name. Yes. Since the playback channel number has been described above, a description thereof will be omitted.

  The left and right pan initial values represent sound image localization initial positions of left and right speakers, which are combinations of the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L, and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the left and right pan setting values during sound reproduction, a difference is produced in the volume output separately from the left and right speakers, and the sound image can be localized in an arbitrary space between the left and right speakers. For example, when “0x00” is set, it indicates that only the left speaker (upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L) outputs, and for example, when “0x80” is set, the upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker are set. The difference in volume output individually from the left and right speakers, which is a combination of 921L, the upper right speaker 573R, and the lower right speaker 921R, is 0, and the sound image is localized at the center of the left and right speakers. For example, when “0xFF” is set, it indicates that only the right speaker (upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R) outputs.

  The initial values of the upper and lower pans are, for example, the sound image localization of sounds by upper and lower speakers such as a pair of upper speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and a pair of lower speakers 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R). It represents the initial position. By dynamically changing the setting values of the upper and lower pans during sound reproduction, a difference is produced in the volume output individually from the upper and lower speakers, and the sound image can be localized in an arbitrary space between the upper and lower speakers. . For example, when “0x00” is set, it indicates that the sound is output from only the pair of upper speakers 573. For example, when “0x80” is set, the volume difference that is output individually from the upper and lower speakers that are a combination of these. Becomes 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, when “0xFF” is set, it indicates that only a pair of lower speakers 921 outputs.

  The volume initial value represents the sound volume setting at the start of reproduction, and can be determined, for example, in a setting range from “0x00” to “0xFF”. The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing each sound described above. The playback type setting is loop playback for repeatedly playing the target sound (corresponding to “LOOP” in the figure), or 1SHOT playback for playing the target sound once (corresponding to “1SHOT” in the figure). It represents whether or not. The output type setting indicates whether the target sound is reproduced in monaural or stereo.

  FIG. 237 shows the relationship between the gaming state, the playback sound, and the playback channel. The time axis, which is the horizontal axis, indicates the gaming state, and the gaming states are, for example, “first half of fluctuation”, “second half of fluctuation”, “stop left symbol”, “stop right symbol”, “stop middle symbol”, and “big hit” Can be mentioned. On the other hand, the vertical axis represents (reproduction) priority, and (reproduction) priority increases from bottom to top.

  FIG. 238 (A) shows an example of the production time chart, FIG. 238 (B) shows an example of the channel reproduction time chart, and FIG. 238 (C) cannot be reproduced when attempting to reproduce each sound. An example of a problem is shown. In these FIGS. 238A to 238C, the horizontal axis is a common time axis.

  In FIG. 238 (A), the game state along the time axis, which is the horizontal axis, in the order of “first half of change”, “second half of change”, “stop left symbol”, “stop right symbol”, “stop middle symbol” and “big hit” It can be mentioned that the game is controlled to be “medium”.

  In the “first half of fluctuation” shown in FIG. 238 (A), for example, as shown in problem 1 in FIG. 238 (C), a new sound is given as a new sound during the playback time of “first half notice A” (“pending” shown in the figure). 235 (B), the “holding winning sound” is pre-assigned to the same playback channels 14 and 15 as the “first half notice A” as shown in FIG. "Is overwritten with the reserved winning sound, and the output of the" first half notice A "sound is stopped (in the case of sound control by a fixed channel).

  In the “second half of fluctuation” shown in FIG. 238 (A), for example, as shown in Problem 2 in FIG. 238 (C), a new sound is given as a new sound during the playback time of “Full Screen Notice” (“Pending” shown in the figure). 235 (B), the “holding winning sound” is pre-assigned to the same playback channels 14 and 15 as the “full screen notice”, as shown in FIG. 235 (B). "" Is overwritten with the pending winning sound, and the output of the "full screen notice" sound stops (in the case of sound control using a fixed channel).

[12-2. Sound control by automatic channel method]
Next, an example of sound control by the automatic channel method according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 239 (A) and FIG. 239 (B) each show an example of sound control by the automatic channel method as the present embodiment.

  FIG. 239 shows an example of a sound reproduction channel. In the sound control by the fixed channel described above, the channel classification as an attribute of the reproduction channel is an automatic channel (corresponding to “AUTOch” in the figure). Is different. Here, the channel classification is an automatic channel means that each reproduction channel for each sound is not fixed and variable, and is controlled so as to be automatically assigned in accordance with a rule described later (described above). Equivalent to “sound control by automatic channel method”).

  In the sound control by the automatic channel method according to the present embodiment, for example, all 16 channels of the reproduction channel 00 to the reproduction channel 15 are used, as in the sound control by the fixed channel method described above. The “reproduction ch” shown in the figure is a reproduction channel omitted.

  On the other hand, FIG. 239 (B) shows an example of allocation of playback channels for each sound. In the sound control by the automatic channel method, as shown in the figure, each sound is assigned a priority. Here, touching on the basic sound reproduction rules, as described above, one sound requires two channels when outputting in stereo, while one channel is required when outputting in monaural. Become.

  The “notification sound 1” to “button press sound” shown in the figure should not be muted in the middle of the sound that has been started to be played back until the end of playback. On the other hand, the “normal BGM” to “holding winning sound” shown in the figure does not cause a problem even if the sound that has started playback is overwritten with another sound during playback and muted.

  In the sound control by the automatic channel method, each reproduction channel is defined as an AUTO group channel (hereinafter abbreviated as “AUTO group”). While multiple AUTO groups can be defined, multiple playback channels can be defined within an AUTO group. Each AUTO group is used to reproduce sounds for the AUTO group. When assigning a sound to an AUTO group, an identifier and a priority order (priority) for specifying a specific AUTO group can be specified in each AUTO group. If the sound is defined in the AUTO group when a new sound is reproduced, it is reproduced immediately if there is an empty channel (unused channel) in the designated AUTO group.

  If there is no empty channel in the above case, the effect control program searches all channels currently being reproduced in the AUTO group based on the priority of the sound to be newly reproduced. If there is a channel whose priority is lower than or the same as the sound being played back, the effect control program ends the use of the AUTO channel and plays back a new sound. On the other hand, the production control program does not reproduce the new sound if there is no empty channel in the AUTO group that has a lower priority or not the same as the sound being reproduced.

  FIG. 240 shows an example of a sound definition table for realizing sound control by the automatic channel method. In the sound definition table in this automatic channel method, for each sound classification and sound name, the playback channel number, left and right pan initial value, upper and lower pan initial value, volume initial value, etc. Instead of the sound number, playback type setting, and output type setting, an identifier and priority for specifying an AUTO group (also referred to as “playback priority”), left and right pan initial value, upper and lower pan initial value, volume initial value, sound Manages definitions of numbers, seek points, playback type settings and output type settings.

  First, the identifier for designating each specific AUTO group represents which AUTO group among the AUTO groups in which a plurality of sounds exist. The priority order is an index indicating which sound should be preferentially reproduced when each sound is reproduced simultaneously. This priority indicates that the higher the numerical value, the sound that should be played with priority, while the lower the numerical value, the sound that should be played without priority. In the present embodiment, as the order of the types of sounds to be reproduced with priority, for example, notification sounds having a priority of “25” (“notification sound 1”, “notification sound 2”, and “notification sound 3”) A sound effect with a priority of “20” (“big hit fixed sound” and “button press sound”), a BGM with a priority of “15” (such as “normal BGM”), and a priority of “10” Sound effects (such as “full-screen notice sound effects”), sound effects with a priority of “05” (“first half notice sound effects” to “second half notice sound effects”), hold winning sounds with a priority of “01” It is said. As a result, for example, when a notification sound is to be reproduced in a state where there is no empty channel, there is no need to reproduce using a predetermined reproduction channel, and a lower priority sound (for example, a reserved winning sound) The notification sound is preferentially played back using the channel that is playing back.

  As described above, the left and right pan initial values represent the sound image localization initial positions of the sound from the left and right speakers, which are combinations of the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L, and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the left and right pan setting values during sound reproduction, a difference is produced in the volume output separately from the left and right speakers, and the sound image can be localized in an arbitrary space between the left and right speakers. This left and right pan initial value is managed as pan information. For example, setting “0x00” indicates that only the left speaker (the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L) outputs, and setting “0x80”, for example, indicates that the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L are output. The difference in volume output from the left and right speakers, which is a combination of the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R, is 0, and the sound image is localized at the center of the left and right speakers. For example, when “0xFF” is set, it indicates that only the right speaker (upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R) outputs.

  Further, as described above, the initial value of the upper and lower pans is, for example, the upper and lower pans of a pair of upper speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and a pair of lower speakers 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R). Represents the initial position of the sound image localization of the sound from the speaker. By dynamically changing the left and right pan settings during sound playback, a difference is produced in the volume output individually from the upper and lower speakers, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the upper and lower speakers. . The initial value of the upper and lower pans is managed as pan information. For example, when “0x00” is set, it indicates that the sound is output from only the pair of upper speakers 573. For example, when “0x80” is set, the volume difference that is output individually from the upper and lower speakers that are a combination of these. Becomes 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, when “0xFF” is set, it indicates that only a pair of lower speakers 921 outputs.

  Similarly, the volume initial value represents the volume setting at the start of playback, and can be determined, for example, in the setting range from “0x00” to “0xFF”. In addition, “1” is set in the third byte (0x1FF if 0xFF) ) Is not affected by the volume change caused by operating one or more volume control devices provided on the gaming machine, and is always played at the volume set at the initial value. Represents. The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing each sound described above.

  The seek point represents the reproduction start position number in the same phrase in the sound data corresponding to each sound. In this embodiment, as the seek point, for example, “0” is set in each of “upper right speaker confirmation sound” to “first half notice A sound effect”, while “second half notice A sound effect” and “second half notice B effect”. “1” is set for each “sound”. When the maximum number of sounds that can be registered in the sound source by such a seek point is exceeded, the maximum number of sounds that can be registered can be registered.

  The playback type setting is loop playback for repeatedly playing the target sound (corresponding to “LOOP” in the figure), or 1SHOT playback for playing the target sound once (corresponding to “1SHOT” in the figure). It represents whether or not. The output type setting indicates whether the target sound is reproduced in monaural or stereo.

  FIG. 241 shows the relationship between the gaming state, the reproduced sound, and the priority order. The time axis, which is the horizontal axis, indicates the gaming state, and the gaming states are, for example, “first half of fluctuation”, “second half of fluctuation”, “stop left symbol”, “stop right symbol”, “stop middle symbol”, and “big hit” Can be mentioned. On the other hand, the vertical axis represents (reproduction) priority, and (reproduction) priority increases from bottom to top.

  FIG. 242 (A) shows an example of an effect time chart, and FIG. 242 (B) shows an example of an AUTO channel playback time chart. In these FIGS. 242A and 242B, the horizontal axis is a common time axis. In FIG. 242 (A), the game state is sequentially changed along the horizontal axis, “first half of change”, “second half of change”, “left symbol stop”, “right symbol stop”, “middle symbol stop” and “ It can be mentioned that the game is controlled so as to be “big hit”.

  In the “first half of fluctuation” shown in FIG. 242 (A), as shown in FIG. 242 (B), for example, the “normal BGM playback” sound is played all the time on the playback channels 00-01 (for example). Equivalent to range A). Here, if there is a start opening prize (corresponding to the “holding winning” shown in the figure) and an attempt is made to reproduce the reserved winning sound as a new sound, the playback channels 12 to 13 exist as empty channels at the start timing. Since this reserved winning sound can be reproduced using the reproduction channels 12 to 13, any sound being reproduced is not overwritten by the reserved winning sound (corresponding to the “reserved sound reproduction” shown in the figure). Output of all kinds of sounds continues.

  In the “second half of fluctuation” shown in FIG. 242 (A), as shown in FIG. 242 (B), for example, the sound of “reach BGM playback” is played all the time in the playback channels 00 to 01 ( Equivalent to range B). Here, for example, if there is a start winning (corresponding to “holding winning” shown in the figure) and the player tries to play the reserved winning sound as a new sound, the playback channels 02 to 03 exist as empty channels at the start timing. The output of all other types of sounds continues without being overwritten by the pending winning sound (corresponding to the “reserved sound reproduction” shown in the figure).

  In the “second half of fluctuation” shown in FIG. 242 (A), for example, a notification sound (corresponding to “notification 2 occurrence” shown in the figure) is generated. As shown in FIG. 242B, it is found that there is no empty channel at the start timing as a result of searching for an empty channel. Therefore, the sound having the lowest priority among the sounds being reproduced at the start timing is searched, and the reproduction channels 04 to 05 are found as the channels that are reproducing the reserved winning sound having the lowest priority of “01”. In these reproduction channels 04 to 05, the reserved winning sound is reproduced as described above, but the priority (25) of the notification sound to be reproduced next (corresponding to “notification sound 2” in the figure) is set. Since it is higher than the priority (01) of the reserved winning sound, the reserved winning sound being reproduced in these reproduction channels 04 to 05 is overwritten with the notification sound.

  FIG. 243 shows an example of automatic channel control work information stored in the AUTO group channel control work area provided in the peripheral control RAM. This work information for automatic channel control includes, as a work name, a setting reservation flag, a requested sound number, a sound number during playback, an automatic assignment group, a priority at the time of automatic assignment, an elapsed time since registration, and a volume control for each channel. And a piece of information corresponding to these.

  If the setting reservation flag is a value other than “0”, it indicates that a setting reservation is made. The requested sound number represents a sound data index number as an identifier for identifying a sound to be reproduced if “−1” is stopped and other than “−1”. The sound number during playback indicates a sound data index number as an identifier for identifying the sound being played back when “−1” is stopped and other than “−1”.

  In the automatic assignment group, when “0”, the channel is fixedly assigned, while when “1”, the channel is automatically assigned (“sound control by automatic channel method” described later). Equivalent). Here, for example, if the automatic allocation group is “1”, it indicates that it is AUTO group 1, and if it is “2”, it indicates AUTO group 2. On the other hand, the priority at the time of automatic allocation represents the priority in the case of performing sound control by the automatic channel method described later.

  The elapsed time from the registration represents the elapsed time from the registration time when the desired reproduction sound is registered as “0”. Note that the elapsed time from the registration is the number of sounds being played when trying to play a new sound in a situation where multiple sounds with the same priority at the time of the automatic assignment are being played. Used to determine which sound should be overwritten and erased. For example, a sound that has been reproduced for a longer time is determined, and this sound is overwritten with the new sound and erased.

  The volume control work stores a volume value (volume value) of a sound to be reproduced. The pan control work stores pan information including the set values of the left and right pans and the upper and lower pans.

  FIG. 244 shows an example of empty channel search processing when sound control is performed when only one AUTO group is defined in the automatic channel method. In FIG. 244, the channel is also abbreviated as “ch”.

  When there is a request for reproduction of a new sound (step S1100), the production control program checks an automatic allocation group related to the new sound (step S1102). If this automatic allocation group is “0”, fixed allocation is performed. And start playing a new sound on the designated channel.

  On the other hand, when the automatic allocation group is other than “0”, the effect control program determines that the allocation is automatic allocation, and determines whether the new sound corresponds to the monaural channel (step S1106). .

  When the new sound is monaural, the effect control program determines whether or not there is a vacant (mono) channel (1 channel) (step S1108). ) While starting the reproduction of the new sound on the channel (step S1109), if it does not exist, the reproduction sound having the same or lower priority as the priority of the new sound is reproduced in the (mono) channel being reproduced. It is determined whether or not a channel exists (step S1110).

  The production control program terminates the processing if there is no channel of reproduced sound that is equal to or lower than the priority of the new sound in such a (mono) channel being reproduced, while Determines whether there are a plurality of corresponding channels (step S1112).

  When there are multiple corresponding channels, the production control program is playing the sound with the longest playback time since registration based on the elapsed time from the registration described above. The reproduction of the new sound is started on the (monaural) channel (step S1114). On the other hand, when there is not a plurality of the corresponding channels, the effect control program starts reproduction of the new sound on a (monaural) channel that satisfies a desired condition (step S1116).

  On the other hand, if the production control program determines in step S1106 described above that the new sound is not monaural, it determines whether there are vacant (stereo) channels (two channels) (step S1106). S1120). When it is determined that there is an empty channel, the effect control program selects a (stereo) channel that satisfies a desired condition and starts reproducing the new sound (step S1122).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no empty channel, the effect control program determines whether or not a (stereo) channel of the sound being reproduced has the same or lower priority as the priority of the new sound (step) S1124) Since the process is terminated if it does not exist, overwriting of the sound being reproduced with the new sound to be reproduced is not performed. On the other hand, if there is a production control program, it determines whether or not there are a plurality of corresponding channels (step S1126).

  The production control program starts outputting the new sound with a (stereo) channel satisfying a desired condition when there are not a plurality of corresponding channels, and when there are a plurality of corresponding channels, Based on the elapsed time from the registration, the new sound starts to be reproduced on the (stereo) channel having the longest reproduction time from the registration among the corresponding channels (step S1130).

  As described above, the production control program searches for an empty channel in order to reproduce a new sound. Such empty channel search processing will be described in a more visually understandable manner.

  245 (A) and 245 (B) to 248 (A) and 248 (B) each show an example of specific contents of the empty channel search process. As shown in FIG. 245 (A), the effect control program searches for an empty channel when a normal BGM playback request with a priority of 15 is generated, and the playback channels 00 to 01 are free. Therefore, normal BGM playback is started in stereo using these playback channels 00-01.

  As shown in FIG. 245 (B), the effect control program searches for an empty channel and triggers playback channels 02 to 03 in response to the request for playing the sound effect of the first-order notice_A whose priority is 05. Therefore, the reproduction of the sound effect of the first notice_A is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 02 to 03.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 246 (A), the production control program searches for an empty channel triggered by the occurrence of a playback request for a button pressing sound having a priority of 20, and sets the playback channels 04 to 05 to the search channels. Since there is a vacancy, playback of the button press sound is started in stereo using these playback channels 04 to 05.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 246 (B), the effect control program searches for an empty channel when a request for reproducing the sound effect of the first half notice_B having a priority of 05 is generated, and plays the playback channel 06. Since there is a vacancy in .about.07, reproduction of the sound effect of the first half notice_B is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 06.about.07.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 247 (A), the effect control program searches for an empty channel triggered by the occurrence of a jackpot definite sound playback request with a priority of 20, and sets the playback channels 08-09. Since there is a vacancy, the reproduction of the big hit definite sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 08 to 09.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 247 (B), the effect control program searches for an empty channel when a request for reproducing the sound effect of the first half notice_C having a priority of 05 is generated, and the reproduction channel 10 Since there is a vacancy in .about.11, the reproduction of the sound effect of the first notice_C is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 10-11.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 248 (A), the effect control program searches for an empty channel when a request for playing a reserved winning sound having a priority of 01 is generated, and sets the play channels 12 to 13 to the search. Since there is a vacancy, the reproduction of the reserved winning sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 12-13.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 248 (B), the effect control program searches for an empty channel when a request for reproducing the notification sound 3 having the priority of 25 is generated, and sets the reproduction channels 14 to 15 to the retrieval channels 14 to 15. Since there is a vacancy, the reproduction of the notification sound 3 is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 14 to 15.

  FIGS. 249 (A) and 249 (B) to 252 (A) and 252 (B) each show an example of specific contents of the empty channel search processing. As shown in FIG. 249 (A), the performance control program searches for an empty channel when a playback request for reach BGM with priority 15 is generated, and playback channels 00 to 01 are free. Therefore, the reproduction of the reach BGM is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

  As shown in FIG. 249 (B), the effect control program searches for an empty channel when a request for reproducing the notification sound 1 having a priority of 25 is generated, and there is an empty space in the reproduction channels 02 to 03. Therefore, the reproduction of the notification sound 1 is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 02 to 03.

  After repeating the processing as described above, the effect control program next, as shown in FIG. 250 (A), vacant channels are triggered by the occurrence of a request to reproduce the full-screen warning sound having a priority of 10. Since there is a free space in the reproduction channels 10 to 11, the reproduction of the full-screen warning sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 10 to 11.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 250 (B), the effect control program searches for an empty channel in response to the request for playing notification sound 1 with priority 25, and FIG. 250 (A) shows. As shown, since there is a space in the reproduction channels 02 to 03 (corresponding to “non-reproduction (empty)” in the drawing), the reproduction of the sound effect of the notification sound 1 is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 02 to 03. .

  Next, as shown in FIG. 251 (A), the production control program searches for an empty channel when a request for reproducing the notification sound 3 having a priority of 25 is generated, and plays channels 04 to 05 ( Since this corresponds to “non-reproduction (empty)” in the figure, there is an empty space, and the reproduction of the notification sound 3 is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 04 to 05.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 251 (B), the production control program searches for an empty channel triggered by the occurrence of a request for playing an accessory announcement sound with a priority of 10, and plays channels 12-13. Since there is a vacant space, the reproduction of the accessory warning sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 12-13.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 252 (A), the production control program searches for an empty channel and triggers playback channels 14 to 15 ( Since there is a vacancy (corresponding to “non-reproduction (vacant)” in the figure), the reproduction of the reserved winning sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 14 to 15.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 252 (B), the effect control program searches for an empty channel when a request for reproducing the notification sound 2 having a priority of 25 is generated, but there is no empty channel. Therefore, the use of the reproduction channels 14 to 15 that reproduce the “holding winning sound” having the lowest priority in each channel corresponding to the sound being reproduced is stopped, and the reproduction channels 14 to 15 are used in stereo. The reproduction of the notification sound 2 which is a desired sound is started.

  In this way, each sound to be output is not fixedly assigned to a specific channel in advance, and a playback channel having a lower priority is searched according to the priority of the sound, and the output schedule having a higher priority is searched. Will be played on the playback channel found in the search. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, not only can an empty channel be effectively used as described above, but also each of the sounds scheduled to be output is made as much as possible using each channel including the empty channel. Since it becomes possible to reproduce, it is possible to realize various sound effects and enhance the interest of the player.

  FIGS. 253 (A) and 253 (B) to 254 (A) and 254 (B) each show an example of specific contents of the empty channel search processing. As shown in FIG. 253 (A), the production control program searches for an empty channel when a request to reproduce a left symbol stop sound with a priority of 15 is generated, and the reproduction channels 00 to 01 are vacant. Therefore, the reproduction of the left symbol stop sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

  As shown in FIG. 253 (B), the performance control program searches for an empty channel when a request to play a right symbol stop sound with a priority of 15 is generated, and the playback channels 00 to 01 are empty. Therefore, the reproduction of the right symbol stop sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 254 (A), the effect control program searches for an empty channel when a request to reproduce a medium symbol stop sound with a priority of 15 is generated, and plays channels 00 to 01. Therefore, the reproduction of the middle symbol stop sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 254 (B), the production control program searches for an empty channel triggered by the occurrence of a big hit BGM playback request with a priority of 15, and the playback channels 00 to 01 are empty. Therefore, the big hit BGM playback is started in stereo using these playback channels 00 to 01.

  When the sound replacement playback according to the priority order occurs using a certain playback channel, the effect control program restores the previous sound played back before the replacement in the playback channel after the playback is completed. Needless to say, it can be done.

[12-3. Variation of sound control]
In the above embodiment, the sound control by the automatic channel method is performed as an example using all the reproduction channels for the maximum number of channels, but the present invention is not limited to this, You may make it perform sound control as follows by a combination.

  255 (A) to 255 (F) are diagrams showing examples of channel assignment variations in sound control based on the above-described two types of channel systems or combinations thereof.

  FIG. 255 (A) shows an example of channel assignment in sound control based on the maximum number of channels (16 channels) fixed channel method described above as a comparative example with the above-described embodiment, and FIG. 255 (B) shows this. This corresponds to the embodiment of the present invention described so far, and shows an example of channel assignment when sound control is performed by the automatic channel method for the maximum number of channels. Since sound control by these two channel assignments has already been described, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 255 (C) shows an embodiment in which sound control is performed by an automatic channel method by assigning channels to the maximum number of playback channels while using a plurality of automatic channel groups (corresponding to “PTN2” in the figure). . FIG. 255 (D) shows an embodiment in which channel assignment is performed for the reproduction channels for the maximum number of channels while using one automatic channel group, and sound control is performed for the some reproduction channels by the above-described fixed channel method. (Corresponding to “PTN3” in the figure).

  FIG. 255 (E) shows an embodiment in which channel assignment is performed for the playback channels for the maximum number of channels while using a plurality of automatic channel groups, and sound control by the fixed channel method described above is performed for some playback channels. (Corresponding to “PTN4” in the figure). Note that a specific example of the channel method illustrated in FIG. 255E will be described in detail later with reference to the drawings after FIG.

  FIG. 255 (F) shows the assignment of the channels for the maximum number of playback channels using one automatic channel group, and the sound control by the automatic channel method, and the sound by the fixed channel method described above for some of the playback channels. Although the control is performed, it is different from the above-described example in that the number of channels is ensured so that the number of reproduction channels is variable. Note that a specific example of the channel method illustrated in FIG. 255F will be described in detail later with reference to the drawings after FIG. 268.

  As shown in the present embodiment, by adopting an automatic channel method in which all channels are grouped, empty channels are allocated or output channels are replaced based on a pre-specified standard. Sound can be output simply by determining the priority order. Therefore, unlike conventional control methods in which sound is output by specifying a channel, channel management is not required, so control related to sound output can be simplified and development efficiency can be improved. It becomes.

  In addition, by adopting the automatic channel method, it is possible to minimize the number of channels. For example, it is possible to adopt a low-priced sound source IC with a small number of channels, thereby reducing the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine. be able to.

[13. Game control processing]
FIG. 256 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process illustrated in FIG. 212. FIG. 257 is a flowchart showing the first and second start-up winning process shown in FIG. FIG. 258 is a flowchart showing the change start process shown in FIG. 256. FIG. 259 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variation pattern setting process illustrated in FIG. 256. FIG. 260 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the changing process shown in FIG. 256. The main control program executes timer interrupt processing every 4 ms, for example.

[13-1. Special design and special electric accessory control processing]
In the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, the main control program first executes the first and second start opening winning processes (step S6110). In the first and second starting opening winning process, the main control program determines whether or not the first starting opening sensor 3112 has detected a gaming ball and the first starting opening 2002 has received the game ball, or Then, it is determined whether or not the game ball is detected by the second start port sensor 3113 and the second start port 2004 has received the game ball.

  Next, the main control program first determines whether or not the processing flag is 0 (step S6120), and if this processing flag is 0, executes a change start process (step S6130). Note that the processing flag of 0 indicates that, for example, the start condition is satisfied for the start storage information already stored in the start storage information storage area. In this variation start process, the main control program performs setting for starting the variation display of the special symbol based on the result of whether or not a predetermined winning condition is established as a lottery for winning the big hit, Thereafter, the processing flag is updated to 1.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 0 in step S6120, the main control program determines whether or not the processing flag is 1 (step S6140). When this process flag is 1, the main control program executes a variation pattern setting process (step S6150). In this variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern or stop symbol (special symbol) displayed on the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display on the basis of the result of the big hit determination or the current gaming state ( After determining / setting the jackpot symbol, the lost symbol, etc.), the processing flag is updated to “2”. This variation pattern represents the variation time from the start of the variation display of the special symbol (identification symbol) to the stop display on either the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. ing.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 1 in step S6140, the main control program determines whether or not the processing flag is 2 (step S6170). If this process flag is 2, the following changing process is executed (step S6180). In this changing process, the main control program monitors the changing time set in the changing pattern setting process (step S6150) with a timer, and triggered by the time-out, the first special symbol display 1403 or the second The change display of the special symbol using the special symbol display 1405 is stopped.

  Thereafter, when the main control program determines that the winning condition for the big hit game is established in the big hit lottery in the above-described variation start process (step S6130), the process flag is updated to 3. When the main control program determines that the winning condition for the small hit game is established in the big win lottery in the above-described variation start process (step S6130), the process flag is updated to 5. On the other hand, when the main control program determines that none of the winning conditions is satisfied in the big win lottery and the winning flag is not won, the processing flag is updated to zero. In this case, the main control program is executed again from the variation start process (step S6130) in the next timer interrupt process.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 2 in step S6170, the main control program determines whether or not the processing flag is 3 (step S6190). When the process flag is 3, the main control program executes a jackpot game preparation process (step S6200).

  In this jackpot game preparation process, the main control program operates a condition device, which is one of the conditions for executing the jackpot game, to determine the mode of the jackpot game, and this determined jackpot game The mode (for example, the number of rounds) is set, the accessory continuous activation device is activated, and the processing flag is updated to 4.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 3 in step S6190, the main control program determines whether or not the processing flag is 4 (S6210). When the process flag is 4, the following jackpot game process is executed (step S6220). In the jackpot game process, the main control program determines whether one of the rounds, the number of times to open, the release time, and the number of game balls to be won as the jackpot game mode set in the jackpot game mode determination process (step S6607). The opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member or the other opening / closing member is controlled, and then the processing flag is updated to 0.

  Here, the main control program controls at least one of the first special game and the second special game as the set jackpot game, and executes the opening / closing operation of one opening / closing member in the first special game. In the second special game, the opening / closing operation of the other opening / closing member is performed and the opening / closing operation of the one opening / closing member is restricted.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 4 in step S6210, the main control program determines whether or not the processing flag is 5 (S6230). When the processing flag is 5, the following process when the small hit is established is executed (S6240). In the small hitting establishment process, the main control program sets the number of opening times and the opening time in order to control the opening / closing operation of one opening / closing member or the other opening / closing member as the small hitting game mode.

  After that, the main control program closes the opening / closing member after opening the one opening / closing member or the other opening / closing member only once for a very short time, for example, based on the set number of opening times and opening time. Control is performed so that the state is set, and then the processing flag is updated to 0. In this case, in the next timer interrupt process, the change start process (step S6130) is performed again. This small hit game is not a game with the operation of the condition device like the big hit game, but is a kind of big hit game, for example, and one of the opening / closing members or the other opening / closing member is opened for only a short time. It refers to a game that is very similar to a game (a so-called short open big hit game).

  Note that a plurality of types of variation patterns are stored as variation patterns. The variation pattern determines the time from when the symbol variation of the special symbol starts to when it ends, and when the information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, the effect appearing in the effect display device 1600 The type of pattern can be determined. In the present embodiment, the plurality of types of variation patterns can be classified into a jackpot variation variation pattern, a deviation reach variation variation pattern, and a variation variation variation pattern. The big hit fluctuation is a fluctuation that is performed when the result of the big hit determination is a big hit. In the effect display device 1600, after reaching the reach effect, the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol is expanded so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed in a fixed stop state. Production is performed. The loss reach variation is a variation that is performed when the result of the big hit determination is a loss and it is determined that the reach determination is performed based on the reach random number. An effect is developed in which the change display of the symbols is finally lost and the symbols are displayed in a fixed stop state. The loss fluctuation is a fluctuation that is performed when the result of the big hit determination is a loss and the reach determination based on the reach random number is not determined to reach, and the effect display device 1600 does not reach the reach effect. Then, the effect is developed so that the variation display of the decorative symbol is finally deviated and the symbol is confirmed and stopped. The variation pattern is defined so that it can be specified which variation pattern is on the first special symbol side or the second special symbol side.

  That is, in the peripheral control board 1510, the game information such as the result of the big hit determination is obtained from the main control board 1310 and is referred to so that such a variation pattern of the decorative design can appear. In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 performs a process of changing the effect display (background or reserved image) related to the expectation in addition to causing the decorative display pattern 1600 to appear in the effect display device 1600 based on the acquired game information. Or assigning each effect sound corresponding to the progress of the effect display (decorative pattern variation pattern, notice effect, movable object effect, button operation effect, etc.) to a predetermined channel, or operating a movable member. Execute control.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, whether or not the main control program executes the small hitting establishment process S6240 depending on whether or not the processing flag is set to 5 in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process shown in FIG. Can be selected. That is, if the processing flag is in the range of 0-5, the main control program can be a game including a small hit game, whereas if the processing flag is in the range of 0-4, the main control program does not include the small hit game. It can be a game.

  As described above, the special symbol and special electric accessory control process includes the program code for the small hit game that can be executed according to the value of the processing flag as in the small hit establishment process S6240. It is assumed that it is not unused program code.

  That is, the main control program executes another branch process provided in parallel instead of executing the small hitting establishment process S6240. With such a program structure, it is possible to share a program code even among models having different gaming characteristics whether or not a small hit game is included. For example, different models depending on whether or not a small hit game is included There is no need to develop each program code in between.

  As described above, the main control program selectively executes one of the processes of step S6130, step S6150, step S6180, step S6200, step S6220, and step S6240 according to the state of the processing flag described above, and then The special symbol and special electric accessory control process is terminated.

[13-2. First and second start-up winning process]
FIG. 257 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the first and second start-up winning process (step S6110) illustrated in FIG. The first and second start opening winning process (step S6110) is a process related to a determination as to whether or not a game ball has been received at the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004, and that there has been the reception. On the condition that is determined, includes processing for updating the hold state of the corresponding special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol).

[13-3. Entering a game ball into the second starting port]
First, the main control program determines whether or not a detection signal is output from the second start port sensor 3113 (step S6201), and if it is determined that a detection signal is output from the second start port sensor 3113, the second start port It is determined that the game ball is accepted in 2004 (hereinafter also referred to as “start winning prize”) (the start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied), and the following step S6202 is executed. In this step S6202, the main control program obtains various random numbers for the second special symbol lottery (such as a big hit determination random number, a big hit symbol random number, etc.) triggered by the start winning.

  In addition, this main control program is combined with the jackpot determination random number and the like in response to the start winning, instead of acquiring the jackpot game mode determination random value (for example, the round number determination random number value), that is, the big prize opening 2103 Before the release mode is determined, the variation pattern of the special symbol and the stop symbol are first determined to advance the game. Although the details will be described later, this main control program detects that a game ball has passed through the gate 2575 (left gate 2575L, right gate 2575R) after displaying a special symbol stop symbol after a predetermined fluctuation time. With this as a trigger, a random value for determining the big hit game mode is acquired.

  At the same time, the main control program determines whether or not the value of the second hold number counter provided in the RAM of the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) is less than 4 which is the upper limit value. As a result, if the second hold number counter is less than 4, the main control program sequentially executes a second start hold storage process and a hold history update process which will be described later.

  First, in the second start hold storage process, the main control program starts memory information acquired when the game ball is received at the second start port 2004 (a jackpot determination random value, a jackpot symbol random value, etc. ) Are stored as a predetermined storage area (RAM), for example, in a second start storage information storage area which is a part of the main control RAM, in association with the types of special symbols and the order of suspension (step S6203).

  That is, for the second special symbol, the main control program stores at least one start memory information indicating that the start condition is not yet satisfied for each special symbol type. The predetermined start number is stored in the second start storage information storage area (start storage information storage means, second start storage information storage means) of the main control RAM in such a manner that the order can be specified. Therefore, the main control program stores any second start memory information when a new game ball is received by the second start port 2004, that is, when the start condition is satisfied (at the time of start winning). If it is not stored in the storage area, it is assumed that the start condition is immediately established, and the variable display of the second special symbol can be started.

  At the same time, the main control program writes and sets a start port winning command indicating that the game ball has been received in the second start port 2004 in the transmission information storage area, and in the command transmission process described above, the start port A winning command is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 1510.

  Further, the main control program is triggered by the fact that new second start memory information is stored in the second start memory information storage area (that is, the number of second start memory information of the second special symbol is increased). Then, it is determined whether or not the following preceding determination condition is satisfied (preceding condition determination lottery means).

  As the preceding determination condition, any one or any of the above-mentioned jackpot determination random number storage area, special symbol random number storage area, reach determination random number storage area, variation pattern random number storage area 1 and variation type random number storage area It is possible to exemplify that the random number value stored in the combination is read, and the read random number value matches the pre-read determination value for the second special symbol stored in the main control ROM described above (hereinafter, This is called “advance judgment lottery”).

  The main control program determines that the preceding determination condition is satisfied when the read random number value matches the second special symbol prefetch determination value, while the read random number value is the second special symbol. If the pre-read determination value does not match, it is determined that the preceding determination condition is not satisfied. The main control program does not execute the advance determination command transmission process to be described later when the preceding determination condition is not satisfied, and the following advance determination command transmission process when the preceding determination condition is satisfied. Execute.

  In the preceding determination command transmission process, the main control program writes and sets a special symbol 2 storage pre-reading effect command instructing that the preceding determination effect should be started for the second special symbol in the transmission information storage area. In the command transmission process, the special symbol 2 storage prefetch effect command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (command transmission means). At this time, the main control program includes the following prefetch information in the special symbol 2 memory prefetch effect command.

  Specifically, the special symbol 2 storage prefetching effect command includes, for example, a special symbol 2 type prefetching command, a special symbol 2 variation pattern prefetching command, a special symbol 2 variation type prefetching command, and a special symbol 2 variation sorting table information prefetching command. , Or any one of these or any combination thereof, and includes pre-read information to be described later. This prefetch information includes information regarding the symbol type, variation pattern number, variation type number of the second special symbol, and variation distribution table information.

  This special symbol 2 type prefetch command includes information regarding the symbol type of the second special symbol. The symbol type here is, for example, a big hit symbol as a stop symbol indicating that it is a big hit, a small hit symbol as a stop symbol that indicates a small hit, or a lost symbol as a stop symbol that indicates a loss It is the information which shows either. This special symbol 2 variation pattern prefetch command includes information on the variation pattern number of the second special symbol. This special symbol 2 variation type look-ahead command includes information regarding the variation type number of the second special symbol. This special symbol 2 fluctuation distribution table information prefetch command includes the fluctuation distribution table information of the second special symbol.

  As described above, in the peripheral control board 1510, the effect control program that has received the special symbol 2 storage pre-reading effect command described above uses the special symbol 2 storage pre-reading effect command, as will be described later, and will be described later. Production can be performed.

  In this embodiment, after the main control program shifts the gaming state from the probability variation state to another gaming state (for example, the normal gaming state) (winning probability control means), a predetermined period (hereinafter referred to as “preceding”) from this transition point. The notification that the above-described preceding determination condition has been satisfied is suppressed over the “determination suppression range” (predetermined determination suppression means).

  That is, the main control program stores the special symbol 2 storage pre-reading effect command in the transmission information storage area of the main control RAM over the preceding determination suppression range after the gaming state shifts from the probability variation state to the normal gaming state. Writing of (preceding judgment instruction command) is restricted. Thereby, it is suppressed that the special symbol 2 storage prefetch effect command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the command transmission process described above.

  On the other hand, in the hold history update process, the main control program adds 1 to the counter value of the second hold number counter provided in the main control RAM (step S6204). Further, in this pending history update process, the main control program has a start condition corresponding to the at least one start memory information stored in the first or second start memory information storage area in the lower special symbol memory display 1187. In a mode in which the at least one first or second start memory information can be specified over the period until it is established, the upper special symbol memory display 1184 or the lower special symbol memory display 1187 has a hold display mode (for example, lighting, Blinking or extinguishing), and then the start condition corresponding to the start storage information to be prioritized among the at least one first or second start storage information stored by the first or second start storage information storage means As a result, the derivation of the hold display mode corresponding to the priority start storage information is stopped and the first or second start is started. From 憶 information storage area erasing start memory information to be the first (pending digestion control means).

[13-4. Game balls entering the first starting point]
On the other hand, if no detection signal is output from the second start port sensor 3113 in step S6201, or if the value of the second reserved number counter is 4 that is the upper limit value in the processing of step S202, the main control program Determines whether or not a detection signal is output from the first start port sensor 3112 (step S6205).

  When a detection signal is output from the first start port sensor 3112, the main control program determines that a game ball has been received by the first start port 2002 (hereinafter also referred to as “start winning prize”) (first special symbol). In step S6206, the following step S6206 is executed. In this step S6206, the main control program obtains various random values for the first special symbol lottery (such as a big hit determination random number, a big hit symbol random number, etc.) triggered by the start winning, and the above-mentioned start storage information storage area The number of first start storage information (corresponding to the various random number values) stored in the first start storage information storage area (hereinafter also referred to as “first hold number counter”) is less than 4 which is the upper limit value. Judge whether there is. As a result, when the first hold number counter is less than 4, the main control program sequentially executes the following first start hold storage process and hold history update process.

  In the first start hold storage process, the main control program uses start memory information (such as a big hit determination random number value, a big hit symbol random number value, etc.) acquired when a game ball is received in the first start port 2002 as a special For example, a predetermined storage area (RAM) is stored in a first start storage information storage area that is a part of the main control RAM while being associated with the symbol type and the order of holding (step S6207).

  That is, for the first special symbol, the main control program stores at least one start memory information indicating that the start condition is not yet satisfied for the first special symbol, and the order in which the start condition is satisfied for each special symbol. Are stored in the first start memory information storage area (start memory information storage means, first start memory information storage means) up to a predetermined number. Therefore, the main control program stores all the first start memory information when a new game ball is received by the first start port 2002, that is, when the start condition is satisfied (at the time of start winning). If it is not stored in the storage area, it is assumed that the start condition is immediately satisfied, and the variable display of the first special symbol is started.

  At the same time, the main control program writes and sets a start opening prize command indicating that a game ball has been received at the first start opening 2002 in the transmission information storage area, and starts start winning prize in the command transmission process described above. The command is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 1510. In this manner, the peripheral control board 1510 can execute the advance determination effect described later using the start opening prize command.

  Further, the main control program is triggered by the fact that new first start memory information is stored in the first start memory information storage area (that is, the number of first start memory information of the first special symbol has increased). Then, it is determined whether or not the following preceding determination condition is satisfied. As the preceding determination condition, for example, one of the above-mentioned jackpot determination random number storage area, special symbol random number storage area, reach determination random number storage area, variation pattern random number storage area 1 and variation type random number storage area or It can be mentioned that the random number value stored in any combination is read and the read random number value matches the first special symbol prefetch determination value stored in the main control ROM described above ( Hereinafter referred to as “advance determination lottery”).

  By the way, as the above-described advance determination process, the main control program executes the advance determination lottery based on the game information determined based on any of the predetermined random numbers as described above, and the lottery result is displayed. In addition, it is configured so that it can be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as a preceding determination instruction command (one of the special symbol 1 storage pre-reading effect command and the special symbol 2 storage pre-reading effect command) (pre-reading first stage determination).

  The main control program determines that the preceding determination condition is satisfied when the read random number value matches the first special symbol prefetch determination value, while the read random number value is the first special symbol. If the pre-read determination value does not match, it is determined that the preceding determination condition is not satisfied. The main control program does not execute the advance determination command transmission process described later when the preceding determination condition is not satisfied, and transmits the following advance determination command when the preceding determination condition is satisfied. Execute the process.

  In the preceding determination command transmission process, the main control program writes and sets a special symbol 1 storage pre-reading effect command instructing that the preceding determination effect should be started for the first special symbol in the transmission information storage area. In the command transmission process, the special symbol 1 storage prefetch effect command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (command transmission means). At this time, the main control program includes the following prefetch information in the special symbol 1 storage prefetch effect command.

  Specifically, the special symbol 1 storage prefetching effect command includes, for example, a special symbol 1 type prefetch command, a special symbol 1 variation pattern prefetch command, a special symbol 1 variation type prefetch command, and a special symbol 1 variation allocation table information prefetch command. , Or any one of these or any combination thereof, and includes pre-read information to be described later. This prefetch information includes the symbol type of the first special symbol, the variation pattern number, the variation type number, and the variation distribution table information.

  This special symbol 1 type prefetch command includes information related to the symbol type of the first special symbol. The symbol type here is, for example, a big hit symbol as a stop symbol indicating that it is a big hit, a small hit symbol as a stop symbol that indicates a small hit, or a lost symbol as a stop symbol that indicates a loss It is the information which shows either. This special symbol 1 variation pattern look-ahead command includes information regarding the variation pattern number of the first special symbol. This special symbol 1 variation type look-ahead command includes information regarding the variation type number of the first special symbol. This special symbol 1 fluctuation distribution table information prefetch command includes the fluctuation distribution table information of the first special symbol.

  As described above, in the peripheral control board 1510, the effect control program that has received the special symbol 1 storage pre-reading effect command described above uses the special symbol 1 storage pre-reading effect command, as will be described later, and makes a preceding determination described later. Production can be performed.

  In this peripheral control board 1510, the big hit expectation indicated by the special symbol 1 storage pre-reading effect command indicates whether or not the peripheral control MPU 1530a executes the pre-reading display effect based on the special symbol 1 storage pre-reading effect command. Execution is determined according to the ratio. The pre-reading effect is a continuous effect across a plurality of variations, but whether or not to perform this pre-reading effect is determined based on the special symbol 1 storage pre-reading effect command transmitted at the time of winning the start opening, and at that timing In addition to determining a display mode from a plurality of display modes of effects that are continuously performed, a display mode that changes across a plurality of variations is also determined (a scenario is determined in advance).

  As a display mode, based on the result of the preceding determination process, the effect is immediately started, and based on the result of the preceding determination process, if the change is in progress, the effect is waited to be executed and the next change It is possible to exemplify the case where a continuous production starts with the start. Furthermore, even if it is determined that such a continuous production is to be started, the display mode includes a mode that does not change at all from the state before the continuous production is started (for example, a normal display mode) Normal display mode, red specific display mode, gold special display mode).

  Although such a continuous effect changes step by step, the expectation to the big hit with the display mode to be displayed next with respect to the previous display mode may be the same, or the display mode is increased. Also good. Furthermore, a display mode in which the degree of expectation for jackpots is reduced may be executed. In that case, the big hit expectation may be actually higher than the display mode in which the expectation rises step by step (that is, it corresponds to “broken law”). As a final form of the continuous notice, a mode in which the player can discriminate information represented by the special symbol 1 memory prefetching effect command, for example, jackpot confirmation, probability variation confirmation (confirmation of transition to the probability variation state), presence of play, etc. The aspect of this may be sufficient.

  On the other hand, in the hold history update process, the main control program adds 1 to the counter value of the first hold number counter provided in the RAM (corresponding to the startup storage information storage area) (step S6208). Further, in this pending history update process, the main control program waits until the start condition corresponding to the at least one start storage information stored in the start storage information storage area is satisfied in the upper special symbol storage display 1184. The at least one start memory information stored in the start memory information storage area is derived by deriving a hold display mode (for example, lighting, blinking, or extinguishing) in a mode capable of specifying the at least one start memory information When the start condition corresponding to the start storage information to be prioritized is satisfied, the derivation of the hold display mode corresponding to the start storage information to be prioritized is stopped and the priority should be given from the start storage information storage area. The start memory information is erased (holding digestion control means).

  On the other hand, the main control program reaches 4 when the game ball is not received at the first start port 2002 in step S6205 or when the counter value of the first hold number counter becomes the upper limit value in the process of step S6206. If yes, the first and second start opening winning processes are terminated.

[13-5. Fluctuation start processing]
FIG. 258 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the change start process illustrated in FIG. 256.

  In this variation start process (step S6130), the main control program first determines whether or not the values of the two reserved number counters of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are both 0 (step S6301). . Here, the value of the number-of-holds counter of the first special symbol indicates the number of first start storage information (random number values) stored in the first start storage information storage area in the start storage information storage area described above. The value of the second special symbol holding number counter indicates the number of second starting storage information (random value) stored in the second starting storage information storage area in the above-described starting storage information storage area. .

  If the main control program determines in step S301 described above that the value of the number-of-holds counter for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 0, the start conditions for the first special symbol and the second special symbol are both After determining that it has not been established and ending this variation starting process and ending the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, the timer interrupt process is executed every 4 ms as described above. Note that the variation start process is the same as the preceding determination process, so that the same result is obtained at the start of variation and the preceding determination as the determination result, and the result may be used as a prefetch effect command.

  On the other hand, if the main control program determines in step S6301 that the value of the number-of-holds counter for the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not 0, the start condition is set for at least one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is determined that the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and it is determined that the engine is in a so-called start suspension state. Next, the main control program determines whether or not the value of the number-of-holds counter of the second special symbol is 0, that is, whether or not the number of second start storage information is 0 (step S6302).

  If it is determined in step S6302 that the number of second start memory information is not zero, the main control program acquires the second start memory information (second special symbol random number value) (step S6303), and then the second start described above. A predetermined number of second start storage information stored in the storage information storage area is shifted and stored (step S6304).

  More specifically, the main control program stores the second start storage information (random value) stored in the n th storage area (n is a natural number of 2 or more) obtained by dividing the second start storage information storage area into a plurality. Are shifted and stored in the (n-1) th storage area. Thereby, at least a storage area is vacant, and new start-up storage information of the second special symbol can be stored in the storage area where the vacancy occurs.

  At the same time, the main control program sets “1” to the special symbol variation flag (step S6305), and subtracts 1 from the value of the second special symbol holding number counter, that is, the number of the second start memory information (step S6305). S6306). At the same time, the main control program controls the lighting of the lower special symbol memory display 1187 so as to indicate the number of second start memorized information after the subtraction (the number of second special symbols held). Note that the special symbol variation flag set to 1 in this way is reset when the processing flag is updated to 0 after the variation start processing is completed, for example.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6302 that the number of second startup storage information is 0, the main control program acquires the first startup storage information (first special symbol random number value) (step S6307) and then described above. A predetermined number of first start memory information stored in the first start memory information storage area is shifted and stored (step S6308).

  Specifically, each of the first start storage information storage area and the second start storage information storage area is provided with four storage areas (first to fourth sections). In each of these storage areas, a big hit determination random number storage area for storing the big hit determination random number value, a big hit symbol random number storage area for storing the big hit symbol random number value, and a reach determination random number value are stored. A random number storage area for reach determination to be stored, and a random pattern for random pattern 1, 2 storage area for storing variable display pattern random values of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively, are provided.

  The main control program stores the second start storage information (random value) stored in the nth (n is a natural number of 2 or more) storage area divided into a plurality of the first start storage information storage areas. Shift to the storage area. As a result, at least a storage area becomes empty, and new start-up storage information of the first special symbol can be stored in the storage area where the empty has occurred.

  At the same time, the main control program sets “2” in the special symbol variation flag (step S6309), and subtracts “1” from the value of the holding number counter of the first special symbol, that is, the number of the second start memory information. (Step S6310). In addition, the main control program controls the lighting of the upper special symbol memory display 1184 so as to indicate the number of first start memory information after the subtraction (the number of first special symbols held). The special symbol variation flag set to “2” in this way is reset, for example, when the processing flag is updated to “0” after the variation start processing ends.

  As described above, for the determination at the start of fluctuation, the same determination process as that for prefetching is performed, but the information determined by prefetching is again the same without using all or part of the information. By repeating the processing and executing it, it becomes possible to obtain the same result as in the prefetch determination. Even if the game process is determined by executing the same process at the time of starting winning and at the start of variation, the pre-read command (special symbol storage pre-reading effect command) and the command at the start of variation are different from each other. In order to identify each other, the same command value is not used.

  Next, the main control program confirms the contents of the jackpot flag and determines whether or not the probability variation function is operating, that is, whether or not the gaming state is a probability variation state (step S6312). When the gaming state is not the probability variation state, the main control program selects the probability variation function non-operation jackpot determination table set with a low probability of jackpot (step S6313). On the other hand, when the gaming state is the probability variation state, the main control program selects the probability variation function operating determination table set with a high probability of winning a jackpot (step S6314).

  Next, based on the selected table, the main control program receives the first special symbol random number value or the second special symbol random number value (hereinafter also referred to as “big hit determination random number value”) acquired in step S6303 or step S6307. It is determined whether or not the value (random value corresponding to jackpot) matches (step S6315).

  That is, the main control program determines whether or not a predetermined winning condition is satisfied after the start condition is satisfied (lottery means). When the jackpot value matches, the main control program is the jackpot of the jackpot type based on the jackpot determination random value, that is, the type that activates at least one of the probability variation function and the time-shortening function (the state type related to the gaming state). This is determined (step S6316). Next, the main control program sets the jackpot flag corresponding to the determined jackpot type to ON (step S6317).

  On the other hand, if the jackpot determination random number obtained in step S6315 does not match the jackpot value, the main control program executes step S6318 described later. Finally, the main control program updates the processing flag to 1 (step S6318).

[13-6. Fluctuation pattern setting process]
FIG. 259 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variation pattern setting process.

  First, the main control program determines which jackpot flag is ON (step S6401). When it is determined that any of the big hit flags is ON, the main control program executes a big hit fluctuation pattern table setting process (step S6402).

  In this big hit fluctuation pattern table setting process, a fluctuation pattern table for winning big hits (a big hit fluctuation pattern table as a fluctuation pattern table at the time of winning) is set, and if the winning conditions are satisfied, the fluctuation to win the big hit A pattern (variation pattern at the time of winning) is determined (variation pattern setting means).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6401 that the big hit flag is not ON, the main control program functions as a reach lottery means and has been stored in the start storage information storage area of the main control built-in RAM and the start condition is satisfied. Reach condition as a condition for executing an effect (reach effect) implying that a predetermined winning condition may be established for stored information, that is, a special lottery may be won, or this reach It is determined whether or not a specific reach condition is satisfied among the conditions (step S6403).

  Note that the reach condition here means that it is relatively unlikely that the winning condition is satisfied, and it is easy for the player to hold the expectation of winning the special lottery relatively easily. Normal reach as an example, and a specific aspect of reach production that makes it relatively easy for players to hold the expectation of winning a special lottery with a relatively high probability of winning This is a condition for executing any one of the super-reach as an example. On the other hand, the specific reach condition described above is a condition for executing this super reach. Hereinafter, such determination is also referred to as “reach lottery”.

  By the way, the main control program stores the winning probability of such reach lottery, that is, the probability that the reach condition is satisfied (hereinafter referred to as “reach lottery winning probability”) in the start storage information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Control is performed so as to change in stages according to the number of already-started storage information. Specifically, the main control program, when the winning probability of the reach lottery is 0, for example, when it is 0, 1/15 or 1 according to the number of stored start storage information (so-called holding number) Is controlled so that 1/14, 2 is 1/13, 3 is 1/10, and 4 is 1/10.

  Further, the main control program writes the reach lottery result command including the result of the aforementioned reach lottery into the transmission information storage area of the aforementioned main control built-in RAM and transmits it in the aforementioned command transmission process (random number range information control means). ). That is, the main control program corresponds to each start storage information stored in the start storage information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, instead of transmitting the determination reach random number value itself to the peripheral control board 1510. And a reach lottery result command related to the result of the reach lottery.

  The reach lottery result command includes a first special symbol reach lottery result command corresponding to start memory information related to the first special symbol, and a second special symbol reach lottery result command corresponding to start memory information related to the second special symbol. Is a command name generically.

  When it is determined that the reach condition described above is satisfied, that is, when it is determined that the reach effect is to be executed, the main control program executes a reach loss variation pattern table setting process (step S6404). In this reach-losing variation pattern table setting process, the main control program sets a variation pattern table (reach-losing variation pattern table) for executing a reach effect to make a loss.

  At this time, the main control program determines whether or not the time reduction function is operating. When the main control program determines that the winning condition is not satisfied as described above and the time reduction function is activated (time reduction), the main control program performs the above-described reach effect and causes a loss. A variation pattern table including a pattern (time-short non-winning variation pattern) (time-short reach-losing variation pattern table as a time-short non-winning variation pattern table) is set (variation pattern setting means).

  On the other hand, if the main control program determines that the winning condition is not satisfied as described above and the time reduction function is not activated (non-time reduction), the main control program executes the reach effect described above and A variation pattern table (a non-temporal non-temporal reach variation variation pattern table as a non-temporal non-winning variation pattern table) including a variation pattern (non-temporal non-winning variation pattern table) is set (variation pattern setting means). In the following description, the short-time reach loss variation pattern table and the non-short-time reach loss variation pattern table are also collectively referred to as a “reach loss variation pattern table”.

  In the present embodiment, the main control program has not only “big hit”, “small hit” and “losing” as the lottery result of the lottery on the fluctuation pattern of the special symbols, but also this “losing” is activated by the time shortening function. It is also controlled separately whether it is a “non-short-time loss” as a “lack” in a state where the time-shortening function is not performed or a “short-time loss” in a state where the time-shortening function is activated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S6403 that the reach condition is not satisfied, that is, when it is determined that the reach effect is not executed, the main control program executes a non-reach loss variation pattern table setting process (step S6405). In this non-reach loss variation pattern table setting process, the main control program sets a variation pattern table (non-reach loss variation pattern table) that is lost without executing the reach effect. A non-reach loss variation pattern table is prepared in correspondence with a plurality of gaming states, and a plurality of types are prepared. For example, in a normal gaming state, a table in which a shortening variation is easily performed when the number of holdings is a predetermined value or more. It has become.

  Even when it is determined that the reach condition is not satisfied, the main control program similarly determines whether or not the time reduction function is operating, and similarly to the above, whether or not the time reduction function is operating. The variation pattern table to be set may be changed according to the above. In other words, the main control program loses without executing the reach effect described above when it is determined that the winning condition is not satisfied as described above and the time reduction function is activated (time reduction). For this purpose, a fluctuation pattern table (time-short non-reach fluctuation pattern table as a time-short non-winning fluctuation pattern table) including a fluctuation pattern (time-short non-winning fluctuation pattern table) is set (fluctuation pattern setting means). On the other hand, when the main control program determines that the winning condition is not satisfied as described above and the time reduction function is not activated (non-time reduction), the main control program loses without executing the reach effect described above. A variation pattern table (a non-temporal non-reach loss variation pattern table as a non-temporal non-winning variation pattern table) is set (variation pattern setting means).

  The main control program (variation pattern setting means) determines the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the table set as described above (step S6410), the pattern command and the winning information of the variation pattern of the special symbol thus determined. The command is written and set in the transmission information storage area (step S6411). Hereinafter, these pattern commands and winning information commands are collectively referred to as “variation pattern commands”. The pattern command of the variation pattern includes information regarding the variation time of the special symbol, and the winning information command includes a winning result regarding the jackpot.

  Furthermore, the main control program sets the value of the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbol determined based on the variation pattern table set as described above in the timer (step S6412). That is, if the fluctuation pattern table set as described above is a big hit fluctuation pattern table, the main control program determines the big hit fluctuation time according to the special symbol fluctuation pattern determined based on the big hit fluctuation pattern table. To the timer. On the other hand, the main control program, when the variation pattern table set as described above is a small hit variation pattern table, according to the variation pattern of the special symbol determined based on this small hit variation pattern table, Set the variable time for the timer.

  When the fluctuation pattern table set as described above is a short-time reach-losing fluctuation pattern table, the main control program determines whether the short-time or short-time fluctuation pattern table is based on the special symbol fluctuation pattern determined based on the short-time reach-losing fluctuation pattern table. Set reach variation time in timer. On the other hand, when the variation pattern table set as described above is a non-temporal reach reach variation pattern table, the main control program responds to the special symbol variation pattern determined based on the non-temporal reach loss variation pattern table. Then, the variable time for non-short-time reach is set in the timer. As described above, even when the lottery result of the special lottery is “losing”, the variation time of the special symbol is made different depending on whether or not the time reduction function is activated.

  Here, the main control program manages the basic variation time and the addition variation time as 2-byte data as the variation time of such a special symbol, and the maximum variation time that is the total value of these times is set. 262.144 s (65536 × 4 ms) × 2 = 524.288 s, and a special symbol variation time twice as long as before, in which each time is managed by 1 byte, is realized.

  When the value of the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbol determined as described above is set in the timer, the main control program next sets the special diagram 250ED operation flag to ON (step S6413). When the special figure 250ED operation flag is set to ON, the main control program is specified based on the value of the special symbol variation flag set in step S6305 or step S6309 described above when the start condition is satisfied. At least one of the first special symbol display unit 1403 (variable display unit) and the second special symbol display unit 1405 (variable display unit) is caused to start a variable display including a lighting pattern of a plurality of LEDs according to the determined variation pattern. (Design variation control means). Finally, the main control program updates the process flag to 2 (step S6414), and ends the above variation pattern setting process.

  Thus, when set in the variation pattern setting process, the main control program receives the pattern command and winning information command already written in the transmission information storage area in the command transmission process included in the timer interrupt process executed every 4 ms. Read out and transmit to the peripheral control unit 1510.

[13-7. Processing during change]
FIG. 260 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the changing process shown in FIG. 256.

  First, the main control program determines whether or not the variation time set in the timer in the above-described step S6412 (see FIG. 259) has expired (step S6501), and the variation time set in the timer is timed. If it is not up, the changing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the variation time set in the timer is up, the main control program sets the special figure 250ED operation flag set to ON in step S413 described above to OFF (step S6502). Then, the main control program determines the first special symbol display unit 1403 (variable display means) and the second special symbol display unit 1405 (variable display) according to the special symbol variation flag set in step S6305 or step S6309 described above. Means) is used to stop the change display (variation of special symbols) consisting of a change pattern of the lighting, extinction or blinking mode of the 7-segment LED, and the stop mode according to the established conditions described above. The stop symbol consisting of is displayed (design variation control means). In other words, the main control program starts the special symbol variation display when the start condition is met after the start condition is met, and then the winning condition is determined when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern has elapsed. A stop symbol corresponding to the result is displayed (symbol variation control means).

  Next, the main control program writes and sets a fixed stop command in the transmission information storage area described above (step S6503). This fixed stop command is a command indicating that the change of the special symbol is finished and the predetermined stop symbol is fixed. The main control program reads the fixed stop command from the transmission information storage area and transmits it to the peripheral control unit 1510 in the command transmission process included in the timer interrupt process executed every 4 ms. Accordingly, the peripheral control board 1510 can recognize that the stop symbol of the special symbol that has been variably displayed has been determined.

  Next, the main control program determines whether or not the big hit flag is ON (step S6504). When it is determined that the big hit flag is ON, the main control program updates the processing flag to 3 (step S6505) and ends the changing process.

  By the way, in a general gaming machine, when the game ball is received at the start port and the start condition is satisfied, there is no start memory information (hereinafter also referred to as a holding ball) in which the start condition has been satisfied before that. The special symbol variation display is started, and the stop symbol is displayed when a predetermined variation time has elapsed.

  At the same time, in such a general gaming machine, after the start condition is established, a special lottery is subsequently executed, and when the special lottery is won, the normal gaming state is changed to the special gaming state (existing). See first reference above). In this way, when the gaming state transitions, for example, the game content associated with the stored ball that has been stored before the transition of the gaming state may be executed after the transition of the gaming state. It seems that there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the processing flag is updated to 3 (that is, triggered by the transition of the gaming state, for example), it is determined that the main control program is to be transferred next. After writing a command representing the gaming state (hereinafter referred to as “transfer destination command”) to the transmission information storage area, the main control program then transfers the transfer destination command to the peripheral control board 1510 in command transmission processing (S92). Send to.

  As will be described later, the main control program keeps the gaming state in the normal gaming state if the winning condition is not satisfied, but if the winning condition is satisfied, the main control program responds to the established winning condition from the normal gaming state. The game state is shifted to a more advantageous game state, and thereafter, the game state is changed back to the normal game state (game state control means).

  Accordingly, the main control program transmits a transition destination command indicating that the game state has been changed to the predetermined game state to the peripheral control board 1510 when the game state has been changed (post-migration game state notification means). . On the other hand, in the peripheral control board 1510, based on the transfer destination command received from the main control board 1310, the transferred game state is taken into consideration, and it is difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable due to the difference in the game state before and after the transfer. Control the production operation.

  Normally, in the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control MPU 1530a normally performs the rendering operation without being subjected to special restrictions from the main control board 1310 when a predetermined rendering condition is satisfied.

  As a first example for making it difficult to give the player a sense of incongruity, when the peripheral control MPU 1530a receives a transfer destination command from the main control board 1310, it indicates that the gaming state has shifted based on this transfer destination command. Since it can be ascertained reliably, for example, the control of the main control board 1310 is used as an opportunity to restrict the execution of presentation operations such as the preceding determination effect and the reach effect described above. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult for the production operation to give the player a sense of incongruity due to the difference in the gaming state before and after the transition.

  On the other hand, as a second example for making it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable, the peripheral control board 1510 uses, for example, a start condition based on the transfer destination command received by the peripheral control MPU 1530a from the main control board 1310. If the gaming state at the first time point when the starting condition is satisfied is different from the gaming state at the second time point when the starting condition is satisfied with respect to the starting memory information that is established, the effect operation is performed in consideration of the shifted gaming state. You may make it control.

  In this way, in the peripheral control board 1510 that has received the transition destination command later, when the gaming state is transitioned, the peripheral control MPU 1530a can immediately grasp that the gaming state has transitioned, and therefore transitions. It is possible to control the production operation so that the game content linked to the game state does not cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

  The peripheral control MPU 1530a receives the transfer destination command from the main control board 1310 and, for example, when it is determined that the next game state is a probabilistic change and a short time state, a predetermined winning condition regarding the stored start memory information is stored. However, if the winning type is not the winning type that activates the probability variation function (so-called normal jackpot), the preceding determination effect is applied to the subsequent starting storage information stored subsequent to the previous starting storage information. You may make it regulate so that it may not perform.

  By the way, a state where the processing flag is 3 indicates that the special symbol variation display is stopped so as to indicate that the big win is won. Although not shown in the flowchart, 0 is set as an initial value to a situation identification flag for identifying a gaming state in a jackpot game preparation process to be described later together with the process of updating the process flag to 3 in step S6505.

  The main control program was established using the first special symbol display unit 1403 (variable display unit) or the second special symbol display unit 1405 (variable display unit) corresponding to the special symbol that was variably displayed as described above. A stop symbol corresponding to the winning condition is displayed (stop symbol control means).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6504 that the big hit flag is not ON, the main control program updates the processing flag to 0 (step S6508) and ends the changing process. In this case, since the main control program is not accompanied by the transition of the gaming state, the main control program regulates the writing of the transition destination command to the transmission information storage area. Note that the processing flag of 0 indicates that the special symbol is in the processing stage in which the fluctuation is stopped as shown that the jackpot is not won.

[13-8. Jackpot preparation process]
As already explained, in the jackpot game preparation process, the main control program operates a condition device, which is one of the conditions for executing the jackpot game, and performs the process of determining the mode of the jackpot game. The mode (for example, the number of rounds) of the hit jackpot game is set, and the accessory continuous operation device is operated. Then, the effect control program updates the processing flag to 4, sets the status identification flag to 0 and returns it to the initial value, and ends the jackpot game preparation process.

[13-9. Big hit game processing]
Next, the jackpot game process (step S6220) executed when the process flag is “4” will be described. FIG. 261 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the big hit game process.

  In the jackpot game process described above, the main control program first determines whether or not the big prize opening 2103 is open (step S6801). When the big prize opening 2103 is being opened, the main control program determines whether the opening time (elapsed time after opening) of the big prize opening 2103 has reached the opening / closing operation limit time set in step S6803. Is determined (step S6802). When it is determined that the opening / closing operation limit time has elapsed, the main control program closes the special winning opening 2103 by closing the opening / closing member (step S6804).

  However, even if it is determined in step S6802 that the set opening / closing operation restriction time has not yet elapsed, the main control program does not enter the big prize opening 2103 after the big prize opening 2103 is opened. If the number of game balls that have entered is equal to or greater than the upper limit (for example, 9) set in step S6803, the process proceeds to step S6804 and the special winning opening 2103 is closed. On the other hand, if the set opening / closing operation limit time has not yet elapsed in step S6802 and the number of game balls received in the big winning opening 2103 has not yet reached the upper limit number in step S6803, the main control program The jackpot game process is terminated while maintaining the big winning opening 2103 in the open state.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6801 that the big prize opening 2103 is not being opened, the main control program sets the number of times the big prize opening 2105, 2106 is opened by the opening / closing member (the number of round games) in step S6803. It is determined whether or not the maximum number of rounds reached has been reached (step S805). If the maximum number of rounds has not been reached, the main control program operates the opening and closing members in accordance with the winning conditions established as described above, and opens the corresponding big prize opening 2103 (step S6806), and the big hit game processing Exit.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6805 that the round game has already been performed for the maximum number of rounds, the main control program confirms that the winning condition has been established by stopping the operation of the accessory continuous operation device. The state is shifted to a state in which execution of the opening / closing operation (big hit game) of the opening / closing member executed as a condition is restricted.

  That is, in this case, the main control program is stored in the RAM of the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) separately from the big hit flag in, for example, step S6317 (see FIG. 258) by executing steps S6807 to S6812. Based on the winning type of the jackpot that is triggered by the execution of the jackpot game, the gaming state after the jackpot game is set, and then the jackpot game process is terminated.

  When it is determined in step S6805 that the round game has already been performed for the maximum number of rounds, the main control program first sets the big hit flag and the big hit game flag to OFF states (step S6807). Then, the winning type of the jackpot that is triggered by the jackpot game is determined (step S6808).

  Here, in step S6808, the main control program determines whether or not the winning type that activates the probability variation function (the jackpot symbol is, for example, 0, 1, 3, 5, 6, 7, 9). In other words, the main control program determines whether or not a probability change transition condition for determining whether or not a gaming state (probability variation state) in which a winning condition is relatively higher than that in the normal gaming state should be established. (Winning probability control means).

  The main control program sets the probability change state when the probability change transition condition is satisfied, and also sets a transfer destination command in the transmission information storage area as a command indicating a game state determined to be transferred next. Write. On the other hand, the main control program makes a transition to a gaming state other than the probability variation state if the probability variation transition condition is not satisfied (winning probability control means), and determines the gaming state that is determined to be transitioned next. As a command to represent, the migration destination command is written in the transmission information storage area. Thereafter, the main control program transmits the command written in the transmission information storage area to the peripheral control board 1510 in the command transmission process (S92).

  That is, if the main control program determines in step S6808 that the probability variation function is not selected, the main control program stops the operation of the condition device without activating both the probability variation function and the time shortening function (step S6808). S6811).

  On the other hand, when the main control program determines in step S6808 that it is the winning type that activates the probability variation function (so-called probability variation big hit), the main control program activates the probability variation function (step S6809). That is, the main control program determines whether or not a probability change transition condition for determining whether or not the probability variation state in which the winning condition is established is relatively higher than that in the normal gaming state should be satisfied. If the probability variation transition condition is satisfied, the probability that the winning condition is satisfied is shifted to a probability variation state that is set relatively higher than the normal gaming state, and the special symbol is displayed over a predetermined number of variation display times. While the probability variation state is continued while the variation is displayed, the state is shifted to a gaming state other than the probability variation state when the probability variation transition condition is not satisfied (winning probability control means).

  Next, the main control program activates the time reduction function (step S6810), and then stops the operation of the condition device (step S6811). When the time reduction function is activated, the main control program selects each hourly time variation pattern table including a variation pattern group in which the variation time is shortened from the start of the operation to the predetermined number of variations of the special symbol. Corresponding to the length of the variation pattern determined from each hourly variation pattern table, the variation time value of the special symbol is set to the timer shorter than the prescribed variation time value (shortening function control means) .

  This main control program writes a transfer destination command as a command representing a gaming state that is determined to be transferred next to the transmission information storage area, and then transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 in the command transmission process (S92). You may do it.

  At the same time, the main control program repeats the opening / closing operation of the pair of movable pieces 2105 arranged in the vicinity of the second start port 2004 according to a predetermined opening / closing pattern until the predetermined number of special symbol fluctuations is reached. The game ball flowing down in the vicinity of the pair of movable pieces 2105 is in a state where it can be easily received by the second starting port 2004. Finally, the main control program sets the processing flag to 0 (step S6812) and ends the big hit game processing.

  As described above, the main control program repeatedly opens and closes the big prize opening 2103 according to the winning mode corresponding to the winning type of the big hit until the number of rounds predetermined in step 805 is reached, and the big prize opening 2103 is opened. A prize ball movement instruction is given according to the number of game balls received in the special winning opening 2103 in the state.

  Here, in a general gaming machine, the game balls launched into the game area flow down between a number of nails provided in the game area, and some of them enter the start opening or the general start opening. On the other hand, the remaining game balls are discharged out of the game area through a discharge port (so-called out-out port) formed at the bottom of the game area. In such a gaming machine, at first glance, it is provided in the game area. Depending on the arrangement of the played objects and nails, it is conceivable that the circulation of the game ball is unlikely to be in a suitable state.

  However, in the present embodiment, as described above, this is solved by the following processing. First, when the winning condition is satisfied, the main control program activates at least one of the determined first special symbol display 1403 (variable display means) and second special symbol display 1405 (variable display means). Using the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol according to the fluctuation pattern determined as described above (variation pattern at the time of winning), and then the winning conditions when the fluctuation time at the time of winning according to the winning fluctuation pattern has passed A stop symbol corresponding to is displayed (symbol variation control means).

  Next, the main control program determines that the first special symbol display 1403 (variable display means) and the second special symbol display are determined when the winning condition is not satisfied and the time reduction function is activated. Using at least one of 1405 (variable display means), after controlling the change display of the special symbol in accordance with the above-determined time-short non-winning change pattern, the change time according to the short non-win-time change pattern (time short non-win time) The stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the special lottery is displayed on the occasion that the variation time has elapsed (symbol variation control means).

  Next, the main control program determines that the first special symbol indicator 1403 (variable display means) and the second special symbol indicator are determined when the winning condition is not satisfied and the time reduction function is not activated. Using at least one of 1405 (variable display means), after controlling the change display of the special symbol in accordance with the determined non-temporal non-winning fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation time (non-short time) according to the non-temporal non-winning fluctuation pattern The stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed when the non-winning time) elapses.

[14. Advance judgment processing]
The above-described effect control program analyzes the command received from the main control board 1310 and stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer in the above-described received command analysis processing (command receiving means), and the command is a special symbol 1 stored command. Or, if it is a special symbol 2 storage command, the reception of this command triggers the start hold display mode that implies the lottery result of the special lottery for new start memory information corresponding to the special symbol 1 storage command or the special symbol 2 storage command To the game board side effect display device 1600 (display means) (start hold control means).

  In other words, when the received command is a special symbol memory pre-reading effect command (special symbol 1 memory pre-reading effect command or special symbol 2 memory pre-reading effect command), the effect control program reads the pre-read included in the special symbol memory pre-reading effect command. Based on the information (for example, information on the stop symbol of the special symbol), for example, information suggesting the type of jackpot game is acquired, and based on the information, the special symbol 1 storage pre-reading effect command or the special symbol 2 is acquired. A start hold display mode that implies the lottery result of the special lottery corresponding to the new start memory information corresponding to the stored prefetch effect command is derived to the game board side effect display device 1600, and then corresponds to the new start memory information. Derivation of the start hold display mode ends (start hold control means) .

  Specifically, when the special symbol 1 storage pre-reading effect command or the special symbol 2 storage pre-reading effect command is received, the effect control program displays “starting hold display mode (for example,“ normal display ”as a hold display mode in which it is difficult to expect a big hit) A special start hold display mode from the beginning or midway of the above derivation (for example, a “super hot hold display mode” is shown as an example of a hold display mode that makes it very easy for a player to expect a big hit. Is performed) and the preceding determination control to be derived by the game board side effect display device 1600 is executed (advance determination control means).

[15. Another form of sound control by automatic channel method]
Next, details of another embodiment of the above-described sound control method will be described. In the sound control method described above, as the automatic channel method, the sound allocation to each channel is dynamically changed so that a lot of sounds can be played back by effectively utilizing the empty channels. Since diversified gaming machines in recent years select and output hundreds or thousands of sounds, the management of sound sources may be complicated.

  In addition, by superimposing and outputting a plurality of sounds, it is possible to perform a preliminary announcement effect redundantly or to enable various sound effects with a small number of sound sources. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 255 (C), the sound is divided into a plurality of groups, and a plurality of sounds and playback channels are dynamically assigned to each group, thereby reliably outputting the sounds. can do. In addition, there is an advantage that management is facilitated by dividing the sound into types.

  Furthermore, the sound includes a sound that should be output with priority over the effect sound such as a notification sound and a sound that is continuously output such as BGM. For these sounds, it is more convenient to fix the output channel than to dynamically assign the channel. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 255 (D), the sound that is output with priority or the sound that is always output is output in the fixed channel system, and the sound that changes in accordance with the result of the start winning or variation display is displayed. Output in automatic channel mode.

  By configuring as described above, it is possible to effectively use empty channels by the automatic channel method and to prevent unnecessary channel switching control from occurring by the fixed channel method. Moreover, since it becomes possible to classify according to the type of sound such as BGM, effect sound, and notification sound, management of effect data becomes easy.

  The sound control method shown in FIG. 255 (E) is a combination of the sound control methods shown in FIGS. 255 (C) and 255 (D), and has the advantages of each method. The sound control method shown in FIG. 255 (E) will be specifically described below.

[15-1. Sound control with fixed channel method and multiple automatic channel methods]
In the present embodiment, unlike the example described above, the number of channels in sound source control is 32 channels (ch), and includes channels that reproduce sound using a fixed channel method and channels that reproduce sound using an automatic channel method. . In addition, channels for reproducing sound by the automatic channel method are divided into two groups. Hereinafter, this will be specifically described with reference to FIG.

[15-1-1. Playback channel configuration]
FIG. 262 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration table of playback channels in sound source control in the present embodiment. As described above, the sound source control of this embodiment uses 32 channels, and a unique identifier (channel number) is assigned to each channel.

  The channel configuration table includes “automatic allocation” indicating whether or not automatic allocation is performed for channel numbers, “classification” indicating a group to which each channel belongs, and “purpose of use” of each channel. Note that “remarks” is added to the configuration table shown in FIG. 262 as a supplement.

  As shown in FIG. 262, the configuration of each channel of the present embodiment is that the channel numbers 0 to 7 are fixed channel systems, 8 to 19 are automatic channel systems, 20 to 23 are fixed channel systems, and 24 to 29. Is an automatic channel system, and 30 and 31 are fixed channel systems.

  Further, the channels of the automatic channel system with channel numbers 8 to 19 are “AUTO group 1”, and the channels of the automatic channel system with channel numbers 24 to 29 are “AUTO group 2”.

  In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, sound can be output in stereo, and in the case of stereo output, one pair (two) of channels is used. On the other hand, in the case of monaural output, one channel is used.

  A channel with channel number 0 (hereinafter referred to as “channel 0”, and each channel is represented by “channel” + “channel number”) is a channel used for the system. For example, it is a channel for outputting a sound that is used by all manufacturers regardless of a specific model. Specifically, it is the sound that is output while displaying the manufacturer's logo when the gaming machine is activated. Channel 1 is a channel that is paired with channel 0 when sound is output in stereo.

  Channel 2 is a channel used for outputting BGM during a game or waiting for a customer. Channel 3 is a channel that is paired with channel 2 when BGM is output in stereo. Similarly, channel 4 and channel 6 are channels used to output BGM, and channel 5 and channel 7 are channels that are paired with channel 4 and channel 6 when BGM is output in stereo. is there.

  In the present embodiment, not only stereo output but also a plurality of sounds are output at the same time, thereby improving the sound quality of BGM. Therefore, a plurality of (pair) channels can be used to output BGM, and BGM1 to BGM3 can be output simultaneously. Further, as will be described later, since BGM can be output also on channel 20 (and channel 21), four BGMs can be output simultaneously using a maximum of 8 channels (4 pairs). It has become.

  While the gaming machine is operating normally, the BGM is continuously output, and a predetermined sound source is repeatedly reproduced. For this reason, the channel for reproducing the BGM is continuously occupied, and it is more efficient to fix the channel in advance than to dynamically assign the channel. Therefore, in the sound source control in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the channel for reproducing the BGM is a fixed channel system, and only the BGM is output. As a result, the control can be simplified as compared with the case where the sound is reproduced only by the automatic channel method while preventing the generation of an empty channel.

  Channels 8 to 19 are channels for reproducing sound output when the notice effect is executed. In the notice effect, the sound selected by lottery according to the result of the variable display, the degree of expectation, the progress of the game, etc. is output each time. As described above, the channel can be effectively used by applying the automatic channel method to the sound output each time based on the predetermined condition.

  In this embodiment, unlike the example described above, channels to which the automatic channel method is applied are grouped. The group of channels that output the sound during the notice effect is AUTO group 1.

  When outputting a sound when the notice effect is executed, the peripheral control MPU 1530a first searches for an empty channel among the channels assigned to the AUTO group 1. In the case of stereo, empty channels for two channels are searched, and in principle, continuous channels are set as output channels. At this time, if there is an empty channel, setting is made so as to output the sound designated from the empty channel. On the other hand, when there is no empty channel, based on a predetermined condition, the used channel is released and a new sound is output, or the output of the designated sound is stopped. The detailed procedure for channel selection will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Channels 20 and 21 are channels to which the fixed channel method is applied. The channel 21 is a channel that is paired with the channel 20 during stereo output. Channels 20 and 21 are channels for outputting BGM output or effect sound. This is used when four sounds are superimposed and BGM is output, or when a specific performance sound is output. The specific effect sound is, for example, a sound output in an effect other than the notice effect that is output by the automatic channel method.

  The channels 22 and 23 are channels to which the fixed channel method is applied, as in the channels 20 and 21. The channel 23 is a channel that is paired with the channel 22 when stereo output is performed. Channels 22 and 23 are channels for outputting a hold sound. The on-hold sound output on the channels 22 and 23 is, for example, a sound that is output regardless of the lottery result at the time of starting winning, or a sound that is output with priority such as when a big hit is confirmed. Note that sounds based on the lottery result at the time of starting winning are output from channels 24 to 29 as will be described later.

  Channels 24 to 29 are channels to which the automatic channel method is applied. Channels 24 to 29 play sounds that are output based on the degree of expectation according to the lottery result at the time of starting winning, or sounds that are output when the hold display changes at the start of fluctuation. By outputting channels 22 and 23 in a fixed channel manner, it is possible to reliably output the sound at the time of jackpot determination even if there is no empty channel in channels 24 to 29, and draw the player's attention. Can do.

  Channels 30 and 31 are channels to which the fixed channel method is applied. Channels 30 and 31 are channels used for the system. The channel 30 outputs a change sound when the volume is changed and a notification sound when the game medium is paid out. Also, the channel 31 outputs a notification sound when an abnormality occurs in the gaming machine. As described above, the fixed channel method in which the output destination is secured in advance is applied so that the notification sound related to the operation of the gaming machine and the notification sound when an abnormality occurs are reliably transmitted to the outside.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a fixed channel system channel is assigned when output is continuously continued as in BGM or when it is necessary to output reliably as in an abnormal alarm sound. On the other hand, the automatic channel method is applied to the sound that is output flexibly according to the game state, etc., thereby preventing the sound from being output while there is an empty channel, and a channel with a finite number of channels. It can be used effectively.

[15-1-2. Free channel search processing]
Next, a procedure for searching for an empty channel for sound source control according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 263 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of an empty channel search process in the case where control for outputting sound according to the present embodiment is executed. FIG. 244 describes the case where there is one AUTO group, but FIG. 263 is different in that it has a plurality of AUTO groups. Note that description of common processing is omitted.

  In the empty channel search process shown in FIG. 263, it is determined whether or not an empty channel exists in the same group of channels when the new sound is in the automatic channel system in the processes of steps S1108 and S1120. That is, even if different groups of channels are available, if the same channel group is not available, the results of step S1108 and step S1120 are “No”.

  Further, in the empty channel search process shown in FIG. 263, when there is no empty channel, the reproduction of the sound output from the channel selected based on a predetermined condition is stopped, and a new sound is output from the channel (step). S1118, step S1132). Hereinafter, a channel selection condition for stopping sound reproduction will be described with reference to FIG. The production in which the output of the sound is stopped is continuously executed without stopping the image display and the operation of the accessory.

  FIG. 264 is a diagram illustrating an example of a condition for selecting a channel for switching sound output (stopping or releasing sound reproduction) when a channel is not empty when a new sound is output in the present embodiment. . As a specific selection condition, attributes of a sound being reproduced and a new sound are compared, and a sound with higher importance is prioritized. The attributes include, as will be described later, the playback time, whether the output is stereo or monaural, the volume, the amount of change in the sound being played back, and the sound playback time at the time of channel selection, Includes remaining playback time. Each condition will be specifically described below.

  Condition 1 selects a channel based on the playback time (elapsed time) from the start of playback. For example, as shown in steps S1114 and S1130 in FIG. 244, a channel having a long reproduction time is selected. Thus, by selecting a channel having a long elapsed time since the start of reproduction, the output of the effect sound that has been sufficiently executed is terminated, and the player can easily recognize that a new effect has been executed.

  Condition 2 selects a channel based on the playback time of the entire performance. For example, an effect with a shorter playback time is selected because an effect with a higher expectation can be achieved with an effect with a longer playback time. On the other hand, the influence on the subsequently executed effects may be minimized by canceling the effects having a long playback time. In this case, the determination is made based on the preset total playback time without depending on the playback time from the start of playback.

  Condition 1 and condition 2 are conditions related to the playback time. In addition to this, for example, the sound output of a short (or long) remaining effect time may be stopped. Further, the channel may be selected in accordance with the elapsed time from the start of reproduction with respect to the entire production time, that is, the progression ratio of the production. By setting the conditions in this way, the sound output can be stopped at the initial stage or the final stage of the production.

  Condition 3 selects a channel based on the volume of the sound being played. For example, an effect in which a sound with a large volume is output can be a highly important effect, and therefore, a channel with a small volume of sound being output is preferentially selected. Conversely, a channel with a large volume of sound being output may be preferentially selected and the player may be made aware that a new performance will be executed.

  Condition 4 selects a channel based on a change in the volume of the sound being played back. For example, it is assumed that an effect in which a sound to be faded in or faded out is output can be a more important effect, and a channel with a small amount of volume change is preferentially selected. Conversely, a channel with a large volume change may be preferentially selected to reduce the load of sound control.

  Condition 5 selects a channel on the basis of a dynamic change of the sound image localization position (pan pot). For example, a channel with less change in the dynamic sound image localization position can be considered to be a more important performance that can produce a more three-dimensional sound effect by changing the left and right sound output of a stereo speaker. Select with priority. On the other hand, it is possible to preferentially select a channel with a large change in the dynamic sound image localization position to reduce the load of sound control.

  Condition 6 selects a channel based on a sound number (index). For example, a large (small) number is selected. At this time, the priority order may be associated with the sound number.

  Condition 7 selects a channel depending on whether the sound is monaural or stereo. For example, a channel that outputs a monaural sound is selected on the assumption that an effect output with stereo sound with good sound quality has a higher expectation. On the other hand, since the monaural sound uses only one channel, if the number of empty channels is not enough even if the channels that output the monaural sound are opened, a channel that outputs stereo sound is selected to increase the number of empty channels. It may be.

  Condition 8 selects a channel depending on whether or not volume adjustment is permitted. For example, an effect set so that volume adjustment cannot be performed may be higher in importance, or an effect set so that volume adjustment can be performed may be higher in importance.

  In addition to the above-described conditions, for example, in the case of the same priority, a new sound reproduction request may be discarded without switching channels. In addition, by assigning unique priorities to all sounds, the production data may be set so as not to have the same priorities.

  In the table shown in FIG. 264, the conditions from 1 to 8 are shown as an example, but these conditions may be applied alone or a plurality of conditions may be applied in combination. For example, a threshold value may be set for each condition and a channel satisfying more conditions may be selected, or a priority may be set for each condition and the conditions applied sequentially.

[15-1-3. Volume control]
Next, an example in which channel assignment control is performed based on priority assigned to newly output sound will be described. Here, an example in which three types of notices (first notices A to C) are executed in the first half of the change will be described. FIG. 265 is a timing chart showing an example of an effect for explaining the sound control of the present embodiment, where (A) shows the timing at which the sound effects are reproduced, and (B) shows the channel through which each sound effect is output. ing. FIG. 266 is a diagram showing an example of the priority order of sound effects in the effect example of the present embodiment.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 265, the first half notice_A is generated when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable display. At this time, when an instruction instruction for the effect button is displayed on the display screen and the player operates the effect button, the first half notice_B is generated. Further, the first half notice C is generated while the first half notice_A and the first half notice_B are being executed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 266, the priority order of the first half notice_A is 03, the priority order of the first half notice_B is 05, and the priority order of the first half notice_C is 20. Further, since the volume suppression flag is set in the first half notice_B and the first half notice_C, when the announcement effect with a low priority is executed repeatedly in the same group, the volume is set based on the suppressed volume value. Reduced.

  The contents of each notice will be described. For example, the first notice_A is an effect in which a character appears. A character appears on the display screen, and sound effects are output in stereo from channels 08 and 09.

  The first half notice_B is an effect executed by the operation of the effect button, and a button press sound is reproduced when the button is operated (channels 18 and 19), and the first half notice_B is started, and the effect from the channels 10 and 11 in stereo. Sound is output.

  In the first half notice_C, along with the output of the sound effect (channels 12 and 13), the screen display is stopped for a predetermined time, and a sound having a lower priority than the first half notice_C, specifically, other notice effects and BGM are temporarily displayed. The sound is muted (blackout effect). Thereafter, when the effect screen is displayed, output of sound effects other than the first half notice_C is resumed.

  Here, the volume change of the sound effect of each notice effect will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 267 is a timing chart showing an example of the volume change of the sound effect in the first half variation of the present embodiment, where (A) shows the output timing of the effect sound and (B) shows the volume change of each effect sound. The horizontal axis represents the time axis, and the vertical axis of (B) represents the volume (volume).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the variable display is started from time t0, and the first half notice_A is started at time t1. At this time, it is output at the preset volume V_A of the effect sound effect of the first half notice_A.

  Thereafter, the operation instruction of the effect button is displayed on the effect screen, and the first half notice_B is executed by pressing the effect button (time t2). At this time, the button press sound of the effect button is reproduced with the volume V_T, and the effect sound effect of the first half notice_B is output with the volume V_B. Also, since the priority order of the first half notice_B is higher than the priority order of the first half notice_A, the volume of the sound effect of the first half notice_A is suppressed to 50%.

  Note that if the priority order of the notice effect that is executed later is lower than or the same as the priority order of the notice effect that is being executed, the volume does not have to be lowered, and even if there are few sound effects that are output at the same time It is not necessary to lower the volume. Further, the volume may be lowered only in the case of a combination of specific notice effects.

  Further, when the first half notice C is executed at time t3, the screen is darkened until time t5, and sound effects other than the first half notice_C are muted. At this time, the sound effect of the first half notice_C is output with the volume V_C.

  In addition, the output of the effect sound effects of the first half notice_A and the first half notice_B that are muted from time t3 is resumed at time t5. Originally, the button pressing sound is output until time t4, but since t5> t4, reproduction ends at time t3.

  Thereafter, the effects of the first half notice_A and the first half notice_B are continued until a preset end time (time t6, t7). Furthermore, the first half notice_C ends at time t8, and the first half of the change ends.

  Note that during the period in which the effect sound is muted, the output of the effect sound may be continued with the volume set to 0, or the output of the effect sound may be stopped. When the volume is set to 0, the volume (subvolume) for each channel may be set to 0, the main volume for controlling the volume of the overall effect sound effect is set to 0, and the sound effect of the first half notice_C is output. May be bypassed and output so as not to be affected by the control by the main volume. Even if the output of other sound effects is suppressed by the first half notice_C, sound effects, warning sounds, and notification sounds with higher priorities are output.

  As described above, when outputting a new sound and reducing the volume of the sound being played, instead of lowering the volume of the sound specified by the volume suppression flag, etc., the volume of the sound being played on all channels is reduced. Alternatively, the volume of the sound being played back on the same channel may be lowered in the channel method (fixed channel method, automatic channel method). Further, the volume of the sound being played back on the channels in the same group (AUTO group) may be lowered.

[15-1-4. effect]
By configuring as described above, in this embodiment, it is possible to preferentially output a sound having a high priority. Sounds with a high priority are, for example, sounds to be surely transmitted to players and game hall employees, such as notification sounds and warning sounds, and the expectation that the result of variable display is a big hit is high. Sound effects to increase the expectation of the game, or sound effects that have a high stage effect and can improve the interest of the game.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, it becomes possible to easily manage production data related to production sound effects by classifying each channel used for sound source control into a plurality of groups. As a result, it is possible to improve development efficiency, for example, by suppressing the occurrence of bugs by conducting systematic tests. In addition, by making a stable game possible, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, channels of the automatic channel method are classified into a plurality of groups. Specifically, there are a group (AUTO group 1) for outputting a sound effect of a notice effect and a group (AUTO group 2) for outputting a sound effect related to holding. The number of sound effects of the notice effect is enormous compared to the number of channels, and a plurality of effect sound effects can be reproduced simultaneously. In particular, during the first half of the change, there may be a case where output of the effect sound exceeding the allocated number of channels may be requested by executing a pre-reading notice of the pending change together with the change notice. In such a case, it is possible to maximize the fun of the game by outputting the low-priority effect sound effect while replacing the high-priority effect sound effect in the channel assigned to the AUTO group 1. .

  Furthermore, it is desirable that the effect of notifying the expectation level by changing the hold display of the variable display and accompanying the output of the effect sound effect can greatly increase the player's expectation and be executed reliably. . In this embodiment, by outputting the effect sound effect relating to such a hold display (hold sound) from the channels belonging to the AUTO group 2, it is possible to reproduce more reliably independently of the notice effect related to the variable display. it can. Also, unlike the notice effect with variable display, since the number of effect sound effects that are output simultaneously does not greatly exceed the number of channels assigned to the AUTO group 2, the output of effect sound effects is stopped. The possibility of being reduced. Moreover, even if it is a case where it is canceled, the output of the effect sound with a low priority is only canceled. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game by reliably executing a highly effective effect that increases the player's expectation.

  In this embodiment, a channel to which the automatic channel method is applied and a channel to which the fixed channel method is applied are mixed. As described above, the automatic channel method makes effective use of a finite number of channels by searching for available channels, and gives priority to output effects and high-priority sounds by setting priorities. Is possible. On the other hand, the fixed channel method is applied when a sound is continuously output as in BGM or when a sound is preferentially output in order to notify a malfunction of a gaming machine or an illegal act. As described above, by applying a channel method suitable for the characteristics and use of sound, each channel can be used effectively, and further appropriate control according to the sound output status can be performed. For example, in the control for outputting BGM, it is only necessary to output a sound to a pre-assigned channel regardless of the gaming state. In the control for outputting an alarm sound, a designated channel is not searched without searching for an empty channel. The sound should be output directly to. On the other hand, as described above, in the automatic channel method, it is possible to make the best use of empty channels and to preferentially output a sound with a high effect.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, by controlling the volume for each effect sound effect (channel), it is possible to emphasize and execute an effect with a high priority. Also, the effect being executed can be continued while the volume is lowered without interruption. At this time, the volume can be returned to the original volume as long as the previously executed effect with the lower priority is continuing even after the effect with the higher priority is completed. Further, as described in the embodiment, by stopping other effects and executing a specific effect alone, it is possible to make the effect of the specific effect stand out. Thus, in this embodiment, the variation of production can be increased and the interest of a game can be improved.

[15-2. Modification of sound control with fixed channel method and automatic channel method]
In the sound control method described above, the number of channels for which the automatic channel method is set and the number of channels for which the fixed channel method is set are preset. In this modification, the automatic channel method is used. A modification in which the number of channels set and the number of channels for which the fixed channel method is set are variable will be described.

[15-2-1. Example of production]
When the number of channels is variable, for example, there is a case where it is desired to output more than the number of channels to which the same type of sound can be temporarily allocated. For example, in the case of a gaming machine capable of executing an effect including a plurality of scenes, the screen is divided into a plurality of (for example, nine divisions), and different scenes are displayed on each divided screen. At that time, it is conceivable to output BGM corresponding to each scene. FIG. 268 is a diagram showing a screen configuration example of effects in a modification of the present embodiment. The production example shown in FIG. 268 is a notice production in the latter half of the fluctuation after the occurrence of reach.

  In this modification, the display screen is divided into nine, and an effect (multi-screen effect) for displaying different scenes on each screen is executed. Then, any one scene is selected, and an effect corresponding to the selected scene is executed. At this time, BGM (9 types) of each scene is output simultaneously. The scene may be selected by lottery or selected by the player.

  The gaming machine of this modification uses 32 channels in sound source control, as in the above-described embodiment. Also, the default channel assignment is the same as the arrangement shown in FIG. Therefore, it is possible to output four types (eight channels) of BGM at the same time. However, in the multi-screen effect in this modification, it is necessary to output nine types of BGM at the same time. Therefore, in this modification, a channel for outputting BGM is reassigned, and the channel arrangement is rearranged.

[15-2-2. Channel arrangement]
FIG. 269 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration table of playback channels in sound source control in a modification of the present embodiment, where (A) shows a default configuration, and (B) shows a configuration when a multi-screen effect is executed. The default configuration in FIG. 269A is the same as the arrangement shown in FIG. 262 as described above.

  In this modification, when the multi-screen effect is started, the channel arrangement shown in FIG. 269 (A) is changed to the arrangement shown in FIG. 269 (B). Specifically, a fixed channel system channel for outputting BGM is added (channels 8 to 17), and the number of channels adopting the automatic channel system assigned to the AUTO group 1 is reduced. This is because even if a different notice effect is executed during execution of the multi-screen effect, it is difficult for the player to recognize.

  After the start of the multi-screen effect, all BGM corresponding to each scene is reproduced while all scenes are displayed. At this time, if all BGMs are output at a normal volume, the sound volume becomes too high, and therefore the sound is output with the sound volume set lower than normal. When a scene is selected, a notice effect (second half notice) based on the selected scene is executed, the BGM volume of the selected scene is set to a normal volume, and playback of other BGMs is terminated. . When the player selects a scene, for example, the screen divided by the operation unit provided in the gaming machine is selected, and the BGM of the selected scene is changed to another scene until the scene is determined. The volume may be made larger than the BGM of the scene, or the BGM volume of another scene may be made smaller.

[15-2-3. Volume control]
FIG. 270 is a timing chart showing an example of the volume change of the sound effect in the latter half of the variation of the modification of the present embodiment, where (A) is the output timing of the effect sound effect, and (B) is the volume change of each effect sound effect. Indicates.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 270, the channel arrangement is changed from the default state (FIG. 269 (A)) to the multi-screen effect arrangement (FIG. 269 (B) at the timing when execution of the multi-screen effect is determined (for example, at the start of fluctuation). )). After the end of the first half fluctuation (time t11), reach occurs and the second half fluctuation starts. After the start of the second half fluctuation, the multi-screen effect is started (time t12). At this time, as shown in FIG. 268, the display screen is divided, different scenes are displayed in the divided display areas, and BGM corresponding to each scene is output.

  When the multi-screen effect is started, BGM corresponding to the purpose of use of each channel after the change to the arrangement for multi-screen effect (FIG. 269 (B)) is output. At this time, the volume V_2 is smaller than the normal volume V_1.

  Thereafter, when a scene for which the effect is to be continued is selected (time t13), the BGM volume corresponding to the selected scene is set to the normal volume V_1, and the output of the other BGM is stopped. In the effect example shown in FIG. 270, scene 5 is selected, and the volume of BGM_0-5 is set to the normal volume V_1. At this time, the display area corresponding to the scene 5 is displayed on the entire display screen, and the second half notice_5 corresponding to the scene 5 is executed.

  Note that, after the end of the multi-screen effect, the channel for outputting BGM_0-5 may be changed from channels 10 and 11 to channels 2 and 3, and the channel arrangement may be returned to the default. When the output of BGM from the channels 10 and 11 is continued as in this modification, the channel may be returned to the default arrangement at the start of the next fluctuation.

  Further, the channel arrangement may be changed at a necessary timing. For example, in this modification, the channel arrangement may be changed immediately before the execution of the multi-screen effect is started, or may be changed at the start of the second half fluctuation.

  Furthermore, instead of changing the arrangement of the channels according to the contents of the effect, it may be changed when the gaming state (for example, an effect mode such as a big hit state, a short time state, or a background change) changes.

[15-2-4. effect]
By configuring as described above, the number of fixed channels (corresponding to “variable fixed ch” in FIG. 255 (F)) for performing sound control by the fixed channel method and the automatic channels for performing sound control by the automatic channel method (FIG. 255 (F) “corresponding to“ variable AUTOch ”) can be flexibly changed according to the type and number of sounds to be reproduced. As a result, more notification sounds, BGM, or sound effects can be reproduced depending on the situation. For example, in a situation where no game is played, more types of notification sounds are output. Flexible measures such as increasing the number of BGM and sound effects to be reproduced for production by suppressing the number of reproducible notification sounds.

[16. Control over sound being output on other channels]
In the embodiment described above, an example has been described in which channels are grouped and output sound is managed by being associated with each group. Also, if the number of sounds that can be assigned at the same time in the same group is exceeded, the output of the sound that is sounding is stopped based on the predetermined condition and a new sound is output, or the output of a new sound is stopped. Then, the control for the sound being output belonging to the same group has been described. Here, a case will be described in which when a sound is newly assigned to a channel for output, control is performed such as changing the volume of the sound being output on another channel.

  In the state before the occurrence of reach after the start of the special symbol variation (during the first half variation), the output of the sound of the BGM being played and other effects is regulated (muted) for a predetermined time together with the output of the predetermined sound effect. As a representative effect for performing such control, there is a blackout effect that regulates the output of sound effects and darkens the screen. In the blackout effect, after the elapse of a predetermined time after the output of the sound effect is restricted, the darkening of the screen is canceled, and the sound output by the BGM or other effects is resumed, whereby the newly output sound (the sound concerned) The effect including the output of the player is conspicuous and the player's attention can be drawn to increase the player's sense of expectation for the change.

  In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which assignment of a new sound to an empty channel is not performed, but the assignment of a channel from which sound effects are output is not canceled and a new sound is assigned. In this case, in order to return the output of BGM or the like to the state before regulation, the volume (volume) may be returned without considering processing such as reassigning the sound to the channel. Hereinafter, specific embodiments will be described.

[16-1. Control when sounds from different groups are being output]
In the present embodiment, channels are grouped and a priority order is set for each group. A description will be given of a case in which sound is output from a channel belonging to a group having a higher priority when a sound is output from a channel belonging to a group having a lower priority.

[16-1-1. Volume control table by channel group]
FIG. 271 is a diagram illustrating an example of a volume control table for each channel group indicating the priority of volume (volume) control for each group in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, each channel is defined as a fixed channel (fixed channel) 1, a fixed channel (fixed channel) 2, an automatic channel group (AUTO group) 1, an automatic channel group (AUTO group) 2, and an automatic channel group (AUTO group). It is divided into three groups of three.

  For each group, a group volume priority order and a suppression volume value are set. The group volume priority indicates the priority between groups, and the smaller the numerical value, the higher the priority. In this embodiment, a numerical value of 1 or more is set, and “1” has the highest priority.

  The suppression volume value is a numerical value indicating an aspect in which the volume of another sound being played is changed when the sound is played on a channel belonging to a group having a low priority. Specifically, when “−1” is set, the sound reproduction is continued without changing the other sound being reproduced. When “0” is set, control is performed to mute other sounds being reproduced. When a numerical value other than “0” is set, for example, when “50” is set, the volume of the other sound being reproduced is suppressed to 50%. That is, when a numerical value from 1 to 100 is set, the volume is changed with the unit as%. It should be noted that control may be performed so that the volume is set larger than usual by setting a numerical value of 100 or more.

  Further, each set value will be described with reference to FIG. 271. Also in this embodiment, channels of the fixed channel method and the automatic channel method are mixed as in the above-described embodiment. In the fixed channel, a sound such as a notification sound or BGM that is output with priority or is always output is assigned. In the automatic channel, grouped effect sounds are assigned according to the type and importance of the production.

  In fixed ch1, the group volume priority is set to “1”, which is the highest. Further, since “0” is set in the suppression volume value, when sound is reproduced with the fixed ch1, all other sounds being reproduced are muted. The sound reproduced by the fixed ch1 is a notification sound for notifying outside such as a player or a game hall employee as shown as a reference reproduction sound. This may be an alarm sound for notifying that a failure has occurred in the gaming machine, or an alarm sound for clogging a ball or the like. That is, when a sound is output from the fixed ch1, because of an illegal act or a failure, the output of the effect sound is stopped and only the notification sound is output. Further, while the notification sound is output from the fixed ch1 having the highest priority, the output of other sounds having a relatively low priority is restricted.

  In the fixed channel 2, in FIG. 271, the lowest group volume priority is set to “4”. In addition, since “−1” is set in the suppression volume value, even if sound reproduction is started on the fixed ch 2, other sounds being reproduced are not affected. Sound played on fixed channel 2 is mainly BGM in games, and in normal games, production effect sounds that draw the player's attention in response to the execution of special symbol variation display while BGM is being output, etc. Is output.

  In AUTO group 1, the group volume priority is set to “2”. In addition, since “0” is set as the suppression volume value, when sound is reproduced in the AUTO group 1, all sounds being reproduced other than the notification sound output from the fixed ch1 are muted. That is, the sound output in the AUTO group 1 is output with the highest priority in production, and other sounds are muted and output alone.

  Specific sounds output in the AUTO group 1 include a jackpot sound, a blackout sound effect, a V winning sound, etc., as shown in the reference playback sound. The big hit definite sound is a sound for notifying that the result of the variation display is a big hit at a predetermined timing such as at the time of starting winning a prize, and is a production effect sound that maximizes the expectation for the player. The V winning sound is a sound for notifying that a game ball has won a prize in the V zone and, for example, it has been determined that the game will shift to a high probability state. Can be made.

  The blackout sound effect is a sound effect that is output in a silent state while suppressing the output of other effect sound effects when executing the blackout effect described above. At this time, the display of the effect screen is also darkened. At this time, an effect of emitting a flash on the screen may be executed together with the output of the blackout sound effect. The jackpot sound and V winning sound are output in a short time after the sound is output in order to suppress the output of other sounds so that the player does not miss the output of these sounds. Is resumed. On the other hand, in the blackout sound effect, the player's attention is concentrated on the blackout effect by setting the sound effect sound of another effect not being output for a predetermined time after the blackout sound effect is output. In addition, after execution of the blackout effect, an effect linked to the blackout effect may be executed with the change. For example, the blackout effect is executed with the first half change, and the corresponding effect is executed with the second half change. It may be.

  In AUTO group 2, the group volume priority is set to “3”. In addition, since “50” is set as the suppression volume value, when sounds are played in the AUTO group 2, all sounds being played in the groups whose priority is “4” or less are halved (50% Output). For example, the BGM output from the fixed channel 2 has the group volume priority “4” as described above, so that the volume is halved and the sound of the AUTO group 2 is output at the normal volume. Thereby, it is possible to execute an effect that draws the player's attention while continuing the flow of the game without completely muting the BGM. Specific sounds output by the AUTO group 2 include, for example, a first half notice sound effect and a second half notice effect sound.

  In AUTO group 3, the group volume priority is set to “2”. Similarly to the case of AUTO group 2, since “50” is set as the suppression volume value, when sound is played back in AUTO group 3, a group whose priority is “3” or lower is being played back. All sounds are halved. For example, when a notice sound effect is output from the AUTO group 2, the volume of the notice sound effect is halved. At this time, if the volume of the BGM output from the fixed channel 2 has already been halved, it may be continued without changing the volume, or the volume may be halved (1/4 of the original volume). May be.

  Specific sounds output by the AUTO group 3 include, for example, a hold winning sound at the time of start winning, a hold changing sound indicating that the hold display has changed, a button pressing sound for notifying that the effect button has been pressed, and the like. is there. In the present embodiment, when the group volume priority order is the same, the sound is output as it is with a normal volume. Therefore, even if the AUTO group 2 blackout effect is executed and the output of BGM or the like is restricted, sounds belonging to the AUTO group 3 are output. For example, when a game ball enters a start winning opening, a pending winning sound is output even when a blackout effect is being executed.

[16-1-2. Group volume control processing]
Next, the volume control procedure in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 272 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of group volume control processing for performing sound control corresponding to the group to which the output sound belongs according to this embodiment. The group volume control process is executed in the sound data creation process in the peripheral control unit steady process (FIG. 230, step S1030) of the peripheral control unit power-on process. The group volume control process will be described below.

  When the group volume control process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1530a first determines whether or not there is a new sound reproduction request (step S1401). If there is no new sound reproduction request (the result of step S1401 is “No”), the processing from step S1420 is executed.

  On the other hand, when there is a request for playing a new sound (the result of step S1401 is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 1530a identifies a channel group from the sound number of the sound that has been requested to be played, and a volume control table for each channel group. From FIG. 271, the suppression volume value and the group volume priority order corresponding to the channel group are acquired (step S1402).

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 1530a determines whether or not the acquired suppression volume value is “−1” (no suppression control) (step S1403). When the acquired suppression volume value is “−1” (the result of step S1403 is “Yes”), that is, when control is not performed on the sound being reproduced, the processing from step S1406 is executed.

  When the acquired suppression volume value is not “−1” (the result of step S1403 is “No”), that is, when control is performed on the sound being played back, the peripheral control MPU 1530a further controls the sound requested to be played back. It is determined whether the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the group volume priority are registered in the work area (step S1404). When the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the group volume priority order have been registered (the result of step S1404 is “Yes”), the processes after step S1406 are executed.

  When the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the group volume priority are not registered (the result of step S1404 is “No”), the peripheral control MPU 1530a determines the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the group volume priority of the sound requested to be reproduced. The rank is held in the work area (step S1405). In this work area, the parameters (sound number, suppression volume value, and group volume priority) of the sound with the highest priority currently being reproduced are recorded.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 1530a determines whether or not there is a sound that is already being reproduced (step S1406). If there is no sound being reproduced (the result of step S1406 is “No”), a predetermined volume value is set to the volume of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made (step S1407). On the other hand, if there is a sound that is already being reproduced (the result of step S1406 is “Yes”), sound control is performed based on the parameters stored in the work area and the parameters of the new sound in the processing after step S1410.

  The control for the sound being reproduced will be described. First, the peripheral control MPU 1530a determines whether or not a sound parameter for suppressing the output of the sound being reproduced has been registered in the work area (step S1410). If the sound parameter that suppresses the output of the sound being reproduced has not been registered (the result of step S1410 is “No”), the output of the sound requested to be newly reproduced is set (step S1407).

  The sound control executed after step S1410 will be described. When the sound for suppressing the output of the sound being reproduced has been registered (the result of step S1410 is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 1530a sends a new reproduction request. The group volume priority order of the sound is compared with the group volume priority order already stored in the work area (step S1411).

  If the group volume priority of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made is lower than the group volume priority already held in the work area (the result of step S1411 is “<”), the peripheral control MPU 1530a makes a new reproduction request. The volume of the sound with the noise is reduced based on the suppression volume value of the work area (step S1414).

  If the group volume priority of the sound for which a new playback request has been made is higher than the group volume priority stored in the work area (the result of step S1411 is “>”), the peripheral control MPU 1530a performs the new playback. The requested sound number, suppression volume value, and group volume priority are overwritten in the work area (step S1412), and the volume of the sound requested for new playback is set to a predetermined volume value (step S1413). ).

  Furthermore, if the group volume priority of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made is equal to the group volume priority held in the work area (the result of step S1411 is “=”), the peripheral control MPU 1530a While maintaining the content, the volume of the sound requested to be newly reproduced is set to a predetermined volume value (step S1413).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 1530a determines whether or not the group volume priority of the sound that is already being reproduced is lower than the group volume priority that has been recorded in the work area (step S1415). If the group volume priority of the sound being played is lower than the group volume priority recorded in the work area (the result of step S1415 is “Yes”), the volume of the sound being played is recorded in the work area. The volume is reduced based on the suppression volume value (step S1416).

  When the processing of step S1415 and step S1416 is executed for all the sounds being played back (step S1417), or after the processing of step S1407 ends, the peripheral control MPU 1530a determines that the suppression volume value and the group volume priority are set as work. It is determined whether or not it has been registered in the area (step S1420). If the suppression volume value and the group volume priority order are not already registered in the work area (the result of step S1420 is “No”), this process ends.

  When the suppression volume value and the group volume priority are registered in the work area (the result of step S1420 is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 1530a does not reproduce the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area. It is determined whether or not the processing has been completed (step S1421). If the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area has not been completed (the result of step S1421 is “No”), this process ends.

  When the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area is completed (the result of step S1421 is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 1530a displays the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the group volume priority order in the work area. (Step S1422). Finally, all the sounds being reproduced are returned to the original volume values determined in advance (steps S1423 and S1424), and this process is terminated.

  The above is the processing for controlling the volume of the sound being reproduced when the reproduction of a new sound is requested in the present embodiment. Next, sound volume control will be described in time series. FIG. 273 is a timing chart for explaining the procedure for controlling the volume according to this embodiment in time series. (A) shows the execution timing of the production, and (B) shows the volume of each production. FIG. 273 describes an example in which a notice effect and a blackout effect are executed.

  When the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the game is started and the normal BGM is output on the fixed channel (fixed ch2). As shown in FIG. 271, for the fixed channel 2, the group volume priority is “4” and the suppression volume value is “−1”. Since the normal BGM has a suppression volume value “−1”, the sound is reproduced without recording the normal BGM sound number, group volume priority, and suppression volume value in the work area.

  When the game ball wins the start winning opening (here, sound output at the time of the winning winning is omitted), the special symbol variation display (dynamic display) is started, and the first half notice A is started (time t21). The effect sound effect of the first half notice A is output on the channels belonging to the AUTO group 2, the group volume priority is “3”, and the suppression volume value is “50” (the result of step S1402 and step S1403 is “No”). . Since no parameters were recorded in the work area at the start of the first half notice (the result of step S1404 is “No”), the parameters of the effect sound effect of the first half notice are recorded in the work area (step S1405).

  At the start of the first half notice A, the normal BGM is output (the result of step S1406 is “Yes”), and the sound number of the effect sound of the first half notice A is registered in the work area (the result of step S1410 is the result). “Yes”). At this time, the group priority of the sound requested for new reproduction and the group priority of the work area are the same (the result of step S1411 is “=”). A predetermined volume value is set (step S1413).

  At this time, since the normal BGM is being played back and the group volume priority is lower than the effect sound effect of the first half variation (result of step S1415 is “Yes”), the sound is based on the effect sound effect parameter of the first half notice A. Is suppressed (step S1416). Specifically, the normal BGM volume is reduced (suppressed) to an output of 50%.

  Thereafter, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, a blackout effect is executed (time t22). The sound effect of the blackout effect is output on a channel belonging to AUTO group 1, the group volume priority is “2”, and the suppression volume value is “0” (step S1402). At this time, the parameter of the first half notice A is recorded in the work area, but since the group volume priority is higher in the blackout effect (the result of step S1411 is “>”), the content of the work area is changed to the blackout effect. (Step S1412), and a predetermined volume value is set to the volume of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made (step S1413).

  Furthermore, since the group priority of the effect sound of the normal BGM and the first half notice A being played is lower than the group priority of the effect sound of the blackout effect (the result of step S1415 is “Yes”), these The volume of the sound effect is reduced (step S1416). The blackout effect is muted because the suppression volume value is zero.

  Further, the second half notice B is started during execution of the blackout effect (time t23). At this time, since the group volume priority order of the second half notice B is lower than the group volume priority order of the blackout effect (the result of step S1411 is “<”), the second half notice B is started in a silenced state, Continue until is finished.

  Thereafter, when the game ball wins the start winning opening, a reserved winning sound is output (time t24). The reserved winning sound is output on a channel belonging to the AUTO group 3, and the group volume priority is “2” and the suppression volume value is “50”. In the present embodiment, when the group volume priority order is the same (the result of step S1411 is “=”), the parameters recorded in the work area are maintained, and output in a predetermined volume. Therefore, even if the blackout effect is being executed, the pending winning sound is output as usual.

  When the blackout effect ends (time t26), the blackout effect parameter recorded in the work area is deleted (step S1422), and the restricted volume is returned to the predetermined volume (step S1423). . Specifically, the volumes of the normal BGM, the first half notice A, and the second half notice B are returned to predetermined volumes. Thereafter, the output of the sound of the first half notice A and the second half notice B ends (time t27, t28).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, while a sound effect having a high group priority is being output, a specific effect can be emphasized by suppressing the output of a sound effect having a low group priority. Furthermore, volume control based on the suppression volume value allows the player to recognize that multiple performances are in progress at the same time. By setting the priority higher, it is possible to execute the effect without impairing the effect.

  In addition, when a new high priority sound is output and the output of the effect sound during playback is suppressed, in the embodiment described above, the volume of the effect sound during playback is immediately output based on the suppression volume value. The volume of other effect sound is gradually lowered to the target value (volume based on the suppression volume value) and faded out from the timing when the sound with high priority is output. Also good. In this case, the start value (the volume currently being played) and the time to reach the target value, the amount of change may be specified, or the target value based on the production contents such as the length of the reproduction time of the production effect sound. You may make it set the time to reach and the amount of change. For example, if the output of the new effect sound is short, the time to reach the target value may be set short to make the effect sound stand out. If the output of the new effect sound is relatively long, the target It is also possible to reduce the uncomfortable feeling that may occur when the effect sound effect is switched by setting a long time to reach the value.

  For example, if the newly output sound effect is a short-time output, such as a big hit confirmation sound or a V winning sound, the output of the effect sound during playback such as BGM is faded out in a relatively short time, It is possible to make the newly produced effect sound more prominent without destroying the game tempo.

  Furthermore, when the output of the new effect sound is finished and the output of the other effect sound is resumed, the volume of the other effect sound is immediately returned to the target value (predetermined volume value). Instead, the start value (volume during regulation), the time to reach the target value, and the amount of change may be defined and controlled to fade in. For example, the normal BGM output is suppressed to 50% during the sound effect reproduction of the first half notice A, but when the normal BGM output is resumed, the normal volume is set as the target value, and the start value (the volume currently being reproduced. Then, the volume is controlled to 50%, and the fade-in is controlled based on the specified time and the amount of change. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to suppress the player's uncomfortable feeling while making the switching of the effect sound effect stand out, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Moreover, although this embodiment demonstrated the effect sound effect as an example, it can be applied similarly also in the case of an alarm sound or a notification sound. As an example, when outputting a notification sound having a high importance (priority order) (for example, an alarm sound due to fraud), not only a production effect sound but also a notification sound having a relatively low importance (priority order) ( For example, the output of a ball clogging notification sound) may be regulated. On the other hand, if an illegal act is performed while a low-priority (priority) notification sound is being output, output of the notification sound is interrupted, and a high-priority (priority) notification sound (alarm) Sound) may be output with priority.

  Note that the alarm sound and the notification sound are not set for the sound output time like the effect sound, but the sound output is continued until the cause of the alarm or the notification is resolved. Therefore, when a situation occurs in which a plurality of types of alarm sounds and notification sounds are output, the sound with the highest priority is output, and after the cause of outputting the sound is resolved, other notification sounds are output. . At this time, the sound with the next highest priority may be output to restrict the output of the remaining sound, or all the remaining sounds may be output simultaneously.

[16-2. Volume control by sound output time (long / short)
In the above, the control of the sound output redundantly according to the priority order between the groups has been described. Next, a control example for controlling the sound volume based on the sound output time (long / short) will be described.

[16-2-1. Volume control table for each sound effect]
FIG. 274 is a diagram illustrating an example of a volume control table for each sound effect indicating volume (volume) control for each total sound reproduction time (output time) in the present embodiment. For each sound effect, a used playback channel (ch), a total playback time, and a suppression volume value are set.

  As in the example shown in FIG. 271, the used reproduction channels are divided into five groups of fixed ch1, fixed ch2, AUTO group 1, AUTO group 2, and AUTO group 3.

  The total playback time is the time from the start to stop of the sound effect output. When the total playback time is set to -1, the sound effect is output at a preset volume without being affected by the suppression control by the sound effect to be output elsewhere. At this time, control is performed so that the volume of the sound effect cannot be suppressed.

  When the total playback time is set to 0, loop playback is repeatedly output, and output is continued until another sound effect is assigned to the same channel. When the numerical value set for the total reproduction time is any other number (positive number), it is the reproduction time of the sound effect. Note that the unit of the total playback time is milliseconds (ms).

  Similar to the example shown in FIG. 271, the suppression volume value is a numerical value indicating an aspect in which the volume of another sound effect output simultaneously is changed. Specifically, in the case of “−1”, the sound is continuously reproduced without changing the sound being reproduced, and in the case of “0”, the sound effect being reproduced (− Output (except for sound effects set to 1) is suppressed (mute). In the case of a numerical value other than “0”, for example, when “50” is set, the volume of the sound being reproduced is suppressed to 50%.

  Subsequently, each sound effect will be described with reference to FIG. 274. In the present embodiment as well, in the same manner as in the above-described embodiment, channels of the fixed channel method and the automatic channel method are mixed, and the assigned sound effects are also the same. It is. In the example shown in FIG. 274, the suppression volume value is set for each channel group, but may be set for each sound effect.

  Since the total playback time is set to “−1” and the suppression volume value is set to “0” for the sound effect assigned to the fixed ch 1, when these sound effects are played back, All sounds are muted. The sound played on the fixed channel 1 is a notification sound for notifying outside such as a player or an employee of a game hall, and is caused by an illegal act or occurrence of a malfunction. Cannot be suppressed, and output of other sound effects during playback is forcibly suppressed (stopped, muted).

  Since the total playback time is set to “0” and the suppression volume value is set to “−1”, the sound effect assigned to the fixed channel 2 is repeatedly output from the start of output. These sound effects do not affect other sounds being reproduced. The sound effect assigned to the fixed channel 2 is mainly BGM in games.

  The sound effect assigned to AUTO group 1 has a total playback time set for each sound effect (play time) and a suppression volume value of “0”. All other sounds being played are muted. That is, the sound output in the AUTO group 1 is output with the highest priority in production, and other sounds are muted and output alone. Specific sounds output in the AUTO group 1 include a jackpot sound, a blackout sound effect, a V winning sound, etc., as shown in FIG.

  The sound effects assigned to the AUTO group 2 and the AUTO group 3 have the total playback time set for each sound effect (playback time) and the suppression volume value “50”. When a sound is reproduced, all other sound outputs being reproduced are halved (suppressed to 50% output). Thus, for example, as specific sounds output in the AUTO group 2 that can make the production stand out while continuing the flow of the game by halving the output of the BGM, for example, the first half notice sound effect or the second half notice effect Examples of specific sounds output by the AUTO group 3 include, for example, a hold winning sound at the time of starting winning a prize, a hold changing sound indicating that the hold display has changed, and an effect button being pressed. For example, a button press sound for notification.

[16-2-2. Volume control processing]
In this embodiment, the output of the sound effect reproduced in duplicate is controlled according to the sound effect playback time. FIG. 275A and FIG. 275B are flowcharts showing the procedure of a volume control process for performing sound control based on parameters set for each sound effect according to the present embodiment. Hereinafter, the procedure of sound effect output control in this embodiment will be described.

  When the volume control process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1530a first determines whether or not there is a request for playing a new sound (step S1501). When there is no new sound reproduction request (the result of step S1501 is “No”), the processing from step S1530 is executed.

  On the other hand, when there is a new sound reproduction request (the result of step S1501 is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 1530a identifies the sound effect name based on the sound number of the sound requested to be reproduced, The suppression volume value and the total playback time are acquired from the control table (FIG. 274) (step S1502).

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 1530a determines whether or not the acquired suppression volume value is “−1” (no suppression control) (step S1503). When the acquired suppression volume value is “−1” (the result of step S1503 is “Yes”), that is, when the control for the sound being reproduced is not performed, the processing after step S1506 is executed.

  When the acquired suppression volume value is not “−1” (the result of step S1503 is “No”), that is, when control is being performed on the sound being played back, the peripheral control MPU 1530a further controls the sound requested to be played back. It is determined whether the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time have been registered in the work area (step S1504). If the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time have been registered in the work area (the result of step S1504 is “Yes”), the processing from step S1506 is executed.

  When the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the group volume priority are not registered (the result of step S1504 is “No”), the peripheral control MPU 1530a determines the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total playback time of the sound requested to be played. Is held in the work area (step S1505).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 1530a determines whether or not there is a sound that is already being reproduced (step S1506). If there is no sound being reproduced (the result of step S1506 is “No”), a predetermined volume value is set to the volume of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made (step S1507). On the other hand, if there is a sound that is already being reproduced (the result of step S1506 is “Yes”), sound control is performed based on the parameters stored in the work area and the parameters of the new sound in the processing after step S1510.

  The sound control based on the parameters stored in the work area and the parameters of the new sound will be described. First, the peripheral control MPU 1530a determines whether or not the total reproduction time of the sound requested to be newly reproduced is “−1”. (Step S1510). When the total reproduction time of the sound requested to be newly reproduced is “−1” (the result of step S1410 is “Yes”), as described above, an alarm sound is output when an abnormality occurs, and the new The volume of the playback sound is prohibited from being suppressed, and the output of other sound effects during playback is forcibly suppressed.

  The peripheral control MPU 1530a sets a predetermined volume value for the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made (step S1511). Furthermore, the work number is overwritten with the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time for which a new reproduction request has been made (step S1512).

  Then, the peripheral control MPU 1530a suppresses the volume of the sound effect being reproduced based on the sound suppression volume value for which a new reproduction request has been made (step S1513). If the volume of all sound effects being reproduced is suppressed, the processing after step S1530 is executed (step S1514).

  On the other hand, if the total playback time of the sound requested to be newly played is not “−1” (the result of step S1510 is “No”), the peripheral control MPU 1530a determines the total playback time of the sound held in the work area. It is determined whether “−1” or a sound number is set in the work area (step S1520). When the total reproduction time of the sound held in the work area is “−1” or the sound number is not set in the work area (the result of step S1520 is “Yes”), the processes after step S1530 are executed.

  When the total playback time of the sound held in the work area is not “−1” and the sound number is set in the work area (the result of step S1520 is “No”), the peripheral control MPU 1530a It is determined whether or not the suppression volume value of the sound requested to be newly reproduced is smaller than the suppression volume value held in the work area (step S1521).

  If the suppression volume value of the sound requested to be newly played is smaller than the suppression volume value held in the work area (the result of step S1521 is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 1530a transmits the sound requested to be newly played. The work area is overwritten with the number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time (step S1522).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 1530a determines whether or not the total reproduction time of the sound requested to be newly reproduced is shorter than the total reproduction time held in the work area (step S1523). If the total playback time of the sound requested for new playback is shorter than or equal to the total playback time held in the work area (the result of step S1521 is “Yes”), the volume of the sound requested for new playback is set. A predetermined volume value is set (step S1524). On the other hand, if the total playback time of the sound requested for new playback is longer than the total playback time held in the work area (the result of step S1521 is “No”), the volume of the sound requested for new playback The volume value reduced based on the suppression volume value of the work area is set (step S1525).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 1530a determines whether or not the suppression volume value is smaller than or the same as the suppression volume value recorded in the work area for all the sounds being reproduced (step S1526). If the suppression volume value of the sound being reproduced is larger than the suppression volume value already recorded in the work area (the result of step S1526 is “No”), the volume of the sound being reproduced is recorded in the work area. The volume is reduced based on the suppression volume value (step S1527).

  When the peripheral control MPU 1530a performs the processing of step S1526 and step S1527 for all the sounds being reproduced, the peripheral control MPU 1530a executes the processing after step S1530 (step S1528).

  When the volume control for the sound requested for new reproduction and the sound being reproduced is completed (step S1507, step S1514, step S1524, step S1525, step S1528), the peripheral control MPU 1530a displays the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time. Is registered in the work area (step S1530). If the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time have not been registered in the work area (the result of step S1530 is “No”), this process is terminated.

  When the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time are already registered in the work area (the result of step S1530 is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 1530a reproduces the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area. It is determined whether or not the process has ended (step S1531). If the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area has not been completed (the result of step S1531 is “No”), this process ends.

  When the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area is completed (the result of step S1531 is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 1530a obtains the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time from the work area. It erases (step S1532). Finally, all the sounds being reproduced are restored to the original volume values determined in advance (steps S1533 and S1534), and this process is terminated.

  The above is the processing for controlling the sound volume based on the total sound effect playback time in the present embodiment. Next, sound volume control will be specifically described along a time series. FIG. 276 is a timing chart for explaining the procedure for controlling the volume according to the present embodiment in chronological order. (A) shows the execution timing of the production, and (B) shows the volume of each production. FIG. 276 describes an example in which the first half notice effect and the blackout effect are executed.

  When the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the game is started and the normal BGM is output. The normal BGM is output at the fixed channel 2 and the suppression volume value is set to “−1” as shown in FIG. 274. Normal BGM is loop reproduction in which reproduction is repeated until the BGM is switched, and 0 is set for the total reproduction time. Since the suppression volume value is “−1” (the result of step S1503 is “Yes”), the normal BGM parameter is not registered in the work area. Then, a preset volume value is set, and normal BGM is output (step S1507).

  After that, when the game ball wins the starting winning opening and the special symbol variation display (dynamic display) is started, the output of the sound effect of the first half notice A is newly requested in order to execute the first half notice A. (Time t31). The sound effect of the first half notice A is output on a channel belonging to AUTO group 2, the total playback time is set to 15000 ms, and the suppression volume value is set to 50 (the result of step S1503 is “No”).

  Further, since no parameter is registered in the work area at this time (the result of step S1504 is “No”), the sound number, total playback time, and suppression volume value of the first half notice A are held in the work area ( Step S1505).

  Furthermore, the normal BGM is being played back at the start timing of the first half notice A (the result of step S1506 is “Yes”), the total play time of the first half notice A is 15000 ms (the result of step S1510 is “No”), and new The parameter of the sound effect of the first half notice A for which the reproduction request has been made has already been registered in the work area (the result of step S1520 is “No”, the result of step S1521 is “No”, and the result of step S1523 is “Yes”). ). Therefore, the volume of the sound effect of the first half notice A for which a new reproduction request has been made is set to a predetermined volume value (step S1524).

  Subsequently, since the normal BGM is being reproduced at this time and the volume has not been suppressed, the suppression volume value is “100”, which is larger than the suppression volume value “50” of the first half notice A recorded in the work area. (The result of step S1526 is “No”), and based on the suppression volume value “50” of the first half notice A, the normal BGM volume is reduced to 50% (step S1527).

  Subsequently, the sound effect parameter of the first half notice A is already registered in the work area (the result of step S1530 is “Yes”), and the first half notice A is continued (the result of step S1531 is “No”). This process ends.

  Thereafter, the blackout effect is executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and a new sound reproduction request for the blackout effect sound is received (time t32). The blackout effect sound is output on a channel belonging to the AUTO group 1, and the total playback time is “8000” and the suppression volume value is “0” (the result of step S1503 is “No”). At this time, the parameter of the sound effect of the first half notice A is already registered in the work area (the result of Step S1504 is “Yes”), and the sound effect of the normal BGM and the first half notice A is being output (Step S1506). The result is “Yes”).

  Further, the blackout effect sound effect requested for new reproduction has a total reproduction time of “8000” (the result of step S1510 is “No”), and the total reproduction time of the sound effect of the first half notice A held in the work area. Is “15000” (the result of step S1520 is “No”).

  Next, since the suppression volume value of the sound effect of the first half notice A held in the work area is “50” and the suppression volume value of the blackout effect sound effect requested to be newly reproduced is “0” (step The result of S1521 is “Yes”), and the work number is overwritten with the sound number, suppression volume value “0”, and total playback time “8000” of the blackout effect sound that has been requested for new playback (step S1522).

  In addition, since the total reproduction time (8000 ms; a1) of the sound effect of the blackout notice effect is shorter than the total reproduction time (15000 ms) of the sound effect of the first half notice A (the result of step S1523 is “Yes”), blackout A predetermined volume value is set as the volume of the notice effect sound effect (step S1524).

  Subsequently, the suppression volume value of the sound being played is normally “50” for BGM, “100” for the sound effect of the first half notice A, and “0” for the sound effect volume of the blackout notice effect effect already recorded in the work area. (The result of step S1526 is “No”), the volume of the sound effect of the normal BGM and the first half notice A is set to “0” (step S1527).

  Thereafter, when a game ball wins the start winning opening during execution of the blackout effect, a new sound reproduction request for the reserved winning sound is received (time t33). The reserved winning sound is output on a channel belonging to the AUTO group 3, and the total playback time is “2000” and the suppression volume value is “50” (the result of step S1503 is “No”). At this time, the parameter of the blackout effect sound effect is already registered in the work area (the result of step S1504 is “Yes”), and the blackout effect sound effect, the normal BGM, and the sound effect of the first half notice A are being output. Yes (the result of step S1506 is “Yes”). At this time, the output of the normal BGM and the sound effect of the first half notice A is suppressed.

  Further, the pending winning sound for which a new reproduction request has been made has a total reproduction time of “2000” (the result of step S1510 is “No”), and the total reproduction time of the blackout effect sound effect held in the work area is “8000”. (The result of step S1520 is “No”).

  Next, since the suppression volume value of the blackout effect sound effect held in the work area is “0” and the suppression volume value of the pending winning sound requested to be newly reproduced is “50” (the result of step S1521 is “No”), the work area is not overwritten, but the total reproduction time (2000 ms; a2) of the pending winning sound is shorter than the total reproduction time (8000 ms; a1) of the blackout effect sound (the result of step S1523 is “Yes”), a predetermined volume value is set to the volume of the pending winning sound (step S1524). Further, since the work area is not updated, the suppression volume value of the sound being reproduced is the same as the suppression volume value recorded in the work area (the result of step S1526 is “Yes”). Then, even when the output of the reserved winning sound is finished (time t34), the blackout effect sound is continuously output because the parameter of the blackout effect sound is recorded in the work area.

  Thereafter, when the blackout effect ends (time t35), the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area ends (the result of step S1531 is “Yes”), so the blackout stored in the work area. The parameter of the effect sound is deleted (step S1532). Then, the volume of the sound effect of the normal BGM and the first half notice A in which the sound reproduction is suppressed (the volume has been reduced) is returned to a predetermined volume value (step S1533). At this time, the normal BGM is suppressed at the time of reproducing the sound effect of the first half notice A, but the normal volume is restored.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to mute the volume of other sound effects being played and to make a specific effect (for example, blackout effect) stand out, Even if the output ends, it is possible to provide the player with a production opportunity. Specifically, if the output of the sound effect is completed during the mute period, the sound effect is output even while a specific effect is executed and the output of the sound effect of another effect is suppressed If the output of the sound effect continues until the end of the mute period, the output of the sound effect of the effect during the mute period is suppressed to make the execution of the specific effect stand out. be able to.

  By the way, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 in which the number of channels is limited, a new sound is generated when there is no vacancy in the channel to which sound data is to be assigned (the number of vacant channels is 0). If the data allocation condition is satisfied, one of the sound outputs must be discarded, and there is a concern that the game entertainment will deteriorate due to the appearance of the unintended sound output in the production design.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, when a new sound data allocation condition is satisfied when there is no channel space (the number of empty channels is 0), a preset value is set. Based on the priorities, the control of the sound output with lower importance is selectively discarded, thereby avoiding the appearance of an unintended sound output in the production design and reducing the entertainment interest. Proposed to be suppressed. However, it can be said that it is also important to make technical ingenuity in the situation where there is no vacant channel (the situation where the number of vacant channels is 0) and how it is difficult to appear.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in order to enable more channel resources to be assigned to the effect sound (effect sound), various kinds of signals that are not output as long as an appropriate game is performed. As for the notification sound, it is possible to adopt a channel saving type control structure that can appropriately notify the abnormality content only with a single channel. Hereinafter, an example of a case where a channel saving type control structure is adopted for outputting various kinds of notification sounds will be described.

  FIG. 277 shows a specific channel (hereinafter referred to as channel X) of a finite number of channels prepared by using various types of notification sounds (payout notification sounds and abnormal notification sounds) excluding effect sounds as sound control by the fixed channel method. An example of a sound definition table in the case of realizing the process of outputting only in the above-mentioned manner is shown. In this sound definition table, for each sound name, the priority for playback, left / right pan initial value, upper / lower pan initial value, volume initial value, sound number, seek point, playback type setting and output type setting definition are managed. doing. Here, for the convenience of explanation, only the definitions for the notification sounds 1 to 7 are shown, and the description of the definitions of other notification sounds, effect sounds, and the like is omitted. In addition to the definition based on the fixed channel method illustrated in FIG. 236, the production sound is defined based on the automatic channel method illustrated in FIG. 240 for each channel other than the channel X to which the notification sound is assigned. It is also possible to use it.

  The priority is a parameter that is used to determine which of the notification sounds is assigned to the channel X for output when a plurality of notification sounds satisfy the output conditions. The high notification sound is assigned to the channel X and output regardless of the assignment state of the notification sound having the low priority order to the channel X. As will be described later, when the priorities are the same, the notification sound previously assigned to channel X is given priority, and after the output of the notification sound is finished, the notification sound assigned to channel X is output. Will be.

  The left and right pan initial values represent sound image localization initial positions of left and right speakers, which are combinations of the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L, and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the left and right pan setting values during sound reproduction, a difference is produced in the volume output separately from the left and right speakers, and the sound image can be localized in an arbitrary space between the left and right speakers. For example, when “0x00” is set, it indicates that only the left speaker (upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L) outputs, and for example, when “0x80” is set, the upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker are set. The difference in volume output individually from the left and right speakers, which is a combination of 921L, the upper right speaker 573R, and the lower right speaker 921R, is 0, and the sound image is localized at the center of the left and right speakers. For example, when “0xFF” is set, it indicates that only the right speaker (upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R) outputs.

  The initial values of the upper and lower pans are, for example, the sound image localization of sounds by upper and lower speakers such as a pair of upper speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and a pair of lower speakers 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R). It represents the initial position. By dynamically changing the setting values of the upper and lower pans during sound reproduction, a difference is produced in the volume output individually from the upper and lower speakers, and the sound image can be localized in an arbitrary space between the upper and lower speakers. . For example, when “0x00” is set, it indicates that the sound is output from only the pair of upper speakers 573. For example, when “0x80” is set, the volume difference that is output individually from the upper and lower speakers that are a combination of these. Becomes 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, when “0xFF” is set, it indicates that only a pair of lower speakers 921 outputs.

  The volume initial value represents the sound volume setting at the start of reproduction, and can be determined, for example, in a setting range from “0x00” to “0xFF”. The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing each sound described above. The playback type setting is loop playback for repeatedly playing the target sound (corresponding to “LOOP” in the figure), or 1SHOT playback for playing the target sound once (corresponding to “1SHOT” in the figure). It represents whether or not. The output type setting indicates whether the target sound is reproduced in monaural or stereo.

  FIG. 278 is a table showing notification conditions, notification modes, notification times, and conditions (release conditions) for the notification, for each notification sound exemplified in FIG. 277, for each type of notification sound. In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a finite notification time is set for any notification sound, but this is used as much as possible in order to effectively use a single channel X. This is a measure for maintaining in the state and forcing a subsequent notification sound output.

  As shown in FIG. 278, the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is in a state in which magnetism is detected by the magnetic sensor 2404 (a state where there is a high possibility that an illegal act using a magnet is being performed). This is to be notified. As a notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “Boo-boo magnet has been detected” and display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, “Magnet has been detected”). ) And lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are executed. As the notification time, the loop processing for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “Boo-boo magnet has been detected” ends in 60 seconds (corresponding to six notification sound repetitions) from the detection by the magnetic sensor 2404. On the other hand, the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the lighting by various lamps continue to be executed until the “return on power” which is the release condition is satisfied. ing.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality), a state in which vibration is detected by the vibration sensor 2405 (the possibility of a fraudulent act due to a dodging action is high). Notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) for notifying that the player is in the state) and the first grand prize opening sensor 2403 or the second big prize opening sensor even though the big hit gaming state (the state where the big prize opening is opened) is not present Notification sound 3 (high volume) for informing that the detection by 2402 is in a state (a state where there is a high possibility that an illegal act of forcibly opening a large winning opening in a closed state and winning a game ball is performed) Winning anomalies) is regarded as belonging to the first notification group when there is a high possibility that some sort of fraud has been performed, and the notification sounds belonging to the first notification group are Intellectual aspects and broadcast time, both the release conditions are as setting to that common.

  For example, in the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality), as the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “boost vibration detected” and display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, , “Vibration detected”) and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are executed, and the detection by the vibration sensor 2405 is performed as a notification time. The loop processing for repeatedly outputting the notification sound is completed in 60 seconds (corresponding to six repetitions of the notification sound) from the time of the occurrence, whereas the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and various lamps The execution of the lighting by is continued until the release condition “power-on” is satisfied. In addition, in the notification sound 3 (big prize abnormality), as a notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “A boo-boo prize abnormality has been detected” and a display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 are displayed. A display (for example, “A big prize abnormality has been detected”) and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are respectively executed, and as notification time, Whereas the loop processing for repeatedly outputting the notification sound in 60 seconds (corresponding to six repetitions of the notification sound) is terminated after the detection by the first grand prize opening sensor 2403 or the second grand prize opening sensor 2402, Regarding the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the lighting by various lamps, the release condition “power-on” is satisfied. So that the execution is continued.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 employs different display modes for the notification sounds 1 to 3 belonging to the first notification group. About lighting by the various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged in the frame 3 and the game board 5, the same lighting mode (all of the various lamps are necessarily lighted) by the notification sounds 1 to 3 belonging to the first notification group. It does not have to be an aspect). Moreover, about the notification sound used as the object of a loop process, the notification sound 1 called "boo boo" which plays the role which alert | reports that it belongs to the 1st notification group (state with the high possibility that the fraudulent act was performed). A combination of sequential output of an alarm sound used in any of 3 to 3 and a message sound (unique sound) that plays a role of notifying individual identification as to which of the notification contents is adopted. The warning sound is a monotonous sound to give a warning meaning in a severe unfair situation, and the message sound is composed of various sounds to clarify the distinction from other notification sounds. It is desirable to do so.

  In other words, when reporting information belonging to the first notification group (a state in which there is a high possibility that fraud has been performed), rather than specifying which notification type it is, the hall side response to fraud It is important to speed up the initial action. In this regard, according to the above-described configuration, only the notification sound of “boo-boo” and the lighting mode unique to the first notification group by various lamps (light emitting devices) are output, and those belonging to the first notification group (the fraudulent acts are It is expected that the initial response of the hall side response to the fraudulent act will be expedited. In addition, a message sound for notifying which notification type is to be output following the notification sound of “boo-boo”, or display within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is performed. Therefore, it is expected that the treatment after the initial movement corresponding to the hall side is performed smoothly.

  On the other hand, the notification sound 4 (door opening) is a state in which the door frame opening switch 618 detects that the door frame 3 is open with respect to the main body frame 4 (the possibility of fraudulent acts due to door opening). However, there is a possibility that the door may be opened by an abnormality handling measure on the hall side). As a notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “the door is open ping-pong ping-pong” and a display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, “the door is open” )) And lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are respectively executed. As for the notification time, the loop processing for repeatedly outputting the notification sound such as “the door is open ping-pong ping-pong” is 30 seconds after the detection by the door frame opening switch 618 (corresponding to three repetitions of the notification sound). ), The display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the lighting by various lamps are the release condition “door closing detection (door frame opening switch 618 causes the main body frame 4 to On the other hand, the execution is continued until “detection that the door frame 3 is closed)” is satisfied.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 4 (door opening), a state in which the main body frame opening switch 619 detects that the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2 ( Although there is a possibility that an illegal act is performed by opening the main body frame, a notification sound 5 (frame opening) for notifying that there is a possibility that the main body frame is opened by an abnormality handling measure on the hall side) It is considered as belonging to the second notification group when there is a medium possibility that some sort of fraud has been performed and this cannot be denied, and for notification sounds belonging to the second notification group, those notifications The mode, the notification time, and the release condition are all set to a common one.

  For example, in the notification sound 5 (frame open), as the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “the frame is open ping-pong ping-pong” and display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 ( For example, “the frame is open”) and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are executed, respectively, and the body frame opening switch is used as the notification time. The loop processing for repeatedly outputting the notification sound in 30 seconds (corresponding to the repetition of the notification sound for three times) after the detection by 619 is ended, whereas the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 As for lighting by various lamps, the release condition is “frame closing detection (the body frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2 by the body frame opening switch 619. Until the detection of it) "is satisfied so that the execution is continued.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 employs different display modes for the notification sounds 4 and 5 belonging to the second notification group. About the lighting by the various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged in the frame 3 and the game board 5, the same lighting mode (all of the various lamps are necessarily turned on) by the notification sounds 4 and 5 belonging to the second notification group. It does not have to be an aspect). However, the lighting mode by the lamp (light emitting device) when belonging to the second notification group is different from the lighting mode by the lamp (light emitting device) when belonging to the first notification group. In addition, regarding the notification sound that is the target of the loop processing, a message sound (unique sound) that plays a role of notifying individual identification as to which content of the notification and a sound belonging to the second notification group (injustice) A combination of sequential output with alarm sounds used in either of the notification sounds 4 and 5, such as “ping-pong ping-pong”, which plays a role of notifying that the possibility of the occurrence of the error is moderate) Yes.

  In other words, when notifying those who belong to the second notification group (a state in which there is a moderate possibility of fraudulent acts) It is important to be able to perform abnormality handling on the hall side to a certain degree of speed. In this regard, according to the above-described configuration, as the notification sound, first, as in the case of belonging to the third notification group described later, a message sound for informing which notification type is output is output. Therefore, it is expected that those who are playing appropriate games will be less likely to feel disgust. On the other hand, an alarm sound such as “ping-pong ping-pong” follows the message sound, although it is an alarm sound different from the case of belonging to the first notification group so as to make it difficult for a person who is playing an appropriate game to feel disgust. In the case of belonging to the third notification group, the lighting mode is different from the case of belonging to the first notification group so that it is difficult for the person who is playing an appropriate game to feel disgust. By performing notification by turning on various lamps that are not performed, it is expected that the abnormality handling measures on the hall side will be accelerated to some extent.

  On the other hand, the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is generated when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 provided in the area on the right side with respect to the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a in spite of the non-time-short state. Passing is detected by the gate sensor 2401 (the game is played in a manner that is disadvantageous to the player, and it should be corrected to a game in the proper manner (left-handed)) This is to be notified. As the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “please return to left-handed” and a display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, “please return to left-handed” )) Are executed. In addition, as the notification time, both of the loop processing for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “please return to the left” and the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 are in a non-time-saving state. The detection is completed in 20 seconds (corresponding to two repetitions of the notification sound) from when the detection by the gate sensor 2401 is detected.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance), a state where the lower tray 322 is detected to be full of game balls by the full-tank detection sensor 279 (lower pan) The notification sound 7 (ball-out guidance) for notifying that the game ball in the 322 is in a state where the ball is to be removed is provided to guide the game in order to properly advance the game although the possibility of fraud is low. It is assumed that it belongs to the third notification group when it is in the power state, and for the notification sound belonging to the third notification group, the notification mode, the notification time, and the release condition are all set in common. It is said.

  For example, in the notification sound 7 (ball guidance), as the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “please remove the ball of the lower plate” and a display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 Display (for example, “please remove the ball on the lower plate”) and a loop process for repeatedly outputting an alarm sound such as “please remove the ball on the lower plate” as a notification time, and a game board Both the display in the display area of the side effect display device 1600 are finished in 20 seconds (corresponding to repeated notification sounds for two times) from when the full tank detection sensor 279 detects. .

  However, the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) and the notification sound 7 (ball-out guidance) are detected when the sensors 2401 and 2401 are terminated in 20 seconds from the detection by the gate sensor 2401 or the full tank detection sensor 279. When 279 is still in the detection state, the notification process (notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) and notification sound 7 (ball-out guidance)) is executed again from the beginning.

  In the third notification group according to this embodiment, only the message sound is output as the notification sounds 6 and 7, but more strictly, for example, after the message sound for 5 seconds has been output, there is no sound for 5 seconds. Data is assigned to channel X, and a sound corresponding to that is output (silent output), and a loop process is repeated for repeating the notification sound for 10 seconds with the message sound and silent data as a set. It has become. And, since the notification sounds 6 and 7 are all configured to output silence data for the same time, the notification sounds 6 and 7 function as a unique notification mode different from the first notification group and the second notification group, Even on the hall side, it is possible to properly recognize that the notification belongs to the third notification group only by confirming the portion of the silent data, not the portion of the message sound that is difficult to hear in the noisy hall. Regarding the silent data, it is desirable to prepare in advance as one sound data (10-second sound data) including the message sound, and to perform the loop processing while assigning it to the channel X.

  By the way, although there can be silence in the notification sounds (such as between the alarm sound and the message sound) used in the first notification group and the second notification group, these are very short in order to have a “between”. It is clear that it is a time thing and is fundamentally different from the above-mentioned silent part (third notification group) having a relatively long time and having a group identification function.

  According to such a configuration, an alarm sound such as “boo-boo” or “ping-pong ping-pong” is not output, and only a message sound is repeatedly output with a predetermined silence period interposed therebetween. Thus, it is possible to make a notification regarding the game guidance without feeling disgusted.

  In the examples shown in FIG. 277 and FIG. 278, the notification sound belonging to the same notification group is set to have the same priority, but the notification sound belonging to the same notification group has different priorities. You may do it. In addition, loop playback in which the target sound is repeatedly played is adopted as the playback type setting. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and 1SHOT playback in which the target sound is played once may be adopted. . In addition, “boo-boo” that is commonly used for the notification sounds belonging to the first notification group and “ping-pong ping-pong” that is commonly used for the notification sounds belonging to the second notification group are connected with the message sound. The sound data may be prepared separately for each notification sound, or prepared as sound data different from the message sound, and the sound data that combines the message sound and the alarm sound is created at the time of output. After that, it may be assigned to the channel.

  FIG. 279 (a) shows processing when the output condition (abnormality detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced. An example is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 279 (a), when there is a magnetic detection by the magnetic sensor 2404 in the process of step S84 (FIG. 212) at timing tα1 at which no notification sound is output, the main control is performed. In the MPU 1310a, first, the state of the notification flag is updated so as to indicate that magnetic detection has occurred. Next, information indicating the presence of magnetic detection is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. Thereby, in the process of step S90 (FIG. 212), information indicating that the magnetic detection has been performed based on the state of the updated notification flag is output to the outside and managed in the hall computer. In the process of S92 (FIG. 212), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (magnetic detection) is used for a process related to notification in the peripheral control MPU 1530a.

  On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU 1530a analyzes the command in the received command analysis process in step S1022 (FIG. 230) at the timing tα1 (or immediately after) at which no notification sound is output. , The notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) shown in FIG. 278 is assigned (set) to the channel X in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 230), and its notification mode (In this case, the notification sound reproduction in the “loop of magnet detected”) is started, and a timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is set.

  When assigning the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) to the channel X, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection is extracted from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1530b or the peripheral control RAM 1530c, and the peripheral control is performed. This is set to 1530cae in the schedule data storage area of the RAM 1530c. On this basis, the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is assigned to the channel X so that the notification sound such as “Boo-boo magnet has been detected” is reproduced in a predetermined processing mode (loop). become.

  At this time, the peripheral control MPU 1530a extracts screen generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection and emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1530b or the peripheral control RAM 1530c. By setting 1530cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c, the above-described in-liquid crystal display and lamp lighting are also executed. The display in the liquid crystal and the lamp lighting are continuously executed until the power is turned on again as a condition for canceling the magnetic abnormality.

  Through such processing, a notification sound such as “We detected boo-boo magnetism” is repeatedly executed for 60 seconds from the timing tα1, and display within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, “Detect magnetism”). And lighting by various lamps arranged in the door frame 3 and the game board 5 (lighting mode of the first notification group) are executed.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 279 (a), at the timing tα2 in which 60 seconds have not elapsed since the timing tα1 and a notification sound such as “Booming magnetism is detected” is in the state of loop playback, step S84 ( It is assumed that vibration is detected by the vibration sensor 2405 in the process of FIG. In this regard, the main control MPU 1310a first updates the state of the notification flag so as to indicate that the vibration has been detected, as in the case of the timing tα1 at which the magnetic detection has been performed. Next, information indicating that vibration has been detected is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. Thereby, in the process of step S90 (FIG. 212), information indicating that vibration has been detected based on the updated state of the notification flag is output to the outside and managed in the hall computer. In the process of S92 (FIG. 212), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (vibration detection) is used for a process related to notification in the peripheral control MPU 1530a.

  On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1530a, the command is analyzed by the received command analysis process in step S1022 (FIG. 230) at the timing tα2 (or immediately after) when the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is in the output state (reproduction state). As a result, even if it is determined that the vibration detection information is included, the alarm sound 2 (vibration abnormality) shown in FIG. 278 is assigned to the channel X in the warning process in step S1024 (FIG. 230). I won't do that. That is, since the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) having the same priority is already assigned to the channel X, the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is not newly assigned to the channel X. Thus, the reproduction of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) on the side already assigned is preferentially executed and continued.

  Also, the peripheral control MPU 1530a according to this embodiment does not set the sound generation schedule data itself according to the vibration detection at the timing tα2. Therefore, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is not subjected to the expansion process in a state where it is not assigned to the channel X.

  However, on the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1530a according to this embodiment, at the timing tα2 (or immediately after), a timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) that has not been set yet. ) Is set, and when the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is output (reproduction state), when the timer (60 seconds) has not expired, a sound corresponding to vibration detection is set. Set the schedule data for generation, assign the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) to the channel X for the remaining time, and the notification sound in the notification mode (in this case, the loop of “Boom vibration detected”) Playback is to be executed.

  The peripheral control MPU 1530a does not set the sound generation schedule data according to the vibration detection at the timing tα2 (or immediately after), but the screen generation schedule data according to the vibration detection and the vibration detection are not set. The emission mode generation schedule data according to the above is extracted from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1530b or the peripheral control RAM 1530c and set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c to 1530cae. These are executed for lamp lighting.

  In the liquid crystal display, a display corresponding to the vibration abnormality appears separately at a position different from the position where the display corresponding to the magnetic abnormality is performed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Yes. In the lamp lighting, although the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the vibration detection is set, the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the magnetic detection is already set and the priority is the same. The lighting mode of the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the magnetic detection already in the set state will be reflected in each lamp emission, and the lighting mode of the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the vibration detection will be reflected in various types. It is not reflected in each lamp emission. Similarly to the sound generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection may not be set at the timing tα2 (or immediately after that).

  However, as described above, in this embodiment, the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the magnetic detection and the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the vibration detection have the same data contents. Even in the case of reflecting, there is no change in lamp lighting.

  After this, at timing tα3 when 60 seconds have elapsed from timing tα1, a notification sound such as “Booming magnetism detected” is repeated based on the timer (60 seconds) of notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) being timed up. The loop process to be executed is terminated. Here, since the time required to reproduce the notification sound such as “Boo-boo magnetism detected” once is set to 10 seconds, the timer (60 seconds) of notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) At the timing tα3 that has been increased, the loop processing is terminated at a time when the notification sound “Boo-boo magnetism has been detected” has been reproduced six times, and when the notification sound is good.

  At this time, since the timer (60 seconds) of the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is not up, the peripheral control MPU 1530a sets sound generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection, and the rest By assigning the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) to the channel X for the time (the time (α) from the timing tα2 to the timing tα3 subtracted from 60 seconds), the notification mode (here, “boobo vibration” is assigned. ”Is detected” loop), the notification sound reproduction is executed.

  That is, the timer for the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is set at the timing tα2, while the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the vibration detection is not set but is set when the timing tα3 is reached. Therefore, at timing tα3, the notification sound of “Boo-boo vibration detected” can be reproduced from the head, and when the timer of notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) expires, “Boo-boo vibration is detected. It is possible to prompt the user to stop the loop processing from being played back at a halfway timing (for example, timing such as “boobing vibration”) in the notification sound such as “Done”.

  According to such a configuration, when one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced, when an output condition (abnormality detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied (FIG. 279 (a)), when the sixth alarm sound (here “Boo-boo”) and the sixth message sound (here “magnetic detected”) have finished playing, the seventh alarm sound (here Then, it is possible to realize smooth notification sound switching as if “boo-boo”) was reproduced. As a result, “Boo-boo magnetism has been detected” and “Boo-boo vibration have been detected” are connected at a strange place, making it impossible to recognize fraudulent notifications in a tense situation (for example, If the alarm sound 1 ends with “Boo-boo magnet” and the alarm sound 2 starts with “Motion detected”, an unknown notification such as “Boo-boo magnet detected” The occurrence of content that may confuse the site) can be suitably suppressed.

  Further, according to the above configuration, at the timing tα3, the remaining time of the timer corresponding to the vibration detection is shortened, and the notification sound 2 is timed up at the “boo-boo” alarm sound and ends and the message sound is Even if it is not reproduced, it is possible to recognize that some abnormality detection is occurring at the same time because the loop processing is finished at a halfway timing and the reproduction is stopped. If it is a notification, the notification sound is terminated at a good point). As a result, when the notification sound is interrupted at halfway timing, it will be prompted to check the display in the liquid crystal, and the display in the liquid crystal will show “Magnetic detected” and “Vibration detected” respectively. By being displayed, it is possible to properly recognize that the magnetic detection and the vibration detection have been performed.

  FIG. 279 (b) shows processing when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced. An example is shown.

  Here, the process when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced is shown in FIG. ) With reference to the above processing (processing when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced) ).

  For example, as shown in FIG. 279 (b), the frame opening detection by the main body frame opening switch 619 is performed within the processing of step S82 or S84 (FIG. 212) at the timing tβ1 when no notification sound is output. If there is, the main control MPU 1310a first updates the state of the notification flag so as to indicate that the frame opening has been detected. Next, information indicating that the frame opening has been detected is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. Thereby, in the process of step S90 (FIG. 212), information indicating that the frame opening has been detected based on the state of the updated notification flag is externally output and managed in the hall computer. In the process of step S92 (FIG. 212), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (frame opening detection) is used for a process related to notification in the peripheral control MPU 1530a.

  On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU 1530a analyzes the command in the received command analysis process in step S1022 (FIG. 230) at the timing tβ1 (or immediately after) at which no notification sound is output. When it is determined that the information is included, the notification sound 5 (open frame) shown in FIG. 278 is assigned (set) to channel X in the warning process in step S1024 (FIG. 230), and the notification is made. Notification sound playback in the mode (here, “frame is open ping-pong ping-pong” loop) is started, and a timer (30 seconds) is set for timing the notification time of notification sound 5 (frame open). .

  When the notification sound 5 (frame open) is assigned to the channel X, sound generation schedule data corresponding to the frame open detection is extracted from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1530b or the peripheral control RAM 1530c. This is set to 1530cae in the schedule data storage area of the control RAM 1530c. Then, by assigning the notification sound 5 (frame open) to the channel X, the notification sound such as “the frame is open ping-pong ping-pong” is reproduced in a predetermined processing mode (loop). It becomes like this.

  At this time, the peripheral control MPU 1530a obtains the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the frame opening detection and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the frame opening detection from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1530b or the peripheral control RAM 1530c. By extracting and setting 1530cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c, the above-described in-liquid crystal display and lamp lighting are also executed. The in-liquid crystal display and the lamp lighting are continuously executed until the frame closing detection which is the release condition of the frame opening detection is performed.

  Through such processing, a notification sound such as “the frame is open ping-pong ping-pong” is repeatedly executed for 30 seconds from the timing tβ1, and the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, “ And “lighting by various lamps arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 (lighting mode of the second notification group)” are executed.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 279 (b), at time tβ2 when 30 seconds have not elapsed since the timing tβ1 and a notification sound such as “the frame is open ping-pong ping-pong” is in the state of loop playback, step S82 is performed. Alternatively, it is assumed that the door opening detection is performed by the door frame opening switch 618 in the process of S84 (FIG. 212). In this regard, the main control MPU 1310a first updates the state of the notification flag so as to indicate that the door opening has been detected, as in the case of the timing tβ1 at which the frame opening has been detected. Next, information indicating that the door opening has been detected is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. Thereby, in the process of step S90 (FIG. 212), information indicating that the door opening has been detected based on the state of the updated notification flag is output to the outside and managed in the hall computer. In the process of step S92 (FIG. 212), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (door opening detection) is used for a process related to notification in the peripheral control MPU 1530a.

  On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1530a, the command is analyzed by the received command analysis processing in step S1022 (FIG. 230) at the timing tβ2 (or immediately after) when the notification sound 5 (frame open) is in the output state (reproduction state). As a result, even if it is grasped that the door opening detection information is included, the alarm sound 4 (door opening) shown in FIG. 278 is transmitted to the channel X in the warning process in step S1024 (FIG. 230). Do not assign. That is, since the notification sound 5 (frame opening) having the same priority is already assigned to the channel X, the notification sound 4 (door opening) is not newly assigned to the channel X. Thus, the reproduction of the notification sound 5 (frame open) on the side that has already been assigned is preferentially executed and continued.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 1530a according to this embodiment does not set the sound generation schedule data itself according to the detection of the door opening at the timing tβ2. Therefore, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the notification sound 4 (door opening) in a state where the channel X is not assigned is not processed.

  However, on the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1530a according to this embodiment, at the timing tβ2 (or immediately after), a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door opening) that has not been set yet. ) Is set, and when the output state (reproduction state) of the notification sound 5 (frame open) ends, when the timer (30 seconds) has not timed out, it corresponds to the door open detection. Set the schedule data for sound generation, and assign the notification sound 4 (door open) to the channel X for the remaining time, and in the notification mode (here, the “door is open ping-pong ping-pong” loop) Notification sound reproduction is executed.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 1530a does not set the sound generation schedule data according to the door opening detection at the timing tβ2 (or immediately after), but the screen generation schedule data according to the door opening detection, and The light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection is extracted from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1530b or the peripheral control RAM 1530c, and set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c in 1530cae, thereby the liquid crystal described above. These are executed for internal display and lamp lighting.

  In the liquid crystal display, a display corresponding to the door opening appears at a position different from the position where the display corresponding to the frame opening is performed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Yes. When the lamp is lit, the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection is set, but the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the frame opening detection is already set and the priority is the same. Therefore, the lighting mode generation schedule data corresponding to the frame opening detection already in the set state is reflected in each lamp emission, and the lighting mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection is turned on. The mode is not reflected in each lamp emission. Similarly to the sound generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the detection of door opening may not be set at the timing tβ2 (or immediately after).

  However, as described above, in this embodiment, the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the frame opening detection and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection have the same data contents. In any case, the lamp lighting does not change.

  After this, at timing tβ3 when 30 seconds have elapsed from timing tβ1, a notification sound such as “The frame is open ping-pong ping-pong” is issued based on the time-up of the timer (30 seconds) of notification sound 5 (frame opening). The loop process that is repeatedly executed is terminated. In this case, since the time required to reproduce the notification sound such as “The frame is open ping-pong ping-pong” is set to 10 seconds, the timer (30 seconds) for the notification sound 5 (frame open) is set. At the time tβ3 when the time is up, the loop processing is finished at a good timing when the notification sound such as “frame is open ping-pong ping-pong” has been reproduced three times.

  At this time, since the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 4 (door opening) is not up, the peripheral control MPU 1530a sets the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection, By assigning the notification sound 4 (door opening) to the channel X for the remaining time (time obtained by subtracting the time (β) from timing tβ2 to timing tβ3 from 30 seconds), the notification mode (here, “door Will open the notification sound in the “Ping-Pong” loop.

  That is, the timer for the notification sound 4 (door opening) is set at the timing tβ2, while the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection is not set but is set at the timing tβ3. Therefore, at timing tβ3, the notification sound of “door is open ping-pong ping-pong” can be reproduced from the head, and when the timer of notification sound 4 (door open) times out, “door opens. It is possible to prompt the user to stop the loop processing from being played back at a halfway timing (for example, timing such as “door is open”) of the notification sound such as “Ping Pong”.

  According to such a configuration, when one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced, the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied (see FIG. 279 (b)) When the third message sound (here “the frame is open”) and the third warning sound (here “ping-pong ping-pong”) have finished playing, the fourth message sound ( Here, smooth notification sound switching can be realized as if "the door is open") has been reproduced. As a result, “Ping Ping Ping Pong” and “Ping Ping Ping Pong” are connected at a strange place, making it impossible to recognize the information in a tense situation. Generation | occurrence | production can be suppressed suitably.

  Further, according to the above configuration, at time tβ3, the remaining time of the timer corresponding to the detection of door opening is short, and even if the notification sound 4 is interrupted at a halfway point, the message sound is reproduced first. Therefore, it is possible to reliably grasp that the door is open.

  FIG. 279 (c) shows processing when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced. An example is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 279 (c), at the timing tγ1 at which no notification sound is output, the game is in spite of being in a non-time-saving state within the process of step S84 or S88 (FIG. 212). If it is detected by the gate sensor 2401 that the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2003 provided in the area on the right side of the center accessory 2500 in the area 5a (right-handed detection in a non-short-time state), In the control MPU 1310a, information indicating that a right-handed detection has been detected in a non-time-short state is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510. Thereby, in the process of step S92 (FIG. 212), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (right-handed detection in the short time state) is provided for the process related to the notification in the peripheral control MPU 1530a. It becomes like this. Regarding the processing of the third notification group, the notification flag is not updated in the main control MPU 1310a, and the information is not externally output to the hall computer.

  On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1530a, as a result of analyzing the command in the received command analysis processing in step S1022 (FIG. 230) at the timing tγ1 (or immediately after) at which no notification sound is output, When the right-handed detection information is detected, the alarm sound 6 (left-handed guidance) shown in FIG. 278 is assigned to the channel X in the warning process in step S1024 (FIG. 230) ( A timer (not shown) for starting notification sound reproduction in the notification mode (in this case, the loop of “return to left-handed”) and counting the notification time of notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) ( 20 seconds).

  Regarding right-handed detection in a non-time-short state, in this embodiment, information indicating that is output from the main control MPU 1310a as a command. Only the information that the gate sensor 2401 has detected that the ball has passed is output as a command, and the peripheral control MPU 1530a determines whether the detection by the gate sensor 2401 has been performed in a non-time-short state. And processing related to the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) may be performed based on the detection by the gate sensor 2401 in a non-time-short state.

  When assigning the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) to the channel X, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time-short state is copied to various control data in the peripheral control ROM 1530b or the peripheral control RAM 1530c. It is extracted from the area and set to 1530cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c. Then, by assigning the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) to the channel X, the notification sound such as “please return to the left-handed” is reproduced in a predetermined processing mode (loop). It becomes like this.

  At this time, the peripheral control MPU 1530a extracts the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time-short state from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1530b or the peripheral control RAM 1530c, and schedule data in the peripheral control RAM 1530c. By setting 1530cae in the storage area, the above-described display in the liquid crystal is also executed. Execution of the display in the liquid crystal becomes a notification end (a timer (20 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is timed up), which is a release condition of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance). Will continue to run. In addition, regarding the processing of the third notification group having a low possibility of fraud, importance is placed on avoiding the progress of the production, and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time-short state is set. It will never be done.

  Through such processing, a notification sound such as “please return to the left” is repeatedly executed for 20 seconds from the timing tγ1, and the display on the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed until the notification sound is ended. The display in the area (for example, “please return to the left”) is executed.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 279 (c), at the timing tγ2 when 20 seconds have not elapsed since the timing tγ1 and a notification sound such as “please return to the left” is in the state of loop reproduction, step S82 or A case is assumed in which the full-bottom detection sensor 279 detects that the lower pan is full in the process of S84 (FIG. 212). In this regard, in the main control MPU 1310a, information indicating that the lower pan full has been detected is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510, as in the case of the timing tγ1 when the right-handed detection in the non-time-short state is detected. Thereby, in the process of step S92 (FIG. 212), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 so that the information (lower pan full tank detection) is provided to the process related to the notification in the peripheral control MPU 1530a. Become.

  On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1530a, at the timing tγ2 (or immediately after) the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is in the output state (reproduction state), the command is received in the received command analysis process in step S1022 (FIG. 230). As a result of the analysis, even if it is understood that the information about the detection of the full-bottom plate is included, the alarm sound 7 (ball removal guidance) shown in FIG. 278 is displayed on the channel in the warning process in step S1024 (FIG. 230). Do not assign to X. That is, since the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) having the same priority is already assigned to the channel X, the notification sound 7 (ball guidance) is not newly assigned to the channel X. Thus, the reproduction of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) on the side already assigned is preferentially executed and continued.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU 1530a according to this embodiment does not set the sound generation schedule data itself corresponding to the detection of the lower pan full tank at timing tγ2. Therefore, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) is not subjected to the expansion process in a state where it is not assigned to the channel X.

  However, in the peripheral control MPU 1530a according to this embodiment, at the timing tγ2 (or immediately after that), a timer (20 for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) that has not been set yet) Second) is set, and when the output state (reproduction state) of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) ends, when the timer (20 seconds) has not timed up, the lower pan is full. Set the schedule data for sound generation according to the detection, and assign the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) to channel X for the remaining time, and the notification mode (in this case, “Pull the ball on the lower plate. The notification sound reproduction is executed in the “loop”.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU 1530a does not set the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the detection of the lower pan full at the timing tγ2 (or immediately after that), but generates the screen corresponding to the detection of the lower pan full. The schedule data is extracted from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1530b or the peripheral control RAM 1530c and set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c in 1530cae, so that the above-mentioned liquid crystal display is executed. ing.

  In the liquid crystal display, a display corresponding to the ball removal guidance appears separately at a position different from the position where the display corresponding to the left-handed guidance is performed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. It has become.

  After that, at timing tγ3 when 20 seconds have elapsed from timing tγ1, a notification sound such as “Please return to left-handed” is issued based on the timer (20 seconds) of notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) being up. The loop process that is repeatedly executed is terminated. Here, since the time required to reproduce the notification sound such as “Return to left-handed” once is set to 10 seconds, the timer (30 seconds) of notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is set. At the time tγ3 when the time is up, the loop processing is finished at a good timing when the notification sound such as “please return to the left” has been reproduced twice.

  At this time, since the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) is not up, the peripheral control MPU 1530a sets the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the detection of the full lower tray. Then, by assigning the notification sound 7 (ball guidance) to the channel X for the remaining time (the time obtained by subtracting the time (γ) from the timing tγ2 to the timing tγ3 from 20 seconds), the notification mode (here) Then, the notification sound reproduction in the “please remove the ball of the lower plate” loop is executed.

  In other words, at timing tγ2, while setting the timer for the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance), the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the detection of the full tray is not set, but is set when timing tγ3 is reached. Therefore, at the timing tγ3, the notification sound “please remove the ball in the lower plate” can be reproduced from the head and the timer of the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) is timed up. , So that the loop processing is terminated at the halfway timing of the notification sound such as “Please remove the ball from the lower plate” (for example, “Please remove the ball from the lower plate”) and will not be played back. Can be encouraged.

  According to such a configuration, when one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced, the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied (see FIG. 279 (c)) When the second message sound (here “return to the left”) is finished playing, the third message sound (here “extract the ball on the lower plate”) Smooth notification sound switching as if it was reproduced can be realized. As a result, “please return to the left” and “please pull out the ball on the lower plate” are connected at a strange place, and the occurrence of a situation where the notification content cannot be recognized is suitably suppressed. Will be able to.

  In the third notification group according to this embodiment, as described above, after the message sound is output, the 5-second silence data is assigned to the channel X, and the sound corresponding to that is output (silence output). It is like that. Therefore, when one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced and when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied, silence data of 5 seconds is sandwiched. Since the message sound of another notification sound is played back, the occurrence of a situation in which two different message sounds are connected by the absence of an alarm sound and the notification content cannot be recognized is preferable. It will be possible to avoid.

  FIG. 280 (a) shows an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced. It is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 280 (a), if there is a magnetic detection by the magnetic sensor 2404 in the process of step S84 (FIG. 212) at the timing t-1 when no notification sound is output, the magnetic Regarding the processing according to the detection (magnetic abnormality processing), the same processing as that described with reference to FIG. 279 (a) is performed. Accordingly, at timing t-1, a loop process for repeatedly executing a notification sound such as “Boo-boo magnet has been detected” is started, and the timer (60 seconds) of notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is timed up. At t-3, the loop processing is terminated at a good timing when the notification sound “Boo-boo magnetism has been detected” has been reproduced six times. In addition, the display in the liquid crystal and the lamp lighting are continuously executed until the power is turned on again, which is a condition for canceling the magnetic abnormality.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 280 (a), the timing t-2 when 60 seconds have not elapsed since the timing t-1 and a notification sound such as “Booming magnetism has been detected” is in a loop reproduction state. , It is assumed that the door opening detection is performed by the door frame opening switch 618 within the process of step S82 or S84 (FIG. 212). In this respect, the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) according to the magnetic detection has a higher priority than the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) according to the door opening detection (see FIG. 277). ), Even if door opening detection occurs, the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is continued.

  In general, as for the processing on the lower priority side, as in the case where the processing of the same priority described with reference to FIGS. 279 (a) to (c) overlaps, the notification sound on the lower priority side is transmitted. Only the timer is set and the sound generation schedule data itself is not set.

  However, the situation where the door is opened immediately after the occurrence of a magnetic abnormality is different from the case where the door is simply opened, and there is a high possibility that some sort of fraud has occurred. It can be said that it is hard to say that the notification belongs to the “second notification group with a medium possibility of fraud”. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 280 (a), at timing t-2, neither the alarm sound 4 (door opening) timer corresponding to the door opening detection nor the sound generation schedule data is set. Only set the flag according to the detection of door opening. Then, at timing t-3, based on the flag being set, a notification sound 4 (door opening) timer corresponding to the door opening detection and a sound generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection are respectively obtained. As well as setting, notification sound 4 (door open) is assigned to channel X, and notification sound reproduction in the notification mode (here, “the door is open ping-pong ping-pong” loop) is started. . Note that the display in the liquid crystal and the lamp lighting in response to the detection of the door opening are started from the timing t-2.

  According to such a configuration, while the alarm sound such as “Boo-boo magnet was detected” was detected during the loop playback, the door frame opening switch 618 detected the door opening, but “Boo-boo magnet was detected. "From the timing t-3 when the alarm sound loop playback ends, the notification sound 4 (door opening) corresponding to the door opening detection is played back for 30 seconds, and the" door is open ping-pong ping-pong " That is, the loop processing is finished at a good timing when the notification sound is reproduced three times. As described above, the notification sound 4 (door opening) corresponding to the door opening detection is reproduced in a more polite notification mode different from the processing based on the normal priority order, so that the notification belonging to the second notification group. Although it is a content (here, a “door is open ping-pong ping-pong” loop), it is expected to promote recognition that the possibility of fraud is high.

  In addition, after the notification sound “Boo-boo magnet detected”, the notification content starts from the message sound (the door is open), so that the first notification group in the most tense situation The notification to which it belongs can be recognized at an early stage that it has been terminated. On the other hand, the alarm sound “ping-pong ping-pong” is reproduced after the message sound, so that it is possible to easily recognize that it is not a notification belonging to the third notification group.

  FIG. 280 (b) shows an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced. It is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 280 (b), when the door opening detection is performed by the door frame opening switch 618 in the process of step S82 or S84 (FIG. 212) at the timing tδ1 when no notification sound is output. As for the processing corresponding to the door opening detection (door opening processing), the same processing as the “processing according to frame opening detection (frame opening processing)” described with reference to FIG. 279 (b) is performed. Is called. Therefore, at timing tδ1, a loop process for repeatedly executing a notification sound such as “door is open ping-pong ping-pong” is started, and timing tδ3 when the timer (30 seconds) of notification sound 4 (door open) has timed up. Then, the loop process will be completed at a good timing when the notification sound such as “door is open ping-pong ping-pong” has been reproduced three times. In addition, the display in the liquid crystal and the lamp lighting are executed continuously until the door closing is detected as a door opening release condition.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 280 (b), at the timing tδ2 where 30 seconds have not elapsed since the timing tδ1 and a notification sound such as “the door is open ping-pong ping-pong” is in the state of loop playback. A case is assumed in which right-handed detection in a non-time-short state is detected by the gate sensor 2401 within the processing of S84 or S86 (FIG. 212). In this regard, the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) according to the door opening detection has a higher priority than the processing of the notification sound 6 (left-hand guidance) according to the right-handed detection in the non-time-short state. For this reason (see FIG. 277), the process of the notification sound 4 (door opening) is continuously performed even when the right-handed detection in the non-time-short state occurs.

  That is, as described above, regarding the processing on the lower priority side, the notification sound on the lower priority side is the same as in the case where the processing of the same priority described with reference to FIGS. 279 (a) to (c) overlaps. Only the timer is set, and the sound generation schedule data itself is not set.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 280 (b), at timing tδ2, while setting the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance), sound generation corresponding to right-handed detection in a non-time-short state is performed. No schedule data is set. At time tδ3, when the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is not up, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time-short state is set, and the remaining time The notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is assigned to the channel X by the number of minutes, and the notification sound is reproduced in the notification mode (here, the “return to left-handed” loop).

  According to such a configuration, the notification sound such as “The door is open ping-pong ping-pong” has been reproduced three times, and the notification sound that does not include the warning sound “Please return to the left” at a good timing. Thus, it is possible to easily recognize that the possibility of fraud has decreased while continuing the notification state. In the third notification group according to this embodiment, as described above, after the message sound is output, the 5-second silence data is assigned to the channel X, and the sound corresponding to that is output (silence output). It is like that. Therefore, even with such silence data, the type of notification sound that has been reproduced so far has ended, and it can be easily recognized that the notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced. It becomes like this.

  FIG. 280 (c) shows an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced. It is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 280 (c), when the door opening detection is performed by the door frame opening switch 618 in the process of step S82 or S84 (FIG. 212) at the timing tε1 when no notification sound is output. As for the processing corresponding to the door opening detection (door opening processing), the same processing as the “processing according to frame opening detection (frame opening processing)” described with reference to FIG. 279 (b) is performed. Is called. Therefore, at timing tε1, a loop process for repeatedly executing a notification sound such as “the door is open ping-pong ping-pong” is started, and the timing tε3 at which the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 4 (door open) has timed up. Then, the loop process will be completed at a good timing when the notification sound such as “door is open ping-pong ping-pong” has been reproduced three times. In addition, the display in the liquid crystal and the lamp lighting are executed continuously until the door closing is detected as a door opening release condition.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 280 (c), at the timing tε2 when 30 seconds have not elapsed from the timing tε1 and a notification sound such as “the door is open ping-pong ping-pong” is in the state of loop reproduction, step S84. It is assumed that the magnetic sensor 2404 detects magnetism in the process of FIG. In this regard, the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) according to the door opening detection has a lower priority than the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) according to the magnetic detection by the magnetic sensor 2404 ( 277), giving priority to the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) according to the magnetic detection by the magnetic sensor 2404, and the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) is output for both sound and lamp lighting. The contents will not be reflected as the operation of each actuator. In addition, since the display in the liquid crystal is displayed at different positions in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 for each notification, priority is given during the execution of the notification with a low priority. Even in the case where a high-priority notification is generated, the in-liquid crystal display on the lower priority side is maintained.

  Here, with respect to the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening), as a method for preventing the output contents from being reflected as the operation of each actuator in either the sound or the lamp lighting, it has been set so far at the timing tε2. A process for canceling the sound generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation schedule data in accordance with the detection of the door opening from the set state may be performed.

  In this respect, in this embodiment, not only the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection but also the sound generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection at the timing tε2. Are kept in a set state, and the sound generation schedule data, the screen generation schedule data, and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection that has a higher priority than the respective data are respectively set. Put it in a state. Then, the assignment to the channel X and various lamp operations is performed based on the sound generation schedule data according to the door opening detection and the light emission mode generation schedule data, and the sound generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation according to the magnetic detection. By switching to the content based on the schedule data for use, the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) corresponding to the magnetic detection by the magnetic sensor 2404 can be performed regardless of whether it is sound, display in liquid crystal, or lamp lighting. Is reflected as the operation of each actuator.

  According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 280 (c), at timing tε2, the low-priority processing in the execution state (processing at the time of opening the door) does not perform any operation. The notification content can be changed based on the priority between two different processes (door opening process and magnetic abnormality process).

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 280 (c), at timing tδ2, a loop process for repeatedly executing a notification sound such as “Boo-boo magnet has been detected” is started, and a timer for notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is started. The loop processing is terminated at a good timing when the notification sound such as “Boo-Bou magnetism has been detected” has been reproduced six times in accordance with the time-up of (60 seconds). In addition, the display in the liquid crystal and the lamp lighting are continuously executed until the power is turned on again, which is a condition for canceling the magnetic abnormality.

  According to such a configuration, immediately after the occurrence of magnetic detection that is highly likely to be fraudulent, the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is performed in any of sound, in-liquid crystal display, and lamp lighting. The output contents are reflected as the operation of each actuator. Moreover, since an alarm sound such as “boo-boo” is first reproduced as the notification sound, the notification belonging to the first notification group is performed, and the fact that the situation has changed to a tense situation is quickly transmitted to the hall side. That is expected.

  FIG. 280 (d) shows an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced. It is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 280 (d), at the timing tζ1 when no notification sound is output, right-handed detection in the non-time-short state by the gate sensor 2401 is performed within the processing of step S84 or S86 (FIG. 212). If there is, the processing corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time-short state (left-handed guidance processing) is performed in the same manner as described with reference to FIG. 279 (c). Therefore, at timing tζ1, a loop process for repeatedly executing a notification sound such as “please return to the left” is started, and timing tζ3 when the timer (20 seconds) of notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is timed up. Then, the loop processing is ended at a good timing when the notification sound “Please return to left-handed” has been reproduced twice. In addition, the display in the liquid crystal and the lamp lighting are continuously executed until the timer of the notification sound, which is a condition for canceling the left-handed guidance, is continued.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 280 (d), at time tζ2 in which a notification sound such as “please return to the left-handed” is in a state where loop notification is in progress since 20 seconds have not elapsed since time tζ1, step S82 or It is assumed that the door opening detection is performed by the door frame opening switch 618 in the process of S84 (FIG. 212). In this regard, the processing of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) according to the right-handed detection in the non-short-time state has a lower priority than the processing of the notification sound 4 (door-opening) according to the door opening detection. Therefore (see FIG. 277), priority is given to the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) according to the detection of the door opening, and the output content of the processing of the notification sound 6 (left-hand guidance) is reflected as the operation of the actuator. Will not be done. In addition, since the display in the liquid crystal is displayed at different positions in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 for each notification, priority is given during the execution of the notification with a low priority. Even in the case where a high-priority notification is generated, the in-liquid crystal display on the lower priority side is maintained.

  Here, with respect to the processing of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance), as a technique for preventing the output contents from being reflected as the operation of the actuator, the right-handed detection in the non-short-time state that has been set so far is performed at the timing tζ2. Processing for canceling the sound generation schedule data according to the set state may be performed.

  In this respect, in this embodiment, at the timing tζ2, not only the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time-short state but also the sound-generation schedule data corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time-short state. The screen generation schedule data and the light emission mode according to the door opening detection as well as the sound generation schedule data according to the door opening detection having higher priority than this are maintained. Set the generation schedule data to the set state. Then, the assignment to the channel X is switched from the content based on the sound generation schedule data according to the right-handed detection in the non-time-short state to the content based on the sound generation schedule data according to the door opening detection. Thus, the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) according to the detection of the door opening is made so that the output contents are reflected as the operation of each actuator in any of sound, liquid crystal display, and lamp lighting.

  According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 280 (d), at timing tζ2, the low-priority processing in the execution state (left-handed guidance processing) is performed without any operation. The notification content can be changed based on the priority order between two different processes (left-hand guidance process and door opening process).

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 280 (d), at timing tζ2, a loop process for repeatedly executing a notification sound such as “the door is open ping-pong ping-pong” is started, and the notification sound 4 (door opening) As the timer (30 seconds) expires, the loop processing is terminated at a good timing when the notification sound such as “door is open ping-pong ping-pong” has been reproduced three times. In addition, the display in the liquid crystal and the lamp lighting are continuously performed until the door closing detection which is the release condition of the door opening is performed.

  According to such a configuration, as soon as the detection of door opening that is likely to be fraudulent occurs, notification sound 4 (door opening) is processed by sound, display in liquid crystal, lamp lighting. In either case, the output content is reflected as the operation of each actuator. Moreover, since the notification sound is first played from the message sound (the door is open), the person who is playing the appropriate game will not feel disgust, Notifications belonging to the second notification group are made by the alarm sound of “Ping-Pong”, and it is expected to promptly notify the hall side that it has been switched to a situation where there is a possibility of fraud. .

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a plurality of notification sounds shown in FIG. 277 are to be output, various processes are performed by performing the above-described processes according to the priority order. Although only a single channel (channel X) is used for the notification sound, it is possible to appropriately notify abnormal contents, game guidance, and the like (channel saving type control structure). However, as described above, the notification sound belonging to the second notification group having a medium fraud possibility may be higher than the medium depending on other detection situations. It is difficult to say that the current state of the gaming machine is properly notified only by the control based on the priority order.

  In addition, the notification sound is output not only when there is an abnormality detection with a high possibility of fraud but also when there is an abnormality detection with a low possibility of fraud. is there. In other words, if there is an abnormality detection that is likely to have been fraudulent, it is required to output a notification sound as long as the detection state continues. If there is, there is a possibility that such a detection state may be maintained for the convenience of the hall (such as recovery from various errors), so even if the detection state is continued, the output of the notification sound is not necessarily performed. It is important to be able to execute more flexible notification processing depending on the situation of the pachinko machine 1 such as not being required to continue.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in each situation illustrated in FIG. 281 to FIG. 286, in addition to the control based on the above-described priority order, special conditions are also taken into consideration to further improve the state of the gaming machine. Notification in a manner that enables appropriate expression is realized. Hereinafter, the special notification process will be described for each situation with reference to FIGS. 281 to 286.

  In the example shown in FIG. 281, door opening detection by the door frame opening switch 618 occurs at timing tα11 when no notification sound is output. Then, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection is set and the notification sound is assigned to the channel X, and the screen generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection are also included. Set state. At this time, by setting a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door opening), the notification sound corresponding to the detection of the door opening is set to 30 until the timing tα12 arrives. It will be played for seconds.

  On the other hand, the display in the liquid crystal according to the door opening detection is maintained until the timing tα16 at which the door opening is not detected by the door frame opening switch 618 is reached.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 281, at the timing tα13 when the notification sound reproduction according to the detection of door opening is completed and the channel X is in an empty state, the priority regarding notification is relatively high. Magnetic detection by 2404 occurs. Therefore, regarding the lamp light emission corresponding to the detection of the opening of the door started from timing tα11, although the emission mode generation schedule data is maintained in the set state until the timing tα16 arrives, regarding allocation to various lamp operations. At timing tα13, the lamp emission mode is switched according to the magnetic detection.

  That is, at timing tα13, sound generation schedule data corresponding to magnetism detection is set and the notification sound is assigned to channel X, and screen generation schedule data and light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to magnetism detection are also included. They are set. At this time, a timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is set, so that the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is set for 60 seconds until the timing tα14 arrives. To be played over.

  On the other hand, regarding the display in the liquid crystal and the lamp emission corresponding to the magnetic detection, the display and the emission are maintained unless the power is turned off.

  By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 281, when the alarm sound reproduction according to the door opening detection has been completed and the door opening detection by the door frame opening switch 618 is still continuing, the magnetic sensor 2404 is present. Magnetic detection due to. Such a situation means that a person who intends to perform some unauthorized manipulation opens the door frame 3 and opens it, and then waits for the notification sound reproduction in response to the detection of the door opening to end. It is assumed that there is a possibility that the magnet is instantaneously within the detection range of the magnetic sensor 2404 when attempting to secretly place an improper purpose magnet inside the door frame 3 in a cold state, which is extremely malicious Since it is an act, there is a concern that it is insufficient as a countermeasure only to perform the notification sound processing according to the magnetic detection. On the other hand, since the state of magnetic detection by the magnetic sensor 2404 has already been turned off, even if any countermeasure is taken, magnetic detection cannot be used as an opportunity.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection is finished at the timing tα14, the door opening detection by the door frame opening switch 618 is still continued. Based on this, the “sound generation schedule data corresponding to the detection of door opening” in which the notification sound reproduction has already been notified for the notification time (30 seconds) is set again, and the notification sound is transmitted to the channel X. Special processing to reassign to is performed. In this case, the notification sound corresponding to the detection of the door opening for 30 seconds until the timing tα15 arrives by setting the timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door opening). Is played.

  In such a configuration, the notification sound corresponding to the detection of the door opening that has already been in the end state is played back in a form connected to the “reproduction of the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection”, so that there is a great discomfort in the hall. It will be expected to attract everyone's attention. In addition, as a person who commits fraud, he is already relieved that “when the magnetic alarm is over, all of the alarm sound playback has been completed, and it is finally possible to make it inconspicuous that fraudulent acts have been performed.” Because the notification sound corresponding to the detection of the door opening that should have ended is played, an unexpected notification situation will occur, so it is expected to recognize that further fraudulent activities are too risky It becomes like this.

  As will be described later, in this embodiment, during the period in which the notification process belonging to the first notification group is being performed and during the period in which the notification process belonging to the second notification group is being performed, A process of suppressing the volume of the assigned effect sound during the symbol change and the other game sounds (a process of reducing the volume to a specific value) is performed. The specific value may be volume 0. During the period in which the notification process belonging to the third notification group is being performed, the volume of the effect sound that is assigned to other channels and the other game sounds are not suppressed.

  Here, the period during which the notification process is performed (the period for which the volume is to be suppressed) refers to whether any of the sensors used in the first notification group or the second notification group is in a specific detection state (abnormal It is a period in which the conditions of whether the notification sound belonging to the first notification group or the second notification group is being reproduced (whether the notification sound is being reproduced) are satisfied. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 281, the symbol variation occurs based on the fact that the period of the timing tα11 to tα13 and the period of the timing tα14 to tα16 are during the period in which the notification process is performed by the first notification group. A process for suppressing the volume of the production sound and the other game sounds (a process for reducing the volume to a specific value) is performed, and during the period from timing tα13 to tα14, notification by the first notification group and the second notification group Based on the fact that the process is being performed, a process (a process for reducing the volume to a specific value) that suppresses the volume of the effect sound that is changing the symbol and the other game sounds is performed.

  In this embodiment, both the notification processing by the first notification group and the second notification group are performed during the period when only the notification processing by the first notification group is performed (timing tα11 to tα13, tα14 to tα16). During the period, the volume of the effect sound that is changing the symbol and the volume of the other game sounds are reduced to the same value, but both the notification processing by the first notification group and the second notification group are performed. During the period, a process of reducing the value to a value lower than during the period in which only the notification process by the first notification group is performed may be performed. That is, in this case, it is possible to recognize that there are a plurality of notification states only by confirming the effect sound other than the notification, and it is expected that the initial movement on the hall side will be further accelerated.

  In the example shown in FIG. 281, at the timing tα16 when the door opening detection is terminated, the processing for suppressing the volume of the effect sound during the symbol variation and the other game sounds is terminated. However, if the notification sound corresponding to the detection of door opening that was already in the finished state was played back in a form linked to “reproduction of the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection”, there was a possibility that an extremely malicious act was performed. In view of this, even when the timing of opening the door is terminated, tα16, the volume of the effect sound during the fluctuation of the symbol and the other game sounds may not be suppressed, and this may be continued.

  In the example shown in FIG. 281, as is clear from the processing according to the door opening detection, the in-liquid crystal display corresponding to the door opening detection is displayed during the period in which the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection is reproduced. The start period and the end period of the lamp light emission in a mode corresponding to the detection of the opening of the door are all made different, although the start period is the same. As described above, only a single channel (channel X) is used for various types of notification sounds by operating them so as to have different roles for the notification sound, display in liquid crystal, and lamp emission. However, it is possible to appropriately notify the abnormal content, game guidance, and the like.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 282, after the notification sound (timing tα21 to tα22) corresponding to the detection of the opening of the door is finished, right-handed detection in the non-short-time state by the gate sensor 2401 occurs at timing tα23. Assume the case. However, in this example, unlike the example shown in FIG. 281, since the possibility that an extremely malicious act is performed is low, the notification sound reproduction according to the right-handed detection in the non-time-short state is terminated. At the timing tα24, the notification sound according to the detection of the door opening that has already ended is not reproduced again. In addition, during the period from timing tα22 to timing tα23, the suppression mode of the volume of the effect sound during the pattern change and the other game sounds is not changed. By the way, even after the notification sound (timing tα21 to tα22) corresponding to the door opening detection is finished, even when the frame opening detection occurs instead of the right-handed detection in the non-time-short state by the gate sensor 2401, it is extremely malicious. Therefore, when the notification sound corresponding to this is finished, the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection already in the end state is not reproduced again.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 283, magnetic detection by the magnetic sensor 2404 occurs at timing tα33 after the notification sound (timing tα31 to tα32) corresponding to the detection of door opening is completed. Is the same. However, in the example shown in FIG. 283, it is assumed that the door frame 3 is closed and the door opening detection is ended at the timing tα34 within the period in which the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is being reproduced. Yes.

  In the example shown in FIG. 283, at the timing tα35 at which the notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection is ended, the notification sound according to the door opening detection already in the end state is “notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection”. There is no such thing as being played back in a connected form. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 283, as in the case of the example shown in FIG. 281, a person who intends to perform some illegal work opens the door frame 3 to open it, and then detects the door opening. In response to the end of the corresponding notification sound reproduction, the magnet is momentarily placed in the detection range of the magnetic sensor 2404 when an attempt is made to secretly place an improper magnet inside the door frame 3 in a cold state. A possible situation is assumed. However, after timing tα34, considering that the door frame 3 is in a non-illegal state where the door frame 3 is closed and no magnetic detection occurs, the magnetic detection is performed in spite of being in such a non-illegal state. It is considered that the notification sound is played sufficiently until the timing tα35 arrives, and it is considered that it plays a sufficient role as the notification sound processing, and the channel X is freed when the further notification sound processing becomes necessary. It can be said that it is more beneficial to keep it in a state. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 283, although only a single channel (channel X) is used for various types of notification sounds, abnormal contents, game guidance, and the like can be appropriately notified.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 284, the magnetic detection by the magnetic sensor 2404 occurs at the timing tα43 after the notification sound (timing tα41 to tα42) corresponding to the detection of the door opening is ended, as shown in FIG. Same as example. However, in the example shown in FIG. 284, it is assumed that the magnetic detection by the magnetic sensor 2404 occurs again at the timing tα44 within the period in which the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is being reproduced.

  That is, in the example shown in FIG. 284, after the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the detection of the door opening is completed, an attempt is made to secretly place an improper purpose magnet inside the door frame 3 in a state where the warming is cooled. Sometimes a magnet momentarily enters the detection range of the magnetic sensor 2404, and a magnetic abnormality notification sound is reproduced accordingly. It is assumed that it is going to be put again, and there is a possibility that a more malicious fraud is being carried out. Therefore, in this example, when the magnetic detection by the magnetic sensor 2404 occurs again at the timing tα44, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection is kept in the set state, while the notification sound 1 ( A process for resetting a timer (60 seconds) for measuring a notification time of (magnetic abnormality) is performed.

  According to such a configuration, the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection for a longer time from when the first magnetic detection is performed until 60 seconds have elapsed from the timing tα44 at which the second magnetic detection is performed. Can be played continuously. In this case, the notification sound such as “Boo-boo magnet has been detected” is continuously reproduced over a period from timing tα43 to timing tα45. And finally, the loop processing is not finished at the timing when the notification sound such as “Boo-boo magnet was detected” is good, for example, “Boo-boo magnet is detected”, and the loop processing is finished As a result, it will be expected that everyone will be attracted attention by creating a sense of incongruity in the hall.

  Furthermore, at the timing tα44 at which 60 seconds have elapsed from the timing tα44 at which the second magnetic detection was made, the notification sound reproduction has already been reported for the notification time (30 seconds). The sound generation schedule data corresponding to the detection is set again, and special processing for reassigning the notification sound to the channel X is performed. In this case, the notification sound corresponding to the detection of the door opening for 30 seconds until the timing tα15 arrives by setting the timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door opening). Is played.

  In such a configuration, the notification sound corresponding to the detection of the door opening that has already been in the closed state is reproduced in a manner linked to the “reproduction of the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection”, and the midway such as “detecting the boo-boo magnetism”. It is played back in a form linked to “notification sound playback according to magnetism detection” in which the loop processing is terminated at an odd timing. Therefore, the priority state of the notification sound according to the detection of the door opening that has already ended is increased, and a notification mode appears as if the notification sound of the magnetic detection was reproduced in the middle, and appeared in the hall. It will be expected that everyone's attention will be gathered with a greater sense of incongruity.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 285, the magnetic detection by the magnetic sensor 2404 occurs at the timing tα53 after the notification sound (timing tα51 to tα52) corresponding to the door opening detection ends, as shown in FIG. Same as example. However, in the example shown in FIG. 285, it is assumed that vibration detection by the vibration sensor 2405 occurs at timing tα54 that is within the period in which the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is being reproduced.

  Even in the example shown in FIG. 285, when the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the detection of the door opening is completed and an attempt is made to secretly place an improper magnet inside the door frame 3 in a state where the warming is cold. Even though a magnet instantaneously enters the detection range of the magnetic sensor 2404 and a magnetic anomaly notification sound is reproduced accordingly, the pachinko machine 1 is greatly shaken without suffering from such a situation. It is assumed that there is a possibility that more malicious fraud is being carried out. Therefore, in this example, at the timing tα55 at which the notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection is terminated, the notification sound according to the vibration detection is reproduced in a form connected to the “notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection”. At the timing tα56 at which the notification sound reproduction according to the vibration detection is terminated, the notification sound according to the door opening detection that has already been in the finished state is reproduced in a manner further linked to the “notification sound reproduction according to the vibration detection”. ing.

  In addition, at the timing tα54 when the vibration detection by the vibration sensor 2405 occurs, the timer (60 for notifying the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection and counting the notification time of the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) Second), and at a timing tα55 at which the reproduction of the notification sound according to the magnetic detection ends, the sound generation schedule data according to the vibration detection is set and the notification sound is assigned to the channel X. .

  According to such a configuration, a notification sound such as “Boo-boost vibration has been detected” is not terminated at a good timing, for example, the loop processing is not completed at a halfway timing such as “Boo-boost vibration is detected”. Since the process will be terminated, it will be expected that everyone will be attracted with a great sense of incongruity in the hall.

  Furthermore, at the timing tα56 at which the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the vibration detection is terminated, the notification sound reproduction has already been notified for the notification time (30 seconds) “for sound generation according to the door open detection” A special process is performed in which “schedule data” is set again and the notification sound is reassigned to channel X. In this case, the notification sound corresponding to the detection of the door opening for 30 seconds until the timing tα15 arrives by setting the timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door opening). Is played.

  In such a configuration, the notification sound according to the door opening detection already in the end state is further connected to the “notification sound reproduction according to the vibration detection” connected to the “notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection”. In addition to being played back at the same time, it is played back in a form linked to “playback of notification sound in response to vibration detection” at which the loop processing is terminated at an abrupt timing such as “detecting booby vibration”. Therefore, the priority state of the notification sound according to the door opening detection already in the end state becomes high, and a notification mode appears as if the notification sound of vibration detection was reproduced in the middle, and appeared in the hall It will be expected that everyone's attention will be gathered with a greater sense of incongruity.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 286, it is assumed that magnetic detection by the magnetic sensor 2404 occurs at the timing tα63 after the notification sound (timing tα61 to tα62) corresponding to the detection of the opening of the frame is completed, not the door opening detection. doing.

  In the example shown in FIG. 286, it can be said that the situation where the magnetic detection further occurs immediately after the detection of the frame opening is high is a possibility of performing some kind of fraud. However, on the other hand, if a magnet is used for the purpose of fraud, the door frame 3 should be opened. Even if the body frame 4 is opened, it is beneficial to arrange the magnets. Therefore, it can be said that there is a possibility that the magnetic sensor 2404 may be erroneously detected when the magnet is used to eliminate the clogging of the ball in the ball tank or the payout passage.

  Therefore, also in the example shown in FIG. 286, at the timing tα64 at which the notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection is ended, the notification sound according to the frame opening detection that has already been in the end state is “the notification sound according to the magnetic detection”. By reproducing in the form of “reproduction” (timing tα64 to tα65), it is expected that a great sense of incongruity will be generated in the hole and everyone's attention will be gathered. However, after that, at the timing tα66 when the body frame 4 is closed and the frame opening detection is ended, not only each notification process (notification sound, display in liquid crystal, lamp) according to the frame opening detection but also according to the magnetic detection. Each notification process (notification sound, in-liquid crystal display, lamp) is also subjected to a special process for ending them.

  According to such a configuration, while performing a function against fraud appropriately, in the event of erroneous detection on the hall side, only the body frame 4 is closed, and notification processing corresponding to frame opening detection and magnetic detection ( Notification sound, in-liquid crystal display, and lamp) can all be terminated, so that it is expected to quickly maintain the atmosphere in the hall by speeding up the response on the hole side to false detection. Become.

  In the example shown in FIG. 286, even when the body frame 4 is closed and the frame opening detection is ended when the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is being reproduced, the frame opening detection is not performed. Not only for each notification process (notification sound, display in liquid crystal, lamp) according to detection of opening of the frame, but also for each notification process (notification sound, display in liquid crystal, lamp) according to magnetism detection You may make it perform the special process which complete | finishes.

  By the way, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is equipped with a player-side volume adjustment function.

  For example, the peripheral control MPU 1530a monitors whether or not the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are operated in the process of step S1108 (see FIG. 232), and the effect selection left button 331 is operated. If it is determined that the setting value (player setting value) by the player is reduced with respect to the volume of the speaker, and if it is determined that the effect selection right button 332 has been operated, the setting of the speaker volume by the player Processing to increase the value (player set value) is performed. In addition, when the player set value is lowered and the actually reduced volume is output from the speaker, a volume adjustment completion sound (for example, “Pi!”) Is output at the volume value after the decrease. On the other hand, when the player setting value is increased and the actually increased volume is output from the speaker, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, “pip!”) Is output at the increased volume value. It is possible to grasp how much the volume has been changed after the volume adjustment is completed. As for the volume adjustment completion sound, the same sound may be output when the volume value is lowered and when it is raised. Incidentally, the volume adjustment completion sound has a relatively high priority (for example, “20” which is the same as the button press sound) referred to when there is no empty channel, and the output volume of the production sound ( The change in the volume of the audible sound can be transmitted more reliably.

  Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1530a according to this embodiment, such a volume adjustment process is performed in a period before the game is started (the demo display etc. Not only during the period that can be performed), but also during the period when the game is started and the symbol variation according to the jackpot determination is executed, the player is allowed to accept, and more important effects appeared By making it possible to change the setting of the volume level flexibly at times, the game entertainment is maintained.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 in the situation in which channel assignments of various effect sounds are made according to the progress of the display effect during the execution period of the symbol variation. When it is detected that 1 is in a specific state such as magnetic anomaly or door opening, a specific notification sound corresponding to the detected content among a plurality of types of notification sounds is assigned to a channel and output. At this time, the channel assignment of various effect sounds according to the progress of the display effect itself is not stopped, and the effect progress notification process for reducing the output volume to a specific value can be executed. That is, in this case, even if a specific notification sound is assigned to a channel among a plurality of types of notification sounds, the channel assignment of various effect sounds according to the progress of the display effect itself is not canceled. Thus, as long as the channel assignment or the abnormal state of the specific notification sound is completed, the effect can be enjoyed again by appropriately returning the output volume of the effect sound according to the progress of the effect display.

  However, in the above-described effect progress notification process, the channel assignment of various effect sounds according to the progress of the display effect itself is not stopped, so that only a specific notification sound is assigned to the channel at the normal time ( More channels are used than in the non-informing state, and there are no free channels to which no sound data is assigned before the end of channel assignment (notifying state) of a specific notification sound. Risk tends to be high. If there is no free channel to which no sound data is assigned before the end of the channel assignment (notification state) of a specific notification sound, any of the sound data at that time is lost. Since one channel assignment has to be discarded, after that, even if the channel assignment (notification state) of a specific notification sound is completed, the discarded sound data cannot be assigned to the channel and reproduced. There is a concern that the entertainment interest will decline.

  Concerning the concerns about the vacant channels related to the production sound, there is no direct adverse effect when the fixed channel method is adopted for the channel assignment of the notification sound, but the fixed channel method is adopted for the channel assignment of the notification sound. Whether or not to adopt the automatic channel method should be determined from the viewpoint of the design of the game and the production, so as to the notification process under the progress of production even if any channel method is adopted It is important to prepare a processing structure capable of adopting a common processing program in order to ensure cost reduction and improvement in reliability required for the development of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, in the example described below, either the fixed channel method or the automatic channel method may be adopted for both the notification sound and the effect sound.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if an operation on the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 is performed while the effect progress notification process is being executed, the operation is reduced to a specific value. The output volume of the production sound is not variable and is maintained. That is, in this case, it is not necessary to generate the above-mentioned volume adjustment completion sound (“Pi!” Or “Pi!”) Even if there is an operation by the player while the notification process under the effect progress is being executed. Therefore, it is expected that the channel will have a margin and the risk of vacant channels being lost is promoted.

  However, while the pachinko machine 1 is capable of changing the volume value flexibly when a more important performance appears, the output volume is set while the notification process under the progress of the performance is being executed. If the change cannot be made, when the notification process under the effect progress caused by the error detection or the notification due to the convenience of the hall (door opening, etc.) is executed, the sound volume is appropriately set according to the content of the effect progress. It is inevitable that the game entertainment will decline due to the fact that the setting cannot be changed. Also, as a result of the progress of the presentation during the period in which the notification process under the progress of the presentation is being performed, the output volume (possible) After changing the setting of the volume of the listening sound is allowed, it is necessary to accept a plurality of operations in order to change the sound volume to an appropriate value. However, in this case, the channel is occupied by the above-mentioned volume adjustment completion sound. Thus, there is a concern that the game entertainment will be lowered due to the fact that the effect sound cannot be output properly because there are not enough empty channels even though the notification process under the effect progress is finally finished.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, when an operation for the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 is performed while the effect progress notification process is being executed, the value is reduced to a specific value. The output volume of the produced sound (the volume of the audible sound) is not variable and is maintained, while the player can accept the change of the set value (player set value) of the sound itself. When the effect progress notification process (the process of reducing the output volume to a specific value) is finished, the output volume (audible volume) that reflects all the operations up to that point is collectively changed.

  According to such a configuration, if the player accepts the change of the setting value (player setting value) in accordance with the progress of the presentation while the notification process under the progress of the presentation is being executed, a new operation can be performed. Even when the notification process under the effect progress is finished, the output volume (audible sound volume) reflecting all the operations up to that point can be changed at once. As described above, the notification process under the effect progress is completed by allowing the player to accept the change of the set value (player set value) even during the period when the effect progress notification process is being executed. It will be expected to suppress the decline in the entertainment interests until then. In addition, the volume value (audible sound volume) is changed in multiple stages as soon as the notification process under the progress of the production ends, and a situation occurs in which the empty channel is insufficient due to the volume adjustment completion sound each time. Is also preferably avoided.

  In addition, according to the said structure, when performing the batch change of the output volume to a player setting value, when the notification progress under effect progress is complete | finished, the game in the period when the notification processing under effect progress was performed. Regardless of the number of times the player setting value is changed or the number of operations by the player, etc., the volume adjustment completion sound will be played only once at the volume after the batch change. You may make it output with the sound (for example, "bee!") Of the special aspect different from.

  Furthermore, in order to more preferably resolve the shortage of empty channels when the notification progress under the effect progress is completed, the number of changes in the player setting value during the period during which the notification progress under the effect progress is being executed, or by the player Regardless of the number of operations or the like, it is desirable not to reproduce the volume adjustment completion sound itself when changing the output volume (audible sound volume) at once as the notification process under the progress of production is finished. . According to such a configuration, in particular, although the notification process under the progress of the effect due to the error detection or the notification due to the convenience on the hall side (door opening, etc.) has finally ended, the appropriate effect due to the lack of empty channels It is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of a situation where it becomes impossible to enjoy the video.

  Hereinafter, an example of the process from the execution of the effect progress notification process until the output volume (the volume of the audible sound) is collectively changed will be described.

  FIG. 287 is a diagram for explaining the contents of the notification process under the effect progress according to the notification state of the pachinko machine 1.

  First, prior to explaining the processing from when the effect progressing notification process is executed until the output volume (audible sound volume) is collectively changed, the contents of the effect progress notification process will be described with reference to FIG. 287. A brief explanation will be given. Here, for convenience of explanation, only the notification sounds 1 to 7 illustrated in FIG. 277 are shown, and description of other notification sounds is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 287, in this example, first, two types of suppression modes (first volume suppression mode and second volume suppression mode) are prepared as the volume control mode of the production sound. For example, in the first volume suppression mode, when the player changes the set value (player set value) for the volume, the output sound volume (audible sound volume) in the range of “20” to “50” is changed. Among these, the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) is set to “10”. On the other hand, in the second volume suppression mode, the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) is set to “0”. Therefore, the second volume suppression mode has a higher degree of suppression than the first volume suppression mode. In particular, in this explanation example, although the process relating to the output itself is performed, the effect sound is silenced. It is illustrated as what makes it.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, of the notification sounds 1 to 7, the notification sounds 1 to 3 (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, prize winning abnormality) belonging to the first notification group having a high possibility of fraud. When the notification process regarding any of them is executed, a process of suppressing the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is performed in the second volume suppression mode that is the higher suppression level. In addition, when the notification process regarding any one of the notification sounds 1 to 3 (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, big prize abnormality) belonging to the first notification group is executed, even when abnormality detection is turned off, The output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) in the second volume suppression mode on the higher suppression level until a predetermined time (in this case, 60 seconds) elapses after the abnormality is detected. ) Is not terminated and this is continued.

  In this example, when the notification process related to any one of the notification sounds 1 to 3 (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, big prize abnormality) belonging to the first notification group is executed, the output volume of the production sound (audible sound) The period of time during which the process of suppressing the volume of sound is continued is the same as the period from when the notification sound (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, big prize abnormality) according to abnormality detection is played to when it is terminated Is set to

  On the other hand, when the notification process related to any one of notification sounds 4 and 5 (door opening, frame opening) belonging to the second notification group having a medium possibility of fraud among the notification sounds 1 to 7 is performed, the degree of suppression The process of suppressing the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is performed in the first volume suppression mode on the lower side. However, when the notification process related to any one of the notification sounds 4 and 5 (door opening, frame opening) belonging to the second notification group is executed, when the abnormality detection is turned off immediately after the abnormality detection occurs, Thus, the process of suppressing the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is terminated in the first volume suppression mode that is the low suppression level.

  On the other hand, when the notification process related to any one of the notification sounds 6 and 7 (left-handed guidance and ball removal guidance) belonging to the third notification group related to the game guidance among the notification sounds 1 to 7 is performed. Therefore, no processing is performed to suppress the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound).

  In this example, the suppression mode is different between the case where the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed and the case where the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed. The output volume of the production sound in one suppression mode between the case where the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed and the case where the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed are not necessarily different. You may make it perform the process which suppresses (volume of an audible sound). However, the end condition of the process to be suppressed is different in a case where the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed more strictly than the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed. It is important to make it.

  FIG. 288 shows the contents of the process related to the volume adjustment when the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is operated while the abnormality detection has not occurred and the process related to the notification sound is not executed. It is a figure explaining.

  In this example, the player setting value is varied by “1” within a range of “1” to “5” by an operation with the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332. The volume of the effect sound is set to be smaller as the value is smaller. In addition, the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) is set as a player in a state where the above-described suppression modes (first volume suppression mode and second volume suppression mode) are not set for the production sound. It is set as a numerical value 20 times the value. Therefore, in this example, the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) is made variable in the range of “20” to “100” by the operation by the player.

  Now, as shown in FIG. 288 (A), the player set value is “3” out of “1” to “5” with respect to the volume of the effect sound, and no notification flag is set. Assume that the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is set to “60”, which is 20 times that volume. Also, assuming that the decorative symbol SZ is in a stopped state, and that the jackpot determination has not been made and is in a state of waiting for a start winning prize, the effect selection left button 331 is simulated in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. The displayed display image 331a and the display image 332a imitating the effect selection right button 332 are displayed, and the volume adjustment guidance display OAH is displayed to indicate that the volume can be adjusted through these operations. Further, at this time, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the first volume value display OH1 that makes it possible to recognize which of the current player set values is “1” to “5” is also executed. The The volume adjustment guidance display OAH and the first volume value display OH1 may be displayed at all times, or during a specific period such as a super reach effect that is a reach effect that is executed with the background image changed. In the case of the above, at least one of a first volume value display OH1 and a later-described second volume value display OH2 may appear when the player performs an operation without displaying. Further, both the volume adjustment guidance display OAH and the first volume value display OH1 may not necessarily be displayed, one of them may be omitted, and only the other may be displayed.

  In the situation shown in FIG. 288 (A), when an operation with the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is performed, the player setting value is incremented by “1” each time the operation is performed. As a result, the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) is changed by “20”. In addition, whenever the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) changes, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, “Pi!”) Is played at the volume after the change.

  Further, at this time, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, a second gauge indicating which of the current set values is “1” to “5” that is the range of the player set values is indicated by a gauge display. The volume value display OH2 (see FIG. 288 (C)) is executed in place of the volume adjustment guidance display OAH, which will be described later.

  If the effect selection left button 331 is operated when the player setting value is “1”, neither the player setting value nor the output sound volume (audible sound volume) is reduced. The person set value remains “1” (the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) remains “20”). Therefore, even if the effect selection left button 331 is operated when the player setting value is “1”, the volume adjustment completion sound is not assigned to the channel itself, or even if assigned to the channel, the volume is set to “ It is desirable to prevent audible output by setting it to “0”. The same applies to the case where the effect selection right button 332 is operated when the player setting value is “5”.

  On the other hand, when the start winning is generated and the jackpot determination is performed, as shown in FIG. 288 (B), the decorative symbol SZ varies in a predetermined effect pattern based on the result of the jackpot determination and the type of the variation pattern. Is displayed. In addition, while the decorative design SZ is variably displayed, a predetermined effect is developed and an effect sound corresponding to the progress of the predetermined effect is output.

  In this respect, in the volume adjustment process according to this embodiment, not only the period shown in FIG. 288 (a period during which a demo display or the like can be performed), but also the variation of symbols corresponding to the jackpot determination after the game is started. Even during the period of execution, the player is allowed to accept, for example, when a more important effect such as the reach effect shown in FIG. As described above, the configuration allows the setting change to be made possible.

  That is, FIG. 288 (C) shows a state after the player has performed the operation of the effect selection right button 332 twice in association with the reach effect being executed in the state shown in FIG. 288 (B). In the first operation, the player setting value has been changed from “3” to “4”, and the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) is “60”, which is 20 times the volume. While the setting has been changed to “80”, the volume adjustment completion sound is assigned to a predetermined channel and played at “80”, which is the volume after the change, and in the second operation, The value has been changed from “4” to “5”, and the output volume of the production sound (audible sound volume) has been changed from “80” to “100”, which is 20 times that, Volume adjustment completed at “100”, the volume after the change There and reproduced is assigned to a predetermined channel.

  Further, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to this embodiment, when the player setting value is changed by such an operation, the range of the player setting value is “1” to “5”. Thus, the second volume value display OH2 indicating the current set value by gauge display is executed in place of the volume adjustment guidance display OAH. This is to clarify the current set value for the player set value range of “1” to “5”, and even under a tense situation where a more important performance appears. The purpose is to prevent operation mistakes such as repeated operation of the effect selection right button 332 even though the player setting value is the maximum value “5”. In the gauge display, the numerical value range of “1” to “5” is regularly displayed as blocks, and the number of filled blocks among these blocks is increased / decreased according to the change in the player setting value. Is displayed to show the current player setting value.

  As shown in FIG. 288 (D), the second volume value display OH2 is displayed when there is an operation on the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 in the state shown in FIG. 288 (C). The display is turned off after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed, and thereafter the volume adjustment guidance display OAH is executed again. Therefore, even if the operation is performed in such a manner that the player setting value does not change (operation on the effect selection right button 332 when the player setting value is the maximum value “5”), the effect selection left button 331 is selected. Alternatively, as long as the operation on the effect selection right button 332 is repeated, the display of the second volume value display OH2 is maintained. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, an operation in a mode in which the player setting value does not change (operation on the effect selection right button 332 when the player setting value is the maximum value “5”). When the operation is performed, the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output every time the operation is performed, but the timer value for measuring the time until the second volume value display OH2 is not displayed is reset. Accordingly, it is more preferable to prevent an operation error such as an operation to be repeatedly performed on the effect selection right button 332 even though the player setting value is “5” which is the maximum value. become.

  On the other hand, FIG. 289 shows that the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is operated while the door opening detection occurs during the symbol variation execution period and the process related to the notification sound is executed. It is a figure explaining the content about the process regarding the volume adjustment accompanying that.

  The situation shown in FIG. 289 (A) is the situation before the symbol variation is started, and is the same as the situation described with reference to FIG. 288 (A). In such a situation, when a start winning is generated and a jackpot determination is performed, as shown in FIG. 289 (B), the result or fluctuation of the jackpot determination is the same as the situation described with reference to FIG. 288 (B). Based on the type of pattern, the decorative symbol SZ is variably displayed in a predetermined effect pattern. In addition, while the decorative design SZ is variably displayed, a predetermined effect is developed and an effect sound corresponding to the progress of the predetermined effect is output.

  However, in the situation shown in FIG. 289 (B), the door opening detection belonging to the second notification group occurs during the symbol change execution period, and the processing related to the notification sound 4 (door opening) is executed accordingly. More specifically, a loop process (30 seconds) for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “the door is open ping-pong ping-pong”, and display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (here, “ “When the door is open”) and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are respectively executed.

  In addition, as described above, when the door opening detection belonging to the second notification group occurs during the symbol variation period, and the processing related to the notification sound 4 (door opening) corresponding thereto is executed, the first sound volume suppression mode is used. An effect progress notification process for suppressing the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is performed. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 289 (B), the player setting value is maintained at “3”, which is the same as in the situation of FIG. 289 (A). The sound output volume (the volume of the audible sound) is set to a predetermined first specific value (here, “10”) lower than the original numerical value (20 times the player setting value). The contents of the performance are developed under the volume value.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an operation on the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 is performed while such an effect progress notification process is being executed, the first identification is performed. The output volume of the production sound that is lowered to the value (here, “10”) (the volume of the audible sound) is not variable and is maintained, while the setting value (player setting value) by the player regarding the volume Accepting the change of itself, and when the above-mentioned production progress notification process (the process of reducing the output volume to a specific value) is completed, the output volume (audible volume) that reflects all the operations up to that point It is as described above that they are collectively changed.

  That is, FIG. 289 (C) shows a state after the player performs the operation with the effect selection right button 332 twice in accordance with the reach effect being executed in the state shown in FIG. 289 (B). Although the player setting value has been changed from “3” to “5” by the operation of the effect selection right button 332, the output sound volume (audible sound volume) of the effect sound is the original value (game) It can be seen that the predetermined first specific value (here, “10”) lower than 20 times the user set value) is maintained. Therefore, even if the player performs the operation with the effect selection right button 332 twice, until the above-described effect progress notification process (the process of reducing the output volume to a specific value) is completed, the volume of the effect sound Is not changed, and the content of the performance is developed with the volume of the first specific value.

  At this time, in the first operation among the operations by the player, the player set value is changed from “3” to “4”, but the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) is the first specified. Since the value (here, “10”) is maintained, the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output, and the player setting value is changed from “4” to “5” even in the second operation. However, since the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) is maintained at the first specific value (here, “10”), the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output.

  However, in the first operation, the player setting value itself is changed from “3” to “4”, and the player operation for adjusting the volume is accepted. In the display area of the device 1600, a second volume value display OH2 indicating that the current setting value is “4” among the player setting value ranges “1” to “5” is indicated by a gauge display. This is executed in place of the volume adjustment guidance display OAH, and the numerical value is changed from “3” to “4” and displayed in the first volume value display OH1.

  Also, in the second operation, the player setting value itself changes from “4” to “5”, and the player operation for volume adjustment is accepted. In the display OH2, a gauge display indicates that the current setting value has changed from “4” to “5” in the range of player setting values “1” to “5”, and the first volume value is also displayed. In the display OH1, the numerical value is changed from “4” to “5” and displayed.

  After that, the door frame 3 is closed while the sound volume adjustment guidance display OAH is returned to the state in which the sound volume adjustment guidance display OAH is executed again, and the processing related to the notification sound 4 (door opening) and the effect progress notification processing (output volume to a specific value) 289 (D), as shown in FIG. 289 (D), in response to the completion of the processing, the output volume (audible sound volume) reflecting all the operations up to that time is reflected. Change all at once. That is, in this case, the player setting value is gradually changed from “3” to “4” corresponding to the first operation and “5” corresponding to the second operation during the execution process of the effect progress notification process. Because of the change, the output volume (audible sound volume) is originally “80” corresponding to the first operation from the first specific value (here, “10”), and the second operation. However, the first specific value (here, “10”) should be changed to “100” reflecting all the operations up to that point.

  As described above, the notification process under the effect progress is completed by allowing the player to accept the change of the set value (player set value) even during the period when the effect progress notification process is being executed. It will be expected to suppress the decline in the entertainment interests until then. In addition, the volume value (audible sound volume) is changed in multiple stages immediately after the notification process under the progress of the production, and the empty channel is insufficient or free due to the volume adjustment completion sound each time. The occurrence of such a situation is preferably avoided.

  Moreover, in this example, when the output volume (the volume of the audible sound) is changed in a lump (“10” → “100”) in accordance with the completion of the notification process under the effect progress, the output volume changes. Regardless, the channel assignment of the volume adjustment completion sound is not performed. According to such a configuration, in particular, although the notification process under the progress of the effect due to the error detection or the notification due to the convenience on the hall side (door opening, etc.) has finally ended, the appropriate effect due to the lack of empty channels It is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of a situation where it becomes impossible to enjoy the video.

  On the other hand, FIG. 290 shows the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection when the state detection generated in FIG. 289 is not a door opening but a magnetic abnormality, and the process related to the notification sound is being executed. It is a figure explaining the content about the process regarding the volume adjustment accompanying operation of the right button 332.

  The situation shown in FIG. 290 (A) is the situation before the symbol variation is started, and is the same as the situation described with reference to FIG. 289 (A). In such a situation, when a start winning is generated and a jackpot determination is performed, as shown in FIG. 290 (B), the result or fluctuation of the jackpot determination is the same as the situation described with reference to FIG. 289 (B). Based on the type of pattern, the decorative symbol SZ is variably displayed in a predetermined effect pattern. In addition, while the decorative design SZ is variably displayed, a predetermined effect is developed and an effect sound corresponding to the progress of the predetermined effect is output.

  In the situation shown in FIG. 290 (B), the magnetic detection belonging to the first notification group occurs during the symbol variation execution period, and the processing related to the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) corresponding to this is executed. Specifically, a loop process (60 seconds) for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “Boo-boo magnet was detected” and display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (here, “magnetic detection”) And lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) disposed on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are executed.

  In addition, as described above, when the magnetic detection belonging to the first notification group occurs during the symbol variation period and the processing related to the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) corresponding to the detection is performed, the effect is produced in the second volume suppression mode. Notification processing under the progress of production for suppressing the output volume of sound (volume of audible sound) is performed. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 290 (B), the player setting value is maintained at “3”, which is the same as in the situation of FIG. 290 (A). The sound output volume (audible sound volume) is set to a predetermined second specific value (here, “0”) lower than the original value (20 times the player setting value). The production contents are developed under the volume value (in this case, mute).

  In this regard, even when the effect progress notification process according to the magnetic abnormality is executed, if the operation on the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is performed, the second specific value (here, “0”). ") The output volume of the production sound that has been reduced to (the volume of the audible sound (mute) in this case) is not variable and is maintained, while the player's setting value for the volume (player setting value) itself Change acceptance is allowed, and when the above-described production progress notification process (process for reducing the output volume to a specific value) is completed, the output volume (audible volume) that reflects all the operations up to that point is finished. As described above, the batch change is performed.

  In other words, FIG. 290 (C) shows a state after the player has performed the operation of the effect selection right button 332 twice in accordance with the execution of the reach effect in the state shown in FIG. 290 (B). Although the player setting value has been changed from “3” to “5” by the operation of the effect selection right button 332, the output sound volume (audible sound volume) of the effect sound is the original value (game) It can be seen that a predetermined second specific value (here, “0 (silence)”) that is lower than 20 times the user set value) is maintained. Therefore, even if the player performs the operation with the effect selection right button 332 twice, until the above-described effect progress notification process (the process of reducing the output volume to a specific value) is completed, the volume of the effect sound Is not changed, and the content of the performance is advanced with the volume of the second specific value being maintained.

  At this time, in the first operation among the operations by the player, the player set value is changed from “3” to “4”, but the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) is the second specified. Since the value (here “0”) is maintained, the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output, and the player setting value is changed from “4” to “5” even in the second operation. However, since the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) is maintained at the second specific value (here, “0”), the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output.

  However, in the first operation, the player setting value itself is changed from “3” to “4”, and the player operation for adjusting the volume is accepted. In the display area of the device 1600, a second volume value display OH2 indicating that the current setting value is “4” among the player setting value ranges “1” to “5” is indicated by a gauge display. This is executed in place of the volume adjustment guidance display OAH, and the numerical value is changed from “3” to “4” and displayed in the first volume value display OH1.

  Also, in the second operation, the player setting value itself changes from “4” to “5”, and the player operation for volume adjustment is accepted. In the display OH2, a gauge display indicates that the current setting value has changed from “4” to “5” in the range of player setting values “1” to “5”, and the first volume value is also displayed. In the display OH1, the numerical value is changed from “4” to “5” and displayed.

  Incidentally, in this illustrative example, in the situation shown in FIG. 290 (C), the magnetic detection itself is already in a non-detected state. However, unlike the case of door detection, the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) in the second volume suppression mode until a predetermined time (here 60 seconds) elapses after the magnetic detection. The notification process under the effect progress that suppresses this is continuously executed.

  After that, a predetermined time (in this case, 60 seconds) has elapsed since the occurrence of magnetism detection while the volume adjustment guidance display OAH has returned to the state in which it is executed again. 290 (D), the output volume (audible sound volume) reflecting all the operations up to that time is completed in accordance with the completion of the process, as shown in FIG. 290 (D). Change all at once. That is, in this case, the player setting value is gradually changed from “3” to “4” corresponding to the first operation and “5” corresponding to the second operation during the execution process of the effect progress notification process. Because of the change, the output volume (audible sound volume) is originally “80” corresponding to the first operation from the second specific value (here “0”), and the second operation. However, the second specific value (here “0”) is changed to “100” reflecting all the operations up to that point.

  When the notification process according to the magnetic abnormality is executed, unlike the case where the notification process according to the door opening is executed, even in the situation shown in FIG. 290 (D), the game board side effect display device Display in the display area 1600 (here, “magnetic detection”) and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 remain executed. Yes. That is, in the notification process according to the magnetic abnormality, when the notification sound is terminated, while the notification by the display in the liquid crystal and the notification by the lamp are continued, the production sound is excluded from the suppression target and corresponds to the player set value. However, in the notification process according to the opening of the door, the production sound remains to be suppressed while the notification by the display in the liquid crystal and the notification by the lamp are continued in the notification process according to the door opening. It is supposed to be.

  In this way, even when a magnetic abnormality occurs, the change acceptance of the set value (player set value) by the player is permitted even during the period in which the notification process under the effect progress is being executed. Thus, it is expected to suppress a decrease in the gaming interests until the notification process under the effect progress is completed. In addition, the volume value (audible sound volume) is changed in multiple stages immediately after the notification process under the progress of the production, and the empty channel is insufficient or free due to the volume adjustment completion sound each time. The occurrence of such a situation is preferably avoided.

  In addition, in this example, the output volume (audible sound volume) is also changed collectively (“0” → “100”) when the notification process under the effect progress due to the magnetic abnormality is terminated. In spite of the change in the volume, the channel assignment of the volume adjustment completion sound is not performed. According to such a configuration, in particular, a situation in which it is not possible to enjoy an appropriate effect due to a lack of empty channels, even though the notification process under the effect progress due to notification due to erroneous detection has finally ended. The occurrence of this can be suitably suppressed.

  As shown in Fig. 201, the initial volume of the alarm sound for the door opening such as "The door is open ping-pong ping pong" Since “1” (0x1FF) is set in the third byte of the value, the playback is always performed at the volume set by the initial value regardless of the player setting value.

  In addition, when the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) or the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) is executed, the notification process under the effect progress is not executed. Both the value and the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) can be varied as appropriate. However, for these notification sounds 6 and 7, as shown in FIG. 201, “1” (0x1FF) is set in the third byte of the volume initial value, so regardless of the player set value, Playback is always performed at the volume set by the initial value.

  Among the notification sounds 1 to 7, for the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) and the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) belonging to the third notification group, “1” is not set in the third byte of the volume initial value, You may make it include in the object of the volume adjustment by a player.

  In addition, for each process described in FIG. 289 and FIG. 290, state detection is performed not only during the period of symbol variation execution, but also before the symbol variation starts, and over the timing of the start and end of symbol variation. Even when the notification process according to the above is executed, it may be executed in the same manner.

  In each process described with reference to FIGS. 289 and 290, after the effect progress notification process is completed, the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button is the same as before the effect progress notification process is started. When the player setting value is changed by the operation of 332, the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is changed accordingly. Whenever the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) changes, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, “Pi!”) Is played at the volume after the change.

  Moreover, although the process demonstrated in FIG. 289 and the process demonstrated in FIG. 290 differed in the production | presentation sound suppression aspect during the period when the production progress under notification process is performed, about this suppression aspect, it is not necessarily necessary. The output sound volume (audible sound) of the production sound is suppressed in one mode between the case where the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed and the case where the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed. As described above, the processing for suppressing the sound volume may be performed.

  In addition, in the notification process under the progress of production, the output volume of various game sounds (the volume of audible sounds) is suppressed. Among these game sounds, a game ball is placed at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. Some game sounds such as a sound (winning sound) played in response to winning a prize may be played with the initial value set volume without being affected by volume control. That is, in this case, it becomes possible for the hall side to easily grasp whether or not the game is being continued despite the occurrence of an abnormal state as the pachinko machine 1. In this sense, some sounds such as a sound (winning sound) that is played in response to the winning of a game ball at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 when the effect progress notification process is being executed. It is desirable to play the game sound as a special sound that cannot be output when the notification process under the effect progress is not executed.

  As described above, in FIGS. 277 to 290, there is no channel space by adopting the channel saving type control structure that can appropriately notify the abnormality content etc. with only a single channel for various notification sounds. (Situation where the number of vacant channels is 0) It was proposed that technical measures should be taken in terms of how to make this difficult to appear. However, even when such a control structure is adopted, there is a situation in which there is no vacancy in the channel to which the production effect sound (production sound) is assigned (the situation where the number of vacant channels is 0). Concerns about the appearance of the above unintended sound output still remain.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, regarding the channel assignment of the production sound, various technical matters are performed at a stage before the situation where there is no vacant channel (the situation where the number of vacant channels is 0) occurs. I try to give some ingenuity. Hereinafter, various technical ideas applied to the output of the production sound will be sequentially described. In adopting these technical devices as the pachinko machine 1, the above-described channel-saving control structure that can appropriately notify the abnormality content only with a single channel with respect to various notification sounds is not necessarily employed. You don't have to. In each example described below, either the fixed channel method or the automatic channel method may be adopted for both the notification sound and the effect sound. In addition, when the automatic channel method is employed, the above-described control based on the priority order may not necessarily be employed, and a process for discarding a new sound may be performed when all channels are in use. Good. Moreover, each example demonstrated below can be implemented in combination as appropriate.

[Channel reservation processing]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is limited, even if a special result is obtained by the determination by the determination means according to the winning, there is no vacant channel to which sound data is assigned In a situation where the number of empty channels is 0, a special sound corresponding to the fact that a special result has been obtained cannot be assigned to the channel, and there is a concern that the game entertainment will be lowered due to the fact that it cannot be output.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not a specific action such as “an act of praying with the hand holding the pachinko machine 1” or “button operation” has been performed. It can be detected by detection means. When it is detected that such a specific action has been performed, for example, a predetermined value that does not indicate any expectation, such as a sound corresponding to silence data composed of only silence sound (output sound with a volume of 0). By executing a process of assigning a sound to a channel over a predetermined time (channel reservation process), the channel is kept from being used by another sound. On the other hand, while the channel reservation process is performed in this way, even if special performance conditions such as a jackpot finalizing effect and a pre-reading effect are established as a result of the game ball being received at the specific winning opening, At this point, no special sound corresponding to the performance is assigned to the channel. Then, after waiting for the channel reservation process to end, an effect of assigning a special sound to the channel and reproducing it can be executed (post notification effect).

  That is, in this case, at least one of the channels that can be assigned to the special sound is reserved in advance (channel reservation) by a predetermined sound that does not show any expectation due to a specific action by the player. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation where a special sound cannot be output due to a shortage of channels even though a special result is obtained in the determination according to winning.

  As for special sounds, for example, in addition to the jackpot confirmation sound that is executed only when winning a jackpot in the jackpot determination according to the winning, a highly anticipated effect mode (for example, in the effect determination based on the jackpot determination according to the winning (for example, Predictive announcement sound that is executed when a highly anticipated announcement effect that is performed during the execution of a reach production is selected, or when a predetermined judgment result is obtained by a prefetch judgment according to a prize It is possible to exemplify a pre-read notification sound or the like that is executed as an effect, but in essence, it is assigned to a channel and output when a special determination result is obtained by determination by a predetermined determination means according to winning Anything can be used.

  FIG. 291 shows that when a game ball is won at the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004, a special sound (for example, a quine) that matches a so-called pre-reading effect is output as a “special sound”. A channel to which a special sound can be assigned is in a state where the special sound has not been output (more precisely, a determination that a special sound is to be output (a determination that a pre-reading effect will be performed) has not yet been made). It is a time chart which shows an example about the channel reservation process ensured in advance from time.

  First, prior to explaining an example of the channel reservation process, first, a general prefetch effect that is a well-known technique will be briefly explained.

  That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a winning is made to the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out based on the winning. , The first and second start opening winning process shown in FIG. 257 is performed. In the first / second start opening winning process, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won a start opening (the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004). As described above, processing for increasing the number of reserved symbols on the special symbol side by 1 is performed.

  However, in actuality, in the first and second start opening winning processes, illustration is omitted, but pre-reading processing for executing a pre-reading effect on the winning start opening side is also executed (for example, the first start opening 2002). If it is the side (first special figure side), it is executed as a process between steps S6204 and S6205. If it is the second start port 2004 side (second special figure side), it is executed as a process between steps S6207 and S6208. It has become so.

  Here, the pre-reading effect on the first special symbol side is an effect that suggests in advance the determination result (or the degree of expectation) of the first special symbol before the variable display of the first special symbol is started. In the first special figure prefetching process, information required for determining whether or not the prefetching effect is executed on the peripheral control board 1510 side, the contents of the effect, etc. Information, information related to the variation pattern number for prefetch determination) is generated and stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result itself of the first special symbol, information regarding the stop symbol of the special symbol may be included in the command as information suggesting the type of jackpot game. For example, information at a stage before final determination such as an SP reach group, a normal reach group in the variation pattern, and a latent hit group or a small hit group in the symbol type may be transmitted as a prefetch command.

  On the other hand, the pre-reading effect on the second special symbol side is an effect that suggests in advance the determination result (or the degree of expectation) of the second special symbol before the variable display of the second special symbol is started. In the second special figure prefetching process, information (winning information, symbol type, variation pattern number, etc.) necessary for determining the presence / absence of prefetching and the contents of the presentation on the peripheral control board 1510 side is generated, The information is stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result itself of the second special symbol, information related to the stop symbol of the special symbol may be included in the command as information suggesting the type of jackpot game. For example, information at a stage before final determination such as an SP reach group, a normal reach group in the variation pattern, and a latent hit group or a small hit group in the symbol type may be transmitted as a prefetch command.

  That is, in the peripheral control board 1510, the determination process as to whether or not the big hit is won and the symbol variation is not digested, and information obtained from the prefetch command when they are put on hold ( Expectations on whether the jackpot determination that is put on hold will obtain a special result based on information related to the pre-reading effect on the first special figure side and information related to the pre-reading effect on the second special figure side) It is possible to perform a pre-reading effect that suggests the degree in advance.

  More specifically, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines whether or not there is a situation in which a start winning has occurred, and performs control related to a hold display and a pre-reading effect according to the start winning in the situation. After that, by updating the special symbol processing flag based on the grasped game situation, the above-mentioned variation start processing, variation pattern setting processing, variation processing, big hit game processing, and small hit establishment shown in FIG. Perform one of the processes. Among these, in the control related to the pre-reading effect, for example, a new hold display corresponding to the start winning prize is displayed in any of a plurality of modes (for example, a relatively low expectation blue color and a relatively high expectation red color). Whether to perform a specific pre-reading effect that suggests the prefetching expectation level depending on whether it is displayed, and a mode (for example, blue, red, or when it is determined not to perform the pre-reading effect) according to the result of the determination In the normal display mode), the hold display is performed. As a result, until the jackpot determination corresponding to the hold display is exhausted, a pre-reading effect in which the jackpot expectation degree is suggested in advance by the display mode is executed.

  By the way, in such a pre-reading effect, when a hold display (including a jackpot confirmed hold display) appears in a highly expected manner, a special sound (for example, a quine) may be output in accordance with the pre-read execution. Many. However, since such special sounds (pre-reading effects) are played at game ball winning timings that occur irregularly, a game ball winning occurs at a timing when there is no vacant channel, and pre-fetching is determined. If there is a win, the player can recognize that the special sound is not played even though the pre-reading determination is won and the hold display appears in a highly expected manner (blue or red). There is a concern that the entertainment interest will decline.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 291, as described above, the special sound is output before the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 wins the game ball and outputs the special sound (prefetching effect). Channels that can be assigned in advance from the time when the special sound is not output (more precisely, the determination that the special sound is output (the determination that the pre-reading effect is performed) has not yet been made). It is possible to execute channel reservation processing to be secured in

  For example, at timing tY10 shown in FIG. 291, the number of jackpot determinations that are currently on hold (the number of holds) is 0, and a normal background display appears in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. If the player is in a situation where the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable state, the player usually wins a game ball at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 in order to increase the number of holds. A game (handle operation) is performed as described. As a result, when a game ball is won at the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004, up to four big hit determinations are put on hold in accordance with the winnings, and the big hit determination is made. Each time the game is put on hold, processing related to hold display and pre-reading effects according to winning is performed.

  Here, as the pre-reading effect when the channel reservation process is not executed, for example, in the order of winning to the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, the first winning (first hold), the second winning ( Assuming that the second winning), the third winning (third holding), and the fourth winning (fourth holding) have occurred, processing relating to the pre-reading effect is performed at each timing when the holding has occurred. When a pre-reading determination is won and a pre-reading effect is performed, a special sound (e.g., a cure) is output at a timing at which the corresponding hold occurs (each timing when winning and pre-reading determination is performed). A hold display with a mark will appear.

  On the other hand, the pre-reading effect when the channel reservation process is being executed is also, for example, in the order of winning to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the first win (first hold), the second win ( Assuming that the second winning), the third winning (third holding), and the fourth winning (fourth holding) have occurred, processing relating to the pre-reading effect is performed at each timing when the holding has occurred. However, when a pre-reading effect is performed after winning the pre-reading determination, a special sound (for example, a quine) is not output at the timing when the corresponding hold occurs (winning timing), but this is kept waiting for execution. The special sound (for example, quine) is output after waiting for the channel to be channel-reserved to become available. In addition, about the hold display with a specific aspect, you may make it appear in synchronization with the timing which outputs a special sound (for example, a quine), or it may make it appear at the timing when the hold which wins prefetch determination occurred. Good. However, when a hold display having a specific mode is caused to appear at a timing when a hold that has been won for the prefetch determination is generated, a prefetch effect when the channel reservation process is being executed and a case where the channel reservation process is not being executed. In any of the prefetch effects, it is desirable that only one aspect (for example, only red) can appear as a specific aspect.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a hand is held around the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, a non-contact type sensor (for example, an ultrasonic sensor or an infrared sensor) is not shown. However, this is detected as an object, and this is used as a trigger to start channel reservation processing.

  For example, at the timing tY11 shown in FIG. 291, the player holds his / her hand around the front of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and this is a state where it is detected as an object. Then, the peripheral control board 1510 generates a prayer effect mode based on the detection. In this prayer effect mode, first, a prayer mode background display in which “Shrine Torii” is displayed as a background image in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is performed, and “countdown countdown” is performed for a predetermined time (30 seconds). A process of assigning and reproducing “sound” to a predetermined channel is performed. For example, the countdown sound starts from “30” and ends when the countdown counts down to “0” every second. In addition, during the period in which the prayer mode background display is displayed in this way, the effect that the decorative symbols are variably displayed in a predetermined effect pattern is continuously executed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600.

  However, the “shrine torii (prayer mode background display)” in such a display area and the “countdown sound” in a predetermined channel hold the player in front of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. This can be triggered only by the trigger (detection by the sensor), and it is not related to the content of the performance (production that suggests the degree of expectation) that is progressing within the symbol variation being executed, It does not depend on the result of the jackpot determination at all. Therefore, the display and sound generated when the player holds his hand may be appropriately changed to other contents. However, by performing such processing, the display and sound are predetermined for a predetermined time (30 seconds). The channel can be maintained in a usage state (in this case, a “countdown voice” usage state that does not indicate any expectation), and until this predetermined time (30 seconds) elapses, It is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation in which another sound that does not know when it ends for a predetermined channel is assigned (channel reservation processing).

  Until the predetermined time (30 seconds) during which the channel reservation process is executed in this way, the player plays a game so that the game ball is won at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. (Handle operation) will be performed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 291, the first winning (first hold), the second winning (second holding), the third winning (third holding), and the fourth winning (fourth hold) occurred. Then, processing related to the pre-reading effect is performed at each timing when the suspension occurs. However, as described above, while the “countdown audio” is being played (while the channel reservation process is being executed), the determination result (prefetching win) that the prefetching effect is performed as a result of the determination according to the winning is Even if it is obtained, a special sound (for example, a quine) is not assigned to the channel at the time of winning, and this is stored as a state of waiting for execution. The special sound (for example, cuin) in the waiting state in this way is output as a post notification sound that is output after the winning time at timing tY12 when a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed from timing tY11. Become.

  On the other hand, a prize is generated during the period from the start of the reproduction of the “countdown voice” (channel reservation process) by the player's own intention until the end (timing tY11 to tY12). If there is no winning, but a special determination result is not obtained even though a winning has occurred (the pre-reading effect was not won), even if the timing tY12 at which the reproduction of “countdown sound” ends is special Sound is not played.

  According to such a configuration, the player holds his hand and starts the reproduction of the “countdown voice” (channel reservation process) from his own intention to the end (timing tY11 to tY12). If a prize is generated and a special judgment result (pre-fetching win) is obtained in the judgment according to the prize, a special sound (cuein) is not output at that time, and the “countdown sound” It is executed as a post-announcement effect that is output aiming at the timing when the channel is vacated and the channel is vacant. Accordingly, it is possible to suitably avoid the occurrence of a situation in which a special sound cannot be output due to the absence of an empty channel even though a special determination result (prefetching win) is obtained. In addition, even if a special determination result (prefetching win) is obtained at any timing between timings tY11 to tY12, a special sound (cue) corresponding to this is generated at a timing when at least one channel is vacant. Since reproduction is aimed at tY12, it is only necessary to confirm whether or not a special sound (cuein) is generated at timing tY12, and a special determination result (read-ahead) within a relatively long period of timing tY11 to tY12 It will be possible to easily recognize whether or not (winning) has been obtained.

  In addition, when outputting a special sound (cuein) as such a post notification sound, it may be assigned to any of the channels that are idle at timing tY12 for reproduction. However, if the special sound (cuin) is selectively assigned to the predetermined channel to which the “countdown sound” has been assigned, the channel reservation processing and the post-announcement effect corresponding to it can be performed with only one channel. It can be said that this is beneficial in that it can be realized, and the range of production can be expanded within a limited number of channels.

  Further, in this embodiment, for the prayer mode background display in which “Shrine Torii” is displayed as a background image, the timing tY12 at which the “countdown audio” playback ends and the playback of the special sound (cuein) are performed. Even after the end timing arrives, it is continuously displayed. This is based on the fact that a person who requests execution of such a channel reservation process tends to hold his hand again to generate the channel reservation process every time the number of holds decreases. It is considered that there is a benefit when holding your hand over the display of “Shrine Torii” as a background image (the probability that a special sound will be played at the timing of the announcement will increase) Yes, the prayer mode background display is continuously performed until a specific condition unrelated to the channel reservation process is satisfied (for example, release operation by a button). However, in actuality, even if “Shrine Torii” is displayed as a background image or “Shrine Torii” is not displayed as a background image, the player holds the hand When this is sometimes detected, only a process of maintaining a predetermined channel in an assigned state for a predetermined time is performed by a predetermined sound (countdown audio), and therefore the timing tY12 at which the reproduction of “countdown audio” is terminated. Alternatively, the display may be returned to the normal background display at the timing when the reproduction of the special sound (cuein) as the notification sound is terminated.

  In addition, when the player holds his hand again during the period of the timing tY11 to tY12 and this is detected, the reproduction time of the “countdown voice” until the predetermined time (30 seconds in this case) elapses from the detection again. May be extended so that a special sound corresponding to the pre-reading winning is outputted when the timing comes.

  Also, such a prayer effect mode is executed based on the fact that a specific action by the player is detected not only when the symbol variation is in the changing state but also when the symbol variation is not in the changing state. You may make it do. The specific action may be an action to be detected by a contact type sensor, such as a predetermined button operation, in addition to an action to be detected by a non-contact type sensor.

  However, when a special sound (cuein) is output as such a post-announcement sound, the first time winning (first hold), the second time winning ( (2nd hold), 3rd win (3rd hold), 4th win (4th hold), it will be difficult to know which special decision result (prefetch win) was obtained, so prefetch win There is a concern about a decline in the entertainment interest of the game due to being suspended and not recognized. On the other hand, the content reproduced as the special sound is not a uniform sound (here, “Cuin”), but the first prize (first hold), the second prize (second hold), the third prize (second hold) (3 hold), it is also possible to make it different depending on which hold of the fourth winning prize (fourth hold) wins. However, in this case, since the content changes from the sound (in this case “Cuin”) that is played in the pre-reading effect when the channel reservation process is not being executed, it is possible to know that the pre-reading is won. There is concern that it will disappear.

  Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, a special determination result is given at any timing between the timings tY11 to tY12 (first hold, second hold, third hold, and fourth hold). Depending on whether or not (prefetching win) is obtained, a process of varying the playback time of the special sound (herein “cuin”) starting from timing tY12 is performed.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 291, it is assumed that a special determination result (prefetching win) is obtained in the first winning (first hold) that is won at an extremely early timing among timings tY11 to tY12. In this case, however, a special sound (herein, “cue”) is reproduced for 3 seconds from the timing tY12.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 292, a case in which a special determination result (prefetching win) is obtained in the second winning (second hold) that is won at a relatively early timing among the timings tY11 to tY12. In this case, the special sound is reproduced for 6 seconds from the timing tY12. Here, it takes 3 seconds to play “Cuin” once. If a special sound (here “Cuin”) is played for 6 seconds, “Cuin” is played twice. As a result, a sound of a form such as “Cuin Cuin” is output.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 293, it is assumed that a special determination result (prefetching win) is obtained in the third winning (third hold) winning at a relatively late timing among timings tY11 to tY12. However, in this case, the special sound is reproduced for 9 seconds from the timing tY12. Here, since the time required to play “Cuin” once is 3 seconds, when a special sound (here “Cuin”) is played for 9 seconds, “Cuin” is 3 The sound is reproduced as many times as possible, and a sound of a form such as “Cuin Cuin Cuin” is output.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 294, it is assumed that a special determination result (prefetching win) is obtained in the fourth winning (fourth hold) that is won at an extremely late timing among timings tY11 to tY12. However, in this case, the special sound is reproduced for 12 seconds from the timing tY12. Here, since it takes 3 seconds to play “Cuin” once, when playing a special sound (here, “Cuin”) for 12 seconds, “Cuin” is 4 The sound is reproduced as many times as possible, and a sound of a form such as “Cuin / Cuin / Cuin / Cuin” is output.

  According to such a configuration, when a special sound is output at timing tY12, it is possible to grasp that a special determination result (prefetching win) is obtained between timings tY11 to tY12. It becomes possible to predict at which timing between tY11 and tY12 a special determination result (prefetching win) has been obtained by winning. In this example, the shorter the playback time of the special sound from the timing tY12, the more the special determination result (prefetching win) was obtained with the winning that occurred at an earlier timing between the timings tY11 to tY12. The longer the playback time of the special sound from timing tY12 is, the longer the timing of tY11 to tY12 between timings tY11 to tY12 is indicated, the more special judgment result (prefetching winning) is obtained. .

  In this example, it may be assumed that only the first winning is generated between timings tY11 to tY12 and a special determination result is obtained according to the winning. However, in this case as well, depending on the timing at which the winning occurs. Thus, the length of the reproduction time of the special sound from the timing tY12 is varied as described above. However, instead of this, considering that the number of holds is limited to a maximum of four, if a special determination result is obtained in the first winning, the special sound is “Cuin” 1 regardless of the winning timing. Set the playback time for the first time, and if a special judgment result is obtained in the second prize, the special sound is set as the playback time for the second time of “Cuin” regardless of the timing of the prize, and the special judgment is given in the third prize. If the result is obtained, the special sound is set to the playback time for 3 times of “Cuin” regardless of the winning timing. If the special result is obtained in the fourth winning, the special sound is set regardless of the winning timing. May be set to the playback time for four times of “Cuin”.

  Further, in this embodiment, when a pre-reading win is obtained, “cuein” is reproduced as a special sound. Depending on whether a low prefetching win) or a second determination result (for example, a prefetching win with a relatively high degree of expectation) is obtained, the playback content as a special sound may be changed. For example, when the first determination result (for example, prefetching with a relatively low expectation) is obtained in the prefetch determination at the time of winning a prize, “Cuin” is played as a special sound, whereas the prefetching at the time of winning a prize is performed. If the second determination result (prefetching winning with relatively high expectation) is obtained in the determination, if “Dokan” is reproduced as a special sound, it occurs at any timing between timings tY11 to tY12. In addition to the prediction of whether or not the pre-reading win was obtained in the winning prize, the first determination result (the pre-reading win with relatively low expectation) and the second determination result (the pre-reading win with relatively high anticipation) as the pre-reading win It is also possible to predict which one has been obtained. In this case, it is desirable to reproduce “cuin” or “docan” as a special sound also in the pre-reading effect when the channel reservation process is not executed, depending on the determination result.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 295, the first determination result (prefetching win with relatively low expectation) in the prefetch determination in the first winning (first hold) that is won at an extremely early timing among timings tY11 to tY12. ) Is obtained, and the second determination result (relatively high prefetching win) is obtained in the pre-reading determination in the fourth winning (fourth hold) that has been won at a very late timing. In this case, however, the special sound is reproduced in the “cuin” manner for 3 seconds from the timing tY12, and then the special sound is reproduced in the “docan” manner for another 9 seconds.

  According to such a configuration, by confirming that the reproduction time of the special sound in the “cue” mode is 3 seconds, the first winning ( It becomes possible to predict that the first determination result (prefetching with relatively low expectation) is obtained in the prefetch determination in the first hold). In addition, by confirming that the special sound playback time itself was performed for 12 seconds (3 + 9 seconds), it was confirmed that the prefetching was won in the prefetch determination in the fourth winning (fourth hold) that was won at a very late timing. It is possible to grasp. Furthermore, according to the fact that the first determination result (prefetching win with relatively low expectation) was obtained in the prefetch determination in the first winning (first hold) that was won at an extremely early timing among the timings tY11 to tY12. By confirming that the special sound is being played in the “docan” mode after the one-time “cuein” played is finished, the pre-reading determination in the fourth winning (fourth hold) is the second It is possible to predict that the determination result (prefetching with relatively low expectation) has been obtained.

  Alternatively, when the first determination result (pre-fetching on the first special figure side) is obtained in the pre-reading determination according to the winning at the first starting port 2002, “cuin” is reproduced as a special sound. , “Dokan” may be reproduced as a special sound when the second determination result (prefetching win on the second special figure side) is obtained in the pre-reading determination in accordance with the winning at the second starting port 2004. . In this case, in the pre-reading effect when the channel reservation process is not executed, either the pre-reading determination according to the winning at the first starting port 2002 or the pre-reading determination according to the winning at the second starting port 2004 is performed. It is desirable to reproduce “cuein” or “dokan” as a special sound depending on whether there is any.

  According to such a configuration, for example, when the situation shown in FIG. 295 occurs, by confirming that the reproduction time of the special sound in the “cue” mode is 3 seconds, the timing tY11 to tY12 The first winning (first hold) that is won at an extremely early timing is a win to the first starting port 2002 side, and the first determination result (the first special figure side of the first special figure side) in the pre-reading determination corresponding to this It becomes possible to predict that the pre-reading win) was obtained. In addition, by confirming that the special sound playback time itself was performed for 12 seconds (3 + 9 seconds), the pre-reading determination is made even in the pre-reading determination in the fourth winning (fourth hold) which is won at a very late timing. Can be grasped. Furthermore, according to the fact that the first determination result (the first special drawing side pre-reading win) was obtained in the pre-reading determination in the first winning (first hold) that was won at an extremely early timing among the timings tY11 to tY12. By confirming that the special sound has been played in the “docan” mode after the one-time “cuein” played is finished, the fourth winning (fourth hold) is on the second start port 2004 side It is possible to predict that the second determination result (prefetching win on the side of the second special figure) has been obtained by the prefetch determination in accordance with this.

  As described above, in this embodiment, as an example of channel control in a case where a special determination result is obtained based on the fact that a game ball is received at a specific winning opening while performing the channel reservation process The case where the pre-reading winning in the pre-reading effect is obtained is exemplified. However, the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 291 to 295 is basically a gaming machine in which a determination process is performed when a game ball is received at a specific winning opening, and the determination process is special. Channel control (channel reservation processing, etc.) that has the technical characteristics in itself, which can avoid the fact that a channel shortage occurs and cannot be output when a special sound is output when the judgment result is obtained Therefore, it is clear that the application example is not necessarily limited to the pre-reading win in the pre-reading effect.

[Channel usage restriction]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is limited, even if a special result is obtained by the determination by the determination means according to the winning, there is no vacant channel to which sound data is assigned In a situation where the number of empty channels is 0, a special sound corresponding to the fact that a special result has been obtained cannot be assigned to the channel, and there is a concern that the game entertainment will be lowered due to the fact that it cannot be output.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the number of empty channels is monitored while the game is progressing, and if this is less than a predetermined number, at least some of the game sounds are out of various game sounds. The ratio of restricting the execution of processing related to output is increased (channel use restriction). That is, in this case, for at least some of the game sounds, the execution of processing related to the output is limited from the stage before the number of empty channels becomes zero, and the processing is executed as the number of empty channels approaches zero. Since the rate of restriction becomes high, it becomes difficult to reduce the number of empty channels to zero.

  More specifically, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, whenever the symbol variation corresponding to the jackpot determination in the hold state is digested (every time the start condition is satisfied), Determine the availability of the channel during the execution period. As a result, when there is room in the channel availability, the channel usage restriction rate (channel restriction level) is lowered until at least the relevant symbol variation to be judged is finished, and the channel availability is reduced. When there is no room in the situation, increase the rate at which channel usage is restricted (channel restriction level) at least until the relevant symbol variation, which is the subject of determination, is terminated, and limit channel limitations based on such symbol variation as one unit. By executing this, the occurrence of a situation in which the number of empty channels becomes zero during the execution period of the symbol variation to be determined is suppressed. As will be described later, a plurality of level values are prepared as channel restriction levels, and the ratio of restricting execution of processing related to game sound output increases as the level value increases.

  FIG. 296 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for processing related to setting of such a channel restriction level.

  Assume that it is determined that a pattern command (variation pattern) has been received from the main control board 1310 within the process of step S1022 (FIG. 230). Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, as shown in FIG. 296, as the processing in step S3101, the value of the previously set channel restriction level is reset. Note that the reset process (step S3101) may be performed when the symbol variation is finished.

  Next, as the process of step S3102, based on the type of the first half of the production pattern corresponding to the received fluctuation pattern, the first half of the period (for example, the period from the start of the design fluctuation to the start of the reach production, Specify “X”, which is the number of empty channels (minimum number of empty channels) based on the timing when the channel is most empty within the period from the start of fluctuation to the time when the design is stopped without starting reach production) To do. Further, as the processing of step S3103, based on the type of the latter half of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the received fluctuation pattern, the channel within the latter half of the fluctuation period (for example, the period from the start of reach production to the stop of the fluctuation of symbols, etc.) “Y”, which is the number of empty channels (the minimum number of empty channels) based on the timing when the empty space becomes the smallest, is specified.

  However, when an effect pattern that stops the symbol without starting the reach effect from the start of the symbol variation is selected, the symbol variation corresponding to the “second half of the variation” is not performed. In this case, the next step process is performed without performing the process of step S3103 itself, or the maximum number that can be set as the number of empty channels “Y” in the process of step S3103 (a number that is not subject to channel restriction). Will be set.

  Then, in step S3104, “X” specified in step S3102 is compared with “Y” specified in step S3103. Among these “X” and “Y”, On the basis of the value on the side where the minimum number of empty channels is smaller (the side where the number of empty channels is not sufficient), the channel restriction level is set until at least the relevant symbol variation to be determined is finished. As a result, the execution of the process related to the output of the game sound can be restricted based on the set channel restriction level from the start to the end of the symbol variation to be determined. Therefore, it is expected that the number of vacant channels is hardly reduced to 0, and that it is expected to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest due to appearance of an unintended performance mode.

  In this embodiment, when setting the channel restriction level, the “minimum free channel number” used for the determination is specified separately for the first half (step S3102) and the second half (step S3103). I am going to do that. This is because the production contents in the first half of the change (such as the period from the start of symbol change to the start of reach production) are shared by multiple production patterns (for example, long reach, super reach A, super reach B, etc.). This is because it is possible to reduce the amount of data necessary to specify the minimum number of free channels by specifying the minimum number of free channels in the first half of the fluctuation. .

  However, the minimum number of free channels used to determine the channel restriction level need not be specified separately for the first half of the fluctuation and the second half of the fluctuation. With the pattern as a unit, the number of empty channels (the minimum number of empty channels) may be specified based on the timing when the channel is most empty during the period in which the effect pattern is executed.

  In addition, the “minimum number of vacant channels” here is a sound automatically generated when the production pattern (production content) to be judged progresses (for symbol stop-related or big-hit determination according to BGM-related or big-hit determination). It shows how many channels are left in an empty state when they are assigned to each channel only for the corresponding sound effects. Therefore, a button pressing sound (such as a sound accompanying an effect generated based on a button operation), a volume adjustment completion sound, various notification sounds, a block winning sound (sound accompanying a winning in a general winning opening), a hold winning sound (first The production patterns (production contents) to be judged such as the sound associated with winning at the start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004), the ordinary electric production sound (the sound accompanying the production according to the judgment of the normal symbol), etc. are developed. Various kinds of sounds that are not necessarily executed simply by being included are not included as judgment targets.

  FIG. 297 shows channel restriction level values set separately for the “minimum number of free channels” specified in the process of step S3104, and an example of the restriction contents determined separately for the channel restriction levels. .

  As shown in FIG. 297, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, first, among the various game sounds, the block winning sound (the winning to the general winning opening) is selected as the sound to be restricted for channel use. ), On-hold winning sound (sound associated with winning at the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004), general electric effect sound (sound accompanying effect according to the determination of the normal symbol), volume adjustment completion sound Is illustrated. Therefore, during the period of symbol fluctuation when there is not enough room in the free channel, at least for these game sounds (block winning sound, hold winning sound, general electric effect sound, volume adjustment completion sound) among various game sounds Channel usage restrictions may occur.

  More specifically, when the “minimum free channel number” specified in the process of step S3103 is 12 or more, the process of step S3104 sets the channel restriction level based on the association shown in FIG. Set to “0”. In other words, in this case, it is assumed that there is a situation where symbol variation with an empty channel is performed, and the sound that is subject to channel use restriction (block winning sound, hold winning sound, general electric effect sound, volume adjustment completion sound) None of them are limited, and if there is a prize at the general prize opening during execution of the symbol variation, a block winning sound is assigned to a predetermined vacant channel and played, and the first start port 2002 or If there is a winning at the second starting port 2004, the reserved winning sound is assigned to a predetermined vacant channel and reproduced, and when an effect corresponding to the determination of the normal symbol is performed during the execution of the symbol variation, The electric sound is assigned to a predetermined vacant channel for playback, and when the volume is adjusted while the symbol variation is being executed, the volume adjustment completion sound corresponding to this is sent to the vacant channel. Ri applied to the be played.

  On the other hand, when the “minimum free channel number” specified in the process of step S3103 is any one of 6 to 11, the process of step S3104 performs channel restriction based on the association shown in FIG. Set the level to “1”. In other words, in this case, it is assumed that there is a situation in which the pattern variation with a slight margin is executed in the empty channel, and the four sounds (block winning sound, hold winning sound, general electric effect sound, volume adjustment completed) that are subject to channel use restriction Sound)), the channel use restriction (25% restriction) is generated for the block winning sound. In other words, in this case, when there is a winning in the general winning opening during the execution of the symbol variation and this is detected, the amount of prize balls corresponding to the winning is paid out, but the block winning sound is set to a predetermined value. Processing is performed so as not to allocate to an empty channel. At this time, it is desirable not to set the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the winning to the general winning opening, and not to reproduce the block winning sound itself.

  On the other hand, when the “minimum free channel number” specified in the process of step S3103 is any one of 2 to 5, the process of step S3104 sets the channel restriction level based on the association shown in FIG. Set to “2”. In other words, in this case, it is assumed that there is a situation in which there is a relatively small pattern change in the empty channel, and the four sounds (block winning sound, hold winning sound, general electric effect sound, volume adjustment) that are subject to channel use restriction are adjusted. The channel use restriction (50% restriction) is generated for two sounds of the block winning sound and the reserved winning sound among the completion sounds. That is, in this case, in addition to the restriction on the block winning sound described above, when there is a winning at the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 during execution of the symbol variation, the quantity corresponding to the winning is detected. Although the payout of the minute prize balls and the above-described first and second start opening winning prize processing are performed, the reserved winning sound is processed so as not to be assigned to a predetermined empty channel. At this time, it is desirable not to set the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the winning at the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, and not to reproduce the reserved winning sound itself.

  On the other hand, when the “minimum free channel number” specified in the process of step S3103 is either 0 or 1, in the process of step S3104, the channel restriction level is based on the association shown in FIG. Is set to “3”. In other words, in this case, it is assumed that there is a situation where symbol variation is performed with no room in the empty channel, and four sounds (block winning sound, hold winning sound, general electric effect sound, volume adjustment complete) that are subject to channel use restriction The channel usage limit (100% limit) is generated for all of the sound. That is, in this case, in addition to the restriction on the block winning sound described above and the restriction on the pending winning sound, even if an effect corresponding to the determination of the normal symbol is performed during the execution of the symbol variation, Is processed so as not to be assigned to a predetermined empty channel. In addition, when the player performs a volume adjustment operation during the execution of the symbol variation, the volume adjustment is performed according to the operation, but the volume adjustment completion sound is processed so as not to be assigned to a predetermined empty channel. It will be. At this time, for the general electric performance sound and the volume adjustment completion sound, do not set the corresponding sound generation schedule data and do not reproduce the general electric performance sound or the volume adjustment completion sound itself. Is desirable.

  According to such a configuration, when the symbol variation is performed in which the number of empty channels to which no sound is assigned is less than a predetermined number while the game is progressing, the number of the empty channels is predetermined. Compared to the case where the symbol variation that does not become less than the number is executed, the ratio of restricting the execution of the processing related to the output of at least a part of the various game sounds is increased. That is, in this case, some game sounds (block winning sound, hold winning sound, general electric effect sound, volume adjustment completion sound) are output from the stage before the number of empty channels actually becomes zero. Execution of related processing is restricted, and the percentage of execution restriction increases as the number of free channels decreases, so the number of free channels becomes 0 during the execution of symbol variation. It is expected that the occurrence of such a situation is suitably suppressed.

  In the above configuration, among the various game sounds, the sound that is subject to restriction on channel use is not the most important “effect sound related to jackpot determination” in the pachinko machine 1, but other “sounds associated with winning a prize” "," Production sound related to normal determination ", and" sound related to volume adjustment ". In other words, even if a restriction on channel use is generated during the execution of symbol variation, the effect on whether the big hit symbol appears due to the symbol variation is not limited, so it is executed appropriately. The decline in the entertainment interest when restricting the use of the channel is suppressed.

  In the above configuration, multiple types of game sounds that are candidates for restriction on channel use are prepared (block winning sound, hold winning sound, general electric effect sound, volume adjustment completion sound). As the channel restriction level becomes higher (as the minimum vacant channel number is smaller, the number of types of sounds subject to restriction on channel use is increased). However, a method of limiting the execution of processing related to the output from the stage before the number of empty channels actually becomes 0, and increasing the rate of execution restriction as the number of empty channels decreases. For example, a method described below with reference to FIG. 298 may be adopted.

  FIG. 298 is a diagram showing another example of the restriction content determined separately for the channel restriction level.

  As shown in FIG. 298, in this alternative example, the channel is used depending on the “minimum free channel number” specified in the process of step S3103 and the channel restriction level specified in the process of step S3104. A limited lottery is held as to whether or not to apply a limit. However, here, a plurality of sounds that are candidates for channel use restriction are not prepared, and when a determination result indicating that restriction is imposed in the restriction lottery is obtained, one game sound (for example, a volume adjustment completion sound) Etc.) is limited only to the channel use.

  For example, in this alternative example, when the channel restriction level is 0 (the minimum number of free channels is 12 or more), the probability of obtaining a determination result indicating that restriction is imposed in the restricted lottery is set to 0/100, The restriction process related to channel use is not executed for a specific game sound (for example, a volume adjustment completion sound) to be restricted.

  However, when the channel restriction level is 1 or more, the probability that a determination result indicating that restriction is imposed in the restricted lottery is increased as the value increases, and the channel restriction level is 1 (minimum free channel). When the number is 6 to 11), the probability is 25/100, and when the channel restriction level is 2 (the minimum number of free channels is 2 to 5), the probability is 50/100, and the channel restriction level. Is 3 (the minimum number of free channels is 0, 1), the same probability is 100/100. In this alternative example, when a determination result indicating that the restriction is applied in the restricted lottery is obtained, the restriction process related to the channel use is executed with the same contents regardless of the channel restriction level.

  Even in such a configuration, when the game is progressing and the symbol variation is executed in which the number of free channels to which no sound is assigned is less than a predetermined number, the number of free channels is reduced. Compared to the case where the symbol variation that does not become less than the predetermined number is executed, the ratio of restricting the execution of the process related to the output of at least some of the game sounds is increased. In other words, in this case, for some of the game sounds (volume adjustment completion sound), there is a limit to the execution of processing related to the output from the stage before the number of empty channels actually becomes zero. Since the rate of execution restriction increases as the number of available channels decreases, the occurrence of a situation where the number of free channels becomes zero during the execution of symbol variation is preferred. It is expected to be suppressed.

  Further, according to the above configuration, by checking whether or not a specific sound (volume adjustment completion sound) is reproduced during the symbol variation execution period, the minimum free channel during the symbol variation execution period is confirmed. It becomes possible to estimate the possibility that there is no room in the number, and it is possible to prompt the game progress (winning, button operation, etc.) corresponding to the estimation.

  In the configuration illustrated in FIGS. 297 and 298, after performing determination processing for various types of notice effects based on the effect patterns, the number of minimum vacant channels is specified from the occurrence status of the notice effects, and the specified minimum vacancy is determined. Although the channel restriction level is set based on the number of channels, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the maximum number of sounds that can be assigned to a channel at the same time during the symbol variation period can be estimated in advance for each effect pattern. Keep it. Then, when the production pattern is determined, the channel restriction ratio may be increased as the channel shortage in which the production pattern is classified in advance is more likely to occur. That is, in this case, when a specific type of performance pattern that tends to use many channels at the same time is executed, there are actually no button operations or many channels are not used without various winnings, and empty channels are not used. Even if there is a surplus in the number of channels, there will be a situation in which the execution of processing related to game sound output may be restricted during the execution of the symbol variation. This is extremely useful in that it can be avoided that the number of signals becomes zero, and even when such processing is executed, “the number of empty channels in the pattern variation is relatively When the number is low, the rate at which execution of processing related to game sound output is restricted increases, and when the number of free channels during symbol fluctuation is relatively large, it is related to game sound output. The rate at which the execution of processing is restricted is low ", and it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained because it is a phenomenon that is not particularly uncomfortable from the player side. become. Also, in this case, by checking whether or not the sound is restricted, it is possible to estimate the possibility that the effect pattern is likely to cause a shortage of channels.

  In addition, in the configurations illustrated in FIG. 297 and FIG. 298 and other examples thereof, the channel restriction is performed with the symbol variation as one unit. The restriction level may be varied, and the channel restriction corresponding to the channel restriction level may be executed each time. Or, when a predetermined restriction condition is satisfied, such as when a specific rendering mode is executed over a plurality of symbol variations, the channel restriction level is made constant with a specific value over a plurality of symbol variations, and the channel restriction level is set. Accordingly, channel restriction may be executed.

  By the way, in the configurations exemplified in FIG. 297 and FIG. 298 and other examples thereof, the sound that is subject to channel use restriction is not the most important “production sound related to jackpot determination” in the pachinko machine 1, Only “sounds associated with winning prizes”, “production sounds related to normal judgment”, and “sounds related to volume adjustment” were adopted. However, since these sounds include those that occur less frequently than the production sounds, in order to realize a restriction process that can secure an empty channel more effectively, It is desirable to adopt “effect sound” as a restriction target. However, on the other hand, if the above-described restriction processing is performed on the “effect sound related to the jackpot determination”, there is a concern that the effect sound may not be reproduced, resulting in an effect that lacks excitement. In some cases, if the jackpot symbol is stopped, there is a risk that the game entertainment will be reduced.

  In this regard, in the configurations illustrated in FIG. 297 and FIG. 298 and other examples thereof, among the “effect sounds related to the jackpot determination”, only the “effect related to the symbol variation that is in the reserved state and will be digested in the future” If the channel usage of the sound is restricted (for example, if it is adopted as a specific game sound to be restricted in FIG. 298 or another example thereof), the effect related to the result of the symbol variation being performed is performed. Therefore, it is possible to adopt a production sound with a high occurrence frequency as a restriction target without any restriction.

  For example, when a winning at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 occurs during the period in which the symbol variation is being executed and the jackpot determination corresponding to this is put on hold, the hold is usually performed. A determination process is performed as to whether or not a pre-reading effect is to be performed with respect to the jackpot determination made into a state. As a result, when a special result is obtained, a pre-reading effect (effect display, effect sound) that suggests in advance the degree of expectation as to whether or not the jackpot determination that has been put on hold is to win the jackpot; Become.

  However, when the number of channels used increases and there is anxiety about vacancy (such as when the minimum number of vacant channels is 0 or 1, symbol variation is being executed) In the case where “the effect sound corresponding to the effect relating to the symbol variation that will be digested in the future” is targeted, winning to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 occurs and the jackpot determination corresponding to this is suspended. Even if it is in the state, the determination process for the pre-reading effect itself is not executed with respect to the jackpot determination put on hold, and both the pre-reading effect and the effect sound corresponding to this are not performed.

  According to such a configuration, when the number of used channels increases and anxiety occurs in the vacancy, the channel portion assigned to the production related to the future symbol variation that is not the symbol variation being executed is being executed. It is possible to supply effect sounds related to fluctuations in performance, so that effects with high occurrence frequency are restricted without any adverse effect on the effects related to the result of the ongoing symbol fluctuation. Will be able to. In addition, the effect to be restricted is only “the effect related to the future symbol fluctuation in the unexecuted state”, and even if the symbol fluctuation is subject to restriction, it will be restricted if it is suspended in the future. Since the effect during design change (the contents of the effect according to the effect pattern) that is not made is always executed, the decrease in the game entertainment effect due to the effect being restricted is also suitably suppressed.

  In addition, when “effect sound related to jackpot determination” is set as the restriction target, if only the effect sound is restricted (no sound output) among the effects (effect display, effect sound), the effect lacks excitement. However, in the above configuration, if the number of channels used increases and anxiety about the vacancy occurs, a prize is awarded and the jackpot determination is put on hold. Sometimes the judgment process for the pre-reading effect is not executed itself, and both the effect display related to the pre-reading effect and the effect sound are not performed. It is only the same production situation as when it was played (the hold display when the pre-reading production is not executed), and it is preferable to avoid a decrease in the gaming interests due to the production execution lacking excitement It becomes possible way.

  In addition, when “effect sound related to jackpot determination” is set as a restriction target, when the winning combination and the jackpot determination is put on hold, the determination process for the prefetch effect itself is not executed, and the effect display and effect regarding the prefetch effect are performed. Although it was made not to perform both with a sound, it is not restricted to this. For example, when “effect sound related to jackpot determination” is to be restricted, determination processing for prefetch effects is performed when winning, but even if a special result is obtained, until a specific timing during symbol variation arrives Does not execute both the effect display and the effect sound related to the pre-reading effect, but restricts them, and when a specific timing arrives during the pattern change, only the effect display and the effect sound are limited to the effect display. This may be done by canceling. That is, in this case, an effect display related to the pre-reading effect is performed in a special mode (timing) different from the case where the “effect sound related to the big hit determination” is not the restriction target (normal time), and a special display is performed. Since the pre-reading effect will be executed after showing as if the result (pre-reading win) was not obtained, the pre-reading effect is suppressed while suppressing the decline in the game entertainment effect by not outputting the production sound according to the pre-reading effect. It becomes possible to perform suitably.

In addition, as a process related to the future production in the situation where channel use is restricted,
・ The pre-reading effect judgment process is performed when winning a prize, but even if a special result is obtained, both the effect display and the effect sound related to the pre-reading effect are not executed until the specific timing during the symbol change arrives. A configuration in which only the restriction on the effect display of the effect display and the effect sound is released and this is performed when the specific timing during the symbol variation arrives so as to restrict these is the first under-limit processing age,
When the second restricted process is used, the game is advanced when the determination processing for the prefetch effect itself is not executed when winning and the effect display and the effect sound regarding the prefetch effect are not performed. In particular, when symbol variation is performed in which the number of empty channels with no sound assigned is less than a predetermined number, compared to when symbol variation in which the number of empty channels is not less than the predetermined number is performed. The ratio of execution of either the first under-restricted process or the second under-restricted process is increased, and within the symbol variation that was in the execution state when the first under-restricted process was performed. The expected value of the number of channels used in is “A”, and the expected value of the number of channels used in the symbol variation that was in the execution state when the second restricted process is performed is “B”. When it As the relationship is relation of "A <B", it is more desirable that the one of those first restriction under treatment and the second restriction under processing is executed. In other words, in this case, as the number of channels used increases and the greater anxiety arises due to vacancy, it is not the first under-restricted process that restricts only the effect sound but restricts both the effect display and the effect sound. Since the ratio of channel restriction applied by the second under-restricted process increases, it is expected that anxiety when the number of channels used increases is more appropriately suppressed.

[Channel special opening process]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is limited, even if a special result is obtained by the determination by the determination means according to the winning, there is no vacant channel to which sound data is assigned In a situation where the number of empty channels is 0, a special sound corresponding to the fact that a special result has been obtained cannot be assigned to the channel, and there is a concern that the game entertainment will be lowered due to the fact that it cannot be output.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a plurality of game sounds are assigned to different channels and are in an output state, the volume of at least some of the game sounds is reduced, A process of ending assignment of a specific game sound to a channel can be performed in a state where the volume is lowered (suppressed state). Then, after the assignment of the specific game sound to the channel is finished in this way, it is possible to execute a process of increasing the volume of another game sound that is continuously assigned to the channel (channel special release process).

  According to such a configuration, the usage state is aimed at a timing in a situation where it is difficult to recognize that a change has occurred in the channel assignment mode of the game sound (the state where the volume of the game sound is reduced (suppressed state)) The number of channels in the channel is reduced (the number of empty channels is increased). Therefore, for example, in order to output important game sounds more reliably, even if the number of channels in use is reduced prior to this, the number of channels in use is reduced. This makes it difficult to be aware of this, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interests due to the fact that specific game sounds are no longer output.

  FIG. 299 is a time chart showing an example of the allocation status of each channel when such a channel special release process is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 299, during the period in which the symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination is being executed, at timing tk11, a predetermined effect pattern whose effect has been advanced on the game board side effect display device 1600 The “normal BGM playback” sound corresponding to the playback is assigned to the playback channels 02 and 03 (in this case, stereo playback), and the sound corresponding to the performance A displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 is displayed. The “effect A playback” sound is assigned to the playback channels 08 and 09 for playback (in this case, stereo playback).

  In this regard, as shown in FIG. 299 (a), among the sounds in the playback state (normal BGM playback, effect A playback), the sound of “effect A playback” is a stage where a predetermined effect pattern is in the middle of the effect. At timing tk13 (in the middle of symbol change execution), the playback channels 08 and 09 are removed and the playback ends. In this way, even if the predetermined production pattern is in the middle of production, the content of the production of the predetermined production pattern can be obtained by ending the assignment of the production sound from the channel and quickly changing it to an empty channel. When progressing, it becomes possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where it becomes impossible to allocate and reproduce new sounds due to insufficient channels.

  However, as described above, when the predetermined production pattern according to the result of the big hit determination is in the stage of production (in the middle of the execution of symbol variation), when the production sound is unassigned from the channel and changed to an empty channel, There will be a decrease in the number of effect sounds in the playback state, and there is a concern that the degree of expectation that a jackpot symbol will appear in the effect pattern is reduced by that amount.

  Therefore, in this example, as shown in FIG. 299 (a), first, the sound of “production A playback” is first removed from the playback channels 08 and 09 before timing tk13 at which the playback ends. Over the period from “timing tk12” to the arrival of “timing tk14” after the timing tk13, the sound of “playing effect B” according to the effect B displayed on the game board-side effect display device 1600 The playback channels 08 and 09 are assigned to be in a playback state (in this case, stereo playback). Then, as shown in FIG. 299 (b), during the period (timing tk12 to tk14) in which the sound of “production B reproduction” is in the reproduction state in this way, timing tk13 at which reproduction of “production A reproduction” ends. As the sound arrives, a process (volume suppression process) for reducing the volume is performed while a plurality of effect sounds including the sound of the “effect B playback” are assigned to the channel.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 299 (c), the sound of “effect B playback” in this example is output as an effect sound corresponding to a step effect whose effect contents can be developed up to four times. After the production contents have been developed three times (step 1, step 2 and step 3) in sequence, the production is executed as to whether or not the production contents are further developed according to step 4. Thus, a process of reducing the volume (volume suppression process) is performed while a plurality of effect sounds including the sound of “effect B playback” corresponding to the step effect are assigned to the channel. In addition, when this volume suppression process is finished and when the high expectation aspect that further develops to the effect contents according to step 4 appears when the volume is returned to the normal volume (relatively high expectation effect), While the specific effect sound corresponding to the effect content in step 4 is output as the sound of “effect B playback”, the step does not develop into the effect content according to step 4 but the effect content according to step 3 When a low-expected production mode in which the production ends is produced (a production with a relatively low expectation), a production sound different from the specific production sound is output as the sound of “production B reproduction”.

  According to such a configuration, the effect design is made to arrive at the timing tk13 aiming at the time when the volume suppression process is performed on a plurality of effect sounds. Since the “playback” sound is removed from the playback channels 08 and 09 and the playback ends, the number of channels in use has decreased (the “playback A playback” sound is in a non-playback state). It is possible to make it difficult to notice.

  In particular, in the example shown in FIGS. 299 (a) to 299 (c), the production content with relatively high expectation (production content developed into step 4) and the production content with relatively low expectation (step) Within the period (period in which it is unclear whether it develops) within the period in which the production content (the production whether or not to develop to Step 4) appears. A volume suppression process is executed, and the “production A playback” sound is removed from the playback channels 08 and 09 and the playback ends. According to such a configuration, not only the volume of the production sound is reduced, but also the player's interest itself is strongly attracted to the production B ("production B playback" sound). Because the production A (the sound of “production A playback”) comes to an end, the volume of the production sound that was targeted for volume suppression, including the sound of “production B playback”, was then restored. Even if the sound of “production A playback” is not reproduced, the production content with relatively high expectation (production content developed into step 4) and the production content with relatively low expectation ( It becomes possible to make it difficult to notice that the sound of “production A reproduction” is not reproduced by attracting interest to which of the production contents) that has not developed into step 4).

  In addition, in the volume suppression processing according to this illustrative example, the volume is lowered while each of the plurality of effect sounds including the sound of “effect B playback” is assigned to the channel. The volume is not reduced, and a specific effect sound (here, “normal BGM playback” sound) is continuously played at the normal volume. In other words, in this case, the volume of a plurality of effect sounds is reduced while the sound volume of some effect sounds (“normal BGM playback” sound) is being played normally without being suppressed, and thus the sound is discriminated. Since the reproduction of the “production A reproduction” sound comes to an end while the reproduction of the “production A reproduction” sound is no longer reproduced, it can be made more difficult to notice. It becomes like this.

  Still further, in this example, the reproduction of the “effect A reproduction” sound is not finished immediately after the volume suppression process is performed on the plurality of effect sounds, and a predetermined time has elapsed after the volume suppression process is started. The reproduction of the sound of “production A reproduction” is terminated after waiting for the elapsed timing tk13 to arrive. That is, immediately after the volume suppression process is started, there is a possibility that the player will be interested in the production sounds A and B in which the change of “volume reduction” has occurred, but the volume decreases to a specific value. Therefore, when the state that does not change with the specific value is maintained for a predetermined time, it is assumed that such interest has already faded. Therefore, the sound of “production A reproduction” is aimed at such timing. By finishing the reproduction of, the sound of “production A reproduction” is not reproduced and can be made more difficult to notice.

  In particular, in this example, the volume of the effect sound to be subjected to the volume suppression process is decreased in stages, and the reproduction of the “effect A playback” sound is ended after the volume becomes 0 (silence). As a result, it is possible to make it harder to notice when the sound of “production A reproduction” is not reproduced.

  In the example shown in FIG. 299, the reproduction of the “production B reproduction” is started in the state where the reproduction of the “production A reproduction” is being reproduced, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the state where the “effect B playback” sound is being played back, the playback of the “effect A playback” sound is started. May be terminated.

  Further, the effects A and B are not necessarily the effects accompanied by the effect display in the game board side effect display device 1600. For example, the effects A and B may be executed as sound effects only.

  In the example shown in FIG. 299, the timing tk12 at which the sound of “production B reproduction” is reproduced comes from the development of a variation pattern (production pattern) according to the jackpot determination. Not limited. For example, based on an operation on a predetermined operation means (such as the operation button 410), the reproduction of “production B reproduction” is started, and the sound of “production A reproduction” is reproduced while the sound of “production B reproduction” is reproduced. May be terminated in the manner described above.

  Further, it is not always necessary to reduce the volume of the effect sound to be subjected to the volume suppression process in a stepwise manner. Conversely, as a process for returning the volume of the effect sound, the volume may be returned in stages. Also, the volume does not necessarily have to be 0 (silence), and if the volume is suppressed to a level lower than normal, it is difficult to notice that the reproduction of the “production A reproduction” sound has ended. Is possible.

  In the example shown in FIG. 299, a specific effect sound (here, “normal BGM playback” sound) according to the effect pattern is excluded from the volume suppression process, and the normal sound volume is maintained. Although the reproduction is continued, the volume of all effect sounds may be lowered when the volume suppression process is performed. Conversely, the sound of “production A reproduction” may be maintained without necessarily reducing the volume when the volume suppression process is performed. Even in such a case, the volume is reduced. While the player is interested in the “production B playback” sound, the playback of the “production A playback” sound is terminated, and then the “production B playback” sound is also included. Even if the sound of “effect A playback” is not reproduced when the volume of the plurality of effect sounds that have been targeted for volume suppression is returned, the content of the effect with a relatively high expectation (step 4) The effect “playing effect A” is played back, attracting interest as to whether the content of the effect that develops to a higher level) or the content of the production with relatively low expectations (the effect that does not develop into step 4) appears. Can make it harder to notice Uninaru.

  In addition, at least during the period during which the effect pattern for reproducing the sound of “effect A playback” and “effect B playback” is performed (after the volume of “effect B playback” is reduced from the normal value). Until the value is returned to the normal value), even if a winning at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 occurs in order to maintain the interest in the sound of “production B reproduction” more appropriately, It is desirable not to play the corresponding reserved winning sound. Further, even when a special result (prefetching win) is obtained in the prefetch determination when a winning at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 occurs, the effect sound corresponding to the prefetch effect is not reproduced. It is desirable.

  In the example shown in FIG. 299, sound reproduction of “production A reproduction” is ended within a period in which the production sound is reduced in volume, and when the production period ends, the sound is assigned to the channel in a state where the volume is reduced until then. In addition to this, the volume of the production sound that was being played was increased (returned to the original volume value), but in addition to this, a special production sound that was not assigned to the channel until the end of the period was added to the channel. You may make it newly allocate and reproduce | regenerate (reproduction | regeneration with the normal volume). According to such a configuration, when the volume is returned, it becomes more interesting whether or not the special effect sound is played back, and it is further noticed by the fact that the “play effect A playback” sound is not played back. Can be difficult. Moreover, if the number of channels used after the volume recovery is reduced than before the volume reduction, there is a concern that the expectation that the jackpot symbol will appear due to the symbol variation is reduced. Is assigned to a channel and played back (played at normal volume), so that it is the same before or after the volume is restored, or more (2 or more performance sounds for the channel). It is also possible that the player remembers the feeling that the degree of expectation has been reduced, because it is possible to make it possible to use the channel (when newly assigned). It will be avoided. In this case, the special effect sound may or may not be played when the volume is restored, and it is suggested that the expectation is relatively high when the special effect sound is played. It is desirable to do.

  Note that when a special effect sound that was not assigned to a channel when the volume is restored is newly assigned to a channel for playback, the channel that has become empty due to the removal of the sound for “effect A playback” It is desirable to assign a special performance sound to the. According to such a configuration, a wide range of effects can be realized with a small number of channel resources.

  Further, such a channel special opening process does not necessarily have to be performed when it is determined that a specific performance pattern is to be executed. For example, a restriction target in the process described with reference to FIGS. 297 and 298 As the effect of “effect A” is adopted, the smaller the number of minimum vacant channels is, the smaller the symbol variation (when the minimum number of vacant channels due to symbol variation is less than a predetermined number, compared to when the number is not less than the predetermined number). The rate at which processing is performed may be increased. According to such a configuration, in the situation where there is a margin in the number of empty channels so as not to make the user feel uneasy about the lack of channels, the “production A” can be continuously output without being terminated halfway. become.

[Suppressed operation sound output processing]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is limited, even if a special result is obtained by the determination by the determination means according to the winning, there is no vacant channel to which sound data is assigned In a situation where the number of empty channels is 0, a special sound corresponding to the fact that a special result has been obtained cannot be assigned to the channel, and there is a concern that the game entertainment will be lowered due to the fact that it cannot be output.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when it is determined that a specific effect pattern is to be executed as the symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination, the symbol variation is started and ended. During the period, the game board side effect display device 1600 performs a process of advancing the display effect according to the specific effect pattern, and assigns and reproduces the sound of “BGM playback” according to the specific effect pattern to the predetermined channel. To perform the process. Then, when the display effect on the game board side effect display device 1600 progresses to a predetermined timing within the symbol variation period, a state where the sound of “BGM playback” is assigned to a predetermined channel and is output in a suppression mode or silence ( When the volume of “BGM playback” is reduced to a specific value and output), and an operation on a predetermined operation means (such as the operation button 410) is detected in this state, A special effect sound suggesting an expectation degree in which a special display mode) appears in the effect pattern is output in a non-suppressed manner (suppressed operation sound output process). The degree of expectation suggested by the special performance may be 100%.

  That is, in this case, when outputting the special effect sound according to the operation detection, although the sound of “BGM playback” is still assigned to the predetermined channel, it is set to a state of being output in a suppression mode or silence. As a result, it is possible to provide an atmosphere in which channel usage is likely to be afforded. Therefore, providing the player with an opportunity to output the special performance sound in a state where anxiety such as “Maybe there is no space in the channel and the special performance sound may not be output” has been removed. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest.

  By the way, when a sound corresponding to a specific production pattern ("BGM playback" sound) is assigned to a channel and is output in a suppressed manner or silence, the sound is generally assigned to the channel. It is assumed that the process of suppressing the volume of the sound (the sound of “BGM playback”) (the process of reducing the volume to a specific value) is performed. In fact, if such a volume suppression process is performed prior to giving an operation opportunity to a player (generating an effective period of production reception), a sound (“ It is possible to give the player an opportunity to operate (generate a valid period for the production reception) after setting the “BGM playback” sound) to a state of being output in a suppressed manner or in silence.

  However, as is well known, when an operation opportunity is given to a player, the effective period of the effect reception is generated for a predetermined time, but the operation (effect reception) is performed at any timing within this effective period. This is undefined (depending on the player) and cannot be predicted in advance. Therefore, even if an operation (production reception) is performed within the effective period, the volume suppression process can be terminated and the volume can be returned to the initial value. It is impossible to store the “BGM playback” sound in advance so as to start playback of the sound in accordance with this indefinite timing.

  In addition to performing the process of returning the volume when an operation is performed by the player, the sound data of “BGM playback” is switched to the sound data of “BGM playback dedicated for special effect sound playback”. It is also conceivable to perform the process of reproducing. However, the “BGM playback” sound is played in accordance with the contents of various effects and the timing of the symbol stop until the specific effect pattern is stopped after the symbol is stopped. When an operation (production reception) is performed at an indefinite time (depending on the player), when the operation (production reception) is triggered, the sound of “BGM playback” is newly reproduced. There is a concern that so-called sound misalignment will occur between the various effects and symbol stop timings thereafter, and the game entertainment will be reduced.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a specific effect pattern is executed, first, a plurality of sound data (BGM playback) sound corresponding to the specific effect pattern ( For example, normal fluctuation sound data, sound data for the first half of the super reach production, sound data for the second half of the super reach production), etc. Performs the process of sequentially assigning to channels. Of the plurality of sound data stored as the “BGM playback” sound corresponding to the specific effect pattern, specific sound data (one sound material) is defined by the sound generation schedule data. If assigned to a predetermined channel in a time-series manner, playback is started by being assigned to the predetermined channel from the timing before the effective period of effect reception within the specific effect pattern, and the effective period ends. Thus, reproduction is performed while maintaining the assignment state for a predetermined channel over a long period until the timing after the above.

  In this regard, in a certain section (special period) when the specific sound data (one sound material) is viewed in time series, a suppression mode or a process related to sound output in silence compared to other sections When the specific sound data is assigned to a predetermined channel according to the time series defined by the sound generation schedule data, a partial section (special (Time period) within a time series in which the valid period of the production reception occurs. In addition to this, even if an operation is performed by the player at any timing within the effective period of the above-mentioned production reception occurring within the special period (partial section), the special period from the special period (partial section) The sound of “BGM playback” is displayed as a special effect sound corresponding to the effect reception over two sections in the specific sound data with the period after the (partial section) ends (other sections). Reproduction is performed in a non-suppressed manner on a channel different from the assigned predetermined channel.

  According to such a configuration, a plurality of sound data (for example, sound data at the time of normal fluctuation, sound data of the first half of the super reach effect, The sound data of the second half of the reach production is assigned to the predetermined channels in sequence according to the time series defined by the corresponding sound generation schedule data, and the volume is not adjusted from the initial value. In both cases, it is possible to create a “suppressed state or state (special period) output in silence”. In addition, when an operation by a player is accepted in the “suppressed state or state that is output silently (special period)” created in this way, it is specially performed in a non-suppressed manner by a highly immediate process triggered by this. While the production sound is started to be reproduced, the sound of “BGM reproduction” in the reproduction state on the predetermined channel is “in a state of being output in suppression mode or silence (special period) regardless of the production reception” Is maintained for a predetermined time. After that, a part of specific sound data (one sound material) (suppression mode or silent sound output) is completed in such a way that the special effect sound is reproduced while being reproduced. Since the data content of other sections (non-suppressed sound output) is played back, it becomes possible to return the sound of “BGM playback” to the output in a non-suppressed mode secretly. It is possible to provide a production sound without a sense of incongruity. That is, in this case, when the player receives an operation in the suppression mode or in the state where the sound of “BGM playback” is output in silence, the special performance sound is not suppressed by a process with high immediacy triggered by this. However, it is possible to suitably avoid the occurrence of a sound shift between the various effects and the timing of the symbol stop after that.

  FIG. 300 is a time chart illustrating an example of an assignment state of each channel when such a suppressed operation sound output process is performed. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 300, a specific example when executing such a suppressed operation sound output process will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 300 (a), during the period in which the symbol variation corresponding to the result of the jackpot determination is being executed, the timing at which the presentation progresses on the game board side effect display device 1600 at the timing ts11. The sound of “BGM playback” corresponding to the production pattern is assigned to the playback channels 02 and 03 and is already played back (in this case, stereo playback). The sound of “BGM playback” is, for example, one sound data (one piece of data over the entire period of symbol variation from the start to the end of symbol variation when it is determined that a specific performance pattern is executed) (Sound material) may be reproduced based on sound generation schedule data, or the entire period of symbol variation is divided into a plurality of periods, and different sound data prepared for each period May be sequentially reproduced based on sound generation schedule data corresponding to the above. In the example shown in FIG. 300, one sound data (one sound material) as a sound of “BGM playback” over the entire period (part of the symbol variation period) in the figure including the timing ts11. Are assigned to the channels 02 and 03 and are in a playback state.

  In this regard, as shown in FIGS. 300 (a) and 300 (b), one piece of sound data (sound of “BGM playback”) assigned to the channels 02 and 03 and in a playback state is special. The silent data content is set at timing ts12 before the arrival of timing ts13 when the operation effective period (effective period for receiving the production) for which an operation opportunity that is the generation of the production sound is given occurs. The playback state is set for a part of the section. As a result, without adjusting the volume from the initial value for the “BGM playback” sound, the sound can be output without sound while being assigned to a predetermined channel.

  According to such a configuration, at timing ts13, the sound of “BGM playback” is in a playback state within a partial section set as silent data content, and there seems to be room in channel usage. While the atmosphere is provided, it is possible to generate an operation effective period (effective period of production reception) in which an operation opportunity is given to the player. This provides an opportunity for the player to output the special performance sound in a state where anxiety such as “Maybe there is no available channel and the special performance sound may not be output” is removed. This makes it possible to suppress the decline in the gaming interests.

  Moreover, the operation valid period according to this example is a timing ts16 at which a partial section in which silent data content is set as the sound of “BGM playback” is ended even when there is no operation by the player. At time ts15 before arriving, the period is ended so that the player's operation is not accepted for production. Therefore, even if an operation by the player is accepted at any timing during the operation valid period, the sound of “BGM playback” is in a playback state within a partial section set as silent data content. A special performance sound corresponding to an operation by the player can be generated while an atmosphere is provided in which the use situation of the channel is likely to be sufficient. It should be noted that the operation effective period is ended not only when the player does not perform an operation but at the timing ts15, but also when the player receives an operation. When the timing ts15 arrives without any operation by the player, a special effect sound may be generated as in the case of the operation by the player at that timing.

  In this example, it is assumed that an operation by the player is accepted at timing ts14. Based on the acceptance of the effect, the channel 02 to which the sound “BGM playback” is assigned. , 03 is assigned to a special effect sound for reproduction on channels 08, 09 different from.

  In this regard, in this example, the maximum time from the start of the operation effective period to the end thereof (time from timing ts13 to timing ts15) is “SY”, and the operation effective period ends at this maximum time. When the time from the end of a section in which silent data content is set as the sound of “BGM playback” to the end (time from timing ts15 to timing ts16) is “BF” Even if an operation by the player is accepted at any timing of the above, the special effect sound is assigned to the channels 08 and 09 for a certain period of time “SY + α (> BF)” and reproduced.

  According to such a configuration, even when an operation by the player is accepted at any timing within the operation effective period, the timing ts16 always comes when the special effect sound is in the reproduction state. It is possible to output the “BGM playback” sound as a non-suppressed form in the form of being mixed with the special effect sound. That is, in this case, although the time until the sound of “BGM playback” is output as a non-suppressed mode after the reproduction of the special effect sound is started according to the timing when the operation by the player is accepted, the time varies. The output period of the special effect sound is a buffer period for returning the sound of “BGM playback” in a non-suppressing manner (the sound of “BGM playback” is restored in a non-suppressing manner by intermingling with the special effect sound) The period of time when it is difficult for the player to notice that the “BGM playback” sound is not restored as a non-suppressed mode when an operation by the player is accepted, and the user feels uncomfortable by returning after a predetermined time. It becomes difficult to remember.

  Then, after the sound “BGM playback” is restored as the data content (non-suppressed mode) of the production sound for BGM playback, the sound “BGM playback” is played back in the non-suppressed mode when the timing ts17 arrives. While in the state, the reproduction of the special performance sound comes to an end.

  In the example described above, “timing at which the reproduction of the special effect sound is started” and “timing at which the reproduction of the special effect sound is ended” are performed by the player as shown in FIG. 300 (b). Although it will be variable within the range indicated by the dotted arrows according to the timing of acceptance, the timing ts16 arrives when the special performance sound is in the playback state, regardless of which timing it falls into. It is clear that the normal section in which the data content (non-suppression mode) of the BGM playback effect sound is set as the “BGM playback” sound is started.

  In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 300, “a sense of incongruity caused by returning after a predetermined time without returning the“ BGM playback ”sound as an unsuppressed mode when an operation by the player is accepted” is further remembered. In order to make it difficult, it is desirable to set the volume initial value of the special effect sound to be larger than the initial value of BGM playback in the normal section. According to such a configuration, it is possible to secretly shift the BGM playback sound to the playback state in the normal section while paying attention to the special effect sound having a large volume initial value.

  In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 300, when the player's operation is accepted, a special effect sound is generated based on the effect reception. However, a specific effect corresponding to the variation pattern and the result of the jackpot determination is used. The special effect sound may be generated based on the fact that the effect is accepted only when the condition is satisfied. Even if a specific performance condition is not satisfied, an operation valid period is generated at timing ts14, and when an operation by a player is accepted within the operation valid period, the production is accepted. Based on this, a predetermined effect sound (such as a failure effect sound) is reproduced. Even if the operation is performed at any timing within the operation effective period, the BGM playback sound is secretly set to the playback state in the normal section while the predetermined effect sound (failed effect sound or the like) is in the playback state. It is desirable to make the transition to the same as in the example shown in FIG.

  However, instead of this, when a predetermined effect sound (failed effect sound or the like) is reproduced, the reproduction time is made shorter than that when the special effect sound is put into the reproduction state, and the predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound) is reproduced. The sound of the BGM playback may be returned to the playback state in the normal section in a state where the playback of the sound or the like is finished. In this case, even if the operation is performed at any timing within the operation effective period, the timing for returning the BGM playback sound to the playback state in the normal section is the playback of a predetermined effect sound (such as a failure effect sound). It will be set so that it will arrive after ending. According to such a configuration, a silence period (according to the operation timing) from when a predetermined effect sound (failed effect sound or the like) ends to when the BGM playback sound returns to the normal state playback state. The period in which the length is variable) can be generated as the buffer period. In addition, if it is set so that a revival effect with a high degree of expectation (which may be 100%) can occur during the silent period, it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained.

  Alternatively, when reproducing a predetermined effect sound (failed effect sound, etc.), the BGM playback sound is not restored to the playback state in the normal section, and the symbol variation is stopped in a losing manner. Also good. In this case, at timing ts12, the assignment of the BGM playback sound to the channels 02 and 03 may be terminated, and this may be made an empty channel.

  In addition, when generating a special effect sound, it is also possible to reduce the degree of attention to the sound of BGM playback by performing a movable effect that operates a predetermined movable body based on the reception of the effect. This is desirable for secretly shifting the playback sound to the playback state in the normal section.

  In the example shown in FIG. 300, “BGM playback” sound is output silently in some sections, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the mode is suppressed more than “BGM playback” sounds in other sections. As long as it is output at. Here, examples of the suppressed mode include a mode of reducing the vibration frequency of the speaker cone per unit time in addition to a mode in which the volume is relatively lowered.

  Also, in the example shown in FIG. 300, by setting a suppression mode or a time-sequential period of silence in the sound data of “BGM playback” assigned to a predetermined channel itself, the “BGM playback” Without adjusting the volume of the sound, it is possible to create a state of being output in a suppressed manner or silence (special period) simply by playing it. However, it is not always necessary to set a suppression mode or a time-series period of silence in the sound data of “BGM playback” assigned to a predetermined channel. For example, at time ts12, the sound of “BGM playback” You may make it perform the volume adjustment which reduces a sound volume to a specific value (it may be mute). That is, in this case, even if an operation by the player is accepted at timing ts14, a process of increasing the sound volume of the “BGM playback” from the specific value (a process of returning to the initial volume value) is triggered by the acceptance of the effect. Do not. If the specific performance condition is satisfied, the volume of the “BGM playback” sound is increased from the specific value while the special performance sound is being played when the predetermined timing ts16 arrives. Processing (processing to return to the initial volume value) is performed. On the other hand, if a specific performance condition is not satisfied, the volume of the sound of “BGM playback” is specified while a predetermined performance sound (failed performance sound, etc.) is being played, as in the above-described another example. A process of raising the value from the value (a process of returning to the initial volume value) may be performed, or the sound volume of the “BGM playback” sound may be set to a specific value after the reproduction of the predetermined effect sound (failed effect sound or the like) is finished. (A process for returning to the initial volume value) may be performed, or the symbol variation may be terminated without raising a predetermined effect sound (such as a failure effect sound) from a specific value. Good.

  In the example shown in FIG. 300, a restriction process is made to make it difficult to assign a new sound to an empty channel over a period from a predetermined timing before timing ts12 to timing ts16 at least. It is desirable to make it. Note that such a restriction process has nothing to do with whether or not a jackpot symbol appears due to a symbol variation being executed, such as a block winning tone, a pending winning tone, a general electric effect sound, an adjustment tone, etc. It is desirable that a specific game sound is set as a restriction target, and that the specific game sound set as the restriction target is not newly assigned to a channel and is not reproduced.

  In addition, when it is determined that a specific effect pattern is to be executed as a symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination, a specific effect sound (BGM) is transmitted on a channel different from the channels 02 and 03 before the timing ts12 arrives. So that it is not a music but an effect sound such as a sound effect or a speech, etc.) and a timing ts12 arrives while the specific effect sound is being played, and BGM playback is performed. It is desirable that the sound is output in a suppressed manner or silence. That is, in this case, since the sound of BGM reproduction is mixed into the specific effect sound, it becomes difficult to notice that the sound of BGM reproduction has been set to the suppression mode or the silence state. Note that the playback state of a specific effect sound is terminated before the timing ts14 when the special effect sound (or the predetermined effect sound) is output (timing ts14 or before the timing ts14). However, it is desirable to alleviate the anxiety that the special performance sound is not output.

  In addition, when it is determined that a specific effect pattern is to be executed as a symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination, the sound of BGM playback is output from timing ts14 at which a special effect sound (or a predetermined effect sound) is output. It is desirable that the production sound is output on a plurality of channels until the timing ts16 when the suppression mode or the silenced state ends. That is, in this case, since a plurality of effect sounds including the special effect sound are output, it becomes possible to easily mix the sound of BGM playback into these effect sounds, and the sound of BGM playback is usually changed. It becomes possible to secretly shift to the reproduction state in the mode.

  Further, such a suppressed operation sound output process does not necessarily have to be performed when it is determined that a specific effect pattern is to be executed. For example, in the process described with reference to FIGS. 297 and 298 “BGM playback sound” is used as the restriction target, and the smaller the number of symbols, the smaller the number of minimum vacant channels (when the minimum number of vacant channels due to symbol variation is less than the predetermined number, compared to when the number is not less than the predetermined number). You may make it make the ratio by which the said operation sound output process under suppression is performed high. According to such a configuration, the BGM playback sound is output without being suppressed or silenced in a situation where there is a surplus in the number of empty channels so as not to feel uneasy that the special performance sound is not output due to a lack of channels. Will be able to.

[Channel assignment cancellation operation]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is limited, even if a special result is obtained by the determination by the determination means according to the winning, there is no vacant channel to which sound data is assigned In a situation where the number of empty channels is 0, a special sound corresponding to the fact that a special result has been obtained cannot be assigned to the channel, and there is a concern that the game entertainment will be lowered due to the fact that it cannot be output.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the process of changing at least one of the channels to which sound data is assigned to an empty channel to which no sound data is assigned is triggered by detection by the detection means. Executable (channel assignment cancellation operation). In other words, in this case, an empty channel will be created in response to the player's operation, so an empty channel is created by the player's operation at the timing immediately before the player's favorite performance sound or special sound is generated. By securing in advance, it becomes possible to reliably output the player's favorite performance sound and special sound through the empty channel secured in advance.

  Note that the operation (channel assignment cancellation operation) in this example is not limited to “button operation”, and examples include an act of praying while holding the hand against the pachinko machine 1 with reference to FIGS. 291 to 295. In short, it is based on a contact-type or non-contact-type predetermined sensor that can detect any state change that occurs when a specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) that is the detection target is performed. Any process may be used as long as it detects the sound assigned to the channel and removes the sound from the channel and ends the reproduction.

  FIG. 301 is a time chart showing an example of the allocation status of each channel when processing related to such channel allocation cancellation operation is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 301, during the period in which the symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination is being executed, at timing tw11, a predetermined effect pattern whose effect has been developed on the game board side effect display device 1600 "BGM1 playback" sound (for example, effect sound effect played during the execution of the super reach effect) is assigned to the playback channels 00 and 01 and played (in this case, stereo playback), and The sound of “BGM2 playback” corresponding to the production mode (for example, one piece of music that is continuously played back across multiple variations in a short-time gaming state, etc.) is assigned to playback channels 02 and 03 and played back (here, stereo playback) ) Is in the situation.

  In this regard, as shown in FIGS. 301 (a) and 301 (b), among the sounds in the reproduction state (BGM1 reproduction, BGM2 reproduction), the sound of “BGM2 reproduction” is a specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation). The channel assignment is forcibly terminated at the time when is detected, and during the period in which the symbol variation is being executed, when the timing tw12 is reached, an effect reception of the specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) is received. An allowable reception period can be generated up to timing tw13. In the reception period from timing tw12 to timing tw13, a specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) that is a detection target such as “operate a button and secure an empty channel” in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 An operation instruction image for prompting to perform is displayed.

  Here, FIG. 301 (a) shows the allocation status of each channel when a specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) is not performed within the reception period from timing tw12 to timing tw13 and detection by a predetermined detection means is not performed. Show.

  As shown in FIG. 301 (a), when the detection by the predetermined detecting means is not performed until the timing tw13 arrives, the sound of “BGM2 playback” is removed from the playback channels 02 and 03. Even after timing tw13 arrives, this is continuously reproduced. Further, at the timing tw13 when the acceptance period ends, the operation instruction image (operate the button and secure an empty channel) displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is not displayed.

  Further, at timing tw13, processing is performed in which a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit definite sound) is assigned to an empty channel (reproduction channels 10 and 11) and reproduced. In this example, since the other channels (reproduction channels 10 and 11) are reserved in advance without changing the reproduction channels 02 and 03 to empty channels by detection by a predetermined detection means, the empty channels are reserved. A predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit definite sound) can be assigned to the channel and played back. However, if the other channels are not reserved in advance, there is no empty channel to which a predetermined effect sound (here, the big hit definite sound) can be assigned, and this cannot be reproduced and output. Concern will arise.

  FIG. 301 (b) shows the allocation status of each channel when a specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) is performed at timing tw12a in the reception period from timing tw12 to timing tw13 and detection is performed by a predetermined detection means. Show.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 301 (b), when detection by a predetermined detection means is performed before the timing tw13 arrives, the playback channels 02 and 03 are reproduced at the timing tw12a when the detection is made. The sound “BGM2 playback” is removed. As a result, it is possible to secure in advance a free channel (playback channel 02, 03) that can function as a target for assigning a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit definite sound) until the timing tw13 arrives. The concern that the predetermined effect sound (here, the big hit definite sound) cannot be reproduced and output is resolved. In addition, the playback state of the sound “BGM2 playback” is forcibly terminated when detection by a predetermined detection means is performed, and in this case, the music or speech as the sound of “BGM2 playback” is exhausted to the end (or Since the playback ends at a halfway point without being played back, the player feels that a free channel has been reserved in advance by a specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) by the player. As a result, it becomes possible to easily wait for the timing at which a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit definite sound) is reproduced.

  It should be noted that at the timing tw12a when the detection by the predetermined detection means is performed, the reproduction state of the sound “BGM2 reproduction” is forcibly terminated, and the operation instruction image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (Operate the button and secure an empty channel) is not displayed, and the reception period in which the reception of the specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) is permitted is ended.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 301 (b), at the timing tw13, not the reproduction channels 02 and 03 reserved in advance as the empty channels, but other channels (reproduction channels 10, 11), a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit definite sound) is assigned and reproduced. However, if there is no vacancy in other channels at timing tw13, a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit definitive sound) is assigned to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 secured in advance and reproduced.

  Alternatively, when the specific sound (channel assignment cancellation operation) is performed at timing tw12a and the effect sound is removed from the specific channel based on detection by a predetermined detection means, there is a vacancy in another channel. However, a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit definite sound) may be assigned to the specific channel for reproduction. That is, in this case, when a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit definite sound) is assigned to a specific channel and reproduced, the effect sound (here, different from the predetermined effect sound) Even if BGM2) is allocated, the allocation state is canceled at that time triggered by a specific action detection (channel allocation cancellation operation) such as a button operation, and therefore one channel (specific channel) is assigned. It is possible to play “BGM2 playback” sound and a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit definite sound) only by using them, and to effectively use a playback channel which is a limited resource. .

  In the example shown in FIG. 301 (b), a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit definite sound) is reproduced at the timing tw13 when the reception period ends, but a timing later than the timing tw13. Then, a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit confirmation sound) may be reproduced.

  Further, as the predetermined effect sound, in addition to the jackpot definitive sound, an effect sound that suggests the degree of expectation that the jackpot symbol will appear, an effect sound that suggests that the player has lost the jackpot, and the like may be used. It is desirable that these effect sounds are selectively output based on the type of the effect pattern that appears due to the symbol variation. Alternatively, when it is suggested that the player has lost the jackpot, even if the timing tw13 arrives, no effect sound is output, and the empty channel may not necessarily be used.

  On the other hand, when a specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) is detected, the sound that ends channel assignment is not a sound that is output in any of a plurality of forms, but is output in only one form. It is desirable to execute as a specific sound. That is, in this case, even if the specific sound is missed when the playback state is forcibly terminated, the content can be easily predicted and does not cause any trouble. It becomes possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest when the state is forcibly terminated.

  In the example shown in FIG. 301 (b), a reception period in which the reception of a specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) is permitted is generated when a predetermined timing within the symbol variation arrives. Not limited to. For example, at least during a period in which a specific sound as a target to be excluded from channel assignment is in a playback state, a specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) is allowed to be accepted, and the channel assignment of the specific sound is based on the acceptance. You may make it cancel. In this case, for example, a predetermined sound after the specific sound is put into the playback state, a predetermined timing at which a predetermined time elapses, and the state of the empty channel reserved in advance is maintained for a predetermined time, and then another sound is output to the empty channel. It is desirable to be allocated and played back.

  In addition, as a method for canceling channel assignment of a specific sound to be forcibly terminated, a method for making a channel to which the specific sound is assigned an empty channel at that time, a predetermined sound (for example, 0. It is also possible to cancel the channel assignment of a specific sound by allocating an extremely short assignment cancellation reception sound (such as 1 second) in the form of overwriting the channel. Even in such a configuration, it is possible to cancel the channel assignment of the specific sound when the specific action is accepted and forcibly ended, at an earlier stage than when the specific action is not forcibly ended.

  In addition, at least during the period from when the reception of the effect of the specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) is permitted until the reproduction of the predetermined effect sound using the empty channel created by the reception of the effect ends, a new sound In order to prevent the channel from being used unnecessarily, a specific game sound (for example, a winning sound, a hold-change sound, a volume adjustment sound, etc. that is not related to the effect of whether the big hit symbol appears within the symbol variation) It is desirable not to output the pre-reading effect sound or the like.

  In addition, the specific sound to be forcibly terminated ("BGM2 playback" sound) is played as a non-loop effect sound such as music or speech that is played back only for a predetermined time without being looped. It is desirable to make it easier to remember that a free channel has been reserved in advance by a specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) by the player so that the playback ends at a halfway point without being played to the end. .

[Abnormality notification while a performance according to a performance pattern is being performed]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is limited, even if a special result is obtained by the determination by the determination means according to the winning, there is no vacant channel to which sound data is assigned In a situation where the number of empty channels is 0, a special sound corresponding to the fact that a special result has been obtained cannot be assigned to the channel, and there is a concern that the game entertainment will be lowered due to the fact that it cannot be output.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even when a specific abnormal state occurs, a specific notification sound corresponding to the specific abnormal state is not necessarily assigned to a channel and output. A specific notification sound is assigned to a channel and output on the condition that this occurs in a specific situation. That is, in this case, when a specific abnormal condition occurs, a specific notification sound corresponding to this is not necessarily output, thereby accelerating the reduction of the risk that there will be no more free channels due to that much room. Is expected.

  More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the predetermined movable decorative body is not at the specific position (origin position) even though it is at a timing at which the predetermined movable decoration body should be at the specific position (origin position). Is detected by a predetermined sensor (movable body abnormality), it is determined that an abnormality (movable body abnormality) has occurred in the predetermined movable decorative body. When such a movable body abnormality occurs, as a notification process by the pachinko machine 1, an output of a notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality (for example, “a movable body abnormality has occurred”) and a game The display at the time of abnormality in the display area of the board-side effect display device 1600 (for example, “abnormality occurred in the back movable effect unit 3200”) can be executed. In addition, it is desirable that the abnormal display in the display area is performed so that it is possible to specify which of the plurality of movable decorative bodies has an abnormality. It may be an aspect that identifies which abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body belonging to which of the groups. For example, as a plurality of movable decorative bodies, a plurality of frame-side movable decorative bodies (not shown) provided on the door frame 3 side and a plurality of board-side movable decorative bodies provided on the game board 5 side (for example, the front front decoration unit 3100 and the like) , The back-side movable effect unit 3200, the back-left movable effect unit 3300, the back-right movable effect unit 3400, the back-upper movable effect unit 3500, the back-under-movable effect unit 3700, etc.) The display at the time of abnormality in the display area is performed in such a manner that it can be specified which side of the decorative body or the board-side movable decorative body has an abnormality. Note that the plurality of movable decorative bodies refers to movable decorative bodies that have different drive sources and are provided separately.

  However, such a movable body abnormality is basically caused by a failure of the movable decorative body, and it is highly possible that there is no error on the part of the player. Therefore, if the notification process may be executed prominently during the period in which various games (such as symbol variations and jackpot games) according to the jackpot determination are being executed, However, it will have an adverse effect on the player, and it is an amusement for the player. Not only that, the number of empty channels is not enough for the notification sound corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body, so the player may feel uneasy about not being able to output a new sound. There is concern about a decline in the entertainment interest.

  However, on the other hand, a failure of the movable decorative body usually occurs when the movable decorative body operates, and there is a side where it is difficult to assume a situation where the mobile decorative body suddenly fails when not operating at all. Then, when the movable body abnormality occurs when the movable decorative body is not operating at all, it is abnormal when the movable decorative body is removed from a specific position (origin position) due to a fraudulent action such as a sticking action or a wire approach. If there is a possibility that it is in a detected situation and the notification sound corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body is not output in spite of being in such a situation, fraudulent acts may be promoted. If you are a big player, there is a concern about the decline in the gaming interest.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, such a movable body abnormality occurs during a period in which various games (symbol fluctuation, jackpot game, etc.) according to the jackpot determination are being executed and detected. Even in such a case, it is possible to execute a notification process (output of a notification sound, display at the time of abnormality in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, lighting at the time of abnormality by various lamps, etc.) by the pachinko machine 1. However, during a period in which various games (symbol variation, jackpot game, etc.) according to the jackpot determination are being executed, a process (variation pattern (effect pattern)) for operating the movable decorative body by at least the effect control by the peripheral control board 1510 When a movable body abnormality is detected while a movable decorative body is operated based on a performance pattern during a big hit game or the like, a notification process (output of notification sound) by the pachinko machine 1 is detected. The display at the time of abnormality in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, lighting at the time of abnormality by various lamps, etc.) are not performed. Note that the external output of the information indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body (hall side notification) is not performed in an obvious manner and does not adversely affect the performance, and may be performed regardless of the situation.

  According to such a configuration, even in a period in which various games (symbol variation, jackpot game, etc.) according to the jackpot determination are being executed, a situation in which a failure in the movable decorative body is unlikely to occur (by the peripheral control board 1510). Abnormality of moving object in process of moving movable ornament body by effect control (moving body driving process of moving movable ornament body based on variation pattern (effect pattern) or effect pattern during big hit game)) In the event that a failure occurs, the notification process by the pachinko machine 1 such as an abnormality notification sound can be performed, but at least in a situation where the failure of the movable decorative body is likely to occur (during the moving operation of the movable body), the movable body abnormality is In the case of occurrence, the notification process by the pachinko machine 1 such as an abnormal notification sound is not performed, so that the person who performs the illegal action is restrained from performing the illegal action. While manner also, so for a legitimate player is expected to avoid that adverse effects are exerted on the effect of running.

  For example, even if a movable body abnormality is detected in the process of operating the movable decorative body by the effect control by the peripheral control board 1510, the display control in the game board side effect display device 1600, the control control of the effect sound for the channel, and the occurrence of the abnormality The light emission control of the light emitting unit including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body is performed as it is in the same manner as when the movable body abnormality is not detected. It is suppressed from being exerted. However, even if the stage timing for operating the movable decorative body again after the movable body abnormality is detected, the movable decorative body is operated as long as the movable decorative body has not been recovered from the abnormal state. Production is not executed.

  That is, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, when a movable body abnormality is detected, it is determined whether or not a notification process by the pachinko machine 1 such as an abnormality notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality is performed. Regardless, it is possible to execute a restoration process for performing a predetermined restoration operation (an action to move the movable decorative body to a specific position (origin position)) to restore the movable decorative body from an abnormal state. This restoration process may be executed with different contents depending on the type of the movable decorative body in which an abnormality has occurred. According to such a configuration, even if the specific movable decoration body is in an abnormal state during the execution period of the symbol variation in which the specific movable decoration that operates the specific movable decoration body is performed, the specific movable decoration is started. If the specific movable decorative body is recovered from the abnormal state at an earlier stage, it is possible to execute a specific movable effect that operates the specific movable decorative body.

  It should be noted that the movable decorative object is identified within a predetermined time even though the restoration process for performing the predetermined restoration operation (the movement to move to the specific position (origin position)) is performed on the movable decorative object. If it does not return to the position (origin position), it is determined that the recovery has failed, and the game and performance are developed while maintaining the abnormal state.

  FIG. 302 shows the allocation status of each channel when a movable body abnormality is detected in the process of operating the movable decorative body according to the variation pattern (effect pattern) according to the jackpot determination during the period in which the symbol variation is performed. It is a time chart which shows an example about the situation by the side of a movable decoration object.

  As shown in FIG. 302 (a), the game board side effect display device 1600 is in the timing ti11 during the period when the symbol variation (specific effect pattern) corresponding to the result of the jackpot determination is being executed. The sound of “BGM playback” corresponding to the specific performance pattern in which the performance has been advanced is assigned to the playback channels 02 and 03 and has already been played back (in this case, stereo playback).

  In this symbol variation (specific effect pattern), at timing ti12, an operation effective period (effective period of effect reception) in which an operation opportunity is given to the player may occur over a period up to timing ti14. And if operation (for example, operation button 410) by a player is detected within this period (period from timing ti12 to timing ti14), the operation effective period (effective period of presentation reception) will be ended by using this as an opportunity. Production control for operating a specific movable decorative body is executed. If an operation (for example, the operation button 410) by the player is not detected within the operation effective period (effective period for receiving the effect), the effect control for operating the specific movable decorative body is executed after the timing ti14. Alternatively, the presentation control itself for operating a specific movable decorative body may not be executed.

  In this regard, in the example illustrated in FIG. 302, it is assumed that an operation by the player is accepted at timing ti13. Therefore, at the timing ti13, based on the fact that the player's operation has been accepted, the movable body driving process is executed to perform a movable effect that causes the specific movable decorative body to perform an effect (FIG. 302 (b)). (See FIG. 302 (a)). The production sound according to the movable production is assigned to the channels 08 and 09 for reproduction.

  Here, as the movable body driving process, for example, when operating a specific movable decorative body, first, it is determined whether or not the abnormality history is stored. As a result, when the abnormality history is stored, since the restoration process has failed and recovery cannot be expected, the movable body driving process is terminated without performing any driving. On the other hand, when the abnormality history is not stored, information from a predetermined sensor is acquired, and it is determined based on the information whether a specific movable decorative body is at a specific position (original position). As a result, if the specific movable decorative body is at the specific position (original position), the specific movable decorative body is operated in a manner defined by the effect pattern. In such an operation, the specific movable decorative body is finally returned to a specific position (original position), and when driving for the specific movable decorative body is completed, information from a predetermined sensor is acquired, If it is determined based on this information that the vehicle is returned to the specific position (original position), the movable body driving process is terminated. However, when it is determined that the specific movable decorative body is not in the specific position (original position) in the movable body driving process, a restoration process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable decorative body is executed. Then, the movable body driving process is terminated. At this time, if the restoration process fails, the abnormality history is stored in a predetermined storage area.

  With such a movable body driving process, the specific movable decorative body performs the rendering operation from the timing ti13. In this example, the specific movable decorative body is applied to the specific movable decorative body at the timing ti15 within the period during which the rendering operation is performed. It is assumed that an abnormality has occurred and this cannot work. In FIG. 302 (b), a dotted range indicates a period in which a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. Therefore, at the timing ti17 after the driving for the specific movable decorative body (drive for the rendering operation) is finished, it is determined that the specific movable decorative body is not returned to the specific position (original position) (movable body). An abnormality is determined), and a restoration process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body is executed based on the determination.

  However, as described above, a situation in which an abnormality (movable body abnormality) occurs in the specific movable decorative body while the specific movable decorative body is operating based on the effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination is the movable Since it can be said that there is a high possibility that it has occurred due to a failure of the decorative body, in this illustrative example, the abnormality notification sound corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body is not assigned to the channel and reproduced. That is, in this case, regarding the display control in the game board side effect display device 1600, the assignment control of the effect sound to the channel, and the light emission control of the light emitting unit including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body in which the abnormality has occurred, the movable body abnormality has occurred. Since it is executed as it is in the same manner as when it was not detected, it is possible to suppress an adverse effect on the performance being executed.

  At timing ti18, the restoration process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable decorative body is completed. At this time, it is detected that the movable decorative body has returned to the specific position (origin position). In the case (when it is determined that the movable body abnormality has been resolved), the storage of the abnormality history is erased, and thereafter, the normal movable effect can be executed. On the other hand, as shown in the example shown in FIG. 302 (b), it is not detected that the movable decorative body has returned to the specific position (origin position) (determination that the movable body abnormality has been eliminated) and the recovery fails. In this case, after that, as long as the RAM is not cleared and the power supply is continued, a predetermined restoration operation is not performed and the game and performance are developed while maintaining the abnormal state. That is, in this case, even within the same symbol variation, or within the symbol variation after the next time, even when the timing for executing the movable effect using the specific movable ornament based on the effect pattern has arrived, The effect operation is not performed, and the display effect when the movable effect is performed is executed in the game board side effect display device 1600, and the operation effect sound when the movable effect is performed is assigned to the channel and reproduced. In addition, various light emitting units including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body in which the abnormality has occurred only emit light in the light emitting mode when the movable effect is performed. However, especially when the movable decorative body itself does not operate, the actuator (lamp) mounted on the movable decorative body is activated (emitted) in the mode of operation, so that the movable effect is not performed. It is expected to curb the entertainment interest.

  As described above, when a movable body abnormality is detected in the process of operating the movable decorative body based on at least the variation pattern (effect pattern) according to the jackpot determination during the period in which the symbol variation is performed, the movable body By not assigning the abnormality notification sound corresponding to the abnormality to the channel and not reproducing it, it is possible to suppress an adverse effect on the effect being executed.

  On the other hand, even if an abnormality occurs in the same movable decorative body (specific movable decorative body) within the same variation pattern (specific production pattern) as in the example shown in FIG. When it occurs at a timing different from when a specific movable decorative body is operated by effect control (effect pattern), an abnormality notification sound corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body is assigned to the channel and reproduced.

  FIG. 303 shows that the movable body abnormality is not in the process of operating the movable decorative body according to the variation pattern (effect pattern) according to the big hit determination in the period in which the symbol variation is performed, but in a process different from this. It is a time chart which shows those examples about the allocation condition of each channel when detected, and the condition by the side of a movable decoration body.

  As shown in FIG. 303 (a), during the period in which the symbol variation (specific effect pattern) corresponding to the result of the jackpot determination is being executed, at the timing ti11, as described above, the game board side effect The sound of “BGM playback” corresponding to a specific effect pattern whose effect has been developed on the display device 1600 is assigned to the playback channels 02 and 03 and has already been played back (in this case, stereo playback).

  As described above, in this symbol variation (specific effect pattern), when the timing ti12 is reached, the operation effective period (effective period of the effect reception) in which an operation opportunity is given to the player is the maximum and the timing ti14. Can occur over time. And if operation (for example, operation button 410) by a player is detected within this period (period from timing ti12 to timing ti14), the operation effective period (effective period of presentation reception) will be ended by using this as an opportunity. Production control for operating a specific movable decorative body is executed.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 303, the specific movable decorative body is moved by some external force at the timing ti11a before the timing ti12 at which such a specific movable decorative body can perform the rendering operation (the operation does not operate based on the rendering pattern). Therefore, it is assumed that the specific movable decorative body is not detected at the specific position (original position) at the timing ti11b that should be at the specific position (original position) (movable body abnormality). In FIG. 303 (b) as well, a dotted range indicates a period in which a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. Accordingly, at the timing ti11b, based on the determination that the movable body abnormality has occurred, a restoration process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable decorative body is executed.

  At timing ti13a, the restoration process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable decorative body is completed. At this time, it is detected that the movable decorative body has returned to the specific position (origin position) (movable body). If it is determined that the abnormality has been resolved), the storage of the abnormality history will be erased, and after that, it will be possible to execute a normal movable effect without performing any abnormality notification. Become so. In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 303, the operation effective period (timing ti12 to timing ti14) is generated so as to straddle such timing ti13a. Therefore, when the operation by the player is accepted within the period of the timing ti12 to the timing ti13a in the operation effective period, the specific movable decorative body is still in an abnormal state, and therefore the rendering operation of the specific movable decorative body is The display effect when the movable effect is performed is executed in the game board side effect display device 1600, and the operation effect sound when the movable effect is performed is assigned to the channel and played back, causing an abnormality. The various light emitting units including the lamps mounted on the movable decorative body only emit light in the light emitting mode when the movable effect is performed. On the other hand, when an operation by the player is received within the period of the timing ti13a to the timing ti14 in the operation effective period (timing ti12 to timing ti14), the abnormal state of the specific movable decorative body is determined by the restoration process. If it is eliminated, the usual production control (movable body, display production, production sound, light emission) including the production operation of the specific movable decorative body is executed. In this example, it is assumed that a movable body abnormality has occurred only in a specific movable decorative body (one movable decorative body) and a restoration process corresponding to the abnormality is being performed. . That is, when a plurality of movable decorative bodies including a specific movable decorative body are in a state where restoration processing is being executed, even if an operation by the player is accepted within a period from timing ti13a to timing ti14, a specific operation is performed. Although the effect operation of the movable decorative body is not necessarily performed, this will be described later with reference to FIGS. 304 and 305.

  However, in the example illustrated in FIG. 303, it is assumed that at the timing ti13a, it is not detected that the movable decorative body has returned to the specific position (origin position) (determination that the movable body abnormality has been resolved) and the recovery has failed. doing. Therefore, after the timing ti13a, as long as the RAM is not cleared and the power supply is continued, a predetermined restoration operation is not performed and the game and performance are developed while maintaining the abnormal state.

  In addition, as described above, a situation in which an abnormality (movable body abnormality) has occurred in the specific movable decorative body although it is not the timing at which the specific movable decorative body is operated based on the performance pattern according to the result of the big hit determination It can be said that there is a possibility that an abnormality is detected when a specific movable decorative body is removed from a specific position (origin position) by a fraudulent action such as a sticking action or a wire approach. Moreover, the timing ti13a is a situation in which the abnormality of the movable body has not been resolved by some external force even in the restoration process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body, and there is a possibility that an illegal act has been performed. It can be said that it is increasing.

  Therefore, at the timing ti13a, although the symbol variation (specific effect pattern) is being executed, the notification process according to the movable body abnormality is executed. That is, in this case, in the channel, various effect sounds according to a specific effect pattern are assigned and reproduced according to the progress of the effect contents, and the abnormality notification sound is reproduced over a predetermined time in the reproduction channels 00 and 01. Will be assigned to and played. Further, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, in addition to the display effect corresponding to the specific effect pattern being developed and executed as it is, the display at the time of abnormality corresponding to the movable body abnormality (for example, “ The occurrence of an abnormality in the inside movable effect unit 3200 ”is executed. In addition, in various light emitting units, as a mode corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body, a part of the light emitting units emit light in an abnormal state, and the other light emitting units are in a normal mode in accordance with the progress of the production contents. The light will be emitted.

  302 and 303, even when the same movable body abnormality occurs during one symbol variation, the period during which the control related to the rendering operation of the movable decorative body based on at least the variation pattern is executed When the movable body abnormality occurs during the operation, it is unlikely that an illegal act has been performed, and there is a possibility of failure during the production operation. . On the other hand, when the abnormality of the movable body suddenly occurs when the control related to the production operation of the movable decorative body based on the variation pattern is not executed, it is highly likely that an illegal act is performed, and the abnormality is more abnormal than the production. This is a characteristic configuration assuming that it is more important to output the notification.

  In the example shown in FIG. 303, the notification process corresponding to the movable body abnormality is not performed at timing ti11b, and the restoration process is executed, but the notification process corresponding to the movable body abnormality is performed at timing ti13a when the movable body abnormality is not resolved. It was decided to do. However, at timing ti11b, a movable body abnormality is detected despite the fact that a specific movable decorative body cannot operate based on the production pattern, and even this alone causes fraudulent acts such as a sticking action or a wire approach. Since it can be said that there is a high possibility of being broken, a notification process corresponding to the movable body abnormality may be performed at this timing ti11b.

  In short, regarding the notification process in response to the abnormality of the movable body, within the period in which the symbol variation is performed, “the specific movable decoration body is in spite of the fact that the specific movable decoration body is not performing the production operation based on the production pattern. "A failure has occurred in the specific movable decorative body while the specific movable decorative body is performing the rendering operation based on the performance pattern". It is important not to be executed as a sufficient condition, so that it is possible for a person who performs a fraudulent act to prevent the fraudulent act from being performed, while being executed for a legitimate player It is expected to avoid having an adverse effect on the production. The condition for performing the notification process according to the abnormality of the movable body within the period in which the symbol variation is performed is as follows: “The specific movable decoration is not performed by the specific movable decoration body based on the production pattern. For example, “failure in restoration processing performed in response to the occurrence of an abnormality” or “occurring when the occurrence of an abnormality is in a specific situation” It is possible to adopt these as further conditions.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 302 and 303, it is determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decorative body within the process of operating the specific movable decorative body in accordance with the effect pattern. However, if an abnormality occurs when a specific movable decorative body is operated according to the production pattern, the notification process corresponding to the movable body abnormality will not be performed as a trigger. It may not be determined whether an abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decorative body within the process of operating the decorative body in accordance with the effect pattern. In this case, it is desirable that the determination as to whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body is performed at a predetermined timing or every predetermined time.

  In addition, the detection method of the movable body abnormality is not limited to the detection of the position of the movable decorative body to be detected. Other methods such as performing detection may be employed. In other words, in this case, in the example of FIG. 302, an overload is applied to an actuator such as a motor that operates the movable decorative body at the timing ti17, thereby detecting the abnormality of the movable body. In the example of FIG. 303, an overload is applied to an actuator such as a motor that operates the movable decorative body at the timing ti11b, thereby detecting the abnormality of the movable body.

  In the examples shown in FIG. 302 and FIG. 303, the specific movable decorative body is illustrated as performing the stage operation at the timing when the operation is performed by the player, but the specific movable decorative body is displayed at the specific timing determined by the presentation pattern. It is also possible to perform a production operation.

  Of the notifications corresponding to the movable body abnormality, the abnormality notification sound is assigned to the channel and reproduced for a predetermined time. During this reproduction period, the volume of the effect sound is reduced to a specific value (0). You may make it perform the process to reduce.

  In the case where the abnormality notification is not executed on the sufficient condition that “the abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decorative body while the specific movable decorative body is performing the production operation based on the production pattern”, after that, However, even if the abnormal state is not solved and remains, it is desirable not to notify the abnormality as long as the RAM is not cleared and the power supply is continued. In addition, it is desirable that the game or performance be developed while maintaining the abnormal state without causing a predetermined restoration operation.

[Restoration of multiple movable ornaments]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is limited, even if a special result is obtained by the determination by the determination means according to the winning, there is no vacant channel to which sound data is assigned In a situation where the number of empty channels is 0, a special sound corresponding to the fact that a special result has been obtained cannot be assigned to the channel, and there is a concern that the game entertainment will be lowered due to the fact that it cannot be output. Therefore, conventionally, even if a movable body abnormality occurs in any of a plurality of movable decorative bodies (movable decorative bodies with different drive sources and provided separately), common abnormal sound data (one abnormality (Sound data) is assigned to a channel and played back, so that the number of channels used is not increased unnecessarily even when a movable body abnormality occurs simultaneously for a plurality of movable decorative bodies. It was. In addition, the movable body abnormality means that the movable body is in a state where it cannot operate properly, and is the same as that exemplified in “abnormality notification while an effect according to an effect pattern is performed”. is there.

  However, in recent years, the number of movable ornaments mounted on gaming machines has increased, and the game can be obtained simply by associating common abnormal sound data (one abnormal sound data) with all movable ornaments. It is becoming difficult to properly inform the state of the machine. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of movable decorative bodies are divided into two or more groups, and abnormality notification sounds that differ depending on which of the groups the movable decorative bodies have an abnormality are made to channels. By assigning and reproducing, the state of the pachinko machine 1 can be appropriately notified even when the number of movable decorative bodies mounted on the pachinko machine 1 is increasing.

  In this example as well, when a moving body abnormality occurs, as described in the above-described example of “abnormality notification while an effect according to the effect pattern is being performed” (see FIGS. 302 and 303). Is performed. Therefore, even in this example, even when various games (symbol variation, jackpot game, etc.) are generated and detected, notification processing (output of notification sound) by the pachinko machine 1 is detected. The display at the time of abnormality in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, lighting at the time of abnormality by various lamps, etc.) can be executed. Similarly, during the period in which various games (symbol variation, jackpot game, etc.) according to the jackpot determination are being executed, a process (variation pattern) for operating the movable decorative body by at least the effect control by the peripheral control board 1510. When a movable body abnormality is detected while the (moving body driving process for operating the movable decorative body based on the (effect pattern) or the effect pattern during the big hit game) is being performed, a notification process by the pachinko machine 1 ( Notification sound output, abnormal display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, abnormal lighting by various lamps, etc.) are not performed.

  In this example, however, when a movable body abnormality occurs simultaneously in a plurality of movable decorative bodies, only one abnormal sound data assigned to a channel and put into a reproduction state is associated with a specific group among the above groups. On the other hand, a process for performing a restoring operation on all of the plurality of movable decorative bodies in which the abnormality occurs is executed. According to such a configuration, even when a movable body abnormality occurs in a plurality of movable decorative bodies, it is expected to promote a reduction in the risk that a channel will be freed up and there will be no free channels. As a result, it becomes possible to quickly return the abnormalities of each movable decorative body, and it is expected to reduce the channel use time by improving the efficiency of the processing when the abnormalities occur. . Note that the details of the restoration process and the processes at the time of success and failure are described in the above-mentioned example of “abnormality notification while an effect according to the effect pattern is being performed” (see FIGS. 302 and 303). ).

  Here, as an aspect which divides a some movable decoration body into two or more groups, it is calculated | required that it is an aspect suitable for alerting | reporting the state as the said pachinko machine 1, for example, it is provided in the door frame 3 side. A plurality of frame-side movable ornaments (not shown) and a plurality of board-side movable ornaments provided on the game board 5 side (for example, the back front decoration unit 3100, the back middle movable effect unit 3200, the back left movable effect unit 3300, the back Right movable effect unit 3400, back upper movable effect unit 3500, lower back movable effect unit 3700, etc.), the frame side movable decorative body that can be contacted without opening the door frame 3 is abnormal. Depending on the type of abnormality notification sound, it can be transmitted to the hall side whether or not an abnormality has occurred, or whether an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body on the panel side that is difficult to contact unless the door frame 3 is opened. So is the ability. In other words, when an abnormality occurs in the board-side movable decorative body, it can be said that there is a higher possibility that fraudulent acts are performed to the extent that contact is more difficult than when an abnormality occurs in the frame-side movable decorative body. Therefore, by performing the notification sound output based on such grouping, the notification sound according to the abnormality of the movable body is not noticed by the player side depending on the type (unpleasant feeling). Without any change), the fact that the pachinko machine 1 is in a state of high possibility of fraud can be secretly transmitted to the hall side.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment as well, in the event that a movable body abnormality has occurred, as a notification process by the pachinko machine 1, in addition to the output of the notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality, a game board side effect display As described above, the display at the time of abnormality in the display area of the device 1600 can be executed. In this regard, in this example, the plurality of movable decorative bodies are divided into two or more groups as a notification mode by display on the game board side effect display device 1600 in the notification process according to the movable body abnormality. It is desirable to display different notifications depending on whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body belonging to. However, the “notification by display” is inferior to the diffusion function for the occurrence of abnormality than the case of the “notification by sound”, but is superior in the information transmission function for informing the details of the abnormality in more detail. Have the same properties. Therefore, in the “notification by display”, the grouping is performed in such a manner that the information transmission function is more effectively performed in a manner different from the case of performing the “notification by sound” using the difference in properties. In particular, it is desirable to display differently depending on which of the groups thus uniquely divided belongs to the movable decorative body.

  That is, in this case, for example, when a movable body abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body A and when a movable body abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body B, the movable decorative bodies A and B are grouped into either group. Depending on whether there are any abnormalities in the movable body, the notification content displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 is the same even though the abnormality notification sound to be reproduced is the same. Is a first notification mode in which different displays are performed ”,“ a second notification mode in which an abnormality notification sound to be reproduced and a notification content to be displayed are the same even when any abnormality of the movable body occurs. ”And“ a third notification mode in which an abnormality notification sound to be reproduced and a notification content to be displayed are different from each other even when any movable body abnormality occurs ”occur. It becomes this It is possible to provide a more granular notification manner by notification by the two different contents of the sound and display.

  FIG. 304 shows an example of the allocation status of each channel and the status on the movable decorative body side when a movable body abnormality occurs simultaneously in a plurality of movable decorative bodies at a specific timing during the period in which the symbol variation is performed. It is a time chart.

  As shown in FIG. 304 (a), the game board side effect display device 1600 displays the timing change tj11 during the period when the symbol variation (specific effect pattern) corresponding to the result of the big hit determination is being executed. The sound of “BGM playback” corresponding to the specific performance pattern in which the performance has been advanced is assigned to the playback channels 02 and 03 and has already been played back (in this case, stereo playback).

  In this symbol variation (specific effect pattern), at the timing tj13, the operation effective period (effective period of effect reception) in which an operation opportunity is given to the player may occur over the period up to the timing tj15. And if operation (for example, operation button 410) by a player is detected within this period (period from timing tj13 to timing tj15), the operation effective period (effective period of effect reception) will be ended by using this as an opportunity. Production control for operating a specific movable decorative body is executed. If an operation (for example, the operation button 410) by the player is not detected within the operation effective period (effective period of the effect reception), the effect control for operating the specific movable decorative body is executed after timing tj15. Alternatively, the presentation control itself for operating a specific movable decorative body may not be executed.

  In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 304, it is assumed that an operation by the player is accepted at timing tj14. Therefore, at timing tj14, based on the fact that the operation by the player has been accepted, the movable body driving process is executed to perform a movable effect that causes the specific movable decorative body to perform an effect. An effect sound corresponding to the movable effect is assigned to 08 and 09 and reproduced.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 304, at a timing tj11, the plurality of movable decorative bodies are moved by some external force (the operation is not based on the effect pattern), and the timing tj13 at which the specific movable decorative body can perform the effect operation. A case is assumed where abnormalities of these movable bodies are detected at the previous timing tj12. In FIG. 304 (b) and later-described FIG. 305 (b), a dotted range indicates a period in which each movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. Therefore, at the timing tj12, based on the determination that the movable body abnormality has occurred, the above-described restoration process is performed to perform a predetermined restoration operation on each movable decorative body in which the movable body abnormality has occurred. Accordingly, in relation to this restoration process, even if an operation by the player is received at stage tj14, a specific movable decorative body is not necessarily operated. In the example shown in FIG. 304, a board-side movable decorative body A provided on the game board 5 side, a board-side movable decorative body B provided on the game board 5 side, and a board-side movable decorative body C provided on the game board 5 side. The movable body abnormality is detected with respect to the frame side movable decorative body D provided on the door frame 3 side, the frame side movable decorative body E provided on the door frame 3 side, and the frame side movable decorative body F provided on the door frame 3 side. Each situation is assumed.

  More specifically, in the restoration process according to the example shown in FIG. 304, first, the board side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C provided on the game board 5 side and the frame side movable decorative body provided on the door frame 3 side. The processing mode is different between D, E, and F. For example, with respect to the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C provided on the game board 5 side, a plurality of movable decorative bodies are arranged in a relatively narrow space. Therefore, after the timing tj12, the restoration process is performed so that the operation periods do not overlap each other based on a predetermined order. On the other hand, the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F provided on the door frame 3 side operate using the space outside the pachinko machine 1, and the board side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are operated. Therefore, the restoration process is simultaneously performed at the timing tj12, so that the rapid recovery of each movable decorative body can be performed.

  In such a configuration, the restoration process of the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C provided on the game board 5 side is performed over a long period from timing tj12 to timing tj18, whereas the door frame 3 side In the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F provided in the above, those restoration processes can be completed in a relatively short time from timing tj12 to timing tj16.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 304, the board-side movable decorative body provided on the game board 5 side before the operation effective period (effective period for effect reception) in which an operation opportunity is given to the player ends. It is assumed that none of the restoration processing of A, B, and C and the restoration processing of the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F provided on the door frame 3 side are completed. Therefore, when the specific movable decorative body corresponds to any of the panel-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, it corresponds to any of the panel-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C and the operation is effective. Regardless of the timing at which the stage is received (effective period of the stage reception), the stage is processed so that the stage operation is not performed when the stage is received.

  In other words, in this case, if there is a production reception within the period during which the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body is being performed, it is obvious that the specific movable decorative body cannot be produced using this as a trigger. Even if a production reception occurs after the restoration process for a specific movable ornament is completed, it is possible to perform another operation with another board-side movable ornament that is still in the stage of executing the restoration process. The concern of interfering arises. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 304, when the specific movable decorative body corresponds to any one of the panel-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, any one within the operation effective period (timing tj13 to timing tj15). Even if an operation by the player is accepted at the timing, the specific movable decorative body is not performed, and the display effect when the movable effect is performed is executed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and the channel is displayed on the channel. On the other hand, an effect sound (operation effect sound) when the movable effect is performed is assigned and reproduced, and various light emitting units including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body in which the abnormality has occurred perform the movable effect. In other words, the light is emitted only in the light emission mode. In short, when a specific movable decorative body corresponds to any of the panel-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, after all the restoration processes are completed (all the restoration processes are completed successfully), Only when the timing for performing the effect operation of the specific movable decorative body arrives, the execution of the effect operation is allowed.

  On the other hand, when the specific movable decorative body corresponds to any of the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F, it corresponds to any of the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F, and Processing is performed so that whether or not to perform a production operation triggered by this when the production is accepted depends on when the production is accepted within the operation valid period (effective period of production reception) It becomes.

  That is, in this case, first, if the specific movable decorative body is the frame side movable decorative body E, the timing tj13 to tj15 at which the specific movable decorative body can perform the rendering operation after the restoration process is completed (the restoration process is successful). Inevitably arrives, and even if the other movable decorative bodies A to C, D, and F are in the process of restoration, there is no concern of interfering with them. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 304, when the specific movable decorative body corresponds to the frame-side movable decorative body E, any operation by the player is accepted within the operation effective period (timing tj13 to timing tj15). Even if it is performed, a specific movable decorative body effect operation is performed, and the display effect when the movable effect is performed is executed in the game board side effect display device 1600, and the movable effect is applied to the channel. In the light emission mode when various movable light emitting units perform the movable effect, including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body in which an abnormality has occurred, the sound produced when the effect is performed is played back. Light is emitted.

  On the other hand, if the specific movable decorative body is the frame-side movable decorative body D, the operation effective period (timing tj13 to timing tj15) is generated so as to straddle the timing when the restoration process is ended. Therefore, when an operation by the player is accepted within the operation effective period before the restoration process is completed, the specific movable decorative body is still in an abnormal state. The body effect operation is not performed, and the display effect when the movable effect is performed is executed in the game board side effect display device 1600, and the effect sound when the movable effect is performed is assigned to the channel and reproduced. Then, various light emitting units including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body in which an abnormality has occurred only emit light in the light emitting mode when the movable effect is performed. On the other hand, when the operation by the player is accepted within the operation effective period within the period after the end of the restoration process (successful restoration process), the other movable decorative bodies A to C and F are restored. Since there is no concern of interfering with them even if it is in progress, normal production control (movable body, display production, production sound, light emission) is also included, including production operations of specific movable ornaments. Will be executed.

  On the other hand, if the specific movable decorative body is the frame-side movable decorative body F, the operation effective period (timing tj13 to timing tj15) does not arrive after the restoration processing is completed (successful restoration processing). . Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 304, when the specific movable decorative body corresponds to the board-side movable decorative body F, an operation by the player is accepted within the operation effective period (timing tj13 to timing tj15). Even if it is performed, the specific movable decorative body is not performed, the display effect when the movable effect is performed is executed in the game board side effect display device 1600, and the movable effect is performed for the channel. Effect sound (operation effect sound) is assigned and reproduced, and various light emitting units including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body in which an abnormality has occurred are emitted in the light emission mode when the movable effect is performed. Will stay.

  Here, the notification process according to the example shown in FIG. 304 will be described. In this example, a plurality of board-side movable decorative bodies A and B provided on the game board 5 side are provided when the notification sound is notified in accordance with the abnormality of the movable body. , C, and a plurality of frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, F provided on the door frame 3 side, and the abnormal movable decorative body belongs to any of these groups. Different notification sounds are output depending on whether there are any.

  In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 304, it is assumed that a movable body abnormality occurs simultaneously in the board-side movable decorative body and the frame-side movable decorative body. However, such a situation cannot normally occur as a proper game is progressing, and cannot occur as a result of fraud. There is a high probability that all movable decorations have been tampered with manually, and so on. In any case, in such a special situation, the notification process itself can be troublesome, and it is required to end the notification state early.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 304, it was detected that the movable body abnormality occurred with respect to the board side movable decorative bodies A, B, C and the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, F, respectively. At timing tj12, as described above, the restoration process on the board-side movable decorative body side and the restoration process on the frame-side movable decorative body side are simultaneously started as described above, while the alarm sound output is movable on the frame side. The common alarm sound for the frame side corresponding to the decorative bodies D, E, and F is not assigned to the channel, but the common alarm sound for the board side corresponding to the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is assigned to the channel. The output is stopped.

  That is, the time for which the abnormality notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality is reproduced is the time until the abnormality of the movable decorative body to be notified is resolved, or a predetermined predetermined time after the abnormality notification sound is output. It is set as the time until the time (for example, 30 seconds common on the board side and the frame side) elapses. Therefore, among the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C and the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F, the “board-side movable decorative body A, By assigning only the panel side common abnormality notification sound corresponding to the B and C sides to the channel, the “board side common abnormality notification sound corresponding to the panel side movable decorative body A, B, and C side” is generated. The restoration process of the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F can be ended while the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F are being reproduced. Since the output request of the “frame side common abnormality notification sound corresponding to the frame side movable decorative body D, E, F” after the output of “sound” is ended, it is avoided. The notification process can be ended in a simpler manner.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 304, the panel side movable decorative body A, B, C and the frame side movable decorative body D, E, F are being restored. The “board side common decorative alarm sound corresponding to the board side movable decorative body A, B, C side” is assigned to the channel and reproduced over the period up to the timing tj18 when all the restoration processes of B, C are finished. Thus, the “frame side common abnormality notification sound corresponding to the frame side movable decorative body D, E, F side” is not reproduced. At this time, as described above, the assignment control of the effect sound to the channel is performed as usual.

  On the other hand, in the notification mode by display in the game board side effect display device 1600 in the notification process according to the movable body abnormality, the above “notification by sound” is performed by utilizing the difference in properties from the notification sound described above. The above-mentioned grouping is performed in a mode different from the above, in a mode in which the information transmission function is more exerted, and a different display is performed depending on which of the groups uniquely divided in this way is abnormal. ing. That is, in this case, for example, if the frame-side movable decorative body E is grouped with the frame-side movable decorative body F, even if the restoration process of the frame-side movable decorative body E is completed, the frame-side movable decorative body E corresponds to this. The “notification by display” remains maintained, and the “notification by display” is terminated at the timing when the restoration process of the frame-side movable decorative body F is completed. Similarly, for example, if the board-side movable decorative body A is grouped with the frame-side movable decorative body D, even if the restoration processing of the frame-side movable decorative body A is completed, The corresponding “notification by display” remains maintained, and the “notification by display” ends at the timing when the restoration process of the frame-side movable decorative body D ends. Therefore, even if the restoration process for a specific movable decorative body ends first, depending on the execution situation related to the restoration process of the movable decorative body grouped with the specific movable decorative body, The “notification by display” corresponding to the movable decorative body for which the restoration process has been completed later may be terminated first.

  According to the example of FIG. 304, a plurality of notification sounds corresponding to the type of the movable decorative body in which the movable body abnormality has occurred are prepared as the notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality. When a movable body abnormality occurs simultaneously in a plurality of movable decorative bodies corresponding to each of the notification sounds, only one of the plurality of notification sounds can be reproduced. The movable decorative body that does not correspond to the notification sound is also executed during the reproduction period. Moreover, as a movable decorative body corresponding to the notification sound in the reproduction state, when a plurality of movable decorative bodies are in an abnormal state, these movable decorative bodies are individually restored according to a predetermined order. On the other hand, as a movable decorative body that does not correspond to the notification sound in the reproduction state, when a plurality of movable decorative bodies are in an abnormal state, the restoration process for these movable decorative bodies is executed simultaneously. As a result, for a movable decorative body that does not correspond to the notification sound in the playback state, the total time required for the restoration process can be made shorter than that of the movable decoration body that corresponds to the notification sound in the playback state. While one specific notification sound of the notification sound is being reproduced, all the movable decorative bodies can be returned from the abnormal state to the normal state, and the second notification sound is output. It becomes possible to avoid it.

  That is, in this embodiment, a plurality of movable decorative bodies are grouped into a board-side movable decorative body and a frame-side movable decorative body, and restoration processing corresponding to each group is performed simultaneously. Not limited to. In short, a plurality of movable decorative bodies (A to F in the above example) can be operated in two or more groups (in the above example, the board side and (The frame side), the restoration process can be executed independently for each group, and a plurality of movable decorative bodies (DF) belonging to at least one of the groups (the frame side in the above example) Among them, if it is selected as a movable decorative body that can be operated without being affected by each other's operation status and all can be restored simultaneously, see FIGS. 304 and 305. It is possible to configure so as to obtain the functions and effects described.

  In the example shown in FIG. 304, it is desirable that the determination as to whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body be made at a predetermined timing or every predetermined time. In addition, the detection method of the movable body abnormality is not limited to the detection of the position of the movable decorative body to be detected. Other methods such as performing detection may be employed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 304, the specific movable decorative body is exemplified as the stage operation at the timing when the player operates, but the specific movable decorative body is performed at the specific timing determined by the stage pattern. It may be allowed.

  Of the notifications corresponding to the movable body abnormality, the abnormality notification sound is assigned to the channel and reproduced for a predetermined time. During this reproduction period, the volume of the effect sound is reduced to a specific value (0). You may make it perform the process to reduce.

  In the example shown in FIG. 304, the movable body abnormality occurred in the board side movable decorative bodies A, B, C and the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, F, respectively, during the period in which the symbol variation was executed. Although the description has been made assuming that the situation is assumed, the symbol variation is not necessarily executed. That is, during the execution of the big hit game or when the special symbol game is in a state of waiting for progress (for example, in the demo screen), the board side movable ornaments A, B, C and the frame side movable ornament D, Even when a movable body abnormality occurs in each of E and F, each process according to the movable body abnormality is performed in the same manner as the example described with reference to FIG.

  In the example shown in FIG. 304, the restoration process is performed so that the operation periods of all the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C provided on the game board 5 side do not overlap with each other based on a predetermined order. It was. However, if a plurality of movable decorative bodies that do not interfere with each other even if they are operated simultaneously are included in the panel-side movable decorative body, the panel-side movable decorative bodies are arranged based on a predetermined order. During the restoration process, the restoration process may be performed at the same time only for some movable decorative bodies that do not cause interference due to contact with each other.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 304, the timing at which it is determined whether a movable body abnormality has occurred in the board side movable decorative bodies A, B, C, and the movable body abnormality has occurred in the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, F. Although it is assumed that the timing at which the determination is made is the same, these timings may be different. For example, as shown in FIG. 305, after it is determined that a movable body abnormality has occurred in the panel side movable decorative bodies A, B, C, a movable body abnormality has occurred in the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, F. Even when the determination is made, the restoration process for the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F is completed at an earlier timing than the restoration process for the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is completed. As long as there is a relationship, after the output of the “common alarm sound on the board side corresponding to the board side movable decorative bodies A, B, C” ends, the “frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, F side It is possible to avoid a request for output of the corresponding frame side common abnormality notification sound.

  Conversely, in the example shown in FIG. 304, after it is determined that a movable body abnormality has occurred in the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, F, a movable body abnormality has occurred in the board side movable decorative bodies A, B, C. You may make it be the processing structure determined to have carried out. However, in this case, when it is determined that the movable body abnormality has occurred in the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F, a notification process corresponding to the movable body abnormality and a restoration process of the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F are performed. And wait until it is determined that the movable body abnormality has occurred in the panel side movable decorative bodies A, B, C, and then correspond to the panel side movable decorative bodies A, B, C side. While the notification process is performed, it is desirable to perform the restoration process for the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C and the restoration process for the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F, respectively. In addition, as a result of waiting for the determination process whether the movable body abnormality occurred in the panel side movable decorative bodies A, B, C, no movable body abnormality occurred in the panel side movable decorative bodies A, B, C. In this case, the restoring process of the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F is performed while the notification process corresponding to the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F is performed.

[17. Detection signal detection error detection sensor]
Next, a configuration for preventing erroneous detection of a signal from the detection sensor due to contact resistance will be described. The gaming machine described here is, for example, a gaming machine represented by a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine, and relates to a gaming machine in which a game is played by a player.

  2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine (for example, a so-called pachinko machine) that plays a game by driving a game ball toward the game area and rolling down the game ball that is driven in the game area is widely known. The gaming board of such a gaming machine detects a winning detection sensor that detects a winning of a game ball at a winning opening (a start opening, a large winning opening, a normal winning opening, etc.), and an illegal gaming act on the gaming board. Many detection sensors such as sensors (for example, vibration detection sensors and magnetic detection sensors) are provided (for example, JP 2009-165673 A).

  In gaming machines, there are circumstances where the detection sensors are installed at a plurality of locations in the game area (for example, arranged in the vicinity of a start opening, a winning opening, a big winning opening, an out opening, etc.). For this reason, a connector member is generally used for electrical connection between a detection sensor and a detection circuit unit (for example, a transistor on a panel relay board) that detects a detection signal from the detection sensor. .

  By the way, when signal transmission is performed by the connector member, when the connector member is corroded or dust enters the connector connecting portion, contact resistance is generated. Similarly, contact resistance occurs when vibration is applied to the connector member. For example, when playing a right-handed game, when vibration is applied to the connector member from a specific part of the game area where a large number of game balls continuously concentrate and flow down, this causes contact resistance. There is a fear.

  If a current flows through the contact resistance generated due to this, the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance will rise, and an abnormal voltage different from the original normal state may enter the detection circuit unit. is there. That is, there is a possibility that the signal of the detection sensor is erroneously detected.

  Therefore, the present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent erroneous detection of a signal from a detection sensor due to contact resistance.

  The gaming machine according to [Means 1] includes a detection sensor unit arranged at a predetermined position and a relay board that relays a detection signal of the detection sensor part to a main control board. In order to solve the problem, the main control board switches on / off the output of the detection signal in response to the first voltage output from the voltage output unit or the second voltage that is lower than the first voltage. A relay circuit that outputs the first voltage when the detection sensor is in the first state, and the second voltage when the detection sensor is in the second state. Between the voltage output unit that outputs the voltage output unit, and the detection circuit unit of the main control board between the voltage output unit and the detection circuit unit of the main control board, the second voltage in the second state, the second voltage A predetermined voltage higher than and lower than the first voltage is added The detection sensor unit and the voltage output unit are electrically connected to each other through a connector member. The voltage output unit and the detection circuit unit are electrically connected via each other.

  According to the gaming machine according to [Means 1], when the detection sensor unit has the second voltage in the second state and the current flows through the contact resistance of the connector unit, the first voltage is higher than the second voltage. Even if a lower predetermined voltage is added, the avoidance unit avoids the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit. Thereby, since the voltage of the detection circuit section is not affected, when contact resistance occurs due to slight sliding wear of the connector member, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a signal from the detection sensor due to contact resistance. .

  The gaming machine according to [Means 2] is characterized in that, in the gaming machine according to [Means 1], the avoidance unit includes a Zener diode having a Zener voltage higher than the predetermined voltage. is there.

  According to the gaming machine according to [Means 2], when the detection sensor unit has the second voltage in the second state and the current flows through the contact resistance of the connector unit, the first voltage is higher than the second voltage. Even if a lower predetermined voltage is added, the Zener voltage is higher than the predetermined voltage, so that the Zener diode remains non-conductive. That is, the Zener diode avoids the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit.

  Thereby, since the voltage of the detection circuit section is not affected, when contact resistance occurs due to slight sliding wear of the connector member, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a signal from the detection sensor due to contact resistance. .

  According to the above gaming machine, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a signal from the detection sensor caused when the contact resistance of the connector member is generated.

[17-1. Conventional magnetic sensor input circuit]
FIG. 306 is a circuit diagram showing an example of a conventional magnetic sensor input circuit provided in a gaming machine. The gaming machine has a main control board 1310 and a panel relay board 4161. As shown in the figure, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is supplied with the voltage + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g. The magnetic detection sensor 4024 is the same as the magnetic sensor 2404 described with reference to FIG.

  The magnetic detection sensor 4024 includes a magnetic sensor MGS and a built-in transistor STR. The magnetic sensor MGS is composed of, for example, a magnetoresistive effect element or the like, and outputs a predetermined voltage (for example, +5 V) when it does not detect magnetism above a predetermined value, and outputs a voltage when it detects magnetism above a predetermined value. Do not (0V).

  The base terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the output terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR is grounded. The collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to one end of a pull-up resistor IR0 provided on the panel relay substrate 4161 via a connector CON1, and + 12V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR0. Thereby, when the transistor STR is in the OFF state, the collector terminal of the transistor STR is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor IR0 (corresponding to the first voltage).

  The transistor STR is turned on by a voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS when the magnetic sensor MGS does not detect magnetism, and a current flows from the collector terminal to the ground via the emitter terminal. In addition, when the magnetic sensor MGS detects the magnetism, the transistor STR is turned off when the output from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped, and the flow of current from the collector terminal to the emitter terminal is stopped.

  The collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to one end of the resistor IR1 in addition to being connected to the pull-up resistor IR0, and the other end of the resistor IR1 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 is grounded, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR2, and + 12V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR2. Thereby, when the transistor ITR0 is in the OFF state, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor IR2.

  The collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 in the subsequent stage, in addition to being connected to the pull-up resistor IR2. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the connector CON2.

  The main control input circuit 1310b is composed of a pull-up resistor NR1, a resistor NR2, and a transistor NTR1, and one end of the pull-up resistor NR1 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 in the previous stage of the panel relay board 4161 via the connector CON2. + 12V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor NR1. As a result, when the previous stage transistor ITR1 is in the OFF state, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor NR1.

  The collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to one end of the resistor NR2 in addition to being connected to the pull-up resistor NR1, and the other end of the resistor NR2 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1. The emitter terminal of the transistor NTR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is electrically connected to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

  In the figure, the detection sensor unit corresponds to the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the voltage output unit 4163 is connected to the magnetic detection sensor 4024, and corresponds to the pull-up resistor IR0 to which + 12V is applied. In addition, the detection circuit unit 4164 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, and includes a pull-up resistor IR2 to which + 12V is applied and a transistor ITR1 having a base terminal connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0. Is applicable.

  In addition, a sensor signal input unit 4162 is configured by a circuit configured by the connector CON1, the voltage output unit 4163, the resistor IR1, and the transistor ITR0 in the preceding stage of the detection circuit unit 4164. Thus, the sensor signal input unit 4162 and the detection circuit unit 4164 are provided on the panel relay board 4161.

[17-1-1. Detection operation]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state in which magnetism is not detected, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR, thereby turning on the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. Further, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). In addition, since the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is also lowered to the ground side. Thereby, the transistor ITR0 is turned off.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage raised to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1, whereby the transistor ITR1 is turned on. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

  Further, when the transistor ITR1 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. A magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal where the transistor NTR1 is off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

  When the magnetic sensor MGS is in a detection state in which magnetism is detected, the output of the voltage from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR disappears, so that the built-in transistor STR is turned off. When the transistor STR is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is raised to the + 12V side. In addition, since the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is also raised to the + 12V side (corresponding to the first voltage). Thereby, the transistor ITR0 is turned on.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0. When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

  When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, the voltage raised to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor NR2 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1, thereby turning on the transistor NTR1. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, a magnetic detection switch signal whose logic connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is HI (on) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

  The operation states of the magnetic sensor MGS, the built-in transistor STR, the transistor ITR0, the transistor ITR1, and the transistor NTR1 described above are shown in a tabular form in FIG. Even when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is disconnected from the panel relay substrate 4161, the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the transistor ITR1 is turned off, and the transistor NTR1 is turned on similarly to the operation when the magnetic sensor MGS detects magnetism. .

  By the way, when signal transmission is performed by the connector member, when the connector member is corroded or dust enters the connector connecting portion, contact resistance is generated. There are pin contact type and bellows contact depending on the shape of the contact part terminal of the connector member, but in the case of the bellows contact type, if the harness attached to the connector member is pulled during connection work etc., the pin contact The gap is easier to open than the type. When the gap is opened, dust or the like easily enters from this portion.

  Similarly, contact resistance occurs when vibration is applied to the connector member. For example, when playing a right-handed game, when sliding wear occurs due to vibration from a specific part of the game area where many game balls continuously concentrate and flow down, to the connector member However, this may cause contact resistance.

  Here, the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit when such a contact resistance RR is generated in the connector member (connector CON1) that electrically connects the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the voltage output portion 4163 of the panel relay board 4161. Will be described. For example, in FIG. 306, when the contact resistance RR is generated in the connector member, the contact resistance RR is indicated by a chain line. Note that the size of the contact resistance RR is 100 to 1000 times that when the connector contact is normal.

  As described above, when the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state in which no magnetism is detected, the built-in transistor STR is turned on. When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor RR (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. Thereby, although the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage), the current flows through the contact resistance RR, so that the potential upstream of the contact resistance RR Will be lifted. In FIG. 306, a connection point between the pull-up resistor IR0 and the resistor IR1 is illustrated as a black circle as a portion where the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistor RR increases.

  That is, when a current flows through the contact resistance RR generated due to the contact state of the connector portion, a voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0. . When the voltage raised by the contact resistance RR reaches a specified voltage between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0, the transistor ITR0 is turned on. Therefore, there is a possibility that the transistor ITR0 is turned on even though the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in the non-detection state. That is, in the conventional sensor signal input unit 4162 provided on the panel relay board 4161, when the contact resistance RR is generated, there is a possibility that the sensor signal is erroneously detected.

[17-2. Example 1 of Magnetic Sensor Input Circuit]
FIG. 307 is a circuit diagram illustrating an example (Example 1) of a magnetic sensor input circuit arranged in the gaming machine of the embodiment. In this embodiment, the magnetic sensor input circuit of Example 1 includes a magnetic detection sensor 4024 of the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit of FIG. 306, a connector CON1, a voltage output unit 4163 of the panel relay board 4161, a detection circuit unit 4164, and a main control board. The main control input circuit 1310b 1310 has the same circuit configuration. For this reason, the same reference numerals are used for the same circuit components.

  The magnetic detection sensors 4024 are installed at a plurality of locations in the game area, for example, near the first start port 2002, the second start port 2004, the general winning port 2001, the big winning port 2005, the out port 1126, and the like. become.

  The magnetic sensor input circuit of the present embodiment is different from the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit in that the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism between the voltage output unit 4163 and the detection circuit unit 4164 (second detection state). State), a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is added to the voltage (second voltage) at which the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side. An avoidance unit 4166 for avoiding the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164 is provided, and the voltage output unit 4163 and the detection circuit unit 4164 are electrically connected via the avoidance unit 4166.

  In the first embodiment, the avoidance unit 4166 is configured by a Zener diode ZD0 having a Zener voltage higher than the predetermined voltage. Specifically, the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163, and the collector terminal of the transistor STR built in the magnetic detection sensor 4024 via the connector CON1 in the previous stage of the connection part. It is connected.

  The anode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 arranged in the subsequent stage. Further, + 12V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR0. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR2 to which +12 V is applied to the other end in the detection circuit unit 4164 and the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 Connected to the base terminal. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the connector CON2. The sensor signal input unit 4162 is configured by the connector CON1, the voltage output unit 4163, and the avoidance unit 4166.

[17-2-1. Detection operation when connector contact is normal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state in which magnetism is not detected, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR, thereby turning on the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR.

  As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). In addition, since the collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 via the Zener diode ZD0, the Zener voltage is higher than the second voltage, so that the Zener diode ZD0 maintains a non-conductive state. For this reason, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0 V). Thereby, the transistor ITR0 is turned off.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage raised to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit portion 4164, whereby the transistor ITR1 is turned on. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

  When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. A magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal where the transistor NTR1 is off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

  When the magnetic sensor MGS is in a detection state in which magnetism is detected, the output of the voltage from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR disappears, so that the built-in transistor STR is turned off. When the transistor STR is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is raised to the + 12V side. Further, since the collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 via the Zener diode ZD0, a Zener voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (corresponding to the first voltage). Thereby, the transistor ITR0 is turned on.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0. Further, when the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit portion 4164 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

  When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, the voltage raised to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1, thereby turning on the transistor NTR1. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, a magnetic detection switch signal whose logic connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is HI (on) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

  When the main control MPU 1310a determines that such an abnormal state is present, in the above example, when the logic of the magnetic detection switch signal is determined to be HI, the main control unit MPU 1310a An error command is transmitted to the control unit 1511 and a process of outputting a signal indicating that from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer is performed. In response to the error command, the peripheral control unit 1511 notifies the abnormality by the game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect display device 460, an alarm lamp, voice, or the like.

[17-2-2. Detection operation when connector contact is abnormal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state (second state) in which magnetism is not detected, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR, thereby incorporating the built-in transistor STR. The transistor STR is turned on.

  When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor RR (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. Thereby, although the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage), the current flows through the contact resistance RR, so that the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR. Lifts up. In FIG. 307, the connection point between the pull-up resistor IR0 and the Zener diode ZD0 is illustrated as a black circle as a location where the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR increases.

  That is, when a current flows through the contact resistance generated due to the contact state of the connector portion, a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is added to the second voltage, and the Zener This is applied to the cathode terminal of the diode ZD0. Even if a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage is added and applied, the Zener diode ZD0 maintains the non-conduction state because the Zener voltage is higher than the predetermined voltage. For this reason, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0 V). Thereby, the transistor ITR0 is turned off. That is, the avoidance unit 4166 avoids the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164.

  The operation of the detection circuit unit 4164 and the main control input circuit 1310b in the subsequent stage is the same as the detection operation when the connector contact is normal.

  As a result, since the voltage of the detection circuit unit 4164 is not affected (because there is no voltage change), when contact resistance occurs due to slight sliding wear of the connector member, the signal from the detection sensor due to contact resistance is False detection can be prevented.

  As in the prior art, when an abnormality is detected by the magnetic sensor MGS, the main control MPU 1310a transmits an error command to the peripheral control unit 1511, and the peripheral control unit 1511 transmits a magnet according to the transmitted error command. Notification that an illegal gaming act using the game machine has been performed or that the magnetic detection sensor 4024 has been disconnected is provided by the game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect display device 460, a warning indicator, voice, etc. To do. Further, an error signal is output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer.

[17-3. Example 2 of Magnetic Sensor Input Circuit]
FIG. 308 is a circuit diagram illustrating an example (Example 2) of a magnetic sensor input circuit arranged in the gaming machine of the embodiment. The magnetic sensor input circuit of the second embodiment includes the magnetic detection sensor 4024 of the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit of FIG. 306, the connector CON1, the voltage output unit 4163 of the panel relay board 4161, the detection circuit unit 4164, and the main control of the main control board 1310. The input circuit 1310b has the same circuit configuration. For this reason, the same reference numerals are used for the same circuit components.

  In the second embodiment, the avoiding unit 4166 includes a first resistor IR1 having one end connected to the voltage output unit 4163, a second resistor having one end connected to the other end of the first resistor IR1, and the other end grounded. And the resistor IR3. When the sensor signal input unit 4162 of the second embodiment is compared with the conventional sensor signal input unit 4162 of FIG. 306, one end of the resistor IR3 whose other end is grounded is arranged downstream of the other end of the resistor IR1. The difference is that it is connected to the connection point with the base terminal of the transistor ITR0. That is, in the second embodiment, the avoiding unit 4166 is an example in which the avoidance unit 4166 is configured by a resistor IR3 that causes a current to flow to ground when the predetermined voltage is applied.

  One end of the first resistor IR1 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163, and is connected to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 via the connector CON1 in the previous stage of the connection portion. ing.

  Further, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR1 to which + 12V is applied to the other end in the detection circuit unit 4164, and to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the connector CON2. The sensor signal input unit 4162 is configured by the connector CON1, the voltage output unit 4163, and the avoidance unit 4166.

[17-3-1. Detection operation when connector contact is normal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state in which magnetism is not detected, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR, thereby turning on the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR.

  As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Further, since the collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0, the voltage pulled to the ground side is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0. Thereby, the transistor ITR0 is turned off.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage raised to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1, whereby the transistor ITR1 is turned on. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

  When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. A magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal where the transistor NTR1 is off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

  When the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a detection state in which magnetism is detected, the output of the voltage from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR disappears, so that the built-in transistor STR is turned off. When the transistor STR is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is raised to the + 12V side.

  Further, a voltage of +12 V is applied to a series resistance circuit configured by the pull-up resistor IR0, the first resistor IR1 of the avoiding unit 4166, and the second resistor IR3, and the pull-up resistor IR0 and the first resistor of the avoiding unit 4166 A current flows to the ground via IR1 and the second resistor IR3. When a current flows through the second resistor IR3, a potential difference generated between both ends of the second resistor IR3 is applied between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0, whereby the transistor ITR0 is turned on.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0. Further, when the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit portion 4164 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

  When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, the voltage raised to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1, thereby turning on the transistor NTR1. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, a magnetic detection switch signal whose logic connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is HI (on) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

[17-3-2. Detection operation when connector contact is abnormal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state in which magnetism is not detected, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR, thereby turning on the built-in transistor STR.

  When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. Thereby, although the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage), the current flows through the contact resistance RR, so that the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR. Lifts up. In FIG. 308, a connection point between the pull-up resistor IR0 and the first resistor IR1 is illustrated as a black circle as a portion where the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistor RR increases.

  That is, when a current flows through the contact resistance RR generated due to the contact state of the connector portion, a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is added to the second voltage. 1 is applied to one end of the resistor. This voltage is sufficiently lower than the voltage applied when the built-in transistor of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is turned off.

  When a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage is added and applied to one end of the first resistor, a current flows through the first resistor IR1, and this current further flows to the ground through the second resistor IR3. That is, since the other end of the second resistor IR3 is grounded, a current obtained by adding a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage to the second voltage is almost grounded. As a result, almost no current flows into the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 subsequent to the second resistor IR3. Therefore, the subsequent transistor ITR0 is not turned on. As a result, the subsequent transistor ITR0 maintains the off state. That is, the avoidance unit 4166 avoids the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164.

  The operation of the detection circuit unit 4164 and the main control input circuit 1310b in the subsequent stage is the same as the detection operation when the connector contact is normal.

  As a result, since the voltage of the detection circuit unit 4164 is not affected (because there is no voltage change), when contact resistance occurs due to slight sliding wear of the connector member, the signal from the detection sensor due to contact resistance is False detection can be prevented.

[17-4. Example 3 of Magnetic Sensor Input Circuit]
FIG. 309 is a circuit diagram illustrating an example (Example 3) of a magnetic sensor input circuit arranged in the gaming machine of the embodiment. The magnetic sensor input circuit of the third embodiment includes a magnetic detection sensor 4024 of the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit of FIG. 306, a connector, a voltage output unit 4163 of the panel relay board 4161, a detection circuit unit 4164, and a main control input of the main control board 1310. The circuit 1310b has the same circuit configuration. For this reason, the same reference numerals are used for the same circuit components.

  In the third embodiment, the avoiding unit 4166 includes two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 and a resistor that constitute a Darlington circuit set to an operating voltage that is higher than the second voltage and higher than a predetermined voltage that is lower than the first voltage. IR1, IR4, and IR5 are included. Compared to the above-described second embodiment, in the third embodiment, instead of the resistor IR3 having the other end grounded, a resistor IR4 and a resistor IR5 connected in series are respectively connected in parallel to the two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 constituting the Darlington circuit. Connected. That is, in the third embodiment, the avoiding unit 4166 is configured by a resistor IR4 and a resistor IR5 that cause a current to flow to ground when the predetermined voltage is applied.

  More specifically, one end of the resistor IR1 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163, and the other end of the resistor IR1 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage of the Darlington circuit. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR2 at the rear stage of the Darlington circuit, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR2 is grounded.

  The other end of the resistor IR1 is connected to the base terminal of the previous stage transistor ITR0, and is also connected to one end of the resistor IR4. The other end of the resistor IR4 is connected to the emitter terminal of the previous stage transistor ITR0. Further, one end of the resistor IR5 is connected to the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage, and the other end of the resistor IR5 is grounded.

  That is, the resistor IR4 is connected in parallel between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the former stage transistor ITR0, and the resistor IR5 is connected in parallel between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the latter stage transistor ITR2. The collector terminals of the two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 are connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 while + 12V of the detection circuit unit 4164 is applied to one end of the pull-up resistor IR2 applied to the other end.

[17-4-1. Detection operation when connector contact is normal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state in which magnetism is not detected, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR, thereby turning on the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. Further, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Since the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is also pulled down to the ground side. As a result, the transistor ITR0 is turned off and the transistor ITR2 is also turned off.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage raised to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit portion 4164, whereby the transistor ITR1 is turned on. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

  When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. A magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal where the transistor NTR1 is off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

  When the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a detection state in which magnetism is detected, the output of the voltage from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR disappears, so that the built-in transistor STR is turned off. When the transistor STR is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is raised to the + 12V side.

  Further, a voltage of +12 V is applied to a series resistance circuit composed of the pull-up resistor IR0, the resistor IR1, the resistor IR4, and the resistor IR5 of the avoidance unit 4166, and the pull-up resistor IR0, the resistor IR1, the resistor IR4, and the resistor of the avoidance unit 4166 Current flows to ground via IR5. When a current flows through the resistor IR4, a potential difference generated between both ends of the resistor IR4 is applied between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the previous stage transistor ITR0. As a result, the previous stage transistor ITR0 is turned on.

  When the previous transistor ITR0 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the resistor IR5. When a current flows through the resistor IR5, a potential difference generated between both ends of the resistor IR5 is applied between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the subsequent transistor ITR2. As a result, the subsequent transistor ITR2 is turned on.

  When the succeeding transistor ITR2 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the succeeding transistor ITR2, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR2. Further, when the transistor ITR2 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit portion 4164 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR2 in the subsequent stage is lowered to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

  When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, the voltage raised to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1, thereby turning on the transistor NTR1. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, a magnetic detection switch signal whose logic connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is HI (on) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

[17-4-2. Detection operation when connector contact is abnormal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state in which magnetism is not detected, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR, thereby turning on the built-in transistor STR.

  When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor RR (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. Thereby, although the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage), the current flows through the contact resistance RR, so that the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR. Lifts up. In FIG. 309, a connection point between the pull-up resistor IR0 and the resistor IR1 is illustrated as a black circle as a portion where the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistor RR increases.

  That is, a voltage in which a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is added to the second voltage due to the current flowing through the contact resistance generated due to the contact state of the connector portion. Is applied to one end of the resistor IR1. This voltage is sufficiently lower than the voltage applied when the built-in transistor of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is turned off.

  When a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to one end of the resistor IR1, a current flows through the resistor IR1, and this current further flows to the ground through the resistor IR4 and the resistor IR5. That is, since the other end of the resistor IR5 is grounded, most of the current due to the applied predetermined voltage falls to the ground, and almost no current flows in the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage of the Darlington circuit, which is the subsequent stage of the resistor IR1. Do not flow. Therefore, the previous stage transistor ITR0 is not turned on. Also, the subsequent transistor ITR2 is not turned on. As a result, the two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 of the Darlington circuit maintain the off state. That is, the avoidance unit 4166 avoids the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164.

  The operation of the detection circuit unit 4164 and the main control input circuit 1310b in the subsequent stage is the same as the detection operation when the connector contact is normal.

  As a result, since the voltage of the detection circuit unit 4164 is not affected (because there is no voltage change), when contact resistance occurs due to slight sliding wear of the connector member, the signal from the detection sensor due to contact resistance is False detection can be prevented.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 311, a plurality of open collector type sensor signal input units 4162 connected to each of the plurality of magnetic detection sensors 4024 are connected in parallel to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164. ing. When any one of the sensor signal input units 4162 detects magnetism and turns on, the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 is turned off.

  Similarly, when any one of the connections between the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the sensor signal input unit 4162 is disconnected, the detection circuit unit 4164 is turned on when the sensor signal input unit 4162 corresponding to the disconnected magnetic detection sensor 4024 is turned on. The transistor ITR1 is turned off. Further, when there are a plurality of sensors, a voltage output unit 4163 is provided for each of the plurality of sensors, and each provided voltage output unit 4163 is a transistor array having a plurality of Darlington circuits, for example, “TD62083AP” (commercial product, TOSHIBA Corporation). It can be used by connecting to the product.

  The sensor signal input unit 4162 provided on the panel relay board 4161 of the present embodiment has been described above. However, the detection sensor applicable to the sensor signal input unit 4162 is not limited to the magnetic detection sensor 4024, but a connector member. As long as the sensor signal is transmitted from the detection sensor, various sensors such as a general winning opening sensor 4020, a first starting opening sensor 4002, a second starting opening sensor 4004, a count sensor 4005, a vibration detection sensor, a contact, etc. A sensor or the like can be applied.

  The present invention has been described with reference to preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention as described below. And design changes are possible.

  The embodiment of the present invention has been described with reference to the first to third embodiments. However, if the gist of the present invention, that is, the circuit configuration provided with the avoidance unit 4166 is not changed, the voltage output unit 4163, The locations of the avoidance unit 4166 and the detection circuit unit 4164 on the substrate can be variously changed and arranged as necessary. Below, several variations of the arrangement example are shown.

[17-5. Example 4]
FIG. 312 shows an example in which the detection circuit unit 4164 of the magnetic sensor input circuit is arranged on the main control board 1310. In this example, the voltage output unit 4163, the avoidance unit 4166, and the signal relay transistor ITR0 are arranged on the panel relay board 4161. Note that the electrical basic connection is the same as the circuit shown in FIG. Further, the function and effect of the avoidance unit 4166 are the same as those of the circuit shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 312, the connector CON2 is connected to the collector terminal of the signal relay transistor ITR0 of the panel relay board 4161, the other end of the pull-up resistor IR2 of the detection circuit unit 4164 of the main control board 1310, and the base terminal of the transistor ITR1. Are electrically connected.

[17-6. Example 5]
FIG. 313 shows another example in which the detection circuit unit 4164 of the magnetic sensor input circuit is arranged on the main control board 1310. In this example, the voltage output unit 4163 and the avoidance unit 4166 are arranged on the panel relay board 4161, and the signal relay transistor ITR0 is moved to the main control board 1310 and provided in the front stage of the detection circuit unit 4164. Yes. Also in the fifth embodiment, the electrical basic connection is the same as the circuit shown in FIG. Further, the function and effect of the avoidance unit 4166 are the same as those of the circuit shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 313, the connector CON2 electrically connects the anode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 constituting the avoidance portion 4166 of the panel relay board 4161 and the base terminal of the signal relay transistor ITR0 of the main control board 1310. It is connected.

  Further, in the fourth embodiment shown in FIG. 312 and the fifth embodiment shown in FIG. 313, the panel relay board 4161 and the main control board 1310 are harnesses having connector members at both ends (in FIG. 312 simply indicated as CON2. ) Is electrically connected. For this reason, contact resistance may also occur at the connector connection portion. Therefore, in order to avoid erroneous detection of a signal due to the contact resistance, as a modified example in the fourth embodiment, in addition to the bull-up resistor NR1 to which + 12V is applied to one end of the connector member CON2 on the circuit, that is, one end. Another avoidance portion may be provided between the connection point between the end and the signal line connected to the connector member CON2 and the base terminal of the transistor ITR1, similarly to the avoidance portion 4166. According to this, signal false detection can be further reduced, and the reliability of signal detection is enhanced.

  In the present invention, the detection circuit unit 4164 is configured by using the pull-up resistor IR2 and the transistor ITR1 to which + 12V is applied to one end in the fourth and fifth embodiments. This essentially selects the one that is advantageous in terms of control due to the difference in logic (whether HI level active or LOW level active) input to the main control MPU 1310a connected in the subsequent stage. For this purpose, a circuit comprising a pull-up resistor IR2 and a transistor ITR1 is provided as a detection circuit unit 4164, which is arranged in front of the main input circuit 1310a.

  However, the other end of the bullup resistor NR1 to which + 12V is applied to one end is connected to the signal line, and the base terminal is connected to the subsequent stage of the signal line via the resistor NR2, the emitter terminal is grounded, and A main control input circuit 1310a itself having a collector terminal connected to an input port (not shown) substitutes for the detection circuit unit 4164 (in other words, a circuit that functions as the detection circuit unit 4164, that is, a main circuit Since the control input circuit 1310a can perform detection), however, the present invention is sufficiently established.

[17-7. Example 6]
FIG. 314 shows an example in which a magnetic sensor input circuit avoidance unit 4166 and a detection circuit unit 4164 are arranged on the main control board 1310. It should be noted that the signal relay transistor ITR0 is also provided in the previous stage of the detection circuit unit 4164, with the arrangement location being moved to the main control board 1310. Also in the sixth embodiment, the electrical basic connection is the same as the circuit shown in FIG. Further, the function and effect of the avoidance unit 4166 are the same as those of the circuit shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 314, a signal line leading to the connector CON1 to which the other end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163 of the panel relay board 4161 is connected, and an avoidance unit 4166 of the main control board 1310 are configured. The cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is electrically connected by the connector CON2.

  If the panel relay board 4161 and the main control board 1310 are configured as in the fourth to sixth embodiments, the panel relay board 4161 is a detection sensor unit (in this embodiment, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is used. There is an advantage that it is possible to make it common regardless of the type).

  From the standpoint of ease of assembly, it is desirable to use a relay board, but the first start port sensor 4002 and the second start port sensor 4004 provided at the start port that brings a lottery to the player are more convenient. Even if it is missing, it may be better to connect the main control board 1310 directly with a connector without providing circuit elements on the relay board in order to prevent fraud. In such a case, the configuration of the seventh embodiment functions suitably.

[17-8. Example 7]
FIG. 315 shows an example in which a voltage output unit 4163, an avoidance unit 4166, and a detection circuit unit 4164 of the magnetic sensor input circuit are arranged on the main control board 1310. In this example as well, the signal relay transistor ITR0 is also provided at the front stage of the detection circuit unit 4164, with the location being moved to the main control board 1310. Also in the seventh embodiment, the electrical basic connection is the same as the circuit shown in FIG. Further, the function and effect of the avoidance unit 4166 are the same as those of the circuit shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 315, the panel relay board 4161 is only formed with a signal line (for example, by printed wiring) that simply relays a signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024. The signal line is electrically connected to the connector CON1 of the main control board 1310 by a harness connected to the connector on the panel relay board 4161. That is, the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 of the main control board 1310 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163, and the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is built in via the connector CON1 and the panel relay board 4161 in the previous stage of the connection part. This is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR.

  In FIG. 315, the relay board provided with only the connectors (CON3, CON4) is used, but the output of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is directly connected to the main control board 1310 without using the relay board. You can also.

  Even in the configurations shown in [Embodiment 4] to [Embodiment 7], since the avoidance section 4166 is provided, the voltage of the detection circuit section 4164 is not affected (because there is no voltage change), the connector member. When the contact resistance is generated due to the slight sliding wear, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of the signal from the detection sensor due to the contact resistance.

  In the seventh embodiment, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is electrically connected to the panel relay board 4161 through a connector CON3 (represented by a square in the drawing) provided on the panel relay board 4161, and further the panel relay board 4161. It is configured to be electrically connected to a connector member CON1 provided on the main control board 1310 through a connector CON4 (shown by a square in the drawing) provided on the main control board 1310. Therefore, the contact resistance may occur at three locations, the connector CON3, the connector CON4, and the connector CON1.

  Considering this, the voltage generated by the current flowing through the contact resistance RR of the connector CON1 portion and the contact resistance generated by loosening of the connection portion of the panel relay board 4161 (CON3 and CON4 shown by squares in the figure). Even if the detection sensor unit (magnetic detection sensor 4024) is added to the second voltage in the second state (additional voltage due to the contact resistance generated at each of the three connector connection portions described above), the avoidance unit Reference numeral 4166 is selected and provided so as to avoid the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164. As a result, the voltage of the detection circuit unit 4164 is not affected, and therefore, when contact resistance occurs due to slight sliding wear of each connector member, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a signal from the detection sensor due to contact resistance. Can do.

  In the configurations shown in [Embodiment 4] to [Embodiment 7], the Zener diode ZD0 is used as the avoidance unit 4166. However, the avoidance unit 4166 is not limited to the Zener diode ZD0, but has been described above. The avoidance unit 4166 shown in FIG. 308 (Example 2) or the avoidance unit 4166 shown in FIG. 309 (Example 3) can be used.

  Since the panel relay board 4161 shown in the seventh embodiment is formed only with signal lines (for example, by printed wiring) that simply relay signals from the detection sensor units, signals from a plurality of detection sensor units are received. There is an advantage that printed wiring is formed so as to be gathered independently on the panel relay board 4161 and put together into one connector member, and connected to the main control board 1310 through a connector.

[17-9. Electrical connection of detection sensor, panel relay board and main control board]
Next, electrical connection between the detection sensor unit 4000, the panel relay board 4161, and the main control board 1310 will be described. FIG. 316 is a block diagram showing a basic configuration of electrical connection mainly between the detection sensor section, the panel relay board, and the main control board. The detection sensor unit 4000 is a collective term for various detection sensors arranged at predetermined positions on the game board 5, and as described above, for example, the general winning port sensor 4020, the first start port sensor 4002, the second A start port sensor 4004, a count sensor 4005, a vibration detection sensor, a magnetic detection sensor 4024, and the like correspond to this.

  The main control board 1310 controls the progress of the game, and is a board on which a main control MPU 1310a as a control subject is mounted. Panel relay board 4161 is a board that relays the detection signal of detection sensor unit 4000 to main control board 1310.

  The detection sensor unit 4000 is electrically connected to the panel relay board 4161 via a connector member 4501 provided on the panel relay board 4161. The panel relay board 4161 and the main control board 1310 are a harness in which a connector member 4502 provided on the panel relay board 4161 and a connector member 4503 provided on the main control board 1310 are provided with connectors for connection at both ends. By being connected by a connector, it is electrically connected. That is, the detection sensor unit 4000 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via the connector member 4501 and the connector member 4502 provided in the panel relay board 4161 and the connector member 4503 provided in the main control board. The signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

[17-10. Arrangement positions of panel relay board 4161 and main control board 1310 in the gaming machine]
FIG. 317 is a front view schematically showing each example of arrangement positions of the panel relay board 4161 and the main control board 1310 in the gaming machine 1. In FIG. 317 (A) to FIG. 317 (D), the panel relay board 4161 and the main control board 1310 are the rear part of the game board 5 at positions that are not visually recognized by the player, and basically display effects on the game board side. A device (for example, a liquid crystal display device) 1600 is disposed below. Reference numeral 300 denotes a handle unit that is provided on the door frame 3 shown in FIG. 9 and is operated by the player. Reference numeral 410 denotes a lower center of the door frame 3 shown in FIG. And an operation button that is pushed in by the player for production.

  In FIG. 317 (A), a main control board 1310 is arranged at the center of the rear lower part of the game board 5, and a panel relay board 4161 is provided at the lower rear part of the game board 5 to the right of the main control board 1310 in a front view. The arrangement pattern is shown. In FIGS. 317 (A) to 186 (D), specifically, on the rear surface of the box-shaped back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the plate-like transparent gaming panel 1100 that defines the rear end of the gaming area 5a. On the other hand, the panel relay board 4161 and the main control board 1310 are attached.

  In FIG. 317 (B), a panel relay board 4161 is arranged at the center of the rear lower part of the game board 5, and the main control board 1310 is located at the rear lower part of the game board 5 and to the right of the panel relay board 4161 in front view. The arrangement pattern is shown. In FIG. 317 (C), a main control board 1310 is arranged at the center of the rear lower part of the game board 5, and a panel relay board 4161 is located at the lower rear part of the game board 5 and to the left of the main control board 1310 in a front view. The arrangement pattern is shown.

  Further, in FIGS. 317 (A) to 317 (C), the positional relationship of the panel relay board 4161 in the front-rear direction with respect to the main control board 1310 is the same layer as the main control board 1310 or in front of the main control board 1310. 4161 is located.

  Further, FIG. 317 (D) shows an arrangement pattern in which the main control board 1310 and the panel relay board 4161 are arranged in the front-rear direction at the center of the rear lower part of the game board 5. In FIG. 317 (D), a panel relay board 4161 is arranged in front of the main control board 1310. As shown in FIGS. 317 (A) to 317 (D) described above, the arrangement of the panel relay board 4161 and the main control board 1310 is determined based on various conditions.

  The detection sensor unit 4000 is electrically connected to the panel relay board 4161 via a connector member 4501 provided on the panel relay board 4161. The panel relay board 4161 and the main control board 1310 are a harness in which a connector member 4502 provided on the panel relay board 4161 and a connector member 4503 provided on the main control board 1310 are provided with connectors for connection at both ends. By being connected by a connector, it is electrically connected. That is, the detection sensor unit 4000 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via the connector member 4501 and the connector member 4502 provided in the panel relay board 4161 and the connector member 4503 provided in the main control board. The signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

  Therefore, the embodiment described below has been made in view of such circumstances, the purpose of which is to provide an avoidance unit that avoids erroneous detection of a signal from a detection sensor due to contact resistance, The present invention relates to a gaming machine in which an avoidance unit is appropriately arranged on a panel relay board or a main control board in consideration of the arrangement positional relationship between a vibration generation source and a control board.

[17-11. Example of arrangement of avoidance unit]
318 (A) to 318 (C) are diagrams showing examples of arrangement of the avoidance unit 4510 with respect to the panel relay board 4161 and the main control board 1310. FIG. Note that the avoidance unit 4510 has a circuit configuration including an avoidance unit 4166 for avoiding the voltage adding action due to the contact resistance generated in the connector member. The avoidance portion 4166 has been described above with reference to FIGS. 307 to 309, and in the circuit portion arranged upstream of the avoidance portion 4166, the connection state of the connector member is loosened, and contact resistance is generated in this portion. By doing so, even if the voltage is added by the contact resistance, the effect of the added voltage on the detection circuit unit arranged at a stage after the avoiding unit 4166 is avoided.

  As described above, when vibration is applied to the connector member, the risk of erroneous detection of a signal from the detection sensor unit 4000 increases due to the contact resistance of the connector member. However, as shown in FIGS. 317 (A) to 317 (D) described above, the layout of the panel relay board 4161 and the main control board 1310 is usually determined on the game board 5 from various conditions. In that case, it is often not considered to arrange each substrate so as to avoid being affected by vibration. On the other hand, as the vibration generation source that affects the game, in addition to the one caused by the collision between the game ball guiding path member arranged in the right region of the game region 5a and the game ball by the right strike described above, for example, an effect button (operation button 410) ), A ball hitting operation of the ball launcher of the ball launcher, a sound from a high output speaker, and the like.

  Therefore, the embodiment described below is made in view of such circumstances, and an avoidance unit that avoids erroneous detection of a signal from the detection sensor due to contact resistance due to contact resistance generated by looseness of the connector member. In addition to providing the unit 4510, the avoidance unit 4545 is appropriately disposed on the panel relay board 4161 and the main control board 1310 in consideration of the positional relationship with the vibration generation source.

  FIG. 318A shows an example in which an avoidance unit 4510 is provided on the panel relay board 4161. When the vibration is applied to the connector member 4501 that electrically connects the detection sensor unit 4000 and the panel relay board 4161, FIG. Even if the member 4501 is loosened and contact resistance is generated by this loosening, the avoidance unit 4510 avoids the voltage addition action by the contact resistance, thereby avoiding erroneous detection of the signal from the detection sensor unit 4000. It is.

  FIG. 318B shows an example in which the avoidance unit 4510 is provided on the main control board 1310, and vibration is applied to the connector member 4502 provided on the panel relay board 4161 or the connector member 4503 provided on the main control board 1310. When the contact member 4502 or 4503 is loosened by the addition, and contact resistance is generated due to this loosening, the avoidance unit 4510 avoids the voltage adding action due to the contact resistance, and is relayed from the panel relay board 4161. This is to avoid erroneous detection of the output signal.

  FIG. 318C shows an example in which an avoidance unit 4510 is provided on both the panel relay board 4161 and the main control board 1310, and a connector for electrically connecting the detection sensor unit 4000 and the panel relay board 4161. Vibration is applied to the member 4501, and vibration is applied to the connector member 4502 provided on the panel relay board 4161 or the connector member 4503 provided on the main control board 1310, thereby the connector member 4501, the connector member 4502 or the connector. Even if the member 4503 is loosened and contact resistance is generated by this loosening, the avoidance unit 4510 avoids the voltage adding action due to the contact resistance, thereby avoiding erroneous detection of the signal from the detection sensor unit 4000. The signal relayed from the panel relay board 4161 is output. It is to avoid erroneous detection of.

[17-12. Specific example of vibration source and arrangement example of avoidance unit 4510]
FIGS. 319 (A) to 319 (F) are diagrams showing a specific example of a vibration generating source in the gaming machine 1, and an arrangement example of the panel relay board 4161 and the main control board 1310. FIG. In each figure, a member that is a vibration generation source is indicated by a hatched portion. FIG. 319 (A) to FIG. 319 (C) are games in which a number of right-handed game balls continuously flow down to the right area of the game area 5a when playing right-handed. An example is shown in which a ball guide path unit 4200 is provided, and when slight sliding wear occurs due to vibration from the game ball guide path unit 4200 applied to the connector member, this may cause contact resistance. Yes.

  In the case of the gaming machine having the board arrangement shown in FIG. 319 (A), when the vibration generation source is a collision between the game board 5 and the game ball that is right-handed, a panel is provided with respect to the game ball guiding path unit 4200 serving as the vibration generation source. Since the relay board 4161 is disposed close to the connector board, the connector member [connector member 4501 shown in FIG. 318A] of the panel relay board 4161 is easily affected. Therefore, the avoidance unit 4510 is arranged on the panel relay board 4161 [see FIG. 318A].

  In the case of the gaming machine having the board arrangement shown in FIG. 319 (B), when the vibration generation source is a collision between the game board 5 and the game ball that is right-handed, the game ball guide path unit 4200 serving as the vibration generation source is Since the control board 1310 is disposed close to the connector board, the connector member [connector member 4503 shown in FIG. 318B] of the main control board 1310 is easily affected. Therefore, the avoidance unit 4510 is arranged on the main control board 1310 [see FIG. 318B].

  In the case of the gaming machine having the board arrangement shown in FIG. 319 (C), when the vibration generation source is a collision between the game board 5 and the game ball that is right-handed, the game ball guide path unit 4200 serving as the vibration generation source is Considering that the control board 1310 and the panel relay board 4161 are arranged close to each other, the connector members [connector member 4501, connector member 4502, and connector member 4503 shown in FIG. Susceptible to. Therefore, the avoidance unit 4510 is arranged on both the main control board 1310 and the panel relay board 4161 [see FIG. 318C].

  FIG. 319 shows the case where the vibration source is the operation button 410. For example, when the player concentrates on the game, the player operates the operation button 410 to perform a strike operation, or during the specific performance, a “continuous hit” message is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and the player receives the message. If the vibration generation source is due to an operation on the operation button 410 for production, such as when the player strikes the operation button 410 continuously by recognizing, the operation button 410 becomes the vibration generation source. Is assumed. In this case, in FIG. 319 (D), the main control board 1310 is disposed close to the operation button 410 serving as a vibration generation source, so that the connector member of the main control board 1310 [FIG. The connector member 4503] shown in B) is easily affected by vibration. Therefore, the avoidance unit 4510 is arranged on the main control board 1310 [see FIG. 318B].

  In the case of the gaming machine with the board arrangement shown in FIGS. 317 (B) to 317 (D), not limited to the gaming machine with the board arrangement shown in FIG. 319 (D), FIG. 318 (A) to FIG. The arrangement pattern of the avoidance unit 4510 shown in (C) can be adopted.

  FIG. 319 (E) shows a case where the vibration source is the hitting ball 683 of the ball launcher 680 (see FIG. 91 for the specific arrangement position). For example, in a right-handed game, it is assumed that the striking force (elastic force) of the ball launched by the ball launcher 680 with respect to the game ball to be fired becomes large, and the impact at this time becomes a vibration generation source. In this case, in FIG. 319 (E), the panel relay board 4161 is disposed close to the hitting ball 683 serving as the vibration generation source, so that the connector member of the panel relay board 4161 [FIG. The connector member 4501] shown in A) is susceptible to vibration. Therefore, the avoidance unit 4510 is arranged on the panel relay board 4161 [see FIG. 318A].

  Not only in the case of the gaming machine with the board arrangement shown in FIG. 319 (E), but also in the case of the gaming machine with the board arrangement shown in FIGS. 317 (B) to 317 (D), FIG. The arrangement pattern of the avoidance unit 4510 shown in FIG. 318C can be employed.

  FIG. 319 (F) shows a case where the vibration generation source is a speaker 921 for sound output (see FIG. 91 for a specific arrangement position). For example, a loud sound effect is output from the speaker 921 in order to excite the gaming state at the time of a specific effect, and it is assumed that the vibration of the speaker 921 at this time becomes a vibration generation source. In this case, in FIG. 319 (F), the panel relay board 4161 is disposed close to the speaker 921 serving as a vibration generation source, and thus the connector member of the panel relay board 4161 [FIG. The connector member 4501] shown in FIG. Therefore, the avoidance unit 4510 is arranged on the panel relay board 4161 [see FIG. 318A].

  Not only in the case of the gaming machine having the board arrangement shown in FIG. 319 (F), but also in the case of the gaming machine having the board arrangement shown in FIGS. 317 (A), 317 (B) and 317 (D). The arrangement pattern of the avoidance unit 4510 shown in FIGS. 318 (A) to 318 (C) can be employed.

  The number of members that serve as the vibration generation source described above is not limited to one in the gaming machine 1. For example, a member that becomes a vibration generation source according to the gaming state, such as a thing equipped with a game ball guiding path unit 4200 and a hitting ball 683, a thing equipped with a game ball guiding path unit 4200 and an operation button 410, etc. It is expected to change. That is, a gaming machine provided with a plurality of members serving as vibration generation sources is assumed. Even in that case, any of the arrangement patterns of the avoidance unit 4510 shown in FIGS. 318A to 318C can be adopted.

  As described above, the avoidance unit 4545 can be appropriately arranged on the panel relay board 4161 and the main control board 1310 in consideration of the positional relationship with the vibration source. In addition, by appropriately arranging the avoidance unit 4510, even if the connector member is loosened due to vibration from a member that is a vibration generation source, and contact resistance is generated by this, the detection sensor unit based on the contact resistance is generated. 4000 and erroneous detection of signals from the panel relay board 4161 can be avoided.

  As described above, when signal transmission is performed by the connector member, contact resistance is generated when the connector member is corroded or dust enters the connector connecting portion. Similarly, contact resistance occurs when vibration is applied to the connector member. For example, when playing a right-handed game, when vibration is applied to the connector member from a specific part of the game area where a large number of game balls continuously concentrate and flow down, this causes contact resistance. There is a fear.

  If a current flows through the contact resistance generated due to this, the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance will rise, and an abnormal voltage different from the original normal state may enter the detection circuit unit. is there. That is, there is a possibility that the signal of the detection sensor is erroneously detected.

  Therefore, it is necessary to prevent erroneous detection of a signal from the detection sensor due to contact resistance. As described above, when vibration is applied to the connector member, the possibility of erroneous detection of a signal from the detection sensor increases. However, normally, the arrangement of the panel relay board and the main control board on the game board is determined from various conditions. In that case, it is often not considered to arrange each substrate so as to avoid being affected by vibration. On the other hand, in addition to those caused by the collision between the right-handed game board and the game ball as described above, for example, those caused by the hitting operation of the effect button, the ball hitting operation of the ball launcher, For example, a high volume by an output speaker may be mentioned.

  Therefore, the embodiment described below has been made in view of such circumstances, the purpose of which is to provide an avoidance unit that avoids erroneous detection of a signal from a detection sensor due to contact resistance, The present invention relates to a gaming machine in which an avoidance unit is appropriately arranged on a panel relay board or a main control board in consideration of a positional relationship with a vibration generation source.

  The embodiments described above can be summarized as the following technical means.

The gaming machine according to [Means 1]
A detection sensor unit disposed at a predetermined position of the game board, a main control board for controlling the progress of the game, and a panel relay board for relaying detection signals of the detection sensor unit to the main control board In order to solve the above problems,
In the right area of the game area into which the game ball is to be shot, a game ball guiding path unit is arranged in which the game ball that has been continuously hit to the right as the game ball is hit to the right.
At least one of the main control board and the panel relay board has a connector member,
A board having the connector member is disposed in proximity to the game ball guiding path unit, and either one of the main control board and the panel relay board is caused by contact resistance generated in the connector member. An avoidance unit for avoiding voltage addition action is provided,
It is characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine according to [Means 1], the avoidance unit is suitable for either the panel relay board or the main control board in consideration of the positional relationship with the game ball guiding path unit serving as the vibration generation source. Can be arranged. Further, by appropriately arranging the avoidance unit, the connector member is loosened by the vibration from the member that is a vibration generation source, and even if the contact resistance is generated by this, the detection sensor unit by the contact resistance or It is possible to avoid erroneous detection of signals from the panel relay board.

The gaming machine according to [Means 2]
A game provided with a detection sensor unit arranged at a predetermined position of the game board, a main control board for controlling the progress of the game, and a panel relay board for relaying detection signals of the detection sensor unit to the main control board In the machine
It has an operation button that allows a player to perform a predetermined operation for production,
At least one of the main control board and the panel relay board has a connector member,
A board having the connector member is disposed in proximity to the operation button, and voltage is added to one of the main control board and the panel relay board by contact resistance generated in the connector member. An avoidance unit for avoiding the action is provided,
It is characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine according to [Means 2], the avoidance unit is appropriately disposed on one of the panel relay board and the main control board in consideration of the positional relationship with the operation button serving as the vibration generation source. be able to. Further, by appropriately arranging the avoidance unit, the connector member is loosened by the vibration from the member that is a vibration generation source, and even if the contact resistance is generated by this, the detection sensor unit by the contact resistance or It is possible to avoid erroneous detection of signals from the panel relay board.

The gaming machine according to [Means 3]
A game provided with a detection sensor unit arranged at a predetermined position of the game board, a main control board for controlling the progress of the game, and a panel relay board for relaying detection signals of the detection sensor unit to the main control board In the machine
It has a ball launcher that launches a game ball into the game area in response to an operation on the hitting handle,
At least one of the main control board and the panel relay board has a connector member,
The board having the connector member is disposed in the vicinity of the ball striking ball of the ball launcher, and the contact resistance generated in the connector member on either the main control board or the panel relay board An avoidance unit for avoiding the voltage addition action by is provided,
It is characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine according to [Means 3], the avoidance unit is disposed on either the panel relay board or the main control board in consideration of the positional relationship with the ball hitting basket of the ball launching device that is the vibration generation source. Can be placed properly. Further, by appropriately arranging the avoidance unit, the connector member is loosened by the vibration from the member that is a vibration generation source, and even if the contact resistance is generated by this, the detection sensor unit by the contact resistance or It is possible to avoid erroneous detection of signals from the panel relay board.

The gaming machine according to [Means 4]
A game provided with a detection sensor unit arranged at a predetermined position of the game board, a main control board for controlling the progress of the game, and a panel relay board for relaying detection signals of the detection sensor unit to the main control board In the machine
A speaker for sound output,
At least one of the main control board and the panel relay board has a connector member,
The board having the connector member is arranged close to the speaker, and the voltage adding action by the contact resistance generated in the connector member is applied to either the main control board or the panel relay board. An avoidance unit for avoiding
It is characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine according to [Means 4], the avoidance unit is appropriately arranged on either the panel relay board or the main control board in consideration of the positional relationship of the high-output speaker when it becomes a vibration generation source. can do. Further, by appropriately arranging the avoidance unit, the connector member is loosened by the vibration from the member that is a vibration generation source, and even if the contact resistance is generated by this, the detection sensor unit by the contact resistance or It is possible to avoid erroneous detection of signals from the panel relay board.

  According to the gaming machine of each of the above embodiments, the avoidance unit can be appropriately disposed on either the panel relay board or the main control board in consideration of the positional relationship of the gaming members that are the vibration generation sources. it can. Further, by appropriately arranging the avoidance unit, the connector member is loosened by the vibration from the member that is a vibration generation source, and even if the contact resistance is generated by this, the detection sensor unit by the contact resistance or It is possible to avoid erroneous detection of signals from the panel relay board.

  The present invention is not limited to the circumstances described above, and in recent gaming machines, it is common to provide a plurality of movable effectors (movable accessories) that are electrically driven by a drive source such as a motor or solenoid used for effects. . As for these movable objects, the volume and the operation range tend to increase, and depending on the operation range, depending on the thing, the operation speed tends to increase, and the movable method is complicated. Therefore, it is conceivable that the movable accessory itself becomes a vibration generation source, and the connector member is loosened, thereby generating contact resistance. Even in such a case, the embodiment of the present invention can avoid erroneous detection of signals from the detection sensor unit and the panel relay board due to contact resistance.

  By the way, when a plurality of movable accessories are not in the initial position, there is a possibility that a predetermined effect cannot be started normally.

  Therefore, in order to reliably grasp the initial position of the movable effector, an origin position detection sensor (a photosensor consisting of a light projection type and a light reception type is often used) is directly incorporated in the movable effector or drive motor. In the mold, these detection signals are fed back to the control body and used for control. The exchange of electrical signals between the production control board and the drive board is also realized by a connector member and a harness connecting them.

  Although many specific illustrations have already been carried out, the illustration is omitted. However, for example, the arrangement position of the movable director in the game board surface is behind the upper part (initial position) of the game area 5a and behind the left side of the game area 5a. (Initial position), an initial position at the center of the game area 5a where the effect movable body is divided into left and right at the center of the game panel, or at the lower center of the game area 5a (behind the big prize opening unit, etc.) Depending on the type and version of the game machine, the position of the game machine will change variously in order to appeal the characteristics of the gaming machine.

  Now, if the transmission of driving data and signals for operating it and the origin detection signal cannot be correctly transmitted / received, it is possible that not only error detection cannot be performed but also there is a risk of erroneous transmission. . Here, it is considered that the avoidance unit 4166 described above is provided on the drive board at a later stage in the transmission direction of the origin position detection sensor, or provided on the signal input side of the peripheral control board 1510 on the control side.

As described above, even when an effect of rapidly combining at least two movable members is performed, there is a possibility that vibration due to the collision at that time may be transmitted violently, and even in this case, it is necessary to counter some countermeasures. As a specific example, as shown in FIG. 320 (C), when the left and right movable members perform the intense heat effect in which the left and right movable members are united at the center portion of the game board 5, the arrangement position of the peripheral control board, It is necessary to consider the location of the sensor that detects the origin position of the production movable body.
.

[17-13. Electrical connection of origin position detection sensor unit, drive board and peripheral control board for controlling it]
FIG. 320A is a block diagram mainly showing a basic configuration of electrical connection with respect to the origin position detection sensor 4000 for detecting the origin position of the peripheral control board 1510, the drive board 4161, the drive means, and the movable effect body. is there.

  The peripheral control board 1510 controls the progress of the production, and is a board on which the peripheral control MPU 1511a that is the production control subject is mounted. The drive board 4161 is also a board that relays the detection signal of the origin position detection sensor unit 4000 to the peripheral control board 1510.

  In FIG. 320, the peripheral control board 1510 performs the control subject for the effect, and the drive board 4180 outputs the drive data output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the drive source and at least the initial position (origin of the movable effector). The information of the position detection sensor) is input and the input information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control board 1510 is used for control based on this information. The drive board 4161 is for supplying a drive current corresponding to the drive signal to the drive means. In addition, the drive board is used for detecting the origin position for detecting the initial position for supplying the drive current corresponding to the movable effect body. Pass to 4161. As shown in FIG. 320 (A), transmission and reception of these control signals are performed by electrical connection by connector members 4504, 4505, and 4506.

  Since the positional relationship of the movable member for producing the vibration source and the positional relationship of the connector member connecting the peripheral control board 1510 or the drive board 4161 and the origin position detection sensor are various, one of them is “connector connection by vibration”. The avoidance unit 4150 is arranged in consideration of the appropriate influence of whether loosening occurs. As shown in FIG. 320 (A) or 320 (B), they can be provided as appropriate. As a result, even if the connector member is loosened due to vibration from the member that is the vibration generation source and contact resistance is generated by these, errors in signals from the origin position detection sensor 4000 and the drive board due to the contact resistance occur. Detection can be avoided.

  Note that when operating the movable accessory, loose connection of the connector on the drive means, origin position detection sensor unit, drive board, and peripheral control board connected by the connector was considered as a problem. It is also applied when a ball launcher and a speaker are considered as vibration sources.

[17-14. Grouping of movable actors for multiple productions]
As described above, in game machines, it is common to provide a plurality of movable effectors (movable accessories) that are electrically driven by a drive source such as a motor or solenoid used for effects. About these movable accessories, the volume and the operation range tend to increase, and depending on the operation range, depending on the thing, the operation speed tends to expand, and the movable method is complicated. further. There may be a case where the movable ranges of different movable combinations intersect.

  When a malfunction occurs in one of the plurality of movable accessories, the current state is that little consideration is given to the operating state of the other movable combinations. If the return operation is performed only with a movable combination in which a defect has occurred without considering the other movable combination, there is a possibility of interfering with the other movable combination. If this happens, there is a risk that the interest of the game will be lowered and the interest of the game will be reduced.

  Here, in order to use the movable combination for production, it is necessary to return all the movable combinations to the initial positions. In addition, when an accessory is not intended and is stopped at a location other than the initial position for some reason, an operation is performed to restore the movable accessory to the initial position. If you do not take into account that the movable range of movable actors intersected like in this case, when performing a return operation, it physically interferes with other movable actors and returns all movable actors to their initial positions. You may not be able to make it. In such a case, a large vibration or the like different from the normal vibration may occur due to the physical interference of the movable accessory. However, since the avoiding unit 4166 is provided as described above, the peripheral control is performed. In the substrate 1510, erroneous detection of the detection signal of the sensor can be avoided.

  Therefore, in the embodiment described below, in order to surely return a plurality of actors to their initial positions, the actors that physically interfere with each other are collectively managed as one group, and the actors in the group are managed. By performing the return operation in a predetermined operation sequence, it is possible to reliably return from a location other than the initial position.

  In the following embodiments, each of the plurality of movable accessories is movable within an operation range from an initial position where the operation starts to an operation position until the operation ends. In the peripheral control board 1510, each of the plurality of movable actors is divided into a plurality of groups in which the operation ranges do not interfere with each other, and in at least one group, the plurality of movable combinations in which the operation ranges interfere with each other. Contains things.

  Each of the plurality of movable accessories includes an initial position detection sensor (for example, a photo sensor) that detects an initial position set in advance. The peripheral control board 1510 has a predetermined operation when there is a problem that the initial position is not detected even in one of a plurality of movable combinations in a group including a plurality of movable combinations whose operation ranges interfere with each other. According to the sequence, all movable members in the group are returned to their initial positions.

  FIG. 321 is a front view conceptually showing a plurality of movable accessories for presentation provided in the gaming machine 1 and grouping of the plurality of movable accessories. As shown in FIG. 321, an accessory group 01 (reference numeral 5000) is arranged at the center of the gaming machine 1, and an accessory group 02 (reference numeral 5002) is arranged on the right side of the gaming machine 1, An accessory group 03 (reference numeral 5004) is disposed on the left side of the machine 1, and an accessory group 04 (reference numeral 5006) is disposed substantially at the upper center of the gaming machine 1, and at the lower center of the gaming machine 1. Is provided with an accessory group 05 (reference numeral 5008). That is, the gaming machine 1 has five accessory groups.

  The five accessory groups 01 to 05 do not interfere with each other within the operating range. More specifically, the actor group 01 is composed of a mask actor, a fuselage deformed left actor, a fuselage deformed right actor, a fuselage storage-appearing agent, an upper liquid crystal driving agent, and a lower liquid crystal driving agent. Yes. The accessory group 02 is composed only of the right shoulder accessory, the accessory group 03 is composed only of the left shoulder accessory, the accessory group 04 is composed only of the facial accessory, and the accessory group 05 is composed only of the pop-up accessory. Has been.

  Therefore, the objects that physically interfere are in the same group. In the above example, a masked character belonging to the character group 01, a torso deformed left character, a torso deformed right character, a torso storage-appearing character, an upper liquid crystal driving character, and a lower liquid crystal driving character Are supposed to interfere with each other.

  In this example, when there is a problem that the initial position is not detected in any one of a plurality of movable accessories belonging to the accessory group 01, the peripheral control board 1510 is in the group according to a predetermined operation sequence. All movable objects are returned to their initial positions.

  More specifically, when it is determined that one of the movable combinations in the same group (the combination group 01) is abnormal in photo, the operations of all the combinations in the group are stopped. Note that the photo abnormality means that the movable accessory has not returned to the predetermined initial position. In the group, the corrective action is not limited to the movable parts at the problem location, but by operating all the movable parts in the group by using predetermined accessory correction motor sequence data. Recover movable movable objects with correct initial positions.

  The accessory correction motor sequence data mainly defines the driving order of the motor to be driven and the operation time thereof (in other words, the driving start timing and the driving end timing), and the peripheral control ROM 1510b of the peripheral control board 1510 is defined. Is remembered. In the case of the above-mentioned accessory group 01, there are six movable actors. Therefore, the motors as driving sources for driving these six movable actors are motor A (masked accessory) and motor B (fuselage deformation), respectively. Left hand), motor C (fuselage deformed right hand), motor D (fuselage storage-appearing hand), motor E (upper liquid crystal drive), motor F (lower liquid crystal drive). To do.

  When performing the recovery operation to the initial position, the motors to be driven may be driven one by one in order, but not limited to this, in the case where physical interference between movable objects can not occur, A plurality of motors to be driven may be driven. For example, the drive start times may be shifted and driven together, or a plurality of drives may be driven simultaneously.

  For example, assume that a photo anomaly has been detected for the fuselage storage-appearing character (motor D). FIG. 322 is a timing chart in the case of performing the restoration operation to the initial position performed at this time as an example. In FIG. 322, the recovery operation to the initial position is started at time t0. At time t0, the motor A is first driven, and at time t1, the driving of the motor A is stopped.

  At the same time, that is, at the time t1, the motor B and the motor C are simultaneously driven. Thereafter, the motor E and the motor F are simultaneously driven at time t2. Thereafter, at time t3, the motor B and the motor C are stopped at the same time. Thereafter, at time t4, the motor E and the motor F are stopped at the same time. At the same time t4, the motor D is driven. Thus, the driving of the motor D is stopped at time t5. That is, the recovery operation to the initial position is completed at time t5. It should be noted that the stoppage of driving of each motor is conditional on normal photo detection.

  Since different groups do not physically interfere with each other, the return operation may be performed in parallel.

  The present invention has been described with reference to preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention as described below. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above-described embodiment, the gaming machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even in this case, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

  In the above embodiment, in the third effect decorative rotator unit 530B, the decorative rotator unit 530 is provided with two of the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 in the circumferential direction around the first axis CL. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and three or more may be arranged in the circumferential direction as in the third decorative surface portion and the fourth decorative surface portion.

  In the above embodiment, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is shown to be rotatable only within an angle range of 180 degrees around the first axis CL, but can be rotated within an angle range up to 360 degrees. It may be configured so that it can be rotated indefinitely.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the first axis CL that is the rotation axis of the decorative rotating body unit 530 is shown to extend horizontally. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the center axis CL of the operation button 410 is not limited to this. It is good also as what extended up and down so that it might orthogonally cross.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 100 Door frame base unit 110 Door frame base 111 Through-hole 320 Dish unit 400B Third effect operation unit 410 Operation button (operation receiving part)
411 Button lens 415 Frame unit 420 Decoration board unit 520 Third base unit 521 Unit base 521g Left shaft part 521h Right bearing part 528 Production operation unit first drive motor (drive part)
530 Decorative Rotating Body Unit 531 Rotating Body Base Unit 531b Rotating Body Side Left Bearing 531c Rotating Body Side Right Shaft 532 First Decoration Surface (Decorative Rotating Body)
532d Shaft member 533 Second decorative surface (decorative rotating body)
533a Rotating decorative portion 533b Fixed decorative portion 534 Production operation unit second drive motor 535 First decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536 Second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 830 Discharge device 951 Discharge control substrate 1310 Main control substrate 1510 Peripheral control substrate 3000 Back unit 3010 Back Box 3031 Production drive board 3032 Panel relay board 3130 Back front lower decorative unit 3131 Back front lower central lens 3500 Back movable movable unit 3513 First fixed decorative lens 3514 Back first decorative board 3530 Back second decorative body unit 3533 1st Two fixed decorative lenses 3534 Back second decorative substrate 3550 Back third decorative body unit 3553 Third fixed decorative lens 3554 Back third decorative substrate 3570 Back rotating base unit 3600 Back lifting unit 3610 Movable side unit 3611 Movable side Bae CL1 1st axis CL2 2nd axis

Recent gaming machines can perform a wide variety of effects through sound control, such as effects that draw the player's attention by suddenly lowering the volume of the effect sound while the symbols are changing and displayed for a predetermined period of time. Has been implemented, but there was still a risk of a decline in the amusement interest .

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a repressible gaming machine that interest of Yu technique is reduced.

In order to achieve the above-described object, the gaming machine according to the present invention can execute a lottery based on establishment of a start condition, and can execute a game control means for controlling a game based on the lottery result, and an effect of the game It includes a Do presentation control means, and a sound output means for outputting to the outside the sound output in the game, the presentation control means, in the game, the output of the sound and can perform an effect that a predetermined period suppressed, wherein when the output of the sound is requested at a predetermined time period, wherein the output of the sound even during production which is a predetermined period suppressed and capable of outputting a short special sound than the predetermined period.

Furthermore, it is desirable that the effect of notifying the expectation level by changing the hold display of the variable display and accompanying the output of the effect sound effect can greatly increase the player's expectation and be executed reliably. . In this embodiment, by outputting the effect sound effect relating to such a hold display (hold sound) from the channels belonging to the AUTO group 2, it is possible to reproduce more reliably independently of the notice effect related to the variable display. it can. Also, unlike the notice effect with variable display, the number of effect sound effects that are output at the same time does not greatly exceed the number of channels assigned to AUTO group 1 , so the output of effect sound effects is stopped. The possibility of being reduced. Moreover, even if it is a case where it is canceled, the output of the effect sound with a low priority is only canceled. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game by reliably executing a highly effective effect that increases the player's expectation.

Claims (1)

Game control means for executing a lottery based on the establishment of the start condition and controlling the game based on the lottery result;
Effect control means capable of executing the game effect;
Sound output means for outputting the sound output in the game to the outside;
With
The production control means includes
In the game, it is possible to execute an effect that regulates the output of sound for a predetermined period,
If the sound output is requested during the predetermined period and the output time of the sound for which the output is requested satisfies a specific condition in relation to the predetermined period, the requested sound is output even within the predetermined period. A gaming machine characterized by enabling output.